
class PFsias 

Book . W/ 



PRESENTED BY 



I66'<D 



NEW METHOD 



OF LEARNING THE 



GERMAN LANGUAGE: 



EMBRACING BOTH THE 



^nalgtic anb 8j)Ml)ztit Jttotes of instruction ; 



BEING 



A PLAIN" AND PRACTICAL WAY OF ACQUIRING THE AR1 



READING, SPEAKING, AND COMPOSING GEMAN. 



W. H. WOODBUKY, A.M., 

AUTHOR OF " SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN," " ELEMENTARY GERMAN READ1B, 

•' ECLECTIC GERMAN READER," " GERMAN-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-GERMAN 

READER," i; NEW METHOD FOR GERMANS TO LEARN ENGLISH," OR : 

" Sfceue 3Jtetfyot>e jur (Srlernung ber englif^en <5pradje," etc. 



SEBer frembe Spradjen ntc&t fennt, tteig ni$t$ son fetner etgnetu 

©cetH 



NEW YORK: 

IYISONT, PHINNEY & CO., 48 & 50 WALKER STREET. 

CHICAGO: S. C. GRIGGS & CO., 39 & 41 LAKE ST. 

CINCINNATI : MOORE, WILSTAOH, KEYS & CO. ST. LOUIS : KEITH & WOODS. 

PHILADELPHIA : SOWER, BARNES & CO. DETROIT I F. RAYMOND & CO. 

savannah: J. M. COOPER & CO. 

1860. 



of 



it'h 



\ 



>* 



Just Published. 

A Key ro the Exercises in Woodbury's New Method 
With the German Language. Price 50 cents. 
IVISON & PHINNEY, 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1855, fcy 

W H. WOODBURY 

--$> Vt+ Clerk e Office of the District Jourt of the Southern Dlnrfel t 

New York. 



nances S # Ha^ 
Jul* 18,l$31. 



TO 

JAMES N. M°ELLIGOTT, LLP. 

IN WHOM ABE FOITNIS 
HIGH MORAL WORTH, RARE PHILOLOGICAL ATTAINMENTS, 

EXTRAORDINARY SUCCESS AS A PRACTICAL EDUCATOR 

AND AN ABLE AND ELOQUENT ADVOCATE OF 

THE CAUSE OF GENERAL EDUCATION, 

IS MOS-T CORDIALLY DEDICATED 
IT HIS FRIEND, 

THE AUTHOR. 



WOODBURY'S GERMAN SERIES. 



^ * 9 & • • ^ 



L NEW METHOD WITH GERMAN. 

623 pp. 12ma.— Price, $1 50. 

II. KEY TO NEW METHOD 

80 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents. 

III. SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN. 

230 pp. 12mo - Price, 75 cents. 

IV. KEY TO SHORTER COURSE. 

80 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents. 

V. ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. 

250 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

VI. ECLECTIC GERMAN READER. 

280 pp. 12mo.— Price, $1. 

Vfl. GERMAN-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-GERMAN READER. 

70 pp. 12mo. — Price, 25 cents. 



§ur ©rlemung ier engltf^en @pra<$e* 

$rei$ $!♦ 



«!,«♦»,». 



Sasqutiit's jFrentl) 0me0. 



I. FRENCH COURSE. 

500 pp. 12mo.— Price, $1 25. 

IL KEY TO FRENCH COURSE. 

140 pp. 12mo. — Price, 50 cents. 

HL COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 

260 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

IV. TELEMAQUE. 

390 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents. 

V. NAPOLEON. 

274 pp. 12mo. — Price, 75 cents* 



PREFACE. 

The German Language is now deservedly ranked among the 
leading studies in many of our High Schools and Academies. 
Its treasures in every department of knowledge, in every variety 
of composition, are certainly among the wonders of literary 
achievement. Among European tongues it holds a decided su- 
periority of rank ; surpassing them all in the abundance of 
its words, in the richness of its internal resources, and in its 
wonderful flexibility. Hence the propriety of its place among 
liberal studies. 

But the motives to the study of this language reach far be- 
yond the circles of literary life. Celerity and cheapness of 
travel, growing out of recent improvements in navigation, have 
united in producing an easy intercourse between Germany and 
America. Besides, we have already in our midst an immense 
and daily augmenting German population. The language of 
this people is spoken extensively among us, and has hence come 
to have a high practical value. It is often set down as an in- 
dispensable qualification even for a common clerkship. 

Such being the character and importance of the German lan- 
guage, various attempts have been made, as was natural, to 
give greater facility in learning it. Some of these are unques- 
tionably excellent works ; executed, according to the plan which 
they have adopted, in a manner skillful and judicious. But just 
here, in plan, as it seems to the present writer, all of them are 
more or less lacking; and out of this conviction has ansen the 
present volume. 

The grounds of this conviction may be briefly stated. Years 
ago, when the author, with something of enthusiasm, resolved, 
if possible, to master the language, and for that, among other 



T] PREFACE. 

purposes, resided for 3ome time in Germany, he found his ar 
dor not a little abated by the circumstance, that, in no one of 
the numerous grammars which he had collected about him, was 
he able to pursue his studies on what he deemed philosophical 
principles. The methods of the books were in one sense va- 
rious ; but all were plainly divisible into two extremely oppo- 
site classes. In one class theory held the sway ; in the other 
practice was supreme. The one seemed bent upon grounding 
the pupil in set rules and forms, and anxious chiefly to present 
and impress the language, as a thing of science, a systematic 
whole. The other appeared to deal almost exclusively in sep- 
arate and independent facts ; intent only on exhibiting and 
teaching the German tongue, as a thing of art, a medium of com- 
mon communication. That such a knowledge of the language as 
he had proposed to himself to acquire, could never be obtained 
by either of these methods exclusively, was perfectly evident. 
That not only the surest, but even the shortest route to his ob- 
ject, might be found in the due combination of the two, seemed 
not less obvious. For art has her only just basis in the science 
that lies underneath ; without which she is liable to frequent 
failure and perpetual uncertainty. 

The attempt, then, in this book is to unite and narmonize 
more fully two things, which, in teaching a language, ought 
never to be separated : the theoretical and the practical. This 
leading feature being announced, we now proceed to specify 
some details of the plan. 

It assumes in the outset, as ever afterward, the position of 
the careful and considerate living teacher ] that is, introduces 
one by one the easier forms and usages of the language, and 
directs attention to the more obvious differences between the 
German and the English. It here seeks to avoid the error of 
frightening the beginner with a formidable array of rules, de- 
clensions and conjugations, w T hich he is, as yet, in no wise pre 
pared to entertain. 

After a certain amount of progress in these preliminary 
steps, the pupil is put upon the exercise of composing in Ger- 
man. To this end he is taught to regard every German sen- 
tence, given him for translation, as a model on which he is to 



preface. vii 

build one of his own. He is in no wise trammeled as to the 
thought ; he is under no necessity of divesting it of some par- 
ticular English dress, given it by the hand of another ; but is 
encouraged to take any thought which may suggest itself, and, 
under the guidance of his model sentence and what other light 
he has received, to put it into a German garb. In this way, 
he comes gradually to feel the difference between the English 
and the German modes of expression, and thence derives ac- 
curacy and readiness in making them. Conjointly with this 
process, and in order to its more complete success, the practice 
of turning English sentences into German, as well as German 
into English, is carried on in a series of exercises at once pro- 
gressive, comprehensive and systematic. 

It supplies the learner throughout all these various exercises 
with the materials necessary to their due performance. Every 
lesson is headed with the statement and illustration of all new 
principles involved, an explanation of difficult words and 
phrases, and a vocabulary alphabetically arranged. Nothing, 
indeed, is left unsupplied, which the student can not readily 
obtain for himself. 

It does not, however, in regard to grammatical instruction, 
leave the learner here. For, although it embraces somewhere 
or other in the previous course, all the leading facts and fea- 
tures of the language, it purposely deals with them rather as 
individuals than as components of a grammatical system. It 
takes them analytically, not synthetically. But now, having 
accomplished its purpose in this respect, it invites the attention 
of the student to a new and more scientific aspect of them. 
They come before him now, not as new things, but in new re- 
lations. He has all the advantage of an impressive review, 
and at the same time gives discipline to his mind, by giving 
order to its acquisitions. 

It furthermore, as is plain, adapts itself to all classes of 
teachers and learners. Those who insist upon the more purely 
practical method, who regard every thing beyond as superflu- 
ous, if not pernicious, will find the course contained in the first 
part, all-sufficient, it is believed, to answer their demands. 
To those, on the other hand, who can tolerate nothing short of 



Vlli PREFACE. 

a strictly systematic course, first and last, the second part will, 
it is hoped, be found no unacceptable offering. To those, 
finally, who sympathize with the author in the view that these 
two methods can and ought to be united in teaching a language, 
the entire work is presented with all the confidence of expe- 
rienced success. 

To render it yet more complete in itself, a carefully selected 
series of Reading Lessons, from the best German writers, has 
been added, together with a full vocabulary (pp. 471 and 505). 

Throughout the volume, great care has been taken to furnish 
in every particular, however trivial it might seem, the most 
reliable instruction. And in this respect, as in others, it is 
hoped, the work will be found especially acceptable to that 
large class of students who aim at the acquisition of the lan- 
guage mainly without the aid of a teacher. Indeed, for their 
purposes, many features in the system will prove peculiarly 
serviceable. 

In the matter of declension and conjugation — in the account 
of derivatives and compounds — in the tabular views of verbs, 
regular and irregular, simple and compound — in the illustra- 
tions of the powers and uses of the prepositions and other par- 
ticles — in short, in all leading points, the author has sought 
to present those views only which are now recognized as the 
best and truest by the highest German authorities. To the 
labors of Becker and Heyse especially is he indebted ; though 
numerous are the works on German grammar, which have 
been consulted in view of this publication. 

Finally, with the sincere desire that this course of study may 
subserve the purpose of rendering the German language and 
literature more easy of access, and with a grateful acknowledg- 
ment of the friendly aid which has been received from several 
gentlemen of known ability in linguistic science, the work is 
respectfully submitted. 

New Yoke, October, 1855. 



CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. 



I H > S^ " . 



LESSON I.— German Alphabet , .\. 19 

LESSON IL— Sounds of letters.— I. Vowels.— -II Umlauts*— 
III. Diphthongs. -^ IV. Consonants. — V. Compound Conso- 

' nants.-— VT. Accent. . . * * 20 

LESSON III.— Current hand 2% 

LESSON IV. — 1. Forms of definite article.— 2. $aBett present sin- 
gular. . * 23 

LESSON V.— Stttgen and SGBarten present singular.— 1. Root. — 
2. Form of Conjugation * « ....*...*. 2-4 

LESSON YI. — Interrogative Conjugation 26 

LESSON VII. — 1. Verbs irregular present singular.— 2. Gender 
of Nouns ........ 2f 

LESSON VIII.-— 1. Cases.— 2. Declension of Nouns.— 3. Nouns of 
Old decl. ending in t, el, en, er, $en, lein.— 4. Old decl. with def. 
Art. Agreement of article with noun. — 6. Verbs with dat. and ace. 29 

LESSON IX.— 1. Genitive^ how rendered. — 2. Nouns adding e$ in 
gen. Occasional omission of e in gen. and dat 31 

LESSON X*— 1. Demonstrative pronouns SMgfer and 3ener* — 
2* Often rendered by latter— /owner* — -3. The word one,— 4 Decl. 
of biefer, etc— 5. Sent and ^ergeffett pres* sing « 33 

LESSON XL— 1. Dative with prepositions* — 2. Dative with verbs 
of motion. — 3. Omission of prep.— 4. Of, how expressed in Ger- 
man.-^). Position of Prep **,.......< * . * * * 36 

LESSON XII.— 1. Indef. Art.— 2. 3* Poss* Prons.— 4. Decl* of indef. 
Art*, etc* — 5. e when often dropped. — 6. Words in apposition ... 88 

LESSON XIII. — 1. Interrogative Pronouns. — 2. 2£a$ fur separat- 
ed. — 3. SMdjer and roctS fur in exclamations, — 4* 2Md) in ques- 
tions. — 5. (Sin rendered by a one, — 6. 2Bct3 for toaxum* Decl. of 
roer and roaS— 7. Gen. of tt)a$*— 8. SBomtt, etc* * 41 

LESSON XIV.— 1. Adjectives used predicatively*— 2. Used attri- 
butively. — 3. Old decl. of Adjs.— 4. Agreement of Adj. with 
Nouns. — 5. Attributive and predicative forms of Adj* — 6. Adjs* 
preceded by ettMS, tt>a3 and tttd)t& — 7. Adjs. referring to noun 
understood. . . * « * * * 44 



X COffTEtfTS 0* THE LESSOKS. 

FA08 

LESSON XV.— 1. New decl. of Adjs.— 2. Form of New decl. in 
nom.— 3. Final syllable of manner, etc., sometimes dropped.— 
4. Adj. placed after noun. — 5. Adj. formed from nouns 47 

LESSON XVI.— 1. Mixed decl. of Adjs.— 2. Adjs. following mcttt, 
etc. — 3. (Stgett. Endings of Mixed decL nom.— 4. (Em as nu- 
meral. — 5. Inflection of eht and fern. — 6. (£in preceded by def. art. 50 

LESSON XVIL— 1. Connected view of Old, New and Mixed de- 
clensions.— 2. Words requiring adj. in New decl. — 3. Words re- 
quiring adj. in Mixed decl 54 

LESSON XVIII. —1. Indefinite pronouns*— 2. 3. Sebermann.— 4. 3e* 
manb.— 5. 9?temcmb. — 6. 9£i$t with Semanb and (£ttta<3. — 7. (£iner 
and Reiner 56 

LESSON XIX. — 1. 2. Indefinite pronoun man. — 3. Q5ax, and gaits 
unb aar 59 

LESSON XX. — 1. Prepositions with dat.— 2. Prepositions with 
ace. — 3. Prepositions with dat. and ace. — 4. Preps, and def. art. 
contracted. Examples of an, son, auf> au3 and naclj 61 

LESSON XXI. — 1. Negative conjugation. — 2. Position of 9ftdjt* — 

3. In interrogative sentences. — 4. ©onbern and 5lber*- — 5. 6. 9U$t 
ftal)r ?— 7. SRid)t with S^oc^. — 8. 2Iuct) ntdjt, aud) fctn, etc 64 

LESSON XXII. — 1. New decl. ending in unaccented ar, e, er, el. — 

2. Nouns not ending in ax, etc. — 3. Adj. or Part, used substan- 
tively. — 5. For determining decl 67 

^ESSON XXIIL— Feminine gender. — 1. Decl. of bte, btefe and 
metne. — 2. Decl. ' t Adjs. in fern. gen. Old decl. — 3. New decl. — 

4. Decl. of Fern Nouns. — 5. 6. Appellations of Females. — 7. 2T, o, 

it, umlauted before the suffix in 70 

LESSON XXI V. — 1. Formation and Gen. of Diminutives. — 2. Use 
of Diminutives. — 3. grduleirt and SDldbcfyen. — 4. 5. Compound 
Nouns. Nouns with Nouns. — 6. With Preps., etc.— 7. With 
Adjs.-— 8. Compound Adjs. — 9. 10. Nouns separated by hyphen. — 

11. 12. 13. Gender of Compound Nouns - 74 

LESSON XXV.— Plan of Composing German.— 1. Art.> and adj. 
Prons., Plural. Decl. in all Genders of Plur. — 2. Adjs* — 3. Old 
decl. — 4. 5. Plural of Nouns of Old decl., Neuter. — 6. 7. Masc. — 
8. Fem.^- 9. Decl. of Nouns in Plural.— 10. Qabtn, <5eitt and Soften* 

pres. plur 79 

LESSON XXVI.— 1. Irreg. Plur. of Nouns.— 2. Neuter Nouns.— 

3. Masc. Nouns. — 4. Nouns ending in tfyum.— 5. Plural of SDtoum.-— 
6. Seute and ©olf.— 7. 5XpfeI, etc.— 8. Gutter and So&ter.— 9. $at, 
etc. — 1 0. Sing., how used 84 

LESSON XXVIL— 1. Decl. of Pers. Prons.— 2. Second Pers. £%.— 
8. Second Pers. Plv/r. — 4. Third Pers, Sing, — 5. ThiidYer&, Plv/r< 87 



OOtftBBTS Of TBE Lfi&&'OS&. 3ft 

PAG* 

LESIiON XXVIII.— 1. 2. Gen. of Pers. Prons. — 3. Dat. with son.— 

4. Pron cutis refei ?£ng to Neuter Appellations of Persons.— 
6. Gender of Prons. representing inanimate objects. — 6. Adverbs 
substituted for pron. and prep.~—7. Use of e$ as gram. subj. — 
8. Position of. — 9. 10. Various uses of e3. — 11. Prons. of differ- 
ent persons. — 12. Pron. repeated* — 13. Gen. of a Pers. Pron. be- 
fore Numerals . . „ . . 05 

LESSON XXIX.— 1. Reflexive use of Pers. Prons.— 2. Stc^— - 3. 4. 

5. (Bell) ft.— 6. Reflexive pronouns used as reciprocal. — 7. <Std) 
rendered by Pers. Pron. — 8. Position .of Pers. Pron. in inter- 
rogative sentences.— 9. 10. 11. Reflexive Verbs • 9$ 

LESSON XXX.— New decl. plur.— 1. Adjs.— 2. Nouns.— 3. Fern. 
Nouns.— 4. 5. 6. Decl. of Proper Names. — 7. Foreign Proper 
Names. — 8. Proper Names of Places and Countries. — 9. Connected 
View of the Art.. Demonst. and Poss. Prons., Adj. and Nouns, 
in all Decls 100 

LESSON XXXI.— Irreg. decl. of Nouns.— 1. Nouns inflected ac- 
cording to New decl.— 2. Mixed decl. of Adjs. in plur. — 3. $tl$ 
and gricbe. — i. 2>er @djmer L u — 5. Nouns taking Old decl. in sing. y 
and New in plur. — 6. Decl. of Waiter and Sdtge.— 7. SBett and 
£emb.— 8. See. — 9. Mixed decl. of Adj 106 

LESSON XXXIL— Comparison of Adjs.— -1. Comparative.— 2. Su- 
perlative. — 3. When umlauted.— 4. Irregular.— 5. How declin- 
ed.*— 6. Superlative after am.-*— 7. Superlative combined with 
tlHer.— 8. Comparative by means of $ie()r> QBemger, etc.— 9. Par- 
ticiples, how declined. — 10. 3e-befto and je-je.— 11. Position of 
subject and verb . • * 10$ 

LESSON XXXIIL — 1. Adjs. used substantively. — 2. As abstract 
Nouns. — 3. S5e(l.— 4. Comparative of S^a^e*— 5. Formation of 
Adjs. from Proper Names of Countries and Cities.— 6. From Pro- 
per Names of Persons. — 7. Denoting a sect. . . „ 113 

LESSON XXXIV.— 1. (Sitel and Skitter, omission of inflectional 
endings. — 2. Several Adjs. qualifying the same noun. — 3. In 
nom. and ace. Neut. — 4. Adj. denoting a language. — 5 Form of 
the New decl.— 6. Sentences used adjectively. — 7. Adjs. used 
adverbially. — 8. 9. Adverbs.— 10. Comparative of 2>tel, etc.... 117 

LESSON XXXV.— 1. Absolute Poss. Prons.— 2. 3. Used substan- 
tively. — 4. 9ftetnc3gletd)en, etc. — 5. ©leicfyeiu • i2* 

LESSON XXXVL— 1. Conjugation of paben.— 2. Idioms with 
£aben. — 3. Position of the main verb in compound tenses. — 
4. Verb with two objects connected by a conj. — 5. Two or more 
nouns in sing. — >5. With collective nouns. — 7. With words as 
titles, ir sing. — t , , . , , t , , , 125 



XII COttfEKTS OF TfiE lESSO&S, 

PAtfi 

LESSOR XXXVII— Conjugation of ^icbctt. — 1- Preuent Parti- 
ciple,— 2. 3. Perfect Particip .e.~ 4. Inflection of tlie Participles. — 

5. JPreamt f sing.— 6. Plur. — 7. Imperfect sing< — 8. Plur. — 9. Per- 
fect anl Pluperfect.— -10, Future. — 11. 12. Orthographic and 
euphonic changes. — 13. Imperative .,,..,...*...... 129 

LESSON XXXYIIL— Use of the Tenses.— 1. Present— 2. Imper- 
fect — 3. Perfect — 4. Future Tenses. — 5. 6. Imperative. 2)u and 
3fyr, ©ie*-— 7. Verb repeated or wholly omitted .......... 184 

LESSON XXXIX. — 1. Relative Prons.— 2. Bed. of the relative 
be r* — 3. Use of gen. — 4. SBelcfyer, t, e#> used in the sense of some, 
any. — 5. Construction of sentences with rel. Prons. — 6, Words 
requiring the same construction. Principal and Subordinate 
Sentences, — 7. Relative clause and principal sentence. Exam* 
pies of ...,...,...<....,*...,, , ,<-.«■##..«**«*..*#•«. 188 

LESSON XL,— 1, Ser and BaS as relative.-— 2. Ser for Semanb.— 
3. Use of 2Ba$* — 4. Pronominal Adverbs. — 5, Agreement of the 
Verb with relative. — 6, Position and omission of relative. — 
7. Relative repeated. — 8. Omission of Copula. , . .....„** 142 

LESSON LXI. — 1. Determinative Pronouns. — 2. Derjentge*— 3, £)er 
for ©erjemge*— -4. £>exfei6e<— 5. ©old)er# followed by a relative*— 

6. Followed by ttne.— 7. Omitted, — 8. Used with indef. art.— 

9. Used as a substitute for a demonst. or a pers. Pron, .<.,.*,« 145 
LESSON XLIL— 1. Def t aft,— 2, Art. with kibe, f)ctI6, fo, foldjer, 

tt)te and ju* — 3, Indef art. ,..,..,.. * „ . ............. . 149 

WESSON XLIII.— 1, Omission of art.— 2. 9ta<$ $<wfe, etc— 3. Omis- 
Man or retention of art. — 4. Before the substantively used in- 
finitive, — 5- Omission formerly more common. — 6. With in be- 
fore the dat .,...,.....,.,......,..,...,.,...,..,.....,.,,. 158 

LESSON XLIV, — 1. Demonstrative Pronouns. — 2. Demonstiat, 
£)er with noun,-*-3. Rendered by pers^ pron. — 4. Used before 
the gen.— 5, £>effen, 2)eren.— 0. £)£$ in compounds.— 7. £)tefe$ 
and tt>el$e3 with the verb (Settle — 8, (Sfeetu ................... 156 

LESSON XLV. — 1. Auxiliaries of mod& — 2. Conjugation of the 
mode auxiliaries. — : 3. Formation of Plur*— -A* £)ikfen* — 5. Mn* 
netu— 6- ttm$tn with $imnetu— 7. SDWgett. — 8, Mffetn — 9, ©^XTen* — 

10. 2Bottett.— 11. Satren,— 12. Conjugation of— 13. FormofP^- 
/<ec£ and Pluperfect. — 14* Position of infinitive form of the Par- 
ticiple. — 15. Omission of main verb 161 

LESSON XLVL— 1. Conjugation of SettL— 2. Idioms with (SeitL— 

3. Conjugation of SBerbetu- — 4. 2Berben as an independent verb, . 167 
LESSON XLV1L— L "Irrajular" Verbs.— 2, Form of infinitive.— 



contents of tSe Lessens. iMi 

PACkfl 

& 4. 5. Formation of Imperfect Tense and Perfect Participle. — 
6. Irregular in Present tense. — 7. Formation of second and third 
persons .................*. o ......*........*...... 172 

LESSON XLV1II. — Use of the auxiliaries §><xbt\\ and ©eitt. — 1. §Ct* 
fcetu — 2. <Sein with what verbs used.' — 3, §d>en or ©ein . * . 170 

LESSON XLIX.— 1. Infinitive without $«♦— 2.- ©pajtrett with fa$* 
?en^ fujren> reiten and gel)en*- — Infinitive as the Subject or 05/icl of 
a verb. — 4. As a Noun, — 5. After Slnfiatt, £)\)nt and Urn* — 6. Used 
passively. — 7. 2B iffe it followed by an infinitive* ........ l85( 

LESSON L. — Participles and Imperative.— 1. Present participle 
used attributively and predicatively* — 2. Perfect participle. — 
3. Perfect participle for Imperative. — 4L Future participle. — 
5* Imperative. — 6. Daburdj, ba$ . 8 - .-...-. ^ ..-.•....-.........,** . 18$ 

LESSON LI. — 1. Compound verbs separable. — 2. 3. 4. Position of 
the particle.-^-5< Frefixed to a verb ^ctf accented on. the first 
syllable. — 6. Signification of. . . . .......... . . .......... 188 

LESSON LIL — Adverbs.— 1, £)Ct, etc., with verbs of rest. — 2. £er 
and £un compounded with other words. — 3. Separated from 
»■©♦ — 4. Rendered by a Preposition.--^). Formation of adverbs, — 
6. Formed of various parts of speech. ........ < , < ....... 191 

LESSON LIIL — Collocation of words. — 1. Words requiring the 
Verbs at the end of the sentence, — 2. Words followed by the 
correlative fo. — 3. The correlative fo followed by bod) or bett^ 
ttodj.-— 4. Wotx, etc. — 5. Inversion of subject and verb. — & Con- 
junction omitted in translation. — 7. Position of Adverbs with 
Adjs. — 8^ With Verbs*. — 9^ Adverbs of time and manner ........ 194 

LESSON LIV. — Compound verbs inseparable. — 1. Unaccented 
particles. — 2. 3. Unaccented or accented. — 4 Augment. . ...... 199 f 

LESSON LV. — Subjunetivev Conjugation of Sein, §ct£en and SBer** 
ben. — 1. Use of Subjunctive. — 2.- Perfect and Pluperfect rendered 
by Present and Perfect — 3. Subjunctive for Imperative. — L 5. 
Formation of Subjunctive of regular verbs, — ^6.- Of irregular verbs 201 

LESSON LTI. — Conditional. Conjugation of <Szxn, £>ctBen and £Ser** 
ben. — 1. Use of Conditional. — 2. Imperfect and Pluperfect of Sub- 
junctive substituted. — 3. a. fa e< d. Employment of Conditional 20$ 

LESSON LVIL — L Impersonal Verbs.- — 2. Omission of e£. — 
3. %au§ttx\f biinfetu — 4 ©ekn tfeed impersonally. — 5. geljten, etc. 
-—6. Impersonal and reflexive .............. * ............... 2lft 

LESSON LVIII. — 1. Paradigm of a Passive verb. — 2. Formation of 
Passive Verbs. — 3. Omission of 2Bert>etu— -4. Used impersonally 21 4 

LESSON LXIX.-—1. Proper and common Names. — 2. Bate. — 
3. Nouns of weight, <foc. — 4 When the latter noun is qualified 
by some other word — 5. $kmw— 6, ©In 9)ctar,. « * < , . , 218 



33ir &&$t&Kt& o£ the t#s6oKr& 

PAOB 

LESSON IX.— 1. Prepositions with gen.— 2. Sang* and £ro£.— 

8. Sitthng. — 4. £atb> tyaloen or tyal&er, urtcjeadjtet and joegcru — 5. Urn 
Wttfen. — 6. $alb'tn, etc., in compounds. — 7. Slnflatt. — =-8. SBegen pre- 
ceded by oon . . * ...... * ....... 220 

LESSON LXL— 1. Adjs. with gen.— 2. With ace. —3. #ofl.— 
4. grol). — 5. <Bd)ulbic$.-^-6. SBcrtlj.*— 7* Gen. used in denoting rela- 
tion of magnitude* — 8. Used adverbially. — 9. Denoting posses- 
sion. — 10. Gen. of Pers. prons. used partitively. — 11. Gen. used 
parti tively. — 12. As predicate after the verb Sent 224 

LESSON LXI!. — l. Reflexive Verbs with gen. — 2. Impersonal 
Verbs with gen.*— 3. Transitive Verbs with gen.*— 4. Verbs fol- 
lowed by prepositions.— 5. Verbs with gen. and ace. — 6. SHdjteit 
and Batten. — 7. barren. — 8. ©ebenfen. — 0. £ad)cn, gotten and SBctlten 228 

LESSON LXIII.— 1. Adjs. with dak— 2. Dak substituted for a 
poss. pron. — 3. Occasional use of the first and second persons 
of prons. in dak — 4. Dak with pet, ttoit and ju. . 234 

LESSON LXIV.—l. Verbs with dak — 2. Verbs governing dak or 
ace— 3. Soften 23? 

LESSON LXV.— Indefinite Numerals.— 1, Slnber.— 2. S3cibc— 
3. 33etbe$.— 4. <£ttt>a3.— 5. So cttta&— 6. Srgenb.— • 7.8. 9. Sieland 
SGBcmg.— 10, Superlative of fttck— 11. OTe, ad.— 12. Plur. of M. 241 

LESSON LXVI.-^-Prepos'tions construed with dat.-^-l. 2lu3. — 

2. 9fapcrX-3. Set.— 4. (£ttta.ea.en.— 5. ©egemikr.— 6. €Dtit.- — 7. SWit 
compounded with verbs.— 8. fftad).*~9. 9?adj after its object.— 
10. £)b.— 11. Sett,— -12. #on.*— 13. 3u.— 14. Su preceded by auf 
or itad). — 15. The dak with in in connection with SBerben. — 

16. Idioms with jit and nacr). . . .......*... 245 

LESSON LXVII. --Prepositions with ace— 1. £urd)— 2. gitr. — 

3. ©eg en.— -4. Dtyne.— 5. llm.— 6. Um in compounds.— 7. Ace. with 

Urn rendered by our nom ,..«,., 249 

LESSON LXVIII. — -Prepositions governing dak and acc.—l. &rt — 

2. Idioms with an,— a. 5tuf.— 4. 3tt.— 5. Ucbcr.— 6. Hitter.— 7, SBor. 251 
LESSON LXIX.— Adverbs and Conjunctions.— 1. 3T&er.— 2. 9lt* 

letrt. — 3. 311$.— 4. SiCXfo. — 6. 2(u4— 6. S3alb.— 7. 331$.— 8. £>a.— 

9. ©ajjj.— 10. $emt.— 11. 2>oc$.— • 12. (g^ert. — 13. <£§e.-HL4> Grft— 
15. (£ttt>a. — 16. ©ar.— 17. ®ern.— 18. @'tet$.— 19. Smmen— 20. 3a. 
—21. 3e.— 22. fleiru— 23. fKo$.--24. ^un.— 25, fRur.— 26. ©d)on.— 
27. 8o.— 28. <Sonjt.— 29. Unb.— 30. 2UeHeid)t.— 31. Sie.— 32. SltS 
tt>ie. — 3-3. S23te after an adjective in the comparative.— 34. SBo^l. 

— 3f>. SBotyt denoting a supposition or probability 254 

LESSON LXX. — l. Modes of Address, £err, grau and grd'uletn he 
fore Proper names. — % Before words denoting relationship.... 260 



INDEX TO THE LESSONS* 



Lessons. 

fF6er> fonbertt, 21. 4. 69. 1. 

Abbreviations 70- 

Ace, 8. 1. With preps, 20. 2. 
Ace. ordat. with preps., 20.3. 
With verbs, 64. 2. Ace. or 
gen. with adj., 61. 2. 3. With 
verbs, 62.5. 

$Td)tm and rcarten, ,62. 6. 

Adjs., 14. Attrib>, 14.2. Old dec., 
14. 3 Agreement, 14. 4. Pre- 
ceded by etraa£, <fcc., 14, 6.- 
Referring to noun under- 
stood, 14. 7. New decl., 15. 1. 
Denoting material, 15. 5. 
Mixed decl., 16. 1. Connected 
View, 17. Old decl, plur., 25-3. 
New decl. plu \, 30. 1. Mixed 
decl. plur, 31. 9. Comparison 
of, 32. Compar., 32. 1. Su- 
perl., 32. 2. lrregul. comp., 
32. 4. Superlative after am, 
32, 6. Superl. suffixed to all, 
32. 7. Comp. by adverbs, 
32. 8. Used substantively, 
33. 1. Abstract, 33, 2. Formed 
from countries, <fcc, 33. 5. 
From persons, 33, 6 Denot- 
ing sect, 33, 7. Omission of 
inil. endings, 34. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 
Used abverbially, 34. 7. Re- 
quiring gen,, 61. 1. Ace, • 
61. 2. Dat., ...63.1 

Adverbs, pronominal, 28. 6, 
Formation of adverbs, 34, 8. 
9. 52. 5. 6. Nouns used as, 61. 8. 

Metn, 69.2. 

OTer, prefixed to superlative?, 32. 7. 

2U3, 69. 3. Omission after \o> 69. 3. 
note. 

ttU »te, 69. 32, 



] ,Esr>o?m. 

SRfOi 69.4. 

51m, with the superlative, . . .32 6. 

31 n, 68. 1. Idioms with, 68. % 

5lnbcr, ber anbeve, . 63. 1. 

8itbcr3, 65. 1.6. 

$lxi)tatt, before infinitive, ... .49. 5. 

Slnjktt or (ktt, 60. 7. 

Apposition, rule for, 12. 6. 

Arts., decl. of, 8. 4. 12. 4. Fern., 
23. 1. Plur., 25. 1. Contract- 
ed with preps., 20. 4. Use 
of, 42. Omission of, 43. 

Attributive adjective, 14. 1. 

Sludj, 69. 5. $iKt) tticfyr, aud? fern, 
<fec, after a negation, 21. 8. 

STuf, 68.3. 

2Iu3, 66. 1. 

Slider, 66.2* 

Aux : lary verbs, 45. 46. Use of 
the auxiliaries fyxbtn and feitt, 48> 

SalD, 69. 6. 

SBefmben, 29. 10. 

©efcalten, 62. 1. 065. 

33ei, 66.3. 

SBctbe, 65.2. 

23eibe3, 65.3. 

SBid, ^ 69.7. 

(Cardinal numbers, §41.) 

Cases, 8, 60. 61. 62. 63. 64* 

S^ert, diminutives in, 24.1. Re- 
presented by prons. masc. 
or fern., * 28. 4. 

Collocation of words, 53. 

Comparison of adjs., 3 2. Comps. 
and sups,, decl. of, 32. 5. Ir- 
reg. forms of, .32. 4 

Composing German, plan of, 25. 

Compound adjectives, .24. 8 

Compound nouns, formation 
of, 24. 4. Gender of, .... 24. lit 



* See Contents of Lessons* p, ix ; also Genera Index, p, 618, 



tn 



INEIEX TO T&E LESSONS. 



Lessons. 

Compound verls, separable, 51* 

Inseparable, ............ 54* 

Conditional mo >d, ........ ; . 56. 

Conjugation of yerbs, reg., 37. 
Irregi, ................. 6 47. 

Conjunctions, examples illus* 
trating the use of, . . s '« /* . . 69; 

Connected view of article, (fee., 30; 9. 

Consonants, classification and 
pronunciation of, .... * 2; IV* V* 

t)a, 52. 1. 69. 8. Compounded 
with other words, .52* 2* 

ftafiir (nidjts bafiir fonnett), 45* 6* 

%a$t peculiar use of, .*.... .44* 7* 

4><tg,. .;...;.«* 69.9. 

Dat., after certain preps*, 20. 1. 
With adjs«, 63* 1. Substi- 
tuted for poss. pron., 63"; 2. 
Peculiar use of 63. 3. With 
verbs, ...m..;. 64. 

Declension, of the arts*, 8. 4. 
12.4* 23.1. 25. 1. Of nouns* 
8. 2. Old form; 8* 3. 25. 9. 
New form, 22. 30. 2. Of 
adjs., 14. 15* 16. 23. 2. 3. 25* 
2. 3. 30. L Of pers. prons., 
27. 1. Of comps* and su- 
perls.. 32, 5* Of absolute 
poss. prons., 35. Of adj., art.,- 
noun, demonst. and poss. 
prons., .....**.....*..... 30* 9. 

Demonstrative pronouns, . *10. 44. 

fcentt, .*.; * 69. 10* 

SDer, determinative, when ab^ 
solute, its form in the gen. 
plur., 41. 3. Relative, ..... 39* 

ficrienigc, *41. 1* 

fccrfelbe, * 41.4. 

£)ej?l)alb, 53.6. 

SDefto,. .....; ;,.... ..,32. 10. 

Determinative pronouns,. . . * 41* 

Sttefei and jener distinguished, 10. L 

2)tefe$ f bte£, peculiar use of, . .44* 7* 

Diminutives, 24* 1. 2. Gend. of 
prons. referring to, * .28. 4. 

Diphthongs, pounds of, .... . 2. III. 

£)od), 69. 11* 

£>imt), ** ..**..*, 67. 1. 

SDiirfen, remarks on, 45. 4. 

©ten, 69. 12. Before demonst. 
or determinative, .*;*... .44. 8. 

<E$e, 69.13. 

Sigen,...*; . .*< * < ..*<*..* *16. 3; 



diner, , 18.7 

(Silt 9)actr, 59. 6. 

(Ett, suffix, forming adjectives, 15. 5. 

(Stttgegen, .;**....;........ .66. 4. 

(Sttttcmg, 60.3. 

(Srjr, ,.69.14. 

(£3, peculiar use of, 28. 7. 8. 9. 10. 

<E* feibenn, *..; 69. 10. 

dim, ..<**.... ..69.15. 

<£tn>a3, ;...«... .65. 4. 

flfe^Ieitr -• , ..57.5. 

Femin. nouns, indeclinable in 
sing. ..*;.*........**.*.. 23. 4* 

gran, graulctn, .**... ;70. 1. % 

grof), 61.4. 

gitr, . . . .* * 67. & 

Future tenses* how formed, 37. 10; 
Observations on the use of, 38. 4* 

®cmj imb gar, ..*..*.*.....* 19. & 

®ar, * 19. 3. 69.16, 

©e, prefixed to the perfect 
part., 37. 2. Inserted between 
the prefix and the radical in 
compound verbs separable, 
51. 3. Excluded from the 
perfect part, of compound 
verbs inseparable, ....... .54. 1. 

®ef>en, impersonally used,. . .57. 4* 

©egen, .*.....*....... * 67. £f, 

®egenukr, .....«...* < ..*... 66. a. 

&en.. With preps., 60. With 
adjs., 61. Used adverbially, 

61. 8. With reflexive verbs* 

62. 1. After the impersonal 
e3 geljiftet, <fec*, 62. 2. With 
transitive verbs, .......... 62. 81 

®enug, ..**....... ;...;....53.t 

©ettt, ; ; .....69.17. 

©letd), * 69.13. 

$ct'&ett, conjugation of, 36* 1. 
Idioms with, 36. 2. When 
and how used as an auxili- 
ary, .**;..;;. *....;;. .48. 1. 3. 

$alb, tyalben or tyalber,. . . * . . .60. 4. 
|>albett, rcegen and um-Mtnllen 
with the gem of pers. prons.* 60. 6. 

$au$, nacfy or $tt, .43. 2. 

|>etgett,-. ;;*.... 49. 1. ofo. 

£er and$in, *.52. 2. 3. 

£ert,.. 70.1.2. 

§itt, 52. 2.3. 

!>olett laffen, 49 6. 

gmmer, **.<<< 69* 1& 



INDEX TO THE LESSONS. 



XV11 



Lessons. 

lmper. mood, past part, in 
place of, 50. 3. Observations 
on the several uses of, ... .50. 5 

Imperfect, how formed, 37. 7. 8. 
Observations on the use of, 38. 2. 

Impersonal verbs, 57. 

3n,.., 68.4, 

Indefinite numerals", 65. 

Indefinite pronouns, 18. 

Indefinite pronoun man, . .19. 1. 2. 

Indicative mood, for imper., 38. 1. c. 

Infinitive mood, use of, in place 
of past part., 45. 13. With- 
out ju, 49. 1. As a neuter 
noun, 49, 4. Active form 
used passively, 49. 6. An- 
swering after bletbett, ge$ett r 
&c, to our present part.,. .49. 1. 

Interrogative conjugation,. .'. 6. 1. 

Interrogative pronouns, 13. 

Srgertb, 65. 6. 

Irregular verbs 47. 

Set, 69.20. 

3e, 69. 21. Before compara- 
tive, 32.10. 

Sener and biefer, distinguished, 10. 1. 

tfctn, . 69,22. 

Werner, 18.7. 

$ettte3 sott beibett, 65. 2. 

$otmett, remarks on, 45. 5. 

gang*, 60.2. 

£affen, remark on, 45. 11. 

£ettt, diminutives in, 24. 1. Rep- 
resented by a pron. masc. 
or fern 28. 4. 

Sttatt, its use, 19. 1. 2. 

SDttt, 66.6. 

Wdt f with verbs 66. 7. 

Mixed declension of adjectives, 16. 

SFcbgett, remarks on, . . .45 v . 

Moods, indicative, 87. Infini- 
tive, 49. Subjunctive, 55. 
Conditional, 5 6. Imperative, 50. 5. 

Sttitffett, remark on, 45. 8. 

§M, 66.8. 

$lafy, following the word it 
governs, 66. 9. 16. 

Negative conjugation, 21. 

8fci$ttt>a$r? 21.5. 

Vlofy, 69. 23. 

Nouns, decl. of, 8. 2. Old form 
o£ 8. 4. New form of, 22. 
Old iecl. plur., 25. 9. Irreg. 



Lessons. 
plur., 26. New decl. plur., 
30. 2. Fern, plur., 30. 3. Pro- 
per names, decl. of, 30. 4. 
Foreign proper names, 30. 
7. 8. Irreg. decl. of nouns, 31. 

(Numbers, §44. § 45.) 

Sfaltt, 69.24, 

91ux, 69. 25. 

Ob, 66. 10. 

Dime, 67. 4. Followed by the 
infinitive, 49. 5. 

(Ordinal numbers, § 45.) 

Paradigm of Ijabett, 36. 1. Of 
liebett, 37. Of feitt, 46. 1. Of 
tterbeit, 46. 3. Of a passive 
verb, 58. 1. 

Participles, how formed, 37. 
1. 2. Declined like adjs., 
37. 4. Past part, for the im- 
per., 50. 3. Future part. ... 50. 4. 

Particles, 51. 54 

Passive verb, mode of forming, 
58. 2. Paradigm of, 58. 1. 
Other methods expressing 
passivity, 19. 1. 29. 10. 

Perfect tense, how formed, 37. 
9. Observat. on the use of, 38. 3. 

Pers. prons., decl. of, 27. 1. 
Second pers. sing., 27. 2. Se- 
cond pers. plur., 27. 3. Third 
pers. sing. 27>4. Third pers. 
plur. 27. 5. Observations on 
the use of pers. prons, 28. 
Used as reflexives, 29. 1. 
Construed with ^albeit, tt)e^ 
(jett and urn — nnlTen, 60. 6 

Pluperf., how formed, 37. 9 

Plurals, of art. and adj. prons., 
25. 1. Of adjs., 25. 2. Old 
decl., 25. 3. Nouns of old 
decl., neut., 25. 4. 5. Masc, 
25. 6. 7. Fern., 25. 8. Irreg. 
plur. of nouns, 26. New decl. 
plur., of adjs., 30. 1. Of 
nouns, 30. 2. 3. 

Poss. prons., 12. 2. When ab- 
solute 35. 

Prefixes of verbs, compound 
sep., 51. Insep. 54. 1. Sep. 
and insep (4 2. 

Preps., position of, 1 1. 5. With 
dat, 20. 1. With ace, 20. 2. 
Withdat, or pre. 20. 3. With 



xviii 



INDEX TO THE LESSONS. 



Lessons. 

gen., 60. Examples of the 

use of, 66. 67. 68. 

Prons., poss., 12. 2. Absolute 

poss, 35. Interrog., 13. In- 

def.. 18. Pers., 27. 28. Reflex. 

and recip., 29. Rel., 39. 40. 

Determin. 41. Demonst. . . 44. 
Proper names, decl. of, 30. 4. 

Of countries, <fcc., 30. 8. 

Quantity, weight, $c, noun3 

denoting, 59. 3. 

SRecfct&aben, 36 - 2 - 

Reciprocal pronouns, 29. 6. 

Reflexive pronouns, 29. 1. 

Reflexive verbs, 29. 9. Equiv- 
alent to intransitives or 
passives, 29. 10. 

Sletye, 46. 2. 

Relat. prons., 39. 49. Never 
omitted, 40. 7. 

Sd)ott, 69. 26. 

<5d)uib fern, 46.2. 

©d)uibta, 61.5. 

Sein, paradigm of, 46. 1. When 
and how used as auxiliary, 48. 

Sett, . Q6. 11. 

©elbjlor fciber, 29. 3. 4. 

Sclbfl, before a noun, 29. 5. 

So, 69.27. 

So <£troa$, 65. 5. 

(Bolder, 41. 5. 

Soften, remarks on, 45. 9. As 
imper., 50. 5. obs. 

Some, 39. 4. 

Sott|1, 69. 28. 

Sfcauren gefyen, fafyren, <fcc.,. . .49. 2. 

Subjunctive mood, observa- 
tions on the several uses of, 55. 

Tenses, use of, present, 38. 1. 
Imperfect, 38. 2. Perfect, 
38. 3. Futures, 38.4. 

£ro£, 60.2 

lleber, 68.5. 

tt&r, 65.7. 

Urn, ...67.5. 

Um, in compounds, 67. 6. 



Lesson*. 
ttm, ace. with, 67. 7. 

Itm — nnflen, ,60.5. 

Um&trt, with fonneit, 45. 6. 

Umlauts, sounds of, 2. II. 

Uttb, 69, 29. 

Unrest tyx'btn, 36. 2. 

Unter, 68. 6. 

ttnter iuer SCugen, 68. 6. 

Verbs, reflex., 29. 9. 10. Aux., 
45. Irreg., 47. Compound, 
sep., 51. Insep., 54. Impers., 
57. Passive, 58. 

2Uet, when declined, . . .65. 7. 8. 9. 

2Hetletd)t, 69. 30. 

%oU, 61.3. 

#ott, 66. 12. With the dative, 
instead of the genitive, . . .11. 4. 

#or, 68.7. 

Vowels, classification and pro- 
nunciation of, 2. 1. 

2Ba3, interrog., 13. Rel., ... 40. 

2Ba6, for toaritm, 13. 6. 

3©a3 fiir tin, 13. 

SBeflen, 60. 4. 6. 

SBelcfyer, interrog., 13. Rel., . . 39. 

SBetrig, when declined,. .65. 7. 8. 9. 

SBer, interrog., 13. Rel 40. 

SBerbert, paradigm of, 46. 3. As 
an independent verb, 46. 4. 
With the dat., 46. 4. obs. 

2Bert$, 61. 6. 

SBte, 69. 31. 33. 2Bie »tel,. . .65. 7. 

2Bie befmben Sie ftd)? 29. 10. 

SBiffertf before an infinitive, 49. 7. 

2Bo, compounded with other 
words, 52. 

2Bo$l, t ....69.34. 

SBofyl, denoting doubt, suppo- 
sition, <fec, .69. 35. 

SBollen, remarks on, 45. 10. 

Bit, 66. 1 3. Between the parts 

of a compound verb 51. 3. 

£u, 06. 13. 11 15. 16, 

SitfoTge, ...60 2. 

gu ©ntrtbe getjen, ridden, 43. 6, 

3u$aufc, 43.2. 



WOODBURY'S NEW METHOD 



LESSON I. 








Cation I. 








THE LETTERS. 




German Alphabet. 




Eeutfdics SUptjafcct 


German. 




English Pronunciation, 




Examples. 


21 a 






a 


ah 




mt. 


S3 I 






b 


bay 




SSeten* 


6 c 






c 


tsay 




Settr* 


£ t 






d 


day 




£c$ncn. 


g e 






e 


e (as in 


prey) 


gfretu 


S f 






f 


eff 




gett; 


© 






g 


gay 




(Mem 


£ $ 






h 


hah 




£at)iu 


3* i 






i 


i (as in 


pique) 


31)nen. 


3* i 






J 


yote 




Sotcu 


* I 






k 


kah 




j?at)t* 


i l 






1 


ell 




gae. 


m m 






m 


emm 




gmpor'o 


91 n 






n 


enn 




Snbe. 


O o 






o 


oh 




£^r. 


9> P 






P 


pay 




$eter. 


D q 






q 


koo 




Dual* ' 


3t r 






r 


err (as in error) 


grfh 


<S f « 


(21. 


«.) 


s 


ess 




gjfcn. 


£ t 






t 


tay 




tytc. 


U u 






u 


o (as m 


do) 


lifer. 


33 » 






V 


fow (as in fowl) 


SSotf. 


SB » 






w 


vay 




SBefciu 


* r 






X 


ix 




gtr- 


§) V 






y 


ipsilon 




®9(lem\ 


3 a 






z 


tset 




SetteL 



* S before a consonant answers to I, as in fjn; before a vowel it 
answers to Y, as in 3a $r. 



20 SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 

COMPOUND CONSONANTS. 

eh, d)=tsay-hah; ck, cf=tsay-kah ; sch, f^=es-tsay-hah, 
j[=es-es; st, ft=es-tay; sz, fj=es-tset ; tz, |=tay-tset. 



LESSON II. Union II. 

SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 

I. Vowels. 

1. SI, a sounds like a in ah, marl : W)tl f @aal, Sloth 

2. S, e sounds like e in tete, very : grujr, £eer, £err* 

3. 3, t sounds like i in pique, ill : 3ljr, ©tft, $mt>* 

4. £), o sounds like o, oo, in no, door: Df)r, 5D?onb, Soot 

5. It, u sounds like o, oo, in do, moor : Uf)r, £unt>, Ufer* 

6. g), 9 sounds like t in 3t)r, Silt, gfop, ©tyj, @9tup. 

A vowel when doubled, or followed by B m the same syllable, is 
thereby lengthened ; preceding a double consonant it is shortened. 

Words in this and the following lessons, unless otherwise noted, 
take the primary accent on the first syllable, 

II. Umlauts. 

The Umlauts are produced by a union of e with a, o, u, respectively; 
as in 5le^re or fyfyxi, Del or Dl, tteber or itber. Except when they are 
capitals, however, the e is more commonly expressed by two dots; 
thus, ft, 0t it, (instead of at, ce, ue). 

1. 2le, S sounds nearly like e in SHepfel, Oartner, fyat. 

2. £)e,'o sounds as heard in Del, $56el, ©ot^c. 

3. Ue, it sounds as heard in Uebel, Sffi filler, ©fit). 

For o and it we have in English no corresponding sounds. Cel 
and Sitbf for example, might be understood if pronounced ail ana 
seed; but this is by no means the correct pronunciation. The French eu 
in^ewr, answers most nearly, perhaps, to 5; and% in the word vu to u. 

III. Diphthongs. 

1. 2U, at (or a$) sounds like ay in aye : i?at, 5JJat. 

2. 2lu, an sounds like ou in flour : §au$ f 5D?au3* 

3. ©t, ei (or ety) sounds like i in die: Seitt, $ettt. 

4. Su, eu sounds nearly like oi in oil : Sule, £eu* 

5* 2teu, an sounds nearly like eu in : $iiufer, ^leugeln. 



SOUNDS OF THE LETTEKS. 21 

IV. Consonants. 

1 93, k, f, $, f, I, m, n, p, q, r, d, p$, ff and fi sound like b, d. 
f, h, k, 1, m 5 n, p, q, x, ck, ph, ss and st. 

2. £, c before e (or a), i and 9 in the same syllable sounds 

like j (ts); otherwise like ! : Seber, ctotF, £opal\ 

3. ©, g at the beginning of a syllable sounds like g in #tm. 

After tt, in the same syllable, it sounds like our g hard 
in like position : 2ttt$ft, 9tatt Q, gar* Otherwise its sound 
usually approaches that of d): Sag, regnen, 5Ragb* 

4. £, Ij in the midst or at the end of a syllable is silent, but 

serves to lengthen its vowel : SDteljr, 2ol)n, £t)mt, SJtuty* 

5. 3, } sounds like y consonant : 3a1)r, %ubt, Satiuax, %uitl. 

6. 5t, r is uttered with a trill or vibration of the tongue, and 

with greater stress than our r: Mofyv, 23rot>* 

7. @, f at the beginning of a syllable followed by a vowel, 

has a sound between that of z and 5: ©otjn, ftttb* Other- 
wise it sounds like s: ®a3, foaS* At the end of a word 
S, instead of f, is employed. 

8. 2, t sounds like t in tes*; £ert, 2tri* Where in English t 

sounds like sh, t has the sound of j (&) : Station, station. 

9. 25, & sounds like / in ^J: Setter* In foreign words & sounds 

like m: SeneWg, Serfages* 

10. SB, ft) has a sound between that of w and v: SBelt, SBaffer, 

After a consonant, in the same syllable, it sounds like w : 
@$tt>er, g»et. 

11. 3/ i sounds like &:• 3a|I, ga$m, 3inn, $elj, Btmmer. 

V., Compound Consonants. 

1. S^, $ in primitive words, followed by $, sounds like £; 
jDad)3, 2Bad)3* Otherwise d) has its guttural sound : Xufy 
ttd&j, Ijod)** In foreign words $ retains its original sound: 
Stjor, djarmanf. 



* To aid in producing this sound take, for experiment, the alcove 
word §6$ ♦ pronounce fjo precisely like our word 7w! observing only 
to give as full and distinct a breathing at the close as at the beginning ; 
thus, ftofo— •$()<$« When not preceded by a, o, or u f however, a slight 
hissing sound of s or &h naturally attaches to the $5 i%, xttfjU reidj. 



22 VOWELS AND CONSOK ANTS. 

2. ©<$, fdj sounds like sh: ©djmtr, @<$tfo, ©fitter, @d}alc. 

3. fj (though compounded of [and g) sounds like jf, aud occurs 

only at the end of a syllable : gujj, na§, ^ajjltd). 

4. £ (compounded of t and g) sounds like g and like jjj, is used 

only at the end of a syllable : 8>Iafe, (fatten, ttufcltd). 

VI. Accent 

i In words compounded with a separable particle (§90 and 
91), as also, with the prefix im, the primary accent is on 
the first syllable : ab^aUtn, cuVgefatfen, un'gef&Uig, Un'faD. 

§ (Ei final, and also ir (or ier), in verbs ending in iren (or 
ieren), take the accent : (Scfymberet', poli'ren, riffi'ren. 

3- Foreign words that have dropped the original endings, 
usually take the accent on the last syllable : a. Slfcimral', 
Eontraft'. Those that have taken German endings are gen- 
erally accented on the penult: b. §ranjo'ftfd), 2tpot§e'fet\ 
Those that remain unchanged in form, often retain the 
original accent : c. CouVgium, 9Jttnt[te'riunu 

4* Nearly all words, except those above noted, are accented on 
the radical or primitive syllable, thus corresponding to our 
words of Anglo-Saxon origin : SBmfc'mufyle, greimfc'fdjaft, 
iibermad)'fen, untcwcfy'men, tterftefy'en, le'kn. 2e6cn'tig is 
one of the very few exceptions to this latter rule. 

In German as in English, the accent is often varied for the sake of 
contrast or emphasis: (Sr i|l nid)t fce'fe&rt, fonbcrn aer'fcfcrt, ho is not 
converted, but per' verted. 

Exercise 1 Slufga&e 1. 

Vowels, Umlauts, Diphthongs. 

(a) «lter, $al, Style, (e) (Erie, fleljen, mc$r, Stteer, itett. (t, *) 3ft 

l$n, <5tyt ©pmW* (o) D§r, £ooS, bort. (a) Hitter, 8to$m. (at, ci) 

Wain, menu (ait) gaitft (ait, ea) £aitte, greimb, $eute. (a, e) 2Te$ren, 

geber, ©eflel. (o) Defen, $ortn. (it) Ufcer, SWityle, 

Exercise 2* Slufga&e 2. 

Consonants and Double Consonants. 

(c) <£abett', (Edfar, (Etber, (Etafic, Section'* (9) ©a*et a,e$en, ©tft, 
©onbel, nt$is, Oting. (}) 3a* (r) 9tetf, ran (f, «) ©fig, fRei«. (t) 
Xttel, Station'* (») S5afe f »otu (») Sort, 2Btab, <5d>roert* ($) flint 
$oiJ. (*) gla#3, roacfcfett, <E$ao$, £td)t, Gfjaitffee'. ({$) ©djafc Sleif** 
«f> f ) $ei§, me flat, ft, j) flkfc, f»r|. 



M 



abed gp* f ^/y ^/h 








7 




tt-tjtiwnAf Oys£^t -i 



FORMS OF THE DEFIiaTE ARTICLE, ETC. 



LESSON IV. £ecti0tt IV. 

FORMS OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

1. In German the definite article has, in the nominative 
singular, a distinct form for each gender : 

Masculine, b e r , the ; feminine, bit, the ; neuter, ba$, the, 

2. £ a 6 e tt , to have, in the present tense singular. 



Affirmatively. 
1st prs. id) $abt, I have ; 
2d. prs. ©ieJja&en, you have; 
Zd. prs. er %at, he has; 

33eifpiele* 

§aUn @tc b&$ £eber? 

9kin, id) fyxbe ba* S3rob. 

4>at ber ©lafer ba* ©la*? 

3a, er fat ba* ©la* unb ba* (Mb* 



Interrogatively. 

$a6e icfy? havel? 
Jjafcen ®ie ? have you ? 
tyat er ? has he ? 

Examples. 

Have you the leather? 

No, I have the bread. 

Has the glazier the glass? 

Yes, he has the glass and the gold. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$)a* SBrob, the bread; 

S> a *' the see IV 
SDcr, the \ see l) ' 

(£r, he; 

<£*, it; 
T>a* ©la*, the glass; 
£)a* ©o!b, the gold; 

£aben, to have (see 2); 

3d), I; 

3a, yes; 

Exercise 4. 



£)a* £eber, the leather. 

9Mn, no; 

£>ber, or; 
©er <3attler, the saddler; 
£er (Sdjmieb, the smith; 

<Ste, you ; 
2>c*@tlber, the silver; 

Unb, and; 

3©a*, what; 

SBer. who. 



Slufgabe 4* 

1. 2Sa* ^afcen @ie ? * 2, 3$ $a*e 93rob.* 3. 2Ba* tjat ber 
©attler ? 4. gr $at bag ©la*. 5. SBa* ^aBe t<$ ? 6. @ie tjabett 
©oft. 7. baitrt @ie ba* ©la*? 8. ftein, tdj fytfc ba* Seber. 
9. £at er ba* ©titer? 10. Sftetn, cr tjatba* ©oft. 11. £ate 
1$ ba*.23rob ? 12. 3a, ©ie fjafren e*. 13. SBer fat ba* Seber? 
14. £er ©attler W e*. 15. S33er $at baa ©ifter? 16. £er 
Scfymteb $at e*. 17. Sat ber ©attler ba* ©la* ober ba* ©oft? 
,8. gr $at U^ ©oft unb ba* ©tfter. 

* For uss of capitals in writing German, see p. 2G7, note* Writing in the Gei- 
an character (L. III.) will soon render it familiar, and at the same time be well 
*%pted to fix in the memory the fonns and meanings of the words. 



24 conjugation of ©ingen and SBarten. 

Exercise 5. 2lufga6e*5. 

1. Have you the bread % 2. Yes, I have it. 3. Has he the 
glass % 4. No, he has the bread. 5. Who has the bread ? 6. 
J have it. 7. Have I the glass or the gold % 8. You have the 
glass and the gold. 9. Has the saddler the bread or the leather? 
1 0. He has the bread and the leather. 1 1. What has the smith ? 
12. He has the gold and the glass. 13. What has the saddler] 
14. He has the gold. 15. Who has the silver % 16. I have it. 
IT. Have you the gold? 18. No, the saddler has it. 



LESSON V. Cation V. 

(Sing en and 23 at ten in the present tense singular. 



1st. prs. id) ftng-e, I sing ; 
2d. prs. @ie fing-en, you sing ; 
3d. prs. er ftng-t, he sings; 



id) mart-e, I wait ; 
@ie foart-en, you wait ; 
er toaxt-tt, he waits. 



1. Thus the present tense singular is indicated by e for the 
first person, en for the second, and t (or et*) for the third: that 
part preceding these endings being the root. 

2. For the three forms common in English, the German has 
but one : thus, id) finge, I sing, I do sing, I am singing. 

3. Like ffngen and marten are conjugated in the same tense 
and number, unless otherwise designated, the verbs in this 
and subsequent exercises. 

33ctj>iele. ■ 'Examples. 

£)er victim flngt ba$ £teb. ^^he man is singing the song. 

3$ |ore ttctS <3te fctgetu I -hear what you are saying. 

2)a3 $mb ftriett unb ftttgt. The child is playing and singing. 

<3te ^orett K>ct3 t$ [age. You hear what I say. 

3d) foufe bctS papier'* I am buying the paper. 

£)er Gutter trittft $ctffee unb Ztyt. The miller drinks coffee and tea. 

* When the root ends in b or t, the 3d. person adds e to the t; thus^ 
ttctrt-et, instead of toctrt-t; e is also often added or omitted according 
to the choice of different writers. 



FORMS OP THE ARTICLE, CONJUGATION OF JpClben, ETC. 25 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



S)a3)Budjf the book; 
IDer gifd), the fish; 

gliegeR, (see 3.) to fly; 
£>a2 gletfd), the meat; 
£>er gCeifcfyer, the' butcher; 

|)orerif to hear ; 

Actufen, to buy ; 
Der $cfy, the cook.; 
£)a3 jfrnt, the grain; 
£)a$$cel)i, the flour ;- 



£)er ^iiller, the miller; 

@a$ett, to say ; 

©d)retBettr to write ; 
Der @ emitter? the scholar ; 
t)tx S$tMn, the swan; 

@4tr>immen f to swim; 

©ingen, to sing ; 

Zx'mhn, to drink ; 

SB arte n, to wait ; 
£)a3 SBaffer, the water. 



Exercise 6, StufgaBe 6* 

1 . Der <5<pfer lauflt ba3 Su$> 2. Der SRiHIcr fauft ba$ «onu 
8. 28er lauft ba$ 3Srob? 4. Der Mofy taxxft to* Srob unb fca* 
gleifd). 5. 3d) |ore ma6@fefag.eit. 6. 3d) trtnfe SBafler* L Der 
gtfd) fd)t»immt, ber Segment fltegt. 8* Der ©filter fdjrettt it>a$ 
er |brt. 9. fir tyBrt # a $ @ ie f a S en wtb &<*$ ^ fag** 10. 3d) 
Ijiire ma$ b-er flitter fagh 11. SJer $arie£? 12. 3d) mark* 
13. 5Ba* fagt ber ©djmieb? 14. 2Ber jhtgt? 15. Der gWftyer 
fmgt unb trinlt. 16. 2Ber fauft ba$ gletfdj? H. Der TtMu 
ober tar @d)mteb fauft e&. 18. @ie laufen 23rob, er touft §fetfd), 
unb id) faufe 3Re$L 

Exercise 7. HufgaBe ¥♦ 

1. The miller is writing. 2. Who is buying the meat ? 3. 
The cook is buying it. 4. I hear what you say. 5. The miller 
buys the grain and the cook buys the flour. 6. The butcher 
is singing. 7. Who is singing? 8. Who sings ? 9. The cook 
is singing. 10. The saddler is buying the book. 11. Who 
buys bread? 12, The miller is drinking water. 13. The fish 
swims, the swan flies and swims. 14. The butcher buys flour, 
you buy meat, and I buy bread. 15. Who hears what I say? 
16. I hear what you say. 17. You hear what he says. 1.8. 
Who is buying meat? 19. The saddler or the smith is buy- 
ing it. 



26 



INTERROGATIVE CONJ UOATIOK. 



LESSON VI. 



£ettiou VI. 



INTERROGATIVE CONJUGATION. 

L German verbs in the present and imperfect, when used 
interrogatively, precede the subject, like have and be in English ; 

%&<X$ tyafcen <&k ? What have you ? 

2Ba3 fogert <3ie ? What do you say ? (What say you?) 

SBo tjl er ? Where is he ? 

833$ ttwfjnt er? Where does he live ? (Where lives he?) 



PRESENT TENSE SINGULAR OF THE IRREGULAR VERB ; 
Affirmatively. Interrogatively. 



; t U e n 



i$ weifj, I know ; 
@ie wifiett, you know ; 
er XQt\$, he knows ; 



tt>eijj id) ? do I know ? 
ttrijfen @ie ? do you know ? 
n>ci^ tx ? does he know 1 

Examples. 



33 e t f ^ i ele* 

SBiffen <Ste tt>a3 tdj fetje ? Bo you know what I see? 

SBeig ber Wlann roc @te ttofyrten? Does the man know where you 1 re? 

SDort jie$t ber 3ager ; verfte^en Sie Yonder stands the hunter, do you 

tt>a$ er fagt? understand what he says ? 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



©er SBcufer, the baker; 
©er SBcmer, the peasant; 

SBeHen, see p. 414. 
©a$ (Sifett, the iron ; 
©a3©elb, the money; 
©er ©olbfcfymieb, the goldsmith ; 

Jpammern, to hammer; 

Spmltn, to howl; 
©er #unb, the dog; 
©er 3ager, the hunter; 

Exercise 8. 



©a$ tl (or Del, L. 2. II. 2.) the oil, 

©a3$aftter', the paper; 
©a$9>ult, the desk; 
©aS 3ai§, the salt ; 

#erf'au'fen, to sell (L. 2. VI. 4); 

SJerfic'^en, to understand; 

SSattlt, when; 

SBarmrt', why; 

2Bc, where ; 
©er 2BoIf, the wolf. 



2lrt f g ab e 8. 

1 ♦ 2Ba3 tjatert @ie ? 2. 2Sa3 faufen @te ? 3. $at ber tf od) 
Da« papier? 4. tfauft ber $o^ bad 33rob? 5. ©as t)at ber 
Sader, unb ma3 fauft er ? 6. 3Ba3 fauft ber Sader, unb toa$ m* 
fauft er? 7* SBaruut tterfauft ber ©olDfdjmieb bag ©itter? 8* 
tfauft ber $od) ba3 Del unb bas ©ala ? 9. SBamt tmb mo ftngt ber 
33auer? 10. 2£a3 ftngt ber 3ager? 11. $auft ber ©djiiler bast 
9>ult ? 12. 3Serftel;t ber Sauer m$ id) [age ? 13. SBarum fyam* 
mert ber ©djmieb bas Stfen ? 14. $at £er ©attler t a$ ®ifen? 15. 



GENDER OF NOUNS. 27 

SBarum Mi ber Stunk ? 1 6. SBarum l)eult ber SBoIf? 11. 2Gei§ 
ber (S^iiter »arum t# marte? 18. Sort fiel)t'fcer Sauer, soerfle* 
^en @ie tr>as er fagt ? 

Exercise 9. Stufgafie 9* 

1. What has the baker 1 ? 2. What does the baker buy % 3. 
What does the baker sell % 4. Is the dog barking'? 5. Why 
is he barking ? 6. Where does he stand, and what does he 
understand ? 1. Why is the goldsmith waiting ? 8. Does the 
peasant buy the grain % 9. When does the smith hammer the 
iron 1 10. Where does the scholar sell the desk ? 11. Does 
the goldsmith hammer the gold ? 12. Where does the cook 
buy the salt? 13. Does the saddler sell the oil? 14. Is the 
wolf howling ? 15. Why is he howling ? 16. When and where 
does the hunter sing? It. Is the baker or the peasant waiting ? 
18. Does the peasant know what the baker says ? 



LESSON VII. Section VII. 

VERBS irregular in the present singular indicative. 

1. In the third, person singular of several verbs, the root 
vowel e is changed to i or ie, while in that of some others a, 
and it, take the Umlaut (L. 41. 6. and § 18, p. 346) : 



id) fcredje, I break ; 

@le Bremen, you break ; 

er Wd)t (not 6ted)t), he breaks ; 



td) frije, I see ; 

@te fet)en, you see ; 

er jtel)t (not feijt), he sees. 



GENDER OF NOUNS. 

2. In German some names of inanimate objects are called 
masculine, and some feminine;* while some names of animate 
objects are called neuter : 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

Der SBhtter, the winter ; £te State, the ink ; ©a$$tab, the child. 

* This is true of nearly all languages. Many words, however, though 
denoting the same objects, are regarded in different languages as being 
of different genders. Thus, for brig, the French, brie is masculine, while 
the German, Srtgg is feminine. For head, the German ilopf, is mascu- 
line, the French, tete is feminine, and the Latin, caput is neuter. 



28 



GENDER OF NOUNS, 



Selfttele, 

SteflfctS fltafc ba$ 35u$? 

2Ba£ fagt ber £ef)rer ? 

£)a£ tf fob $at bag SBrcb. 

SBer fauft bag 9)ferb ? 

£)er Conner roEt, ber fftegen fa'tft. 



Examples. 

Does the ihild read the book ? 
"What does the teacher say? 
The child has the bread. 
Who is buying the horse ? 
The thunder rolls, the rain falls. 



Skrfcmft ber SBauer ba$ $alfc imb ba§ Does the peasant sell the calf and 
Samm? the lamb? 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SBttdjen, to break ; (L. 47. 

£>ormern, to thunder; 

(£nttt>e'ber, either; 
£)er ©fjtgr the vinegar; 

gallen, to fall; (L. 47. 6.) 
£)er tfaffee, the coffee; 
£)a3 $al&, the calf; 
£)er $aitfmamt, the merchant ; 

£adjen, to laugh; 
T)a$ £amm, the lamb ; 
£)er £el)rer, the teacher; 



£efen, to read; (L. 47. 6.) 

9?ocB, nor; 
3)er SPfejfer, the pepper; 
2)a$ ©djaf, or ©cl)aaf, the sheep; 
£)er <5clmee, the snow; 

(Sdmetben, to cut; 
2>er. <5ertf, the mustard; 
£>er &{)ee, the tea; 

SBeber, neither; 

Sie, how ; 
2)er Sutler, the sugar. 



Exercise 10. SlufflCtbe 10. 

1* SCarum Bremen @ie bag 93rob ? 2. Sefett @te bag 23ud)? 
3. $auft ber gleifdjer $a$ ©djaaf ober bag Satnm? 4. fir fauft 
tteber bag ©djaaf nod) bag £amm, er fauft bag $af&. 5. Srirtft 
ber ^aufmann entmebcr $affee ober ${)ce? 6. SfCag fauft ber $od)? 
7. Sr fauft fifftg, $feffer, @enf anfc 3 u & r * 8* SBann fallt ber 
©d^tee? 9. SCarum trtnfen @ie SBaffer? 10, SPanim trinftber 
^aufmann 23ier? 11. 33erfiet)en @ic ftag ber Scorer fagt? 12. 
£oren @te ma^ bag Mxtt fagt? 13. SJet serfauft Jtajfee, 2$ee 
unb 3«tfer? 14. Sarum fauft ber 3ager SroD? 15. Scrfietjen 
@te tr>ag ber gleifcber lieft? 16. SBawm ladjt ber @d;iifer ? j 7, 
£)as ^tnb fdjnetset bag $apter. 18. &g fcomterh 

Exercise 11. 21 u f g a & e 11. 

1. Is the teacher reading? 2. What is he reading? 3. h 
the cook breaking the bread? 4. No, he is cutting it. 5. 
Why does the butcher buy the calf, the sheep and the lamb ? 
6. What does the child sing? 7. Is the hunter drinking tea or 
coffee? 8. Why is the cook, buying mustard, pepper, sugar 
and vinegar? 9. Do you know when the snow falls? .10, 
Why are you laughing ? 11. Do you know how the child sings 1 



CASES, DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND DEFINITE ARTICLE. 29 

12. Does the child know how you read? 13. Does the child 
break the bread? 14. The scholar understands what you say. 
15. Do you know why I am laughing? 16. Does it thunder? 
17, What are you buying, bread or flour ? 13. I am buying 
neither bread nor flour. 



LESSON VIII. tuixon VUL 

' CASES. 

1. There are in German four cases ; namely, the 
Nominative, which answers to our nominative ; the 
Genitive, which answers mainly to our possessive ; the 
Dative, for which we have no exact equivalent ; and the 
Accusative, which answers to the English objective. 

The dative denotes the object for or in relation to which an action 
is performed, and is usually rendered by our objective governed by a 
preposition. 

declension of nouns. 

2. Nouns have two forms of declension, called the old and 
the new. 

3. Nouns of the old declension that end in e, el, en, er, djen 
and letn, form the genitive by adding g j the dative and accusa- 
tive remaining like the nominative. 

4. OLD DECLENSION OF NOUNS, MASCULINE AND NEUTER, 
WITH THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 



N. ber SJialer, the painter; 
G. be3 9ftalet3, the painter's ; 
D. bem SSJkter, to the painter ; 
A. ben SJkler, the painter. 



bctS Sifen, the iron; 
be$ &ifen3, of the iron (L. 9) ; 
bem Sifen, to or for the iron ; 
bag Sifen, the iron. 



#a£ett <Ste be3 5JkIer3 SBud)? Have yon the painter's book? 

Sfteut, tdj tyctBe be$ ©d)itler3 23u$. No, I have the scholar's book. 

£)ct$ Seber ge^ort bem Sattter. The eather belongs to the saddler 

The arti lie agrees with its noun in ger ler, case ana number. 



30 VERBS CONSTRUED WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 



VERBS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 

5 When the dative and accusative are both governed by 
the same verb, the dative comes first ; except that the accusative, 
if it be a personal pronoun, precedes the dative. 



©er Sreunb $erfr>rid)t bem Sattler ba$ 

(Mb. 
SBarum gteBt er e$ htm Sdjneiber? 
<&t mafyt btm £etyrer ein $ult. 



8ci|>tel.c* 

©aS SBerl luBt ben SWciflcr* 

©a$ tftnb $at be<3 <3d)uler3 SBIeijtift. 
2Ber ffitdt bem 23dcfer ben fRing ? 
SBarum tabeln Sie ben ©filler? 
©e$ortba<3 £nd) bem SBefcer? 
$erfauft er e3 bem <2>cf)neiber ? 



The friend promises (to) the saddler 

the money. 
Why does he give it to the tailor 
He is making (for) the teacher 

desk. 

Examples. 

The work praises the master. 
The child has the scholar's pencil. 
Who sends the baker the ring ? 
Why do you blame the scholar ? 
Does the cloth belong to the weaver! 
Does he sell it to the tailor? 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



©er Sail, the ball; 

©er SBletjiift, the pencil; 

©er 33rtef, the letter; 

©er 33ruber, the brother; 

©er ©eiM, the cover ; 

®eben, to give; (L. 41. 6.) 
©ef)5'ren, to belong (L. 2. VL 4) ; 

©er ©lafer, the glazier; 

©er £ut, the hat ; 

©er i^eftner, the waiter; 

Exercise 12. 



©er $cann, the man ; 
©a3 9>ferb, the horse ; 
©er diti%, the rice ; 
©er SRincj, the ring ; 

<3d)icfen, to send; 
©er <Sta$I, the steel; 
©er ©totf, the cane; 
©er <5tit§l, the chair; 
©er Stfdfj, the table; 
©er SBet^en, the wheat. 

SlufgaBe 12. 



!♦ £)a$ $inb gtebt bem @d)iiter ben SalL 2. 23er tterfauft bent 
©lafer ben £>ecfet, ben (Stutji unb ba^ gifen ? 3. ©er DecM ge* 
t)Brt bem ©lafer, ber SRing ge^ort bem ©fitter, unb ber Sletftift ge* 
t;ort bem ^ellner. 4* £e* SacferS Sruber lauft ^n £ut, ben @tod 
ben ©tuljl unb ben £t(d>. 5. Sefen @te be$ S^ger^ Srief i 6 
91 ein, id) gete bem 3ager ben 53rtef. 7. SSerfauft ber 9ftann Den 
SFtet§ unb ben SEctjcn? 8. Sr tterfauft tern Saner ben SFtetg unb 
fd)icft bem SDiMer ben SBeijen* 9. 3Barum tyammcrt ber @d)mieb 
ba« (Sifen nnb ben @ta$l? 10. @cX)brt fcaS ®elb bem Saner ober 
bem gtetfdjer? 11. S* gel)ert bem Saner, unb bas $[etb getyihri 



GENITIVE RENDERED BY THE OBJECTIVE. 31 

bem glcijifcet. 12. 3Bct3 fagifcas Mni fcem ©attler? 13. SEarum 
[Sjicft ber Saucr tern 9Mfler ten SBetaen? 14. £er SRitUer fdjtdt 
tern Saner bag SSJle&I, unt) ber Sauer acrfauft e3 bent JMner. 15* 
IBer wfauft Uem ©ibuler ben 33Ietjttft unb bag papier? 

Exercise 13, SlufgaBe 13. 

1. Who sells the saddler the iron and the steel ? 2. Has 
the glazier's brother the waiter's letter 1 3. No, the waiter has 
the letter. 4. The child has the scholar's pencil and ring. 5. 
The cover belongs to the glazier, the hat belongs to the scholar. 
6. The man sells the hunter the horse and the dog. 7. The 
child gives the scholar the paper and the pencil, 8. What 
does the peasant send to the miller ] 9. Who sends the miller 
the grain and the money 1 10. The peasant sells the miller 
the wheat, and the miller sends the waiter the flour. 11. The 
rice belongs to the waiter, the wheat belongs to the peasant, 
the table belongs to the teacher, and the chair belongs to the 
scholar. 12. Who hammers the steel and the iron ? 13. Why- 
does the cook buy the tea, the coffee, the oil, the pepper, the 
salt and the vinegar ? 14. Does the cane belong to the saddler 
or to the tailor ? 15. Is the smith buying the iron or the steel 1 



■■-' ^ * 9 ■ $ ■■ ft » ^- 



LESSON IX. Section IX. 

GENITIVE RENDERED BY THE OBJECTIVE. 

1. The genitive more commonly follows its governing 
noun, and may be rendered either by our possessive, or by the 
objective governed by of : 

§>at>en €ne ba£ S3itdj be£ Have you the book of Have you the scholar's 
Sd)iiler3? the scholar? book? 

NOUNS ADDING 1 3 ZN THE GENITIVE. 

2. Nouns of the old declension, not ending in e, et, en, et, 
d) en and t etn , add e g in the genitive and e in the dative ; the 
accusative remaining like the nominative (compare L. 8. 3.) : 
£Ber fjat be3 $od)e$ SBrob ? Who has the cook's bread ? 

$8&$ aerfaufen <Sie bem £*$€? What do ycu sill to the cook! 



02 LESSON IX. 

Semanb serfcmft bem Sdjmiebe ben Somebody is soiling the smith the 

©ta$l unb ba$ (Sifett* steel and the iron. 

2>er @$mteb giefct km JHnbe b&3 The smith gives the child the mo- 

®elb unb ba$ 25n>b. ney and the bread. 

8. Note, however, that nouns of this class sometimes drop the 
t of the genitive, and* occasionally, that of the dative (§ 13. 
3. p. 274) : 

9Tuf be$ #ogt<3 ($ogte3) ©e$etfj. At the bailiff's command. 

SBtt §ctt be£ $aufmantt$ $fexb ? Who has the merchant's horse ? 



93 eif^iele* 

^)er gifdjer serfcmft bem $9<$e hm 

%ol unb ben £a<§#4 
SBer fyat ben SBogen* ben 3>feil, unJfc ben 

©totf be$ tfinbes ? 
Ser gieBt bem 3)ferbe ba3 £eu? 
£)a$ $inb gieBt bem Sdjaafe ba3 |>eu. 
£>ex SBruber be3 j?fnbt$ »eifa«$ btm 

Wtamt ben 9Mng unb ben <5to<f. 
©eprt biefeS SBrett bem Saufmanne 

sber bem <S$mtebe ? 
SRetn, e$ ge$8ri bem Simmermanne. 



Examples. 

The fisherman sells the cook th© 

eel and the salmon. 
Who has the bow, the arrow and 

the cane of the child ? 
Who gives the horse the hay t 
The child gives the sheep the hay. 
The brother of the child sells the 

man the ring and the cane. 
Does this board belong to the 

merchant or to the smith ? 
No, it belongs to the carpenter. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



£>et Wat? the eel; 
£)er Sknm, the tree; 
©et SBocjen, the bow ; 
£)a3 23rett, the board; 
T)a$ gctfj/ the cask, barrel ; 
5Der gifdjer, the fisherman ; 
T>a$ ©arn, the yarn ; 
<Da$ <&ra$, the grass; 
£>Ct3 $m, the hay; 
2) a$ §u$n, the fowl ; 
£>er tall, the lime ; 



®er ^anfmcmn, the merchant; 
£)er $iifer, the cooper; 
£>ct3 £upfer, the copper ; 
£)er $ felt the arrow; 
£>er (Battel, the saddle; 
£>er .©ofm, * ne son J 
£>er <Spctten, the spade; 

(Spieien, to play; 

^erfprec^en (L. 7.) to promise 
£>er 2BaIb, the forest; 
DaS £inn, the tin. 



Exercise 14. 



SufgaBe 14. 



1* SSetfpri^t ber gtfefyer bem Jtoefye ben lal? 2. ©e^en ©ieben 
SCatb? 3. Serfauft be* Scmer bem Pilfer bm Scmm? 4. 3a, 
unb ber $iifer serfcmft bem Gutter bas gap. 5. ®e$Brt ber Sogen 
tern 9Katme? 6. £er SBogcn geI>ort bem SRanne, unb ber 3>fei( &e* 



£tefer and ^tncv — lesson x. 33 

§5tt bem jttnte. T* SJJer serfauft tern @$miebe ba3 3^n uni> bad 
$upfer? 8* ©ducft ber Saltier bem 9Jknne ben ©attel? 9* 2Ber 
tterfcmft rem jtaufmamt bag ®am, ba3 Jpen unt> ben $aff ? l(h 
©e^ort ba^ SBrett bem 23vu£er be^ ©djmtefces? 11, SBer fdjidt bem 
@d)iniebe ben ©paten? 12. (M)5rt fca$ ®ra3 bem ©Amtebe? 
13. 23er!anft ber ^od).bem ^inbe fcas £u$rt ? 14. 9Wn, ba^ $ini> 
tterfaitft e£ kern j?o$e. 15. £er ^anfmann t)at fcas Sifen bed 
©dnniefces imb bad ©itter bed ©oltfd)mtebed. 16. £ae ^inb fpielt 
unb ber ©djman ffiegt. 

Exercise 15. SlufgaBe 15* 

1. Who sells the merchant the tin and the copper ? 2. The 
copper belongs to the merchant, he sells it to the smith. 6. 
Who sells the cook the eel and the fowl % 4. Who promises 
the child the bow and the arrow % 5. Does the peasant sell 
the merchant the forest % 6. No ? he c?e!ls the cooper the tree. 
7. The peasant has the spade of the fisherman. 8. Who sells 
the man the lime, the cask and the board % 9. The brother of 
the cook sends the smith the bread, the meat and the flour. 
10. The brother of the miller has the horse and the saddle of 
the smith. 11. The child gives the horse and the sheep the 
hay. 12. Does the cooper or the miller buy the yarn of the 
peasant? 13. The brother of the merchant buys it. 14. Who 
sells the smith the iron and the steel % 15. Who sells the 
goldsmith the silver? 16. Who is playing, and what is flying? 



LESSON X. faction X. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS SMefet AND %ttlZV<. 

1. liefer (this,) refers to the nearer, and jener (that,) to the 
more remote of two objects. When not contrasted with jener, 
however, biefer may often be rendered by that : 

liefer $ctffee ift kffer aid icner. This coffee is better than that. 

!Dtefe$ S3rob i]t fceffer aU jetted This bread is better than that. 

2Bie alt ijl MefeS 9)ferb ? How old is that horse ? 

2* 



84 



LESSON X. 



2. Dtefer may often be rendered by the latter and Jener by 

the former : 

3$ femte ben ^attfmarm unb ben 2Irjt; I know the merchant and the rAy- 
btefer t]l reid), jener ijr arm* sician ; the latter is rich, the 

former is poor. 

3. For the word one after a pronoun or adjective no corres- 
ponding word is employed in German : 

£)tefer £tfdj gefjort bem ©djitler unb This table belongs to the scholar 

jener bem Setter* and that (one) to the teacher. 

Sener ijt alt, biefer ijt neu* That one is old, this one is new. 



4. DECLENSION OF ^Dtefet COMPARED WITH ARTICLE 3Det. 

Jfasc. Neut. (Lesson VIII.) 

N, bte[-er, bief-e3, this; (N. ber, bas)* 

G. itef-eS, bief-eS, of this; (G. be3, be*)* 

D. bief-em, btef-em, to or for this; (D. bem, bem)* 

A. bief-en, bie[-e3, thi«; (A. ten, $a$). 

Like biefer are declined the following indefinite numerals and 
adjective pronouns, which, like the definite article, have a dis- 
tinct form for each gender (the characteristic of the nominative 
masculine being t, and that of the neuter s) : 



Masc. Neut. 

alter, aUeS, all (§53. 3.); 
eintger, eintgeS, some ; 
etttd)er, etlid)e3, some ; 
Jeter, jeDeS, every; 



Masc. Neut. 
jener, j;ene3, that ; 
member, mcmd)e3, many a; 
foldjer, foldjeg, such ; 
welder, tt>elci;e3, which, what. 



5. ©ettt and 93 e r g e f f en in the present tense singular. 



id) Bin, I am ; 
@ie finb, you are ; 
er tft, he is. 



id) fcergeffe, I forget ; 
©te sergeffen, you forget; 
er fcergifjt, he forgets. 

18 e i f p i e I e. Examples. 

liefer Sftamt ijt reidj, jener tft arm* This man is rich, that one is poor. 

£)er grilling U nb ctttcft ber §er£jt f)at The spring and also the autumn has 

fettte grettben, biefer fcringt griidjte, its pleasures, the latter bringa 

jener SBlumem fruits, the former flowers. 



©em and SBtffen in the present tense singular. 35 



Dtefer SKann if! «to Water. 

S$ Bin arm ; a£er tdj Bin uifricberu 

S<$ left biefert 23rief. 



That man is a painter. 

I am poor, but I am contented. 

1 am reading (L. V. 2.) this letter. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



IHIIer* all (see decl. Mefer); 
Sfrmi* poor; 

l)iefer, this (see 1.); 
feer ©d'rtncr, the gardener; 
SDfr ©aul, the horse, nag; 

®rojfr large; 

®Utr good ; 

§art, hard; 
Da^ $au§t the house ; 

Seber, every; 

Setter, that; 
Da« £inb, the child ; 

Exercise 16. 



3ftand)er, many a ; 

9?tc()t, not; 

ffteidj» rich ; 

©etn, to b@ (infinitive L, X. 5% 
^er ©dmeiber, the tailor; 

(Bd)5rt, beautiful ; 

Gold)er, such ; 
l Ber Bater, the father ; 
. 5Ba§r, true; 

SMcfyer, which, what; 

Stiffen, to know (p. 358.) 

f ufgafce 16. 



1. Xtefer SKtitfer {ft ber ©otytt fencs 3Bauer3. 2. Setter SBauet 
tfl bet Setter biefes Saueri* 3. 3ener ®wl ge^Brt }enem SDWifler. 
4. ©eljen ©ie Diefen ©arten nnt> Jetted &au3 ? 5. Sitter ©td)l ifl 
Ijart* 6. S^tcfet afie3 Stfen ifl gut. 7. £at {eber ©djmleb fo-ldjflt 
©td)l ttttt) folded gifert ? 8. Sftidbt jeber £urib tft gro£. 9. Sttan* 
d)er Warm tft arm. 10. Lauren ©te biefert Sting cter jenen? 
11. SCarum faufen ©ie jenen Sting imb nidjt biefen? 12. SBtU 
e&em ©djneifrer fcfctden ©ie biefeS Judj ? 13. SMdjeS £ud) fdjitfett 
©ie biefem ©djnciber ? 14. 2Bas biefer SRamt fagt tft wahv. 15, 
?iefl ber Seljrer biefen 33rief ober ietten? 16. 9Ucfet jeber Sftann iji 
reidb, nidjt Jeb*$ ®u$ ifl gut. IT. SBiffen ©ie teas biefer Oartner 
t>erfprid)t btefem $inbe? 18. ©older ©ta$l t[t ni$t gut. 19* 
3jl folded papier fdiBn? 20* 2Beld)em ©attler fcerfauft biefer 
Wann btefes Sebet ? 21. SBaS sergtpt er ? 



Exercise IT. SlufgaBe IT. 

1. Which paper has this scholar? 2. lie has the paper ol 
that child. 3. Which pencil has this child ? 4> It has the pen. 
cil of that scholar. 5, To which teachei does this man send the 
book? 6. Which steel and which iron does this smith buy? 
T. Is every house large and good ? 8. Is every horse beautiful ? 
D. What tree is large? 10. What tree do you see? 11. Has 



36 lEssosr xi. 

every miller such wheat and such Hour? 12. Is not many a 
man rich? IS. Is all iron hard'? 14. Is all steel hard and 
good? 15. Does this garden belong to this gardener, or to 
that miller? 16. Is the father of this scholar reading the book 
of the smith? It. Which tailor is poor, this one or that one? 
18. Who is rich ? 1 9. Who is singing ? (L. V. 2.) 20. That 
child says you have the ball, is it true ? 21. That tree is large 
and beautiful. 22. That tree is falling. 



LESSON XI. Cation XI. 

DATIVE WITH PREPOSITIONS. 

1. The dative is often preceded by prepositions, and thea 
answers to our objective : 

&r fommt an$ bem §aufe. He is coming out of the house. 

3)er Wtam ift in bem §aufe. The man is in the house. 

£)o£ $ittb ftrielt mil bem £imbc* The child is playing with the dog. 

25er £8aum (left W bem £a»f{* The tree stands before the house. 

DATIVE WITH VERBS OF MOTION. 

2. After verbs denoting direction toward^ j u must be placed 
before the name of & person, and nad), before the name of a 
place or country ; ju and nad) being both rendered by to : 

(£r getyt $u bem 9tmtmatm (§ 13. $}♦ He goes to the magistrate. 
&r &e§t natf) bem ©orfe* He goes to the village. 

3. "Where in English the preposition may be omitted, it is 

not usually employed in German : 

j I send the teacher the book. 
■3* Wide Wm Sefrer bat »!<*♦ j j gend the book to the teaclier . 

«- » rx 4. *»x -^ is. a ru.Yk i He gives the tailor the money. 

(He gives the money to the tailor, 
XS$ f$ide bft* fltnb &u bem ge$m* I send the child to the teacher. 
£)a$ $inb ge^t §u bem Sdmeiber. The child goes to the tailor. 

4. 0£ when denoting relation (instead of possession L. 9. 1.% 
must be expressed in German by a corresponding preposition . 
3$ foredje » o n bem ©attner, I am speaking o/ the gaidener. 

(not, \$ fyredje be£ ®foteer$). (Compare Lesson 9. 1.) 



POSITION OF PREPOSITIONS. 



37 



POSITION OF PREPOSITIONS. 

5. Prepositions precede the words which they govern, and 
can not, as in English, stand at the end of a sentence : 

What pencil is he writ- 
ing with ? 

Which house is he in ? 

Do you know which 
book he speaks of ? 



Vtit »el$em SMeijiift 

fcfyret&t er? 
fm tiKlcftem £>au'e ijl er ? 
tBt(fett©te ttottttjelcfyem 

Sudje er fpricfyt? 



With what pencil is 

he writing? 
In which house is he? 
Do you know of which 

book he speaks ? 



Seifpiele* 

©er ©djmieb ge$t p ttm ©Ictfer. 
SBaS jtyictt erbemOHafer? 
2Ber fat ba$ Sud) be£ £e!?rer$? 
SBaS fagen ©ie son bem Setter? 
SBtffen ©tc in weld) em $aufe bet ®la^ 

fer tx)cl)nt ? 
£okn ©ie ben <S$$n be3 $lMer£ ? 



Examples. 

The smith goes to the glazier. 
What does he send the glazier ? 
Who has the book of the teacher ? 
What do you say of the teacher ? 
Do you know which house ths 

glazier lives in ? 
Do you praise the miller's son? 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



©er Slbler, the eagle, 

3£13, than, as; 
©er 2lmBog, the anvil; 
©er Sfrtfer, the anchor; 
©er 2lpfet, the apple; 

& f ri>ei'ten, to work; 
©er 9lrki'ier, the laborer; 
©er SIrnt, the arm; 
©er STrjt/ the physician; 
©Ct3 2ntge, the eye; 

8fo3, out of; 



@e!jen, to go; 
©er §<mtg, the honey; 

Jtommen, to come; 
©ct§ £id)i, the candle ; 

Sftetyr, more; 

3JUt, with; 

iftadj, to, after; 

©predjen, to speak; (L. VIL) 

@ef)r, very; 

g^ott, of, from; 

£u, to (see 2.). 



Exercise 18. 



SufgaBe 18. 



I. $ommt her S^ger ait* tern ipaufe, ober ge^t er nad) tern 
&aufe? 2* 2Ber fdpetft tne$r ate ber SHrgt? 3. 2Bann grt)en @ie 
na$ bem SSafoe? 4. 28a<3 fagt ber 33auer 'oon biefem Steele ? 5. 
SBamt gef)t ba* $mb gu bem SIrktter unb matm nac^ bem Storfe? 
6* £as ^tnb ge^t n>eber git bem Slrtetter nod) na$ bem SBafre* 
7. 3u »elftem Strate geljt ber ©iafer? 8. 33arum fatft ber 8tpfel 
son Hm Scmme ? 9. SStjJen @ie son melcfyem 2lmbo§ ber ©c^mteb 
fpricbt ? 10. 2Ga$ fagt ber ©lafer son bem Slnfer ? 11. Slrfceitet 



88 L3SSS0K Xh 

ber ©filler mil cem Sauer? 12. T)er 2trbeiter arBettet mit Jem 
23auer. 13. Dad Slugc fce$ Slblers ift fd)im. 14. 2Ba3 fagen @ic 
von bem #ontg ? 15, 2 er Slrm btefes @-d}miebe$ ift gto$. 16. 
3>r 33rut>er fctefes 35auer3 ift arm. It. 3JUt toetcfyem SleljHfte 
fdjreibt fcer 2eJjrer? 18. SBijfen @ie nttf weldjem SBIeiftifte er 
fArcttt? 

Exercise 19. SKttfga&e 19. 

1. Are you writing the letter with the pencil of the scholar ? 
2. What does the child say of the honey ? B. Has this laborer 
more grain than flour, and more copper than gold ? 4. Do 
you know what pencil the man is writing with? 5. Yes, I 
know which one he is writing with, 6. Why is the hunter 
coming out of the forest, and why is the child coming out of 
the house? 7. When does the laborer go to the forest? 8. 
When do you go to the teacher? 9. What does he say of the 
eagle ? 10. Is the eye of the eagle large ? 11. Does the apple 
fall from the tree? 12, The miller is coming from the house 
of the goldsmith, and the child is going to the house of the mil 
ler. 13. Do you see that anchor? 14. With which smith 
does the miller work ? 15. The arm of the smith is large. 
16. The brother of the baker is poor. 17. Which forest is the 
physician going to ? 18. He is going neither to this one, nor 
to that one (L. X. 3>). 



^a#--»» ^ ••*-^»fe- 



LESSON XII. fcection XII. 

Indefinite article. 

1. The form of the indefinite article is less varied than that 
of the definite ; having for its accusative masculine only, a eha& 
acteristic ending : 

Nom. masculine, eitt, a ; Nom. neuter, tin, a. 
Ace. masculine, etn-en 7 a ; Ace, neuter, ein p a, 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS LESSON XII. 39 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

2. The possessive pronouns constitute in German a distinct 
class of words, answering in signification to the possessive case 
of our personal pronouns. Like the article, they are subject 
to inflection, and agree in gender, number and case with their 
nouns : 

3$ fyxfce meitt^apiermtb metttettSBalL I have my paper and my ball. 

$at 3§r greunb fca$ 33udj nteitteS $et* Has your friend the book of my 

terS *>ber 3l?re§ £)nfel$? cousin, or of your uncle? 

^djndbett Sie 3§r iBrob mit meinem Are you cutting your bread with 

SKeficr? my knife? 

3. The indefinite article and the possessive pronouns (unlike 
btefer, L. X. 4.) add by inflection, except in the nom. and ace. 
neuter, another syllable to the form of the nominative : 

SDer (£o$tt unfer-ea SftadjBctrS iff tin The son of our neighbor is a friend 
greunb biefeS 3ager3* of this hunter. 



4. DECLENSION OF INDEF. ARTICLE COMPARED WITH DEFINITE* 

Masc. NeuU (Lesson VIII. 3.) 

N. ein, em, a; (N. ber, bctS*) 

G. ein-e$, ein-e3, of a; (G. be£, be3.) 

D. ein-em, em-em, to or for a ; (D. bem, bem.) 

A. ein-en, etn, a; (A. ben, bas.) 

Like the indefinite article ein, are • declined : 
tnetn, my ; (ein, his, its ; unfet, our • tt)r, their ; 
bein, thy; tfjr, her; ener, your; fetn, no. 

5. When a word which ends in el, en, er, takes an additional 
syllable beginning with e, one e is often dropped : 

unf-ers, for unfer-e* j unf-erm, for unfer-em j etc. 

WORDS IN APPOSITION. 

6. Words in apposition must agree in case (§ 133) : 

Unfer Sfaufyfcctr, ber battler, $at ba$ Our neighbor, the saddler, has th® 
§)ferb f elites S'reunbe^ be$ ©erftere. horse of his friend, the tanner* 



40 



LESSON XII. 



(£r (je$t mtt feinem better, bem $Mer, 
na<§ 9)ari3. 



He is going with his cousin, the 
painter, to Paris. 



33eifpiele. 

S$r greunb $at 3$te« Srtef unb 3$r 
SBudj 3§rem Sruber gefd)lcft. 

SBa3 $at fetn Sreunb in feinem Coffer? 

3d) §afce fern (Sifett nnb fetnen <©ta§l. 

SKettt SLifc6) |M)t in meinem Simmer. 

£>er SBaum fte^t jn>tfd)en unferm £>aufe 
nnb Sljrem ©arten. 



Examples. 

Your friend has sent your letter 
and your book to your brother. 

What has his friend in his trunk ? 

I have no iron and no steel. 

My table is standing in my room. 

The tree stands between our house 
and your garden. 



£>a3 $inb ^i fetn 5SttejTer unb feinen The child has its knife and its ball 
SBall in feinem $utt. in its hat. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



9Tn, at; 

5luf, on; 

2)etttt (conj unction j, for; 

<£fje (adverb), ere, before; 

(£ttt (masc. or neut), a, an; 
£)ct3 gener, the fire; 
£)er greunb, the friend; 
£)er jammer, the hammer; 

Winter, behind; 

31)r (masc. or neut), your; 

3n, in, into; 

$em (m. or n.\ not any, no; 



£ie$en, to lie; 

Winn (masc. or neut.), my ; 
2>er SDfcitf the stove ; 

(5ein (masc. ov neut), his, its; 

@ti?en, to sit; 

(Steven, to stand; 

Ueber, over; 

Unfer (masc. or neut.), our; 

Unter, under, among; 

Slot (preposition), before; 
£>ct3 Btmmer, the room ; 

Swiften, between. 



Exercise 20. 



3Iufga6e 20. 



1. 9JMn Sruber $at eltt $utt, etnen £tfd) nnb einen @tu$l in 
feinem 3iwmer. 2. Sr ftj3t an feinem $ntte, nnb fein Sleiftift 
liegt auf bem £ifd)e. 3. ipafen @ie ein gener in 3^em 3immer? 
4. 9tein, benn id) IjaBe fetnen Dfen in meinem ftxmmtx. 5. £er 
©djmieb l)at fetnen jammer nnb fein (Eifen. 6. &3 ift ber grennb 
feinem 9tad)6ar$, be3 ©attlers. 7. Unfer grennb l)at nnfern £nnb* 
8. 3ft ker (So^it unfres 9tad$ar$ in unfrcm ©arten? 9. (&tefyn 
@ie ttor 3^rcnt £aufe e$e @ie ffngen ? 10. <&tti)t ber S5aum 3toi* 
fd)en S^em ©arten nnb unferm £aufe ? 11. 9fteln 33n$ liegt un* 
ter 3^em $nlte. 12. £)a3 Stotmer ^ ©lafers ift iifier bem 3i m * 
mer be* ®olDfc()miei>e3. 13. ©tet)t ber £>nnb Winter 3t)rem 9)ulte? 
14. £at ba$ $inb fein 93ud} nnb feinen SBIeijlift? 15. 2efen @ie 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 41 

in 3^tcnt ofccr in meinem 33u$e? 16, Dtefer "Mann ift arm, er 
$at tvefcer (Mt> nod) 33ro& 

Exercise 21, SlufgaBe 21. 

1. Is your friend sitting no his table? 2. No, he is sitting 
at my table. 3. Why have you a stove in your room 1 4. 
I have no stove in my room. 5. Does your book lie under 
your table? 6. No, it lies on my desk. 7. Is your friend in 
his garden ? 8. No, he is in our house. 9. Your hammer is 
lying between the stove and the table. 10. The scholar's 
room is over the room of his father. 11. Have you no 
fire in your room ? 12. I have no fire in my room, for I have 
no stove. 13. Is the friend of your teacher sitting behind 
your desk ? 14. No, he is standing before his house ; he writes 
before he reads. 15. Our friend, the miller, has our horse and 
our dog in his garden. 16. The son of the peasant has your 
anvil and your iron. 



LESSON XIII. Cection XIII. 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. The interrogative pronouns are 

28er, who ; fteldjer, which, what ; 

2Ba3, what; toa$ fitr, (§ 66.) what kind of. 

In this connection, fur may precede any of the cases : 
2Bct3 fur eitt Wlann t ft er ? What kind of a man is he ? 

Sfttt m$ fur Zintt fcfymfcen <£te? With what kind of ink do you write? 
3tt Voa$ fitr etttem §aufe ttctynett <Ste ? In what kind of a house do you live § 

2. Between ftctS and fitr other words are sometimes intro- 
duced : 

SBctS $ctt er berm fur timber ttor un* What (kind of) miracles, then, has 
fern ^Tttgen get^cm? — ©♦ he performed before our eyes ? 

3. SBeldjet and foctS fur are often employed in exclamations, 
in which use fteldjer usually drops the last syllable : 

2Btf*$ eitt §elb ! What a hero i 



42 • LESSON XIII. 

SBct$ $at intfer §er& fitr ettte fettfame What a singular astronomy has our 

Stftronomt'e gelernt ! heart learned! 

4. The form ft eld) is, also, employed in questions, when the 
succeeding word is under special emphasis : 

SBeld) S'cfyicffal aBer nirb ba$ (Sure "What fate though will your* he! 
fcitt? (be yours?) 

5. When not followed by a noun or an adjective, ettt is ren- 
dered a one, and declined like btefer (L. X. 4.) : 

2Ba3 fitr ettt 2>ogel t|r ber Slbler, uttb What kind of a bird is the eagle, 
tt>a$ fur enter tjr ber £aMd)t? and what kind of a one is the 

hawk? 

6. 2Ba£ is sometimes used in the sense of foarum: 

2Ba§ tydltjt £)u mernett aufge^okttett Why (what) holdest thou my up- 
§lrm ? lifted arm ? 

DECLENSION OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS S3 e X AND 2C Ct $♦ 

N. tter? who? foctf? what? 

G. toeffen? whose? tt?eg? of what? 

D. ft) em ? to or for whom ? (dative wanting.) 

A. to en? whom? ttdS ? what? 

T. The genitive of $a3 seldom occurs except in compounds: 

f£Be$tte$ett $al er e3 Qeu)cm ? On account of what (why) has he 

done it ? 

8. Instead of toa$, construed with prepositions, the adverb 
tt)D (where) combined with them, is employed : 

2Bcmtt (not mtt toa$) fdjretfct er ? With what (wherewith) is he writ- 

ing? 
SBoaon (not son roaS) ftrtdjt er ? Of what (whereof) does he speak ? 

SBorttt (§ 103. 2.) |at er gefep? In what (wherein) has he failed? 

23etfptele* Examples. 

UBiffeit (Bit toa§ fur em Zfytx ba$ Do you know what kind of an ani- 
gtu§£ferb ifr, uttb tit &a% fitr etnem mal the hippopotamus is, and in 
£cmbe e<3 lefct? what kind of a country it lives.' 

Sn roeffen §cu:fe ttofjttett <&k ? In whose house do you live ? 

SBottOJt fprtdjt ber SRaurer? What is the mason speaking of? 



declension of SBer and 2Bct3. 43 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$)a$ Sedfcitr the basin; 

£>er GtiSbax, the white bear: 

8*aul, idle, lazy, indolent; 
£)er Coffer, the trunk ; 
£>er $orb, the basket; 
2)a3 Jhofobi'l, the crocodile ; 
2)a3 Sartb, the country; 

£eben, to live ; 

£iektt, to love; 

£okn, to praise; 



SDtodjeitf to make, do ; 
£ct$ SWcjfcr, the knife ; 
2)er ®d)ul> the shoe ; 
£)er ©chnl^macfyer, the shoemaker; 
£)er (Strang, the ostrich; 
£)er £tger, the tiger; 
2)er Uixterfc^teb, the difference; 
£)er SSogel, the bird, fowl ; 
SBo^nen, to reside, live ; 
'SBoSOtt/ see 8. . 



Exercise 22. 31 uf gate 22. 

1. SBer loBt ben ©diiter, nnb men loBt ber ©djiiler? 2. SDeffen 
ffiud) tefen @te? 3. SBem fdjretBen @ie einen Srief ? 4. 2Bij[en 
@ie meffen SDIeffer ber ©djirijmadjer Ijat? 5. 35a3 fur etn SDieffer 
$at er ? 6. 2Ba3 fur etn 9ftann $at mem SDtejjcr ? ?♦ Slit meffen 
SBletjttft fdretBen @ie ^en SBrtef ? 8* SSftit mctS fur einem SBIeifHftc 
unb auf ma3 fiir papier fdjreiBt ber M)ret ? 9. 3*t ^^ fut einem 
Sanbe leBt berSi^Bdr? 10.3** ma3 fiir einem leBt ber £tger? 
11. 3n meld;em 2 ante teBtber SisBar? 12. SBtffen Stein meld)em 
Sanbe bag ^rofobil leBt ? 13. 2Ba$ lefen @te ? 14. 2Bas fiir et* 
nen @d)nfj macfet fcer @d}ntjmad)er ? 15. 2Bem fdjidt ber ©dmeiber 
fca$ Seden? 16. 3n meffen £aufe motjnen @ie? 17. 2BaS fiir 
etn SSogel ift ber ©tranjjj ? 18. SBtffen <Sie ben Unterfd)tet> jnnfdjett 
"SeBen" nnb "2M)nen?" 19. SieBt ba$ $tnb ben 9Jlann? 20. 
SBejfert ^orB $at ber ©dju^madjer? 21. SBiffen @ie m$ fiir 
einen Coffer id) IjaBe ? 22. 3Son mem fpredje id), nnb meson fpred)en 
@ie? 23. 3d} fpredje son bem SRiitter ; er ift fanl. 

Exercise 23. SlufgaBe 23. 

1 . Whose horse has the tailor ? 2. With whose pencil are 
you writing'? 3. To whom does the saddler send the money? 
4. To which merchant does this anchor belong ? 5. What kind 
of an animal is the white bear ? 6. In what kind of a country 
does he live? 1. In what kind of a house does the shoei^aker 
live ? 8. Do you know what kind of a bird the ostricii is ? 
9. In what kind of a country does the tiger live? 10. What 
are you doing with my knife? 11. Why is the child laughing? 



44 ADJECTIVES — LESSON XIV. 

12. "Vvnoin does the shoemaker praise? 13. Is he making a 
shoe? 14. Who is making the captain a trunk ? 15. In what 
kind of a country does the crocodile live ? 16. On whose table 
is my book lying 1 It. Whom does the child love % 18. To 
whom is the child going % 19. To whom does the peasant send 
the basket ? 20. Of whom are you speaking? 21. Of what 
am I speaking ? 22. Whose basin has the cook ? 23. Is out 
neighbor not idle ? 



LESSON XIV. Cation XIV. 

ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives when used predicatively* undergo no change 
of form ; thus, 

Masc. £)er ©taljt i(l pt* The steel is good. 

NeuL £>a$ (Sifen ip $UU The iron is good. 

ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES. 

2. Adjectives, when used attributively* are subject to three 
modes of inflection, called the old, the new and the mixed de- 
clensions. 

3. Adjectives, when not immediately preceded by Mefer, eitt, 
or some other word of that class (L. X. 4. and L. XII. 4.) are 
inflected according to the 

OLD DECLENSION. 

Masculine. Neuter. Masc. Neut. 

N. gut-er, gut-e3, good; (N.Mef-er, fc>tef-e$*) 

G. gut-es (en),gut-es(en),ofgood; (G. btef-ed btef-eg.) 

D. gut-em, gut-em, to or for good; (D. bief-em, bief-enu) 

A. gut-en, gut-es, good. (A. bief-en, t>tef-e3.) 

* The terms predicative and attributive, which in grammar have a 
strictly conventional sense, should, by the pupil of German especially, 
be fully understood. Thus in the sentence, Qaxt-tT Stafjl ijl: gut, hard 
steel IB good ; hard is regarded as a known attribute of the steel, while 
good is that which is predicated or affirmed of it. Hence hard is attrib- 
utive % smd good predicative. 



ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATIVE FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 4fc 

4. The adjective, like the article, must agree with its noun* 

5. The genitive of the old form is now seldom used \ that of 
the new being preferred : 

£)te Sar&e guten (instead of gute$) The color of good gold is yellow, 
©olbeS ifl gel*. 

ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATIVE FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE* 



Attributive, 




Predicative. 




$art-er 


@ta$I 


ifl niifciidj* 


Hard steel is useful. 


£art-e3 


(Sifett 


ift nu^ltdj. 


Hard iron is useful. 


9?u§Itd)-er 


©tajt 


ill Jjart. 


Useful steel is hard. 


SRiifcltcH* 


(£ifen 


ift $art 


Useful iron is hard. 



6. Adjectives preceded by etoa3, toaS and nid}t$, and used 
substantively, are of the old declension, and written with a 
capital initial : 

$afcen Sie etwa§ -fteuet Have you any thing new? 

<Ste fprecfyen son etttaS 5K euam You speak of something new ? 

<£r fagt tti$t$ cBc^Iec^tc^* He says nothing bad. 

1. An adjective, when referring to a noun understood, has 
the same ending as when the noun is expressed : 

<£r $at feine$ £ttdj, t$ $a&e gro£e3* He has fine cloth, I have coarse. 
barter <Sta§l ift gut, tteidjer ift f$led)t. Hard steel is good, soft is bad. 

Give the gender of the nouns in the following examples, as 
indicated by the adjective. State also which adjectives are 
attributive, and which predicative. 

33 e i f p t e 1 e* Examples. 

SBet^er Stdjl ifl: m$t gut. Soft steel is not good. 

©ute3 SSXei ifl ttetdj. Good lead is soft. 

$at ber Waiter gutenSeijen tmb guteS Has the peasant gool wheat an6 

DB(l? good fruit? 

SBer $ctt fettled S'ttcij tmb fetnen Sammet? Who has fine cloth and fine veh et * 

©uter <Senf ifl gelb, guteS <sal§ ifl: Good mustard is yellow, good salt 

iDeig. is white. 

<£r frrtdjt mtt Bttterm £o$ne* He speaks with bitter scorn. 

(£r ruft in Mtirem #avme«. — U* He cries (or calls) in bitter sorrow 



16 FORM OF THE ADJECTIVE LESSON XIV. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



STngette^m, pleasant ; 
33Iau, blue ; 
2)a3 S3Iet, the lead; 
gan, fine; 
©el b, yellow; 
©rau, gray; 
©rob, coarse; 
©run, green ; 
fjmmer, always; 
3e£t, now ; 



£)er Mantel, the cloak; 
£)er fjto&, the coat; 

fftoti, red; 

(B&roaxi, black; 

£rocfen, dry;- 
£)a£ £ucl), the cloth : 
£)er better, the cousin; 

SBarm, warm; 

SBeijj, white; 
£)a$ Better, the weather. 



Exercise 24. SlufgaBe 24* 

1- 3ft 3^t £udj fetti ober groB ? 2. 3d) i)a6e grobe^ £ud), unb 
ber ©djneiDer $at fetnes £ud). 3. 3Dtefer Mod ift son fetnem Sut^e, 
tetter ift »on groBenu 4. £)er ©td)i ift §art, ba<3 SSlei ift tteid). 
5. Matter ©td)l ift gut, meid)e3 SSlei ift gut. 6. ®uter @ta$l ift 
$art, guteS Slei ift totify. 1. ®ute$ ®olD ift geft, guter ©tat)l ift 
ttetfj. 8. £)er ®olbfd)mieb Jjat toeipen ©tat)I unt> gelBes ®olb. 9* 
2)a3 SBetter ift Jejjt ttarm. 10. SBarmeS SCetter ift angene^m. 
11. 2lngenet)me3 SBetter ift ntdjt immer marm. 12. 33on tt>a$ fiir 
£ud) ntad)t ber ©djneiber ben SUiantel? 13. St mad)t ben 9ftantet 
*»on Blauem unb ben Sftod tton grihtem JEudje-* 14. 2Ba3 fiir 2Bet* 
ter ift angene^m? 15. $alte3, trotfette^ Setter ift angeneljm. 16. 
£>a3 2eDer be* ©attlerS ift gelB, bad Seber t>e^ ©djutjmaderS ift 
fd)»ar$* IT. 3>r ©attler Ijat gelBeS SeDer, unb ber ©d)u1jmad)er 
Ijat fdjmarjeS. 18. $abm ©ie t^eipe^ ober Blaues papier? 19. 
3d) IjaBe BlcmeS unb mein Setter $at roeifjes. 20. §at ber @d)neU 
ber graues ober rctijes Zu&j ? 21. ©r tyat tteber graues nod) rot^e^, 
er Ijat grimes, Blaues, [charges unb Brauneg. 

Exercise 25. SlufgaBe 25. 

1. The weather is warm. 2. Warm weather is pleasant, 
3. What kind of weather is always pleasant? 4. Dry weather 
is pleasant. 5. Is your cloth coarse 1 6.1 have coarse sloth, 
and my cousin has fine cloth. T. The cloth of the tailor is blue, 
the leather of the saddler is yellow. 8. The tailor has blue 
cloth, and the saddler has yellow leather. 9. Is the saddler's 
coat of blue, of green, or of black cloth ] 10. His coat is of 



NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES LESSON XV. 4*1 

black cloth, and his cloak is of gray cloth. 11. Hard lead is 
not good, good lead is not hard. 12. Is the cloth of the tailor 
blue, brown, green, red, or black 1 13. The tailor has black, 
blue, green, gray and red cloth. 14. This paper is white, and 
that is blue. 15. My cousin has blue paper, and his friend has 
white. 16. This tailor is making a coat from coarse gray cloth. 
11. That smith has good steel and good iron. 18. The iron of 
our friend, the smith, is very good. 19. With whose good 
pencil are you writing your friend a letter ? 20. From whos6 
blue cloth is the tailor making his coat % 



LESSON XV. Cation XV. 

NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives, when following btefer, or any word of that 
class,* and referring to the same noun, are of the 

NEW DECLENSION. 



Masculine. 


Neuter. 


N. bief-er 


gute; 


bief-e3 gute ; this good. 


G. bief-es 


guten; 


btef-e$ guten; of this good. 


D. btef-em 


guten ; 


btef-em guten; to or for the good. 


A. bief-en 


guten; 


bief-ee gute ; this good. 


2. FORM OF 


THE NEW DECLENSION IN THE NOMINATIVE. 


Attributive. 


Predicative. 


Met gut-e 


<5ta$t 


tft ^art. All good steel is hard. 


SlUeS gut-e 


'©if en 


ift $axL All good iron is hard. 


£>er ljart-e 


<5ta$l 


tft gut* The hard steel is good. 


£>a$ ^art-c 


(Eifen 


tft gut. The hard iron is good. 


SDtefer fdjim-e 


&cget 


tft fteig* This beautiful bird is white. 


$)iefe3 fdjim-e 


£ud) 


tft tt>et§. This beautiful cloth is white. 


Seber gut-e 


mam 


tft e^rltcfy. Every good man is honest. 



* Namely: after, ber, ehttger, etltdjer, jeber, jener? manner, folder and 
tocher, (L. X. 4. § 31. § 32). 



48 LESSON XV. 

Attributive, Predicative. 

3ebe3 pt-e Stinb ift ef)rlid). Every good child is honest. 

Setter ef rlidj-e 9ftcttm ift gut* That honest man is good. 

Sene^ eljrlid)-e ^tnb tft gut. That honest child is. good. 

Wandjtx $ut~e Wlamx tft arm. Many a good man is poor. 

$Ran<$t§ §ut-t Stinb ift arm. Many a good child is poor, 

3Md)er ftolje fKcmn ift zut? What prond man is good ? 

SMdjeS jtolje fiirfo ift gut? What proud child is good ? 

3. The final syllable of member, foldjer and metier, which, 
by its characteristic ending, denotes the gender of the noun, is 
sometimes dropped ; in which case the adjective that follows 
is inflected according to the old declension (L. XIV. 2.) : 

SJlcmd) gut-er SKatm instead of 9Jkndjer gut-e SEawu 
Sold) grofc-e$ %ud) instead of @o(d)e3 grofc-e £udj. 

4. The adjective with the article is often, for the sake of 
special emphasis, placed after the noun : 

£)a$ tsBiinbttijjr ba$ tterberMtdje. The ruinous treaty (the treaty, the 

ruinous). 

5. Adjectives denoting the material of which a thing is made, 
are formed from nouns by suffixing t f en, ertu In such case 
a, and U often take the Umlaut : 

leberrtf leathern from 2tbtx, leather; 

golbett; golden, gold (made of gold) from ®otb f gold; 

^oljern, wooden from §oI$, wood ; 

gldferUr glass (made of glass) from ®la$, glass. 

§<tt ber $0$ ben Bremen cber btn Has the cook the wooden or the 

jtetrternen £ifdj ? stone table ? 

g)er ©chiller §at ba$ fttberne fctntett* The scholar has the silver inkstand, 

fag unb id) ba<3 glafente* and I the glass one. 

S3 e i f p i e I e* Examples. 

OTe$ gute Sdjrei&papier tft glatt* All good writing-paper is smooth. 

&ct6en @ie baS rotfje ©tegettatf ? Have you the red sealing-wax? 

©etyort MefeS alte 33ferb btnx alten Does this old horse belong to the 

gleifdjer ? old butcher ? 

fjeber toirflttf; &Utt unb niifeltdje Sftenfdj Every really good and useful man 

ift fletfjtg* (human being) is diligent. 

<St\)txx Ste bct§ glcto&enbe (£i3 imb ben Do you see the glittering ice and 

mi^n^d)tteeaufiettem54ett33era,e? the white snow on yonder high 

mountain ? 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



49 



£er image SWamt fdjretfct bent alten The young man is writing the old 

£e$rer etnert SSrief. teacher a letter. 

©etjtteiflung i\t btx eii$ge £$te 2lt§e* Despair is the only genuine athe- 

i^miid. — 91* ism. 



VOCABULARY TG THE EXERCISES. 



^kr, but; 

Slit, old; 

$rtig, polite, agreeable; 

33routtr brown; 

£>umm, stupid; 

gleipigf diligent, industrious; 

Q5tnu$, enough; 

Sung, young; 

Sang, long; 
X)cr £e^rling, the apprentice; 
£)er SJtourer.r the mason; 



£)er ^etgel, the chisel ; 

£)er SEenfdj, the man, human being; 

Stfeu* new; 

©cfyctrf, sharp; 

©io£$, proud; 
£>tt £ifdjler f the cabinet-maker; 

UxtsufriebeUr discontented, dis- 
satisfied ; 

SHetfet^t, perhaps; 

Sufrtebett, contented. 



Exercise 26, 



9lttfga6e 26. 



1* 3$ $<$* bad feme £u$ unfc ber ©djneiber ^at bad grote £ud)» 

2. defer Sfitod ift son bem feinen £ud)e, jener ijl: son tern grofcen* 

3. £)er l)arte @ta1jC ifl gut, tad weidje SBIei ift gut 4. Diefer junge 
Sftaurer fauft jened junge $fertu 5. 3^3 junge $)ferb geprt bte^ 
(em jungen 9$aurer. 6* ©djretben ©ie ben (angen SSrief mtt bem 
alten SletjUfte bed armen Mjrftngd? 7. ©etyorf btefet fdjarfe 5ftete 
^et bem fleifigen 2tfdjler? 8.3ft ieber retdje SDcann jufrieben? 
9* 3ft ni&jt feber jufrtebene Wlann reid) genug ? 10. 2Md)er flei* 
fjtge SOiann ift unjnfrteben? 11. ©d)ret6t Jener arme ©filler mtt 
tern mmn SBIetjitfte? 12. SJlandjer jlolje Sftenfd) ift bumm, aBer 
mtltifyt nidjt jeber. (L. X. 3.) 13. 3ft ailed trodene SBeiter an? 
genet)m ? 14. 2Md)ed gute Seber $at ber alte ©attler, bad gefte, 
tad griine f bad Mam, ober bad fd)»arje? 15. SScrfauft ber artige 
3'taufmann bad wetfje papier, ober bad Matte? 16. 3ft aller gute 
2tatjl Ijart, unb aKed gute 33lct m\§ ? It. 3n tseldjem fatten 
?aute lefct ber Stdftar ? 18. 3ft nidjt jeber faule ©cfoiiler uttgufrte* 
ten, ober foipn ©te nidi ? 



Exercise 21. 



SIufgaBe 2?. 



1. This warm weather is very pleasant. 2.- Is that young 
cabinet-maker the good friend of the old mason? 3. Is every 

3 



50 MIXED DECLENSION Off ADJECTIVES LESSON XVI. 

proud man stupid ? 4. Is not every industrious man contented? 
5. Is not that indolent apprentice very discontented ? 6. Is 
the new chisel of the young cabinet-maker sharp ? 7. Who 
has the sharp chisel of the poor glazier ? 8. This polite scholar 
is writing the old teacher the long letter. 9. Has every con- 
tented man money enough ? 10. Has this friend, the old gla- 
zier, the green, the blue, or the red glass? 11. Is the new 
cloak of the old mason of the fine cloth, or of the coarse ? 12. 
Is the new cloth of the saddler gray, green, black, or blue? 
13. The old saddler has the blue, the gray, the green and the 
black cloth, and the tailor has the red, the white, and the yel- 
low. 14. Do you understand what that poor old man says? 
15. With what old pencil is he writing that long letter ? 16. 
Does any body know in which new house the rich miller lives ? 
11. Why does the poor peasant buy the fine cloth? 18. The 
new cloak of the old baker is very good. 



-<^» »■,$».- 



LESSON XVI. Cection XVI. 

MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives, when following mem, or a word of that class,* 
and referring to the same noun, are of the 

MIXED DECLENSION. 

Masc. Neut 

N. mein gut-er, mem gut-e3, my good ; 
G. metneS gut-en, memeS gut— en, of my good; 
D. meinem gut-en, meinem gut-en, to or for my good ; 
A s meinen gut-en, mein gut-es, my good. 

2. As mein, t>ein, etc., have the same form for each gender 
(t, e. in nom. masc. and neut.) the adjective following them 
takes the characteristic ending (L. X. 4.), thus indicating the 
gender of its noun : 

o Namely: betn# ettt, fettt, t$r, tmfer, euer and fern; (L Xir 4* § 32. 
§33). 



MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



51 



(Sin alt-er Wlam, an old man. 
Sftein neu-er £ifd), my new table. 
3§r eigen-er £ut, your own hat. 



(£itt att-e3 9)ferb, an old horse. 
(Sein neu-e$ S3ud), his new book. 
Unfer etgen— e«3 £au$, our own house. 



3. fitgett, as denoting possession, often requires with " own," 
in translation, both a preposition and a pronoun, and sometimes 
only the latter : 



§aBen Ste em eigene3 Simmer? 
3$ ftafce fein eigene$ ®elb. 
4?at er ni$t3 (£tgene<3 ? 
34 fdjriefc e3 mit etgener £anb. 
(£r fc^rie^ e3 mtt eigerter £anb. 



Have you a room of your own ? 
I have no money of my own. 
Has he nothing of his own ? 
I wrote it with my own hand. 
He wrote it with his own hand. 



ENDINGS OF THE MIXED DECLENSION NOMINATIVE. 





Attributive 




Predicative. 


din 


gut-er 


2D?ann 


iff 


e^rltdj. 


A good man is honest. 


<£in 


gut-e$ 


£inb 


iff 


e^rlidj. 


A good child is honest. 


<£etrt 


etyrli$-er 


greunb ijr 


gut. 


His honest friend is good. 


<Setn 


e$rlidj-e3 


tfinb 


iff 


gut. 


His honest child is good. 


2Mn 


fcr>on— er 


SBogel 


iff 


rr>et§. 


My beautiful bird is white. 


Sftein 


f$im-e$ 


Zu$ 


iff 


toeig. 


My beautiful cloth is white. 


S^r 


alt— er 


SBaum 


iff 


grog. 


Your old tree is large. 


3$r 


alt-ea 


£au3 


iff 


gro£. 


Your old house is large. 


ttnfer 


grog-er 


23aum 


iff 


alt. 


Our large tree is old. 


Unfer 


grog-e^ 


£au3 


iff 


alt. 


Our large house is old. 


Mn 


gut-er 


mam 


iff 


trage. 


No good man is idle. 


Mn 


gut-e3 


$tix& 


iff 


trage. 


No good child is idle. 



4. Sin is also a numeral answering to one, and is then pro- 
nounced with a stronger emphasis, and often written with a 
capital initial : 

3$ fyt&enur (£tn23ud), unb erfjatbrei. I have but one book, and he has 

three. 
<Er lernt mel)r in Sin em £age aU id) He learns more in one day than I 
in jttet. (do L. 38. 7.) in two. 

5. Sin and fein, when not followed by an adjective or a noun, 
are inflected according to the old declension (L. XIV. 3.). In 
thenom. andacc.neut. the e of the final syllable is often omitted : 



Sic tyaBen ffiti 3)ferbe, xfy Ijabe eineS 
(or einS), unb er §at f eine$ {or f eutS) . 



You have two horses, I have one, 
and he has none. 



52 LESSON XVI. 

3$ $ak j»el SHjtye, elner i(l neu, ber I have two tables, one is new and 

ctnbere alt* the other is old. 

(Etner lieBt eft tta3 etn Slnberer §aflt* Oneoftenloves what another hates. 

6. Sin is frequently preceded by the definite article and 
then follows the new declension : 

£)er (Sine tfaugrofj, ber 5lnbere if! *u (The) one is too large, the other is 

fleitt* too small. 

3d) ^ctl>e JX)eber ba$ (Sine nod) ba$ $n* I have neither the one nor the 

bere* other. 



S3 e t f p i e I e* Examples. 

Stteht neuer £eudjter fiefjt auf meinem My new candlestick is standing 

neuen £tfd)e. on my new table. 

Sty tyafce etn gute^ S3u$ unb einen $u* I have a good book and a good 

ten SBleifxift* pencil. 

3d) f)cd>t ©inert, unb metn S3ruber t)at I have one and my brother has 

brei* three. 

£)a<3 ganje SBeltalT if! em uferfofeS The whole universe is a shoreless 

Stteer. — SB* sea. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$lud), also, too; 

(Sfjrlid), honest ; 

§it6fd), pretty, handsome; 

3e, ever; 
T)a$ ^cmtee'i, the camel; 
£)er $apita'n, the captain; 

$Ieht, small, little; 
'Der $tempner, the tinman ; 
'£>er Soffelf the spoon; 

9fa$, yet, still ; 



9?ujplid), useful ; 
SReifr ripe ; 

£>ct3. <Sd)itt, the ship; 

©tarf, strong; 
£)a$ 3:§ier f the animal; 

Zobt, dead; 

£reu, faithful; 

2Bact)fam, watchful; 
£)er SBacjen, the carriage; 

Sufitd;, really. 



Exercise 28. Stufgafce 28* 

1* @te f)akn 3^r femes Stud), unb ber @d)netber $at feitt grotc^ 
Stud;. 2* SDletn alter greunb Jjat ein pbfdjeS $)fert> tmt> einen aU 
ten SBagen* 3* 2)a3 $ameet ift etn gropes, ftarfes imb fel)r ntti^ 
ltd)es £|ier* 4* £)er treue, ttadjfame £unt> unferes guten greunbe* 
tft toM* 5* 3ft unfer alter greunb nod) in unferm neuen Oarten? 
6. 3^ after S r eunt> ift in feinem fdjonen, alten ©arten* ?♦ £a6en 
@le einen guten, retfen SlpfeX? 8* 3$ fyo&t letnen reifert Styfel. 



MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 53 

9* 2Bem tierfauft ber jtattfmcmn fein grofieS neueS ©djtff? 10* 
Sr serfauft e* feinem alien greunbe, bem $apitan. 11* £at meut 
junger Setter mein BlaueS, meut ge(be3, ober mein toei£je£ papier? 

12. fir $at 3^ toeifjeS, unb fcin guter greuni) $at 3^ Mauea. 13. 
3ft fcin falter SSetter angenefym ? 14. ©cfyreiben @ie mit meinem 
alten SBXeiftifte o$er mit 3fyrem neuen? 15. $3a$ fur ein £t)ier ift 
3tjr alter £unb? 16. 28a3 fiir ein neue* ©djtff fauft ber ^apitan, 
em grofjeS ofcer ein fleineS? 11* 3ft ein ttirfltd) e^rlidjer, guter 
9JZann je faul? 18. 3ft ein fauler Sttann je felrfltdj jufriefcen? 
19. £>er ^lempner §at 3^ atted 9fteffer unb auc^ 3$ren alten Soffel* 

Exercise 29. 21 uf gate 29. 

1. Our old friend is still in our new house. 2. Your young 
friend has our old horse, and also our old carriage. 3. What 
kind of black cloth has our old friend, the merchant ? 4. He 
has no black cloth, but he has his good blue cloth. 5. Does 
the camel live in a warm or in a cold country ? 6. Is the 
camel a large, strong and useful animal ? 7. Has your good 
friend a faithful, watchful dog ? 8. Has our old friend, the cap- 
tain, a new ship, or an old one ? 9. Have you a large tree in 
your new garden ? 10. I am waiting with your new pencil; 
have you my old one? 11. Is a faithful, watchful dog a useful 
animal ? 12. Is an indolent scholar faithful, honest and useful? 

13. Has the son of the old peasant a ripe apple? 14. The cap- 
tain is selling the merchant his beautiful new ship. 15. Are 
you buying a young horse, or an old one ? 16. I am buying 
a young horse, and my old friend is selling an old one. 11. 
Has the scholar my white paper or your blue ? 18. He has 
my blue paper and your new pencil. 19. Has the child a 
small spoon J 



54 LESSON XVII. 

LESSON XVII, Union XVII. 

1. CONNECTED VIEW OF THE OLD, NEW AND MIXED DECLENSIONS* 

Masculine. 

OLD DECLENSION. NEW DECLENSION. MIXED DECLENSION. (L. XIV. 3.) 

N. gut-er; ber gut-e; mein gut-er; (btef-er.) 

G. gut-e$ (en) ; be£ gut-en; meineS gut-en; (btef-es.) 

D. gut-em; bent gut-en; nteinem gut-en; (bief-em.) 

A. gut-en ; ben gut-en ; mtinm gut-en ; (bief-em) 

Neuter. 

N. gut-e3; bct3 gut-e; mein gut-e$; (bief-eS.) 

G. gut-e3 (en) ; beS gut-en; metneS gut-en; (btef-e$.) 

D. gut-em; bem gut-en; meincm gut-en; (bief-em.) 

A. gut-e3; ba£ gut-e; mein gut-e$; (bief-e$.) 

2. WORDS REQUIRING THE ADJECTIVE IN THE NEW DECLENSION. 
Masc. Neut. Masc. Neut Masc. NeuL Masc. Neut. 

alter, aHeS; eintger, einigcS ; {ener, jeneS; foeldjer, ftelcfeeS* 
ber, ba3; ettidjer, etlicfyeS; mcmdjer, manned; (L. 15.) 
biefer, biefeS; {eSer, jebeS; folder, foldjeS; 

3. WORDS REQUIRINa THE ADJECTIVE IN THE MIXED DECLENSION. 

bent, ettt, euer, %, lein, mein, feitt, unfer. (L. 16.) 

SB e t f p t e I e ♦ Exampi jjs. 

£)er junge Sttater if! em gcf(^ic!t'er The young painter is a skillful ar« 

.ftimfHer. tist. 

©tefcr gefd) : (fte timjller ijl em guter This skillful artist is a good friend. 

Smmb. 

£er alte battler betft ben Coffer mtt The old saddler coders the trunk 

ncuem £ebcr* with new leather. 

(£r becft btn Xtffy mtt einem grimen He covers the table with a green 

£u$e. cloth. 



VIEW OF THE OLD. NEW AND MIXED DECLENSIONS. 



55 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES, 



SBofe, cross, ill-natured; 

(Etferitr iron (adjective); 
£)a$ ©efajj, the vessel; 

©lafent, glass (adjective); 

©Iatt, smooth; 

§affett, to hate ; 

£dgli$* ugly, ill-formed; 

£ol$ew, wooden; 
£)er $e(7el, the kettle; 
©er ^nopff the button, knob, 
£)er Jhtedjt, the servant, slave ; 



£)er $rug, the pitcher; 

.tup fern, copper (adjective), 
SKeffutgett, brass (adjective) ; 

©er $la$tU the nail; 

£>a$ s J>ul»er, the powder; 

£)a3 ©djtog, the lock; 

£)a3 @d)rei&papier, the writing- 
paper. 
<Be$cn, to see (lefen, L. 7.) ; 

©er SJerrdt^er, the traitor. 



Exercise 30. 



aufgaBe 30. 



1. 3$ ^^e 3^ fctncd Su^ imt> ben gropen jtnopf be3 Stavfi* 
tnannes. 2. S^ccft ber alte ©attler ben alien £i(a) mit griinem ober 
mit Blaucm £ud)e ? 3. «£r bedt ben Sifdj mit btefent gro&en griU 
nen £ud)e* 4. Unfer junger grcnnb X)at un(er junge^ §)ferb. 5* 
£er junge 9Rami fcerfauft bas ^aplict;e 9>ferb* 6* §at ber JBfe 
@d)miet> einen grof en Iftagel, ober ben fnpfernen Reflet be3 $auf* 
manned ? T, Sr tyat fein gutes Sifen, aber er tyat guten t&tafyl unb 
gute3 $upfer. 8. 3^er alte Wlaxin tjl mein alter fiacfcfear. 9* 
SBem getyori tiefes neue ©dj!o§ ? 10. 3$ $dfa fein neuee ©djlojj* 
11. £a&en ©tc toeifed papier ober Manes? 12.3$ ^aBe ba$ 
fteipe papier metnes 23rui>er3, nnD er $at mein BlaneS papier* 13* 
2Me3 gute ©AreiBpapier ift glatt, after nidjt afleS glatte papier ijt 
gut. 14. $a$t ntdjt jebcr gute SKenfd) einen 33errat^er ? 15* £>a3 
gaj3 ijt ein ^BljemeS ©efa$. 16. Xer $ej[el ift ein eiferneS, fupfer^ 
neS, ober me(fingene3 ®£fa$. 17. SBo ift ber glaferne $rug ? 18* 
Eer $ned;t fcat einen ^rug, after ntdjt etnen glajemen. 19.3$ 
fyabe guteS SPufoer, after fein gute3 33let. 



Exercise 31. SlufgaBe 31. 

1. The ill-natured tailor has his fine cloth and the pretty but- 
ton of his good friend. 2. Is all smooth writing-paper good ! 
S. Is not all good writing-paper smooth 1 4. To whom does 
this coarse powder belong? 5. The hunter has fine powder, 
but he has no coarse. 6. The iron kettle of the servant is large, 
Ids copper kettle is small. 7. Do you know where my 



LESSON XVII.. 

pHcher is ? 8. 1 see your glass pitcher on your new table 
9. Does not every honest man hate a traitor % 10. This agree- 
able child has a wooden horse and a large iron ring. 11. Have 
you a brass nail or an iron one 1 12. A cask is a large wooden 
vessel ; a kettle is an iron, a copper, ©r a brass one. 13. I 
have my white paper and the white paper of the scholar. 14. 
The young saddler is covering the old trunk with black leather. 
15. Does the ugly man cover his table with the blue cloth, 
or with the green] 16. He covers his old table w r ith a red 
cloth. It. Which new book have you? 18. 1 have no new 
book. 19. I have white p&per and he has yellow. 



LESSON XVIII lection XVIII. 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

1. The words jebermcmn, Jemcmb, man, niemcmb, nidjtS and 
Ctoct'3 or ^a^ f m& indefinite pronouns. 

2. %ti)ZTtnam is declined like a noun of the old declension ; 
jemcmfc and niemanb may be declined in the same way, or like 
an adjective of the old declension (§ 59). 9Jicm, ttid)t3 and etoc$ 
are indeclinable : 

<&k fj>red)en sootl ettt)Ct$ 9toem* You speak of something new. 

3dj fyrecfye »wi nidjiS* I do not speak of any thing. 

3. Sebermctmt answers in signification to every body : 
Sebermatm fat feme fdjtoadje Seite* Every body has his weak side. 

4. %tmatti) answers to any body, somebody, and etwetS to any 
thing, something : 

©e§ en <Sie Ssmanfo ? Bo yon see any hody(er somebody) f 

Set, id) fefe Semcmb* Yes, I see somebody. 

$oren <Sie nidjt (£tn>a3? Do you not hear something? 

3a, id) fore tttt>a§, or toa§. Yes, I hear something. 

5. Alternant) answers to nobody , not any body ; and tticf)t$ ta 
nothing, not any thing : 

ffttemanb lofrt mid), unb id) lofce 9^ie^ Nobody praises me, and I do mol 
atanberu praise any body. 



indefinite: pronouns. £ 

<Sd)tc!en <Sie Sfyrem 93 ruber ntc^t^ ? Bo you not send your brother ai # 

thing* 

6. The negative particle, ttid)t, is used with jemctttb and etoaa 
only in interrogative sentences ; hence for the twofold forma 
of expression in English, there is but one in German • 

j I do not see any body. 

( Literally : I see nobody. 
_ • e j He does not buy any thing, 

*r fcttft ttid&H. | Litera u y: He buys nothing. 

7. Sitter, (one), and fettter, (no one. nobody), are also called 
indefinite pronouns : 

Bu rein tjt ntdjt (Etrter im SRei$*=~ £♦ Not one in the kingdom is toopura, 
Reiner ttrngte ben SRcmtem ' No one knew the name. 



53 fe^e SPiemanben* 



33elj>tele. 

after t<§ fe§e 



$te* 



S$ Ijijre Semanben, 

manben. 
$aufen<Stenid)t etwa$? 
fftein, id) faufe 9Md)tS. 
|>afcett <Sie etttaS <5d)one3 ? 

Sebermann $ajjt unb veradjtet einen 
Skrrat^er. 



Examples. 

I hear somebody, but I do not se® 

any body. 
Do you not buy something ? 
No, I do not buy any thing. 
Have you any thing beautiful ? 
I have something beautiful. 
Every body hates and despises a 

traitor, 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SBefu'djen, to visit; 
£)er SSoijrer, the auger; 
£)er S3ud$&ttbler, the bookseller; 

(£ta,ennii$tg, selfish; 

(£ttoa$/ something, anything; 
£>er $ilfjrer, the guide, leader; 
£)cr $oitl t the plane; 

Sebermann, everybody; 

Semanb, anybody, somebody; 
£>er itafe, the cheese ; 



&a§ ftltibt the dress, garment; 

DaS £teb, the song; 

£>er Wtai$, the maize, Indian corn 
Sfttdjt^, nothing* not any thing , 
Sttemanb, nobody, not anybody* 
fRaufytTi, to smoke ; 

Der (5d)i4mad)er, the shoemaker j 

£)er %ala'f, the tobacco; 

£)er teller, the plate; 

£>er ttefcerfc§u$, the overshoe. 



Exercise 32. 2lufgaBe 32. 

L 2Carum hit 3efcermann fctefen (Sdjiiler? 2. Sebermann ifl 
etgeimii^ig. 3. £at 3emant> metnen UeBerf^u^? 4. 2)er @d)u^ 
madjer ntac^t Semanbem einen Uektfdjuts 5. 9ttemcmb hit ben 

3* 



58 lesson xvm. 

83ud$5uMer, unb ber 33udl)anbler lofct Sfttemanteru 6. Sematrt 
fcbicft bem $ned)te eiuert neuen £obel unt> eincn neuen 23ot)rer, T* 
©djtden ©te bem @d)neit>er t»en $nopf ? 8* SRtemanb fd)icft t)em 
©cfynetfcer ten $nopf unD ba£ $leib. 9* Sefuden ©ie SewMben ? 
10* 3d) befudjc 3emanben, a&er metn greunt> £efud)t SWtemanbcu. 
11, ^aufen ©te ntd)t etma^ ? 12, 3d) faufe nidjts, after mein Sruber 
fauft etmas, 13, Jtauft er tt\v&$ ©d)oned? 14, $r lauft ttm§ 
9liij3ltd)e$, aber ntd)t* ©d)cne3, 15* 3taudt 3?wanb t)ier Saba!? 
16- 9Mn, Alternant) raud)t, 17* Sewctnb tyat ten Setter, ben $rug 
Unt> ten $afe tmferes giit)rer3, 18* 3emanb ftrtQt, Wren ©ie bad 
£iet> ? 19. ipaffen ©te Semanben? 20. 5ftem, ic^ tyajfe Pieman* 
ben, 21. Stau\t 3emau$ ben £onig, ben 9Jtat3 unb ben $effe( ? 

Exercise 33. SUfga&e 33, 

1. Somebody is visiting our old guide. 2. Does any body 
hate the bookseller 1 3. No, and the bookseller does hot hate 
any body. 4. To whom does the peasant send the honey, the 
maize and the cheese ? 5. He does not send any body the maize^ 
but he sells somebody the honey. 6. Why does every body 
praise this child ? T. Is every body very selfish ? 8. Has not 
somebody my plane ? 9. No, nobody has your plane, but 
somebody has the auger of the servant. 10. Is any body smok- 
ing? 11. Is somebody singing a song? 12. Somebody has 
my pitcher and my plate. 13. Do you not send somebody 
the money ? 14. No, I do not send any body (I send nobody ; 
see 6) the money. 15. Does any body send the tailor the dress 
and the button? 16. The tailor sends somebody the dress, 
IT. Has the cook any body's kettle ? 18. Yes, he has one. (L.16. 5) 
19. 1 have somebody*s nail. 20. Have you any body's tobacco? 
21. Is any body every body's friend ? 



tifettft&ttfe froxoiTn Man* 5$ 

LESSON XIX, Section XIX. 

INDEFINITE PROKOT1N Wl a &♦ 

1. The pronoiin man (like the French on) indicates persons 
in a general and indefinite manner : 

SKan barf nic^t *u »M ftlaft*. J *»* " *? slc ? to ° mnch \ or 

\ People should not sleep too much. 

SSai tttnft man in ©rManfe I i ^ at t° * % ^ ^ ^l^i 

{ What does onedrink in Greenland! 

to* ,~. - r . .. i People seldom eat too little: or 

{ (Me seldom eats too little. 

~ <. hi , ^ i \)ne hates a tyrant: or 

UJton fcapt emeu X^rannen. \ . , .. _/_ , ' 

* (A tyrant is hated. 

«m r*. **. v A i* . r* i People flatter her too much: or 

man ®»<«*Mt !*t ,« ft*. j sh / is too much flatterei 

2. 53? an is used only L the nominative; the oblique cases 
feeing supplied by other woj ds : 

Wl&n ijjt urn fern teefcen p er§alten» 0™? eats in order to preserve one** 

(his) life 
<Er tptll einen nie T)6ren* He will never listen to one. 

Sflan foil fcitien Dc~dd)jleft ttie ftd) felfrjl On<? should love owe's (his) neigh* 
liefcen. bor as one's se{f (himself). 

3. ©ar (as also the more emphatic gang uni> gar), 5^/are a 
negative, answers 'to at ail, after a negative : 

<£r §at gar mdJt#* He has nothing at all. {at all nothing), 

<£$ ijl gar mdji fait* It is not at all cold. (at all not cold)» 

3$ toeig gan$ unb gar tii$te batum. I know nothing at all of it (thereof), 

8 e i f p t e 1 e, Examples. 

"©ad man ntd)t *erfte$t'# fceflfct' matt What o?«? does not understand, one 

nidjt. — @. does not possess. 

^3 ijt juroeilen tyo'tye 'SBetS^eit ut &er* It is sometimes great wisdom to 

geff'en n>aS man tteig, — ®-* forget what one knows. 

lEBetg man mx biefe -Hut 1 gc £§at $er* Is it known who committed this 

itfct'e ? bloody deed? 

Wlit ber Sett unb mtt ber ©ebulb' temt With (the) time and with (the) pa- 
man OTe3» tience one learns every thing. 

Urn gliufltdj iu fein Bebarf man nur In order to be happy c ne needs onltr 

&ufx&b'tv$tiL contentments 



60 



LESSON XIX, 



Wlan cjlanbt e£ gar ni&jtmlty eintoni** 
ge$ SQ&efnt matt ttirb, ttemt man fidj 
immer in bcm Btrfel feiner £ieMina^ 
fcegriffe tyemmbre^t,— -$. 



O^ can not at all imagine what 
monotonous being one become^ 
Hone cod stantly remains (turi* 
one ? s self) in the circie of on«? 
favorite notions. 



VOCABULARY TO TEE EXERCISES. 



§Beft$'ett> to possess ; 

gcmgen, to catch (§ 78); 

gtnben, to find; 

gitrcfyten, to fear, 

©etoi^'nlid), generally; 

©kufcen, to believe; 
f)er ihieg, the war; 

£eid)t, easily, readily; 
g)er SJlarmor, the marble; 

2Dto, (see 1.) one; 

$luT f only, but; 



£)a$ $ujHanb, (the) Rossis; 
£)er feeel)unb, the seal; 

©efyr, very, very muchj 

<8eitsn, seldoxaj 

$Hel, much; 

SBd^renb, while; 

&BaI)Tfd)ctuIid), probable; 
Der SBaEfifd), the whale; 

SBenig, little, few; 

SBimfdjen, to wish; 

SuserldjHg/ reliable. 



Exercise 34. 



lufgaBe 34, 



!♦ SBo pnbet man ben Sftatmor? 2. 2Ba$ fagt man %®n fcero 
Jtrtege in Siujpanb ? 3, 3Jlan $Brt stel son km $riege, aier nid)t$ 
3ut>erld§ige^> 4* SRan Xobt gefto^nlid) &>as3 man UeBt 5. SJtari 
leftist nid)t $a3 man nid)t $etjie|t 6* 2Jian ifi felten uttjufrieben 
ssaljrenb man artettet* *l. SRan finbet je£t me^r ©efo ate ©ttter. 
8. Das SBetter ijl gar utdji fait. 9. gr |al gar fein @efi>, unb t$ 
^aBe nur (et)r wenig. 10. 2Bo fangt man ben SSMftfd) unb ben 
©eefunb? 11, 3ft pa* fiir einem Sanbe fmbet man ben 2Bolf? 
12* 2Ba3 er 3$rem greunbe fagt ift gar nid)t m^rfd)einlid). 13:, 
Wlan glatifct Ietd)i ®a£ man &iinfd)t #ber fiirdjtet 14. 2Iuf toa§ 
fiir papier fdjrei&en @ie ben Srief ? 15. 34 ^e 9- ar &to papier, 
id) fc^retfee leinen Srief* 



Exercise 35. lufgaBe 35. 

1 . Is one not generally contented while one is workiBg ? 



2. 



In what country is the black marble found ? 3. Is nothing re^ 
liable heard from the war in Russia ? 4. In what kind of water 
is the whale found ? 5. Is the seal caught easily % 6. My 
friend has no money at aH y and I have but very little. 1. What 
is said is not at all probable^ but he believes It ? for he wishes 



PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 61 

it. 8. Does one believe easily what one fears ? 9. What is 
said of the war 1 19. Much is said of the war, but it is not be- 
lieved. 11. Our old neighbor is seen very seldom. 12. Whose 
pencil has the child % 13* It has no pencil at all, it has my 
new knife. 14. What kind of a book is the scholar reading 1 
1 5. He is reading no book at all, he is reading a letter. 



■ag^— f S ^ g l < &* 



LESSON XX. luiion XX, 

1. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 

3[u$, out, out of 5 au$er, without, out of; fcei,by > with; Mts* 
nett, within; enigegen, against, toward; gegeniikv, over against, 
opposite; gemdjj, conformable; mit, with ; na&), to, toward ; 
ttacfjfi, next to ; nebft, beside, including ; pfc, over, on, on ao 
count of; fctmmt, together with ; feit, since; %m f of, from ; $U, 
to, at, by, in; gaunter, against, contrary to« These prepositions 
all govern the dative only. 

2. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE, 

SDuref), through, by, by means of; fiir, for, instead of; gegetf, 
toward, about; p§ne, without, beside; font>er, without; um, 
around, near, at, for ; smber, against, in opposition to* These 
prepositions all govern the accusative only, 

3. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE 

Sttt, at, in, on, by, to; auf, upon, in, at, up, toward; Jjuttet, 
behind, after, back ; tn, in, into, to ; tteJen, by, near, beside ; 
fiber, over, above, at, about; unter, under, below, among; $or, 
before, ago; jttrifcfyen, between, among. These prepositions 
govern the dative, when used with verbs of rest, or with those 
indicating motion within specified limits ; and the accusative, 
when motion or tendency toward any place or object is indi- 
cated : 

€r lauft in fcem ©artetn He is reaming in the garden. 

£v lauft in ben ®ari*n* He is running into the garden. 



8-2 



PliEPOSiTiOlsfe — LESSON Xt 



££r lauft an f bem Gtfc, 
(Er Xauft auf baS (£i£* 

(£r i(! in bem £>aufe* 
^r ge$t in ba% #au$* 



He is running o-n the ice. 

He is running on ("ontoF) th« ic& 

He is in the house. 
He goes into the house. 



4. Prepositions are frequently contracted with the definite 
article into one word : 



&m 


(for an 


%m 


(for an 


tfafs 


(for auf 


©etm 


(for Bet 


&ur$$ 


(for buret) 


Bitr$ 


(for fur 


4?interm (for gutter 


3m 


(for in 


3nS 


(for in 


&om 


(for wa 


Qum 


(for sit 


3ur 


(for ju 



bem)* <Sr fiftt am Stifle. 

ba3). <£r ge§t an$ genjltr* 
ba£). ©rlegteS aufS SBrctU 
bem)* (£r if* Beim SBruber* 
ba3). <£r a.et)t burct)^ geib* 
ba$j* <£$ tfr furS 5Unb. 
btm)* <£r (left ^interm 3aune* 
bem). (Er ifr im £aufe* 
baS). (Er gel)t inS |>au$* 
bem). <Er fommt »om Sttarfte* 
bem). (Sr getyfc &um greunbe* 
ber$ feminine gender, L. 23.) 



He sits at the table. 
He goes to the window. 
He lays it on the board. 
He is with the brother. 
He goes through the field. 
It is for the child. 
He stands lehindth.a, fence* 
He is in the house. 
He goes into the house* 
He comQsfrom the market*. 
He goes to the friend. 



Examples of an, son, auf, au^ and nacfy* 



S£r benft an fetnen greunb* 
&x fyridjt »cn fetnem greunbe* 
(Sr ifr frotj auf fetnen 9kid)ti)um* 
2Ba3 rourbe au$ bem ©fitter? 
£)cl% Staffer fcfymecft nad) <£ifcn. 
@r ijt em €ngldnber son ®eouri* 
OTer <£egen fommt s> o n SDBeft* 
®r iff fafr fcerjer}ri' Don ber £tfce. 
(Er leBt » o n .SBrob unb 2Betn* 
<£r ifl grog » on 8>crfon'. (§ 10?) 



He thinks o/" (about) his friend* 
He speaks o/ his friend. 
He is proud of his -wealth. 
What became of the scholar ? 
The water tastes of iron. 
He is an Englishman 6y birth. 
Every blessing comes from above* 
He is almost consumed with the heat 
He lives on bread and wine. 
He is tali in stature. 



33eij>tele* 

Sitter fletyt an bem genfter, unb ber 

Slnbere a,et)t an ba3 genfrer. 
£>er alte Sftamt unb fein alter greunb 

ge^en in ba3 atte $au$. 
gttea,* ber $ogei" in ba£ Bimmer ober 

in bem dimmer? 
fiBa- urn legt ber Jteftner ba£ §oIj neBen 

ten C-fen ? 



Examples. 

One is standing at the window, and 

the other is going to the window. 
The old man and his old friend are 

going into the old house. 
Is the bird flying into the room oir 

in the room. 
Why does the waiter lay the wood 

beside the etove ? 



^REPOSITIONS. 63 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



4>a3 23anb, the ribbon; 

i)a$ SBett, the bed ; 

QDer SSettler, the beggar; 

£)a$ SBmberoort, the'conj unction; 

2)urd), through; 
T>a$ genjter, the window; 

gitr, for (preposition) ; 

©eg en, toward, to, about ; 
£>er ©ra ben, the ditch; 
£)er better, the cellar; 



£egen, to place, laj, 
9?eben, beside; 
£) ft, often; 
SDfyne, without; 
fRofitgf rusty; 
©p ring en, to spring; 
Um, around, near; 
Unfjofltd), impolite; 
£)ag 23erfydtt f ntJ3tt>ori, the prepositior 
SBiber, against. 



Exercise 36* 2iitfga6e 36* 

1. Der $Rann ftet)t an tern genfter, unb bas $inb geljt an bal 
genfter* 2. Sr ftfet auf bem ©tu^le unb legt fein 33ud) auf ba<3 Sett* 
8. £ct3 $inb tft Winter bem Dfen; ber £unb getjt Winter ten Dfen* 
4. £)a£ papier liegt nefcen bem 33ud)e ; ber ©dniier legt ben 23fei^ 
fttft neben MS Sud). 5. £a$ £au3 fte^t iiBer bem better; ba3 
$)ferb fprtngt iiber ben ©raBen. 6* £er junge SDknn jtetyt unter 
bem 23aume; fein greimb ge^t unter ^m S3aum. 7. 2)er ^auf* 
mann ftefyt sor bem £aufej ber alte ©attler lommt »or ba3 ^pau^. 
8* 5Der Saum fie^t gmtfdjen bem £aufeunb bem ®arten; ber SUlantt 
gei)t jrotfdjett bas §au3 mil ben ©arten. 9. 2)er Heine Sogel fltegt 
in $a$ 3«nmer; fliegt er auc^ in tern 3unmer ? 10. ©er Sagcr 
ge^t burd) ben SSalD unt> urn la§ gelb ; er t ; at em rot$e$ 23anb um 
feinen $ut. 11. St tft tmpflid} gegen unfern 9ia£;Bar. 12. 2Ba3 
fagt er fotoer 3^en Setter? 13. ®e^en @ie cfyte 3$ren @tod? 

14. 3^ ^Be nidjt* fiir ben <Sd)iiIer, benn er ift ntcfjt mein greunb* 

15. 28a3ijl ber Unterfdueb jroifdjen "bemt" unb "fiir?" 16. 2)emt 
ift ein SBinbetoort, fiir ein SSer^&ltntf wort* 

Exercise 37* SlufgaBe 37* 

1. Who is standing at that window ? 2. Before which large 
table is the scholar sitting? 3* Is the old beggar coming be* 
fore our house 1 4. The dog is going behind the house ; the 
garden lies behind the house. 5* Your new pencil is lying be* 
side my new book ; why does the scholar lay his paper beside 
my new book % 6. The child is playing between the house and 
the garden ; the horse is going between the tree and the house. 



. 64 LESSON XXL 

7. The man is in the- house, and his brother is going into the 
house. 8. The dog springs over the ditch ; the room of the 
tailor is over the room of the shoemaker. 9. The horse is 
standing under the tree ; the dog is going under the tree ; the 
child is going to the window. 10* Who says any thing against 
the miller? 11. Why does the bird fly around the field and 
the forest? 12. What kind of paper do you buy for the scholar % 
13. I do not buy any paper at all, for I have no money. 14. 
Do you know the difference between a conjunction and a prep- 
osition ? 15. The saddler is going through the forest; does 
he go without his cane? IB. Is the scholar impolite to our 
friend ? 



LESSON XXL lection XXI. 

NEGATIVE CONJUGATION* 

1. All verbs, in the present and imperfect, in negative sen* 
tences, are employed, like to have and to &<?, in English, with* 
out an auxiliary : 

C£r ijt nidjt $kr. He is not here. 

*£r »o$ttt nidjt fyter*. He does not live here* (He lives not here.) 

%x ^at e$ nid)t. He has it not. 

(£r fcmfi e$ nid)$. He does not buy it. (He buys it not.) 

POSITION OF 9Md)t. 

2. In simple sentences tttdjt follows the object of the verb 
to which it refers. When, however, that which is in one clause 
denied, is in another affirmed of a different object, nidjt precedes 
the object : 

Sdj fyxfce ben $ut nifyU I have not the hat (the hat not) 

<£r loBt feinetl Soljtt nidjt. He does not praise his son. 

3$ fyak ben guten 83leiftift, after nic^t I have the good pencil, but not the 

ba$ papier. paper. 

Sdj $ak ntdjt ben SBletjftft, fanbern ba# I have not the pencil, but the paper. 

Salter. 



NEGATIVE CONJUGATION. 65 

8. In interrogative sentences, nid)t frequently precedes the 
object of the verb : 
|>af>en Bit nidjt ben S&Ietjlift ? Have you not the pencil? 

4. ©onbettt occurs only after a negative, of which it intra 
duces the opposite; while 

516 er is less strongly adversative ; often merely marking 
something additional, and may follow either an affirmation or 
negation : 

(£x ift ntd)t reidj fonbern arm* He is not rich but poor. 

6r ijt nic^t reidj aBer jroI$. He is not rich but proud. 

(£r ift fretgeM<$ after nidjt rei<^> He is generous but not rich. 

<£r ift nidjt nur reicfy fonbern and) fret 5 * He is not only rich but also gen- 

geMg* erous. 

£)a3 Stteffer ift md)t fdjarf fonbern The knife is not sharp but dull. 

ftamtf* 

5. 9Mcf)t frClf)r ? not true ? (is it not true ? like the French 
rtest-ce pas?) answers to our various interrogative phrases 
after an assertion : 

Bit f ennen i\)x\ t \ You know him, do you not ? 

(£r ift SI)r SSruber, \ He is your brother, is he not? 

Bit roirb ge^en f / She will go, will she not? 

(£r ijat e3 ge$a'&t f \ nid)t tt>a$r ? He has had it, has n't he? 

Sir fonnen $oren, I We can hear, can we not ? 

Bit jtnb retcfy, J They are rich, are they not? 

Bit ftnb nidjt retd), / They are not rich, are they ? 

6. Sfticijt todjr sometimes precedes the assertion ; and, occa- 
sionally, the latter word is not expressed : 

9?td)t roaljr, er tjl fe$r reidj? He is very rich, is he not? 

Bit fcnnen ben %lam, nidjt? You know the man, do you not? 

(Er \\i nodj $ier, nid)t ? He is still here, is he not ? 

7. Sftidjt, when used with nod) (y^), should/o^ow it; as should 
also, lein, tmmer, and other words similarly employed : 

<£r tjt nodj ntdjt t)ier. He is not yet here. (He is yet not here.) 

(£r roar nod) nie Iran!* He was never yet sick. (He was yet never 

sick.) 
$at cr nodj fan 2$udj ? Has he no book yet ? (Has he yet no book?) 

8 2lud) ntd)t, and) lein, etc., after a negation, are often best 



66 



LESSON XXI. 



rendered by neither nor ; not either y or some similar word or 
phrase, not strictly literal : 

3$ fmge ntd)t, er ftngt I dc not sing; neither (I do not sing: he too 

and) nidjt. Joes he sing. does not sing.) 

(Er tji md)t retd); and) ift He is not rich, neither (He is not rich, he ia 

er nid)t arm* (nor) is he poor. also not poor.) 

©te §akn lein ©elb, 1$ You have no money, (You have no money, 

and) nid)U nor I either. I also not.) 

©r if! me ^ufri'ebett, id) He is never contented; (He is never contented j 

and) tttcfyL neither am I. I also (am) not.) 



33eij>iele* 

©arum $efu'$en <&it un3 nid)t ofter ? 
Stiffen <Sie md)t rsarum er mint ? 

3$ fetme ben Scaler ntd)t, mem 23ru* 

ber fetmt tfm and) nid)U 
§a$en ©te rttcfyt mein 9)apier imb met* 

nejtSIetftift? 
3$ fyxfie ben SBteifttft/ akr ntdjt ba§ 

papier* 
©a$ 2Better ift m$t trocfen fonbetn 

feudjt* 



Examples* 

Why do you not visit us oftener ? 

Do you not know why he is weep- 
ing? 

I do not know the painter, neither 
does my brother know him. 

Have not you my paper and my 
pencil? 

I have the pencil, but not the 
paper. 

The weather is not dry, but moist. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SBraufen, to roar ; 

Slitfmerffam, attentive ; 
©a6 ©orf, the village; 

(Engltfd), English ; 
©cr glugf the river; 

%xani'6'fi]d), French ; 

greigcMc$, generous; 

£eute, to-day; 

Sittereffant, interesting ; 

^artgroetlig, tedious; 

£ef)rmd), instructive ; 

Exercise 38. 



Sfftorgen, to-morrow; 

9M)ldfftg, negligent; 

3?ie, never; 
©er Sftorroeger, the Norwegian; 

©ortbent, but; 

(£tum£f, dull; 
©er £aitd)er, the diver ; 
©er 2}erBre'd)er, the criminal ; 
©er Sinbr the wind; 

Bittern, to tremble ; 

Bitroet'len, sometimes. 

SlufgaBe 38. 



1. £oren ©ie nidjt trie ber $3inb Brauft? 2* 3$ fe^e ivie bag 
Einb jtttcrt 3. 3ft ntd)t jebeS Iel)rrei$e 33u$ intereffant ? 4, 3ji 
nidjt man&)t$ le^rretcfee 23iid) lattgroelltg ? 5. 2Mdjen Unterfd)teb 
finbett @ie gwlfdjen " 9ltd)t jebeS le^rretdje 23ud) ift intereffant," unb 
"3^^ let)rretd;e 23ud) ift nid)t intereffant?" 6* Dtefer Serbredfeer 



NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. 67 

fprtd)t franjoftfd), ntdt ftafy ? 7. £er gefdudte Saucer Mngt tfjn 
aits bent glnffe. 8* 21£er, n?er fpric^t fern englifcfc, imb mer fprtdjt fetn 
franjojtfdj ? 9. SDJein SRcffer ift nid)t neu, font em alt* 10. £3 ift 
rteu, aber ntcfct fduuf. 11. g3 ijl nidjt fdjarf, font em ftumpf. 12. 
SBarum lofcen @ie Jenen @d)iiler nidjt? 13. 3* lobe jenen, after 
md)t biefen. 14 t 3ft er nidjt ^umeilen fe^r nadjlafftg ? 15. 9tetn, 
er ift nie rtac^ldfftg, font) em immer aufmerffam. 16. ©eljen @ie 
nid)t t)eute nad) Dent £orfe? IT* 3<*, td) 9 e l) e i e l& ^ n1:) me * n 33ru* 
ber geljt morgen. 18. SBarum fpredjen @ie nidjt englifd) ? 

Exercise 39. Slufgafce 39. 

1. Have not you my book ? 2. No, I have not the book. 
3. This child is not industrious, but idle. 4. Not this child, 
but that one is attentive. 5. You speak French, do you not 1 
6. I speak English, but not French. 7. Why do you not write 
to-day ? 8. I write French, but I do not write English. 9. 
You do not find this book tedious, do you*? 10. I do not find 
it very interesting. 11. Is every instructive book tedious ? 
12. Do you never go to the village with your brother? 13. 
My brother is going to-day, and I am going to-morrow. 14. 
Is that scholar sometimes very idle and very negligent? 15. 
This new knife and the new chisel are not sharp, but dull and 
rusty. 16. Our old neighbor, the old Norwegian, is not only 
a very rich, but also a very generous man. 17. Your new 
book is not interesting, neither is it instructive. 18. My new 
book is not only instructive, but also interesting. 



<^ » 9 » >» & - 



LESSON XXL. Cation XXII 

NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. 

1. Nouns of the new declension ending in unaccented ar, e, 
er, el, form all their oblique cases by adding n (for fern, sing,, 
however, see L. XXIII. 4) : 

N. t>er Ungar, ber 5fteffe, ber Sater, 

G. feed Ungar-n, be3 9tejfe-n, beg 53aier-n, 
D. tern Ungar-n, bent 5Rcffe--n, Dent 33aier-n, 
A. ben Ungar-n, ben 91effe-n, ben 23ater-n* 



€8 LESSON XXII. 

2. Nouns of this declension not ending in ax, etc., as above, 
form the oblique cases by adding en: 

N. ber ©raf, ber ©ofoat, ber #elb, 

G. be3 ®raf-en, bey ©cftat-en, be3 £elb-en, 

D. bem ©raf-en, bcm ©ofoat-en, bem £elD-en, 

A. ben ©raf-en, Un @olbat-en, ben §elb-en. 

3. When an adjective or a participle is used substantively 1 
it still follows the declension of its original word : 

SMefer $)eutfdje ifi e.in ©efcmb'ter. This German is an embassador. 

SDtefer ©efctnbt'e tjr em Deutfdje** This embassador is a German. 

4. To the new declension belong most names of males end- 
ing in e, many names of nations, as also various foreign nouns 
(§18): 



£)er £oroe, the lion ; 
£>er £afe, the hare; 
£)er 23aier, the Bavarian; 



£)er Dd)3 (or,D<$fe), the ox; 
£)er 9tb$oc'at, the advocate; 
£)er ttngctr, the Hungarian. 



5. To ascertain to which of the two declensions a noun be- 
longs, the pupil has only to observe the endings of the genitive, 
as given in the vocabularies ; e£ (or s) denoting the old declen- 
sion, and n (or en) the new; thus, 



£)er $ffe, -n, the ape; 

£>cr Self, -e3, the wolf; 

2)er £elb, -en, the hero ; 

£>er Ohjf, -e3, the call; 

£)er Skier, -n, the Bavarian ; 



£>er $dfe, -$, the cheese; 

£)er 23ar, -en, the bear; 

£>er getnb, -e$, the enemy; 

£)er ©raf, -en, the count; 

£)er Dejlreic[)er, -3, the Austrian. 



33 e i f p i e 1 e. Examples. 

SBarum if! bet granjofe ber greunb Why is the Frenchman the friend 

beS <£ttglanber$ unb be3 £Men? of the Englishman and the Turk! 

3(1 ber Deflretdjer ber getnb be<3 SHuf- Is the Austrian the enemy of the 

fen ober be$ gran&ofen ? Russian or of the Frenchman ? 

2Ba$ fur ein £anb3mann tft ber $omg What countryman is the king of 

ijon ® rtedjentcmb ? Greece ? 

£)er (Sclatte liefct feme Sclctttere't m$t. The slave does not love his slavery. 

£er ttngctr liefct ben Dejlreicfoer m$t; The Hungarian does not love t\e 

ber S>oIe and) nidjt. Austrian; neither does the Pole. 

£)er Ungar Itefct ben Dejrrerr)er nid&t, The Hungarian does not love the 

bett IRuffen (Hid) ttidjt* Austrian, nor the Russian either. 



NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. 



69 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$)er STmerUYner, -$, the American ; 

Slnftreng'enb, toilsome ; 
©er SBctier, -n, the Bavarian ; 

©eittftf), German (adj.); 
£)er (Sngldttber, -3, the Englishman ; 
£>er geittb, -e3, the enemy; 
<Det grcmjo'je* -tt, the Frenchman ; 

git^rett, to lead; 
©aS ©rtecfyetilcmb, -3, (the) Greece; 
3)er Stalte'ner, -3, the Italian; 
;Der $ttctl>e, -n, the boy; 
jOer $imig, -e$, the king; 



£)a3 Men, -3, the life 

£)er ^atro'fe, -tt, the sailor; 

£)er 9?effe f ~n, the nephew: 

2)er Djjetntr -6, the uncle; 

£)er Deftveidjer, -£, the Austrian ; 

£)er Stole, -tt, the Pole; 

2)er S^uffe, -tt, the Russian; 

£)er ©olbatr -em the soldier; 

£)er fcitrfe, -tt, the Turk; 

£)er Uttgar, -tt, the Hungarian; 

ttttftdjer, insecure ; 

ttttterbrMett, to oppress. 



Exercise 40. 



StufgaBe 40. 



1* £)er SWatrofc fiitjrt em imftdjeres unb anftrengenbes SeBen* 
£♦ £>as £e6en eines Sffiatrofen ift anftrengenb unb unficfyer. 3. 2)er 
Sfceffe bes alien ©olbaten $at einen SBrief tton feinem £%ime. 4. 
£er alte ©otectt fcfjretbt feinem Sfteffen, bem jungen ©otoaten, einen 
23rtef. 5* £>er $na6e loBt nid^t ben ©olbaten, fonbern ben SKatro^ 
fen. 6.3ft ber $i3mg ton ®rted)enlanb ein Deutf^er? T* 3ft 
ber £)eutfd)e ber greunb be3 Staliener^? 8. 3ft ber grangofe ber 
greunb be3 Deutfdjen? 9. SSarum $a$t ber jitrfe ben SRujfen? 
10. £)er 9htffe unterbritdt ben Sitrfen unb ben $olen. 11. SBarum 
unterbriicft ber Deftretdjer ben Staliener, ben Ungarn imb ften $o^ 
len? 12. 2Ben unierbrtirft ber SImerifaner? 13. 2Cen unterfcriidft 
ber Sngldnber? 14. 2Ber tyafjt btn Snglanber unb ben Slmerifaner? 
15. $a$t ber SRuflfe ben Snglanber, ben §ranjofen, ben Ungarn, ben 
$olcn unb ben Sitrfen ? 



Exercise 41. 



SIufgaBe 41. 



1. Why is the Pole the enemy of the Austrian ? 2. Is the 
Hungarian the friend of the Pole, or is he his enemy 1 3. The 
Pole is the friend of the Hungarian, and the enemy of the Aus- 
trian and of the Russian. 4. Is the king of Greece a Bavarian ? 
5. Is the soldier the nephew of the sailor % 6. No, the sailor 
is the nephew of the soldier. 7. Does the Englishman hate 
the American % 8. The Englishman does not hate the Ameri- 
can. 9. Who oppresses the Italian, the Hungarian and the 



10 LESSON XXIII. 

Pole ? 10. Is this old sailor a Russian, a Turk, an Italian, 
or a Frenchman'? 11. That old soldier is the uncle of this 
boy. 12. Who leads a toilsome and insecure life ? 13. Is 
this German a soldier, or a sailor ? is this sailor a Geiman or 
a Russian ? 14. The boy is writing his uncle, the old soldier, 
a letter. 15. The Hungarian is the neighbor of the Austrian, 
of the Pole, of the Russian and of the Turk. 



LESSON XXIII. Ccction XXIII. 

FEMININE GENDER. 

1. declension of 2M e , Dtefe and SJletne* 
Feminine. 
N. tie, the ; btef-e, this ; mein-e, my ; 

G. ber, of the ; btef-er, of this ; metn-er, of my ; 

D. ber, to or for the; bief-er, to or for this; mein-er, to or for my; 
A. bie, the; bief-e, this; mcin-e, my. 

The article, definite and indefinite, as also, the adjective pro- 
nouns (which in the other genders have different endings, and 
are differently declined), here all end in e, and are inflected 
alike; namely, 

bief-e, Me, att-e, ehttg-e, etltdj-e, jeb-e, mand)-e, foW)-e, tt>eld}-e$ 
as also, 

mein-e, ein-e, betn-e, ener-e, U)r-e, fetn-e, unfer-e, fetn-e, (com- 
pare L. X. 4. and L. XII. 4). 

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES IN THE FEMININE GENDER. 

2. Feminine adjectives, unless they follow bie, etne, or some 
word of the above list, and refer to the same noun, are of the 

OLD DECLENSION. 

N gut-e, good; (Dief-e, metn-e, etn-e* ) 

G. gut-er, of good; (bief-er, metn-er, ein-er.) 

D. gut~er, to or for good ; (Dtef-er, metn-er, ein-er*) 

A. gut-e, good; (sief-e, mein-e, etn-e* ) 



DECLENSION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 



71 



3. Feminine adjectives, when they follow blefe, bte, ntcmdje, 
meine, or any word of that list, and refer to the same noun, 
are of the 



NEW DECLENSION. 



N. Die gute, the good ; 

G. fcer gutett, of the good; 

D. ber guten, to, for the good; 

A. Me gute, the good ; 



meine gute, my good; 
m enter guten, of my good; 
m enter guten, to, for my good ; 
mtim gute, my good. 



Obs. As btef-e, metn-e, etc. {feminine), equally denote the gender of 
the noun, the mixed declension, in the feminine, is not required; hence 
we have here hut two declensions of the adjective, the old and the new, 

DECLENSION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 

4. Feminine nouns, except proper names, are, in the singular, 
indeclinable : * 



3dj v a ^ bte Seber meiner Sftutter* 
(£r tjr ber <So$n biefer alien ©ante. 
SfollfonuneneS ®Iucf tjr ntdjt ber 

Sttenfc^ett £oo3.— ©♦ 
©$»tfrmerei ift transit ber <©eele* 

— SB* 



I have the pen of my mother. 
He is the son of that old lady. 
Perfect (prosperity) happiness is 

not the lot of mankind. 
Fanaticism is sickness (disease) of 

the soul. 



5. Appellations of females are formed from those of males 
by means of the suffix in (or inn) : 



ber <S$netber r the tailor ; 

ber grewtb, the friend ; 

ber (Englanber, the Englishman ; 

ber (Sdjitter; the scholar ; 

ber ©ema'^1/ the consort (husband) ; 

ber £oroe, the lion; 



bte <3$netbertn, the tailoress ; 
bte greimbttt/ the (female) friend; 
bte Gsnojanbertn, the Englishwoman ; 
bte ©djiilcrittf the female scholar ; 
bte ©ema'f? tin, the consort (wife); 
bte £orotn, the lioness. 



6. Appellations of women, formed from titles of men, may 



* It may be observed, however, that in poetry and certain ph rases 
the endings of the new declension (in which the feminine noun waa 
formerly declined) are still sometimes found in the genitive arid dative: 
&§ tjt feiner grauen ©'$roe|ter* It is his wife's sister. 

(5$ tjt Beffer arm nttt (£$retir benn It is better (to be) poor with honor, 

rei$ mit ©djanbetl, than rich with disgrace. 



V2 



LESSON XXIII. 



signify either the wife of an officer, or a female who holds an 
office herself: 

ber sprdftbent', the president; Me $rdfibeittitt, the female presi- 

dent, or the president's wife. 

7. The vowels a, 0, u f usually take the Umlaut; L e. are 
changed to a, 0, it, before the suffix in: 

ber <Sd)ivager, the brother-in-law; Me ©cfylDdcjertn, the sister-in-law ; 
feer S?o$, the cook; Me toii)utf the (female) cook. 



3$ $a£e bierteategebermetuer Sftutter* 

Du ftef?(t ber Gutter %utf in Stra- 
iten* — ©♦ 

girtbert ©te biefe (Spradje fitter? 

Die greunbiu unferer <3d)tt>e#er i(l utt* 
fere Se^rerin* 

Styre Heine (Eoufute ift etne aufmerf* 
fame ©djitlerttu 



Examples. 

I have the new pen of my mother. 
Thou seest the mother's eye in 

tears. 
Do you find this language hard? 
The friend of our sister is our 

teacher. 
Your little cousin is an attentive 

scholar. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Die Styrtfo'fer ~t the apricot (see 4.) ; 
Die SBlume, -, the flower; 
Die Sutter, -, the butter; 
Die Dame, -, the lady; 
Die (Ertgldrtberirt, -, the Englishwo- 
man; 
Die geber, -# the pen; 
Die ^ette r -, the chain; 
Die ^ircfye, -, the church; 
.SDie $trfd)e, -, the cherry; 



Die $?elo'ne, -, the melon; 
Die W\h% ~, the milk; 
Die Gutter, -, the mother; 
Die -ftelEe, -, the pink ; 
Der (3d)tt>ager, -3, the brother-in- 
law; 
Die ©djnoeftetf -, the sister; 
Die £tnte, -, the ink; 
Die £od)ter, -, the daughter; 
Die Hhi't -, the watch. 



Exercise 42. 



Slufgabe 42. 



1. fyabm @te f^^ar^e Sttnte, ober Heme? 2. 3$ I)^e Mane, 
mti) metne ©djwefter t)at fd^arje* 3, SBer ^at meine ncue gefcer 
unb metne gute £inte ? 4* 3|re iunge greunbin fyat Styt mm 
get>er, afcer id) wetfj md)t, foo Me £inte ift 5. SSeffen nene geber 
Ijat biefe ©djiilerin ? 6* £te ©dmterin l)at feme mm geDer, fon* 
tern ehte alte. 7* SBarum fcfyretBen @ie mtt Matter Sinte? 8* 3* 
fdireifce ntdjt mtt Hewer State; id) f^reite mtt meiner fcfyfoargen 



DECLENSION OP FEMININE NOUNS. 13 

£inte. 9. 2Ber fauft bie Willi), bie Sutter, He ketone, tie tfltfdp 
unb bte Slprtfofe ? 10. £te ^B^in lauft tie 3Rlldj, bic Sutter uub 
fete 9Mone, unb bie alte Same lauft bie Styrtfofe* 11. Die 9tofe 
ift etfle fdjone 33Iume. 12. SSer fd)idt ber Jotter jiener alten Dame 
eine Stofe ? 13. 2Ba3 fiir eine 9tofe fdjidt bie ©djtilerin ber Se^re^ 
tin, dm ttetge ober etne rot^e ? 14. 2Cem fd)tdt bte 2et)rerin bte 
fceige 3tofc? 15. SBas fiir eine S3Iume ift bie 9Mfe? 16. £>er 
©djmager unb bie @d)toagerut biefer Snglanberin fmb in Jiener alten 
$trdje. 11. §at meine iun^t greunbin meine U$r unb meine $ette? 
18. 3^re greunbin $at bie Ut)r, after ntdjt bie SittU. 19. Unfere 
Gutter ift unfere Secretin 

Exercise 43. SlttfflaBe 43. 

1. Are you writing with my new pen? 2. No, I am writing 
with the new pen of my sister. 3. Has the sister-in-law of 
your friend a new watch ? 4. Whose watch and chain has your 
mother ? 5. My mother has my watch, and my sister has my 
chain and my pen. 6. The sister of your teacher is our teacher. 
7. In which church is the daughter of our old friend ? 8. What 
kind of a flower have you, a rose, or a pink ? 9. I have a beau- 
tiful pink, and my sister has a rose. 10. This milk is good, 
but the butter is not good. 11. Have you a ripe melon and a 
ripe apricot? 12. I have a ripe apricot and a ripe cherry, but 
I have no ripe melon. 13. What kind of ink has your sister, 
black or blue ? 14. With what kind of a pen, and what kind 
of ink is your mother writing ? 15. Has your friend a white 
rose, or a red one? 16. Is the pink a beautiful flower? It. 
Is not every flower beautiful ? 18. You have my watch, your 
chain, the pen of our teacher and the ink of the scholar. 19. 
1.3 your mother your teacher? 20. No, the daughter of that 
old lady is our teacher. 



14 LESSON xxrv, 

LESSON XXIV. Uttian XXIV. 

FORMATION AND LENDER OF DIMINUTIVES. 

1. The syllables djen and lein,* suffixed to nouns, give rise 
to a large class of words, called diminutives. These diminu- 
tives are always of the neuter gender, and their radical vowel, 
if capable of it, takes the Umlaut : 

£>ct$ £ctmm, the lamb ; ba$ £dmmdjett, the lambkin (little lamb) 

£)er ©ol)rt, the son; ba3 (Btynfytn, the (dear) little son ; 

T)tx %lu^, the river; ba3 glixgdjen, the rivulet (little river)* 

S)er 4>ugcl f the hill ; bat, ^ugeldjen, the hillock (little hill) ; 

jDie 23lume, the flower; ba$ 33iumd)en, (or SBliimlein) the floweret. 

2. The diminutives are also used as terms of endearment^ 
or to indicate familiarity ; and are often employed where in 
English no idea of diminutiveness would be expressed : 

"£)enn SBriiberdjen imb (Sd)ftei1erd)ett For brother dear and sister dear 
bie fommen oft in mtr." (they) often come to me. 

£)a$ SJiJgeldjen (or $ijg!em) ftngt eiti The little bird sings a gladsome 
frofceS £ieb$etu (little) song. 

3. The words graitleitt and 9J?afc$en though regularly formed, 
as diminutives, have lost their strictly diminutive signification, 
grctulein signifies a young (unmarried) lady ; and also serves 
as a title of address : answering to Miss. Waltytn is rendered 
by girl, or maiden ; 9ft agb, from which it is derived, being 
now employed chiefly in the signification of servant : 

grauletn 9t. tjl eine grcunbin biefe$ Miss ]N r . is a friend of this girL 

©ofcalb ba£ 9ftabcfyen 9lbfdneb natym, As soon as the maiden took leave, 

u. [♦ ttu — €>♦ etc. 

SDtefeS Sflabdjen fpielt mit feinem fbxix* This girl is playing with her little 

berdjetu brother. 



° Other forms, chiefly provincial or vulgar, and confined mostly to 
conversation, which sometimes perplex the learner, are el, It, eld)en; as 
«^abet,"for^ab$en; "23ud)eld)en," forS8iid)ietn; " SRijgIi,« for fjfii: gXcin ; etc. 



FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 75 



FORMAT [ON OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 
NOUNS WITH NOUNS. 

4 In German two or more nouns are often united in one 
word, where the English equivalents are joined by a hyihen, 
or several separate words are used : 

Busier, draught-animal, (3uc$, draught; %fytx, beast,) 

£afitl)ier, beast of burden ; (£a jl, burden; £f)ier, beast.) 

©cfyctbertfreube, malicious pleasure; (Scrvabe, injury; greube, joy.) 

§>re£freir)eit, freedom of the press; (gretfjett, freedom; $reffe, press.) 
Shttymfcegterbe, ambition, thirst of fame ; (9frtr)m, fame ; SBegterbe, desire.) 
Drbmm<j3ltel)e, love of order ; (Drbmmg, order; £iek, love.) 

Sd)ur)mctd)er, shoemaker ; (<S$u$, shoe ; Wlafyir, maker.) 

$artbroerf, avocation; trade; (§artb, hand; Serf, work.) 

(Bdjur/madjerrjanbfterf, shoemaker's trade or calling. 

5. The first noun is sometimes put in the plural : 

£tctberfd)ranf, clothes-press; (^kiber, clothes; ©duanf, case, press.) 

§3ud)erfd)rartf, book-case; (SBitcfyer, books.) 

SBorterfcudj, dictionary; (2Bi?rter, words; $&u&), book.) 

NOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS, PRONOUNS, VERBS, ETC. 

6. Compound nouns are also formed by uniting several parts 
of speech : 

SlitSmeg, egress; (au$ f out of; 2Beg, way.) 

giirwort, pronoun; (gur, for ; Sort, word.) 

9JUffd)uter, fellow-scholar; (mit, with; Sdjiiler, scholar.) 

(Bdjreifcpctpier, writing-paper; (fd)rett>en ; to write; papier, paper ) 

■ftcmfmamt, merchant; (faufett, to buy; 5ftcmrt, man.) 

<Storertfrieb, agitator; (ftorert, to disturb; ^riebe, peace.) 

(Springing felb, romp; fly-about; (fprhujert, spring; in, into; gelb, field.) 

£ cm gemots, good-for-nothing; (taugen, to be fit for; md)t3, nothing.) 

SJergtgmeirt* the forget-me-not ; (acvgcffen, to forget; mem (L. 28. 2.); 
ntd)t, and nidjt, not.) 

NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES. 

7. Nouns are sometimes formed by uniting adjectives (unde- 
clined) with nouns : 

ber (Sauerftee, the sheep's sorrel ; (fauer, sour; Jtlce, clover.) 

bcr ^rummfkfi, the crosier; (fntmm, crooked; <&tab, staff.) 

ba$ ^Beig^rcb, the white bread ; (roetjj, white; 33 rob, bread.) 



76 LESSON XXIV. 

COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 

8. Compound adjectives are formed by uniting two adjec- 
tives, or a noun and an adjective : 

©unfctgritrt, dark green; (btmfel, dark; grim, green.) 

$lGQenfr()iMP,, black as a raven; (dtaht, raven; fcfytt>ar$, black.*) 

i'ebeuof.Ut, tired of life; (£e ben, life; fatt, satiated.) 

SBaffenfafytg, capable of bearing arms; (SBaffen, arms; faHg, capable.) 
£Bunbetfdj)6n, extremely beautiful; (2£unber, miracle; fcfyon, beautiful) 

9. Nouns, instead of being written as one word, are some- 
times separated by a hyphen : 

So ftarf aU <55otte<$ Sunben=£aJ3 As strong as God's hatred of sin, is 

Sfi feine <Simber4Hek* — £>♦ his love for sinners. 

10. The latter member of a compound may refer to words 
preceding those with which it is united ; the first word being 
followed by a hyphen : 

£)er ©ttefet* imb (£cl)uljtna$er* The boot and shoemaker. 

%xv%f unb plfeoeburftig* Needing consolation and help. 

GENDER OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 

11. The first word of the compound takes the accent, while 
the latter usually determines the gender : 

(Sin SBlumengarten, A flower-garden. 

(Sine ©ctrtenMume, A garden-flower. 

12. Proper names of places, formed by suffixing the mascu- 
line noun 33erg, or the feminine 33ttrg, to other words, are, like 
all proper names of places, neuter ■ 

£)a3 jlarf fcefefttgte Sftagbe&urg, The strongly-fortified Magdeburg. 

13. The word Wlufy is masculine; the words ^Demutlj, ®xo$s 
tnuttj, Scmgmutt), ©anftmutf), @d?ttermittt) are feminine. S^eil 
is masculine; ©egentljetl, £tntert$etl and 35ort>ert^eit are neuter. 
<2cf)eu is feminine; Slbfdjeu is masculine. 

Seifptelc* Examples. 

DtefeS Heine 9ftctbtfjen tjat etnat ftlfcer* This little girl has a silver thimble. 



FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 



n 



SBet i(t jetted grauletn ? Who is that young lady ? 

<E* tft Stautetn 2?. It is Miss N. 

£>te ©ejtd)t3Mlbung if! ber Spiegel ber The expression of the countenance 



©eele. 

£>er S3uct>Mnber ttar mem 9ftitf$itler 



(BtauB fotfjr bu effett beirt £eftenlana. 

(Gen. iii. 14.) 
£)er 23ud$drtb!er »erfauft 

©djretB* imb SBriefpajner* 



is the mirror of the soul. 

The bookbinder was my fellow- 
scholar. 

Dust shalt thou eat all the days of 
thy life. 
OUteS The book-dealer (seller) sells good 
writing and letter-paper. 



Sftatt ttetmt biefe §8Iume ba% SkrgtjH This flower is called the forget-me- 

nteumt^t. not. 

GEnugflar imb finegelmrt imb efcett Ever clear and pure as a mirror 

SUegt ba<3 gep^rleidjte £ekn. — 3. flows life light as zephyr (literally 

zephyr-light life) 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



S3ei, by, with; 
£)er 93erg, -e3 f the mountain; 
2)er 33ud)Mnber, -3, the bookbinder; 
©ad gclb, -e$, the field; 

grdulein, (see 3.) 
£)a§ $urtt>ort, -e£, the pronoun; 
£)a$ 3afr, -e§, the year; 
£>te SafyreSjett, -, the season of the 

year; 
£)er ihamefy, -e3, the crane; 
£)a3 £aj~rt§ier, -e3, the beast of bur- 
den; 
£>ie Severe, -, the lark; 

9#ubct)en, (see 3.) 



2)ie Sftafyt, -, the night ; 

£)te ^adjttgaE, -» the nightingale; 

2)a3 Dbft, -e$, the fruit; 

£>er Dbfrgartert, -§, the orchard; 

£)er S^aubsoget, -3/ the bird of prey; 

£)ie ©d)Ub»ad)e, -, the sentinel; 

©er Somnter,»-3, the summer; 

£>er ©umpf, -e3, the swamp; 

'Der (Bumpfsogel, -3, the wader, mo- 
rass-bird ; 

£)er £ag, -e3, the day; 

Die Qtit, -, the time; 

©a$ Snakier, -t%, the draught-ani- 
mal. 



Exercise 44. 



SIufgaBe 44. 



1* 2Ba£ fiir papier faufen @ie, ©cfereitpapier ober Sriefpapter ? 
2. £a6en @ie eitten [gotten 33lnmengarten ? 3. 3ft tie 9tofe ettte 
©artcntlume, oocr eine gefobfame ? 4. £)afcett @ie »iel rcifed DBjl 
in 3l)rem Dbftgarten ? 5* £aben@ie eitten 2lpfe£6aum, etnen^irfd)* 
taunt, oter einen 2lprifofenbanm ? (£ct6ett @ie einen 2lpfek, eitten 
$irfd)*, cber einen Slprifofentattm ? see 10.) 6* 2Da3 fiir einen 
SBafc&aum $at ber Ufyrmacfcer in feinem ©arten? 7. $afon @ie 
nid)t 3eit auf ben 33erg ju ge^en ? 8. $Hefe£ £uni>djen ift nur ein 
3afyr alt. 9. Xer ©ommer ift eine fefyr angenel)me 3a^re^eit* 
10. 2Ser ijl biefes Wasn't 11. g£ ift grauiein 5ft., eine gute 



t8 LESSON XXIV. 

greunbin mtintv ©djmefter. 12. SNeine ©djfoefter ifl ettte Sfttt* 
fdmlertn biefes $rauletn£. 13* £ie ©dnltmacfje ift ter 23ruber be^ 
5Bu<fy6tnber$* 14. £a3 Stamttl tft ein Saftt^ier, nnb ber £>rf)3 ift 
etn 3ugt|ter. 15. 28a3 tft ein giirfrort? 16. £er Siller ift ein 
Staufroogel, fcer ©cfyroan ift ein @d)ttrimm s oogel unb ber $rantd) tft 
ein ©umppogel. 17. Xie 9tad)ttgatt ift ein ©tngsogel, tta* fiir 
ein SSogel ift bte 2er^e? 18. SSann fingt tie Serene, urib ftann 
fingt bie 9tad}ttgatt? 19. 2)iefe fingt bet 9lac^t, unb jene bei Sag* 
(L. X. 2.) 

Exercise 45. Slufgabe 45* 

1. What kind of a word is this ? 2. It is a pronoun. 3. Have 
you an apple-tree, or a cherry-tree in your garden ? 4. Have 
you no fruit-tree in your flower-garden ? 5. 1 have no fruit- 
tree in my flower-garden, but I have a rose and a pink in my 
orchard. 6. Has the bookbinder a large forest-tree in his new 
garden ? 7. He has no forest-tree, but he has a very beautiful 
apple-tree. 8. Is the eagle a bird of prey ? 9. What kind of 
a bird is the crane, and where does he live? ■ 10. Is the horse 
a draught-animal, or a beast of burden? 11. Is the summer 
a very pleasant season of the year? 12. Has that little girl 
good letter-paper? 13. The girl has good writing-paper, but 
no letter-paper. 14. Is Miss L. the sister of this little girl ? 
15. Do you know what kind of a bird the swan is ? 16. Why 
do you not write your sister a letter ? 17. I have not time to 
write, I am going with the watchmaker to the village. 18. This 
beautiful little apple-tree is only a year old, how old is that 
one ? 19. My fellow- scholar has a new watch-chain, a sharp 
pen-knife, an old writing-desk, and a good writing-book. 



«*LA» OF COMPOSING GERMAN. ■ 1$ 

LESSON XXV. Cectitm XXV. 

PLAN OF COMPOSING GERMAN. 

Hitherto the attention of the learner lias been mainly direct- 
ed to sueh forms and rules pf declension and construction as 
were necessary to the translation of the several exercises. He 
may now proceed to the more advanced work of composing 
sentences in German, Having clearly before him the thought 
which he proposes to express, let him endeavor, in accordance 
with the rules and examples previously studied, to give ii a 
proper German dress, In this process, under the constant 
guidance of his model sentences in German, he will readily 
acquire the habit of thinking in that language, and so avoid 
the common and natural error of turning English modes of 
thought and expression into merely literal German. 

Moreover, when favored with peculiar opportunities for speak 
Ing the language, the pupil might here introduce into the pro- 
posed sentences one or more of the additional tenses; or, 
change to some other tense any verb found in the regular Ex- 
ercises (See Lessons XXXVL, XXXVII., XXXVIIL). Thus, 
for example, in Exercise 46., 1, for the present tense; as in, 

"£>iefe <&oIbf$aue-be $aktt golbeite* filtone imb pafyleme SUitge," 
the pupil may be required to substitute the imperfect ; as, 

S)iefe (&Qlb\&)mizht fatten golfceue* .pi tone mh Pctfknte Stittge; 
or, the perfect; as, 

©teft <5Mbfd)miebe fyabcn cjoibene, pikrrtt imb fta^lmte SRin-gc (je^aM? 
er, the pluperfect ,; as, 

©ief»: ©olbfcpmiebe fyatttn p£bem% plknn mtb ftcfytemt Sftiag* g e§ a fc i* 
ar, the first future ; as, 
C^iefe ®olbf$miebe j» erb e-n golbctte* plkme imb pa^Icrne OitHge I) a ft eti 

For an additional stock of words, with further statement and 
exemplification of the plan, see page 449- 

It has been deemed better to refer this class of learners, as 
above, than to sacrifice the progressive plan of the work, by 
Introducing those Lessons at an earlier period. 



80 LESSON xxv. 

ARTICLE AND ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS, PLURAL. 

1. In the plural number the article and adjective pronouns, 
as also mel)tere, end in e ; namely, 

fcief-e, Me, all-e, einig-e, etltd)-e, im-t f vxanty-t, tne^rer-e, fold)— e, 
tyeld)-e (L. X. 4) ; as also, 

metn-e, ein-e, betn-e, it)r-e, fein-e, imfer-e and fein-e (L. XII. 4) ; 
* and have all the same form of 

DECLENSION IN ALL GENDERS OF THE PLURAL. 

N. fctef-e, these; mein-e, my; 

G. fctef-er, of these; mein-er, of my; 

D. t>tef-en, to or for these ; mem-en, to or for my ; 

A. btef-e, these ; metn-e, my. 

ADJECTIVES. 

2. Adjectives of all genders in the plural end in e, and have 
but two forms of declension, the old and the new (L. XXX. 1). 

3. Adjectives, unless they follow tiefe, nteine, or some word 
of that class (see 1 ), and refer to the same noun, are of the 

OLD DECLENSION. 
PLUEAL, ALL GENDERS. PLURAL, ALL GENDERS. 

N. gut-e, good; (Mef-e.) 

G. gnt-er, of good; (t>tef-er.) 

D. gut-en, to or for good; (btef-en*) 

A. flut-e, good; (t>ief-e.) 

Compare rule and declension L. XIV. 3, singular number. 

PLURAL OF NOUNS OF THE OLD DECLENSION. 

Neuter. 

4. Neuter nouns ending in the nominative singular in e, el 
en, er, cfyen and lein, have the same form in the nominative 
plural : 

£>ag Sfttttet, the means; bie 9?Httel, the means; 

$)a$ Qdtbau'bt, the building bie ©ebcm'be, the fcuij dings; 

2)a£ SSauer, the cage; bie &kuer, the cages. 



PLURAL OF NOUNS. 81 

b. Neuter nouns not ending in the nominative singular in e, 
t\ f en, er, c^ert and lein, form their nominative plural by adding e t 

$)a$ 3a$r, the year; tie Saljre, the years; 

2)a$ ©efco'i, the commandment ; Me ©efto'ie, the commandments; 

£ct$ 3)ult, the desk; tie $ulte, the desks. 

Masculine* 

6. Masculine nouns ending in the nominative singular in e # 
el, en, er, have the same form in the nominative plural : 

£)er ©artier, the saddler; Me Saltier, the saddlers; 

l X)er Coffer, the trunk; Me Coffer, the trunks; 

£>er SBrimnen, the well; Me SBrwmen, the wells. 

7. Masculine nouns not ending in the nominative singular in 
e, el, en, er, form the nominative plural by adding e, and tak- 
ing the Umlaut, if capable of it : 

©er $ctmm, the comb; Me $dmnte, the combs ; 

£>er (Strcm, the stream; tie ©rrome, the streams; 

£)er §ur, the hat; Me £itte, the hats; 

©er SBaam, the tree; bie Sctume, the trees. 

Feminine. 

8. Feminine nouns ending in the nominative singular in funft 
and mj3, as also those in list page 216, form the plural by add- 
ing e and taking the Umlaut, if capable of it : 

£)te SMbnifr the wilderness; Me SBilbntffe, the wildernesses; 

£>ie #artb, the hand; bie $axibt f the 'hands; 

£)te grud)t, the fruit; Me grudge, the fruits* 

Note. — Most feminine nouns belong to the new declension (L 
XXX. 3). 

DECLENSION Otf NOUNS IN THE PLURAL. 

9. Nouns whose nominative plural ends in en, have all cases 
'n this number alike; those of other terminations have the 
genitive and accusative like the nominative, and add n in the 
dative : 

N. Me 2)egen; bie &oM; bie ©tittle; tie £anbe; 

G. ber £egen; ber $oM; ber ©triple; ber £>iinbe; 

D. ben £)egen ; t)m $ofcetn ; ben @tiu)len ; ben ipanten ; 

A. bie Df8?tt{ bie §okI; bie StiiMe; tie &cinte* 

4* 



82 



LESSON XXV. 



10. fyaitn £>eln and the regular verb 2 often m tub 

PLURAL* 

Present Tense, 



ttrir fyabtn, We have; toix ftnb# we are; tvir tofc-en, we praise; 
il;r tya&t, you have; i|r feib, you are; i^r lob-t, you praise j 
fie tyaben, they have; fte finb, they are; fte lcl>-en, they praise. 

Thus regular Verbs form the first and third persons in the 
present plural, by adding to the root en 5 and to the second per* 
son t (or et. See L. V. h) 



Selfptele* 

5Me £ifd)kr §akn gute §oM» 



Examples* 



The cabinet-makers have good 
planes. 
JDte ^Icffer bcr Jtocfye ftnb fd)arf. The knives of the cooks are sharp* 

gBer ijerfauft' ben «ftod)en bie ®anfe Who sells the cooks the geese and 

unb bie SBurjlc ? the sausages ? 

Die genftcr in Hn Bimmern ber S$it* The windows in the rooms of the 
Xer fittb $U flehw scholars are too small. 



VOCABULARY to the exercises, 



5bte STrt» -> pi. $erte, the as; 

%)a$ £3ein, -eg, -g, pi. -e, the leg; 

£)er SBefen. -g, ph -, the broom; 

&)er £>teb, -eg, ph -*t the thief: 

£)er (£uux>o£;ner, -g, pL-, the inhab- 
itant ; 

£>er (Sfelf -g, pi. -# the ass, donkey; 

£>er ginger, -g, ph -1 the finger; 

£)er g«§» -e«, pL Supe, the foot; 

%'\z §cmb, -, pi. $dtlbt> the hand; 

£)er |>ol$aucr, -g, pi. -, the wood- 
cutter ; 

$)er $aifcr, ~g, pi* -, the emperor; 

$) a $opfr -eg* pi. ixijpfe, the head; 



£>cr flragen, -g, (§ 13. 4. &.) the col- 
lar; 
QaZ $hultijter, -eg, -g, pi. -e, the 

mule; 
Dag D't)r, -eg, -g, ph -en," the ear; 
Der 9)alafr', -eg, pi. $aia)le, thepal 

ace; 
2)er <Sttel, -eg, pL -e, the handle; 
Untemcfy'ten, to instruct; 
itebemefy'men, to undertake; 
SBerfer'tigen, to make; . 
£>er Batjn, -eg, pi. Bct^ne, the tooth, 
Q n>ci (see § 44), two. 



Exercise 46. 



Stufgafce 46. 



L Tiefe ®olfcfd)miete Ijakn gofrene, ftlbcmc unb ftatilerne SJltnge* 
2. IHe @'6tjne iener <Sd)mtet»e fins Me greunfce fctcfet SWiifler. 3, 
£le Seireruntenldjten Me ©djitler. 4. Xte SBBBIfe Ijafcen gro§£ 
3at)ne unt Heine giifje* 5. £ie gleifdjer faufen tie @d)aafe. 6* 



5Dte Jputmadjer fcerferttgen trcb £ erf cm fen Me #iiie-» 7. Die DieBe 
fyaBen lange ginger* 8* SBem fcfjreiBen bie @d)iifer fo ttiele Sriefef 
$. Diefe ©iufyle imb 35ulte g^oren mtfmt Setyrmw 10* Die 
$ncpf* unt> ^ragcjt <m to-icfert SWcfen ftnt> j« gn>$. 11. SBem ge^ 
§oren fctefe £t[d)e, ©tittle una 3)uft* ? 12. Dicfe gtfd)^ tjaBen Heine 
$opfe. 13* Die $alafte t>er $omge unb t>er Jtatfer fint> fetyr fd)8tu 
14* Die (Sitele btefer Sefen fmt> gulang> 15 ■♦ Die fiitttw^ner i>ie* 
}U Dorfes jfttb fe^r arm* !€♦ SBarum iSernefynen 3()re greunte 
fo »icl? 17, 2Ba3 fiir 33 Sum e ftnt) biefe? 18, SBte fctete £oBeI 
C)aBen biefe Jifdjler ? 19* Der Saufcr l)at jmei SBagen, sier g>fertc 
ttnt> a&jt um> nmn$i§ @$affc* 20. Die ^otj^aner IjaBen fdjarfe 
Slerte unt> fearte $dnte, 21. Der ®fd unt> fcad Sftaulttyier ^afien 
grofH Dtymt unt> Kerne Seine. 

Exercise 4ft. SUtfgaBe 47. 

1 . Have job. good axes ] 2. I have good axes, good planes 
and good chisels. 8. Do these tables, chairs and desks belong 
$o Tie scholars? 4, The desks belong to the scholars, and the 
tsha'ra belong to the teachers, 5. The fingers of the thieves are 
long. 6. Wolves have white teeth, &nd muks have long ears* 
7. These brooms have long handles, 8. Emperors and kings 
have beautiful palaces. 9. Have all camels large soft feet 1 
10. The inhabitants of this village are wood-cutters. 11. The 
hands of the hatters are often black. 12. These fish have large 
heads. 13. These scholars are buying coats, hats, rings and 
<canes. 14. The smiths make knives, ax-es and chisels. 15. Do 
these teachers instruct all those scholars ? 16. Those tailors are 
making coats, these girls are making collars. 17. Which 
horses and which carriages do the physicians buy ? 18. These 
shoemakers and those tailors have small rooms, and the cabi- 
net-makers have large ones. 19. The sons of those smiths are 
industrious scholars. 20. These two scholars have three tables 
mnd six chairs. 21. Those goldsmiths have g">ld rings, and 
3}hese have silver ones. 



84 LESSON -XXVI, 

LESSON XX\L lution XXVI. 

IRREGULA.R PLURAL OF KOUNS. 

1. As exceptions to Rules 4 and 5, Lesson, XXV., are tne 
neuter nouns, ba£ §lofj, the raft ; bdo Softer, the convent ; and 
bctS 9tot)r f the reed, all of which take, in the plural, the Urn- 
laut; as, tie §lb£e, bie $Bfier, Me 3iB$re« £)a$ Soot, the boat, 
has either the regular form tie 33oote, or Sole* 

2. There are also several neuter nouns which contain two 
variations from Rule 5, Lesson XXV., in that they add in the 
plural er, and take the Umlaut, if capable of it ; as, bct3 £)orf, 
the village, plural, Me £)orf-er; ba$ 2teb, the song, plural, bie 
Sieber, etc.; see § 13. 5. Exceptions, b. 

3. A few masculine nouns contain one exception to Rule 7, 
Lesson XXV. ; namely, they add er, instead of e ; as, ber iDottt, 
the thorn, plural, tie 53ont-er, etc.; § 13. 6. Exceptions, a. 

4. All nouns ending in tl)itm, whether neuter or masculine, 
torm their plural by adding er, and taking the Umlaut : 

$)ct$ SBiSttyum, the bishopric ; plural, bie sBt^tpmer* 
£)er Snttyum, the error; plural, tie 3ntfyinner, etc. 

5. The plural of Wtann in several compound words is Seute 
instead of Sfftimner: 

£)er SSerpmtm, the miner; btc SBergleute, the miners; 

£)er ^aufmamt; the merchant; bie $cwf(eute, the merchants; 

£)er Stan ermatm, the carpenter ; bie Btmmerleute, the carpenters. 

Give in this manner the plural of Slmtmcttttt, SW&eitSmamt, 
gbelmann, Zanlmann, 2anb£mamt, ©ptelmantu 

6. Seute and Soil are both rendered by people ; the latter 
in the most extended, the former in a limited sense. The plu- 
ral of Soil is usually equivalent to nations : 

£)iefe Settle ffnb ©etttfdje. These people are Germans. 

<Die £)eutf$en {tub ein fletjjji<je$ 3$oIf» The Germans are an industrious 

people. 
2)ie fRegk'rung iflrei^aBer ba^ SJolf The government is rkh, but the 

if arm* people are (is) poor. 

£)ie »erfd)ie'beneu Sitffer <£uroi>a$* The various nal-ions of Europe, 



1KREGULAR JUTEAL OF KOUKS. 



& 



7. Several masculine nouns form an exception to Rule 6, 
Lesson XXV., in that they take the Umlaut ; as plural, Stepfel, 
instead of Styfel; fyammtl, instead of $ammtl. For entire list 
see § 13. 4, Exceptions* 

8. The feminine nouns Gutter and Softer form their plural 

by taking the Umlaut : 

05ute *Mner unterrid)ten if re £M)ter* Good mothers instruct their daugb 

ters. 

9. The masculine nouns 2lal, 2trm, etc. § 13. 6. Exceptions, b, 
omit the Umlaut ; thus forming an exception to Rule 7, Lesson 
XXV. 

10. In German the singular is employed to denote some ob- 
jects, which require in English the plural form (§ 15) : 

£>te <3d)cere ij! w|ng, bie £t$tyu$e ij: The shears are rusty, the snuffers 

Uanh 
CEr faufte eine 23ruTe urtb eine Sange* 



3$ fafce $r»ei ^djeeren urzb brci 3cm* 

gen. 
©eine £unge ifi par! u-nb gefunb* 
£He SIfdje ifl nod) feig* 
£)er 4>afer ifl fcfyon reif* 
(£r n?ugte Dir feinen Dan! bafilr* 



are bright. 
He bought a pair of spectacles and 

a pair of tongs. 
I have two pairs of shears andthrea 

pairs of tongs. 
His lungs are strong and sound* 
The ashes are still hot. 
The oats are already ripe. 
He gave you no thanks for it* 



S3 e if p i el e^ 

£>iefe £anbleute ftttb metne £anb$Zeute* 

Diefe Sfe^fel ftnb nodj nidjt reif. 
Sene $i3gel $a&en frumme (SdjndkL 
SKeine 33ruber !aufen S^ctgct* 
2)ie $utber ftngen fdjime Sieber* 
£)er Jtodj fauft £it§ner unb (£ter> 
1>k Slattern ftnb eine gefa^r'Iic^e 

tfranfyett, 
SitPo$ ttne ha$ ©ifen n?ar ba$ §er§ 

in i^rcr 33rujr.--<5* 
<Da3 irbifdje ©ejtyledjt' murrt otyne 

©runb ; bie ©ctter ftnb geredjt'* — 

SB* 



Examples. 

These peasants (country-peopie) 
are my countrymen. 

These apples are not yet ripe. 

Those birds have crooked beaks. 

My brothers are buying nails. 

The children sing beautiful song§. 

The cook buys fowls and eggs. 

The small-pox is a dangerous dis- 
ease. 

Unfeeling as the iron was the heart 
in their breast. 

The terrestrial race murmurs with- 
out eausej the gods are just. 



m 



LESSO» XXVI. 



The n imbcrs 2, 3, etc. in the following vocabulary refer to the irreg*- 
uiar plural of the nouns as above designated. 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES, 



%)tr STfctnfy, -e$i pi. -e, the evening; 

SBauett/ to I uild; 
£)a6 SSXalt, -e«, pi, flatter, the leaf, 2 ; 
DaS 2)acfy,-e3, pi. £>dd)er the roof, 2; 
£)er £)olcb, -e6, pi. -e, tl.e dagger 9> 
*Der (Mjl, -e3, pi. -er, the spirit, 3 ; 
£)a£ ©raft,-e3, pi. ©rafter, grave, 2 ; 

©rabetif to dig-; 
t)er §afett, -3, pi. £dfett, harbor* 7 ; 
jDa3 $orn,-e3, pi. Corner, horn, 2-; 

$uljl, cool, cold; 
S)er Setb, -e£, pi. -er, the body, 3; 
g)a3 £o$, -e6, pl.£ocfyer, the hole, 2; 
£)er SJtonafc -e$, pi -e, the month, 9 ; 



Exercise 48* 



2)a<3 9£ejr 7 -e$, pL-er, the nest, 2; 

SRttfyett, to rest; 
$)er ^djirm, -e§, pi. -e, the screen 
£>er <3d)loffer, -§, pi.-, lock- smith j 

<Sd)on, already; 

@d)tt>er, heavy; 
f Dct3 ©cfywert, -e3, pi. -er, sword, 2; 
Die (Stabt, -, pi. Stable, the city* 

(Stetl, steep ; 

(Sterblid), mortal; 

£ief, deep; 

UnfrerMtd}, immortal; 
£>er 2B drier* -$, pi. -> the waiter | 
•Det Sintmermann, -e$, pi. -leute, th« 
carpenter, 5. 

8ttfgft6e 48. 



1* Die Dii$er fciefer £iiufer ftnb fteiL 2. Die SScgel Bcmert 
Uiefter in ben SBSfoenu 3. Diefe SBlStter fmb nod) grim; jene fmb 
(d)on gelb. 4. 92id}i ade @&M fmb fc&arf> 6* SBas serfer* 
tigen btefe ©djlojfer ? 6. 3ene banner Men lange ©djtoerter urti 
(cfemere Dold)e. 7. Diefe §unu ftnt) ad)t donate aft* 8. SBarum 
grabt man biefe 2od}er? 9. "Unfere 3Sdter ttd)en fdjon in fitfyten 
©rafceriu" 10. Die (MBen urn btefe ©tabt ftnt) fe^r tief. 11. 
Unfere Setter ftnt) jterMid); nnfere Oeifter mtfterMi$. 12. Difc 
©iirten unb gelfcer fmb jefct feJjr fdjcn. 13. Die <Sd;iffe Itegen in 
fcen ipdfen. 14. Diefe Sl&enbe ftnt fefyr angenefym. 15. ©ingen 
btefe $inber fdjone 2ieber ? 16. SBarnm ftetyen @ie urn bie Defen? 
It. ©ptelen bie $inber in ben ®arten ? 18. 3** l»eW}e ©arten 
gel)en biefe banner? 

Exercise 49, $ufga6e 49. 

1. The water in the harbors is deep. 2. Which men have 
swords and daggers % 3. These houses have very steep roofs, 
4. Those men are digging holes and ditches, 5. The graves of 
our fathers are already green. 6. The leaves of this tree are 
white. 7. The nests of the birds are in the forests. 8. The 
evenings are now very long. 9. The sheep are standing around 



DECLENSION Of TEE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 8t 

the house ; where are the dogs % 10. Are not our spirits im- 
mortal? 11. The locksmiths have hammers and anvils. 12. 
Are those men building houses ] 13. These are building houses, 
and those are building ships. 14. These anvils are not heavy 
enough, 15. Our bodies are not immortal. 16. What men 
have strong arms 1 It. Those merchants and these carpenters 
are my countrymen. 18, Eagles are birds of prey, and 
wolves are beasts of prey. 



LESSON XXVIL Ceciiott XXVII 

1. DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS* 
SINGULAR, 

N. id), I; fot, thou; (@te, you;) 

G. meuter, of me ; fcetner, of thee ; (3%^, of you ;) 

D. ffitr, to, for me; bit, to, for thee; (3|nen, to, for you :) 

A. mid}, me; iid), thee; (®te, you,) 

plural, 

N. mtr, we; t!jr, you; (@te, you,) 

G. tmfer, of us ; euer, of you; (3f)rer, of you;) 

D. utt3, to or for us ; eud), to or for you ; (3f)neit, to, for you ;) 

A. uny, us; tu6> lt you; (®te, you.) 

SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine, Neuter, 

N. er, he; fte, she; t§, it; 

G. feiner, of him ; t^rer, of her; feiner, of it; 

D. ifynt, to, for him ; tfyr, to or for her ; tym, to or fcr it J 

A. i()n, him; fte, her; t$, it* 



PLURAL OF ALL GENDERS* 



■N. fte, they ; 
G. ifyrer, of them ; 
D. fatten, to or for them ; 
A. fte, them, 



88 lesson xxvix. 

SECOND PERSON SINGULAR. 

2. The pronoun of the second person singular is employed, 
as in English, in addressing the Supreme Being ; in proverbial 
phrases, and in serious and sublime styles of composition. It 
is likewise used in addressing relatives, intimate friends and 
children ; as, also, servants and other dependents : 

t)ein $eid) fomme. Thy kingdom come. 

£raue leinem greimbe, menu bu U)n Trust no friend if thou hast not 

ttidjt gepritft' $ajh— $. tested him. 

ffirft mu§t bu faen, First thoxi must sow » 

£>ann fannft bu mctyetu Then thou canst mow. 

2Ba6 $afl b« gefjijrt' ? Wnat have 7 0U heard ? 

Saturn, bein Se$rer I©Bt bid) nirf)t. Jolln > y aur teacher does not praise 

you. 

SECOND PERSON PLURAL. 

3. The second person plural * denotes, mainly, in this num- 
ber, the same class as that to which feu is applied in the singu* 
lar. It is employed in addressing religious assemblies : 

SB arm lemet i§r euere £eclionen? When do you learn your lessons? 

itutber, euer £ef)rer lofct euc§ md)t. Children, your teacher does not 

praise you. 

Obs. — Formerly (as at present in French and English), the prevailing 
form, as being the more polite and respectful, was that of the second, 
instead of the third person plural, and in some portions of Germany, 
among the peasantry, its use is still retained. Usually, however, when 
addressed to a single individual, it implies his inferiority of position i 
£>ct3 glaufct u)r ttrirfUcj) ? fagte ber Do you really believe that ? said 

StM$. the king. 

THIRD PERSON SINGULAR. 

4. The pronouns of the third person singular are sometimes 
used as the second, and indicate the inferior position of the 
person addressed : 

(£r tfl ettt glMItdjet 3ftenfd}> You are (he is) a happy man. 



* This form is still retained in the syllable (£ro. (contraction of (£tx>er, 
an obsolete orthography of euer), which is now used only with titles, 
and is followed by a plural verb : 
&tt). (eure) ^aj.eftat fiiib vW tti^iger Your majesty is (are) much mor© 

al£ i$* witty than L 



DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



S9 



THIRD TERSON PLURAL. 



5. In ordinary address, the form of the third person plural 
oi' the pronoun is applied, as well to one, as to more individuals ; 
hence, when spoken^ the person and number intended must be 
inferred from the context, or the manner of the speaker. 

In writing, however, ©ie and 3|t, except at the beginning 
of a sentence, are made to designate the second person by 
means of capital initials (§ 57). 



9?ein, idj Ubt Bit mcfjt. 
Soften <3ie 3§re gremtbe ? 
9Mn, ifylobt fte ni$t> 
£aben Bit 3IJ re SSit^er? 
£>akn bie ©djiiter tl;re Sucker? 
£)ie ^cfjmlerin fjat tfyre S3itc^er* 
£>te il tuber fyxfcen if)re Silver. 



Do ?/ow praise me? 
No, I do not praise you. 
Do you praise your friends? 
No, I do not praise them. 
Have you your books? 
Have the scholars their books 3 
The scholar has her books. 
The children have their books*. 



Seifptele* 

©tngp- £>u? (ftngen Bit ? ftngt i$r ?) 

©e^ctt Bit biefe §3dtmte ? 

3a, roir fe^en fte. 

Btfytw <Bie un$ ? 

3a, U)tr fe§en Bit. 

Se^en @ie jene (Sngldnberin? 

9cein, n>ir fe$en ffe nicfyt* 

©ie^t fte (Surf) ? 

9tan, fte fie$t un£ m$t* 



Examples. 

Do you sing ? 

Do you see these trees? 

Yes, we see them. 

Do you see us ? 

Yes, we see you. 

Do you see that Englishwoman ? 

No, we do not see her. 

Does she see you? 

No, she does not see us. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



£>;e San!, -, pi. SBdnfe, the bench; 

2) em, thy, your; 

(Suer, your ; 
£>er %a&)tx, -3, pi. -, the fan; 

Serttg, ready, prepared; 
£)er gmgertyut, -e£, pi. -§itte, the 
thimble ; 

Sreunblidj, kind, friendly; 
£)te ©an3, -, pi. ©dnje, the goose; 
2)er ©erber, -6, pi. -, the tanner; 
2)er ■&anbfd)it$, - e£, pi -e, the glove ; 

§0$, high; 



3^r, her, their; 
'Die Jht$, -, pi. tfityc, the cow; 

£d'd)eln, to smile; 
£>er £eud)ter, -3, pi. -, the candle* 
stick ; 

9?a£, wet; 
£>a£ Regiment', -e3, d1. -er, the reg* 
iment; 

(5d)led)t, bad; 
Der <3d)leier, -$, pi. -, the vail; 
2)er 2£eg, -c$, pi. -e, the way. 



90 LESSOK XXVII. 

Exercise 50. SlufgaBc 50* 

1. £aft in beme $anbfdnri)e? 2. SReht, mem Sruber tjat jlc, 
8. S8o ftnb beine greunfce? 4. ©ie flirt in tl)ren 3immern. 5* 
©inb 3^re ©tiit)Je in 3fyrem Simmer ? 6. 3<*, pe. ftnb in meinem 
Stmmer* 7. £abt tfjr cure gingerl;iite ? 8* 9tein, eure greunte 
fyahn fte* 9. Sure greunbe loben eud). 10. ©etb il)rretd)? 11. 
SCer lobt ben ©filler ? 12. SBarum ladjelt feme SRutter unb ladjen 
if)re tftnber? 13. 2Ser lofct Me ©cplerur? 14. Die Secretin i\t 
freunblid; gegen ba^ $inb. 15. SBer lobt bte &inber? 16. 3$re 
greunbe lo&en fie. 17. £er Slrgt Mt ©ie. 18. 2Ba$ ftyicft tie 
2e^rerin i^rer Gutter? 19. ©ie fd)idt il)r etnen ©cfyleter uni) einen 
gadser. 20. SBaS ser|>red)en ©ie mir ? 21. 3d) ^erfpredje 3fynen 
ntd)t3. 22. SBay ^crfprec^en ©ie 3^en ©d)itiern ? 23. 3d) *#* 
fpredje i^nen nid)t$. 24. 3J5a$ fd)iden ©ie bem OerBer? 25. 3d) 
fc^icfe U)m ia$ @efo. 26. $3er lauft Me ®anfe unb bte tf itye ? 
27. Tie @erber faufen fie* 28. ©inD bte SBege troden mi gut? 
29. 9iein f fie ftnb nap nni fdjledjt. 30. ©tnb ik 23dnte fcfyon fer^ 
tig ? 31. SCem gefyoren biefe 2eud)ter ? 32. ©ingen bie Softer 
3f)rer 9lad)barin? 33. $ommt3$r greunb ait<3 bem JRegimente ? 

Exercise 51. SlufgaBe 51. 

1. Have you my gloves ? 2. No, your friends have them. 
3. Do you see your mother ? 4. No, I do not see her. 5. Do 
your brothers know where the candlesticks are? 6. Yes, they 
know where they are. 7. Has the scholar her books and her 
pencils? 8. Yes, she has them in her desk. 9. Are your 
benches too high? 10. Yes, they are too high. 11. What do 
you promise your scholars? 12. I do not promise them any 
thing. 13. Do your brothers promise you any thing? 14. 
Yes, they promise me something. 15. What does the scholar 
send her teacher? 16. She sends her a vail. It. Are your 
fans too small? 18. No, they are too large. 19. Do the tan- 
ners buy the cows? 20. No, the butchers buy them. 21. Are 
the scholars friendly toward the children ? 22. Yes, they are 
playing with them. 23. Have you the knives ? 24. Yes, 1 
have then. 25. Are they on your table? 26. No, they are 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 91 

on ray desk. 2?* Are your friends reading? 28. No, they 
are writing. 29. What are they writing 1 30. They are writ- 
ing letters. 31. Are you writing your father a letter % 32. 
Yes, I am writing him a letter. 



LESSON XXVIII. flection XXVIII. 

PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

1. The genitive of the personal pronouns does not (like tha», 
of nouns, L. IX. 1) indicate possession, but simply answers 
to our objective with (and sometimes without) a preposition: 

(£3 fmb unfer ttter. There are four of us (of us four). 

SBergtB' me titer mci)U Forget me not. 

2)a$ tjr beiner tuvrourbtg. That is unworthy of thee (of thee 

unworthy). 

2. The genitive of the first and second persons sing, of the 
personal pronouns, is often contracted to the form of the nomi- 
native masculine and neuter of the possessive. The genitives of 
the other pronouns are sometimes similarly abbreviated : 

3$ bctifc bet it (-er) wcrnt ber <8otme I think of thee when the glimmer 

©djimmer x>om Sfteere frrctfytt. — ©♦ of the sun beams from the sea. 
33ergtB' me in {for mc liter) tttcfyt. Forget me not (see 1). 

Q)et>cnf'e feitt (for f enter) ♦ Remember (think of) him. 

3. The dative with son is employed in rendering our pos- 
sessive with of when used partitively : 

(£r tft em gretmb a on mtr* He is a friend of mine (of me). 

@ie fmb 2>erroanb'te a on im$» They are relatives of ours (of us). 

4. Pronouns referring to neuter appellations of persons, 
generally follow the natural, rather than the grammatical, gen- 
der (§ 6, 2) : 

(Bein "SiJlmdjen tft fmnf, tdj furcate er His little son is sick; I fear he will 

(or c$) rotrb jferben. d'e. 

'DaS SJcabdjcn §at ifyr (fetn) S3u$* The girl has her book. 

5. Pronouns representing inanimate objects must be of the 
sarQ9 gender as the nouns to which they refer ; hence our neuter 



#2 LESSON XXVIII. 

pronoun must often be expressed in German by the masculine, 
or feminine : 

Der £ut tjt fdjon, after e r tjt fletn* The hat is fine, but it is small 

Die $tii£e iff fdjon, after fie ijr flcitt* The cap is fine, but & is small 

3$ IjaU ben §ut ntcf)t, fie §at ifyn. I have not the hat, she has it. 

©ie §at bie 2ttu§e nicl)t, er f)at ft e. She has not the cap, he has it. 

6. In German a pronominal adverb (applied to things) an- 
swer to a preposition and a pronoun, as commonly emplc/ed 
in English : 

3$ tyafte cinen Dfen, after fetn getter I have a stove, but no fire in it 

b a r i n (not in ifjm) . (therein). 

(Er fdjnetbet fetnen 2tyfel imb giftt mtr He cuts his apple and gives me a 

ein <5tucf b a » o n (wo* tton t§m)» part o/ & (thereof). 

&r tyat iljre geber unb fcfyretftt bam it* He has her pen and writes with it 

(therewith). 

T. The neuter pronoun, e3, employed as a grammatical sub- 
ject, may represent nouns of all genders, and in both numbers. 
The verb, however, must agree in number with the noun, while 
in English it agrees with the pronoun : 

2Ber tjt e3? Who is it? 

(£3 ift ein grember* It is a stranger. 

(£3 finb unfere alten gretmbe roel^e It is (are) our old friends that we 

rotr fetyetu see. 

(Binb e 3 Sterne ? is it stars? (are they stars ?) 

8. When the logical subject is itself a personal pronoun, c3 
follows the verb ; this being exactly the reverse of the English 
construction : 

SdjftmeS* It hi. SrtjteS, It is he. 

StnbSteeS? Is it you? ©eib ifyr e$?is it you\ 

©inb fie e 3 ? /s it they? Sir finb e$* It is we. 

9. & 3 before a verb followed by its subject, frequently an 
swers to there, but is often used for the sake of emphasis, where 
in our language a like construction is not admissible : 

<£ 3 tjt nientanb im (L. 20. 4) £aufe* There is nobody in the house. 

(£ $ finb brei 23udjer ba*. There are three books there. 

(£3 &te$t ein (tiller (EngeL TAere moves a quiet angel. 

(£ 3 pallet ber Conner fo lattt (instead There resounds the thunder so loud 

o/ber Gunner pallet fo laut)* (The thunder resounds so loud). 

(£3 lettdjtet bie <3onne itfter 23of 1 unb The sun shines upon (the) bad and 

©ute (bie (Sonne leudjtet, *c.)«— ©♦ (the) good. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 93 

10. (£ 3 sometimes refers to a previously expressed noun, or 
adjective, and may be rendered one or so ; e£ is likewise some- 
times so used as not to require translation : 

(£r tf! <&§mkb, abtx ity Mtt e 3 nidjt* He is (a) smith, but I am not one. 

SBtr ftnb md)t ctEe gleicij unb f fatten e3 We are not all alike and can not 

nidjt fetit* — ©♦ be so. 

3d) fceijj e 3 bag er ae^t* I know (it) that he is going. 

11. When pronouns of several different persons are the sub- 
jects of a plural verb, the first person is preferred to the second, 
and the second to the third ; often, however, the plural of the 
pronoun is employed after others which are in the singular : 

2)u Uttb ber Jfrtafce fafjen e$* You and the boy saw it* 

S$ ttetg ntd}t toa$ bit unb tdj fa$etu I do not know what you and I saw. 

£>u unb id) nut fa^en e$. You and I (we) saw it. 

12. For the sake of additional emphasis, a pronoun is some- 
times repeated, or placed after its noun in apposition with it : 

<Bc fcieler (Sdjtteben eble$ Slut, e$ The noble blood of so many Swedes 

tft urn ©olb unb ©ttfcer nidjt ge* (it) has not flowed for gold and 

floff'en. — ©♦ silver. 

Unb bie £ugenb fte tft !ein leerer And virtue (it) is no empty sound. 

13. The genitive of the personal pronouns, when referring to 
individuals, is often used before numerals (like the French en), 
in which position it seldom requires translation : 

(£r ^at brei SBruber uttb i$ II a trois freres, et moi He has three brothers, 
$aBe tyxtx nuv (Sinetw je v?en ai qu'un. and I have cnly one. 

Self)) tele. Examples. 

<£$ if! nidjt ctlleS ©olb tt>a§ glanjt- Not ail is gold that glitters (see 10). 
(£$ ttuberfa^rt' SKatufyem metyr (Efyre, There happens to many a one more 

ctl$ er socrbtent' honor than he deserves. 

SBir f)aBen beater gettxxr'tet (see 1). We have waited for thee. 
3$ Miefc mettter nid)t metyr madjttg. I remained no longer master of 

myself. 
£)ctrunter leibet feme (Etgenttefte. His self-love suffers by this (thereby). 

(Sr i(! ein SScrttanbter son un$* He is a relative of ours. 

<£$ ftnb unfer brei, unb U)rer fitnf. There are three of us, and five of 

them. 



94 LESSON XXVIII. 

3$ fy*Be ben $aH ntdjt, <Sie ^aBen tfytt. I have not the ball, you have it. 

(Er fjctt rnetne $eber unb fcfyreiBt bamtt. He has my pen and is wiitingwithit 

&$ fdjeuet ba$ fcofe ©ettiffen £id)t unb The guilty conscience shuns light 

%aa. — ©. and day. 

SBer ttopft? 3$ Mtt e*. Who is rapping? It is I. 

6inb <Ste e£ ? Set* ttrir jtnb eS. Is it you ? Yes, it is we. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



2)te ftkumttolle, -, pi. -, the cotton ; 
2)it 23riicfe f --, pi. -n, the bridge; 

£)amit, with it; 

£)arauf, on it; 

©arm, in it; 

£>ort, yonder; 
£)er Drefcfyer, -3, pi.-, the thrasher; 
£>er gctrber, -3* pi. -r the dyer; 
£)er glacl)'$, -e3, pi. -, the flax; 
£>er 4>anff -e3, pi. -, the hemp; 



Der $amm, -e$, pi. ^tfmnte, comb; 
2)te Sftabel, -, pi. -tt, the needle; 

dltycn, to sew; 
£>te ©eibe, -, pi. -n, the silk; 
2)a3 ©eilf -e3, pi. -e, the rope ; 
£)er i&eiler, -3, pi. -, the ropemaker ; 
iDte ©telle, -, pi. -n, place, situation ; 
£)er 2Bebcr, -3, pi. -, the weaver; 
£)te 2Bottc, -, pi. -, the wool ; 
£)er Bijftncr, -0, pi. -, toll-gatherer. 



Exercise 52. SXufgabe 52* 

1. $auft ber (Seller ben ipanf ? 2. 3a, er lauft vfyn. 3. 3jl 
biefer $tad}3 nidjt gut ? 4. 5ftein, er tft ntc^t gut. 5. Stauft ber 
©etler fete SBoKe? 6. 9Utn, ber 2Bekr lauft fte. 1. $auft ber 
SBeber bie Saummotte? 8. 5^ein, ber ©refdjer fauft fte. 9. $3er 
lauft bas ©eil? 10. £er SRatrofe fauft ea. 11. £at *at 2Wab* 
&)tn bie Sftatcl ? 12. 3a, fte $at bie 9?abel unb nai)t barni-t. 13. 
SSoiftmem torn? 14. gr liegt auf Sfyrem £ifd)e. 15. 3d) 
|ak einen guten Dfen in meinem 3i mmer / a ^er e3 tft !em geuer 
bavin. 16. $auft ba^ 9J£abd)en Die ©eibe? IT. 9Mn, fie fauft 
fie nto^t. 18. ©el)en ©te ben QbUntx bort auf ber 23riide? 19. 
9lein, id) fefye iJjn nidjt, jletjt er barauf ? 20. £er SSBrter ift fletpig, 
e5er fein 9?ad)bar, ber garter, ift eg nidrt. 21. ©predjen ©ie mit 
bet ©d)itlem ? 22. 3<*, ^ fprecfee mit U)nen. 23. ©djreiten ©ie 
mit ben SBlelfiiften ? 24. 3 ft, id) fdjret&e bamtt 25. £at 3t)r 
SSruber eine angenefjme ©telle? 

Exercise 53. Slufgafie 53. 

1. Who sells the cotton'? 2. The weaver buys it, but he 
does not sell it. 3. Have the children their ball 1 4. No, the 
girls have it. 5. You often play with the children, and your 



REFLEXIVE USE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 95 

brother often teaches them. 6. I am not playing with them 
now, I am teaching them. 7. Are the scholars writing with 
our pencils ? 8. Yes, they are writing with them. 9. Who 
buys the wool ? 10. The weaver buys it. 11. Does he buy 
the hemp ? 12. No, the ropemaker buys it. 13. Does the 
dyer buy the flax? 14. No, our friend, the merchant, buys it 
for the weaver. 15. What is lying on the table yonder? 16, 
The needle and the silk are lying on it. IT. What have the 
toll-gatherers in their trunks'? 18. They have their money 
and their clothes in them. 19. Are the girls sewing with tha 
needles? 20. Yes, they are sewing with them. 21. Whom do 
you see on the bridge ? 22. I do not see any body on it. 23 
Does the sailor buy the rope ? 24. No, the merchant buys it 
25. Has the thrasher the cotton ? 



LESSON XXIX. £*ction XXIX. 

REFLEXIVE USE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

1. The personal pronouns of the first and second persons are 
often used reflexively ; answering to our compound personal 
pronouns in the objective case : 

3d) toBe mt$«. I praise myself. 

£>tt loBjl bi$* Thou praisest thyself. 

3Br XoBt end). You praise yourselves. 

3d) geben'fe m e t n e r* I think of myself. 

£);t gebenf ft beiner. Thou thinkest of thyself. 

3d) ttevfpre^'e mir ntdjtS* I do not promise myself any thing. 

2Sa3 »erfyre$t' ttjr eu$? What do you promise yourselves ? 

% There is in the third person a pronoun (f id}) which is 
used only reflexively. It is indeclinable, and occurs only m 
the dative and accusative; answering to all our compound per- 
sonal pronouns of the third person : 

2)er SRctmt Tot)! fid). The man praises himself. 

2>ie grau loBt f i dj. The woman praises herself 

£>a$ itinb loBt ft d> . The child praises itself. 



9$ 



LESSON XXIX* 



(£3 fomten ftd) trar SBetttge re^te'ren, 
ben Serftanb' aerjMn'big gel>rau'** 
d)tn* — <&. 

<£r $erfprtd)t f ftd) et»a§» 

Sttcm fd)metcfyelt ftdj eft* 

g)ie JHnber serfpred/en ftdj etfta$* 

3d) benfe beta, ttenn ftdj be$ SD^onbc^ 
glimmer in DueEen malt* — $♦ 



There can but few govern them- 
selves, (can) nse the understanding 
un der s t an di n gly . 

He promises himself something. 

One often flatters one's self. 

The children promise themselves 
something. 

I think of thee when the moon's glit- 
ter paints itself in fountains. 

8. When our compound personal pronouns are used merely 
to give emphasis (and not reflexively) they should be rendered 
by fe 16 ft , or (e 1 6 er , after the word which it is intended to 
emphasize : 



(Ex klo'^nte btn Sorting feU (!♦ 

<£r feI6 ft klo'tynte btn £d)rltng* 

<Sie f el 6 ft Befudj'te Me £ran?e* 
Sie gin$ ju ber $rcmfen fell) ft 



He rewarded the apprentice Awn- 

He himself rewarded the appren- 
tice. 
She herself visited the patient 
She went to the patient herself. 



4. @e!6ft often follows the reflexive pronouns, and may be 
rendered own, or entirely omitted in translation ; 



©telo&tfld&feBfl* 
SBtrloBettttttSfet&lh 
SBer femtt ftd) fell) (!?—©, 



She praises her (owm) s^lf. 
We praise our (own) selves. 
Who knows himself? (one's self.) 



5. @ e!6ft before a noun answers to the adverb even : 

Sell) (1 feme $einbe adjtett t^n* Even his enemies esteem him. 

Sell) ft feitte gremtbe ^alte.tt t§n fur Even his friends consider him .(hold 
f^ulbtg. him for) guilty. 

6. The reflexive pronouns, of all persons, in the plural, are 
frequently employed, where the signification is sufficiently ob- 
vious, instead of the reciprocal pronoun e i n a n b e r : 

£Btr loBen un$* (instead of) We praise us (i. e. each other). 

$3tr loftett e i n a n' b e r* We praise one another. 

#or eurer Gutter 5(ug 1 &erftort' e it $♦ Before your mother's eye destroy 

— <S 4 each other. 

$Bir toerbett utt$ ttueberfetyett* — ©♦ We shall see each other again. 

£>te S^rcm'tten retdjen ftdj bk §anbe* The tyrants extend to each other 

— @>, their hands (L e. are forming h 

league). 



REFLEXIVE VERBS. 9T 

7. @td), after a preposition, is often best rendered by a 
personal pronoun : 

©rope <£eelen fatten ft dj an ben §im* Great souls hold firmly to Heaven, 

met feji nub laffen Me (Erbe unter and let the earth roll on beneath 

ftd) fertrollen,.— £>. /Aem (selves), 

©te ^atte fetn ©elb Bet ft dj. She had no money with her. 

&at er feirte It^r bet f tdj? Has he his watch with to £ 

8 In interrogative sentences, the personal pronoun, in the 
dative or accusative, is often placed between the verb and its 
subject (when the subject is a noun) : 

go&en i § n feine % x e u nb e ? instead of £oben feint grennbe tfm ? 
2Ba3 fagt i^m ber £er)r?r? " 2£a3 fagt ber Center iljrn? 

S3ie kftn'bet ft $ 3$r greimb ? " SBfe fccjta'tet Sijr greunb ftdj ? 

REFLEXIVE VERBS. 

9. The number of verbs that are used exclusively as reflex 
ive, is much larger in German than in English : 

@te be^e'Ben jtdj in btc g(ud)U They hetake themselves to flight 

(Er fceljUft' ftd) mtt £ fig en. He resorts to falsehoods. 

£)er getnb kmad)'tt$te ftd) bev <5tobt* The enemy took possession (possess- 
ed himself) of the city. 

(Er freftmtt' ftdj Jit tan^e. He bethinks himself too long. 

(Er fcefrrefcr' ftd) e$ ^u Ujutt. He tries (exerts himself) to do it 

SBatitm' eret'fert t^r end) ? Why are you becoming angry ? 

(ES eret'pet ftdj felten* It seldom happens. 

(Er erfyo'It ftdj langfam. He recovers (himself) slowly. 

(Er fcertal'tet ftd> fer)r letdjt* He takes cold very easily. 

$lad) t»cm erfmt'btgt er ftd)? After whom does he inquire ? 

(Er gctraut' ftcr) ntdjt in ftrec&en* He does not dare (venture) to speak 

Ste fdjamen ftct) il)re6 etgenen SBetra'^ They are ashamed (shame them- 

$en£, selves) of their own conduct. 

Sie feljrten ftdj nctdj 9ht$e. They long for quiet, 

©arum' nuberfe^'en S'te ftdj alien met* Why do you oppose (yourself to) 

nen piemen ? all my plans ? 

Unterfrer)}!' bu bid) mtr ba$ &u fagen? Do you venture (presume so far as) 

to tell me that? 

1 0. Many verbs are used reflexively whose equivalents in 
English are employed intransitively or passively : 

S)tc ^otb'ten famnteltcn jtdj um if;rert The soldiers assembled (themselves) 
oUuter. around their loader. 

5 



98 LESSON XXIX. 

;Da$ ^Better f)etlt fid) auf. The weather is clearing (itself) lip. 

SBir Biclten un3 in Berlin' aixf* We stopped (ourselves) in Berlin, 

©te (£rbe brel)t ftdj an itjrer SIdjfe. The earth turns (itself) on its axis. 

£>er pummel Bebeclt' ftd) mit fd}ttar.£en The sky is being covered (covers 

SBotfen* itself) with black clouds. 

<Da3 3Mf empiJrt' ftd) gegen bte £fte* The people rebel against the gov- 

gic'rung. eminent. 

3d) freitc mid) bag er ae^t. I rejoice (myself) that he is going. 

'tISie §aBen fi<$ cntf^lofpen &tt rVmmen. They have determined (themselves) 

to come. 

SBte Beftn'ben 'Bit ftd) ? How do you do ? (find yourself?) 

3d) Befm'be midj fetyr ttK<()l. I am (find myself) very well. 

(£3 ftnbet ft<$ oft eine ®ele'gen$ett. An opportunity is often found. 

£)a3 lajjjt ftd) letdjt benfen. That is (may be) easily imagined. 

JSBeran'bert ftd) nidjt SXHe^ inber SBelt? l>oes not every thing change (itself) 

— ©. in the world? 

(£ttt itying lafterttoHeS £eBen &ufjt ftd) A luxurious vicious life repents (it- 

tn Sfftanget itnb GErnte'briaung aftein'. self) alone in want and degrada- 

— @> # tion. 

$)er SunoUng if! au§ 2BiHfiiBr fonber* The youth is singular, by choice, 

Bar tmb frcut ftdj; ber 9ftann if! e3 and is delighted; the man is so 

mtaBftd)t'Iidj imb argert ftd). — 3£. unintentionally,and is mortified. 

11. Some transitive verbs in taking the reflexive form, un- 
dergo a change of signification (§86 6) : 

<Sr f$itft ftd) itt bie Umflanbe* He adapts himself to circumst^ /*»s. 

<5d fdjitft ftd) ntdjt fo *u fjanbetn. It is not proper to act thus. 

<5r tterfletjt' ftd) auf 9fluftf\ He is a judge of music. 

3d) ijerlaffe nudj auf fte. I depend upon them. 

(£3 ^erpcBt' ftdj bafy e$ ttatyr if!,. Of course (i. *. evidently) it i> ( *m 

S)a$ »erj!e$t' ft$ Son felBft That is a matter of course. 

©eifpicle. Examples. 

*2)ie §anb am<S$»erte,f<$auen fte ft$ The hand on the sword, they £aze 

brotyenb an." threateningly at each other. 

^5o ttuberfpredj'en bte Dratelftdj. — €>♦ So do the oracles contradict 011L 

other. 

*(£$ ^crBer'gen ftdj nodj 23iele in bie* Many still conceal the ow^es wit!*- 

fen 9ttauern>" in these walls. 

3$ freue midj, bag <£te nidjt ge^en. I am glad that you do not gc. 

3$erf!ct)'en <3ie ftdj auf £ndj ? Are you a judge of cloth ? 

(£r Bradj in bie Bitterfren $orn?urfe ge«* He broke out in (into) tne bitterest 

gen jt$ felBer auS*— 9*— £♦ reproaches agains, iiixfcyelf. 



REFLEXIVE VERBS, 



99 



VOCABuLARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$)ie 2T$fe, -, pi. -tt, tlie axis; 

2Irf)tett, to esteem ; 

23et, in, with; 

23efcfrei'ben, modest; 

SBctra'gen, to behave; 
$>er £>tener, -0, pi. -, the servant; 

©rc^etl* to turn; 

(Jtncm'ber, each other; 
k h*i (£rbe, -, pi. -tt, the earth; 

(Erfctl'teit, to take cold ; 



£)te gran, -, pi. -en, the woman; 

®ut, (<wfo.) well;* 

©iijlagctif to strike, to beat; 

<Sd)meid)cIn, to flatter; 

Setoff, see 4. 5 ; 

Sid), see 2; 

%,ab elitr to blame; 
2)er 23unbar$t, -e3, pi. -arjte, tha 
surgeon. 



Exercise 54. 



SlufgaBe 54. 



L SBarum loBfl bit bt$ ? 2. 3* Me mt$ ntd)t. 3. SCer Iott 
ftd ? 4. Setter 5tener loBt fid). 5* SEarum tabelt tt)r end) ? 
6. SBir tabetn una md)t. 7. Sette gran loft fic^. 8. Xiefe Rim 
ber fcfclagen fid). 9. SBarum fd)lagen fie ft* ? 10. 3ene ©dmfer 
$affen etnanter. 11. Skrum fdmetdetn ©te fid)? 12. 3d) 
fd)meid)te mid) ntdjt. 13. ©et)en ©te ^u tern SBunfcarjte feltft, ober 
gu fetnem 33ntber? 14. (M)en ©te feXBft 3U bent SBimbarjte, ober 
fdtden ©te 35ren Wiener? 15. ©eftft tie getnbe biefes 9Rannc3 
adten unt> Men rfyn. 16. Sin Befdeftener SDJann hit fid) fellft 
nidt. 17. man erfaftet fid) letdt bet fotdem better. 18. Eicfe 
Winter Mragen fid) nidt gxtt. 19. $He oft breljt fid) bte Srtc ttm 
ike2l(ife? 20. SCte erlaitet fid 3$r Eiener? 21. gr erfaltet ft* 
nidt. 22. Setragen fid) bte ©driller gut ? 23. Unfere ©driiler 
Betragen fid) tmmer fetyr gut. 24. ©te ftnb ntd)t 3v r eigener gretmb, 
benn ©te fdjmetdjeln fid;. 25. Sin maljrer greunb fd;tnetd)elt nte. 



Exercise 55. 



SlufgaBe 55. 



1. The idle scholar blames himself.- 2. Do you praise your- 
self? 3. Why does not the boy behave himself well ? 4. Do 
you take cold easily? (do you easily take cold ?) 5. Do you 
see yourself? 6. Do you see the surgeon himself? T. Do 
you see the surgeon yourself? 8. Really good men flatter 
themselves sometimes. 9. The earth turns on its axis. 10. 
Even the enemies of a good man esteem him. 11. In what 
kind of weather does one take cold easily? 12. Does this 



100 LESSON XXX. 

woman blame herself? 13. She blames nerself, but her friends 
do not blame her. 14. Those children strike each other. 15. 
Do modest men praise themselves ? 16. Dost thou blame 
thyself? 17. I do not blame myself. 18. Does the servant 
praise himself 19. No, he blames himself. 20. Do you flat- 
tei yourselves? 21. We do not flatter ourselves. 22. Why 
do you blame each other ? 23. Do those men understand each 
other ? 24. They do not hear each other. 25. We visit each 
other very often. 



LESSON XXX. flection XXX. 

NEW DECLENSION PLURAL. 
ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives in the plural, when they follow btefe, fettle, or 
a word of that class (L. XXV. 1) end. in all their cases, in en, 
and are of the 

NEW DECLENSION. 

N. btefe gut-en (banner); feine gut-en (Scanner); 

G. btefer gut-en (^tanner); feinet gut-en (banner); 

D. biefen gut-en (Wanmvn) ; fetnen gut-en (9Kannern) ; 

A. biefe gut-en (3Jianner): feine gut-en (banner*). 



2. Nouns of the new declension have all cases of the plural 
¥iKv> the oblique cases of. the singular (L. XXII.), except £err, 
which cakes only n in the singular, and en in the plural : 
]Si. tie Ungar-n, bie *ftejfe-n, Me @ctbat-en, 
G. ber Ungar-n, ber -Jteffe-n, bet @o(i>at-en, 
D. ben Ungar-n, ben 9teffe-n, ben ©cli>at-en, 
A. bie Ungar-n, bie S^ejfe-n, bie ©otoat-en* 



* In what respect is the form Sftdmter, an exception to Rule 7 L. XXV f 
See L. XXVI. 3. 



DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 101 

FEMININE NOUNS. 

3. Fern mine nouns, except those ending in fimft and nf$, 
and those contained in the list page 276, form their plural ac- 
cording to the new declension. Those ending in the suffix in 
double the n in the plural ; as, greunttn, SreimDtmtetu 

N. We 331ume-n, tie U|r-en, We @d)ft>efter-n, We SRafcel-n 

G. ter 33(ume-n, r^er Ufyr-en, t»er ©djmefter-n, ter 9tat>el— n 

D. ten 23lume-n, tenUl)r-en, ten ©djmefter-n, ten 9latel~tt 

A. tie Slume-n, tie Ul)r-en, tie @d)ft>efier-n, tie S^atel-tt 

DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 

4. Proper names of persons usually take d in the genitive, 
except feminines ending in e, which add n£ : 

Nom. jpemrtd), Henry, Gen. £einrid)-3, Henry's, 

Norn. ®ott)e ; Goethe, Gen. ©ctfye-$, Goethe's, 

Nom. ©evtrut, Gertrude, Gen. ©ertrut-3, Gertrude's, 

Nom. £I)arlotte, Charlotte, Gen. &{jarlotte-n£, Charlotte's. 

5. Masculine nouns ending in such a letter that euphony 
will not admit of an additional $, add in the genitive en 3: 

Nom. Dptj3, Opitz, Gen. Dpij3-en$, Opitz's, 

Nom. %van$, Francis, Gen. grcm3-en3, Francis'. 

6. Masculine nouns whose endings would admit of $ in the 
genitive, sometimes (though rarely) add n$ or en£, and it or 
en in the dative and accusative : 

itemtt U)r STbal&er't-en (instead of Do you know (are you acquaint- 
2lbai6ert) ? ed with) Adalbert ? 

FOREIGN PROPER NAMES. 

7. Foreign proper names, if the final letter admit of it, 
usually form the genitive by adding 3, frequently preceded by 
the apostrophe ; those of other terminations generally indicate 

.the case by means of the article; the noun being unchanged: 

(£r Itefl 93ijron$ ©ebidj'te. He is reading Byron's poems. 

£)te IReben be3 £)cmo3'n)ene$ ftnb The orations of Demosthenes are 

toeliberii'fjmt. world-renowned. 

©ie§ ba! fter) ba, Stmo'tfyeuS, bie Jlra* See there! see there, Timotheus, 

nic^e bed 3&\)fa$. — <3. the cranes of Ibycus. 



102 



LESSON XXX. 



8. Proper names of places and countries form their genitive 
by adding g, if the final letter admit of it, otherwise the case 
is indicated By the article : 

£>te beutfd^e greu)ctt erljo'B ft# au§ The German freedom rose from 
2fta0bebitrg 1 $ $fd)e.— (S. Magdeburg's ashes. 

Die <£tntt>o$tter ber Stabt 3>arU'. (L. The inhabitants of the city (o/) 
LIX. 1.) Paris 



Setfptele* 



Examples. 



Die ©adjfen frattbett burdj eittett Breitett The Saxons stood separated Dy a 

Sttrifdjettrauttt ttoit ben <Sdjroebett ge* wide intervening space from tho 

trermt\ — <&. , Swedes. 

2HIe ©utett, aEe SBofett folgen tfjrer All (the) good, all (the) bad follow 



Sftofenfour* — <3. 
Die Ddrtett ftnb gefd)tcfte 9J?atro'fetn 
Die Surfeit ftnb gute ©olba'teit* 



her rosy path. 
The Danes are skillful sailors. 
The Turks are good soldiers. 



Die Sftuffen unb 9)reugen uttterbritcf en The Russians and Prussians op- 



bie 3>oieru 



press the Poles. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Die SMette, -, pi. -it, the bee ; 
Die 3Mrrte, -, pi. -n, the pear; 
Die (£euft'ne, -, pi. -it, the consin; 
Der Dane, -n, pi. -it, the Dane; 

Duftiq, fragrant ; 

Sett, fat; 

Sriebtidj, peaceful; 
Die ©afrel, -, pi. -it, the fork; 

©efd)tcfr', skillful; 
Der £effe, -it, pi. -it, the Hessian ; 
Die kanid, -, pi. -it, the pulpit; 
Der Dd)3, -en {or £Dd)fe,-tt), pi. -en, 
the ox: 



9)atrio'tif$, patriotic; 
Dte spflaume, -, pi. -n, the plum; 
Da<3 ^c^eflcm', -&, pi. -e, the porce- 
lain ; 
Der ^reuge, -it, pi. -it, the Prussian ; 
Die $ebe, -, pi. -it, the oration ; 
Die SRofe, -, pi. -it, the rose; 

^d)lad)tett, to slaughter; 
Der ©cfytt>ebe, -it, pi. -it, the Swede; 
Die £ctffe, -, pi. -it, the cup; 
Da3 3*olf,-e3, pl.#i>(fer, the people; 

SBeltfcerutymt, world-renowned. 



Exercise 56. Sluf gaBe 56. 

1. £ie $reu§en, £effen, SBaiertt unb ©adjfen ftnb £eutf$e* 2* 
T)ie £eutfd}en ftnb ein fleigiges, frietltd^ed SSoIf* 3. £ie grango* 
fen, §)oIen, Stiirlcn .unb Urigarn ftnb gcinbe fc er SFluffcn* 4. Die 
©olDaten laufcrt unb f&la&ten Die fetten Dcfcfen. 5. 3^iefe ffetnen 
JEnafcen fytibm SBirnen, $)flaumen, $irfd;en unb Slprtfofen. 6. £ie 
©d)uterinuen gef)en ju ^cn gc^rcrinncn. ?♦ 3$re ©(plerinnen 
ftnb unfere Soufinen. 8. Die patriotifdjen 3ieben beS jDemofttjenes 



DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 103 

(ink totliimitjmt. 9. Die neuen Ufjren imb $eiten imferer greim* 
Himctt ftnft »on ©oil). 10. Diefe SRofen unb Sftelfen jmb fdjBnc 
Slumcn. 11. Die S'cmjeln in jenen $ird)en ftnt) gu l)od). 12. 
Die fietfjigeti SStenen ItcBen bie buftigen Slumen. 13. Sfteine 
©c^wcjlern f)aben meine neuen gebern. 14. Diefe Sajfen ftnb fcoit 
$or3ellan, bie ©akin »on Sitter. 15. Die @d)toebett unb Diinen 
ftnb gefdjidte SWatrofen. 

Exercise 57. Slttfgate 57. 

1. These Germans are Bavarians, Hessians, Prussians and 
Saxons. 2. Those boys sell pears, plums and cherries. 3. 
The cups are of porcelain. 4. The French are a patriotic people. 
5. Who buys and slaughters the oxen of the soldiers? 6. Are 
these sailors Danes, Swedes or Russians ? 7. Are the Russians 
and Turks skillful sailors ? 8. Who sells the soldiers the fat 
oxen? 9. Are these roses and pinks fragrant and beautiful 
flowers ? 10. Are not the pulpits in these new churches high 
enough? 11. Do the industrious bees love all beautiful flowers % 
12. Are the Danes an industrious, peaceful people ? 13. Have 
our cousins our pens and our books ? 14. The boys in our 
schools read the world-renowned orations of Demosthenes. 
15. These cups and those forks belong to the nephews of those 
old sailors. 

Remark. — By means of the appended table the pupil will 
be enabled to compare at one view the various terminations 
which have been separately given him in the preceding Lessons. 
This arrangement will both serve the purpose of a more general 
review, and at the same time be well adapted to fix in the mem- 
ory the peculiarities of the different declensions. The endings 
of the adjective, especially, in its various modes of -inflection, 
as well as the words by which those endings are affected, should 
receive a patient attention. 



104 



LESSON XXX. 



9. CONNECTED VIEW OE THE ARTICLE, DEMONSTRATIVE 

IN ALL 



Masc. Fern. Neut. 
N. ber, bte, bad, 
G. be3, ber, beS, 
D. bem, ber, r>em, 
A. ben, bte, ba3, 



SINGULAR. 

biefer, btefe, biefeS, 

biefe3, biefer, biefeS, 

biefem, biefer, btefem, 

biefert, btefe, biefer, 



Mast, 



Fern, Neut, 



metn, metne, metn, 

meine 3, meiner, meinem 

meinem, meiner, meinem* 

meinen, metne, mem. 



$ut, 


3a$r, 


SWtttel, 


Inttes, 


3afyre$, 


TOttete, 


■fmte, 


Sa'^re, 


TOttel, 


£>ut, 


3a$r, 


$UtteL 



OLD DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE AND NOUN. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Masc. Neut. Neut 

K cutter, gute, gute3, Coffer, 

G. gute3 (en), guter, guteS (en), $offer3, 

D. gutem, guter, gittem, Coffer, 

A. guten, • gate, gute<3, Coffer, 

NEW DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XV.) AND NOUN (l. XXII.). 

Masc. Fern. (L. xxm. 3. obs.) Neut. Masc. Masc. 

N. ber gttte, bte, or meine gute, ba§ gute, Setter, ©raf, 

G. be$ guten, ber, or meiner guten, be3 guten, SSaiern, ©rafen, 

D. bem guten, ber, or meiner guten, bem guten, 33aiem, (^rafen, 

A, ben guten, bk, or meine gute, ba$ gute, S3aiew, ©rafem 

MIXED DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XVI. 1, 2). 



Masc. 

N. mein guter, 
G. metneS guten, 
D. meinem guten, 
A. meinen guten, 



Neut. 
metn gute3, 
ntetneS guten, 
meinem guten, 
mein guteS, 



Masc. 

fein alter, 
feine$ alten, 
feinem alien, 
feinen alten, 



Neut. 
fein altcSr 
feine$ alien, 
feinem alien, 
fein alte3. 



WORDS REQUIRING THE NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut Fern. Fern. 
jeber, jebe, jebeS; beine; fetne; 



alter, 


aEe, 


atfeS; 


ber, 


bie f 


ba3; 


biefer, 


biefe, 


biefe£ ; 



jener, jene, jetted; eine; unfere; 

manner, man^e, mand)e<3; eure; feine; 

einiger, einige, etnigeS; folder, fold^e, fol<$e$; t^re; (L. 23. 3. obs.) 

etlicfyer, etlicfye, etlicfyeS; ftelcfyer, n>eld)e, roetd)e3; meine* 

WORDS REQUIRING THE MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

be in, ein, euer, i^r, mein, fein, uttfer and fein* (L. XVI. 1. nots.) 



CONNECTED VIEW OF THE ARTICLE, ETC. 



105 



AND POSSESSIVE PKONOUNS, ADJECTIVE AND NOUNS, 
DECLENSIONS. 



PLURAL, 



AU Genders. 
bie; Mcfe; meine; 
ber; biefer ; meiner; 
ben; biefen; meinen; 
bie; biefe; meine* 



OLD DECLENSION OP THE ADJECTIVE AND NOUN. 



All Gend. Mdsc. 

Coffer; 



Masc. 



Went. 

gute ; Jfo jf er ; . £itte ; Sctfyre ; 

guter; Coffer; £itte; Scdjre; 

guten; ^uffern; bitten; Saljren; 

gute; Coffer; &iite; Sa^re; 



Neut. 

SKiltcI; 

SDUttei; 

SRtttetnj 

TOtel; 



Fern. 



Fern, 



SBanfe; Silbntffe; 

SBdnfe ; SMbniffe; 

SSdnfen; SBilbniffenj 

Sanfe; SBilbniffe* 



NEW DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XXX. 1*) AND NOUN* 

All Genders. Masc. Mase. Fern, NeuL 

tie guten; meine guten; 83aiern; ©rafen; gebern; £erjen; 

ber guten; meiner guten; SBaiern; Qkafen; gebern; Bergen; 

ben guten; meinen guten; SBatent; ©rafeit; gebetn; #er$en; 

bie guten; meine guten; SBaiern; ©rafen; $ebern; £er$eru 

MIXED DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



atTe gute ; ^ 

aHer pten; 

alien pten; 

aHe gute ; 



All Genders. 
meick gute; 
wetter guten; 
tt>etd)en guten; 
nxldje gute; 



einige groge; 

etntger grogen; 

einigen grogen; 

einige groge. 



WORDS REQUIRING THE NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



aHe;° einige; 
bie; etlidje; 

biefe ; iene ; 



mattdje ; 
metjrere ; 
fcld)e; 



ft eld) e; 
beine; 



eure ; feine ; 
t^re ; unferc ; 
meine; feine* 



* Note, that ifter die, einige, ettidje, manege, mel)rere<?rmefire, fbldjeand 
teethe, the adjective sometimes takes a mixed declension (L. XXXI. 9). 



5* 



106 LESSON XXXI* 

LESSON XXXI. faction XXXI. 

IRREGULAR DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

1. The following nouns are inflected according to the new 
declension, (except that they add 3 to en of gen. sing.) : ber 
33ud)ftabe, the letter; ber %tU, the rock; ber griebe, the peace; 
ber gurtfe, the spark; ber ©ebanfe, the thought; ber ©IcmBe, the 
belief; ber £aufe, the heap; ber 9lame, the name ; ber Same, 
the seed ; ber ©d)abe, the damage ; ber SGitte, the will. 

N. ber -gels; ber griebe; ber Warnt^ 

G. be3 gelf-enS; be3 griebe~n3; be$ 9tame-n3; 

D. itrn gelf-en; bem grlebe-n; bem yiamt-~n*> 

A. ten Self-en; ten grtebe-n; ben Sftame-n. 

2. Some of the above words, however, sometimes take in 
the nominative singular en, and are regularly inflected accord- 
ing to the old declension ; as, ber gelfen, be3 SelfenS, etc. 

3. gels and grtebe sometimes follow the old declension in the 
singular; as, ber %zU, be* gelfeS, Inn gelfe, ten geld* 

£)a fell ft bu ben SelS fdjlagetu Thou shalt smite the rock. — Exodus 

xvii. 5. 

4. £er @d)merj forms the genitive by adding en$ ; ba$ £er$ 
adds enS in the genitive and en in the dative, and both form 
their plural according to the new declension (L. XXX. 2). 

5. The following nouns take the old declension in the singular, 
and the new in the plural ; namely masculine, ber 2ll)n, the an- 
cestor; ber 33auer, the peasant; ber £orn, the thorn (§ 15. 3j; 
ber glitter, the spangle; ber gorft, the forest; ber ©cut, the coun- 
try ; ber (Settat'ter, the god-father ; ber Sorteer, the laurel; ber 
UJlajt, the mast; ber 9tad)6ar, the neighbor; ber $fau, the pea- 
cock; ber @ee, the lake; ber ©porn, the spur; ber ©taat, the 
state; ber @tad)e(, the sting; ber ©trat)l, the beam ; ber ©trewp, 
the ostrich (§ 15. 3) ; ber Untertl)cm, the subject; ber Setter, the 
cousin ; ber 3terat or 3ieratt), the ornament. Neuter, bct3 2tuge, 
the e^e; bct3 33ett, the bed; ba£ &nte, the end; ba3 $tmt) f the 
shirt; ta£ £%, the ear. 



IRREGULAR DECLSNStON 01? NOtTNS. 10? 

6. declension of 33 a u e r and Sluge* 

Singular (old). Plural (new). Singular (old). Plural (new), 

N. fcer 23auer, fcte $auer-n, tad Sluge, tie 2iuge-n, 

G. bed 33auer-o ? ber 33cmer-n, bed 2luge^3, bcr %u$t-n f 

D. tern Sauer, ten 33auer-n, bem 2luge, ten 2luge-n, 

A. ben 23auer, tie 83auet-n, i>a6 2luge, tie 2luge-n* 

t. Sett and Jpemfc sometimes take the plural forms SBette and 
£em£er> 

8. !D er @ee signifies the lake; b i e <3ee, the ocean; their form 
is the same in all cases except the genitive singular* ©pottt 
frequently has the plural .©porett, instead of ©pome. 

For further examples of Jtiouns with a mixed declension see 
§19. 

MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES, 

9. After atte, eintge, etlidje, manfyt, meljrere or mel)re, foldje 
and ft) eld) e the nominative and accusative of the adjective some- 
times follow the old) and the other cases the nevj declension^ 
thus forming in the plural also a mixed declension : 

(£r $at eimge pre (or auten) greunbe* He has a few good friends. 
£)ur$ tie ©itte etruger gutcn greunbe. Through the kindness of a few good 

friends. 

Seifpiele* Examples* 

$)er 0lame if! eitt ima,eto5§ttUd)er» The name is an uncommon one. 

3d) ferine Sftiemanb biefeS SfaxmenS* I know nobody by (of) this name. 

®ute giirjlen kfom'men leidjt gute Un* Good princes easily obtain good 

tertt)anen, xtidjt \o leidjt btefe iene. subjects, the latter (do) not so 

— fR. easily (obtain) the former. 

£>ie §)olen unb Ungarn ftnb bie fftadj* The Poles and Hungarians are tha 

Barn ber §3i>t)men. neighbors of the Bohemians. 

£>, eine eblc £immel3gaBe ift baS 8id)t O, a precious gift of Heaven is tha 

beg Surged — ©. light of the eye. 

SBtr ftnb eineS £erjen$r eine^ SBIM3. We are of one heart, of one blood. 

— «. 

©icr Stugen fe$en kjTer aid jtteU Four eyes are better than two (two 

heads are better than one). 

<£$ tji fetne $ofe o$ne ^ornen. There is no rose without thorns, 



108 



LESSON XX%h 



VOCABULARY TO TliE EXERCISES. 



£)te SBctrfe, -, pi. -n, the bark; 
£)er £>ont, -e<3, pi. (§ 15. 3) the thorn; 

©ret (see p. 299.) three ; 

£)rcfd)ett, to thrash; 
£)er (Elegant', -en, pi. -en, elephant ; 

(gifl, first; 
£)et griefre, -n$, pi. -> the peace; 
S)e.r Sitrft -en, pi. -en, the prince ; 
£)a3 ©etret'be, -3, pi. -, the grain; 

Sefct, last; 
£)er $faft, -e<3, pi. -en, the mast; 
£)er 9kme, -n3, pi. -n, the name; 

^ennen, to call; name; 



£>ef 3>fctu, -e$, pi. -en, the peacock; 

Oiufen, to call (see nemten); 
2)er Scbmer^ -e$ or -ertS, pi. -en> 

the pain 
£)er <Stactt, -e$, pi. -en, the state; 
1)tx ©tadjel, -$, pi. -rt, the sting; 
£>er ©torcnfrieb, L. XXIY. 6; 
2)er <3tiJrer, -3, pi. -, the disturber; 

Ueberfej3'en, to translate; 
£>er Untertfycm, -3, pi. -en, subject; 

^em'ntgt, united; 

^erur'fac^en, to cause: 
Die 2Be$!pe, -, pi. -n, the wasp. 



Exercise 58> 



Slufgabe 58* 



1* 9J?an ftnbet in ben Sereinigten@taaien feine giirften nnb feine 
ttttterttjanen. 2. Sine Sarfe $at brei SJJaften. 3. Die Sanern 
brefdjen iljr ©etreibe. 4. 3$ ^aBe ben 3Bagen ttteine^ 9lad)ftar3 
unb bie $>ferbe 3fcrer 5ftad)6arn. 5. S3 flnfe feine 9tofen oljneSor* 
ncn* 6. 5DMne SSettew IjaUn brei fdjihte $fauen. 1. 2)ie Dljren 
tew Slepfyanten finb grojjj, feine Jlugen finb fletn. 8. 3d) fenne ben 
SKa-rot, after id) meijj feinen 9lamen nid;t. 9. $leme ©tattyeln $er* 
urfacfcen oft groj^e ©Emergen* 10. 3Ran nennt einen ©tcrer be3 
griebenS einen ©tiirenftteb. 11 ♦ ©eine Settern rufen xi)n f after er 
§i3rt fie nid)t 12. SCiffen ©ie ^n Unterfd)ieb g»ifd)ett "yizxmtn" 
unb "3*nfen" ? 13. 2Bie tifterfe^t man "Stufett" nnb fete "SRetmen"? 
14. £)er Secret ruft tote ^inber in fein Siau$ nnb nennt fie anfmerf- 
fame @d)filer* 15. -Die gebern beg ©traufje* finb fe$r fd)bn> 



Exercise 59. 



Slnfgafte 59. 



1. Do you know how many masts a bark has ? 2. What is 
a disturber of the peace called ? 3. Why does the teacher call 
his scholars into the house ? 4. The elephant has small eyes 
and large ears. 5. Ostriches and peacocks have beautiful 
feathers, and large, ugly feet. 6. How are the words Sftufen 
and Nemten translated ? 7. There are many Germans in the 
United States. 8. Which pupils are idle? 9. All good princes 
have good subjects, but not all good subjects have good princes. 
10, Our old neighbors, the peasants, are thrashing their grain; 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES, 109 

(hey IislVs wheat, oats, rye and barley. 11. Every rose has 
its thorns, 12. The bees and wasps cause great pain with their 
sharp stings. 13. Under what name is that old soldier known 
here 2 ] 4 a Somebody is calling your cousins. 15. Their teacher 
calls them good and attentive scholars. 



LESSON XXX1L Union XXXII, 

comparison of adjectives, 
Comparative/ 

1. Adjectives, which in the positive end in e, form their com- 
parative by adding r, those of other terminations by adding en 

Positive, Comparative* Positive. Comparative. 

ftetfe, wise; metf-er, wiser; milt, mild; mttD-er, milder; 
fein, fine; fein-er, finer; treu, true; freu-er, truer; 
etrel, vain; ett-ler, (L.XII.5.) flip, sweet; fiip-er, sweeter^ 
jlolj, proud; ftol^-er, prouder; Deri), firm; Sert-er, firmer. 

superlative. 

2. Adjectives ending in fc, i, 3, fj, fd), t, U or g, usually form 
the superlative by adding eft; those of other terminations 
add ft : 

Positive. Superlative. Positive. Superlative. 

milD, mild; tntfD-eft, mildest; fret, free; frei-eft, freest; 
ffl§, sweet; fiif-eft, sweetest; lant, loud; laut-eft, loudest f 
jlolj, proud ; ftolj-cjt, proudest; terb, firm; t>er6-fi, firmest; 
lafm, lame; Iaf)m-ft, lamest; ftetf, stiff; ftetf-ft, siiffest* 

3 When the positive is a monosyllable, the root vowels a t 
v, u, generally assume the Umlaut in the other degrees (for 
exre] lions, however, see §. 36. 5.) : 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

alt, old; att-cr, older; alt-eft, oldest; 

grob, coarse ; grofr-er, coarser ; grbt — ft f coarsest ; 

Hug, prudent; ftiig-er, more prudent ; Hiig-fi, most prudent 



110 LESSON XXX1L 

4. The following are of irregular comparison : 

grop, lar^e; grower, larger; grfigt, largest; 

gut, go-d ; beffer, better; fceft, best; 

§od), high; §ot)er, higher; I)od)fi, highest; 

nd)e near n&fyer, nearer; ndd)ft, nearest, next ; 

¥tel, much, many; me$r, more; meift (mrf)rft), most. 

ipod), when used attributively drops its c, also in the positive; 
as, tin $ol)er (not l)od)er) 23erg, a high mountain. 

5. Adjectives are subject to the same rules of declension in 
the comparative and superlative, as in the positive (L. XIV. 3. 
L. XV. 1. and L. XVI. 1): 

®r tjl reiser aU id). He is richer than L 

£r tjt tin md)mx SDlamt aU t$. He is a richer man than L 

<£r tjl ber retdjjle Sftatm. He is the richest man. 

Wltin fcejler $ut if! ntdjt neu. My best hat is not new. 

£)er fcejle £ut if! nid)t fe^r gttt. The best hat is not very good. 

fficffctt 4>ut 1(1 ber kfte ? Whose hat is the best ? 

SBeffen SSud) tft ba$ fcejle ? "Whose book is the best? 

6. When the superlative is used predicatively it usually 
stands in the dative after a m (an bem § 38.) : 

$Mn £ttt tjt am kftetu My hat is the best (lit at the best). 

Wltin SBud) tjt am fcejletu My book is the best. 

<£r tjt am dltejlen son alien. He is the oldest of all. 

©te lefcn a m Beflen. You read the best. 

7. The superlative is often suffixed to the genitive plural of 

all: 

mv: ft* iff ber ^er^nfle, or ) This hat . g ^ finest of 

4 Dte|e; £ttt tjt a m atfetfdjonjtetu J 

©in aflerltefcfteS $mb* A most charming child. 

8. When two qualities of the same object are compared, the 
adjective, without change of form, is qualified by some other 
word : 

Qtr tft m e §r tapfer aU flttg* He is more valiant than prudent. 

CEr tft \x> e n t g e r tapfer aid flug. He is less valiant than prudent. 

f£r tjt eben fo tapfer aU flag* He is just as valiant as prudent. 

9. Participles ere subject to the same rules of comparison 



COMPARISON Of ADJECTIVES. Ill 

and declension as the adjective, except that they do not take 
the Umlaut ; and in the present f t , instead of e f t , is added : 

(Sin rittjrenbere^ Sd)aufpteL A more touching spectacle. 

t)*& rit^renbjre <SdjaufpteL The most touching spectacle. 

10. 3e — btfto, or \t — je (with the comparative) answers to 
the — the in English : 

Se alter befto (or ie) eljrroitrbtger. The older the more venerable. 

Se efyer ber 23ote gefjt, urn befto kffer The sooner the messenger goes the 

fiir im$» better for us. 

Se Idnger je liefer- The longer the better. 

11. After the latter of these words ( — befto, or — je) the verb 
precedes its subject : 

Se fleijjiger roir ftnb, befto fdjnetter The more industrious we are, the 

lernen Voir (instead ofmx lernen). faster we learn (learn we). 

Se $o$er man ift bejlo liefer farm man The higher one is* the deeper on© 

fatten. can (can one) fall. 

Se Idnger id) mittljm BefawitMn, oefto The longer I am acquainted with 

liefcer iotrb er mir* him, the more dear he becomes 

to me. 

SBctj>tele* Examples. 

£$ tfl ntdjtS aU em Mofjer 2Bct§tt* It is nothing (else) than a mere 

— £)♦ illusion, 

(Er t£ 9ttd)t$ roentger att metn He is nothing less than(lieis) my 

greunb. friend. 

)z mer)r ©oiieS** unb ^eufdjenttefce, The more (one's) love of God and 

bejro roeniger <Self>er4*teBe. — SR. of man, the less (one's) self-love. 

Kn jebem eblen $erj fcrennt ein erotger In every noble heart burns an eter- 

;Durjr nad) etnem ebtent. — 9L nal thirst for (after) a nobler. 

Da3frcr;erei?inbi|lukrattba3oeffere» The more joyous child is every 

— 3£. where the better (one). 

1$ if! nid)t3 erBarm'tidjcr in ber 2Mt There is nothing more pitiable m 

aU ein unentfd)Ioffner fDfenfd). — ©♦ the world than an undecided 

man (human being). 

3cr grogte £>a§ ift rote Me gregte %u* The greatest hatred is lile the great 

genb unb Me fd)limm(len §mtbe, jriu\ est virtue and the worst dogs, 

—at. stin. 

U tjr nut bem SBtflTen rote mit bem It is with (the) knowing as with 
Scfyen, je metyr man ftetjr, bejlo fcef* (the) seeing, the more one seesg 
fer unb angene^mer ift e$. the better and the more agrees 

able it is, 



112 



lEssoN x%m> 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



f)t, 33ucf)e, -, pi. -n, the beech; 

2Md, thick; 

(£bel, noble ; 
S)te (Stdje, -, pi. -tt, the oak; 

(Entfernt', remote, distant; 
3)er ^elbljerr, -n, pi. -en, the com- 
mander-in-chief; 

©eleljrt', learned; 

©litd lid), fortunate ; 

J?lug, prudent; 
£u JBitft, ~, pi. £itfte, the air; 



£)er S^onb, -eS, pi. -e and -en, the 

mOon ; 
QDie ®onne, -, pi. -n, the sun; 
2)er (Sterling, -d, pi. -e, the sparrow; 
j£)er <Siamm, -ed, pi. ©tdmme, trunk ; 
Der ©tern, -d, pi. -e, the star; 

£ctpfer, brave, valiant; 
Die Xctube, -, pi. -n, the pigeon; 

Unrein, impure ; 

Skrbte'nen, to earn ; 

$erfd)enf en, to give away. 



Exercise 60. 



SlufflaBe 60. 



1* 3Der SSauer ift reid), after ber jtaufmann ift reiser. 2. !Det 
Jtanfmann ift ein reidjerer Sftann aid ber 33auer. 3. 3ft nic^t bet 
Jtaufmamt ber retdjfte Siftann in biefer ©tabt? 4. 3$ Mn retd;, 
metit Setter ift reiser, ttnb fein SSater ift am reidjften. 5* 3ft ber 
teidfte SJiann am jufriebenften ? 6. 3ft ntc^t ber fleifjigfte SWanti 
tmmer ber gufrieDenfte ?S}lann ? 1. 3^ tteldjem Sanbe fmt> bad $a^ 
meet ttnb ber Sleptyant Ttu|3Ud)tt ate bad f>ferb ? 8. 2Md;e £t)iere 
fint) am nitfcltcfyjten ? 9. SBetdjed ift bad nii^lt^ere £1}ier, Sa<3 @d>af 
ot>er bad 9>fcrt> ? 10. <Der ebelfte SDtenfd) ift nid)t immer ber gliicE^ 
!td)fte, unt> ser gelel)rtefte nidjt immer ber foeijefte. 11. £ie Srbe 
ift fleiner aid bie Sonne, unb bie ©teme ftnb entfernter aid ber $Jonb. 
12. 2)er ©tamm bed Slpfeftaumed ift bid, ber ©tamm ber Sudje ift 
bider, mt> ber ©tamm ber &id)e ift am bidften. 13. £er 2tyfet* 
fcaum $at einen btden ©tamm, bie 33nd)e $at einen bidern, unb bie 
fitdje $at ben bidften. 14. 3e mtl)r er tterbtent, befto met)r &erfd)en!t 
er. 15. ®in guter geft^err ift me^r flug aid tapfer. 16. £)ie Suft 
in ben ©tabten ift nnreiner aid bie Sanbluft. It* Sin ©perltng 
in ber §anb ift kffer aid eine Zauh auf bem Dafte. 



Exercise 61. 



aufgaBe 61. 



1. Are the merchants richer than the peasants 1 2. Are the 
merchants richer men than the peasants 1 3 Who is the rich- 
est man in this city % 4. Is your house better than the house 
of your richer neighbor? 5. Which is the more useful tree, 
the oak or the beech? 6. Is the oak a more useful tree than 



ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 113 

the beech ? *I. Why is the country air purer than the air in 
large cities'? 8. What flower is more beautiful than the rose ? 

9. In what countries do we find the most beautiful flowers ? 

10. Is the most learned man always the wisest, and the richest 
the most contented ? 11. Are not these boys more industrious 
scholars than those ? 12. Is the earth larger than the moon ? 
1 3. The more industrious we are the more we know. 14. These 
people say they have better horses, better sheep, better oxen, 
hotter carriages and better dogs than our neighbors. 15. I 
have the oldest table, the oldest pen, the oldest book, and the 
oldest chairs in the city. 16. You have older iron, older steel 
and older axes than the smith. It. Where or when is a spar- 
row better than a pigeon 1 



LESSON XXXIII. £ eciiou XXXIII. 

ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 

1. Adjectives denoting persons are often used substantively, 
where in English they are followed by a word referring to in- 
dividuals or objects : 

£er ®ute kbau'ert ben SBofeiu The good (man) pities the bad (one). 

£)er SBofe §ctgt oft ben ©utetu The bad (man) often hates the good. 

Sin ^eibifdjer tfl nie gliicflidj. An envious (person) is never happy. 

3f ber 9tetbifdje if! unjufrteben. Every envious man is discontented. 

Sene <3d)ime ijl fefjr fiolj. That fair (one) is very proud. 

£)ie ttnsliitf lidje ttetnt. The unfortunate (woman) weeps. 

SSctS tt>itf|i bit, mein Kleiner ? What do you wish, my little fellow ? 
£)er Srcwernbe tt>etnt (L. xxxvn. 1). The mourner (mourning man) 



2. In the neuter, the adjective is often employed as an ab- 
stiact noun, and may be preceded as well by the indefinite as 
the definite article ; or it may be used without either : 

®a$ 2?u£Hd)e ijl kffer aU bas Qdymz. The useful is better than the beau- 
tiful. 

l>er SBeife tteig nidjt 2!Ue$. The wise (man) does not kno-w 

every thing (all). 



114 LESSON XXXIII. 

^0 tft tym tin £ei$te$* It is an easy thing for him. 

Serget'te n i)i 23ofe3 nut SBofem Repay not evil with (for) evil. 

<£$ lie&t tie 2BeIt ba6 ©trafclenbe sir The world loves to blacken what 
fdjiMrjett nnb ba$ (Sr^a'bette in ben is bright (the glittering) and drag 
©taub ju jte$en. — ©♦ into the dust the elevated. 

3. The superlative 35 t\t , in the sense of an abstract noun, 
answers to a variety of terms in English which are generally 
best suggested according to the sentence where it is employed* 
Thus it may be rendered by good ; benefit ; or, by other parts 
of speech : 

(£3 tjr fur ba<S aH^emdne 33 e jre. It is for the general good. 

S'ie fang $um 23 e jre n ber Slrmen* She sang for the benefit of the poor. 

<£r gab un3 ettt>a6 jum 93 e ft e tt. He favored us with something. 

@ekn ©ic un3 ettt £tcb jum 93 e ji e n. Give us a song for our entertainment 

With I)ctfc en, and sometimes with $ alt en, the same word is used to 
denote the advantage which a person seeks to gain by means of facetious 
irony, or playful ridicule: 

£>ie 9tafett>etfe I) at Sie jum 33 e (ten. The pert (girl) is rallying you. 

<£r ^ at t§n jum S3efien. He is ridiculing (or, "befooling") 

him. 
2)iefe fceiben gveunbe tya Ben gem em* These two friends are fond of ral- 

anber jum 93 e )t e n. lying each other. 

£>er Sixgner ^ dl t gem 5Inbere jum The liar is fsnd of duping others. 

Bcjlem 

4. The comparative of 9iat)e, is often used substantively in 
the signification of particulars, nearer details : 

Stiffen Sie ntdjt b&$ 9£a§ e r e vonber Do you not know the particulars 

<&ad)t ? of the affair ? 

91 d § e r e 3 lann er S|nen fagen.. (The) nearer details he can commu- 

nicate you. 

FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES OF COUNTRIES 

AND CITIES. 

5. Adjectives are formed from names of countries and cities, 
by means of the suffix i f d) ; and those of the former frequently 
take the Umlaut, if capable of it. In place of an adjective of 
this ending, however, the name of the city with the suffix er 
is often employed, and is undeclined : 



FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES. 115 

SJtcte Comment trctten in fa)toebifdjen Many Pomeranians entered into 
£)ieitfl. — ©♦ Swedish service. 

3Me Urfadje bicfer £}erdn'bcri 4 na, t|1 in The cause of this change is to be 
eBcn biefem $U0/3l)ura. i'fcfyen 23e* sought for in this very Augsburg 
fennt'niffe jn fudjen. — <&. confession. 

£)ie griedjtfd)e ©pradje i)l bie ge&tt'* The Greek language is the most 
betjie ber 2Belt. — §♦ cultivated in (of) the world. 

(Sr fagte e3 auf beutfdj (L. xxxiv. 4). He said it in German. 

<£r fagte e3 im 3ran$ojtfd)en. He said it in (the) French. 

SieBen 3atyrenad)ber$rager3d)Tadjt Seven years after the battle of 
ttar aUe Sfcettgio'nSbuTbwtg gegen Prague all religious toleration 
bie $rotejlant'en im $imi$rei$e auf* toward the Protestants in the 
ge^o'Ben. — ©♦ kingdom was abolished. 

Obs.- Note, that adjectives derived from the names of cities, are 
written with capital initials; as are also those denoting a language, if 
preceded by the article and used without a noun. 



FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES OF PERSONS. 

6. Adjectives are formed from the names of persons by 
means of the suffix if d) , and are usually rendered by a noun : 

<$CM] <Deutfd)Ianb feuftte unter $rie* All Germany sighed under the bur- 

geStaft bod) griebe tt>ar 1 3 im SSatten* den of war, but there was peace 

(ton t f dj e h £ctger.— <S. in Wallenstein's camp. 

SJte ©ebtyarb i f d) e n £ruppen lieferten The troops of Gebhard gave up to 

bem geinbe einen 3>lafc nadjbem an* the enemy one place after an 

bern au$.—<3. (the) other. 

7. Adjectives denoting a sect, derived from proper names are 
© fci .en written with a small initial : 

l*m nemtjdfjrigen flurfiirflen gal) man To the nine years old elector Cal- 
caMnifdje £ef)rer.— (5. vinist teachers were given. 

SHIeS, tta$ bie lutjerijtye £ir$e err)telt' All that the Lutheran church ob~ 
tt>ar £>utbung. tained was toleration. 

Setfptetc. Examples. 

£>cr 6'tarfe t|l am mdd)tia,)len atfein. The strong man is most powerful 

®* alone. 

£>er Se^enb e fcegretft' ben SBtinben, The s^w(/ (man) comprehends the 
akr nid&t bicfer jenen.— SR. blind, but the latter does not the 

former. 



116 



LESSON XXXIII. 



SJhtr ba$ Vltii e fcl)eint gett>ol)it'ltdj unci)* Only the (that which is^ new gen 

tig* — (5), erally seems important, 

fftidjt atle3 <3 d) m e r e 1)1 bepwe^cn ettt Not every thing difficult is therefore 
£at>S)rini1) cl)ite £ettfaben. — $♦ a labyrinth without guide (guid- 

ing thread). 
SReben <Ste *u metnem SBejleru Intercede (speak) in my behalf. 

<Sie Ijaften biefen gremben gum Sejlen. They are making (having) this 

stranger a laughing-stock. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SSebcm'ern, to pity; 

SBertei'ben, to envy; 

SBltttb,. blind; 
£)er £)ont, -e3, pi. -e, the cathedral; 

QEIcnbr miserable, wretched ; 

fyol^tic^, consequently; 
£)a§ ® eMitbe, -3, pi. -, the building ; 

©efrf)tt)inb'f quick, rapid ; 
<Dte §au3frau, -, pi. -en, housewife; 

■fjulflo^r helpless; 

£a'§m, lame; 



£aufcn, to run; 
$?aabeftttr$er, see 5; 
•ftetbifefr, envious; 
SPrafttfdj, practical ; 
<&fyntU, fast; 
£cmB, deaf; 
Stjattg, active; 
£)er £!>or, -en, pi. -en, the fool 
£$ortd)t, foolish; 
Xraurtgr sad, sorrowful; 
SDeife, wise. 



Exercise 62. SlufgaBe 62. 

1* £)er e^rltc^e fletftge 2lrme tjl ftiel nufelt^er unb gIMidjer, al$ 
ber fcmle 5teid)e* 2* 9ttd)t jeber 2lrme ift trcmrig, nid)t Jeber SRetc^e 
fft glucfttd). 3* £er £{)or Beneibet oft ben 3teid)en. 4* Sin 9tei^ 
bifdjer ift nie jufrlefcen, nnb folgltdj nid)t glMid). 5* 9Uemanb ift 
elenber nub tfymc&ter af$ ber 9teibifd)e. 6. T)a3 @d)one unb 2tn^ 
genefyme i\t gut, afcer ba* 9iii?ltc^e unti 5)raftifde ift nod) fceffer. ?♦ 
3ft jeDer £aute unglucfltcft ? 8. 9Mt jeDer ©etetyrte ift ein SBeifer, 
unb ntdjt jeDer SBeife ift ein ®ele§rter. 9. £er 33ltnbe ift nod) un* 
gliidfltdber itnb plflofer ate ber Sauk ober ber 2af)me. 10* Sin 
(Mefcrter ift nid)t numer em t|Sttger, niiplid)er Wann. 11. Sine 
©ele^rte ift nid)t immer eine gnte Jpauefraiu 12* 2Ba3 fur ein 
33ud) lefen @te, ein beutfd?e^, ein frcmjBftfckS ober ein englifd)e£? 
13. 3d) lefe ein frangBftfdjeS* 14* 3^e ©filler lefen beutfdje uno 
englifdje 33ud)er. 15* £er 9ftagbe6urger (see 5*) £)om ift ein fd)B* 
nt3 ®e6aube. 16* Sr ift gefd)mmb in Slttem. 

Ekercise 63. SlufgaBe 63. 

1. Who is more foolish and more miserable than the envious 
man? 2. Nobody is more foolish than an envious man. 3. 



OMISSION OF INFLECTIONAL ENDINGS OF ADJECTIVES. 117 

Tne idle man is not useful, and consequently not nappy. 4. 
Is only the useful man contented ? 5. Is the idle man ever 
really contented and happy ? 6. Is the industrious man never 
sad 1 7. Do you learn the practical, or only the agreeable ? 
8. Why is the idle man unhappy ? 9. Is the blind man more 
helpless than the deaf or the lame one ? 10. Who leads a more 
miserable life than the envious man ? 11. The good man pities 
the poor, but he does not envy the rich. 12. Is the Magdeburg 
cathedral the largest building in the city % 13. The idle man 
is not useful, and consequently not good, for only the useful 
man is really good and wise. 14. These German books are 
new, those French ones are old. 15. Who is more wretched 
than the envious man % 



LESSON XXXIV. Uttion XXXIV. 

OMISSION OF INFLECTIONAL ENDINGS OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. The adjectives e 1 1 e I and tauter, in the signification of 
all, nothing but, mere, sometimes stand without inflection be- 
fore nouns : 

(£3 tjl tan t e r CEigenffmu It is mere obstinacy. 

2Bir ftoljen 2Dtofd)ettftttber ftnb ettel "We proud sons of men are nothing 

arme ©intber*— (£L but poor sinners. 

Writer lauter guten 2)trtgen tjl Me Among things that are all good 

2Bctt)I fitter, the choice is difficult. 

2. When several adjectives qualify the same noun, the in- 
flectional endings of all but the last are sometimes dropped, 
and the omission indicated by a hyphen. In like manner the 
/ast syllable of compound adjectives is sometimes omitted : 
£>te fdjfoar^rot^goibeue ga$ne* The black red golden banner. 
iRiemanb toax fo freubett* unb fd)taflo$ Nobody was as joyless and slee^>- 

toit er. — 0L less (joy- and sleepless) as he. 

3. In the nominative and accusative neuter, adjectives ofteti 
omit the inflectional endings : 

$)e$ Sftenfdjen £efeen ftyeutt einr)errltd) The life of man seems a glorioua 
£oo$. — ®. allotment. 



118 LESSON XXXIV. 

4. An adjective in denoting a language, when not preceded 
by the article, as exemplified in the preceding lesson, is also 
undeclined : 

(£t fagte e§ auf englif<$. He said it in English. 

5. When the latter of two adjectives is employed, conjointly 
with its noun, to embrace as one idea that which theirs* qual- 
ifies, it takes the form of the new declension : 

SDenn geenb'iget nafy lang e m serberf)'* For, ended, after long ruinous strife, 
Itcfy en ©treit," ft>ar bie fcttferlofe, was the emperorless, the terri- 
ble fdjredlidje Be it, tmb ein SRtdjter ble period, and there was a ruler 
tear ttrieber auf (Erben. — ©♦ (judge) again upon earth. 

Obs. — The above rule, though extending to both the gen. and dat., 
is rarely applied, except in the raasc. and neut. of the latter. Note, 
also, that where the adjectives ma} 7 be joined by it n b , or so separated 
as equally to refer to the same noun, the latter one also takes the old 
form (compare 1, 2. § 34.) ; thus, (£r lo[ct)t feinen Durjl mit flctr em fait en 
(n, as euphonic) SBaffer; or, mit Harem unb faltem SBaffer, as also mit 
flarem, faltem SBaffer* 

6. A clause or sentence is often used adjectively, sometimes 
requiring to be translated by a relative clause : 

2)ie in 3)rd>ofttto'nen ge* The nouns that have (The to prepositions 
n>orbenen@uojianti'&en. become prepositions, become nouns). 

"£)te urfprimglid) auS all The conjunction aU (The originally from 
unb fo &ufam'mena,efe§te (as) originally com- all and fo compound- 
conjunction aH tyat pounded of all and fo ed conjunction aU has 
tmmer bie JBebeu'tuno, always has the signi- always, etc.) 
dnc$ 9ftelatt'$3." fication of a relative. 

ADJECTIVES USED ADVERBIALLY. 

7. Adjectives in all degrees of comparison, in the form in 
which they occur as predicate, are employed adverbially : 

(£r Hejl fdjnell ; erfprtdjt lang fa m. He reads fast; he speaks slowly. 

£>er etnjelne Siftann entflte'^t a m I e i ty* The single man escapes the easiest 
t eft en.— ®. 

Se ntetyr ©cfyttadje, }e me^r £iia,e ; bie The more infirmity the more false- 
$raft getjt gera'be: eine $ano'* hood; strength goes straight : a 
nenfttgel, bie £>ol)len ober ©ruoen cannon-ball that has holes or cav- 
eat, gel)t frumm. — 2ft. ities goes crooked. 

* Berber Olid) en ©treit; i. e. contest : here embracing as a single idea 
the conjoint signification of the " latter adjective" and "its noun." 



ADJECTIVES USED ADVERBIALLY. 110 

(£r j'd)retBt gut, fie fdjret&t o e f f e r , He writes well, she writes better, 

unb <Bie fckcioen am & c ft e ru and you write the best. 

(£3 ill $ o dj jl n> a § r f § e i n H ^* It is (most) highly probable. 

(£r oerrtcfyt'ete ba$ ©efdjdft' auf* (§ 38* He transacted the business most 

1.) g e tt> t f f e n § a f t'e |1 e. conscientiously. 

8. Adverbs are produced by adding to the simple form of 
the superlative the termination e n 3 : 

SBir roofynen meijl e n 3 auf bem Sanbe. We live mostly in the country. 
Ste tjl |>od)jlen$ brei^ig 3atyre alt. She is at most thirty years old 

9. Formerly adverbs were distinguished, in the positive de- 
gree, from adjectives by a final e. This termination is still 
often used, especially in poetry ; and in the adverb lange is 
always retained : 

Reiner mod)te ba fejle jle1)en, meinid), No one could stand firmly (there), 

too er fteU — ©♦ I think, where he fell. * 

2Bte Iang e roofmte er l)ier ? How long did he live here ? 

(£r tjl lang e tttdjt fo alt rote t$. He is not as old by far as I. 

3$ fyxfce tyn lang e ttid)t gefeljen. I have not seen him for a long time. 

10. The comparative of St el is often rendered by longer, 
that of Ian g e by more ; the superlative I d n g ft by a long 
time, long ago; the superlative of Jung by recently, lately : 

(£r tjl md)t me^r }u ttg. He is no longer young. 

3d) tt>0$ite I a n 9 e r att jefm 3a$re in I (reside) have resided more than 

biefem |>anfe. ten years in this house. 

®a$ ttnt&f id& I a it g jr.—©. That I knew long ago. 

#or btefer £mbe fc § id) j it n g jr.—©. Recently I was sitting before that 

lime-tree. 

S3et|>iele. Examples. 

(£r fttQtc e3 auf fran&o'ftf$. He said it in French. 

23tr rootfen beutfd) foremen. We wish to speak German. 

©efe&e ftnb glatt (fanft) unb gef^met'* Laws are smooth and flexible, 

big, twmbel&at rote £aune tmb £ei* changeable as humor and pa* 

benfckft; Ifteligio'n Mnbet jheng sion; religion binds firmly and 

unb Wig.— ©. eternally/ 

©in urniufc Sefcen tjl ein fritter Sob. A useless life is an early death. 

3e'f#mffet ftd) ein SBcmbeljient um bie The more rapidly a planet moves 
Sonne betoegt', bejlo iangfamcrbrefci around the sun] the more slowly 
er fl$ urn jidj, — D^. it turns on its axis (a- ound itself). 



120 LESSON XXXIV. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SSIet<$, pale ; 
Detttlicfy, distinct; 
gedfoten, to fight, p. 348 ; 
Da3 ®ebad)t ? nij3,-e3 f pL -e, memory ; 
©erecfyt', just; 
■£>ager, haggard; 
|>attbeln, to act; 
&tf$xtn, to sweep; 
ihcmf, sick; 



£cmge (adverb), long; 

£angfam, slow; 

Cautf loud; 
Der 9faxbe f -it, pi. -it, the raven; 

Sfteben, to speak; 
£>er $ebner, -3, pi. -, the orator; 
Die ©tfjmal&e, -, pi. -it, swallow 

itttgemettt, uncommon ; 
Die 3<mge, -, pi. -it, the tongs. 



Exercise 64. SlufgaBe 64. 

!♦ Semen @ie fransoftfd) ? 2. 9?ein, t»tr lernen beutfd). 3. SBte 
[agt man tm gnglifdjen, "bte ©dwalBe fliegt fdjneller ate ber SRafce ?" 
4. SQBelc^e^ son btefen JEtnbern Heft am Beften, unb toeld)e£ am fdVfecf^ 
teften ? 5. £)er Dtener $at bte 3^nge, wet l)at ben neueften 33ejen ? 
> 6. £)er $Iet§tge lernt fitted, ber gaule langfam. 7. Sener Stebner 
fprtdjt beffer ate er fdjreifct 8. SSarum lernen @ie langfamer ate 
3^r ©ruber ? 9. Sr lernt iriel leister ate id), er l)at ein Beffereg 
©ebacBtmfu 10. @ie fpredjen laut, aBer nidjt beutlid;. 11. £er 
Stvanh ift l)eute ungemem Bleid) unb l)ager. 12. ®uk ©olbaten 
fedten tapfer in alien gerecBten ^riegen. 13. Sr rebet fteife aBer 
er tyanbelt tl)ortd)t. 14. Sr ift reidjer ate feirt 9?ad)Bar, ^mx er ax* 
Bettet fleifjiger ate er. 15. 3$ fcerfte^e @ie Beffer ate tt)n, benn ©ie 
fpredjen beutlidjer nnb lan^atmx. 16. "Sfteue 33efen leBren am 
Beften;" »te fagen @ie bas im Sngltfcfyen ? (L. XXXIII. Obs.) 

Exercise 65. 9Iuf g Be 65. 

1. Does your cousin speak German ? 2. No, he speaks only 
English. 3. Does he learn more slowly than his friend % 4. 
No, he learns faster, and speaks more distinctly. 5. Do all 
soldiers fight bravely in all just wars? 6. The old soldier is 
uncommonly pale and haggard, he is sick, is he not? 7. I clo 
not understand what the teacher says ; he speaks very rapidly, 
and not very distinctly. 8. The idle man acts very foolishly, 
but not every industrious man acts wisely. 9. That orator 
speaks much louder than this one, but not so distinctly. 10. 
Which one of your scholars writes the best, and which writes 
the worst? 11. Which flies the fastest, the eagle, the raven, 
or the swallow ? 1 2. Are all vour scholars learning German ? 



ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



121 



13. No, they are learning French. 14. I do not learn rapidly, 
for my memory is not good. 15. How do you say in German, 
" He speaks very slowly ?" 16. How do you say in German, 
" A new broom sweeps the cleanest V* 



-^-o-*-^- »*-•$»- 



LESSON XXXV. 



lection XXXV. 



ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

L When the possessive pronouns relate, attributively, to a 
noun understood, and are not followed by an adjective, they 
are called absolute possessive pronouns. They are of two 
forms ; as, meitt-er, e, eg, inflected like an adjective of the old 
declension; and ber, bie, £>a£ meitt--ige, or the shorter form, ber, 
Die, ba<3 mettt-e, inflected like an adjective of the new declension : 



Masculine. 
N. meitt-er; 
G. meitt-e3; 
D. meitt-em; 
A. meitt-ett: 



OLD DECLENSION. 

Feminine. 
mem-e ; 
mettt-er; 
meitt-er ; 
meitt-e : 



> 



Neuter. 
meitt-e^ ; 
mettt-e3 ; 
mem-em ; 
meitt-e3 ; 



mine ; 

of mine ; 

to, or for mine; 

mine. 



NEW DECLENSION. 

N. ber meitt-ige; bie meitt-ige ; bctS meitt-ige; mine; 

G. be3 meitt-tgett; ber meitt-tgett; be3 meitt-tgett; of mine, 

D. ^txtx meitt-igett; ber meitt-igett ; bem meitt-igett; to, for mine; 

A. bett meitt-igett; bie meitt-ige ; ba$ meitt-ige; mine; or, 

N. ber meitt-e; bie meitt-e; ba$ mettt-e; mine; 

G. be$ meitt-ett; ber meitt-ett; be3 meitt-ett; of mine; 

D. bem meitt-ett; ber meitt-ett; bem meitt-ett ; to, for mine, 

A. bett meitt-ett; bie meitt-e; ba3 meitt-e; mine. 

ALL GENDERS IN THE PLURAL. 



OLD. 

N. mettt-e ; 
G. mettt-er; 
D. ntettt-en; 
A. meln-e: 



NEW. NEW. 

bie meitt-igett or bie meitt-ett; mine; 

ber meitt-igett or ber meitt-ett; of mine; 

bett meitt-igett or bett meitt-ett; to, for mine; 

bie meitt-igett or bie meitt-ett; mine. 
6 



122 lesson xxxr. 

EXAMPLES OF THE ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Form of old declension. Forms of new declension. 

$Jldn §ut ijl f$tt)arj unb Wltin §ut ijl fdjtoarj, unb My hat is black ,'ind his 
fein-er tjl tr>eij}. ber feme (or ber feinige) is white, 

ijl ttetg. 
©ein $ut ijl fc(jtt>ar$ unb Sein §ut tjl ft^marj unb His hat is black and 
meto~er ijl i»et§. ber metn-e (or ber mein- mine is white, 

ige) ijl toetg* 
2)hitt 23u$ ijl neu imb 2Kein SBudj ijt neu unb ba3 My book is new and hia 
fein-e$ ijl alt. fein-c (or ba$ fein-ige) is old. 

ill alt. 
€>sta S3u$ ijl neu unb ©etn $$u§ ijl neu unb ba3 His book is new and 
mein-e3 ijl alt. mein-e (or mein-ige) ijl mine is old. 

alt. 
€r ge$t ju meinem $reun* (£r ge^t $u meinem greunbe He is going to my friend 
be unb ntcfyt &u bein~em. unb nidjt ju bem bein-en and not to yours. 
(or bem betn-igen). 

2. The absolute possessive pronouns are often used substan 
tively in the neuter singular, to denote property or obligation : 

3$ jle$e ttneber auf bem SDMntgen. — I am standing again upon my own 

(&. ground. 

(Earbina'I, i<$ $ak ha$ fDtanige ge* Cardinal, I have done my duty (I 

i^a'tt. £$tttt ©ie ba$ 3$re. — S. have done mine). Do yours. 

3. In the plural the absolute possessive pronouns often de- 
note one's family or relatives; they are likewise, where the 
application is sufficiently obvious, made to refer to dependents ; 
as servants, soldiers, etc. : 

#ajl bn ba$ (Sdjredltdjfle, baS £e§te Hast thou averted from thy own 

SOU t>tn £)einen afcgette Jjrt ? — S* the most dreadful, the final (fate)? 

£eofco!b akr Befall htn Seinen Son But Leopold ordered his (soldiers) 

ttn SRoffen $U jleigen. — 9ft. to dismount from their horses. 

2Ba3 liegt bem guten ^enfc^en nctyer What lies nearer (in interest) to the 

aU bit Setnen?— <S. good man than his own (family) I 

4. The genitive singular of the possessive pronoun is often 
compounded with gt ei d} e n, as is also that of the plural t> er* 
The words thus formed are indeclinable, and refer to nouns of 
each gender and in either number : 

SBer in ber Sommtite' ijl meineS glei«* Who in the committee is my equal I 
<$en?— &. 






ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



123 



3$ f)alt beirteSgTetctyen me ge$aj5t\ — 

®. 
IBcrorb'nct tjr, ba$ jeber 5ln^e!Iagte 

burd) ©efc&roor'ne son feine£gletd)en 

foE gert'i}'tet roerben. — ©♦ 
Sftan mug bergkt^en Sljaten f)intert)er 

nidjt fo Befcfyau'n. — ©♦ 
©aufett, greffeu mtbbergletdjeti. — (Dai* 

V. 21* 



I never have hated such as you 
(your peers). 

It is prescribed that every ac- 
cused (one) shall be judged by 
jurors of his peers. 

One should not afterward view 
the like deeds so critically. 

Drunkenness, revelings, and such 
like. 



5. Otetdjen, however, often stands apart from the pronoun, 
and is then written with a capital initial : 



<B roirft mit %fla$t ber ebfe SSflann 
Sct^unberte auf feine3 ©leic&ert* — 
©* 

£)a$ SBejle ba&ei if!, ber Sttxl $alt <Sie 
fur fetne^ ©ieicfyen.— -£♦ 



The noble man works, with power, 
for centuries upon those like 
himself. 

The best thing about it is, the fel- 
low takes you for his peer. 



Seifptele* 

Sebermamt Itefct bie Seintgen unb 

fdjit|t ba§ (Heinige* 
£>td) ikfy bein ©aterlcmb, unb metneS 

foUte mid) nid)t fjalten? — £♦ 
©ein 9?am 1 tjr grteblanb, au$ ber 

Sttehuge* — ©♦ 
<£r fd)t(fte e$ md)t 3r)rem SBruber, fon* 

bern mein e m* 
(Er tyanbelt mit ihutyfen, 9?abeln unb 

berakidjen* 



Examples. 

Every one loves his own family, 

and protects his own property. 
Thy native country attracts thee, 

and mine should not detain me ? 
His name is Friedland, (it is) also 

mine. 
He did not send it to your brother, 

but to mine. 
He deals in buttons, pins, and the 

like. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



STnber, other; 

<Der SBcmmeijrer, -$, pi. -, architect; 

£>ie SBurfie, -, pi. -n, the brush ; 

1)te (StgenJjett, -, pi. -en, peculiarity; 

$>tx getter, -g, pi. -, the fault; 

£)te glotCr -, pi. -it, the flute ; 
£icr, here; 

Die Jheibe, -, the chalk; 

£)cr HJtctJer, -e, pi. -, the painter: 

£>er fJittfel, -g, pi. -, the painter's 
pencil or brush ; 

2)er 0iegerif$trmr--e3, pi. -e, the um- 
brella; 

£)er ©cfyiuffet, -3, pi. -, the key; 



£)er <Sd)ttamm, -e$, pi. <S$tr>amme r 

the sponge; 
£er, ha$ (Bo fa, -$, pi. -$, the sofa; 
2)er ©onnenfdnrm, -e$, pi. -e, the 

parasol ; 
2>a3 Safdjentudj, -tf, pi. -titter, the 

handkerchief; 
£>ct$ £imenfa§, -ffeS, pi. -faffer, the 

inkstand; 
$erlcm'a.en, to den and, require; 
T)a§ SBeltmeer, -$, ph -e, the ocean; 
2)a3 Sorterjmdj, -eS, pi. -fciidjer, the 

dictionary. 



124 LESSON XXXV. 

Exercise 66. Slufgafte 66. 

1* ipat fcer 97Mer feinen $infel ober ben metnigen ? 2* Sr I)at 
ken feinigen unb ben S^rigen^ 3. 3$ ^^e meinen 9tegenfd)irm 
unb ben 3t)rigen, meine glote nnb bie 3fynge, ntein £afd}entud) nnb 
ba£ 3^tge, meine SBorterMdjer unb bie 3^tgen + 4. Ser 23au^ 
metier fyat fein £tntenfaj3 unb ba$ meimge, meine $reit>e unb tie 
feinige. 5. 2iegt ber @onnenfd)trm auf meinem (Sofa ober auf fccm 
3^rigen ? 6. Sr liegt auf bem meinigen. 1. 3ft 3^ @d}Iiiffei 
fcefier aU ber tneinige ? 8* Sftetn, ber meinige ift Beffcr aU ber 
3t)rige* 9. Der SSater 3^e3 2eljrer3 urio ber 33rut>er beg unfrigen 
ftnb Iran!. 10* Side 9Q?enfd)en IjaBen i|re Seller unb Sigenfyeiten; 
td) IjaBe Die meinigen, @ie $akm bie S^ngen, unb er l)at t)ie feints 
gen.. 11* 3d) ^&e ^ier jtoet £affen, eine geprt 3^w Sreunbe, 
unb bie ansere gefyort bem unfrigen. 12* 3^ermann tieBt bie @ei^ 
nigen unt> ttertangt bag ©einige. 13. 2)a6 SJeltmeer ift jtmfdfyen 
mir unb ben SWeinigen. 14. Stteine Gutter lat meinen @d)tt>amm 
unb ben ifyrigen, meine Sitrfte unb bie itjrige. 

Exercise 67. SlufgaBe 67. 

1. Have you my inkstand, or yours ? 2. I have mine, and 
the scholar has his. 3. My keys are new, yours are old. 4. My 
mother has my cup, and I have hers ; she has my handker- 
chiefs, and I have hers. 5. You have my parasol, and I have 
yours ; yours is new, and mine is old. 6. Your fiute is lying 
on my sofa, and mine is lying on yours. 7. Your chalk is bet- 
ter than ours ; your sponge is smaller than ours. 8. Is your 
umbrella larger than mine ? 9. Mine is smaller than yours. 
10. The painter has my paint-brush and his, my dictionary and 
his, my flute and his, my pencils and his. 11. Your friend has 
his faults and unpleasant peculiarities ; but all other men have 
theirs — you are not without yours. 12. Here is your brush; 
do you know where mine is % 13. The architect has yours, 
and I have his, but ] do not know where yours is. 14. You 
are writing with your cousin's pencil, and he is writing with 
yours, or with mine. 



CONJUGATION OF ipCt&ett. 125 

LESSON XXXVI. Cectiou XXXVI. 

1. CONJUGATION OF ipClfretU 
INFINITIVE. 

Present. Per/ecu. 

fytibtn, to ha^e. gefjait 1ja6en, to have had. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. m Perfect 

Jaienb, having. ge^aW, had 

INDICATIVE. 

Singular. Plural 

PRESENT. 

tdj ^a6e f I have ; tt>ir IjaBen, we have; 

bu ^aft, thou hast ; i$r fyafot, you have ; 

er ijdtj he has ; fie $abtn, they have. 

IMPERFECT. 

tdj $otte, I had ; tt)ir fatten, we had ; 

bu Ijcttteft, thou hadst ; ffjr ^ottet, you had ; 

er $atte, he had; fie fatten, they had. 

PERFECT. 

tdj T)d6e ge^aBt, I have had; txiir $aBett getjafct, we have had; 
bu tjaft ge^att, thou hast had; t^r Ijafct gelj ait, you have had; 
er fjat getjabt, he has had ; fie IjaBen getjabt, they have had. 

PLUPERFECT. 

tdj fjatte g^ciBt, I had had ; tvxx fatten geljatt, we had had ; 

bu Ijatteft geljabt, thou hadst had; ifyr Ijattet g efyabt, you had had ; 
er ^atte getjabt, he had had ; fie fatten geljabt, they had had. 

FIRST FUTURE. 

tdj toetbe ^akn, I shall have ; voir merben ^afcen, we shall have ; 
bu nurfi fjaben, thou wilt have; tfjr tterbet §abm, you will have ; 
er rcirb ^aben, he will have ; fie merben^abeu, they will, h've. 

SECOND FUTURE. 

tdj twerbej ^ ^ I shall ) -g nrirfoerbetn ^ ^ Ave shall a if 
bu toirft j- |.| thou wilt (- ^ i^r merbet (■ §J you will >• ^ 
er tinrb ) ^^ he will ) | fie merben ; ^ they will ) J 

IMPERATIVE. 

tyabe (bu), have (thou) ; Jjabet or Ijabt (t$r), have (ye, or you). 



126 LESSON XXXVI. 

2. idioms with ipatiett* 

£)U ^ap gut £ad)en. (See p. 446)* You may well laugh. 

(£r §at ud)t, fte ^at unred)t. He is right, she is wrong. 

£>abcn Sie hunger? id) fyabe £>urft Are you hungry ? I am thirsty, 

(£r fytt gent em ttarmeS Bimmer* He likes a warm room. 

(£r §at feine greimbe gem* He is fond of his friends. 

Ste tyaben tfm fetjr lieb. They love him very much. 

SBir ^aben grope (£ile We are in great haste. 

3d) fyxbe tfm in $erbctdjr\ * I suspect him; or 

3$ tyabe $erba$t' auf t§tu I am suspicious of him. 

2Bir fyctben ba3 ©elb nottytg. We are in want of the money. 

3$ fterbe %$t auf tfm tyabetu I will attend to (take care of) him. 

2Ba3 §abett Sie ? What ails you? . 

34 fyctk £ctngett)ette. I feel ennui. 

2Ba3 fyabett Sie bage'gen ? What objection have you ? 

grcm 9?. fjat £rctuer* Mrs. N. is in mourning. 

2Jkn tyat t$n jum 23ejlett. They are bantering him. 

(E$ §ctt feme (£tte. There is no hurry about it 

POSITION OF THE MAIN VERB IN COMPOUND TENSES. 

3. In compound tenses and independent propositions the in- 
finitive or participle is placed at the end of the sentence. In 
the second future the auxiliary tyafan (or (etn) follows the past 
participle : 

2Ba3 fjat er gefjabt ? What has he had ? 

(Er fyat -WidjtS gefyabt 1 . He has had nothing. (He has nothing had.) 
fatten Sie e3 gefyabt' ? Had you had it ? (Had you it had?) 

3d) tterbe e3 fyctbetu I shall have it. (I shall it have.) 

Sie toerben e3 getttg' ge* You will certainly have (You will it certainly 
^ctbt' fyctbetu had it. had have.) 

4. When a verb has two objects connected by a conjunction, 
Jie last may either precede or follow the verb : 

$aben Sie mem 2Bu$ getyabt' cber ba$ \ 

^rtge. or ■ [ Have you had my book or yours? 

£aben Ste mem Souo) ober ba^ Styrtge \ 
getyabt'? J 

The infinitive with ju, when depending on another verb, is 
placed last: 

(£r fyctt md)t Sett ge$abt' eutett 93rtef He has not had timo to write a 
$u f^teibetu letter. 



AGREEMENT OF SUBJECT AND VERB, 



127 



5. Two or more nouns in the singular, as embracing but one 
idea, are sometimes made the subject of a singular verb : 
2krrctt§' tmb ^rgroofju tan ftf}t in al* Treachery and suspicion lurk (s) 

len Qsdett. — ©♦ in every corner. 

Sfof blufge <8d)lad)ten fc igt ©efattg' Upon (the) bloody battles/oZfow (s) 

unb Zani. — S. song and dance, 

©urd)t unb 3ittern ijt mtr an^efom^ Fearfulness and trembling ire (is) 

mett. — Ps. 55, 6* come upon me. 

6. With collective nouns, except those used as numerals, 
the verb is usually in the singular : 

2Ba3 jagt ba§ $$olf ? — ©♦ Why do (does) the people despair ! 

7. With words in the singular, used as titles of respect, the 
verb is usually in the plural : 

Sure fomgtt^e £o$ett tterlaffen e$ Your royal Highness leaves (leave) 
nicfyt tyetterer. — ©♦ it not more joyful. 



Seifptele*. 

9&a* fymeber #lten8t$is? 
SSer Jattc bie SBrufhtabel ? 
$atte 3$r greurtb fte ger)abt'? 
2Ber $at ba$ £ofdjpa£ter ge^abt'? 
SBarm roerben Sie bie DMa'ten unb 

ba$ 9>etfdjaf* JaBen? 
S$'fyaBe gem eitten gro§en Dfen. 
Der ©liitfUd&e, ber S3e$a'glt<i>e $at gut 



Examples. 

What did the old man need ? 

Who had the breast-pin ? 

Had your friend had it ? 

Who has had the blotting-paper ? 

When shall you have the wafers 
and stamp ? 

I like a large stove. 

The fortunate, the comfortable (per- 
son) may well talk. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Die #r$et, _, pi. -tt, the angle (fish- 
ing-tackle) ; 
SSalb, soon; 

Die Starter, -, pi. -n, the small-pox ; 

Die 3Bot)ne, -, pL -it, the bean; 

Die Srufhtabel, --, pi. -n, breast-pin; 

Da3 Dtenjtmab<$en, -3, pi. -, the 
servant-prl; 

Die (Erbfe, -, ph -n, the pea; 

Die ©erjle, -, the barley; 
©eftera, yesterday; 

Der £afer, -$, the oats,L. xxvi. 10; 

Der farm, -c«, pi. flctyrte, the boat; 

DaS £6[rf)pa)uer, -e$, pi. -e, the blot- 
ting-paper ; 

Die fDlaferrw -, pi. -, the measles; 



Die DMa'te, -, pi. -n, the wafer; 
Der Sftocigett, -3, the rye; 
Der ©acf, -e$, pL ©acfe, the bag; 
Da3 Sd}arlad)ftefrer, -3, pi. -, the 

scarlet-fever; 
Die ©djcutfetf -, pL -it, the shovel 
DaS $etfd)aft, -e$, pi. -e, the seal; 
UeBermorgen, day after to-mor« 

row; 
DaS 2)aterlanb, -e$, pi. -e, -Icmber, 

the native country; 
Der or bie Skrroanbte, -it, pi. -it, the 

relative, ^ elation; 
Der or bie 2£aife, -n# -# pi -it, the 

orphan. 



128 LESSON XXXVI. 

Exercise 68. 2IufgaBt 68. 

L 2Ba3 Ijatte ker Sauer in ben gro^en ©acfen ? 2. gr t)atte 
Sofyten, ©erfte, Jpafer nnt> Stoggen barin. 3. 2Ber $at nteinen 
Slafyn unb tneine 2tngel geJjaBt ? 4. £er alte gtf^er t)atte fie geftem, 
unb id) tyaBe fie I^eute get)aBt. 5. 2Bcmn $atte biefeS $tnb bie 
Slattern ? 6. Ss t)at bie Sfftofern geljaBt, aBer nidjt bie Slattern* 
1. £aBen biefe 28aifcn feme Semanbten ge^aBt? 8. ©te IjaBen 
Sertoanbten in itjrem Saterlanbe ge|aBt, unb fterben Batb I)ier greunbe 
IjaBen. 9. SBann juerDen ^Sie Die DBlaten, bas $)ct(d)aft unb ba$ 
SBfdjpapier ^aBen? 10. 3$ fterbe fie morgen ober iiBermorgen ^a? 
ten. 11, 3ene ^inber IjaBen Un Sefen unb bie ©djaufel bes •Dienft^ 
miibcf)en£ getjaBt. 12. 2Bie lange fatten ©ie Die Sruftnabel gefyaBt ? 
13* 3$ |atte fie nidjt lange gefyaBt. 14. £aBen ©ie je ba3 ©cfyar^ 
lad)fteBer get^aBt? 15. SRein, id) l)aBe e$ nie gel)aBt. 16. £aBe 
id) red)t ober unrest? 17. ©te IjaBen unrest, unb er $at red)t. 
18. 3$ JJaBe gem ein tt>arme$ 3t m ™ er * 

Exercise 69. 2(ufgaBe 69. 

1. Had the miller the barley, the oats and the peas ? 2. The 
miller had the wheat and the rye, and the peasant had the oats, 
the peas and the beans. 3. Have the children had the servant- 
girl's shovel and broom? 4. How soon shall you have the 
wafers, the seal and the blotting- paper ? 5.1 shall have them 
to day or to-morrow. 6. These orphans have relatives in their 
native country, but have had none in this. 7. Did you have 
my boat and my angle yesterday ? 8. No, but I have had 
them to-day, and shall have them the day after to-morrow. 
9. How long will the boy have this hat ? 10. He will not have 
it long. 11. What has the miller had in those large bags ? 
12. He has had wheat and flour in them. 13. My brother has 
had the measles. 14. Have you had the scarlet-fever ? 15. 
Has that man had the small-pox? 16. When will the child 
have a new breast-pin? It. Who likes a warm room ? 18. 
Who has had my blotting-paper ? 



conjugation or SieBetU 129 

LESSON XXXVE. Uctiott XXXVII. 

CONJUGATION OF £ i t B t tt* 
INFINITIVE* 

Present Perfect 

L+bm, to love* getieBt JjaBen, to have loved. 

PARTICIPLES* 

Present Perfect 

UeBettb, loving* gelieBt, loved* 

INDICATIVE. 

Singular. Plural 

PEESENT TENSE. 

id) tieBe, I love; ttrir UeBen, we love; 

In lieBft, thoulovest; it)r HeBet, you love; 

er IteBt, he loves ; fie tieBen, they love. 

imperfect tense. 

id) HeBte, I loved ; toiv UeBten, we loved ; 

bu UeBteft, thou lovedst ; t^r IteBtet, you loved ; 

er lieBte, he loved ; fie lieBtert, they loved. 

PERFECT TENSE. 

id) tjaBe gelteBt, I have loved; ttur |aBen gelteBt, we have loved; 
bit Ijaft gelieBt, thou hast lov'd. i^r ^aBt gelieBt, you have lVd. 
er Ijai gelieBt, he has loved ; fie t)aBen gelieBt, they have lVd, 

PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

id) l)atte gelieBt, I had loved ; ftir fatten gelieBt, we had loved ; 
fcu Ijatteft gelieBt, thou hadstlv'd. tf)r l)ctttet gelieBt, you had lVd. 
er $atte gelieBt, he had loved; fte ^atttn gelieBt, they had l'v'd. 

FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 

id) tterbc lieBen, I shall love ; fair foerben lieBen, we shall love; 
In fttrfi lieBen, thou wilt love ; iljr teerbet HeBen, you will love ; 
er fotrb lieBen, he will love ; fie merben lieBen, they will love, 

SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

id) tterbej ^ ^ I shall \ _ ttrir foerben \ „ ^ we shall \ 
bu roirfl |-1| thou wilt (- 1| tljr tterbet (-§|youwi]l V- || 
er ttrirb ) ^ he will T - fte Herbert) ^theywill) ^ 

IMPERATIVE. 

HeBe (in), love (thou) ; HeBet or lieBt (fyx), love (ye or you) 

6* 



130 LESSON xxxvn. 



PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 



1. The present participle is formed by suffixing ett'O to the 
root : 

l)tfff-enb, hoping ; ^Br— cnb f hearing ; madj-ent), making ; 
leb-enb, living; lieb--ent>, loving ; Iofc-enfc>, praising. 

PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 

2. The perfect participle is formed by suffixing t to the root, 
and prefixing, to verbs that have the accent in the first syl- 
lable, the augment ge; 

fle-l)ofR, hoped; ge-pM, heard; ge-madj-t, made; 
ge-lefc-t, lived; ge-tieM, loved ; ge-loM, praised; 
ftubir— t, studied ; tterfcwf-t, sold ; beftraf— t, punished, 

3. Verbs compounded with the particles Be, tm$t, ent, etc., 
(§94. and 95.") do not take the augment g e ; hence those com- 
pounded with the particle g e have the same form for the per- 
fect participle as the simple verb ; thus, gd)brt is the participle 
of tyorert and get)bren; gelofct cf (obert and geloten, etc. : 

(£r $at mtdj gef)ort\ He has heard me. 

(£$ $ctt mir <je§i>ri\ It has belonged to me. 

INFLECTION OE THE PARTICIPLES. 

4. Participles are often used as adjectives, and are then sub* 
ject to the same declension : 

(Sin gelte'ftt-er ®o§n franft oft feine A loved son often grieves his lor* 

lieknb en (Eltenu ing parents. 

S£o ba$ <33elie'bt— e fto^ntr ba ijl tmfer Where the loved (object) dwells, 

£er$* — $♦ there is one's (our) heart. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

Singular* 

5. The first person singular adds e, the second ft, and the 
third t to the root : 

First Person. Second Person, Third Person* 

Id) lofc-e, I praise; bu lofi-fy thou praisest; er lofj-t, he praises | 
Id) jhtbtr-e, I study; bu ftubir-ft, thou studiest; er jlubir-t, he studies. 



conjugation of SteBen* iil 

Plural. 

6. The first and third persons add e tt, and the second adds 
t to the root : 

toix loB-en, we praise; t$r to l-U you praise; fte loB— ett^ they praise; 
ttrir fhtbtr-en, we study; i$r flub tr-t> you study; fte jlubir-ett, they study. 

IMPERFECT TENSE* 

Singular. 

7. The first and third persons singular of the imperfect add 
it, and the second teft to the root : 

tdj toB-te, I praised ; bu lofc-te fb thou praisedst ; er lofc-te, he praised ; 
idjfhtbir-te, I studied; bu (lubir-tefr, thoustudiedst; cr flubtr-te, he studied, 

Plural, 

8. The first and third persons plural of the imperfect add 
ten, and the second tch 

tirirlotMen, we praised; tyxh Met* you praised; fietofMettj they, eta. 
&ir (lubir-ten, we studied; ityr jhtbir-iet, you studied; fie jlubir-ien, they, etc 

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES* 

9. The perfect and pluperfect tenses are formed by combin- 
ing the perfect participle with the present and imperfect tenses 
ofljaien (orfemL. XLVIIL): 

2Ba3 tyafott <Ste gelentt' I What have you learned ? 

2Ben tyctt fcer Statin gelo&t'? Whom has the man praised! 

©arum' $atte er getoehtt't Why had he wept? 

FUTURE TENSES* 

10. The first and second futures are formed by combining 
the present and perfect infinitive with the present indicative of 
the auxiliary fterbett (L. XL VI.) : 

2Ba$ tterben (Bit faufcn? What shall you buy? 

©a* roirb fte faufen ? What will she buy ? 

SSaS ttirb er geprt' BaBen? What will he have heard? 



1 32 LESSON XXXVII* 

ORTHOGRAPHIC AND EUPHONIC CHANGES. 

11. Where the roots end in jD or t, an e is inserted between it 
and the inflectional endings, which begin with ( or U Thus, 
also, e is sometimes inserted after other final root letters : 

Present Mlb-eft, for Mfo-fl; fcart-et, for ttmrt-t; 

Imperfect Bilb— ete f for MIfc-te ; tt>art— ete, for tr>art-te ; 

Participle. geMfo-et, for geMlb-t; gemart-et, for getoari-t 
loBeft, loM, W&ete, gelokt, etc, see 2. 5. 6. etc. 

12. Verbs whose roots end in el or er drop the e in the first 
person singular of the present tense, as also the e of the term- 
ination in the infinitive and present participle : 

Bettel— n for fcettel-en; jttt-re for gitt-erej 
Bettel-nb for totel-enb; gttter-nb for gttter-enb* 

13. The imperative adds, in the singular, e, and in the plural t : 

©age mix, toa$ benfft bu $cn bent (£tb ? Tell me, what thinkest thou of the 

SeeL. IX. 8. oath? 

§Brau$t euer 2lnfe$n. — ©♦ Use your authority. 

35 e t f p i e 1 1+ Examples. 

©djonereS ift nidji3 in ber Sett/ ate Nothing in the world is more beau- 

S^eiQung burdj SJcmunft' unb ®e* tiful than inclination guided by 

tx>tf fen gelei'tet. — ($♦ reason and conscience. 

©etyen @ie mm, unb urtfjei'Ien ©te Go now, and in future judge less 

fimfttc$in ttentger sorfdjneE son ber rashly (precipitately) of justice 

©erecfy'tigfeit in SSene'big. — ©♦ in Venice. 

gromme (£$rfurd)t fdjaffte mix ntetn My misfortune procured for me 

Un$lM, X00 id) ttanbernb flopfte* pious reverence wherever wan- 

— ©♦ dering I rapped. 

ijtyr $afct 1 $ ge^rt'* 0ted)t nnb ®e* You have heard it. Right and jus- 

redj'tigfeit erttar'tet nidjt $om ^aU tice do not expect from the em- 

fer* — ©♦ peror. 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Die Slnhmftr *-, the arrival ; 

Der 5ttXagr -fleS, pi. -ffe, the satin; 

S3ebe<fen, to cover; 

SBeritymt', celebrated; 
Dct$ SBter, -e3, pi. -e, the beer ; 
Der SBrauer, -3, pi. -, the brewer; 

$arben, to color ; 
Die ©eigc, -e, pi. -n# the violin; 



Der $im|rler, -3, pi. -, the artist; 
Die £anbf$aft r -; pi. -en, the land- 

scape ; 
Die 3?ad)rtd)t, -, pi. -en, the news; 
Der @cl)aufpteler,~3, pi. -, the actor 
Die SSoIfe, pi. — n» the cloud; 

,3etd)nen, to draw, delineate ; 

Sietyen/ to draw, pull, p. 358. 



conjugation of SieBem 138 

Exercise 70. SlufgaBe 70. 

!♦ 2Ber fanfte bie g>ferbc nnb ben SBagen be3 ©djaufplelerS ? 2* 
Sftiemanb |at fie gefauft, er $at fie nic^t soerfauft* 3* 2Ba3 gotten 
@ie geftern in ber ©tabt? 4. 3$ ^rte nidjts Scenes. 5. ffiad 
f)at ber 33raner gefauft? 6. ©r $at tie ©erfte gefauft, unb bad 
©ter serfauft. 7. Sr wit* bie S^ac^tic^t geljort I)a6en *>or 3^e? 
Slnfunft. 8. £er 9Mer $at mir etne fd)3ne 2anbfd)aft gejeidjnet. 
9. Der atte ©ptelet t)at auf bet ®etge gefpielt, aBer bie timber IjaBen 
it)n ntd^t get)5rt. 10* SBamt werben @ie bie Sftagel au$ biefem 
33rette ^ie^en ? 11. £ie 3>ferbe gie^en ben SSagen, ber Mnfiler 
Ztifynd bie $ferbe. 12. 3)er gleifdjer Jjat bie Ddjfen gefd)lad)tet 
13. £ie ©onne $at fid) ffltt SMfen Bebeclt. 14. £er garter $atte 
ben Sltlas grim gefarBt. 15. ipbrten @ie was tdj fagte ? 16. Siner 
son m$ ^brte es, aBer bie anbern prten e£ nidjt. 11. S3er f)ai 
biefes Sifcn nnb biefen <Stat)l getyammert? 18. SBarum f)at man 
(L. XIX.) una getoBt ? 19. SJen $at man getabeit? 20. 9flan 
^at 9iiemanben getabeit. 

Exercise 71. SufgaBe 71. 

1. Your friend will have heard this news before my arrival. 
2. Has the dyer colored the satin and the silk ? 3. He has 
colored the satin, but not the silk. 4. The old player has bought 
a new violin. 5. The brewer has sold his beer, what has he 
bought ? 6. Whose oxen has the butcher slaughtered ? 7. How 
has the actor played ? 8. From whom have you heard this 
favorable news ? 9. I have heard no favorable news, but I have 
heard much unfavorable. 10. Has this artist drawn you a 
landscape ? 11. He is drawing a landscape, and the child is 
drawing a little wagon. 12. Who has been praised? 13. No 
body has been praised, but somebody has been blamed. 14. 
The falling snow is white and soft. 15. What have you learned 
to-day? 16. Have you heard what the scholars said? IT. 
No, I have not heard it. 18. The peasants have sold their 
horses and bought oxen. 19. To whom have the horses be- 
longed? 20. I have heard the celebrated Italian singer, whom 
have you heard ** 



i34 lessor xxxvm 

LESSON XXXVIIL Cectiou XXXVIIL 

ON THE USE OF THE TENSES. 
PRESENT. 

1. The present tense is used : 

a. To denote what is transpiring at the time z A speaking, 
Es also stating general truths : 

€3rebetumt> trdumeubit $lenfd)en sief Men (mankind) speak and dream 

fcon kfferen fimftigett £agetu — ©• much of better future days. 

SBenntuer ©mtff'en rein ijl, fo feib If your conscience is clear, (then) 

t$r fret. — ©» you are free. 

PRESENT RENDERED BY THE PERFECT. 

b. To indicate a time that an unfinished action has continued. 
In which use the verb is frequently accompanied by the adverb 
fd)0it, generally not requiring translation; or by the preposition 
felt, which may be rendered by for, or entirely omitted. In this 
use the German present is rendered by the English perfect : 

t£r tfr fyerein' fett me^rereft ©timben* He has been here for (since) several 

— @u hours. 

@d)on in ben fed^jrert Sforib Uegt er tm He has lain (he lies) nearly six 

£§uwu — ©♦ months in the tower. 

THE PRESENT FOR THE FUTURE. 

c. To denote a future action, or to indicate the willingness 
or ability of the subject : 

SBer t»clg> totx -morgert ubtx uttS Be* Who knows who will command us 

fte^It' ?— ® ♦ to-morrow ? 

3$ fec^te ntc^t gegen bi$, t»emt W$ I will not fight against you, if I 

sermef ben tann. — S. can avoid it. 

SBer I>efd)reiBt' bte <8'd)met£en eineS Who can describe the sorrows of 

aerfamt'teitf &ott alien (Betten prucf * a misapprehended, philanthropic 

geftogenen menfd)enfretmblt$en !>er" heart, repelled (thrust back) on 

fccnS ? — @. every side ? 

(f. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE FOR THE IMPERATIVE. 

ST;r f^ttctgt U$ man cu $ aufntfU— ©♦ Be silent till you are summoned. 

IMPERFECT. 

2. The imperfect coi responds mainly to the same tense in 



ON THE USE OF THE TENSES. 135 

English, § 138. Frequently, however, it refers to an action 
performed at an indefinite past time 5 and is best rendered by 
the English perfect : 

£apfer t|l ber SBelt&ejtinngerr Brave is the conqueror of the world, 

£apferer F**r ftdj \tlb\t be$it>ang/ — §* braver (he) who (has) conquered 

himself. 
2Ber nettitt ha$ QblM nodj falfd)? mir Who still calls fortune false? it has 
toax eS treu* — ©♦ been (was) true to me. 

PERFECT. 

3. The perfect is used as in English ; and also in reference 
to a period of time fully passed, in which latter use it is ren- 
dered by the English imperfect : 

3$ $ct£e e3 gejlent ge* I heard it yesterday. (I have it yesterday 

$ori\ heard.) 

C£r §at mtS ijergan'gene He visited us last week. (He has us last week 

SBodje kfud)t'* visited) 

FUTURE TENSES. 

4. The future tenses, besides answering to the corresponding 
English ones, often indicate a probability. Thus used the first 
future is rendered by the present, and the second by the im- 
perfect or perfect with an appropriate adverb : 

3d) f)ore 3emcmb fommer.; e£ ftrirb ber I hear somebody coming (come); it 
2Btrt§ feitt. — £♦ is probably the host (landlord). 

t)u nrirft bUfe ^adjrtdjt fc£ett gefort' You have doubtless already heard 
$a&etu this news. 

IMPERATIVE. 

5. Su and t^r, as subject of the imperative are usually omit* 

ted ; other pronouns are expressed : 

fringe mir betne SBihfoer* ) _ . , , _ _ 

ca ' • m •• ^ I Bring me your books. See Lesson 

§3rtngt nut eure £u*er. f £ J 

SBrmgen ©ie mir 3§re Sitter. J AA v ll6 z ' 6 > 5 ' 

6. Although sentences in which @ i e is the subject, have, 
for both the interrogative and imperative, the same form, yet 
they are as readily distinguished by the inflections of the voice 
in speaking, as by the mark of interrogation in writing : 

iBergcjf'ert Ste ietten Sfameru Forget that name, 



136 



LESSON XXXVlIl* 



Merged en Sie jenen 9Zamen? 
®iaukn @ie nidjt tt>a$ er fagt. 
©laukn <5ie nicfyt ttaS er fagt ? 



Do you forget that naine f 

Do not believe what he says. 

Do you not believe what he says i 



7. Where in English an auxiliary stands as the substitute 
of 4 a previously expressed verb, the Germans either repeat the 
verb entire, or wholly omit it : 

@ic feroten ttjn, id) rtid)t ; or You know him, I (do) not; or 

(Bit fennen tin, i<$ lenne tfm ntc^t. You know him, I do notkno w him. 

CEr tjctt ba3 23udj gele'fen, id) nid)t; or He has read the book, I (have) not; or 

©r $ctt ba3 93u$ gele'fen, id) tyt&e e3 He has read the book, I have not 



ntcfyt gele'fetu 
3dj fe^e ityrt md)t, Sie ? 
3$ §afce tfm nidjt gefe'^en, §at er ifyt 

gefe'|en? 
(£r benft nic^t note t<§. 



read it. 
1 do not see him, (do) you ? 
I have not seen him, has he (seen 

him)? 
He does not think as I (do). 



Sctfotele, 

Sbu fennjt il)n erjl fett Ijeut 3d) after 

lefce fdjon &e$n Satyre unter fetnen 

$ugen. — ©♦ 
<Seit tt>atm Mjt bu fo sorftdjttg ? — £♦ 

WBer lange fc^on fommt er mdjt meljr 

bie 9)almen ju ftefu'djen, bie itnfreS 

$nfgejlanbenen ®rd> umfdjat'tetu — 

£♦ one. 

$)a£ £ict)t ber Sonne fc^aut er ntemal$ The light of the sun he will never 

tx>ieber* — S. behold again. 



Examples. 

You have known him only to-day* 
But I have lived (already) ten 
years under his eye (eyes). 

How long have you been so provi 
dent? 

But for a long time he has not come 
to visit the palm-trees, that over- 
shadow the tomb of our risen 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES* 



&$t, eight ; 

$d)t$efm, eighteen; 
2)er SBote, *-n, pi. ~n, the messenger; 

Dreigio,, thirty; 
T>a§ (Snbe, -3, pi. -n, the end ; 
Der ^elbttefcet, -$, pi. -, sergeant; 

giiljlen, to feel; 

S'i'mftefjn, fifteen; 
%)a§ (®a\tl)ax\%, -e$, pi. -fyaufer, hotel; 
£>er £auptmann, -e$, pi. -manner or 

-teUte ; the captain ; 
5Die $ojfnung/ -, pi. -en, the hope; 



§Uttbert, hundred ; 

fennen, to know, p. 350 ; 
Dct$ Betben, -*$, pi. -, afflictioL ; 

9fte$rere, several; 

Sett; since* for; 
Die ©pracfye, -, pi. -n, language; 
Die ©trape, -, pi, -n, the street; 
X)er £rofrer, -*$* pi. -, the comfortei f 
Die Srofterin, -, pi. -nen, (see L, 
XXIIJ. 5.); 

Urn, at; 

tlmrotylf unweL. 



ON THE USE OF THE TENSES. 137 



Exeroise 12. 2UfgaBe 12. 

L $3ie lange ttoljnt ber £auptmann in btefem £anfe? 2. It 
ttufytt fdjon langer afe adjt 3a$re baruu 3. 2Sie lange ift bet gelD^ 
tteBel in ber ©tabt? 4> Sr ift feit fiinfje^n £agen $kx. 5. 3$ 
fuMe mi$ (L. 29. 9.) feit me^reren £agen fe^r wxwfy. 6. Urn 
melcfce gtit frijen foir ©ie ntotgen? 1* 2Bir lommen ntotgen 2E6en& 
.ju 3^nen, mo ftnben tt>ir ©te ? 8* ©ie fmben m$ in bem ©ajt^aus 
am Snbe biefet Strafe* 9. 2Sie lange lennen ©ie ben alten 9ftann ? 

10. 3$ lenne it)n feit bent 3^te acf)tgei)ni)unbert ein itnb bretfjtg. 

1 1. 2Cen IjaBen ©te geftern Befucbt ? 12. 3$ ^Be geftern SWeman* 
ben Befu^t. 13. Der Sote tt>ei£ too ©ie tooljnen, id) nid)t. 14. 
SDiefer ©filler $at 3 e ^ geljaBt feine SlufgaBe ju lernen, ber an^ 
bere ntdjt. 15. ©pred)en ©ie lauter, id) ux\&ty ©ie nidjt. IS* 
©pred)en ©ie biefe ©prad)e Beffer ate 31? Sruber? IT. Stein, er 
fpridjt snel Beffer aU id). 18. ®§e ©ie geljen, fdjretBen ©ie 3^e 
SlufgaBe. 19. D £ojfnnng, fiige SrSftertn im Seiben ! (L. XLIL 
1. a.) 



Exercise 13. SlufgaBe 73. 

1. How long have your friends been in this city ? 2. They 
have been here for more than eight days. 3. My brothers 
have visited our friends, I have not. 4. You know those people, 
we do not. 5. Your brother knows them, does he not? (L. 
XXI. 5.) 6. How long has this man been in this hotel? 7. 
He has been several years in it. 8. This child has for several 
days felt unwell, it is now very sick. 9. Where will we find 
you to-morrow 1 10. You will find me in the new house of 
our neighbor. 11. At what time do you go to the city ? 12. 
I go to-morrow evening. 13.1 have lived since the year eighteen 
hundred and thirty-eight in this house. 14. Who lives in the 
large house at the end of the street 1 15. I do not know to 
whom it belongs. 16. How long have you known these people? 
] 7. I have known them for more than fifteen years. 18. You 
have known them longer than I have. 



138 LESSON XXXIX. 

LESSON XXXIX. Cation XXXIX. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. The relative pronouns are fteldjer, fteldjc, fteld)e3, ber, bie f 
fca3, and the indeclinable (and nearly obsolete) (o : 

(Bin Sittenfd), welder fKetytt, ift em A man who steals is a thief, 
2)tcfc. 

£)er Sttann, ben (or ttetdjen) Sk lo* The man that (whom) you are prais- 

fcen, ift rnein greunb* ing is my friend 

£>te$ ift ba3 SBcrt, baS &u Seremt'a (This is) the word that came to Jer- 

gefdjafy' an die Suben, f o in SlegW* emiah concerning all the Jews 

tentanb tto^nten. — Jer. xliv, 1. that dwell in the land of Egypt. 

Wlxn lernt 33erf$tt>te'a,en§ett am meijlen One learns discretion (the art of 

tmter 2ftenfd)en, bit feine fyiktu — keeping silence) the best among 

£ft* those who have none. 

2. DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE D t T* 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Went. All Genders. 
N. ber, bte, ba$ t bte, who, which, that ; 
G. be [fen, ber en, be (fen, beren, whose, of which, that; 
D. bent, ber, bent, benen, to or for whom, which; 
A. ben, bie, bct3, bie, whom, which, that. 

The relative ft et &> e r is declined like the interrogative ft t\* 
d) er (see list L. X. 4). 

3. The genitive of ft e Itfe er is used when the relative is im- 
mediately followed by the noun to which it refers ; otherwise 
the genitive of b er is preferred : 

* Sd)Ukr, tt> e I dj e 3 gro jjtett Sdjrift* Schiller, which great writer's works 

fkHer3 SBerfe bie SBeft Beftmn'bert, the world admires, was the fav» 

»ar ber Stealing be£ beutfdjen 2M* orite of the German people. 
fe$." 

i)cr SKanm be ff e n (fio*ft>el$e3) Sud) The man wftose book you have is a 

Ste tyakn, ift ein £)eutfd)et. German. 

SDte 3*rau, be ren (^o£ roeldjer) Stim* The lady wAose voice is so admired 

me man fo fcennnfbert, ift eint 5ta* is an Italian. 
lia'tteritL 



CONSTRUCTION WITH THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 139 

4. SBetdjcr, fteldje, or toelcfceS is sometimes used in the signi 
fication of c ,ome, any, as a substitute for a previously expressed 
noun : 

3$ r)afte Wteber ©clb, $ran$en <Ste I have (some) money again, do joxi 
Welu)e6 ? need some (any) ? 

/Some or any, before nouns, is only rendered in German, when it sig- 
nifies a few, a Utile, and in this sense it usually answers to einiger, etlt* 
(t)er, or etwa$; 

§afcen Sie etwct£ SBein? Have you any (some) wine? 

23rtnge mir etmge ^Ifpftl Bring me some (a few) apples. 

(£r will eintge $ferbe faufen. He wishes to buy some (a few) horses. 

3<§ r)af>e eint$e Star)lfebern, $rau$en I have some (a few) steel pens, do 

©te Welcfye ? you need some (any) ? 
3$ r)aBe ccvitf) wetilje, after mein Sreunb I have some too, but my friend has 

$at feme. none. 

CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES CONNECTED WITH THE RELATIVE 

PRONOUN. 

5. When the members of a sentence are connected by a rel- 
ative pronoun, the verb is placed last; and the auxiliary, when 
used, follows the main verb ; 

3$ I o £ e ben $knn, ben I praise the man whom 

<Ste I o f> e n. you praise. 

3$ lofce ben $Ram, b e r I praise the man who I praise the man who 

mid) I o b t praises me. me praises. 

Widjt 5lHe ftnb pfrte'ben, Not all are contented Not all are contented 

b i e reicr) ftnb. who are rich. who rich are. 

(£r r)at ba$ 33ud), ba$ t<§ He has the book that I He has the book that I 

pefyafct' r) a ft e. have had. had have. 

<£te Wot)nen in betr? ipcufe They live in the house They live in the house 

in w element tt>r web* in which we shall in which we live 

nen w e r b e n. live. shall. 

6. Besides the relative pronoun, there are many connecting 
words which require the same construction (List L. 53.) : 

(£r tfl r)eute, wo er gejlern war. 

(Er war gejlern, wo err)euteijr. 

<Ste (tnb un^ufrtebettr tt> cil ffe arm ftnb. 

<5ie ftnb unjufrteben, o^gletd^ fte reidj ft n b. 

©ie tyat met)r gefagt aU er ge$5rt' t)at* 

(£r $at wentger geprt', aU ffe gefagt' i)at. 

<£ie werben fommen, w e nn fte Sett § a b e n. 

£er 33oxe wartete, Bid er e$ $ 6 r 1 1. 



140 



LESSON XXXIX. 



EXAMPLES OP PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 



Subordinate Sentence. 



Principal Sentence. 

SRtdjt 5lHe ftnb sufrte'ben, 
©tejemgen ftnb ntcfyt toeife, 
Die £eute ftnb ^eute ijier, 
Sebermann madjt ftdj ldd)erlid), 

7. A relative clause, as in English, may be placed between 
the subject and predicate of the principal sentence, without 
changing the construction of the latter : 



ttel^e reidj ftnb* 
toelcfye tu$t$ lernen* 
bie geftern §ier n>aren* 
bet ftd? feXBfl loot* 



Subject of the principal 

Sentence, 

9tt$t 20Ie, 
SfcW&t 2111e, 
Diejenigen, 
Sebetmann, 
£)ie £eute, 
Die £eute, 



Relative Clause. 

bie reid) ftnb, 
bie &ufrie'ben ftnb, 
toeldje ni$t§ lernen, 
ber ftdj feloft loot, 
bie geftern ba ttaren, 
bie $eute tyter ftnb, 



Predicate of the principal 
Sentence. 

ftnb sufrie'betu 
ftnb reidj* 
ftnb nidjt n>ctfe* 
madjt ftdj ladjerltdj* 
ftnb tyeute §ter* 
toaren gejlern ba* 



EXAMPLES OF THE USE OF WORDS EMPLOYED AS INTERROGATIVE 
AND RELATIVE. 



Interrogative Sentences. 

2$er f)at ba$ 33udj geljaot' ? 

2Ba3 fyaoen ©ie gefyort'? 

SBann merben ©te gef)en ? 

2Bo too^nen bie (Scfyuler? 

2Barum' tjaite man ben <Sotbat'en oe* 

ftraft' ? 
Sie tyatte ber S^itler feine Slufgaoen 

gelernt'? 



Relative Sentences 

3$ fcetg, ioer ba3 33ud) ge^aBt' $at, 
<&it toiffen, vqcl$ tdj ge^ort' $afce* 
3d) n>eig nidjt, toann fte ge^en toerben* 
<5te toolmennodj, too fte gettotmt'^aoen* 
2Btr gotten nidjt, toaritm man ii)n oe* 

fftaft' X)attt. 
Siftan fagte un$ ntdjt, toie er fte geterni' 

Jattc. 



33elf>iele* 

(£<3 gettctljrt' bie£te$eg,ar oft einfd)dV 
lidj ®ut, toenn fte ben SBiHen be3 
gorbernben me^r aU fein ©IM k* 
benft'*— ©♦ 

3ttand)e3 ®ute fdjabet un$, toeil toir e3 
mtgoratt'cfyen* 

fceiiig ijt ba$ ©efcfc', fo hm flitofller 
<Sd)on$eit geMe'tet*— #♦ 



Examples. 

Love very often grants an injurious 
possession, when it considers the 
wish rather than the happiness 
of the asker. 

Many a good thing injures us, be- 
cause we misuse it. 

Holy is the law that enjoins beauty 
upon the artist 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



141 



SBaS if! imfdjutblg, ^etXtg f menfd)ttd), 
$ut, rotm t§ ber $ampf nic^t ifiumS 
#aterlanb ?— ©♦ 



What is innocent, holy, humane, 
good, if the contest for the father* 
land is not so ? 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$et SBefcicnte, Ht, pi. -tt, servant; 

§?<c }t el'lcn, to order 

(£ttge, narrow ; 

(£rjdl)kn, to tell, relate; 

gred), impudent, bold ; 
£>te ©efdjt$'te f -e, pi. -n, the story; 
£>a$ ®efd)opf, ~e§, pi. -e> creature; 

©efuttb, healthy; 
2)ie §injtd)t, pi. -en, the respect; 

|>od)ft, extremely; 

|>ojfen, to hope; 



$ur$r short; 
£)er 9Mfter, -$, pi. -, the master ; 

<Stegen, to conquer; 
£)er ©tiefel, -3, pi. -, -n, the boot; 
£>ie Uefmng, -, pi. -en, the exercise, 
the practice ; 

ttntt>al)rfd)etnitd), improbable ; 

SS ergtt) ei'feXitr to despair; 

SBeil, because ; 

Smeifeltt, to doubt. 



Exercise 74* 



SlufgaBe 74. 



1* (SlanBen @ie Me ©efd)id)te, bie ber SRetfier nn3 erjaflt tjat? 
2* 3$ foetfj md)t loon welder @ie fpredjen, er $at nns me^rere er* 
jiityft* 3* Die ©ttefel, bie er gefanft $at, finb tljm ju enge nnb 311 
fnrj. 4. 2eute, fteldjc jfteifetn, fcergwetfeln; aBer bie ipoffenbert fie* 
gen. 5* 3Ba£ @ie in ber ©tabt ge^brt tjaBen, ift l)i3d}ft unroatjr* 
fdjeinltd). 6. Sr mirb bie 5iad)rid}t grfjBrt l)aBen, et)e tt>ir iljn fe^etu 
7. £ier ift ber SSagen, ben 3|r 23ebiente Beftettr $at* 8. ©er 9Jiamt, 
in beffen ipanfe toix gemo^nt I)aBen, ift fet)r fred). 9. 3d) 5^Be gftei 
Stepfel, nnb er Ijat beren brei. 10. £{e Stetfttfte, mit benen @te 
fdjreiBen, ge^oren bem $naBen, beffen 23iid)er id) I)aBe. 11. &in 
gefunber SKenfd), ber nie flei§ig arBeitet, ift, in jeber $in\i&jt, ein 
elenbeS ®efd)opf. 12. S)te gran, beren ©oljtt 3$ren Zi}&) gemad;t 
tjat, ift unfere 9iad)Barin. 13. £ie ©duller, benen biefe gebern 
get)oren, lemen ntdjt »tel, tteil fie nid)t fletfj ig t^re UeBnngen lefen. 
14. SSiffen @ie, mer bie $ferbe je^t $at, bie id) geftern ge^aBi 
IjaBe? 15. 3$ forf§ nt$t, ttelde $>[erbe 8ie geftern gef>aBt f)aBen> 
16. 35tefe 2InfgaBe ift bie (djmerfte, Die id) gelernt IjaBe. 



Exercise 15, SlufgaBe 75. 

1. Where is the servant that has ordered these horses 1 2. 
I do not know who has ordered them. 3. Are the shoes that 
the boy has made too narrow? 4. The boots that he has made 



142 LESSON XL. 

are too short. 5. Why do you not believe the story that they 
told us ? 6. I do not believe it because he has told me other 
stories that are not true. T. Not every man who is industri- 
ous is in every respect a good man, 8. Not all stories are 
untrue which are improbable. 9. Not all despair who doubt ; 
not all conquer who hope. 10. Is a wise man ever unhappy 
because he is poor? 11. Is every healthy man discontented 
who is not industrious 1 12. Do you know where the man 
lives whose house we have bought ? 13. I know where he has 
lived, and I have a friend who knows where he now lives. 14. 
Have you my pens 1 15. Yes, I have three of them. 16. The 
lady whose books we have had is a sister of the scholars with 
whose pens we are writing. 11. Do you find these exercises 
more difficult than the others that you have learned % 



•* & • > • -< fr > * fr» " 



LESSON XL. flection XL. 

2S e r and 23 a $ as relative. 

1. SB e r is used with the force of an antecedent and relative, 
or may be followed by the demonstrative pronoun t> er, (L. 
XLIV.) in a succeeding clause : 

IBer ftdj nidjt felofi oeftef)lt', oleiot (He) who governs not himself re- 

immer eitt $ned)t. — ©. mains always a slave. 

2D e r mcfyt §oren will, ber mug fityleiu He who will not hear must feel. 

2. 2B e r sometimes occurs in the signification of 3emcmt> : 

£ie§ audjbie ett> 1 ge 3) forte to en juriitf, Even if the eternal portal should 
er fd)ttue$e. — 3L SB. &♦ let any one return, he would 

keep silence. 

3. $3 a 3, like what, is used with the signification of an ante- 
cedent and relative ; it also stands as a simple relative after a 
neuter antecedent which does not refer to a previously express- 
ed noun : 

£)owett gteot, roer gletd) ajeot He who gives irrii\ediatelywAff* one 

SB a 3 man ioimfcfyt nub Hefct.— © wishes and loves, gives twofold. 

SBaSbu tyeute tt)im famtfr, ba$ $>er* What thou canst do to-day defer 
f^ie'be ntdjt auf morgen. not until to-morrow. 



S?er and 3Ba3 as relative. 143 

8fHc$, wa$ id) tyore, ftnb Sttmmen ber All that I hear are voices of joy 

greube imb bco £;mf$. — ©ej?* and thankfulness. 

OTeS, to a 3 ij! unb gcfd)ie'$t, geprt $u Every thing that exists and recurs 

einem 3>latt, ijen bent nur ttidjtS belongs to a plan of which we 

fcerfte^eiu understand nothing. 

4. For farther illustration of the use of the pronominal ad- 
verbs, compare with the following examples, § 103. I. 2 : 

$td)tbte @prad)e art unb fur ftd) iji lS T ot (L. XLII. 1. a.) language in and 

rtd)tig# tud)tig unb ^ierttd), fonbern of itself is correct, forcible and 

ber ®eift iji e<3, ber ftd) b ar in ser* elegant, but it is the spirit that 

ftjr'pert. — ©♦ is embodied in it. 

SB o r i n' §at er Unrest ? In what (wherein) is he wrong ? 

5. When the antecedent is a pronoun of the first or second 
person, the verb agrees with the relative in the third ; or the 
personal pronoun is repeated after the relative : 

35k$ farm i$ i$un, b e r felber plfloS What can I do, who myself am (is) 

iji ? helpless ? 

£>a§ fctffen fcrir, bie xoxx bit ©em- That we know, who (we) hunt the 

fen iagen. — <£♦ chamois. 

6. The relative sometimes precedes the word to which it re- 
fers, which latter is sometimes omitted ; 

£> i e e3 genof fen §d>en, b e n e n iji e3 Those who have enjoyed it, to them 

jfyeuer, — ©♦ it is dear. 

•Die er gemefyrt' $at, m'QQtn urn t|n (They) whom he has aggrandized 

ttetnen. — <£>♦ may weep for him. 

7. The relative can not, as sometimes in English, be omitted, 
but must always be expressed : 

3$ fd)ame mid) ber fftotfe, bie id) I shame me of the part ( — ) I play- 

fpielte ; ed.— Scott. 

1 <S iji ber SCBenb be3 £eften§, b er mir T is the sunset of life (that) gives 

ge$eimttijjj&otfe$ SBiffen gieBt* me mystical lore. 

8. In subordinate sentences the copula (auxiliary verb) is 
frequently omitted : 

£>en £>urji nad) feiner (Erfenni'nip fiiflt The thirst after a knowledge of him 

genrijj', berun$ mil btefem 2)ur]l self, He will certainly satisfy who 

erfd)af fen $at)*— #♦ (has) created us with this thirst. 

SPenn bu ba§ groge (Spiel ber 2BeIt When thou hast seen the great 
g:fe'$en ($aft), fo fe^reji bu reiser game of the world (life), thou re- 
lit bid) fell) ft uuM\— -<S. turnest richer to thyself: 



Hi 



LESSON XL. 



33etj>tele v 



Examples. 



<£in fr5$ttdje3 SJoIf t^Ut STtfeS, ttCtS e$ A cheerful people does all that it 

p tljun l^at f mit fcefferem SBillen, has to do, with (a) better will 

aU ein bummt$ cber fc^tx>ermixt^tge«3* than a stupid or a melancholy 

— 2B. one. 

SIBtx gut tjl, ftnbet ©ute$ tm £eBen unb He who is good finds good (things) 

tm £ob. — 35 ♦ in life and in death. 

Die SBiberwarttgfeiten fmb fur bie (The) disappointments are to (for) 

©eele ba$ f tx>a^ em ttttgettritter fur the soul what a thunder-storm 



bie &tft tjl. 
SBer mdjt ptoei'lenpinet unb &uroei$ 

empfm'bet, ber entpfm'bet ge^tg' tm* 5 

tner p roenig. — $♦ 
3§r, t$r felfcjr feib e3, bie ijjr euer ti$* 

ne$ Skterlanb Beftte'ljlt. — <S 



is to (for) the air. 

He who does not sometimes feel 
too much and too tenderly cer- 
tainly always feels too little. 

It is you, you yourselves who rob 
your own fatherland. 



©efe'gnet fet, ber bid) erfcmnt' §ctt. — Blessed be he that did take know- 
Shttfj, II. 19* ledge of thee. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SBegra'Ben, buried; 

SBejta'iigen, to confirm ; 
<£)er SBmtbeSgenolJj, -en, pi. -en, the 
confederate, ally; 

SDctrht, in, into it, therein, § 
103. 2. ; 

(£rtt>ar'ten, to expect; 

®et^an f f done; 

©ettrimt'en, to gain; p. 350. 
£)ie ©utk, -, pi. -n, the pit; 

$ranf en, to grieve ; 

Exercise 76. 



Die $M)t, -, pL Wt&fyt, power; 
£)a£ ©prtcfyttort, -e$, pi. -dorter, the 
adage ; 

(£ud)cn, to seek, look for; 
£)er £cmb, -e<3, the trash; 

Unrest, wrong; 

SBorgejlem, day before yester- 
day; 

SBagen, to venture; 

SBalten, to act, rule; 

SBortn', in what, wherein. 

SiufgaBe 76. 



1. 2Ber jmeifelt, fcerjtoelfelt; tret $offt, Ijai geftegt. — 91. 2. 
gin alteS ©pridjroort fagt, "SBer 2Xnbem eirte ©ruBe graft, fafft fel* 
Ber barein*" 3. 2ttte$, tt>a3 man nn^ scrgeftern in ber <&tctit Joon 
fcem $riege er$al)tte, $ai fldj Beftatigt. 4. SBiffen @te, ttorin ttir 
tmredjt l)aBen ? 5. £m, ber bu fo ftet§tg Bift, ttirft fcljnell lernen. 
6. £>u, bie bn fo fleifjtg Bift, ttirft «oiel lernen. 7. 3^, tie t$r fo 
flelfjig feib, tterbet ttiel lernen. 8. @ie,bie fie fo fleifjtg ftnD, tterben 
ttiel lernen. 9. SBiffen @ie, toaS fiir ein 33ud) nnb teas fiir 9>apier 
id} gefauft IjaBe ? 10. Wan glauBt leidjt, ftas man $offt unb feunfdbt. 
11. @ie ftnb Begraben 2ltle, mit benen x& gctoaltct nnb gelteBt (IjaBe 



DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 145 

see 8)*— ©♦ 12. SBer ttidjts toagt, genrinnt tttd)t$* 13, SRidjt 
teas er gefagt, fonbern mas er getfjatt, I) at fie gefranft 14* ©etnc 
9Ka$i mar grfifjer ate feme Sunbesgenoffett ewartet, grower ate fie 
getrmnfd)! fatten* 15. 3Ser ntd)t$ ate ©eft fudjt, IteW £anb. 

Exercise IT. SlufgaBe 17. 

1. Do you know what the children have told me? 2. I have 
heard all that they have said to yon. 3. What has been said 
and done grieved the old man. 4. All that was told to our 
friends has been confirmed, 5. We do not know wherein the 
boys are wrong, do you? (L. XXXVIII. 7.) 6. They have 
learned less than we had wished and expected. 7. Do you know 
whom the scholars have been looking for % 8. Who steals my 
purse steals trash. 9, Not all gain who venture; do all ven- 
ture who gain % 10. The power of the king was greater than 
he had expected, greater than his allies had wished. 11. What 
does the adage say of a man who digs others a pit % 12. Do 
you understand what I have told you, and do you know why I 
have told it to you % 13. The people I have been visiting are 
Americans. 14. Did you hear what the boys are speaking of? 

15. Do you know whose pen he will write the letter with* 1 

16. I have told you that I have heard. 



LESSON XLI. £ecti0tx XLL 

determinative pronouns. 

1. The determinative pronouns are berjetttge, bieje^ 
ntge, b asjenig e, (tier, see 3.) berfelBe, btefelBe, bas* 
felbe and fol d) er, fol d) e, foldje $♦ @old)-er, is declined 
like t> i e f e r (L. X. 4.) ; b e r, b t e, b a $ } e n i g e ; t> e r, t> t e, 
fcaffeUe, is declined like t> e r, t> i e, t> a g meintge, L. XXXV. 

2. Derjenige refers to something specified in a succeed- 
ing part of (he sentence, and must be followed by a relative 
clause ; berjenige may be rendered by he, the one, that, etc. 

£)ertem$c, ttetdjer ttadjlctfftg ijt, Xernt He (the one) who is negligent do as 
ttidjt fdjnelL not learn rapidly. 



146 LEWB01S XLL 

£)te{enfgt, totlfyt nad&Wfltg Ift tcmt She (the one) ?rho is negligent Aom 

tti$t fdjnclL not learn rapidly. 

£>a$iem$e if! gut, t»a$ nuj>li$ tfL That is good which is useful. 

SBtr Xofcen btejenigen, bic ftnr Itekn. We praise those whom we love, 

£>iejemgen, bie ttnr IteBen, Itefcen im3. Those whom we love, love us. 

£)ie 23itd)er, toelc^e (bie) id) fyaU, ftnb The books which I have are better 

fceffer att bieiemgen, bie er tyctt. than those which he has. 

3, For berjemge i e t is often substituted, in which significa- 
tion, when used adjectively, it is inflected like the definite aiv 
tide. When supplying the place of a noun, it has the declen- 
rion of the relative b er , except that the genitive plural isberer 
instead of Dere n. 

£Bic traitrig ijl ba$ £00$ berer, be* 5 How sad is the lot of those whose 

x e n greuben unb §offmm<jcn ftdj auf joys and hopes are limited (limit 

btefeS fiefcen fcefd)rcm'fen ! themselves) to this life ! 

"£>er $u$m beffen (beSjemgen), ber The glory of him (any one) who 

Iiigt, bctuert nidjt lange." lies, does not endure long. 

3$ Mnntdjt son ben en (benjemgen), 1 am not (one) of those who are 

bie mit Shorten ta^fer ftnb. — ©. valiant with words. 

2)ie(bieiem9cn)»bie(»el$e)bieS35a^r- Those who do not love the truth 

$eit ntdjt liefcen, ftnb nid)t gut. are not good. 

3$ nteine m$t btefeS 33udj, fonbern I do not mean this book, but that 

ba$, ttel$e3 ba$$irtb fyxt. (the one) that the child has. 

4. S)erfel6e answers in use and signification to the same : 

3<$ tyafo benfetkn $Ram gefe'tyen, ben I have seen the same man that he 

er gefe'^en $at. has seen. 

£Bir &eibe tefen biefelkn SBudjer. We both read the same books. 

SUBSTITUTION OF < £)tx\tlht FOR THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

5D e r f e X & e is substituted for the personal pronouns : 
a. After prepositions when the pronoun refers to animate, 
or inanimate objects : 

(Er tyat meinen SBIeijltft unb fdjreifctnrit He has my pencil and is writing 

b em f e I & en (not mit ifym). with it (with the same). 

itx f^nitt ben Styfel unb gab mtr ehten He cut the apple and gave mo a 

2^eil b e f f e 1 1> e n. part of it (of the same). 

6. To avoid ambiguity or the repetition of a pronoun : 

£>tefe £eute ftnb unfere WafyUxn, fen* These people are our neighbors, 

nen Sie btefel&en? do you know t hem (the same) ? 

(£r Io&t ben Jfria&eit, tpeil b e r f e U e He praises the boy because he (the 

fetae flRtttter e$ri* same), honors his mothw. 



DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 141 

<&t liefct fefnen ©ruber, after ntcf)t bte He loves his brother, but not his 

itinbcr beffclb en* (brother's) children . 

(£r tyat bie ge&ler etneS grogen SKan* He has the errors of a great man 

ne$, c^ne bie ^etbten'jle beffel* without his merits (the meiits 

Ben* of one), 

©te fdjrieBen tfjren $inbern, biefel* They wrote to their children that 

ten mujjten gletdj afcreifen, they must start immediately. 

5. © 1 d) e r is frequently followed by a relative pronoun, 
which in this position is rendered by as : 

3$ lefe nur foldje 23itd)er, bie Iel;r* I read only such books as (which) 
reidj ftnb* are instructive. 

6. When folder marks similarity, rather than identity, it 
is followed by to i e : 

£aben <3te fo let) e SLinte ttteid) $e* Have you bought swcA ink as I 

fauft' f)ak ? have? 

3a, id) tyafce eften f o Idj e. Yes, I have just such. 

<S o l $ e Sd)tffe, tt) t e bte, son benen #wcA ships as (those that) you speak 

<Ste fpredjen, ftnb tmftd)er* of are unsafe. 

7. © o I d) e r is sometimes omitted (from a sentence) and a 
personal pronoun introduced after the subject : 

Sine Styrane (fotdje) ttie bte Unjterf>*» A tear such as (the) immortals weep, 
It^en ft e tteinen, trat in fern gro* entered his large, dark eye. 
$t$ bunfleS Sfoge.— -Jfr* 

8. © 1 d) e r, w T hen used with the indefinite article, follows 
it; when, however, the final syllable is dropped (L. XV. 3.) 
fold)- precedes the article : 

©in f o I d) e r ^uftrao, fdjretft mid) Such a mandate frightens me not. 

md)t.— ©. 

<SoIdj-etn ^Better ijt felten &u fol* Such weather has seldom come to 

djer (Srnte gefom'men*— ©♦ such a harvest, 

9. © o 1 d) e r is sometimes used as a substitute for a demon- 
strative, or a personal pronoun : 

£)te ©d&netttgfcit mit ber <5old)t$ The rapidity with which this (such) 
auSgcfityrt ttar, Heg bem geinbe ' was executed, did not leave the 
ntd)t Seit, t$ $u tterfmt'bern.— @, foe time to prevent it. 

33eij>iele> Examples. 

SMjt bu nur beffen grewtb, ber gtutfltcfy Art thou the friend of him only 
ijt? 9ft$t bep, ben (Slettb pitrjt? — who is happy? Not of him, 
$♦ whom adversity overthrows ? 



148 



LESSON XLI. 



SBeife ftatur', tote feTig ifl ber, :tr me* Wise Nature, how happy is he who 

metis ben ©nb^weif beiner ©cfyontyett never loses the design of thy 

fcerH'ert! — SB* beauty! 

5)te £§ctt— btefe Sunge be$ §erjen§ — Action — that tongue of the heart 

tjr 8Ugtet<§ ber gefun'bejle SBalfctm — is at the same time its most 

' beffelben, unb ieber gute 55orfa^ tft -wholesome balm, and every good 

em £roft. — Cft. purpose is a comfort. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



®ei S3ottc$>er, -, pi -, the cooper; 

£)auern, to continue, last; 
$)te (£nte, -, pi. -n, the duck ; 
S)ie Sule, -, pi. — tt f the owl; 
£)ie gorelle, ~, pi. -n, the trout; 

®efe'$en, seen; 
£)et §abi(|tr -e$, pi. -e, the hawk; 
£>er |>afe, -n, pi. -n, the hare; 
2)er ka^iq, -$, pi. -e, the cage; 
£)er Sa^f -e£, pi. -e, the salmon; 

£itgen, to lie; 
£)te 2D£anbel, -# ph -xx, the almond ; 



£)er 9ftefferfd)tnieb, -e$, pi. -e, cutler; 

Drbentltcfy, orderly; 
£>ie $ftrftd)e, -r pi. -en, the peach; 
2)er SRuMn', -3, pi. -e, the ruby; 
£>er Ohtfjm, -e$, the glory; 

©aufen, to tipple, p. 352 ; 
£>er <Smaragb', -3, -e6, pi. -en, the 

emerald ; 
£)er Septet), -$, -e$, pi. -e, carpet; 
£>te £l)ur, -, pi. -en, the door; 

Sugenb^ctft, virtuous ; 
Die 2Batyr$ett, -, pi. -en, the truth. 



Exercise 78. 



SIufgaBe 78. 



1* £>te{enigen, Me un$ fd)meid)eln, flub letne ivafyxt %nurtit. 2* 
Unfer Befter greunb ift berjemge, ber unS bie SBaljr^ett fagh 3. 
£>a£ ©Kiel beffen (besjenigen), ber fauft, bauert nic^t lange. 4. Date 
{enige, m$ meber fdjiht nod) niiiplid) ift, ift ntd)t gut* 5. 2Bir lefen 
nur fotc^e Stiver, tteldje nitfclid) unb let)rreid) fmb. 6. Die Secret 
loBen i^re ©fitter, metl biefelBen gut unb orbentlid) fmb. 1. S3 
ffnb gj»et Stbler, ein £a6td)t, erne Sule, ein SftaBe unb eine £auBe in 
tenen $aftgen; t)aBen @ie biefelBen gefetjen ? 8, 3ft biefer Jeppid) 
berfelBe, ben @ie gefauft IjaBen? 9. 9tein, id) tjaBe benjenigen ge^ 
fauft, ben @{e $eute Sftorgen gefetjen t)aBen. 10. 3$ \tty bie Sttyfir 
be3 §aufes, aBer nidjt bie genfter beffelBem 11* Sfteine Sreunbe 
faufen bie gjftrftc^en 3$rer 9tad)barn, aBer nid)t bie Sftanbeln ber^ 
fel&en. 12. 3$ f^ide biefen ©maragb unb biefen 9tuBin bemfelBen 
yilannt, ber fie mir gefdjtdt i)ciL 13. $lxix biejenigen fmb tteife, 
xvtl&jt tugenb^aft finb. 14. £)er SSftamt, ber ben 2tal, ben 2ad)3 unb 
bie gorette gefauft $at, ift ein 33ottd)er; unb berjemge, ber bie $ntt 
unb ben ^pafen fauft, ift ein SKefferfdjmieb* 



DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 149 

Exercise 19. SlufgctBe 79. 

1. Have you bought these peaches, or those that belonged to 
oar neighbors'? 2. Are these carpets better than those that fhe 
cooper has bought ? 3. He who does not speak the truth is 
not a good man. 4. Those who love the truth are much more 
happy than those w'io do not love it. 5. Is this the same ruby 
that the cutler had yesterday % 6. No, the one that he had is 
larger than this one, but I have the same emerald that he had. 
1. Those who lie are foolish and miserable. 8. True friends are 
those who tell us the truth, and do not flatter us. 9. The al- 
monds that you have bought are better than those that he has, 
10. The shoes that the boy made are too small, and those that 
the man made are too large, 11. He who is proud and vain is 
foolish. 12. Those who do not make themselves useful are 
not contented, and those who are discontented are not happy 
13. It is not always those who have much money that are con- 
tented. 14. Those who are wise read only such books as ara 
instructive and useful. 



« $.«■»«. ♦» ■ 



LESSON XLII. Ceclion XLII. 

USE OF THE ARTICLE. 

1. The definite article is used : 

a. Before nouns, whether singular or plural, when taken m 
a general and unlimited sense : 

£)er Dtctmant if! cm SbetjMtu The diamond is a precious stone. 

£> a $ (Mb if! etn ebeleS 3fletafl\ (The) gold is a precious metal. 

2) i e $imj! tfl erne £odjterber %xti* (The) art is a daughter of (the) 
^ e {^ — (3^ freedom. 

£> e r £a§ if! partei'tfd), afar b t e £tefa Hatred is partial, but love is still 

if! e3 ttodj md)r.— ©♦ more so. 

£)a$ 23udj b e 3 @$id falS if! fcor im3 The hook of fate is closed before 

fcerftfytorfetu— 3©* (from) us. 

b. Before nouns denoting an individual : 

£>er £eifanb if! ba3 ttatjre £td)U The Saviour is the true light, 

©er §immel c)at e$ gettollr'* Heaven has (so) willed it. 

SDic (Srfce if! fleiner aU bie <3onne* The earth is smaller than tte sun 



150 LESSON XLII. 

c. Before the name s of lakes, mountains, rivers and the 
mascu. hie and feminine names of countries : 

JD c r $efu$' ifr etn SSuIfan'* Vesuvius is a volcano. 

2)ie Surfet' tjt madjtiger al3 man Turkey is more powerful than was 
glaufcte* supposed. 

rf. Before the names of days, months and seasons : 

2) er (Samjtaa, ift un3 angenetymer aU Saturday is more agreeable to us 

berSRontag* than Monday. 

SDe.r gefcruar' tffc ber fitr^efre SRonaU February is the shortest month. 

e. Before the names of ranks, bodies and systems of doc- 
trine : 

£> a $ 9)arlament' $erur'n)eilte $arl ben Parliament sentenced Charles the 

Swdten j urn £obe. Second to death. 

2) a 3 dfyriflenttjum iji ber SCBelt cm Christianity is a great blessing to 

grower Segen* the world. 

f. Before the superlative of adjectives, before infinitives 
used substantively, as also before the words ipoj, $trdje, 3Raxtt, 
9Rii$le, ©cbule and ©taM : 

SDie metjlen ©Item fdjtcfen t^rc $uv Most parents send their children to 
ber in b t e Settle imb in b i e -ftircfye* school and to church. 

(£r ge^t oft in b i e Stabt, aoer er rootynt He often goes to town, but he does 
tticfyt gem in b e r Stabt* not like to live in town. 

g. Before the proper names of intimate friends, or servants, 
and when the name of an author is put for his woiks : 

2Bann ge^t b e r Sotyann auf b e n SDkrft ? When does John go to market ? 
2Bir lefen ben $Iopfio& "We are reading Klopstock. 

h. Before proper names preceded by adjectives or titles, 
as also before those which do not by their ending indicate their 
case : 

2) te fdjone Helena roar bie ttrfad)e ber The beautiful Helen was the cause 

Scriro'rung £roia<3. of the destruction of Troy. 

2)er axme 2Biu)eIm roar untro'jHtd) Poor William was inconsolable at 

uBer ben 3$erlitjl\ his loss. 

33ter Satyrtyun'berte lang ftnben rotr During the period of four centuries 

SBara'titer in ben romtfefjen £eeren, we find Batavians in the Roman 

aBer nad) ben Betten b e3 -£>onoriu3 armies, but subsequent to the 

tterfcfyrotn'bet and) tyr 9£ame au$ b er time of Honorius, their very name 

©efcfytdj'ie. — S* disappears from history. 



USE OF THE ARTICLE. 151 

i. Before nouns specifying time or quantity, where in En- 
glish the indefinite article is used : 

3$ fetye tfjit itotim&l b e 3 Scares* I see Mm twice a the) year. 
S3 fojtei einen Scaler ka$ $funb. It costs a thaler a pound. 

j. In many expressions that mark a change in the condition 
of a person or thing, and in English require the nominative or 
accusative after a verb, the dative with 3 um or 3 u r (p. 62. 4.) 
is used : 
£)te cntfd)ie'bcn(Ic SD?e§r^dt erfta'rte The most decided majority declared 

t§n &um $aifer. — <S. him emperor. 

(£3 if: j u m <Sprid)tt>ori gefoorben. It has become a proverb. 

&. The definite article (unless its use would render the sen« 
tence ambiguous) is often substituted for a possessive pronoun . 

<£r serfe^'ie mix einen S'djlao, auf b en He gave me a blow on the (or my) 

2lrm. arm. 

(£r $at ben £ut no$ anf be m $opf. He still has his hat on his head. 

2. When used with b e i t> e, $ a 1 6, f 0, f 1 dj e r, to t e and 3 u, 
the article precedes them : 

£>te Be ib en SMentr Htekn einen Bot 1 the (the two) servants re 

f) a I B e n Sag. mained half a (a half) day. 

(£inen f 1 d) e n 9ftann fenne i$ and). I also Jvnow such a man. 

Sin ft i e alter 2ftann ijl er ? How old a man is he ? 

£)a$ tjt ein $ u HeincS Simmer. This is too small a room. 

Sine fo grcge geber fann id) ntd)t ge* I can not use so large a pen. 

fcraudjen. 

3. The indefinite article is used in a few phrases where i 
is omitted in English : 

(Sin ieoUdjer fur ftdj. Every one for himself! 

£ctfj einem Seben had Seine. Allow to every one his own. 

&on bir erttar'tet man ein kffereS From you (a) better conduct (be 
fBetra'gen. havior) is expected. 

Seifpiele. Examples. 

fcte greifjeU if! bca ^enf^en tyo&y Freedom n man's noblest 

fie$ ®ut.— 51. sion. 

$e$ctm'nt|Te in ber (Sfie fmb gefd|r'li^ Secrets in wedlock are dangerous 

nnb nid)£ig, i^re (Sd^etbe becft immer and vain, their sheath always 

einen 2>oId) ben bie Sett enbtidj covers a dagger whijL time final* 

*ie$fc.-— 0L Iy drawn. 



152 



LESSON XLII. 



Die (£o$or'ten be 3 (£hri'H3 fd>rDoren The cohorts of Civilis swear alle« 

am 3£$eitt h tm SJeSpa'ftau in ©^ giance on the Rhine to Vespa« 

rien. — S* sian in Syria. 

!Der 9[£erglaul>e ift baft (5d}dblid)j?e, Superstition is the most injurious 

toaft fcei ben SDtaftyen etnfetyren farau (thing) that can visit men. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Die §lrttwt$, -/ the poverty; 

SSefte'geU; to conquer; 

©ettfen, to think, p. 346 ; 
Stte (£ttrigfeit, -, the eternity ; 
$He gattl^cit; -, the idleness ; 
Der Srcttfy -enS, pi. -e, (the) Francis; 

$rei, free; 
£)er SritfUtfg/ -ft, pi. -e f the spring; 

gitofte, fifth; 
Der ©elml'fej-rt, pi. -rt, assistant; 
Der £immet, -3, pi. -, the heaven ; 
Der $arl, -ft, pi. -e, (the) Charles; 

Soften, to cost; 
Die £eibertf($aft, -, pi. -en, passion ; 

Exercise 80. 



Der £o$tt, -e3, pi. £i)$tte, reward; 
SUMdjtig, mighty, powerful; 



Der 2Rat, • 
Der %Raxi, -ti 
Der SJtorft, -e 
Die SRujtf, -, 
Da3 spcwta, ■ 



the May ; 

J, the March; 

ft, pi. 3ttarJte, market; 

the music; 

}„ (the) Pavia; 
Da3 9>ftmb, -e$, pi. -e, the pound; 

<5d)mud:ert, to adorn ; 
Die ©djule, -, pi. -rt, the school; 
Der September, -ft, the September; 
Die Stmibe, -, pi. -rt, the hour; 
Die %Mti, -, (the) Turkey ; 
Die Utvfdjulb, -# the innocence. 



2iufgafce 80. 



1. Die SWufif ift tie ©pratf)e ber Setbenfc^aften. — SB. 2. Die 
Unfdjuib $at im Jpimmel einen greunb. — ©♦ 3. Die £offnung ifl 
ber treuefte Crofter be3 9Jlenfd)en. 4. Die Strmutl) ift oft ber »er^ 
biente M)n ber gault)eit. 5. Der greie Heft gefoBljttitd) ben grie* 
ben — after ftirdjtet ntd)t ben Srieg. 6. Der 33ote martet fc^on tikr 
eine ^alBe ©iunbe. 7. @3 ftnb jej3t ftiele Sngtanber unb granjofen 
in ber £ttrfet. 8. Der Sftai ift ein angenel)merer SJionat ak ber 
Wart* 9. Die $mber ftnb in ber ©We, ber SSater unb bie SKutter 
in ber $ir$e unb ber «ne$t auf bem aRarfte (L. 42. 1./.). 10. 
Sin folder Sftann ift ein $x fd)$ad)er ©e^iilfe. 11. 2Bie »iel foftet 
ciefer £l)ee baft $)funb ? 12. SSarum $at er ben £ut in ber ipcmb 
unb nid)t auf bent $opfe ? 13. Der ^aifer $arl ber gimfte kftegte 
ken ^bnig gran^ ^« Srften Jet 3)a$ia. 14. Die nteiften 2J?enf$.en 
arbeiten unb lefen genug, aBer fie benfen »iel gu foenig. 15. 3Bei# 
ht wo ber Jtarl ift? 16. ^Ran madjte ben tapfern gelbweM jum 
$auptmann. 17. 3»Blfmai Ijat jefct f^on ber gtiipng bein ®rai 
mit Slutnen gefc^miidt ! 



OMISSION OF TfiE ARTICLE* 153 

Exercise 81. SlufgaBe 81. 

1, The English and French, who are now in Turkey, are the 
enemies of the Bussians. 2. In what country is the city where 
the Emperor Charles the Fifth conquered King Francis the 
First % 3. Who calls music the language of the passions % 4. 
What sergeant was made a captain % 5. How much does this 
sugar cost a pound % 6. Did the messenger wait more than 
half an hour % 7. Why have they sent us so weak an assistant 1 
8. Hope is often man's only comforter. 9. The friend of inno- 
cence is more powerful than all its enemies. 10. Most men 
think and write too little. 11. Poverty is not always the re- 
sult of idleness. 12. Why is the rose called the queen of 
flowers 1 13. March is a cold, unpleasant month; is May a 
more agreeable month than September'? 14. The free love 
peace, but they love liberty still more. 15. Life is short, death 
is certain, eternity is long, Heaven is just. 16. Why has the 
boy his hat in his hand 1 



^ t * p ^ * < o 



LESSON XLIII. Uttion XLIIL 

OMISSION OF TBE ARTICLE* 

1. The article is omitted : 

a. Before the names of the cardinal points, when direction 
toward, or from them is indicated : 

£)ct3 eitte <S<$tff fegelte rtctdj Djlen, bctS (The) one ship sailed toward the 
anbere na$ @uben. east, the other toward the south. 

b. Before nouns used in a general sense, as the predicate 
offetnor fterfcett, and before those standing in apposition 
after a 1 3, with a previously or subsequently expressed word : 

£)er Srfjntetterling, ijt 8innMtb ber The butterfly is (the or an) emblem 

tf niler&'Itdjfeu:.— U. of immortality. 

Sitter meiner SSritber Ijt ^aufmamt. One of my brothers is a merchant, 

ber anbere $r&t. the other a physician. 

TO greunb fcmtt id) e$ tttdjt ratten. As a friend I can not advise it. 

&a$ t(t mcfyt 5Fcbe, nidjt <Sttte Bet uttS. That is not the fashion, not the cus 

torn with us (in our country), 



154 LESSON XL1I1. 

c. In legal reports and instruments, as also in many phrases 
before er fterer, letter er, folgenber : 

ttefcer&rttt'ger biefeS tjr etn Sreunb »Mt The bearer of this is a friend of 

mir (L. XXVIII 3), mine. 

SBeflag'ter fretjaup'tet bag# lU The accused maintains that> etc. 

Unter itWntttx »erpflidj'tetft$ ba$, ic. The undersigned pledges himself 

that, etc. 

d. Before nouns preceded by 3 xi, indicating the purpose or 
manner of an action : 

©r retfl in $ferbe. He travels on horseback. 

OMfen (Bit $ u 2-anb ober &u SBaffer ? Do you travel by land or by water? 
(£r fag nodi) $u Xtfdj. He was still sitting at table. 

£>ie $irtber gefyen ju Sett. The children are going to bed. 

e. When two or more nouns joined by un i> denote a single 
idea : 

2Bir finb mit $ersimb <&tzUbit fetmaen* We are his with heart and soul. 

2. The omission of the article, as in English, often gives the 
noun an adverbial signification ; thus, er fjeljt na&i ipaufe, signi- 
fies, he is going home ; while, er get)t na&j t> e m £>au[e, signifies, 
he is going to the (specified) house. This difference is illus- 
trated by the phrases ; to bed, to the bed ; at table, at the 
table ; etc. : 

Urn tt>etc(je Belt futben nrir (Bit $u£ctu* At what time shall we find you a£ 

fe ? (L. XXXVIII. 1. c.) toie / 

SEBamt ge^en Bit n a d) §aufe ? When do you go home ? 

3. When the dative of a noun, used in a general sense, is 
preceded by a preposition, the article is often omitted ; fre- 
quently, however, when the preposition and the article can be 
contracted into one word, the article is retained : 

&r ijl etn Sftcmrt son Gstyre* He is a man of honor. 

©djttfe fie %ux Dfrttye* Send her to rest. 

(£r war cutset ftdj sor S$mer$. He was beside himself with pain. 

(£r fagte e3 im Some. He said it in anger. 

4. Before the substantively used infinitive (L. XLIX. 4.), 
under the government of a preposition, the article is often omit- 
ted, as also before the cardinals, fyunDert, tauferti), etc. : 

Stonier $tenfd) fdjetttt mtr an CEfTcrt Many a man seems to think only 
tmb Xxhxftxi \u benfem of eating and drinking. 



OMiSSlOtf Of Tfifi ARTICLE. 155 

Sie Befd&aftigett ft<$ mtt ©<$retkit. They busy themselves with writing, 
$unbert Sttmmett rtefeit ifjm ttad). A hundred voices called after him* 

5. The omission of the article was formerly more common 
than at present, and many phrases in which it occurs are still 
used : 

©r ricfjtete bte Sfrtgest $ett §tmm?L He directed his eyes toward heaven* 
SDtefer entfcfytoffette %on mad^te (Eta* This determined tone made (an) 
brucf* — §>• impression. 

6. With jit, before the dative without the article are formed 
many idiomatic phrases ; as, ju ©runfee ridjten (lit, to direct or 
turn to the ground or bottom) to ruin; gu ©runDe g^en, to 
perish; etc. : 

t)u rufjlf^e Selbjti^ rt^tetc hit The Russian campaign ruined tha 

"Grande Armee" (rote man fie in "Grand Army" (as it used to b« 

nemtert pflegte) $u ©runbe. called). 

Set bem rufftfcfyen gelbjuge gutg bit In the Russian campaign the Grand 

"Grande Armee" $u ©runbe* Army was destroyed. 

33 c i f p i e I e» Examples. 

Sir fegelien nad) Sfarben uitb fte na$ We sailed to the north, and they 

SBtfktt. to the west. 

Stt £)eutfd)Tcmb tjl e3 <3itte hen $ut In Germany it is the custom to 

afcjune^men, roemt mattgreunben Be** take off one's hat when onemeete 

ge'^net. friends. 

Stein 99 ruber tfr in §aufe> unb tdj gelje My brother is at home, and I am 

nad) §aufe« going home, 

itunjr tjl tie recite |>anb ber fftatur'. Art is the right hand of Nature, 

£>tefe tyat nur ©efcfyop'fo i^e ben The latter has made only crea- 

2ftenf$en gemadjt'*— ©♦ tures, the former (has made) man. 

fcaufenb roarnenbe Setfpiele foUten un$ A thousand warning examples 

flu; gemadjt' Jafcen* ought to have made us prudent 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES, 



&etmlid), similar ; 
fclc «fcfcc, -; ashes (L. XXVL 10); 

SButtig, bloody; 
£>te (Sfyvijfenijeit, -, Christendom; 

$o!gen, to follow; 

©an$, whole ; 
$er ©efang, -e$, pi. ©efange, song; 
£>te ©efunb'fceiu -♦ pi. -en, health; 
£)er Gkmtb,-e3, pi. &rimbe, ground; 
£>er fRorbeu, -g, the North; 



3)a3 $itfen, -3, (the) Pilsen; 
2)ie heifer -, pi. -n, the journey, 

^td)tcn f see 6 ; 
2)te ^ScMadjr, -, pi. -en, the bafttle; 
£)er ©itbett, -3, the South; 
£>a £cm$, -e3 r pi. £dnje, the dance; 

Srcutern, to mourn; 

Berlaffen, to leave, p. 350; 

aSilb, wild; 

Q'uiytn, ' y migrate, go, p>S5& 



156 LESSON XLIV. 

Exercise 82. SJitfgaSe 82. 

1* 3*t tteld^er %ofynfytit gteljen Me n>tfben ®anfe na& 9lorben? 
2. ffiSann jtetjen fie na§ ©iiben ? 3* Urn fteldje 3*it fink @ie mor* 
gen ju £>aufe ? 4. 3$ Hit morgm t»en gan^en £ag ju £aufe* 5> 
SBarum gdjt ber $nate nidjt na& $aufe ? 6, fit ge^t nlfyt nafy 
£aufe, tpeil er fdjon jn £>anfe ift ?♦ Steifm gu gu$ ftnb oft ange* 
ne^mer ate ffteifen gn f fetbe s>bet gu SSagen* 8. Sir gie$en fred) 
turfy geinbes unb greunbes Sanbe*— ©♦ 9. $5te S^riften^eit tran^ 
eri in @atf tinb 5lfd}e,— ©♦ 10* ©in ©prtdjwort fagi, "Uefotng 
tna^t ben SKeljfrr," 11. 2iuf Blutige <Sd)Iad)ien folgt ©efang unb 
Janj (L. 36, 5.). 12. 2Bir serlaffen $>ilfen no$ ttor 9l6enb. — @. 
13. £)et Scaler §at Bet biefen nnb al)nlie£)en Strkiten feine ©efuni* 
§ett ju ©runbe geridjttf* 

Exercise 83. StnfgaJe 83* 

1. Is your friend still at home ? 2. No, but he will soon be 
at home. 3, At what time do the scholars go home % 4* They 
are already going home. 5. In what season of the year do the 
swallows migrate to the north ? 6* These and similar labors 
have destroyed the health of this man. 7* Shall you leave the 
city before evening % 8. How do you say in German, " Prac- 
tice makes perfect ?" 9. We shall soon have cold weather, 
the wild geese are flying to the south, 10. The boys waited a 
whole day. 11. Did you make the journey on foot, or by 
water ? 12. Have you not time to write your friends a letter? 
13. At what time shall you be at home ? 14. I am now at 
home, and my brother is coming home. 15. This is one of 
the hardest exercises we have had. 



■^a#-^» « » > i 



LESSON XLIV. Section XLIV, 

demonstrative pronouns. 

1. 35 er, bie, b a$, often supply, as demonstrative pronouns, 
the place of biefer and jener, and when used with nouns, 



MfofOffSTftATlVJE PEONOUNS. 151 

aie distill guished from the article of like form, by a greater 
emphasis : 

3$ loBe ben SDfann, nk&t IHefett* I praise that man, not this one* 

3$ lofo fc e tt SKctltitf ni$t jenett* I praise this man, not that one. 

5D a 3 SSudj $a£e id) fc^on gele'fen* This book I have already read. 

SBer i|l b e r ?* Who is that (or *A&) ? 

2. When the demonstrative b er is used with a noun 5 it hm 
the declension of the definite article ; used substantively, it fol- 
ic ws the inflection of the relative b er (L. 39, 2,) : 

£ en Sfenern fak i$ba$ ®eJb f$$tt To *Aose men I hate already sent 

gejtyttft'* the money, 

£> en en $d>e i<# el f$on gef$icft'« To those I have already sent it. 

Sebermann tttrb eudj lofcett, ha$ t$r Every body trill praise you that 

benen (i.e. the rulers) fcanfftifrn* you have declared war (feud) 

Berg %iW cmgefimbigt $alU— @, against those of Nuremberg. 

3. The demonstrative t> e r may often be best rendered by a 
personal pronoun; its genitive, like that of the relative be if, 
always precedes the governing noun : 

" %a$l eu$ b e r (that one) serfof gen ?" Does A<? cause you to be pursued f 

"£)er fdjabet nidji me$r ; id) faV t$n He will do (L. 38. 1. c.) no more 

erfdjta'gett*" harm, 1 have slam him. 

(£r Itefct feinen %$mbtr, ci&er nt$t bef* He loves his brother, but not his 

fen^inber. (that's) children. 

'2Beffen S3rob bn tffeft; beffen %kb Whose bread thou eatest, Ms song 

bn ftngejh" thou singest. 

4. 2) t r is used before the genitive, as the substitute of a 
i.oun previously expressed, in which position it m rendered that 
before the objective with of; or, frequently, the English pos 
sessive is used and its governing noun is not expressed : 

3d) $afce metnen S&atf nnb ben be 3 I have my ball and that of tha 

StmUn* boy. 

(Er $at feine $ebeir nnb tin feiner He has his pen and that of hia 

Sdjtt>ejter* sisfer.f 

s When thus used, b e r is often made still more significant by a sign 
or gesture : i <6 a $ (that at which I point) tjr mem 23udj, unb b a 3 (that 
other one) ijl feine3, that is my hook, and that (yonder) is his. 2) e r ijl 
e$ (L. 28.8.)/ rtefen $unberi (Btimmen, ber rettetc bie knight/ he is the one, 
cried (a) hundred voices, he rescued the queen. 

^ f Or, I have my ball and the boy's (ball) ; or, he has his pen and his 
sister's (pen). 



158 lessoh xuv. 

^ie fyxkn 3§re 23iH)er imb b te Sfyter You have your books and those of 

23rubei\ your brothers. 

&ctben ©tc bie get er Sljrer 23riiber, Have you the pens of your broth- 

cber bie ber metnigen? ers, or #tase of mine \ 

5. The genitives fceffen, fterett are often used (like the 
French e?i) 5 as a substitute for a noun previously expressed, 
and are sometimes rendered by some, any, and sometimes do 
not require translation (L. 39. 4.) : 

I£r foat fein ©elb fttetyr, after td) fyabt He has no longer any money, but 
b e ff c tt nod). I still have some (of it). 

3$ $afre feme S3 iidjer, bu ^ajiberen I have no books; you have (of 
gu steL them) too many. 

6. The old form of the genitive t> e § (for b e f f en, as also 
totfy, for in eff en) is still retained in several compounds, in 
the more elevated styles of composition, and in some proverb* 
ial phrases : 

(Er tjt begtsegen Win geinb* He is therefore my enemy. 

"2) eg ritt)me ber fclut 1 ge Xqxam' fid) Let not the bloody tyrant boast 

md)t." (himself) of this. 

»$8t$U$ $erj »ott tjt, beg tauft ber Of what the heart is full, o/ *Ao* 

SRunb ufcer," the mouth runs over. 

7. The neuter forms of the demonstrative pronouns (bief e3 
being often contracted into bie 3), as also meldjeS in conjunc- 
tion with the verb fein (like the French ce), may refer to nouns 
of all genders, and in both numbers i 

$H c $ flttb imfere greunbe. These (this) are our friends. 

Ber tftba<3? Who is that? 

8© e I dj e (tub bie langftett 9Md)te ? Which are the longest nights ? 

©ittb b a $ md)t Unaarn? Are not those Hungarians ? 

fftetn, e 3 ftnb SBofymen* (L. 28. T.) No, they are Bohemians* 

8. With the demonstrative and determinative pronouns the 
adverb e fc e n is often used : 

(£r ijt e ft en berfel&e. He is the vm/ same. 

& b en Mefe3 £au$* This very (this same) house, 

^fcen ber unb fein Inberer f)at mi$ 7"ws* he (ho himself) and noboJy 

iU eudj gefdjioY, else has a mt me to you. 



DEMONSTRATIVE fftOHOUKS. 



159 



iBetfptete* 



Examples. 



£)a3 fmb bic gotgen unglMferger Those are the results of unfortunate 

Sfjatetu — 8. deeds. 

2>er (Sine $at Me, ber $nbere anbere The one has these, the other (has) 



©aben— ®. 
* DtefeS Skd) tft mir liefc, n>er ea jltetyft* 

ber tft etn £>tek" 
3Ber fold) 1 etn |>er$ an fehten S3ufen 

brMt, ber fanrt fur £erb unh #of 

mit greuben fecfytett. — @» J 



other gifts. 
This book is dear to me, who steals 

it (he) is a thief. 
Who presses to his bosom such a 

heart, can joyfully (with joy) 

fight for hearth and home 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



vDer Cermet, -8, pi. -, the sleeve ; 
£)te 3lrbett, -, pi. -en, the work; 
£)er ©urometer, -$, pi. -, European; 
£>a$ granffurt, -8, (the) Frankfort; 
£)aS-®emalbe, -e3, pi. -, painting; 
£)te 3atfe, -, pi. -n, the jacket; 
!Der $utfd)er, -§, pi, -, coachman; 
£>er Offictc'rr -8, ph -d the officer; 

$art'fer, see L. 33. 5; 
£>er OMcfyter, -8, pi. -, the judge ; 

(Sammeln, to collect; 

©egelxi/ to sail ; 



2)a$@tegel, -$, pi. -, the seal; 

2)a3 SiegeHacf , -e$, pi. -e, the seal- 
ing-wax ; 
Spantfd), Spanish; 

£er ©tall, -e$, pi. @tatte> the stall, 
stable ; 

Der ©temp el, -3, pi. -, the stamp, 
post-mark j 

25 te Xante, -, pL -n, the aunt; 

t)a$ Unfraut, -e3, pi. -tranter, weed; 

Die SBtefe, -, pi. -n, the meadow; 

Die Settling, -, pi. -en, news paper, 



Exercise 84. SlufgaBe 84. 

1. £er ift mem geinb, afer biefer tjl mem grennb. 2. Eer Stfd) 
teg Secrets ift grower ati ber be3 ©djiiters. 3. ©djreften @ie mit 
meinem SleifHjte, oter mit bent meines Srnbers? 4.3d) tjak 
ben 3^ren tint) auc^ ten 3^3 SruberS. 5. 3$ fdjrrifcc mit 
meiner geber, unb er fdjreift mit ber feined Sreunbe*. 6. 2&otynert 
<£ie in ten §aufem ber 33anern, oter in benen ber JtanjTeiite ? 7. 
fyahm (Sie tie 3^Wung 3f;rer tank, ober tie ber metntgen ? 8* 
SBejTen §)ferb ift bas in S^rem ©tatfe, bas 3^rige, ober bas be3 jjitt* 
fdjers? 9. S3 ift tteter ba$ meiriige nod) bas feinige, fonbern tas 
bes ®iirtner$. 10. £ie3 finb bie ©ttefel te3 D(ficier£, nnb bas fmb 
tie fetnes Wieners. 11. §afi tit teine DBlaten, oter tie beine3 23ru* 
toerd ? 12. 3d) tjafce metn ©tegeffad nnt ba3 fees jfaufmanns, (L. 
9. 3.) metn ©iegel nnt ta$ be£ OartnerS. 13. I> er S3rief tjat ten 
©tempel »on granlfurt ; nnbberf>at ben $artfer ©tempel. 14* 
©at ber $Iempner fetn gafj, oter bas be3 2lrfcetier3? 15. SReine 



160 LESSON XlAVi 

SlrBeit tjt fitter, He melne* 9mt$filer3 ift tet^t. 16. $>aa, Ml 
mattnn^ $eute »on bem JWege er^aWt t)at, ift ,ritd)t ttatjr. 17* 
SWan fmbet met)r Unfmuter auf ben SCiefen tmb gelDern ber 3tmerU 
faner, als auf fatten ber Deutfd)etu 18. $tan fagt bag bie @d)tjfe 
ber 2lmmfatter fd)ttet(er fegeln, ate bie ber Sttglanber. 19. £)a3 ftnb 
S^re flttfipfe, imb bte<3 ftrtb bie bes @$neiber3 20. $)te Vermel 
tiefer Sacfe finb gu lang, bie ber attberen fmb 311 furj. 21. $ta* jhtfc 
mctne 9hd)ter* 22, Sr fammelt ®emalbe unb tjat beren fdjott stele 
gefauft. 

Exercisei 85* SlufgaBe 85* 

1. Have you the teachers seal, or the physician's ? 2. Have 
you the seal of the teacher, or that of the physician % 3* Does 
one find more Weeds (are more weeds found) in the fields and 
meadows of the Americans than in those of the Germans % 4* 
Are those your wafers, or the officer's (those of the officer) % 
5* Those are my "brother's, and these are the officer's. 6. The 
servant has the coachman's boots, and the coachman has the 
servant's. 7. My mother has my vail, and I have my aunt's* 
8. The tinman has the laborer's barrel, and the laborer has that 
of his friend, the cooper. 9. Your work is easier than that of 
your teacher* 10. The scholars work is always easier than the 
teacher's* 11, 1 have been told that you speak Spanish. 12* 
Are the sleeves of this jacket longer than those of the other 1 
13. Whose horses are those in your stable, the officer's or the 
coacfonan's ? 14. They are neither the officer's nor the coach-* 
man's^but the merchant's 15* I have your ball and that of 
your brother, your pen and that of my sister, my sealing-wax 
and that of the scholar, your books and those of your cousin. 
16. Are you writing with our pencils, or with those of our 
scholars? Y\. Is your vail larger than your mother's ? 18. It 
is larger than my mother's, but much smaller than my aunt's 
or my cousin's. 19. What kind of books are these ? 20. Those 
are Spanish books. 21. Has your news paper the post-mark 
of Frankfort or of Paris % 



THE AUXILIARIES. 161 

LESSON XLV. Union XLV. 

THE AUXILIARIES OF MODE 

1. Are biirfen, fonnen, m&gett, miiff en, fo II en, »ot 

1 e n, l a [fen,* and with which the main verb is used without 
the particle git (except with I o nnen, as given below; see 6). 

2. CONJUGATION OP THE MODE AUXILIARIES. 

Present Tense. 

td) barf, farm, m%, nrnfj, fcD, mitt, lajfe, 

bu barfft, fannft, magft, muft, fottft, fetttft, I&jfeji, 

er barf, fann, mag, mufj, fell, mitt, liifjt 

Imperfect Tense. 

td) bitrfte, lomtie, mo$te, nutfjte, fotfte, mottte, lief, 

bu burfteft, fowtteft, modjtejt, mnpeft, fottieft, ttotfteft, liefejr, 

er burfte, lonnte, ntodjie, mu^te, fotfte, motlte, lief. 

(§ 83. 2.) (§ 83. 3.) (§ 83. 4.) (§ 83. 5.) (§ 83. 6.) (§ 83. 8.) 

3. All the persons of the plural are formed as in regular 
verbs. 

4. 2) iir f e n indicates : 

a. A possibility dependent on the will of another : 

£>er Skuer barf rtt$t ftfdjetu The peasant caw not (legally) fish. 

SBer be$ £errn Sod) nidjt tragt, barf He who wears not the Lord's yoke 

jtdj nut feinem J!reu& nidjt fdjmucferu must not adorn himself wi th his 

— €>♦ cross. 

b. ©iir fen, in the subjunctive mode, often indicates a 
logical possibility : 

©3 b it r f t e jefct ju ft at feitu It might (may) now he too late. 

£>te Sfaidjmelt burfte SBebettlen tra=* Posterity wi^rA* hesitate to sub- 
gett bie^ Urt^etX $u jmterfdjret'fcetu scribe to (approve) this verdict. 

c. ©iir f e n (infinitive; see also fomten, L. 58. 1.) preceded 
by 3 u often requires no translation in English : 

(£r Bat ttm SrlauVntg fte Befitc^'en in He asfced (for) permission to (he at 
b ii r f e tu liberty to) visit them. 

* For complete conjugations of thesa verbs, see § 83. 2, etc., (except 
of taffett, which is not there because it is not of the mixed conjugation 
§ 81). See list .of irregular verbs, § 78 » 



162 LESSON XLV. 

5. $ Bit tt en indicates: 

a. A possibility dependent on the capabilities of the subject , 

j£)er $og<l fantt fliegetu The bird can fly. 

©ie font en e3 letdjt ttyutu You can easily do it. 

b A logical possibility : 

Tlan lawn c$ fdjon get^an tyaktu It may have been done already. 

3$ gefje ntcljt, e$ Fonnte rcgnetu I am not going, it might rain. 

€r f antt Unrecfyt tyaktu He may be wrong. 

Obs. — $otttten is often used transitively in the sense of to under- 
stand, to know by heart : 

(£r f antt snete pofc^e Sieber. He knows many pretty songs. 

<Ste Fantt englifdj* She understands English. • 

dx f ann son 5lHem (£tn>a$. He knows a little of every thing. 

Unt^tn with ^onnen. 

6. Um|itt (literally around thither) is used only with I o TU 
n t n ; and here, as an exception, the particle j u is employed 
with the infinitive which follows : 

3$ f o nnte ntcfyt um$in e$ i$m $u I could not avoid ("get round 11 ) tell- 

fctgetu ing it to him. 

3$ f antt tti$t um^in &u Ia$en. I can not help laughing. 

St o n n e n with t> a fit r has likewise an idiomatic use : 

2Ba3 famtjlbu bemtbafur? How can you help it? (lit., what 

canst thou therefor ?) 

7. 9Jt o g e n indicates : 

a. A possibility dependent on the will of the jpeaker or the 

subject, and is frequently used transitively : 

£)u m a g ft ben SBrtef tefen. You may read the letter. 

Sclj ma g nidjt tyier Meikn. I do not wish to remain here. 

34 mag btn SBeitt nidjt. I do not like (wish for) the wine. 

@k m o g en un<3 nidjt fe|)en. They do not wish to see us. 

b. 9JI o g e n indicates a logical possibility as a concession 
• on the part of the speaker : 

(Er mag cm trcucr greunb fern. He may be a true friend. 

©te m o g e n e3 getfyan tjakru They may have done it. 

8. SJt ii f f e rt is the equivalent of must : 

SBir mufff n Mt jlerkiu We must all die. 

(£r m a § t e cd ttyim He wa« obliged to do it 



THB AUXILIARIES 163 

9. © oil en indicates: 

a. A necessity dependent on the will of another, or on 
moral obligation : 

•Diefe gurdjt foil enbtgen; t§r £aitpt This fear shall end; her head shall 

foil fallen; id) xoiU Sriebe fyakn. fall; I will have peace. 

Srfj ! o 1 1 in bie ©tabt gefien. I a?w to go to the city. 

Jttnber foil en {enter.. Children should (shall) learn. 

b. © ollen indicates a logical necessity resting on report, 
and answers mainly to it is said, reported, they say, or to 
phrases of similar import : 

<5ie fo lie n fetyr retdj fern* They are said to be very rich. 

§er$og 3ofycmn foil irrenim^eMr'ge* Duke John is reported to be wan- 
— <£>♦ dering in the mountains. 

c. © oil en, with another verb expressed or understood, 
often answers in relative sentences to our infinitive preceded 
by to: 

(5r tt>cig ntdjt Voa§ er n)un fo It.. He does not know what to do. 

Setge mtr ttrie idj e3 mad)en f o I L Show me how to do it. 
2Ba$ fo II ic^ $ter ? What am I to do here ? 

10. SBotlen indicates : 

a. A necessity dependent on the will of the subject . 

(£$ foil fo fetn, tcfj tt> ill e$ fo $at>en. It shall be so, I will have it so. 

©ie rc o 11 en ntdjt gefyen. They will not (do not wish to) go. 

3$ ttollte e$ t$m erfldren, d>er er I was going to explain it to him, 
to o 1 1 1 e midj nicljt pren. but he wow/d not hear me. 

b. A logical necessity dependent on the assertion of the 
^subject : 

<£r h) i 11 e3 felBjt gefe'^en ^aften* He pretends to have seen it himself. 

©tc foEen in ber <5tabt fetn; bie £eute They are said to be in the city; the 

tt o lien fie gefe^en fyakn. people will have it that they have 

seen them. 

11. Sctffen signifies to let, leave, permit \ command; also, 
to get, or order any thing done : 

£ a g t ba$ geuer au3(jel)cn. Let the fire go out. 

(£r fiat ba3 SBud) f all e n I a f fen. He has dropped (let fall) the book. 

(5r I a g t baS genfter offen. He teaws the window open. 

SBarum' 1 a f f c n Ste i|n §e^eu ? Why do you permit him to go ? 



164 LESSON XLV. 

34 Ictffe mix einen $to$ mafytn* I am getting a coat made (for me). 

34 tyctfee ttym (or fitr tlm) ehten Ototf I have ordered a coat (to be made) 

mad)en I a ff e it. (L. 49. 5.) for him. 

(£r It e § ba$ Regiment' cmrM^tt* He commanded the regiment to ad- 

vance. 

12. These verbs all have a complete conjugation. Hence 
where their English equivalents are found, in this respect, do- 
fective, other words of like meaning must be supplied : 

3^ m it (5 Ijeute gel) en* I wws£ go to-day. 

(£r ft it n f 4 1 e ttyn geljen $n kffeit. He ms/M to let him go. 

34 lit it ft e geftern getyen* I was obliged to go yesterday. 

34 fjctBem4t sett) o XX t% afcer i4^ctf>e I have not wished to, but I have 

g e tit it § t' ♦ been obliged to. 

(£r tturb gefyen f o it It e it* He will be able to go. 

Bit tterben fptelen tt) c II en* They will msA to play. 

(£$ ift kffer ctrktten £U ft II en, CtI3 It is better to be willing to work, 

arfretten $U mil f fen* than to be obliged to work. 

13. The perfect and pluperfect of the above auxiliaries 
(namely, bitrfen, fomten, mogen, miiffett, fotlen, rotten and tafferr^ 

§ 74), as also of ^ei^en (in the sense of to command}, tjelfett, 

^bren and fef)en, when used with other verbs, take the infinitive 

form, instead of the participle : 

34 Ijct&e if)tt fommen Ij t t g e «♦ I have commanded him to come, 

34 $<*&£ i^m ctrktien i) el fen* I have helped him work. 

34 $ft&e tl)n fpre4en $ o x e n* I have heard him speak. 

34 ^e il)tt ge^en fel)ett* I have seen him go. 

34 ^ a ^ ni4t setyen fonne n*. I have not been able to go . 

(Bit $at e3 m4t tljtm m t) 9 en* She has not wished to do it. 

14. When the infinitive form of the participle, as above, is 
employed, it is always placed at the end of the sentence ; hence, 
the inversion usual in relative sentences does not take place : 

S5er $Ram, tt?e!4er $ctt geljen mitffen The man who has been obliged to 

(not gel) en mitffen $ctt)* go. 

34 tteig £$> bag er ttnrb fommenfimnett* I know that he will be able to come, 

15. After these auxiliaries the main verb (where the mean 
ing is sufficiently obvious) is often omitted : 

34 f cttttt m4t metyr. I can (do) no more. 

<5te miiffett gteid) fort* You must (go) away immediately. 

&in Sitngling to I It t jur BtaU $in* A youth wished to go (or get) up to 
auf, the city 



THE AUXILIARIES. 



165 



SSetfpiele* 



ExAMILES. 



£>a£ ©eridjt' I a g i belt ©erlJredj'er The court causes the criminal to be 

ettf&awp'teiu beheaded. 

(£r I a g t fettteit greuttb im <Stt$e* He leaves his friend in the lurch. 

€r ^offte feinett ©o!)n au§ ber ®efa f ^r He hoped to be able to wrest his 



retfett jit fottnetu 
(£3 bit r ft e stelletcfyt toafyx fetn* 
(Er b a r f tttdjt in ba§ $ctu$. 
2Ba3 farm tc6 bafiir? 
Sdjmaa e<2 ntdji t^utt, 
2£a<3tt tiler ba$ tdj tljittt foil ? 
Sdj tr> o II t e gent ba^tn ge^etu 
(£r tt til btdj gefe^en tyaSetu 
3$ mo$te frit^Mett, §err SBtrtlj* 
3d? m o $ t e e<3 &es»ei'feltt (§ 83. 11)- 



son from the danger. 
It might perchance be true. 
He ventures not into the house. 
How can I help it? 
I do not like to do it. 
"What would he have me do ? 
I would fain go thither. 
He insists that he has seen you. 
I would like to breakfast, landlord, 
I might {am inclined to) doubt it, 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$a$ SBeifptet, -e$, pi. -e, example; 

SBIetbett, to remain, continue ; 

SBrhtgen, to bring (p. 346.); 

£>ag {conj.\ that; • 

©epalb, therefore; 

©itrfen, see 4; 

<£|7en, to eat (p. 348.) ; 
$>te $reube, -, pi. -it, joy, pleasure; 
£)ie ©ebulb, -, the patience; 

©eitie'jjen, to enjoy (p. 350.); 
£)a$®ettur$, -e3, pi. -e, the spice; 
£)ie Ramt, -, pi. -it, the can; 

Potmen, see 5 ; 

£eriten, to learn; 

Exercise 86, 



SKcifjiflt, moderate, temperate; 

SRogett, see 7 ; 

OTffen, see 8; 

Dfrgleid)', although; 
Die Sftegel, -, pi. -n, the rule ; 

Sdjuaiettg, difficult; 

©dtfafettj to sleep (p. 354,) ; 

©alien, see 9 ; 
Die ©peife, -, pi. -it, the food; 

%dalid), daily ; 

£ameit, to dance ; 

ttm^in, see 6 ; 

SBettn, if, when ; 

SBoHen, see 10. 

SlufgaBe 86. 



1* Sr mag geljetu 2* Siejentgen, twelve ntdjts ttijfen, follen ete 
ttas lernetu 3. 2Ber Iran! ifi, barf tud)t arBetten. 4. SBcr gefimb 
BleiBen »itt, mnj} mfif tg effett ttnb trtnfetu 5* 2Ser gut fdjlafen ttriH, 
mujj fleijng arfcetien. 6. 2Ber ntc^t fleijHg unb anfmerffam fein anlf. 
lann nicft fdjneH lernen* 7. SBer etnen Srtef fdjreifcen rottl, mu§ 
papier, Suite xtnb geter ^afcetu 8* £te greufcen ber ®rbe foil man 
ttne ®etr>itrge gcmepen nnb nicfot t»te tixgltdje ©petfetu 9. Bennett 
@te mir fagen »o ber 2lrgt ttol)nt? 10* 3$ mill init ?l)nen %u tint 
geljen* 11* SJerDen @ie morgen mil mir nadj ber @tabt ge|en 
fbnnen? 12 + 3d) merbe ge^en fonnen, after id) werfce tttcfct gekn 
fcotten, benn id) foerbe iitermorgen get)en miiffen. 13. £ie beutfdje 



166 LESSON X~,V. 

©pradje foil fe$r ftymtertg fein, bef^atB tmtfj ter ©filler be SHegeln 
unt) He Seifpiele aufmerffam tefen. 14* 2Ber btefe @prad>e lemcn 
ttutt, barf ntdjt faitl oter nad)ldffig fetn* 15* 3ftetn 33ater Jjat mid) 
me tan^en laffen, er f)at me tauten tooHen, itnt feme Stirtitx fyaBen 
nie tanjen biitfen. 16* ffiBtr mert>en Bait) fpredjen fbnnen, mnn toir 
nur fletjjig fein motlem 17. 2Sa3 ftottte t>er ^aufmamt 3fynen £er* 
faufen ? 18* 3$ fonnte md)t3 Bet i^m fmben, it>a3 idj laufen tooflte, 
19* Sin guter Secret mujjj ©cbult) tyaktu 20* £ie Winter ttotfen 
Slepfel unt tftrfdjen, aBer fie lonnen feirte faufen, ^emt fie l)aBen fetn 
©elt>. 21 ♦ ^annfl bu mir jene groge $anne Brtngen ? 22, 5Bir 
fiinnen nid)t umfyin gu ladjen, oBgletd) mir ttnffen, fca§ e5 unrest tfh 
23* 3$ latin nidjts bafiir, bafj id) arm Bin* 24, lonnen ©iebeutfdj, 
franjoftfd) unb fpanifd) ? 

Exercise 87. SlufgaBe 87* 

1. I wished to go with my friend, but I could not, for I was 
obliged to remain at home. 2. He who wishes to be rich or 
learned must be industrious. 3. Those who will not read can 
not learn. 4. I wished to buy good horses but could find none. 

5. When shall you be able to write a letter to your friends \ 

6. I shall be able to write one to-day, but I shall not wish to 
write one. 7. Will your friends be obliged to stay in the house 
this evening 1 8. They will not wish to go out of the house. 
9. We have been able to go, but we have not wished to go. 10. 
Have you been obliged to remain here? 11. We have been 
at liberty to go, but we have wished to remain. 12. I can not 
read, for I am unwell. 13. You must be industrious if you 
wish to be healthy and happy. 14. These men are said to be 
very rich. 15. What shall I do with this money ? 16. You 
may give it to your poor friends. 17. May I read your new 
books'? 18. You may read them if you can. 19. You may 
go to your friend if you wish. 20. 1 do not wisvi to go to-day. 
but I shall wish to go to-morrow. 21. Those boys say they 
can not help laughing. 22. I shall probably be in the city to 
morrow, what shall I buy for you? 23. I can not buy any 
thing, for I have no money. 24. It is said these children un 
der stand German and French. 



OONJl'OATION OF feftlt. 



161 



LESSON XLVL Cectiou XLVI. 

1. CONJUGATION OF <S i t Jt. 



Present. 
(tin. to be. 


INFINI1IVE. 

Perfect 
geroefen fetn, to have beia, 


Present 
feiertb, being. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Perfect. 
geroefen, been- 


Singular, 


INDICATIVE. 

Plural, 

PRESENT TENSE. 


id) Bin, I am ; 
tit Btjr, thou art; 
cr iff, he is; 


rotr ftnb, we are; 
If* fetb, you are ; 
fie ftnb, they are. 




IMPERFECT TENSE. 


id) roar, I was ; 

fcu roarfr, thou wast; 

cr roar, he was ; 


rotr roaren, we were; 
vf)r it>aret f you were ; 
fte roaren, they were. 




PEBFECT TENSE. 



t(r) Bin geroefen, I have been ; 
bit Btft geroefen, thou hast been ; 
cr ifi geroefen, he has been ; 



rotr ftnb geroefen, we have been ; 
ifyr fetb geroefen, you have been ; 
fte ftnb geroefen, they have been. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

td) roar geroefen, I had been ; rotr roaren ger»eferi/ we had been ; 

bit roarfr geroefen, thou hadst been; ttyr roaret gerx>efert f you had been; 
cr roar geroefen, he had been ; fte roaren geroefen, they had been. 

FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 

id) roerbe fetn, 1 shall be; rotr roerben fetn, we shall be; 

bu rptrfr fein, thou wilt be; i$r roerbet fein, you will be; 

er roirb fein, he will be; fte roerben fein, they will be. 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

I shall i .„ rotr roerbem 



i^roerie^ « ^ I shall \ .„ rotr roerben) 
htrotrft V g"£ thou wilt V |' § i$r roerbet > 
ct roirb ) « w he will ) A ^ fte roerben) 



fci (bit), be (thou). 



fte 

IMPERATIVE. 

fcib (i y r), be (you). 



we shall ^ ^ j 
you will \ > $ 
they trill ) * ,a 



1*8 



LESSON XLVI. 



Obs. — As an auxiliary in forming the perfect, pluperfect and second 
future tenses, fe in (§ 71. 3.) is often rendered by the auxiliary have : 

<£r i ft §ter getoefen* He has been here. 

3d) tt> at bort (jefclie'&etu I had remained there. 

(Bit totrb fdjott gegangctt f e i tu She will already have gone. 



2. idioms with feliu 



$fo toem i(! bie IRei^e &u lefen ? 

©ie if! an mir* 

Utir ijl fe&r fait; i$m tft p toarnu 

fWir tft ntdjt too^l* 

2$a3iftbtr? 

3dj tx>eig nidjt tote mir tft* 

eei guteS 3&utl)e$, 

SDftr tft nidjt tooijl ju $?utfje* 

<£s tft if)m (£mft bamtt. 

<£3 tft ©djabe, bag er fetnem dkper 

nidjt geroadjfen ift. 
£>a$ 3)ferb tft mir nid)t fell* 
SBemftnbbiefe^leiber? 
Sie ift iljm etnen ©ulben fdjulbig* 
SBtft bu tm ©tanbe e$ p t^un? 
3dj Bin e3 nidjt tm (Stanbe* 
g£er tft ©ttyulb baran, bag er nodj nidjt 

angefommen tft ? 
&)u felbft Mft <S$utt> baran* 
<£$ tft etn foldje§ ®efefc oorJjanben, 
<£$ tft i(jm barum #x t$wu 
Sooon ift bie Okbe? 
£>a$ tft mir red)t* 
€3 tft i^nen litb* 
3dj Bin Mr ^erjlidj gut* 
£affen <Ste e$ gut fete* 
3dj n>etg rote bu Uft* 
<£<3 fet nun, bag, iu f* to, 
2Ba3 fein foil, fct>idft fid) tool)L 
@3 tft mir fOf alS oft tdj e$ gefjort' 

ptte, 
3$ toil! be3 £cbe3 fete, toenn e$ nid)t 

toafyr ifL 
(St tft toitlenS fte ju kfud)en* 

&t tft mete geroefener greunb* 



"Whose turn is it to read ? 

It is mine. 

I am very cold ; he is too warm. 

I do not feel well. 

What ails you ? 

I don't know what ails me. 

Be of good cheer. 

I do not feel well (mentally). 

He is in earnest about it. 

It is a pity that he is not equal to 

his antagonist. 
My horse is not for sale. 
Whose clothes are these ? 
She owes him a florin. 
Are you able to do it I 
I am not able to do it, 
Whose fault is it, that he has not 

yet arrived f 
It is your own fault. 
There is such a law in existence. 
That is his object. 
What is being spoken of? 
I am satisfied with that. 
They are glad of it 
I love you heartily. 
That's enough of it, (leave off). 
I know you (your ways). 
Supposing now, that, etc. 
Whatever is to be, is proper. 
It seems to me as though I had 

heard it. 
I will (wish I may) die if it is not 

true. 
He is inclined (has the will) to 

visit them. 
He is my former (has been my) 

friend. 



conjugation of SSerben, 



163 



3. CONJUGATION OF 2B t X t> t tt* 



Present. 
XOtxktn, to become, 

Present. 
»f*benb, becoming. 

Singular. 

tdj tterbe, I become ; 

bit JDtrjlf thou becomest ; 

C r ttirb, he becomes ; 



INFINITIVE. 



Perfect 
getocrben fettt, to have become 



PARTICIPLES. 



INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



Perfect 
gettorben, become. 

Plural. 



toix tterben, we become; 
tyx tterbet, you become; 
fte tterbett, they become. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

t<$ ttitrbe or ttctrb, I became; ttrir ttmrben, we became; 

bit tturbefr or ttarbjr, thou becamest; t$r ttmrbet, you became; 
cr ttitrbe or tx>arb f he became ; fte ttitrben, they became. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) Bin gettorben, I have become ; 
bit Mft gettorbett, thou hast become; 
et tjt geivorben, he has become ; 



ttnr ftnb gettorben, we have become; 
t$r feib getrwrben, you have become ; 
fte ftnb gettorben, they have become. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

tdj ttar getootbett/ I had become; uotr tuctren gettorben, we had become; 
bit ttctrff gettorben, thou hadst become; ifyr ttaret gettorben, you had become; 
er ttar gettorben, he had become ; fte ttxxren gettorben, they had become 

FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 

t<$ roerbe tterben, I shall become ; ttrir Herbert tterben, we shall become ; 
bit ttrirjt tterben, thou wilt become ; t$r tterbet tterben, you will become; 
er toixb tterben, he will become ; fte tterben tterben, they will become. 



tdj roerbe \ ^ 
bit tt>trft j- s 
er ttntb J ^ 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

« I shall ^ © ft)ir tterbett w ^ we shall ^ 

2 /*-».££ f 



thou wilt 
he will 






tfyr tterbct >• § 
1 fte tterben) §> 



will I % I 



you 

they will ) 



tt>erbe (bit), become (thou), 



IMPERATIVE. 

roerbet (tBr) r become (you). 
8 



HO 



LESSON XLVl. 



4. SB e r fc e it, as an independent verb, answers mainly to be* 
come. It may, likewise, be variously rendered by to grow* 
turn, be, obtain, or by words of similar import : 



•Der ©cfynee n> tr b ttef. 

<£\t roerben retd). 

©ott fprad}, e3 roerbe Sic^t. 

SB it tserben die alt, 

'Ber Sftafce tt>trb feljr alt, 

£)a3 Staffer tx>trb efcen §u <£t3. 

8fo« StfidjtS tttrb fticfctS, 



The snow is becoming deep. 

They are becoming ("getting*) rich, 

God said, Let there 6e light. 

We are all growing old. 

The raven lives to a great age. 

The water is just turning to ice. 

Out of nothing nothing comes. 



Obs. — The dative governed by xo e r b e n is often best rendered by our 
nominative, and the subject in German by our objective; ttcrben being 
rendered by have or receive : 
Sftetnen armett Unterttyanen mu§ ba# My poor subjects must have (receive) 

Styrige Xdtxb t xi. — ( B. their property (L. 35. 2.). 



SBetfpiele. 



Examples. 



£>ie 2Bcrfe ®otte3 ftnb manntgfaltia,. The works of God are manifold, 

griebrtdj ber ©rofje ttar $omg son Frederick the Great was king of 

spreugen* Prussia. 

(£r toirb fein ©etb fdjneHer lo$ al3 er He gets rid of his money faster than 

eS aerbtente* he earned it. 

<SoMb bit <Sonne unterge^t tonrb e3 -As soon as the sun goes down it i* 

9?a$t» (becomes) night. 

£te^tunbentterben$u£aa,en,bte£aa,e The hours (become) grow to days, 

in 2Bo$en, bte 2Bod)en ju $fonaten the days to weeks, the weeks to 

imb bte donate in Sa^ren. months, and the months to years. 

jDie (Sonne fan! in bad Stteer imb e3 The sun sank into the sea, and it 

Xoaxb Sflafyt. was (became) night. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



§113, as, when; 

£>a, there ; 
£)a$£>eutfcfytanb, -3, (the) Germany; 
£)er £)rucf , -e$, pi. -e, the pressure ; 

(Sfyer, sooner; 
£)a$ Sranfretd), -§, (the) France ; 
T>a$ §eer, -e£, pi. -e, the army ; 

£et§, hot; 
£)er iTamerab', -en, pi. -en, comrade; 
2)er $rteqer, -3, pi. - f the warrior; 
£>a$ Sager, -3, pi. -, couch, camp ; 

£o$, free, rid; 

9ftitbe, weary, tired; 



Die $eU)e, -, pi. -n, the turn ; 
SDer better, -3, pi. ~, the horseman 
£He SftepuMif, -, pi. -en, republic ; 

<Sd)ulbtg, indebted, L. 61. 5 ; 

<3ettften, to sigh, groan* 

(Bo, so, thus; 

Sobatb, as soon ; 
£)er ©peer, -e3, pi. -e, the spear; 
£>er £aglot)ner, -$, pi. • , day -laborer 

£aufenb, thousand ; 

ttnbdnbio,, unmanageable; 
£)a3 3iel, -e$# pi. - e, limit, mark; 

3u (adverb), too. 



THE AUXILIARIES ©ein AND SBetben* 111 

Exercise 88. 2lufgct6e 88* 

L Xtefer ret$e 9ftann ifi fetyr arm gerr^efen. 2. ©inb ©ie anf 
jenem ^o^en (L. 32. 4.) Serge gemefcrt? 3. ©inb ©te je in 9tu^ 
lant) oter ^eutfdlanb getrefen ? 4. 5£er ftar ber gefdjicftefte Shelter 
in tern ipeere bes fran^cftf&en $aifer3 ? 5* SSamt fmt> ©ie in 
granfretd) gercefen? 6. SSte lange finb ©ie tnMefem 2anbe ? 7. 
©int) ©ie nie un^ufrieben unb traurig gettefen? 8* SBani 1 a>erben 
frir reid) fetn ? 9* SJir tterben alt unb alter nnb finb etjer am 
Siele unfereS SeScnd, ate un3 angene^m ift. 10. 2Ba$ toirb au3 
bir it>erben f toemt bu ni&t flet^tger nrirft? 11. 3$ frerbe ffei§iger 
tterben, foklb ate (L. 69. 3.) id} gefunb foerbe. 12. £er ift nid)t 
gut, ber nidjt fudjt imtner Beffer ju tr-erben. 13. ^ranfreid) nmrfce 
im 3a^re eintaufenD ad)t§unDert unb ad)t unb ttiergig eine 9iepubtif< 
14* 23 ftirb ein ^et§er £ag mermen, fagte ein alter $rieger ftenige 
©tunben !oor ber ©41ad)t gu feinem gameraben. 15. Ta$ $>ferb 
tturbe ganj nrilb urit) unbanbtg. 16. £er ^ranfe feufgt auf feinem 
Sager: "roiti e3 benn nie Sag fterben ? ij nnb ber £agU%ter unter 
bem £rucfe feiner Strfceit: "roirfc e£ Imn ntd)t Balb %la&)t fterben?" 
17. "©of)n, ba ^aft bu meinen ©peer! meinem 2lrm tmrb er ju 
fitter." 18. £te SRei^e ift an S^en, marum lefen ©ie niit? 
19. £ie SRei^e ju reben ift ntdjt an 3$nen. 
^- 
Exercise 89. SlufgaBe 89. 

1. When were you in France ? 2. Have those people evet 
been at your house % 3. Had they been in Germany before 
they were in Russia % 4. He will be in Russia before you will 
be in France. 5. The emperor of France was the " nephew 
of his uncle." 6. How long have you been in this city? T 
They have been rich, but have become very poor. 8. What 
has become of your friend % 9. The weather is becoming very 
cold, 10. You can become learned if you will be diligent. 
11. The young sailor has become healthy again. 12. The weather 
is becoming warm, and the days are becoming long. 13. The 
scholars in this school have been very idle, but they are now 
becoming more industrious. 11. I was obliged to wait so long 
that I became very tired. 15. The son gets rid of his money 



H2 ' LESSON XLVII. 

faster thin his father earned it. 16. How much do I owe you? 
17. Whose turn is it to read % 18. It is your fault if you do 
not know. 19. This man who is now so poor and wretched, 
has been a very rich merchant. 



-<» » • ♦ • < » » 



LESSON XLVII. JLection XLVII. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, OR VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. 

1. Irregular verbs are such as do not form their imperfect 
tense and past participle according to the rules in L. 37. 

For complete alphabetical list of "irregular verbs" see § 78; also, 
for further remarks on the same, § 77. 

2. The infinitive of these, as of the regular verbs, ends in e tt. 
The imperfect changes the root vowel ; and the past participle 
frequently differs from the infinitive only by the augment <je J 

Infinitive. Imperfect. Past Participle. 

gekn, to give; id) gctB, I gave; gegefien, given. 

fetyett, to see; td> fa§, I saw; gefetyett, seen. 

3. In some verbs the root vowel is found to be different in 
each of the three parts : 

fmgen, to sing; t$ [cmg, I sang; gefuttgett, sung. 
[pringen, to spring; id) [prang, I sprang; geftnmgen, sprung. 

4. In other verbs the root vowel of the imperfect tense and 
the second participle is the same : 

fltmmett, to climb ; tdj ft omm, I climbed ; geftommen, climbed. 

5. Some verbs change the radical vowel, and also add the 
terminations common to regular verbs : 

Bringen, to carry; id) Brctdjte, I carried; geBradjt, carried, 
benfett, to think; idj bctd)te, I thought; gebadjt, thought. 

6. The present tense forms the different persons like the 
regular verbs, except in the second and third persons singular 
of about sixty verbs, where the root vowel is changed, or if 
capable of it, assumes the Umlaut : (see List § 78. p. 346.) 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



iva 



|<$ geb?, I give; 

bu gibjt or giebfr, thou givest; 

er gtbt or gtebt, he gives. 



id) tefe, read ; 

bu liefefr, thou readest; 

er lieff, he reads. 



id) fpred)e, I speak ; 

bu fprid)ft, thou speakest; 

er fprtdjt, he speaks. 



ic$ fatfe, I fall; 

bu fdllft, thou fallest; 

er fa lit, he falls. 

T. In the imperfect, the second and ^>o? persons are regulaaly 
formed from the first : 

g e $ e m 

tdj ghtg, I went; 

bu gtngft, thou wentst; 

er QinQf he went; 

g eB en* 

id) gab, I gave ; 

bu gab ft, thou gavest; 

er gab, he gave; 



ttur gtngertr we went; 
if)r ginget, you went; 
fie gingen, they went. 



tt>tr gaben, we gave; 
ir)r gabet, you gave ; 
fie gab en, they gave. 



S3 eifpiel e. 

£er fRotl frtfjt ba$ (Sifett. 

2)te (Bonne fd)eint unb etnejebe $no3pe 

fttttffu 
(Er tritt metrte SMtgton' in ben Staul, 

unb ftretft bie £anb au$ nacfy meiner 

.ftrone. — ®. 
Die <3eele empfd'ngt' (£inbrucfe son 

3Iu§en. 
£r fdjetnt feine ganje ifraft erfd>b>f en 

iu rocEen. 



Examples. 

Rust eats (corrodes) iron. 

The sun shines, and each bud id 

swelling. 
He tramples my religion in the 

dust, and stretches out his hand 

for (after) my crown. 
The soul receives impressions from 

without. 
He seems desirous to exhaust his 

entire strength. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SBaden, to bake; 
SBefeJj'ten, to command; 
SBergen, to conceal ; 
SBlafen, to blow ; 
(Smpfan'gen, to receive ; 
Smpfcr/len, to recommend 
gafyren, to go in a carriage 
gledjten, to twist, braid; 
greffen, to eat, devour; 
£alten, to hold; 
£>angen, to hang; 
Sfteffen, to measure; 
SReJmeit, to take; 



<£aufen, to drink (as a beast) ; 

<Sd)clten, to scold; 
(Scfymeljen, to melt ; 
<Sted)en, to sting; 
(stefylen, to steal; 
©terben, to die; 
£ragen, to bear, wear; 
Sreffen, to hit; 
£>erber'ben, to perish, spoil; 
SJergef'jen, to forget ; 
28ad)fen, to grow; 
2£erfen, to throw. 



174 LESSON XL VII. 

Exercise 90. 2Iufga£c 90* 

L ©erBMttasSro't? 2. £:er ©oftat Krgt ftd) sor iemgeinte. 
3* gr Haft lias SJafofyorn. 4. £er Sauer Brtdjt Den^anf unl trtfcfct 
ten ffielgen. 5, 2Ba8 empfangt cr? 6* Xa3 ®uk empfiep fid) 
fel&ft. 7* £er SiKann fa^rt auf tern SBagen. 8. £er ©c^nee fdtlt. 
9. £er tfna&e fSngt Me Soget. 10. £er ©oftat fid)t. 11. gr 
flicfyt ft* einen £mh 12. £er Dd}3 frtjjt £eu tint) fauft SBaffer. 
13. £)a$ $int tjjt Srob unb trhtft $Rity. 14. gr gitt ntir *a$ 
neue 23ud). 15. gr grdfct fid) ein Sodj. 16. gr tjSft fcas $fert. 
17. ©er £ut pngt an tern 9lagel. 18-. gr Iduft imt I&fjt tie an* 
tern anty laufen. 19. @te lieft i|r SSud;. 20. @ie mtflt (or miffet) 
bas £ud>. 21. gr tttmmt mein 23ud). 22. SBarum f^tlt er ? 23. 
Der £unb fcpft, ter ^naBe f^fagt fca$ $ferb. 24. £a3 SBlct 
ftymllgt 25. 2Ba* ffe^ft tu ? tras fpri&t er ? 26. Die SSiene fticfet, 
ter tub jHetylt, ter $ranfe fiirbt. 27. gr tragi fd)bne $leifcer; er 
trifft immer ta$ 3iel. 28. SBarum ftd)t er? 29. £a$ 33ier m* 
btrtt. 30. gr »ergtft ma<3 fie fprldjh 31. 3Der Saum foddjft. 32* 
@ie tt>ei^ nicfyt mas fie mill. 33. gr nrirft ten Sail. 34. 3$ feeip 
toaS er mir fcerfpridjt. 

Exercise 91. 2lufga6e 91. 

1. T do not know who is throwing the balls. 2. Does he 
speak German ? 3. He does not forget what he reads. 4. The 
sun is melting the snow. 5. The thief steals the shoes that he 
wears. 6. The bee stings and dies. 7. The soldier is beating 
the dog. 8. The bird sleeps on the tree. 9. She scolds because 
he takes her book. 10. The carpenter is measuring the room. 
11. The boy runs and lets the dog run too. 12. Who is hold- 
ing my horse ? 13. Where is the cloak hanging ? 14. The man 
that is braiding hats gives us a book. 15. Who is digging this 
hole ? 16. Why does the soldier fw ht ? 17. What is this boy 
eating? 18. What animal eats g ass? 19. What does the 
horse drink ? 20. The tree is flillii g. 21. Who is catching the 
birds ? 22. Does he receive any thing ? 23. Who thrashes 
the wheat and breaks the hamp? 24. Why dost thou conceal 
thyself? 25. What does he command? 26. Who is riding 
on your wagon % 27. My friend recommends me to you. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



175 



©eifpiele; 

(£r pries feme 2Bactre uttb rtet§ un$ fte 

$u faufen. 
£)etne Briiber frag bad ©djmert, too 

ba$ Slut irt Stromeit flog* 

SDer Strom fdjrooll, toett ber ©$ttee 

fd)moi$. 
(£afar fd^ricB ttad) 9tom : "id) fam, 

fa$ tmb jteate." 



EXAMPLES. 

He praised his goods an H advised 

us to buy them. 
The sword devoured thy brothers 

where the blood flowed ia 

streams. 
The stream swelled because the 

snow melted. 
Caesar wrote to Rome: " I c&nie, 

saw and conquered." 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Setgen, to bite; 
SBetru'o.ctt, to deceive; 
Svtrtn'f;tt, to be drowned; 
(Srgrei'fen, to seize; 
gtte|eit, to flee ; 
gltegen, to flow; 
®eMe'ten, to command; 
©ene'fen, to recover; 
dHegett, to pour; 
§eBen, to raise; 
!>etgett, to bid ; 
4>elfen, to help, assist; 
$rted)en, to creep; 
2eiben, to suffer; 



Oteiten, to ride on horseback; 

3d)einen, to appear; 
v5d}{tegen, to shut, lock; 
@d)reten, to cry, shriek; 
©dnoeUen, to swell; 
(Btrtfen, to sink; 
<Stti$m, to ascend; 
<Btreitett, to quarrel ; 
Sretben, to drive; 
£reten, to tread, step ; 
Skrlte'ren, to lose; 
$erfd)ftntt'ben, to disappear; 
2Bafd)en, to wash; 
Stolen, to compel, force. 



Exercise 92. SlufgaBe 92* 

1. £er £unb Btfj ten £te6. 2* £er 33amn Brad). 3. Sr em* 
fcfal)! mid) einem Wlannt, ter mid; ftfyr freuntlidj empftng* 4. 3$ 
blieb ten ganjen £ag* 5. ©ie ergrijfen feine fyanit* 6. Sr ftel 
in t>a3 Staffer uttt ertranf. T, ©ie a$tn tie Stepfet, tie fie ftaljlen* 
8. 2£nr futjren turd) tie ©tatt 9. ©ie ffrtgen tie S3c jel^ ml&t 
au3 ten 9£eftern flcgen. 10. £ie ©oteaten fodbten nid)t iapfer, [on* 
Dern flcgen. 11. Sr geBot unz ju gel)en. 12. Sr gaB mtr tas 
©efo unt gtng. 13* Sr genafi langfam. 14. SSir genojfen geftem 
fe$r &enig. 15. Sr geftann me^r aU id) tterlor* 16. Sr go§ ten 
SBein in fcas ©las. 17. ©ie gruBen einen ttefen ©raBen. 18. Sr 
ftot fdnen ©tod unt §ieB nad) mix. 19. Sr fjtejj fte fommen, aBer fte 
famen nidjt. 20. Sr Ijalf tuts, oBgleid? er uns ntdjt fannte. 21* 
S35ir lafen tad 23u#, tad er wt3 gaB. 22. £a$ $tnt froc^, ter 
£>mtB lief. 23. ©ie lagen auf i^ren 23etten unt litten. 24* ©ie 



176 LESSOV XLVII. 

ndjmen tnctnen Skgen unb futjren in bie ©tabt. 25. Sr rief ben 
armen 9JJarin> 26. Sr fag unb fdjrtefc ben ganjen £ag. 27. X)a3 
$inb ftanb unb fd)rie. 28. £>er @4;nee fd)mol3,ber Strom fdjmott. 

29. @ie tranfen unb fangen; einer fcfyttamm unb ber anbere fanf. 

30. @te fdjlugen tijn, ftaJ)renb er fd^lief. 31. Sr rief mid) unb fdjalt, 
toeil id) auf feinem $ferbe ritt. 32. @ie fd)ien traurtg. 33. Sr ging 
I)inau$ unb fd)Iofj tie £pre. 34. Sr ftieg auf ben Serg. 35. @ie 
ftanben bi$ fie ftarBen. 36. Srftrtttmtt tfynenunb tvitb fteaus bem 
gelbe. 37. @ie tvaten in ba$ $au$ unb serfciwanben. 38. Sr 
ioergaf m$ er tterfprad). 39. Sr traf ba$ ftitL 40. S$ tuu^d 
fdmett. 41. Sr nmfd) ben Sifdj. 42. Sr ttmjjte, bag id) ben ©peel 
ttarf. 43. Sr jog fein @d)»ert unb jfoang fie ju ge^en. 

Exercise 93. SlufgaBe 93. 

1. The trees broke, and the boys fell. 2. The dogs bit the 
boys that stole the apples. 3. The man to whom you recom- 
mended me cheated me. 4. We did not remain long, for they 
did not receive us kindly. 5. The boy seized my hand. 6. We 
called him. 7. Did you ride on the wagon ? 8. The soldiers 
ate bread and drank wine, and their horses ate hay and drank 
water. 9. Our soldiers fought gallantly, and those of our enemy 
fled. 10. The birds flew out of the cage, but the boys caught 
them again. 11. We did not remain long. 12. They com- 
manded us to go to the city, but we did not go, for they gave 
us no money. 13. Did your friends recover? 14. We won 
less than our friends lost. 15. They poured the wine into the 
glasses. 16. They saw the horse, and raised their hands. 17- 
Why were they digging that ditch? 18. He came to us while 
we were reading the books which you gave us. 19. He struck 
at them because they drank so much and sang so loud. 20. 
We crept before we walked. 21. The boys shrieked, and the 
dogs ran. 22. We took the books that lay on the table. 23. 
Did you call him a thief? 24. We knew that they lied. 25. 
We sat around the table and wrote, and they stood around the 
stove. 26. He rode the horse and drove the oxen. 27. They 
called them friends. 28. Why did they seem so sad? 29. He 
scolded me because I slept so long. 30. They threw their spears 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 177 

And drew their swords. 31. Did you forget what he promised 
you ? 32. Did they hit the mark with the arrow % 33. Who 
washed the gloves? 34. Did the trees grow rapidly? 35. 
Did they lock the door? 36* Why did they quarrel with us? 

33 e i f p i e I e. Examples. 

S4 $afce me eitt foldje3 @efitf}t' em* I have never experienced such & 

pfun'ben. feeling. 

Q£- tyatte einen Jhanj fur fie gettmn'ben. He had wound a wreath for them. 
!>atte fein greunb ntcf)t^ son bet <&a$t Had his friend known nothing of 

gettitgt'? the affair? 

Sttctn tyat ben SBer&re^'er ergrif fen. The criminal has been seized. 
28er Ijat ba$ £teb gefun'gen? Who has sung the song? 

#aft bu and) tt>o^l kbad)t, t»a3 bu mir But have you well considered what 

rat^jl ? — S'. you advise me ? 

SBcmn tjctkn @ie an 3^renS3ruber ge* When have you written to your 

fdjrie'fcen? brother? 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES* 



Sftdjten, to grind; 
-3)Mben, to avoid; 
$fetfen, to whistle ; 
5)retfen, to praise ; 
i?d)eren, to shear ; 
^cfytegen, to shoot; 
^cfyinben, to flay ; 
<Sd)letfen, to sharpen, grind; 



(Sd)tt)5ren, to swear; 
©palten f to split: 
<Sptnnen, to spin ; 
ST^un, to do ; 
Skrbrte'ijjen, to offend; 
$er$ei'l)en, to pardon; 
SBekn, to weave; 
££inben, to wind. 



Exercise 94. Siufgct&e 94. 

1. £)er fyunb Ijat ben Xitb geBtffen. 2. fir ^at m$ ktrogen. 3* 
$at er Sftntn tttoa§ gegeten ? 4. fir $attt an xm$ gebad)t. 5, 
£aft t)u Den SQBeijen gebrofdjen? 6. fir {)at un$ freunbltd) empfan^ 
gen, aBer niemanb Ijat un3 iljm empfofyten. 1. 2Ba3 §at er gefnn* 
oen? 8. $Ran $at ben DieB ergriffen. 9. fir f)at ben 2tyfel ge* 
geffen; Ijat er ben S3ogel gefangen ? 10. 3$ ^Be fie gefunben; jte 
jjaben gefo^ten. 11. Der £unb l)at t)a^ gfeifd) gefrejfen. 12, fir 
Ijat mir nidjts gegeBen. 13. 2Ba3 tjat er gefe^en ? 14. 23tr fya* 
ben nifyte genoffen. 15. 2Ba3 ^at er genommen? 16. 2Ber ^at 
ben SCein tn ba$ ®la3 gegoffen? 11* 2Ber Ijat biefe3 £od) gegraten ? 
18. fir 1jat ba$ g>ferb ge^alten. 19. 2Ba3 $at fie gefungen ? 20. 
fir tjat un3 gelannt. 21. @te fjaben mix etn 53nd) gegekn unb t$ 
|ak eg ftetefen. 22. Die gebern l^aBen anf tern Jifcfte gelegeiu 

8* 



178 LESSON XL VII. 

23. Sr fat ntdjt getogen. 24. £er Stutter tjat bas ©etretbe gemefs 
fen nnt> gemat)len* 25. Sr $at un$ Xiebe genannt, tr>eit nrir fetrte 
Slicker genommen tjakn* 26. SBarum t)at tt gepfiffen? 27. ©te 
§aBen ifyre 3)ferte gepriefen. 28* Srtyat fie gerufetu 29. SBarum 
fyaft bu im3 gefd)otten ? 30. Sr fyattt ba3 ©d)af gefdjoren. 31* 
Sr Ijat ben SSBolf gefdjoflfen uri% gefdjunben* 32. ©te fyattm gu 
lange gefd)lafen. 33. ^aft bu bte 3Rej[er gefd)lijfen ? 34. 2Sir 
fyabm bie £f)iiren gefdjloffen. 35. §at er %a$ 23rob gef^nttten? 
36. 3$) tycttte gefdjrle&en, imb fie ^atkn gefdjrteen. 37. ©te Ijat e3 
gefcteorcn. ,38. 2Btr fyafcen tt)n gefetyen* 39. #at er ba£ Steb fd}on 
gefungen ? 40. (Er fyat etne ©tuirte gefejfen. 41. Sr §at bat £>olj 
gefpatten. 42. §ahn fie bte SCoIIe gefponnen? 43. 2Ba3 fte ge* 
[proven $at, t)at tf)n gefbcfyen. 44. £er Sftann, ber $a geftant>ert 
fyattt, $at mem $jerb gefiofyteiu 45. ©te i)alm lange genug ge^ 
ftritten, was fyat er getfjatt? 46. Sr tyat ba3 3te( getroffetu 47*. 
jpafl bu nie SSein getrunfen? 48. 3$ ^abe sergeffen. 49. 3Ba$ 
t)at er aerloren? 50. S3 tyat ityn ^crDroffen. 51. Jpat er un3 tter^ 
jietyen? 52. Sr l)at ba3 Zu&j gemoben tmb gemafdjen; $at er einett 
Sail geirorfen ? 53. 5Rie ^afce td) fte gemte&en. 54. 2Sa3 Ijat 
er gemunben? 

Exercise 95. 3lufga£e 95* 

1. He has beaten the dog that has bitten him* 2. I have ofi 
ten thought of him 8 3. Have you recommended this book to 
us ? 4. Have you thrashed the wheat ? 5. They have always 
received us kindly. 6. Who has ground your knife? 7. The 
boys have eaten the bread and drank the beer. 8. The dogs 
have eaten the meat and drank the water. 9. They have caught 
their horses. 10. What have you found? 11. Why have the 
soldiers fought? 12. I have shot a large bird. 13. Have you 
seen the books that I have read ? 14. Into which glass have 
you poured. the wine? 15. Why have they dug this hole? 
16. Who has held my horse ? 17. Who has seen us? 18. Have 
my books lain on your table? 19. Has any body lied? 20* 
Who has ground the wheat? 21. Have you measured the 
cloth? 22. Why has he avoided his friends ? 23. Why have 
they called him a thbf ? 24. Who has taken my pen ? 25* 



use of tee auxiliaries fyalzrt and Seln* 179 

He has called me, but he has not scolded me. 26. Who has 
sharpened my knife % 27. Have you locked the doors ? 28* 
Who has cut the bread? 29. Had you written him a letter! 
80, Have you ever sung this song t 31. Have you sat longer 
than they have stood 1 32. I have spun the wool and he has 
split the wood. 33, The bees have stung the horse* 84. Has 
any body stolen any thing % 35. He had not spoken at all. 
86* Why have they quarreled ? 37. Who has worn the hat? 
38 What have you lost % 39* Who has thrown the apples'? 
40. Why have they drawn their swords ? 41. Have you w r ashed 
the cloth that he has woven % 42. It vexes him that he has lost 
his money. 43. Have you forgotten what you have promised 
me % 44. Why have you slept so long % 45. Has any one 
compelled you to go 1 46. Who has whistled ? 47. What 
have they praised? 48. Have you ever known such a man? 
49, He has written, and they have spoken. 



LESSON XLVIIL £eciimt XLVI& 

USE OF THE AUXILIARIES fyaittl AND @ t X tt. 

1. ^) a 6 en is used as the auxiliary of all transitive, reflexive * 
and impersonal * verbs ; as also of the verbs of mode c and of 
all objective verbs that govern the genitive & and dative *, ex- 
cept begegrtett, folgen and rceidjen (see 2.), 

2. Intransitive verbs indicating direction from or toward a 
place or an object, or a change from one condition to another, 
as also b I e i h e n, to remain ; 6 e g e g tt e tt, to meet ; f o I g e tt, 
to follow, and ty e td) e tt, to yield, retreat, are conjugated with 
the auxiliary (ettt which is here rendered by have (§ 71. 5) : 

Sirtb fie fdjott gegcm'gen ? Have they already gone ? 

£>er ctrme $nabe i\t ge fallen. The poor boy has fallen. 

3. The following verbs, when not expressing direction from 
or toward a given place, require the auxiliary I) a 6 e tt; namely, 

^LXXIX..9; 6. L. LVII: c. L. XLV; d. L. LXQj e. L. LXIV 



180 



LESSOff XLVIII. 



eil en, to hasten; fl i eg en, to flow; jagen, to chase, hunt ; 
I let tern, to climb; f r t e d) en, to creep, crawl; lanben, to 
land ; I a u f e n, to run ; q n e II e n, to spring • r e i f e n, to travel ; 
reiten, to ride; rennen, to run; fdjiffen, to navigate, 
fdjttimmen, to swim; fegeln, to sail; finfen, to sink; 
fprtngen, to leap, spring- fto^en, to join; treiBen, to 
drive ; to a n t> e r n, to wander, travel : 



maxum' $afl bn fo geetit' ? 
£afr bu nic^t I>eute gerit'ten ? 
d5te $akn nid)t ttiel geretft\ 



Why have you hastened so ? 
Have you not ridden to-day ? 
They have not traveled much* 



Some neuter verbs, as It e g en, to lie ; f it 3 en, to sit ; ft t* 
% e n, tc stand, are sometimes used with the auxiliary f eirt: 
§tytx toax feme $Rafyt me gefkn 'bfru His power never had stood highe* 



33etfptete* 

3ft erbenn nodj ntdjt gefom'men? 
Der Stogel if! ft eg ge flog en. 
@te ftnb in bct$ gelb ge^'gen. 
(Er ij! nadj ^me'rifa gereijV* 
©r roirb f$en gegan'gen feitu 
&r roar nadj ber Stabt geei'tt. 
SB arum' ftnb fie auf baS £anb gerit * 
ten? 



Examples. 

Has (is) he then not yet come ? 
The bird has (is) flown away. 
They have marched into the field. 
He has (is) gone to America. 
He will already have (be) gone. 
He had hastened to the city. 
Why have they ridden into the 
country. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SBege'gnen, to meet; 

(Etlen, to hasten ; 

<£ntrtn'nen, to escape, p. 346 ; 

(£ntfcr;Ia'fen, to fall asleep; 
Der gels, -en$, pi. -en, the rock; 
Der gtujj, -e3, pi. gliiffe,the river; 

©eltn'gen, to succeed, p. 348 ; 

©efd)e'^en, to happen, p. 358 ; 

JHettentf to climb ; 

Sftipn'gen, to fail, p. 352; 
Der $lcm, -e3, pi. $lcme, the plan • 

Exercise 96. 



OMfen, to ripen ; 

Sd)Ietdjen, to glide, steal away; 
Dct3 <Sd)tof,-e3,pL Scfyloffer, castle; 
Die Scfyontjeit, -, pi. -en, beauty; 
Die Seele, -, pi. -n, the soul;' 
Der Stein, -e$, pi. -e, the stone; 
Der Strom, -e£, pi. Strome, stream, 
Der £on, -e$, pi. £6ne, the tone; 
Die £ngenb, -, pi. -en, the virtue; 
Da3 Unternelj'inen, <-%, undertaking, 

^erfdjaflen, to die away, p. 356. 



SUtfgabe 96. 

!♦ 3ft er entfcfylafen ? 2. 9tein, er tft tm$ entronnen* 3. 2Bte 
(ange ifi er geBtieben? 4. @te fmt> naci) Der ($taU gefafyren. 5* 
3ft ber 2Jlann gefatien ? G. £er SSogrf ifl geffogen, 7. 3ft &a3 



USE OF THE AUXILIARIES $0&m AftD ©ettt* ISI 

SBajfer ixhx ba£ gett) gefloffen? 8, Der $ian tfl gelnngen. 9. £)er 
^naBe ifl genefen. 10. 2Ca3 {ft gefdjeljen? 11. 2$ ift cms bet 
Srbe gefro&en. 12, £ef £unb ifl nad) bem SBalbe gelaufen. 13, 
Da« Unteme^men ift mif lung-en* 14. £a3 SSaffer ift am bem 
Selfen gefloffen* 15. @r ift nad) ber @teM geritten. 16. @r mv 
in ba^ £aus gefcfylid^en. 11. &r ttar iiBer ben OraBen gefprungen. 
18. @ie maren au$ bem ©djloffe getreten. 19. £)er te|te Son mat 
serfdjollem 20. Der 23aum ift fel)r fd)nell geftadjfen. 21. Da^ 
$au$ ttrirb gefatten feitt. 22. @ie ftetben gelomnten fein. 23. St 
toax auf bem 9K aft gellettert. 24. Der $naBe ift iiBer ben glufj ge* 
fdjttommftt. 25, Siner war un$ gefolgt, urtb ber 2Inbere war un3 
Begegnet. 26. Set ©c^ne^ tfi gefdjmclaen imb bie ©trome ftnb ge^ 
fdjwoHen. 27. £a3 DBft ift fdjnett gereift. 28. £ie Sngenb ift 
bie @d)Bnt)eit ber @eefe. 29. (St mr na§ bet Stabt geeilt. 

Exercise 91. SlnfgaBe 97. 

1. Have you remained long enough ? 2. Who has gone to 
the city % 3. Do you know what has happened ? 4. The boy 
has sprung across the ditch. 5. Our plan has not succeeded* 
6. The children had hastened into the houses. % Has the snow 
melted % 8. The hunters had climbed upon the trees. 9. Our 
soldiers had fled, and the enemy had come into our country* 
10. He has ridden (on horseback) to the forest, and she has 
ridden (in a carriage) to the city. 11. The patient has recov- 
ered. 12. Has he fallen asleep ? 18. How have they escaped 
us % 14, Our friend has fallen out of the wagon. 15. The 
young birds have flown out of the nest. 16. The worms have 
crawled out of the earth. 11, The horse has run out of the 
stable. 18. The apples had ripened. 19. The water will have 
flowed into the house. 20. Why have you followed us? 21. 
Have you met your friends ? 22. He may already have gone 
23. "VJ here have they remained so long? 24. The child has 
crept out of the house. 



IM LSSBO'tf XLXS. 

LESSON XL1X. fcettiott XLDL 

INFINITIVE WITHOUT 3 U* 

1. When the infinitive is preceded by an auxiliary, or by 
One of the following verbs, the particle 3 u is omitted : 

ft I e i h e it, to remain ; I) e t ju tt* to command ; Itxntxk to learn ; 

fa fjr en, to ride; f) el fen? to help; m a cl) e n, to make ; 

f it fy r e n, to conduct; Ij r e n» to hear ; n e n n e n, to call* nam© ; 

fit § I en? to feel; §ct & en* to have; fefyen?tosee; 

finben, to find; C^ g en, to lay; ifyun, to do; 

§-e$civto go; le^rtrt; to teach; retten, to ride. 

The infinitive, when dependent on the above verbs, is frequently 
best rendered by our present participle : 

IS 1 i c "6 er ft §t ft, jte § e tt cber lie* Did he remain sitting, standing, or 

9 en? lying! 

3?ei§ mtdj nid)t reben, Ijetj? mtdj Do not bid me speak, bid me ba 

fd)ft)et§en» silent. 

*Da3 n e nn e id) f $ I a f e ft* That I call sleeping. 

3d) f it $ I e ben $ul$ f dj i a $ e ft* I /<?<?£ the pulse (beat) beating* 

34 5 a * f *§ m cttBettett* I foZped him work. 

3$ ^ r e t§tt ! m m e ft. I Aear him coining. 

€r 1 e ^ r t e mid) f i n 9 e m He Z<m#&£ me ft? sing. 

3d) f a § fte I a u f e tu I saw them running. 

3dj t e r n e $ e t dj n e ft. lam learning to draw. 

€r f a n b mtdj f dj I a f e in He found me sleeping. 

<Ste macjt mtdj I a dj e m . She ?'s making me Zaw^A. 

Obs. — £>el£en, When used intransitively, often answers to the pasSiVd 
of to name, call, or to the noun name, with the verb to be : 
<£r fy e t § t (Earl. He is named (or his name t«) Charles. 

£Bie $ e t § t ba<3 tm ©eutfdjen ? What is that ca/W in German ? 

$eijjt ba$ ar&eiten? Do you c«^ that (is that called) 

working ? 

©pajtren with 5^V r ^ n / Sufjren, SfteitettAKD ©eftetu 

2. © p a j t r e n is used chiefly with fasten, fiifcren, reitert and 
$e^en, and implies exercise for the purpose of recreation or 
pleasures 

3dj getye fpajtren, <Ste fatyreft X go ^K?i# you nie (in a carriage), 

f p a j t r e ft, unb er r e i t e t fpa&uen. and he rides on horseback. 
S<$ ge&e aUc &age fpagtrert* I go walking every day. 



INFINITIVE WITHOUT 3^ 183 

£Btr macftten etnen langenSpajtr'gatig* We took (made) a long walk. 
(Er r e 1 1 e t cft> after nte f p a j i r e n* He rides often, bat never for pleas- 
ure. 

3. The infinitive (usually without ju) often stands as the 
subject or object of a verb : 

(£3 tjt fceffer Unrest leib e n aU tttt* It is better to suffer wrong than to 

red)t t § u tn do wrong. 

<Beinen geinben serje t'fyen ijl: ebeL To forgive one's (his) enemies is 

noble. 

L The infinitive (commonly preceded by the article or a 
pronoun) is used as a neuter noun, and answers to the partici* 
pial noun in English : 

DaS £ ft g- en fdjabet km £iianer am (The) lying injures the liar thf; 

metjien. most. 

Da3 £e fen kt einem f$roa$en £idjte Reading by a feeble li^ht is inju- 

tjt fcett'Shtgen fd)dbltd)> rious to the eyes. 

5. The infinitive with g it follows an\tatt, oljnt and urn* 
U m, denoting mere purpose or design, may be rendered in or- 
der, or often wholly omitted in translation : 

GEr fptelt a n ft a 1 1 i it lefen. He plays instead of reading. 

£r tfi franf o t)ne e£ jit rotffen. He is sick without knowing it. 

CEr lieft urn %\x tenten He reads (in order) to learn. 

<£r roar ut fdjroad) urn Me STrfcett gu He was too weak to finish th© 
fccften'ben* work. 

6. The infinitive active is often used in a passive sense : 

fciefeS £au£ tft jit sermtetfyen unb \i* This house is to let> and that ona 

ne$ in aerfau'fen* is to be sold (to sell). 

<£r Idgt ba$ §8rob tyoten. He has the bread brought. 

Sr Idgt tfin ba^ S3rob tjolen* He has him go for the bread. 

7. SSijjen often has the signification of to know how, to be 
able, followed by an infinitive : 

€r roeij? ft<§ ya |elfen* He knows how to help himself. 

SBetfpiele* Examples. 

£)u Sdjroert an metner . 8tnfen» roa3 Thou sword upon my left, what 
foil bein §ettre$ SBUnfen? — fix. means thy cheerful gleaming ? 

©ie tjatte eine 2Banbitf)r im $aufe fte* She had a clock standing in the 
Sen* house, 



184 LESSON XLIX, 

&$ ijl feme Sett pt sertie'retu There is no time to lose. 

C£r ift nad) £)eutfd)lcmb gereifl'/ urn fete He has gone to Germany (in order} 

©pracfye in lernen. to learn the language. 

3$ pre bid) an, o^ne bid) $u unter*- I listen to you, without interrupt- 

Bred/en. ing you. 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SHfcertt, silly; 

Slnjlatt, instead of; 

SSefyalten, to keep, retain, p. 350; 
Da$ SUb, -eS, pL 93ttt>er, the pic- 
ture, image; 

gegen, to sweep; 
j&a$ ©efdrtgnijj, -e£, pi. -e, prison ; 

©efyorcfy'en, to obey; 

©kid), immediately ; 

§clen, to fetch, see p. 485* 



£)a3 £ot£, -e$, pi. £M$et, the wood: 

£efyren, to teach; 
£>ie Sufi, -, pi. £ii|1e, inclination; 
£)a3 TOtrcfyen, -$, pi. -, tale, story; 

Spaji'ren, see 2; 

©tubi'ren, to study; 

Unfd)ulbig f innocent; 
Die Urfacfye, -, pi. -it, the cause \ 

Skrmie'tfyen, to let. 



Exercise 98. SlufgaBe 98* 

1. £etpert ©ie t$n get)en ober BleiBen? 2* Steer te^rt mid) fratt^ 
j&jtfdj fyrecben, imb ber anbere lernt e3 lefen. 3* Die 5^ac^tigaII 
tturt> fid) BalD t)bren laffen. 4. Xiefe SSftdtrofen foerben morgen ot>er 
iiBermotgen fifteen ge^en* 5. Der alte Sauer l)at fctel guten alien 
SBeitt im teller liegen. 6* SBefefyten ift leid)t, geljordjen fd)tt>er. T* 
3d) IteBe ba$ Sefen, a&er id) tyaffe ba$ ©djretBen. 8. 2Bir ftnb feineS 
mt^oflidjen SBetragenS tyergltdj mitf\. 9* ©te ift ganj nnfdjulbtg, 
wkijt Urfad)e §at fie t>ertn traimg gu fete ? 10. 3$ $d6e foeber 
3eit nod) Sufi feiit ©ingen ju pren. 11* Seber gute ©filler mi§ 
wann Die Stei^e an itym ift gu lefen. 12. Sin fo alBerneS 9Jlard)en 
ift nidjt 3U glauBen. 13. ©te taffen i^ren SSebienten tfjr ftimmtv 
fegen. 14. 3Der 9tid)ter Hefj ben 33erBred)er tnS ©efangnifjj feerfetu 
15. SeBe urn ju lernen, nm> lerne urn gn feBen. 16. Sr tvei^ gu 
leBen unb fid) ba$ SeBen angenetjm $u macfyen. It. ©te Winter ftnb 
fpagiren gefafyren, unb Die ©filter ftnb fpajiren gerittem 18. fir ift 
ftfdjen gegangen, anftatt gu ftubiren. 19. £>olen ©ie ten £tjee? 
20. 9tetn, icfy laffe tl)n tyoletu 21. fir I&fjt mid) ba$ Silt) no$ 6e* 
^alten. 

Exercise 99. SlufgaBe 99. 

1. Who taught you to speak German? 2. I learned to speak 
it in Germany. 3* This stupid boy remained sitting the whole 



PARTICIPLES AND IMPERATIVE. 185 

evening. 4. The man had a small table standing beside his 
bed. 5. We shall not have time to see our friends this even- 
ing. 6. My mother taught me to sing and my brother teaches 
me to play. 7. When shall you go a fishing, to-morrow, or 
day after to-morrow ? 8. Why have our friends been to the 
city without visiting us % 9. They went to their cousins instead 
of coming to us. 10. I am tired of his singing. 11. They have 
books enough but not time to read them. 12. These houses 
are to be let. 13. This man has something to say to your 
f lend. 14. The captain is getting a new coat made. 15. The 
general caused the innocent soldier to be thrown into prison, 
1 6. This man's conduct is not to be praised. 17. This silly story 
is not to be believed. 18. Is it not your turn to read? 19. We 
must go immediately, there is no time to lose. 20. Why does 
he go for the wood ? 



.«.»«»,>»» 



LESSON L. flection L. 

PARTICIPLES AND IMPERATIVE. 

1. Present participles attributively used have the same gov- 
ernment as the verbs from which they are derived, and, when 
the object is expressed, precede it ; when predicative, however* 
their character is simply that of an adjective : 

fDlein ©olb fu^enber gremtb. My gold-seeking friend. 

£)cr U)tt lofcenbe Setter, The teacher who praises him. 

£)te 2lu$jtd)t toax ret^ettb. The prospect was charming. 

Die $i$e toax brMettb. The heat was oppressive. 

2, The perfect participle sometimes answers to our present 
participle ; or, like many other words, it may often be varied 
or omitted in translation, according to the different idioms . 
the two languages : 

§eulenb fommt ber <Sturm geflo'getu— Howling comes the storm flying 

<&. (flown). 

(£r lam bie ©trafe tyergejo'ijen* He came (moving) along the street, 

£>ctg (Mb ift serlo'ren aegan'gett* The money is (gone) lost. 



186 LESSON L. 

3. The past participle may be used as the imperative : 

3?trf)t fo lain gefprcdj'en. Do not speak so loud. 

gletjHg gearbettct* Labor diligently. 

4. There is a third or future participle formed only from 
transitive verbs by adding t> to the infinitive preceded by 3U; 
it always has a passive signification, and implies necessity or 
obligation : 

l)it in furd)tcnbe ©efa§r'* The to-be-feared danger 

£)a$ in fcattenbe $au$. The house (which is) to be emit 

IMPERATIVE. 

5. When the second person of the imperative is used, the 
subject is generally omitted ; when, however, the third person 
is used, the subject is expressed : 

$arl, brittle mix bttn 33tt$. Charles, bring me your book. 

$tnber, ge§t in bad $an$. Children, go into the house. 

■fctrl, brtngen © ie mir Sfyr SBttdj. Charles, bring me your book. 

©d)tcfe e r bad $Pferb mcrgen* Send the horse to-morrow. 

So fet e §, fagte er. So be it (so let it be), said he. 

Obs. — The present indicative of the auxiliary f o It e it is often best 
omitted in translation, and the main verb rendered by our imperative 
(see imperative L. 38.) : 

2)u foUft e^ t^un* Bo it yourself (you shall do it), 

©er Solemn foil f o m m e «♦ Let John come {have John come). 

6. 2) ctfc u r d), b a fj before a finite verb often answers to by 
before a present participle : 

fPkn fefjetbet ett$ b ab it rd), bag man You are injured 6?/ being praised to' 
eudj p fe§r lofct. much. 

Literally, you are thereby injured, that you are too much praiseu. 

S3 e i \p i e I e. Examples. 

§at er nod) nicfyt bie entfefyte'bene $fai* Has he not yet received the final 

ttort er^at'ten? (determinate) answer? 

Sej?e bid) &um nutrmenben getter. Seat thyself at the warming fire. 

Hem T)oxn »erlej?e bie etlenben Siijse, May no thorn wound thy (the) hast- 

itrtb feine fcibleid)enbe ©cfylangf btint ening feet, and no secret serpent 

gerfe. thy heel* 



PARTICIPLES AND IMPERATIVE. 



187 



fftofen <utf btn 2Be$ geflrettt unb be3 Let roses on the path be strown, 

§arm3 oergeffcn. — •£>;)♦ and sorrow be forgot. 

2)a3 auSjugefeenbe ©elb ijr nod) nidjt The money to be spent has not yet 

ertyat'ten. . been received. 

C£r fd)abet ftdj baht^I), H$ cr &u Siel He injures himself in sleer'ng too 

f$(aft. much. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



T)iT 5Wu-e$t, -3, (the) Albert; 
2)ie Slnftaltr -, pi. -en, preparation; 

SBetycm'beln, to treat; 

33eftrct'fett, to punish; 

S3tbfen, to bleat; 

SBretmen, to burn, p. 346 ♦ 

©rullettf to low; 

©aburdj, by this, thereby; 

(ErttKcfen, to awaken; 
2)a3 (Suro'pa, -$, (the) Europe; 
Die fyaft, -, the haste ; 
£>er $uf, -eS, pi. -e, the hoof; 

ileitdjen, to gasp; 

Exercise 100. 



Die $no$pe, -i pi. -it, the bud; 

^u^n f bold; 
Der Scmbmcmn, -e$, pi. -teute, the 

peasant, husbandman ; 
Der 2aut, -t$, pi. -e, sound, voice; 

fftiemalS, never ; 

fRcgtc'rettr to govern ; 

Sdjaumett, to foam ; 
Der ©cfylag, -e£, pi. ©d)iage, blow; 

©cfyroanfen, to stagger, reel ; 
£>a3 Sftety, -e3, pi. -e, the cattle; 
Die 2$etfe, -, pi. -n, the wave; 

Sertre'ten, to tread down, p. 356. 

SlufgaBe 100. 



1. £er fcraufenfce SBinb treifct bet* fdmemfenbe ©djtff fcnrd) Me 
fd)anmenben SBettetu 2. "Dott fommt ein 9Jiann in cotter £afi ge* 
laufen." 3. £er alte 9JZann fdjrieb mil ^ttternter £anb. 4. Sr 
reitct (jefdjttrini), nnt> tyalt in bem 2lrm ta3 [euj^ente itittb* 5. @o 
[ei e*, fpridjt 2lI6redfct mit bonnerntem Saitt. 6. liefer Sftann iji 
ein ^u fcftrafenter Serbreder. 7. Xer lad)elnte griiMirtg envedt 
bie (dytafenben 33lnmen. 8. Die brennenbe (Sonne fc^meigt £en 
glanjenben ©d)nee. 9. 3'^r Srnbet ift ein jn Benct^enDer SWenfd)* 
10. £er fittyne Sanger ftirft fid) in bie Braufenbe ghttt). 11. SSrtnge 
mir tneinen SMantet nnb meine £anbfd)nf)e. 12. ©d)iden ©ie3^ren. 
33ebientcn $n mir. 13. Sin fd)Iafenter £nnb fangt fetnen £afen. 
14. UnD feudjenb lag id), nrie ein ©terfcenber, jertreten nnter ttjrer 
£nfe ©d)Iag. 15. En iibernimmft bie fpanifdjert SRegimenter, macfcft 
immer SIrtftatt nnb Hft ntemate ferttg, nnb ireiten fie bid) gegen midj 
ju $iel)en, fo fagft tit ia, unt) Metbft gefeffelt fte^n (L. 38. &)♦ 

Exercise 101. Stnfgate 101. 

1. The falling snow covers the fallen tree. 2. The horse 
comes running, the bird comes flying. 3. Give the tiembling 



188 LESSON LI. 

old man a coat. 4. My friend is a very learned man, 5. I 
hear the singing birds and the bleating sheep. 6. The smiling 
spring brings us beautiful flowers. 7. So be it, said the king- 
smiling. 8. He' has the weeping child in his arm. 9. The 
burning sun drives the lowing cattle into the forest. 10. The 
foaming wave flies over the trembling ship. 11. The snow 
melts before the burning sun. 12. A standing tree is more 
beautiful than a fallen one. 13. The hoping husbandman sees 
with joy the swelling buds. 14. Do not sing so loud. 15, 
Who is the most learned man in Europe ? 16. These travelers 
call themselves traveling artists. 17. He governs them bv 
treating them kindly. 



««,» » .,», 



LESSON LI. Uttion LL 

COMPOUND VERBS SEPARABLE. 

1. Any of the following particles may be compounded with 
a verb ; and as they may stand apart from it, they are called 
separable particles or prefixes (§ 89) ; namely, ah, from, off, 
down; an, to, at, in, on, toward; auf, on, up; au$, out, out 
of, from ; bet, by, near, with ; t> a or t> a r, there, at ; tin, in, 
into ; t m p x' , up, upward, on high ; fort, onward, away, for 
ward ; g e g en, toward, against; h) e i m, home, at home ; 1) e r, 
hither, here ; I) i n, thither, there, away ; i n, in, within ; m i t, 
with ; tl(i&}, after ; n t e $> e t, down, downward, under ; o h, on, 
over, on account of ; $or, before, from; ft e g, away, off; ju, 
to, toward; and juriid, back, backward (§ 89 — 91). 

2. In compound tenses, formed from the infinitive and an 
auxiliary, and in subordinate sentences, the particle is placed 
before the verb : 

(Er ttnrb Mb cmfommetn He will soon arrive. 

©tr mixfftn cw^e^ett (§ 93). "We must go out. 

Obs. — In like manner are used with verbs several nouns (sometimes 
written with a capital and sometimes with a small initial) and adjec- 
tives ; as, bct# Concert ttnrb <Stcttt ftnb en (or jlattfmb en), the cod cert will 
take place; er tt>irb u)m Zxq§ Meten {or trojpMeten), he will bid him de- 
fiance ; er tturb u)n tobtfd^iagen, he will kill him. 



COMPOUND VERBS SEPARABLE. 189 

3. 3 W °f the infinitive, when used, and the augment g e of 
the past participle, are placed between the particle and the 
verb : 

(£3 ijr 3ett aufyUQtfyTt (not in auSge^en). It is time to go out. 

(£$ ijr Unrest tfjn auftitfjalten (not pi aufjjalten). It is wrong to detain him. 
(Er Bat mid) aufger)alten (no* ge*aufr)atten). He has detained me. 

@ie ftnb auSgegangen (^o^ ge^auSgangen). They have gone out, 

Obs.- -Verbs derived from compound nouns or adjectives, follow the 
conjugation of simple verbs, i. e. take the augment, and gu of the infin- 
itive, before the entire word ; as, cr t)at gefriityfrMt, he has breakfasted; 
e<3 if! fdjttcr t>u r)anbr)akn, it is difficult to manage; e3 $at gettJetterleudjter, 
it has lightened. 

4. In principal sentences and simple tenses the particle is 
placed at the end of the sentence : 

£)te ©d'jre fommett eBen an* The guests are just arriving. 

SOBarum' gefyett <Bk au$ ? Why are you going out ? 

(Er fcradj bie SBlitme a B. He broke off the flower. 

#iett cr ben SBoten auf? Did he detain the messenger ? 

5. When one of these particles is prefixed to a verb not 
accented on the first syllable, J u of the infinitive follows the 
prefix, and the augment g e is rejected : 

(Er ijr $u ftolj e3 cm^ u^erfennen* He is too proud to acknowledge it. 

(£r t)at e$ an^erfannt* He has acknowledged it. 

6. These compounds generally take a signification different 
from, but often kindred to that of the components used separ- 
ately : 

3$ jler)e meinem greunbe Bet* I assist (stand by) my friend. 

3$ jlet)e £ e i meinem greunbe* I stand by (near) my friend. 

(Er jMte ftcfc) mir S) r* He introduced himself to me. 

(£r jletfte ft<$ fc o r mi$. He placed himself before me. 

S3 eifp tele. Examples. 

$ann er ben Stein auffjefcen? Can he lift up the stone ? 

(Er r)efct ben Stein auf* He lifts the stone up. 

<&\z foKten tt)n ntdjt aufr)alteru You should not detain him, 

(Er mag nidjt etnfd)lafen. He does not wish to go to sleep, 

<Bk ftnb e3 f ber mid) auffjaTt. It is you who detain me. 

(Er ijr bofer tteil Sie an§ger)en* He is angry because you go out. 
(Bit ifr rraurig, tteil er bie SBlume al>=* She is sad because le broke off tha 
fcradj* flower. 



190 



LESSON LI. 



Die 9tfldfIt$|!en@hmbenfclnc«CcBcit*. The happiest hours of his life he 



Brtrtgt er imter ben SBlumen $u.— $L 
S)er SBeife aie$t ba$ 9£ufcltt$e btm %n* 
genetymen, unb ba$ 9tot$tt)ettbtge km 
9?ujpltd)en scr. 



spends among the flowers. 
The wise man prefers the useful 
to the agreeable, and the neces- 
sary to the useful. 



Sm 2Bhtfcr rul>et bie (£rbe au$ unb In (the) winter the earth reposes 



fammelt neue ^vdftc* 



and collects new powers. 



©arum' iji er fdjon audgegangett; unb Why has he already gone out, and 
ioarum ttimf^en <B'ie auSnigeljen ? why do you wish to go out 8 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



^TBntaiten, to weary ; 
Slfcfcfyrei&ett, to copy, p. 354; 
Stbfteigen, to descend, p. 356; 
Wtifyt, genuine; 
SInfangen, to begin, p. 348 ; 
Slnjiefyen, to put on ? p. 358; 
2Iufgel;en, to rise, p. 348 ; 
Sluffdmeiben, to cut open, p. 354; 
STuffpeidjent, to store up; 
£(uffteia,en, to rise, p. 356 ; 
5lu3bre|'d)en, to thrash out, 346; 
%lu$a ) t$tn, to go out, p. 348 ; 
5lue|alten, to sustain, p. 350 ; 
Shtdfprecfyen, to pronounce, 356; 
£)ie ^Belagerung, ~# pi. -en, the siege ; 



(Smfammeltt, to gather; 

(Ettem, to fester ; 

(ErfiiU'cn, to fill, fulfill, do; 
Die gelbfrucfyt, -, pi. — friichte, the 

produce of the field; 
Da3©et>trge, -$, pi -, the chain of 

mountains; 
£>a$ ®efd)i»uY, -eS, pi. -,the ulcer; 
£)a£ £>eil, -e3, the welfare ; 

^anft, soft; 

(Scfyaffen, to create, produce ; 

SBegflicgen, to fly away, p. 348; 

S&eggefycn, to go away, p. 348 ; 

SBegiaufen, to run away, 350 ; 

2£eane!)men, to take away, 352. 



Exercise 102. 81 uf gate 102. 

1* fyabtn ©ie 3I)re 33itd;er meggenommen ? 2* 3a, id) natjm 
fie toeg ate td) audgmg. 3. @ef)en 3I« greunDe ^ettte aud ? 4* 
5ftein, fie ftnt fdjon audgegangen. 5* ©djreifct t)er $nafce ten 23rtef 
ab ? 6. 9Wn, er $at ifyn fdjon geftern abgefduieben. 7. £er fleu 
f ige Saner l)at feine gelDfriidjte eingefammelt, audgetrofd)en unt 
aufgefpeid;ert. 8* Urn iceldje 3 e ^ g^t;t Me ©onne auf ? 9. ©ie 
aft [d)on aufgegangert. 10. £er SOionD ftetgt Winter bent OeBirge 
auf unt> erfiiflt Die SrDe mit feinem fanften 2idte. 11. !Eic taDetnDe 
2Cat)rt)eit Deo ad}ten gmmted ift Day SJieffer Ded SBunDar^ted, tad 
ein eiternred ®efd)tt>ur auffdmeitet; ed fct^affet ©djmerjen, after jum 
Jpetle ted'2etDeuDen. 12. Xer SSogel ift fteggejTogen unt) tad §)fert 
ift tueggelaufen. 13. 3d) tyafce meine £anfcfd)ufye ange^ogen, uni 
ietpt giet)e id) metne Uefrerfcfyutje an. 14. Die mfeen better ftnt son 
tijrert afgemattetcn 5>fertcn afgefiiegen. 15. ©ie fpvedjen tie tent* 
fd)en SSoiier fefer gut m»+ 16, ©ie tyalfrn tie 23clagmtng ucdj 
aud. 



ABVERBfe. 191 

Exercise 103. 2IafgaBe 103. 

1. Who has taken away my gloves and your umbrella ? 2. 
Your brother took away your gloves yesterday. 3. At what 
time do you go out this evening ? 4. I shall not go out this 
evening, I went out this morning. 5. When will your friends 
go away 1 6. They have already gone away. 7. Can you 
pronounce these words well 1 8. I can pronounce them, but 
lot very well. 9. Have you already begun to read German? 
10. No, but I shall begin to-morrow, my friend began yester- 
day. 11. Does he pronounce well % 12. Yes, he pronounces 
very well. 13. Why don't you take away your table ? 14. I 
have not time to take it away. 15. 1 am copying letters for 
my friend who went away yesterday. 16. He understands what 
you say, but he can not pronounce the German words well. 



■^ " c ^ % * &m 



LESSON LIT. Ceclion LII. 

ADVERBS, 

1. The adverbs t> a, there ; tort, yonder ; lj i e r, here, and 
to 0, where, are used with verbs of rest, or with those indicat- 
ing action within specified limits : 

SSer if! b a? § i e r jto)e t$. Who is there ? Here I stand. 

jDort fpielen btc ilinber; it) o fmb bie Yonder the children are playing, 
(Sttent ? where are the parents ? 

2. §>tx f hither, and t)ttt, thither, when compounded with 
other words, as b a, etc. (§ 91) still retain their distinctive mean- 
ings ; ^ e r indicating motion or tendency toward, and I) i n, 
from the speaker. As, however, these particles in compounds 
have no precise equivalents in English, their force is often lost 
in translating : 

2Ber ift b a, unb tter gef)t b ctf) in' ? Who is fAere, and who goes thither? 

SBtctBe fyi er, er ttwb Balb tyiertyer' Remain here, he will soon coma 

fommeru here (hither). 

SB o ijl ber STmtmaxttw unb tt) "> ty in' TFAm? is the magistrate, and where 

ge^t *Ct ? (whither) is he going ? 



192 LESSON LII. 

Direction toward the speaker. 

<£r ftrang § e r ttU$\ He sprang out (hither). 

(£r jlteg $ erauf ♦ He ascended (hither). 

<£r (leigt § era V. He descends (hither). 

<£r fam 5 e rn n't e r. He came down (hither). 

<£r ruberte p uxi% $ er ft' ft e r. He rowed across (hither) to us. 

Direction from the speaker. 

<Er farang $ i n a u $'♦ He sprang out (thither). 

(Er ffteg $ i n a u f ♦ He ascended (thither). 

<£r fleigt $ i n a V. He descends (thither). 

(£r ging $ t nu n'te r. He went down (thither). 

(£r ruberte p tfynen § in u 'fc e r. He rowed across (thither) to them. 

3. § e r and fy i n are often separated from to 0, and placed 
at the end of the sentence. They are also sometimes used with 
verbs of rest ; I) in, in the signification of past, gone ; and ^ e r. 
denoting proximity : 

SB o getyen Sie f) i n? TFA^Aer are you going? 

£8 o fommt er § e r ? TFAercce is he coming? 

SDer <Sominer t|t fdjon ^ in. The summer is already past. 

<5te ftanben urn tt)n § e r. They stood round about him. 

4. These compounds after the dative preceded by a prepo- 
sition, or after the accusative, are usuaMy rendered by a prep- 
osition before the objective : 

(£r flog jum genjler $utctu$'* He flew out of the window. 

<Ste famen bte Zxfppt fyermt'ter* They came down the stairs. 

FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 

5. Adverbs are formed by the union of nouns with nouns, 
nouns with pronouns, nouns with adjectives, nouns with prep- 
ositions, adverbs with prepositions and prepositions with prep- 
ositions : 

<Sdjaaremx>eife, in hordes; (Sdjaar, horde; Setfe, manner). 

©tu<fitd)emetfe, or \ fortunatelv . (glutfttd), fortunate; 2Beife,man. 

©litter SBetfe, ) *' *er). 

SttexnerfettS, for my part; (meitt, my; (Seite, side). 

©tromctuf, up stream; ((Strom, stream; auf, up). 

SBoburd), whereby; (wo, where; burdj, through) 

Ue&erctuS* exceedingly; (ufcer, above; auS, out of). 



ADVERBS. 



193 



6. Adverbs are formed from various parts of speech by 
means of the suffixes ltd), ttngS, foartS, 3 (§ 103— -106) : 

tagltdj, daily; MinblingS, blindly; aufttxxrtS, upward; 

pug3, suddenly; red)t$, to the right; littU, left (to the left); 

moxattl§, in the morning, aftenb^, in the evening ; attberS, otherwise. 



Setfptele. 



Examples. 



f)tr gelb^err ftjpt auf bem $ferbe unb The general sits upon the horse and 

reitet ru^ig langS ben fRei^en ber rides calmly along the ranks of 

©otba'ten fyitt unb §er. the soldiers to and fro. 

Dtefe (Ehtttmnberer fommen au$ SSoJH These immigrants come here (hith- 

men Ijer. er) from Bohemia. 

jDct$ Sefcen be3 5ftenfdjen fd)ttanft ttie The life of man, like a skiff, wavers 

em $lad)tn, fymixbtx unb fjeriikr. (vacillates) to and fro. 

Unb fjtnem' nut £ebadjtigemSd)rittetn And thither (therein) with consid- 

2'dvot trttt. — S. erate step a lion strides. 

Sin £$or fudjt Bltnbling3 9ty$m im A fool blindly seeks renown in the 

£abi)rint& ber Sdjcmbe. — $-tu labyrinth of infamy. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$)atyttt, thither, there; 

getttblidj, hostile ; 
©tc ©efatyr', -/ pi. -ett, the danger; 
£)te ©eumlt', -, pi. — en P the power; 

§tt| hither ; 

£eran', on, near; 

Qtxvi'btTr over, across; 

£>erun'ter, down; 

§ter$er, hither, here; 

$>itt, thither, away; 

$tttafc', down; 



£inauf, up; 

£inau3', out; 

§mit'ber, over, across; 
£>er £ctuf, -e$, pi. Saufe^ the course, 
£>a$ 9)teer, -e$, pi. -e, the sea; 
Der SD^orgcn# -3, pi. -, the morning ; 
f Die 3)erle, -, pi. -n, the pearl; 

Shifen, to travel; 
£)er Sturm, -e$, pi. ©titrme, storm; 

£au$en, to dive ; 

SQofy, well, probably. 



Exercise 104. 2lufga6e 104. 

l t S3o ift ber 3tmmermann ? 2. gr ift in £eut[d)lanb, fein greunb 
ift and) bet. S. SReifen @ic and) bdjin? 4. Sntmeber retfe id) ba^ 
|tn, ober er lommt ^ter^er. 5. 3Bo ge^en unfere greunbe |itt? 6* 
@te getjen nad) bem Eorfe; fatten toir and) bd)tn ge^en? 7. 2Bir 
frollen t)eute l)ter bleiben nub morgert bal)tn ge^en. 8. SBotten @te 
benSerg tytnauf ge^en? 9. 2Bo lommt tfjr $er unb fro gef)t t$r 
tin? 10. SStr fommcn ans &&mfon unb ge^en nad) 3>reu§en* 

11. "Der mam mu% (L. 45. 15.) Wan* In 1 * fetnblid)e Sefren." 

12. 2Ctr nnjfen »o$l »o jene fleifngen SWeiter Ijingegangen ftnb* 

9 



194 LESSON LIX2. 

13* £>er Saucfcer taudjt iu ba$ SSJieer fjinafc, urn $erlen ^eraufjufyo* 
Ten. 14* 23ci grogen ©tiirmert fmt) fcie ©djiffe oft in ®efal)r, fcenn 
tie SBeflen fdjlagen mit ©eroalt fyeran, tad ©cfeiff I'djmanft fyiniiber 
itnt ^eriiBer* 15* £e3 SDiorgeitS fdjrelfct er unt> fceS SlbentS Ueft er* 
16* #tnafc, tyutauf gel)t unfer 2auf. 

Exercise 105. SlufgaH 105* 

1. Where are you going? 2. I am going to the village, will 
you go there too ? 3. I shall go there the day after to-morrow, 
but not to-day. 4. The boy sprang down in the water. 5. 
Our friends are in Greece and we shall also go there. 6. Are 
your cousins coming here % 7. No, for they are already here* 
8. Have you ever traveled from Germany to Russia 1 9. The 
carpenter fell down from the roof. 10. The horse ran down 
the mountain. 11. The boys went up the street. 12. We 
must go to the forest, will you go there with us ? 13. No, we 
must remain where we are. 14. I will go up if you will coma 
down. 15. Have you ever been in Russia ? 



LESSON LIIL " lection LII1. 

COLLOCATION OF WORDS. 
WORDS REQUIRING THE VERBS AT THE END OF THE SENTENCE, 

1. When the subordinate clause is introduced by either of 
the following words, the verb (as with the relative pronoun L. 
39, 5.) is placed at the end of the sentence ; namely : 

21 1 $, when, than ; 6 e & o r, e % e, before ; 6 i 3, till ; t> a, since , 
t> a mit, in order that; fcaf}, that; f all $, if, in case; intern, 
while, in that ; i n f o f e r n, (with aU implied) in so far; j; e (L. 
32.11.) U ad) bent, after that, when ; o 6, whether, if; feit, 
feitb em, since; fo, thus, if; cl)ngead)tet or ungead)tet, 
notwithstanding; ftal)ren£>, while; to a nn f when; ft arum, 
why ; ft e i I (fcteftetl) because ; ft e n n, if; ft i e, as, when ; 
ft o, where, if. 



COLLOCATION OP WORDS. ltf§ 

COMPOUNDS UNDER THE SAME RULE 

Are otjjfeld), ofcfdjon, otmoM, or 06 gletct), ob f&ott, 06 wotyl, 
ttemt and), menu gleid), menu fdjort, although, even if ; bafem, too* 
fern, if, in case that ; ctuf fcajj, so that; aU 06 and aU iuemt, as if. 

Obs, — SBemt and), roettn gtetdj and roetttt fd)ott, though often rendered 
although, (like ob too^t, and the words preceding it) are more strongly 
concessive than the former, and usually best rendered by even though, 

WORDS FOLLOWED BY THE CORRELATIVE @ 0* 

2. £a, oBgtetcb, oftfcfyon, otnuol)!, ftetl, menu and nne are usually 
followed by the correlative fo at the head of a succeeding 
clause : 

2) a tdj ehtmal $ter Mtt, fo ttiff tdj audj Since I am (once) here I will (also) 

MciOeil. remain. 

SB eil cr ntein Sreunb \% fo mug tdj Because he is my friend I must as- 

i$m feetjretyeiu sist (stand by) him. 

SBenn e£ 3$nen moglid) ijt, fo fom* If it is possible (for you, then) come. 

men <5ie* 

THE CORRELATIVE @ FOLLOWED BY 3)od) OR S) e U U $♦ ' 

3. When o B g 1 e i d), or either of the concessive conjunctions, 
stands at the head of \he first sentence, the correlative f o, of 
the next, is usually followed by b o d) or b e n n o d) : • 

SSetttt er aitdj tttdjt oeffer ijr, fo tft er Although he is not better, he is 

b o dj tttdjt fd)led)ter* nevertheless not worse. 

Do matt e$ ifym gleid) £efal)l, fo un* Although it was commanded hhn 

terXieg er e$ b e tin o d)» he neglected it nevertheless. 

£) ogle id) er reiclj tjr, tjr er (or fo ijl Although he is rich, he is never- 

er) bod) eitt Jtttaufer. theless a niggard. 

$B erttt er fi^ott fcofe au£ftel)t, fo mctrtt Even though he seems ill-natured 

er e$ b o d) tttdjt fo Oofe* (bad) still he does not intend it 

so badly. 

Obs. — SSetttt, however, is often omitted and the verb placed before its 
subject: 
Sp c§ SJjttett mogltdj, f o fommett ^ie* If it is possible (for you, then) come. 

4. 2Ikr, vuKn, bentt, enttteber, ober, namlid}, fonbcrn and imb, 
do not change the natural order of the sentence : 

8te tj! tttd)t fd)b'tt, cxoer jU ijtlieoenS* She is not beautiful, but she i* 
t»itrbig» amiable. 



196 LESSON LIU. 

5. When a sentence begins with any c ther word than its 
subject, except as already specified, the main verb, or its aux- 
iliary, usually precedes the subject. For the sake of special 
emphasis, the verb, followed by an adversative clause, may be 
placed at the head of the sentence : 

SBarum fat er nldjt gelefen ? Why has he not read ? 

©elefen tyctt er, aber ntd)t laut* He has read, but not loud. 

Denu ifm f)aoe tcfy Mei'btgt* For him have I offended. 
Diefen Wlam femte tdj, after jenen $afce This man I know, but that one I 

idj me gefetyetu never have seen, 

danger farm id) mdjt roartetu Longer I can not wait. 

2) a Xiegt Sfyr 33u<§* Here lies your book. 

Obs. — As the same word may be an adverb or a conjunction, it may 
require the construction of the relative sentence, or the inversion of 
subject and verb: 

2) a lommt 3fyr greimb* There comes your friend. 

£)a Sfyr Srewtb fonimt, fo Xo'xU tdj As your friend is coming I will 

voaxtnu wait. 

2)atmt Mn id) pfrtekiu With that I am satisfied. 

£)amit i<$ ntc^t &u getyen fcraucT)e, ge^t In order that I may not need to 

er felbfL go he goes himself. 

6. Sometimes a causal conjunction in a leading clause is best 
omitted in translating : 

(Er tjl begljaH) tm$ttfrieben, tioeiX fein He is (— ) discontented because his 
greunb nidjt f)ter tjh friend is not here. 

7. Adverbs (except genug) precede the adjectives and ad- 
verbs which they qualify : 

(£$ tjt f$on siemltdj fait* It is already pretty cold. 

£)er $ut ift grog geraig* The hat is large enough. 

8. Adverbs follow the verbs that they qualify (in compound 
tenses the first auxiliary); those of time preceding those of 
place : 

(Er toar gejrern $ter* He was here yesterday. 

<5te lommen oft in tm$* They often come to our house. 

(£r toirb mar gen I)ier fein* He will be here to-morrow. 

SBir oefu'd)en vfjn oft, akr er fcefu'djt We often visit him, but he never 

im3 nte* visits us. 

(Si toirb bicfen $fonb na$ ber Stabt He will drive to the city this after 

fatyren* noon. 



COLLOCATION OF WORDS. 



m 



9. Adverbs of time precede the object (except wnen it is a 
personal pronoun) ; while those of manner, referring exclu- 
sively to the verb, commonly follow the object : 

(Ex madjte geftern feme ^Crkit fefjr He did his work yesterday very 

fd)ted)t. badly. 

(Er fjat gefiern fetne SIrBett fe^r fd)Ie#t He has done his work (yesterday) 

gemadjt', very badly. (See L. 38. 3.). 

t£r l)at fie ^eute Beffer gemad)t'* He has done it better to-day. 

(£r $ctt mtr geftern biefe 23?itt^eilurtg He made this communication to 

fdjriftlidj gemadjt'* me yesterday in writing. 



Setfptele* 



Examples. 



(£<3 serbrtegt' ttyn, ba$ man t^n ntdjt He is vexed that he was not sent 

I)oIen liefj* for. 

3e mefyr man fyat, }e (or bejlo) mefyr The more one has the more one 

ttntl man fjaften. wants (wishes to have). 

Wan mug fetyen, oB er e$ tf)un tt)trb* One must see whether he will do it 

Sn ber £ngenb aHein' fmbet ber SBetfe In (the) virtue alone the wise man. 

Bnfrte'benfjeit. finds contentment. 

9ta nut bem £ekn tterben unfere £et=* Only with life will our sufferings 

ben auffjoren. cease. 

£>ag biefe ©pradje fd^tt>tertgcr . aXS bie That this language is more difficult 

engltfdje ijr, fyaben Sie roofjl fd)on than the English, you have prob- 

emgefefyen. ably already seen, 

fftte fyabt id) fte gemte'ben nnb fc^t^er^ Never have I avoided them, and 

ltd) roerbe id) itjnen (L. 63. 3.) gan$ hardly shall I entirely escape 

entgefyen. — ©♦ them. 

£em gricbltd)en geftd^rt man gent ben To the peaceful man one willingly 

Srteben. — ©♦ accords peace. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Qlnfommen, to arrive, p. 350 ; 

23t£, till ; 
£er 23itrger, -$, pi. -, the citizen ; 
2>ci Dampf, -e$; pi. £>dmpfe, steam, 
exhalation ; 

£>d), yet, however; 
£>er T)un\t t -e$, pi. XHtnffe, vapor; 

(Enbttd\ at last, finally; 

GEntfre t)cn, to arise, originate ; 

©ott, -c«; God ; 

Se-befro, L. 32. 11 ; 

Se nacfybem, according as ; 
£>ie Kraft, -, pi. tfrdfte the force ; 



2)er 9?ad)en, -3, pi. -, the boat; 
©er ftfe&el, -3, pi. -, the mist ; 

DB, whether; 
£)er £Regen, -3, the rain ; 

©eitbem, since ; 

£rd*ge, idle ; 

JtnglMM), unhappy; 

tttt^dfyltg, innumerable J 

2)erf>in'ben, to unite, p. 346; 

$ertl)et'bigen, to defend; 
Die s 2£affen, pi. the arms, weapons; 

Betgen, to show. 



198 LESSON LIU. 

Exlrcise 106. StufgaBe 106, 

1. Sntttd) jeigten tic 23iirger Itjre SBaffen, itnt) ftngcn an fi$ $u 
fccrt^eftigem 2. 3d) batte it)n gejefjcn, el)e feine greuhte angefom* 
men wareru 3* SBarten ©ie tig id) ten SB.rief gelefen l)a£e. 4, 
SBir auffen, tap er itbermorgen fommen anrt. 5. 3e me^r ©ott tir 
gegefcen ^at, tefto mefyr fotlft tu ten 2lrmen geten. 6* 3e nad;tem 
man ge^antett \at f mtrt man gliicf(id) oter ungiitdlid) fern. T. 3$ 
foeifj ntd)t, oB er ta ift 8. ©eittem fein Setter l)ter ift, ift er ttiel 
jufrietener. 9* JSir rctffen, tine er ta3 geffyan t)at unt too er l)tn* 
gegangen ift. 10. 9tt£ Xampfen unt £itnften entfte^en 9teM unt 
9tegen. 11. ©ie auffen nidt, »arum id) ta3 gefagt §afre* 12. Sltte 
feine jtriifte roollte er fammeln unt fie mit tern getnte serMnteiu 
13. Unfer ©duff nmnt er ^etnen 9tad)en. 14. Dfcgleid) er arm ijt, 
fo ijl er tod) gliidltd). 15. S3eil©ie!ran! ftnt, fo lonnen ©ie nid)t 
auSgetyetu 16. ©ie ftnt franf nnt fonnen te$t)alb nid)t ausgefyeiu 
It, Uefcer unt fet)en nnr nur ten £tmmel unt unjatylige ©terne* 

Exercise 10Y- SlufgaBe 107* 

1. He has written more books than he has bought. 2. They 
saw me before I saw them. 3. We will wait here till you can 
go with us. 4. You know that I have not seen him. 5. The 
longer a man lives the shorter time has he yet to live. 6. Ac- 
cording as one is idle or industrious will one be unhappy or 
contented. 7. I do not know whether he will come or not. 8. 
I have seen him since I have been here. 9. Do you know how 
long he remained in the city ? 10, No, I know that he has 
been there, but I do not know how long he remained. 11. We 
kr.ow him, but we do not know where he lives. 12. This boy 
is sad because his father is sick. 13. Because he has not much 
money he is discontented. 14. I am tired and can, therefore, 
write no longer. 15. They can not go out because they are 
sick. 16. Because he is sick he can not go out. 17. These 
books I have never read. 



COMPOUND VERBS INSEPARABLE. 199 

LESSON LIV. Section LIV. 

COMPOUND VERBS INSEPARABLE. 

1. The unaccented particles Be, emp, ent, er, ge, mip, Ser, tot* 
fcer and ;$er, when prefixed to verbs, reject the augment (ge) hi 
the past participle, and take before them 3 u of the infinitive : 

(Er tyat fettt §au3 ^erfauft* He has sold his house. 

(Er fjat ettt &xu$ in tterfaufen. He has a house to sell. 

2Bte (>at man eud) empfangen? How were you received? 

£)a£ fat mtr me aeprt'. That has never belonged to me. 

£>u tyafi ben Spiegel jerfcro'djen. You have broken the mirror. 

For a more complete survey ot the above particles than could here 
be properly introduced, see § 95. and following. 

2. Surd), through ; gutter, behind ; jikr, over ; um, around; 
imier, under; ttofl, full; ttnfcer, against; tt>tefcer, again, back, 
when accented, are separable, and when unaccented, insepar- 
able : 

<Ex ttntber^o'tte ftct$ er ge^ort ^atte* He repeated what he had heard. 
(Er folte baS SSudj ttneber. He brought the book again. 

£)a$ SBajfcr tjt burdjgelaufen. The water has run through. 

3. The particle mtfj, in some words, takes the accent, and, 
in the infinitive and past participle, is treated like other sepa- 
rable particles : 

(S3 §at mig'gctont; e3 f$eutt mijfttt" It has sounded wrong ; it seems to 
toncn. sound wrong (mis-sound). 

4. In some verbs the augment is used before the prefix mtp 
(but is oftener wholly rejected) : 

©ie $%tfce» t§n gemig'^anbcXt (or mij^ They have maltreated (abused) 
fan'belt, him. 

23 eifpiele. Examples. 

(Er ftefa^l' i§nen (L. 62. 3.) tyre £au* He commanded them to illuminate 

fer in beleudjien* their houses. 

$ct> id) §a(>e euren Sctmmer nur mt* Alas! I have only increased your 

(jro'jjm. grief 

(Er $at un<3 ii£ergefe|t. He has taken (ferried) us over. 

(Er feat cut Srauerfpiet au3 bem £>eur* He has translated a tragedy from 

(a)c» fi&erfcfcf. the German. 



200 



LESSON LIV\ 



©tefer Jfaufmctim fcerforgt' im3 nut 

flaffee, £$ee, Bucfer, *c. 
£)tefe 3>fXansen muffen aKe 3a$re ser=* 

fegt tterben. 
SHe $errltdjfeit ber ©eft serfdnm'nbet. 
<So sergefyt afteS Srbif^e* 
<£v $at OTe3 soerXernt' smS er ttmjji.e* 



This merchant supplies as with 

coffee, tea, sugar, etc. 
These plants must be transplanted 

every year. 
The glory of the world vanishes. 
Thus perishes every thing earthly. 
He has forgotten every thing that 

he knew. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SBege'fyen, to commit, p. 348; 

SBeloty'rtett, to reward ; 

SB e rem 'ben, to rob; 

SBefdjrei'bett, to describe, p. 354; 

£>ason, of it; 
*£)ie (Eltertt, pi. the parents ; 

(Srftn'bert, to invent, p. 348; 

(SEr'ijctrten, to receive; 

CErmor'ben, to murder; 

(£rfe'|ett, to replace ; 
2)tc ©ute r -t the goodness; 
£>te 3ugenb, -, the youth ; 



2)ie timjr, -, pi. Jt'imfie, the art; 
Die £iebe, the love ; 

$D?tJ3'$erfre v eit, to misunder- 
stand, p. 356; 
£>te $flict)t, -, pi. -en, the duty; 

*PoU'ren, to polish ; 
£)er Spiegel, -£, pi. -, looking-glass; 
Der £l)eil, -e<3, pi. -e, the part; 
2)ct$ $erbred)'ett, -3* pi. -/ crime ; 

$erfu'tf)en, to try^ ; 

SSertrei'fcen, to drive away, 356; 

Served/ en, to break, p. 346. 



Exercise 108. 



SInfgabe 108. 



L 3$ ^offe morgen eteen 33rtef gu erljalten. 2. £at ber arme 
SDiann fete ®eft er^altett, ober nur eteen S^etf bason? 3* 3d) l^e 
ba$ SBort sergeffen nnb ba£ papier ^oerloren. 4. £)te 2)eutfd)ett $a* 
ben stele nitjjltdje JEiinjie erfnnben. 5* SKetee ©filler l)aben ftd) 
gut betragen. 6. Sttan $at mir biefes SSnd) empfol)Ien. 7* 3d) 
^aBe eteen SSrief son einem meteer grennbe erljalten, morin er fetee 
SReife befdjrieben tyat 8. Steer ermartet ®eft son feinem Sater, 
vtxit ber Sincere serbient fete ©eft* 9* SBir mu§ten ben alien Wlann 
inbas SSfteer begraben. 10* !Der Saner tyat feinen 2Beigen terfauft* 
11. 3^ r Sruber Ijat mid) migserftanben, id) ^o&t tym nid^iS ser* 
fprod)en. 12. Sr $at feinen Spiegel ^erbrodjen. 13* Unfere grennbe 
{)aben un$ befndjt, fie serfudjten beutfd) #x fpred)en, aber t»ir fonnten 
fte nid)t serfteljen. 14. £a3 tapfere ipeer $at ben geinb sertrieben. 

15. Sr $at fetee $fltd)t erfitttt unt> fetee greunbe l)aben ifjn belo^nt. 

16. 2Ga3 fur ein 23erbredjen fyaben biefe Seute begangen ? 17. @te 
I>aben einen SJJann beraubt unfc ermorbet. 18. £er ^Inabe $at fetee 
Rnopfe polirt, an\tatt fete 23ud) ju ftu^irett. 19. 3Die r e3 23ud) $at 
er in feiner 3ugen$ gelcfen* 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



201 



Exercise 109. StufgaBe 109* 

1. Have you received your books, or only a part of them ? 

2. I have not yet received them, but I expect them to-morrow, 

3. Have you studied this book much ? 4. I have not had much 
time to study it. 5. Have you understood all that you have 
studied ? 6. I have understood it, but I have forgotten a part 
of it. 7. I earn the money that I receive. 8. Somebody has 
broken my knife. 9. We tried to speak German, but they 
could not understand us. 10. I can recommend this book to 
you, I studied it in my youth. 11. The poor man was obliged 
to sell his bed. 12. This man has committed no crime. 13. The 
thief has buried the murdered man in the forest. 14. He has 
robbed his friend. 15. Have you sold any thing to-day? 16. 
Yes, I have sold my horse. 17. What .have you promised me? 
18. I have not promised you any thing. 19. Either you have 
forgotten or I have misunderstood you. 20. Do your duty £iid 
I will reward you. 21. I have not yet received tnat which 
you promised me, but I have not forgotten it. 



LESSON LV. 


^ »■» •^ 


Iztlxon IX 




SUBJUNCTIVE. 




CONJUGATION 


of @ein, 


£a6en 


and SBerbetu 




PRESENT 


TENSE. 




/may be. 


I may have.. 




I may become. 


idj [ei, 


idj Ijak, 




tdj rserbe, 


bu feiejr (or feiji), 


bu ijaBejr, 




bu roerbejr, 


er fei, 


er f)a£e, 




er roerbe, 


rotr feten (or feirt), 


ttir r)akn, 




ttur tterben. 


ifyr feiet, 


ifjr $al>er, 




tyx tterbet* 


fte fetert (or fern). 


fte tyakru 




fte fterben. 




IMPERFECT 


1 TENSE. 




I might be. 


I might have. 




I might become* 


idj ware, 


id) r)dtte, 




id) tintrbe, 


bu todreft (or tttfrji), 


bu f)dttejr ; 




bu tourbefb 


er tsare. 


er r)dtte, 




er trmrbe, 


ttnr ttdrert, 


rcir Ijdttett, 




xo'xx mitrbett; 


Ujr rodret (or todri),- 


U)r i&tttU 




iljr toitrbet* 


fte rsdrert. 


fte fatten. 


Q* 


jte ipurbew. 



202 




LESSOff L?* 








PERFECT TENSE. 




I may haje been 


I m ty have had. 


I may have become* 


id) fei 




id) babe 




id) fei 




bu jeiefi 




bu §ibt\t 




bu feij! 




cr fei 
wir feiett 


• gewefem 


er i)xht 
wir ^aben 


• gerjabu 


er fei 
wtr feiett 


- geworbau 


itjx feiet 




ifyr tyabet 




u)r feiet 




fte feien 




fte Ijaben 


» 


fte feiett 






PLUPERFECT TENSE. 




I might have been* 


I might have had. 


I might have become* 


id) ware 




id) ijatte 




id) ware 
bu ware ft 




bit ware ft 




bu rjatteffc 






er ware 
wir waren 


? gewcferu 


er l)atte 
wtr fatten 


- ger}afcL 


cr ware 
wir war en 


, geworbert 
" or werbert. 


tfyr waret 




il)r l)attet 




ii)r waret 




fie waren 




fie fatten 




fte warert 






FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 




(If) I shall be. 


(If) I shall have. 


(If) I shall become* 


id) werbe 




idj werbe 




id), werbe 




bu werbefi 




bu werbefi 




bu werbejl 




er werbe 
wir wcrben 


- jehu 


er werbe 
wir werben 


* tjaften* 


er werbe 
wir werbert 


■ werbert* 


ti)r werbet 




if)r werbet 




tf)r werbet 




fte werben 




fte Herbert 




fie werbert 






SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 




(If) I shall have been. 


(If) I shall have had. 


(If) I shall have become* 


id) werbe 




id) werbe 




id) werbe 




bu werbefi 




bu werbefi 




bu werbefi 


geworbett 

- orworbert 

feitt* 


er werbe 


gewefen 


er werbe 


t c^e^aBt 


er werbe 


Wir werben 


fehu 


wir werben 


v l)aberu 


wir werbert 


it/r werbet 




ifyr werbet 




if)r werbet 


fie werben 




fie werben 




fte werbert 





1. The subjunctive is employed : 

a. To indicate a wish or a result h in which Use it answers 
to our potential t 

jDarum eBen leu)t er $eirtem, bamit er For this very reason he lends to 
jletS \u (tekn §aU> — £♦ no one (viz;)* that he may always 

have (something) to give. 
IBort Beit iu Belt Bebarf bet 2Beife> bag From time to time the wise man 
man i$itt bie ©titer* bie er fteft^t, lm needs that the endowments he 
redjten £id)te jet§e* — ©♦ possesses should be shown to him 

in the correct light. 

6. It is used in citing a report or opinion, as also m indi* 
rect questions ; 



BtrB JUtfCTlVE. 



203 



3$ T)8rte, ba§ er fetn ©et& serloren I heard (as a report) that he had 
lj a b e (subjunctive). lost his money. 

Here the allusion is to the report merely, without implying on the 
part of the speaker any opinion as to its truth. But if, on the contrary> 
the indicative is used, the report is assumed to be true ; 
S$ f)5rte f bag er fetn (Mb sertoren I heard (the fact). that he has lost 

$at. • his money. 

2. In this mode our imperfect and pluperfect are often ren- 
dered by the present and perfect : 

<£r faate* bag er fern (Mb §afa (en- He said that he had (te) no mo» 

stead of $atlt): ney. 

flftan glaubte> er §al v e ba^ (Mb ge* It was thought he had (has) stolen 

fM)len. the money. 



EXAMPLES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND THE INDICATIVE. 



Subjunctive. 

3d) tyorte, bag er 
fel)r franf feu 

SRaft fa$t> er §a* 
be ijiel (Mb. 

SKan gtauBt* bag 
er fommttttter* 
be. 

f$einjrbu> bag id) 
beingetnbfei? 



Indicative. 
)&) tjorte, bag er 
fe$r franf t[r. 



I heard (a report) 

that he is very 

sick. 
They say he has 3$ fottjft bag er 
much money. iJtel (Mb §at. 

It is thought that $Ran fteig., bag er 
he will come. fommen ttnrb. 

Thinkest thou 2Betgt bu> bag i<$ 
that I am thy beingetnb bin? 
enemy ? 



I heard (the fact) 
that he is very 
sick. 

I know that he 
has much mo- 
ney. 

It is known that 
he will come. 

Knowest thou 
that I am thy 
enemy ? 



Sflir fagt etne traurtge Styming* bag bu A sad presentiment tells me that 



bte SBtittfe fctn werbefk uter rcetdje 

bie ©pamet in ba§ £anb fe§en tr?r* 

ben.— @. 
£)cr after fagt, er fet U nuU\ imb 

toDffe metier ntdjtS me§r mit Mr tft 

fd)affen tya&en. — ©■• 
£Bcr fprtd)t i§m ah bag er bte 9ften* 

fd)en feftne* fit ju §ef>raudjen nuffe ? 

— S. 



you will be the bridge over which 

the Spaniards will come (get) 

into the counl ry. 
But he says he is tired of it, and 

Will have nothing more (further> 

to do with you. 
Who denies (of him) that he knows 

men (understands human nature), 

knows how to use them ? 



3. The subjunctive is often used, especially in the third per. 
son, and sometimes in the first person plural^ in the significa- 
tion of the imperative c 



204 LESSON LV. 

£)er Wltnfd) tferfttdje Me ©tftter m&% Let not man tempt the gods. 

&§ fei tt)ie 3^r gewunf(t)t ' Be it (let it be) as you wished 

3e£t gef)e Seber feine^ 28ege3*— 8'* Now let each go his way. 

■§>aften toix ©ebttlb' ! or Let us be patient ! liter ally, 

£agt anS ©ebulb §akn I Let us have patience I 

$fon Stab tytt an bie £inbe bort ! Let him be bound to the linden 

yonder. 

FORMATION OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE* 

Present Tense. 

4. The present subjunctive of all verbs is formed by suffix- 
ing to the root, e for the first and third person singular, and 
t ft for the second ; the first and third person plural add e XI, 
and the second e t : 

id) loft-e, ttrfr loft-enj id) ttwtt-e, mie fooll-en; 
t>n loft-eft, t§r loft-et; in moll-eft, i^ feott-et; 
er loft-e, fie loft-en* er tooU-t, fie tt>otl-m* 
Imperfect Tense. 

5. In regular verbs the imperfect of the subjunctive differs 
from that of the indicative in taking e before the endings t £, 
t e ft, tenandtet (L. 37. 1. 8.): 

Indicative. Subjunctive, 

id) loft-te, &tr loft-ten ; id) loft-e-te, ftir loB—e— ten ; 
ton loB— teft, il)r loft-tet; bn loft-e-teft, i^r loft-e-tet; 
er loft-te, fie loft-ten* er loft-e-te, fte loft-e-ten, 

6. Irregular verbs add e to the form of the indicative, and 
usually take the Umlaut, if capable of it : 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

id) gaft, ttir gaftenj td) gafte, »tr gaften; 

iu gaftft, x\x gaftt; fen gaft eft, i^r giiftet; 

er gaft, fie gaftem er gafte, fie gaften* 

The other tenses are formed by means of auxiliaries. For complete 
list of irregular verbs see p* 346 ; alsOj remarks § 11. 

33 e t f p t e I e* Examples. 

Ser ntdjt bie SBeXt in feinen ftreimben He who does not see the world in 
ftetyt serbtent md)t bag bie SBelt »on his friends does not deserve that 
ilmi erftxty're* ©♦ ^ ie W0l '*d should lieur of him, 



SUBJOTClTIVE. 



205 



£)ag man einen $Q$d fang-ett fann, ba$ That a bird ean be caught (that) i 

tt)ei§ tdj; afce; bap man tfjm feinen know, but that his cage can be 

$aftg angenetymer aT3 baS frete gelb made more pleasant to him than 

mafytn fimne, ba$ n>et| tcfy md)t. — the open field (that) I do not 

£♦ know. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



$8ef)aup'ten, to affirm; 
Da§ Berlin, -3, (the) Berlin ; 

SBilben, to cultivate; 

SMnben, to bind, tie, p. 346; 
DaSDreSben, -3, (the) Dresden; 

5 rag en, to ask; 
Die §anblung, -, pi. en, the action; 
Der §err, - n, pi. -en, lord, master; 
Die Stnbe, -, pi. -n, linden-tree ; 

feinen, to think; 
Die Sttetramg, -, pi. -en, opinion; 
Die Sftatnr, -, pi. -en, the nature ; 
Da$;ftemnf(eber, -3, pi.-, the nerv- 
ous fever : 



Da3 Stout, -3, (the) Rome; 

Der X^rann, -en, pi. -en, tyrant; 

ttmfonff, in vain; 
Da3 Skne'btg, -3, (the) Venice; 
Die SJerjtel'iung, -, pi. -en, the dis- 
simulation ; 

Sftermal, four times ; 
Die SBelt, -, pi. -en, the world; 

SBteber, again; 
Da33©ien, -3, (the) Vienna ; 

SUJar, indeed; 

S&eimal, twice. 



Exercise 110. 



Stufga&e 110* 



1. 3$ $8rte, bap biefer 'Styramt in Serlin gewefen, aBer idj ttrnflttf 
ntdjt, oB e3 »a$r fei. 2. £aBen @ie and) geprt, id) fet sam spferfce 
gefaffen? 3. 5ft ein, id) Ijcrte, @ie fcien au$ bem 2Bagert gefatten* 
4. £ie grangofen fce^aupten fte feien Die ©eBilbetften in ber SQBelt* 
ft.S^e Sdjmefter glauBte, @ie feien in ber ®iaU get»efen j id? 
meinte aBer, ba$ @ie im SBafoe gewefen feien. 6. Die grtglanbet 
ftnb ber Sftetnung, fte feien He £erren ie3 9J?eere3. 1* Diefcr SRet^ 
\tnbt erjatylt, bafs er a^eimal in 9tom unb siermal in Senebig ge»e* 
fen fet. 8. gr $offt, baf er in ad?t £agen in 2Bten fein merbe. 9, 
3<§ glaitBe, bap stele Sfflenfdjen |ier auf grben % ®nte3 ge^afit $a* 
ben tterbcn. 10. gr fagte a^ar, er fei Irani, aBer stele glauBen, e3 
fei SSerfiettung sen t$m gettefen. 11. 3$ SjiJrte mit Sebauern, @ie 
fatten in Dresten ba$ 9temnfteBer ge^abt. 12. gr fragte mid), 06 
id) etrca^ son biefer §anblung ge$8rt ^dtte. 13. gr glauBt, er tterbe 
nie mteber glMid) fein. 14. gr mtint, id) m8d)te e3 lefeti, aBer id} 
Kmtte nid;t. 15. SJian BinV Ujn an bie Sinbe bort. 16. gr fagte, 
er mftffe getjeiu 1?. 3^r grennb meint, leine <Sd)i3rtt)eit ber Plaint 
fei nmfonft gefdjaffen, unb wtr SWenfc^en feien ba, urn fte su ge^ 
nie^en* 



206 



LESSON LV!> 



Exercise 111. 



[ufgftB* 11L 



1. I icpe I shall sea them to-morrow* 2. He has promised 
that he will go w.th us to-morYow to the city* 3. He made 
me believe that he was my friend, 4. We heard that you were 
unwell. 5. Why do you think that he is your enemy ? 6. 
Because m§ friends told me that he hates me. 7. I have heard 
that my brother has lost his horse, & They say these people 
are very poor, 9. He says we Were in his garden* 10. Did 
you hear that I had found my money ? 11* I had not heard 
that you had lost your money. 12. This man says that he has 
been in Vienna. 13. It is said that the ship has arrived. 14. 
These people think that we are very rich. 15. A good scholar 
studies diligently that he may learn rapidly*, 16. He thought 
I could not write. I 1 ?. They said that they must have the mo- 
tley, 18. My brother says that they have praised you. 



*»^~»« «^-»»^ ^- 



LESSON LVL Cation LVL 

CONDITiONAt,. 
^CONDITIONAL OF @ t X It, Jp CI 6 t XI AND SBctfcetU 



5f* 'should he, 

id) ftitrbc 
fcu nut rb eft 
tx n>iirbe 
tinr witrben 
%x ivitrDet 
Jlc n> uracil 



■ fern* 



1FIRST CONDITIONAL. 

/ should have, 

i§ toitrbe 
bit roiirbejt 
er ruiirbe 
anr rourben 
ifyr roitrbet 
fie rimrbert 



$ahin+ 



I should become, 

icr) tt)iirbc 
bvt ttitrbeit 
er nmrbe 
Mix tuurbett 
tr)r tt>itrbet 
\k ruurbeit 



tosrfcciU 



t should hate teen, 

id) roiirbe 

bu rourbefl 

er rourDe 1 §»n>cfett 

U>tr roitrbeu fein. 

tbr rourbct 

jte tD-urbe-w 



SECOND CONDITIONAL. 

I should have had. I should have betome. 



irij roitrbe 
bu tvihbejt 
er n>iirbe 
nnr rourben 
itjr nitvbet 
jte »)ib ben 



I a b em 



i<§ roiirbe 
bu rourbejl 
er n>iirbe 
nnr niirben 
tor nmrbet 
fife rstirben 



gert>orbcn 

or roorben 

feiiu 



1. The conditional mode is employed where a condition is 
Supposed which is regarded as doubtful or impossible: 

tsd) roitrbe fei&jt getyen, wewt id) nid)t I would go myself if I were not 

fo ait roare. eo old. 

j©a$ ttmrben Sie gen)an $afcen* rocwt What would you have done, if you 

(Bit t$ gefeljert fatten? had seen it ? 

(Er roiirbe e3 U)im, roenn er fonnte* He would do it, if he could. 
@ie rourben e£ geu)cm §aben> tt>emt fte They would have done it> if they 

£>a geroefert rodretn had been there. 

2. For the above forms of the conditional, the imperfect and 
pluperfect of the subjunctive are often substituted; to e tt it 
being omitted, and the subject preceded by the verb : 

5Da$ rodre fd) inter, rodre t% rtid)t fo That were more beautiful, were it 

grog ; instead of not so large; instead of 

£)a3 roiirbe fctjimer fern? roemt e3 rtid)t That would be more beautiful, i! 

fo groB rodm it were not so large. 

3d) Wit t$ md)t geokitot, ^atte id) e$ I had not believed it, had I not 

lttd)t gefefyen; instead vf seen it; instead of 

$d) roiirbe e£ rtid)tgegTaubtl)aoert, roerm I would not have believed it, if I 

id) e£ nid)t gefe^en frdtte* had not seen it. 

SBitgte er, roo id) lin 7 fo fame er ut Here our idiom does not admit of a 

mtr ; instead of literal translation. 

SBerm er rougte, voo id) out, fo roiirbe If he knew where I am> he would 

er in mir fommeiu come to me. 

EXAMPLES OT THE CONDITIONAL AND TltE INDICATIVE. 

Conditional* Indicative. 

Si roiirbe fommert, He would come* (Er foimte fommen, He could come* 

roerm er bitrfte* ifhewereatlib- aber er rootlte but he would 

erty to. rtid)U not. 

^te roiirbe Metoert, She would re- @ie rortfte ntdjt She would not 

Wtm fte nid)t ge* main, if she Mciben? ofrglcid) remain, though 

|ett tniijste* Were not ob- fte nid)t getjen she was not ob 

liged to go. mugte» liged to go. 

gr rourbe e$ gc^ort He would have (£r roar ba gefte* He had been 

£)aocn, roerm erba heard it, if he fen> aber er r)atte there, but he bad 

•^erocfert rodre* had been there, e£ nid)t gefyorU not heaid its, 

3. The conditional mode is employed i 
a, Interrogatively to express surprise or dissent: 
$)vl rodre j! 'fcon Manuel ? — 3. You are Don Manuel ? (Do you say?) 

fcraume, s #rin$? So rodren e$ mtr Dreams, Prince? Were they then 

iroumc gewefen? — @u only (£. e. they were -no^ dreams ? 



208 LESSON LVi. 

$ttr §afte e$ einfaUen foEen btefett (Who pretends that) it occurred td 
<3taat im Staate $u bulben? — <3. me to tolerate . this state within 

the state ? 

b. Sometimes the condition, or that on which it depends, is 
not expressed : 

grommer ©taM D \tiiV id) trimmer Peaceful staff! 0, had I never 

mtt bem Sd)tt)e?ie bid) ^ertaufc^t ! changed thee for the sword I 

£>te$ elenbe SBerfjeug fonnte midj ret* This wretched vehicle (instrument) 
ten, oradjte mid) [cartel! $u fcefreunbe* might save me — might soon con- 
ten ©tabten* — ©♦ vey me to friendly cities. 

r>en modjt 1 id) ftriffen, ber ber £reujte I would like to know (the one) who 

mutton Men ijh — ©♦ is the most faithful of all to me. 

c. To express an opinion with caution or diffidence : 

@d)roerlidj mocfyte erbe§ geinbe^ $nnb=* He can (I think) scarcely escape 
fdjaft fyintergetyn* — <3* the search of the enemy. 

OTe£ lonnte &ulefct nur fctlfdjeS ©pteX All might (may) finally be decep- 
fein* — <S* tion (false play). 

£>er 9)ooel $ cttte mtdj fajt gejMnigt. The rabble almost (was likely to 
— ©, have) stoned me. 

</. After a negative the conditional is used to give empha* 
sis or intensity to the sentence : 

Sfttdj fonnen roir iioer feme -fteuerung Nor can we make complaint of any 
Mage fiit)rcn, n>eld)e in btefer Beit innovation that has been made 
irgenb roo gemctd)ttt)orbentt)are.-©.. any where during this time. 

3d) oin in meinem £eoen fo gtMlidj I have not been so fortunate in my 
nidjt gettefen, bag idjba3 ^ergnugen life as often to have experienced 
oft empfimben $atte*— -£♦ tne pleasure. 

Obs. — To give additional prominence to what may be regarded as 

extraordinary, the imperfect of the indicative is sometimes substituted 

for the conditional : 

"£cttte er in biefem StugettMitfe fidj Had it ignited at this moment, the 
ent$im'bet, fo roar {for toare) ber best part of its effect would have 
Bcjle £$eU feim c SBirhmg oerXoren.,, been (were) lost. 

$e i)p tele. Examples. 

f>atteft bu oon $lenfcben oefferfiet$ ge* Hadst thou always thought better 

bad)t, bu tyattejt beffer and) get)an* of men (mankind) thou wouldst 

belt. S 4 also have acted better. 

©afce e$ ntd)t$ Unerftdrltdje^ metjr, fo If there were no longer any thing 

mod)te id) md)t metjr lekn, xotUx inexplicable, I should nr longer 

Ijttr ttod) boil. — Cft* wish to live, neither here not 

hereafter* 



CONDITIONAL, 209 

€ure $eifpfjmmg to ax ein ttentg %u Your reconciliation was a little too 
fc^nellv <xU bctjj fie tyatte bauer^aft hasty to (allow that it might) be 
feitt fcEetw — ®. permanent. 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



^Bretfeir, to depart; 
£)a3 Slme'rifa, -3, (the) America; 

2(nber3, differently, otherwise; 

STttSrocmbent, to emigrate ; 

sBcglei'tertj to accompany; 
"Die (Efyre, -, pi. -tt, the honor; 
£er grembe, -tt, pi. -it/ foreigner, 

stranger ; 
Die ©efelf fd)Ctft, -, pi. -en, the com- 
pany; 

(Senrig', sure, certain; 



©itttg/ kind; 

£>ct§ §er$, -end, pi. -en, the heart; 
£>a3£et^t3, -d, (the) Leipsic; 

SJftgltdj, perilous, dubious ; 

9ted)tf very, right ; 
Die ©a^-e, -, pi. -n, the business, 
affair, cause; 

$$txfaf)'xtn f to act, proceed ; 

2)ernimf tig, reasonable; 

$erfdjtx>en'berifd), wasteful j 
£)ad2Befen,-d, pi. -, the being. 



Exercise 112. 51 uf gate 112. 

1* £ad SBejfc, mad btefe ganje ©efettfdjajl fyxm fonnte, roiire, gleit^ 
aBjuretfen* . 2. SBer ^iitte geglantt, bap er ein folded iper3 3eigen 
miirbe ? 3* Etefer ^rembe $fttte ed gemifj ntd)t ge$cm, menu mir 
it)n giittg M)anbelt fatten* 4. $etn ttcrniinfttgcr SiJienfd) miiroe fo 
ge^anbelt Ijafceru 5. fir fonnte redjt gut le&en, menn er nidjt jo uv* 
fdjmenberifd) mare. 6* 3$ tt^rbe gleicf) gu it)m gel)en, menn id) 
nur miipte, mo er iff* T. @ie mare gemifi son ber 23riide t)ina& ge^ 
'fatten, menu it)re greunbin ffe nidjt ge^alten ^atte* 8. fir tx>iirbe 
elenb fetn, menn er fo leBen mitfjte mie td). 9. SBenn td) bad ge^ 
nntfjt f)iitte, fo mare id) gang anberd $erfaf)ren. 10. 3^ miirbe mit 
3^nen get)en, menu id) ntdjt fo ttiel ju ttjnn ^dtte. 11* SBenn id) 
bad 33ud) gefe^en Ijiitte, fo miirbe td) ed gefauft tjaten. 12. SBir 
mitrben fdjon fpred^en fonnen, menu mir fletfjtg fhibirt §&tteru 13* 
SBenn fie 3ett fatten mitrben fie nnd gemip Begleiten. 14. SBemt 
id) englifd) fonnte, fo miirbe id) gletd) nad) 3lmertfa aitdmanbenu 
15. 3$ glaube nid)t, bafj bu lange bort Metfcen mitrbeft, menu bit 
audmant>ern fotlteft. 16. 3$ tviirbe bad ^otj fanfen, menn ed gut 
mare. IT* £ad mare etne mtpd)e @a^e. 18. £)|ne fit)re miirbe 
ber SKenfd) ein efenbed SBefen fein. 

Exercise 113. Slufgafce 113. 

1. What would you do with this book if it were yours? 2. 
I would study and try to learn the language that it teaches. 



210 LESSOK Lvn. 

3. What would you do if you were rich? 4. I would travel 
and study. 5. I should be satisfied if 1 could speak as well as 
you do. 6. If I had had a teacher I should have learned h uch 
faster. 7. Would you sell this house if it were yours ? 8. No, 
I would live in it. 9. I do not believe you could sell it. 10. 
if the stranger had called, I should certainly have heard him. 
11. You would have money enough if you were only industri- 
ous. 12. We could have bought the horses if we had had the 
money. 13. I would write you a German letter if I could. 

14. We should have seen the company if we had been at home. 

15. They would come if they had not so much to do. 16. If 
he were only here it would be quite a different affair. 17. It 
would not be the business of a month. 



■ *& » « ^ < i t> 



LESSON LVII. Cectiou LVII. 

IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

1. Besides the verbs denoting natural phenomena (as, c3 ton* 
rtert, c3 rennet, etc.) which in both languages are alike imper- 
sonal (§ 88), there are many verbs in German impersonally 
used, for which the neuter or passive form is required in Eng- 
lish : 

(S3 $at ftarf gcrcgnet. It has rained hard. 

&t Jagelt unb fd)nctU It bails and snows. 

€3 nad)tet fd)otu It is already growing dark (night). 

<£$ grauet mix sor u)m, battot. I have a horror of him, of it. 

©3 geliiftet t§m natf) OTem m$ tx fte$t. He covets every thing that he sees 

-<£$ frcut mid). I am glad, lit. it rejoices me. 

g$ f)mtgert unb burffct UttS. We are hungry and thirsty. 

<E3 tft nur mit biefer ©ctd)e (Srnft. I am in earnest in this matter. 

(£3 getattg or glittfte u)m eS $u n)im. He succeeded in doing ifc. 

(S$ tfyitt \m$ Allien fetjr letb* We are all very sorry. 

®,$ fd)ttunbett tfmen. They feel dizzy. 

(£6 tjat il)m gettnjj getraumt. He has certainly been dreaming. 

Ua mld)t 3eit tag t e$ ? At what time does it dawn (yrow 

llffht)! 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 211 

2. Some impersonal verbs are sometimes preceded by the 
object ; the pronoun e3 being omitted : 

9JUd) tyungert, Wlix fdjmmbett* 

Stan fyat gctraumt. llnS burftet* 

3. £au&ten, tiinfen impersonally used, take either the dative 
or accusative : 

Sfttdj bttnft fte fatten redjt* Methinks they were right. 

$)a$ biinft mtr bod) ju $rdjslt$* That really seems to me too hor- 

rible. 

4. ®e6en, impersonally used, indicates existence in a general 
and indefinite manner, and is rendered by to be; the object of 
gctett standing as the subject of to be : 

"(£3 gt&t fcofe ©etfter, bte in beSSRett* There are (exist) evil spirts that 

fd)en 33rujl fid) i^rcit SBotynftfc ne^ take (to themselves) their abode 

men." in man's breast. 

©i&t e3 ^eute tt>a3 9?eue3? Is there any thing new to-day? 

2Ba3 gibf$, ivarum laufen Sie ? What's the matter, why do you run ? 

5. §ef)len, get redjett and mcmgeln are often used impersonally, 
generally followed by the dative of a person, with the dative 
of a thing ; the latter being governed by a n : 

(£3 fejlte ifjm md)t an autem SBttten. He was not lacking in good will. 
"£)em ©liitfltcfyen fann c$ an 9Ud)t3 The happy man can be in want of 

gebred)cn." nothing. 

$n £e&cn$mittetn mangelt e3 ujnen* There is a lack (scarcity) of provi 

sions with them. 

6. Verbs, intransitive as well as transitive, are frequently 
used impersonally and reflexively, to denote an action in pro- 
gress, or what is customary : 

(£3 fragt ftdj, oB er e3 ttnrb t^un fon* It is questionable whether he will 

not. be able to do it. 

"£eb$aft traumt ft$ 1 S unter biefem One dreams briskly (much) under 

23aum." this tree. 

(£3 fafyrt ftci> tjut auf btefem SBagen. This is a good wagon to ride in. 

(5$ gebiibrt fid) md)t ba$ ju tljun. It is not proper to do that. 

@3 geprt fid) wtfcre ©Item gu Iteben It is our duty (becomes us) to love 

itnb el)ren. ?,nd honor our parents. 

(£$ trdgt ftd> ntd)t fclten gu# ba$ unter It not unfrequei tly happens that 

etnem un[d)einbaren $letbe bte fd)5n* under an unsightly garb the 

Pen Salente fcerbcrgen ftnb. most splendid talents are con- 
cealed 



212 



LESSON LVII. 



7. ®d)en, impersonally used and governing the dative, may 
often be rendered by to he; the dative frequently being ren- 
dered by our nominative, or the objective after with : 

Den SBit^ern gel}t eg oft tote ben Wlm* It is often with books as with 

fd)en. men. 

3Bte gefjt eg (or rote ge^t eg Sfynen) ? How are you (how goes it) ? 

(£g ge§t i^nen fe|r fd)led)t. They get along very badly. 

2Bte gefyfg Mr? Wlix bandjt rootyt ganj How is't with you? It seems to me 

red)U — 93 ♦ (you get along) quite well. 



33eij>tele> 

* (£g gtbt eine Sfrt son 9ftenfdjen, bte 
man stele 3aljre lana, oeooadjten 
fann, ofme mit ftdj einig $u roerben, 
ol> man fie in bte Piaffe ber fd)roa$en 
ober ber Bofen Sente fe£en fouV' 

"(Eg giBt Sorter roeTdje £$aten fmb*" 

Die grage, oo eg ©efpenfter a,eoe, lann 

fciit sernimftiger 5Dtaf$ oeja^en. 

(Sg foil an mtr ntd^t fe^Xen* — ©♦ 

2Bie Sting unb Jlette btr gefaEen roer* . 
ben, bte in Damaging \§ btr augge* 
fud)t, oerlanget mid) $w fefyen. — £♦ 

SBentge ^aben eg tterfud)t> nnb nocfy 2Be* 
nigern tft eg gelnngen* 

(£r taft eg ftcty an ^tc^te mancjeln* 



Examples. 

There is a kind of men whom one 
may (L. 45. 5. b) observe for many 
years, without being able to come 
to a conclusion as to whether to 
place (locate) them in the class of 
weak or of wicked people. 

There are words which are deeds. 

The question whether ghosts exist 
no reasonable man can answer 
affirmatively. 

I shall not be lacking (absent). 

How (the) ring and chain that I 
selected for you in Damascus 
will please you, I long to see. 

Few have tried it, and still fewer 
have succeeded in it. 

He denies himself in nothing (lets 
nothing lack to himself). 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



9Tn y aTtenb, constant; 

§3ti$en, to lighten ; 

Durften, to thirst; (see 1. & 2.) 

<£nt$roet'en (ftcfy), to quarrel; 

©retg'nen (fid)), to happen ; 
Die (Sntte, -, pi. -n# the harvest; 

%tl)Un, to fail, be deficient in; 

grieren, to be cold, freeze, 1.2; 

©if tig, venomous; 

£eiti$en, to hallow; 

•£>una,ern, to hunger; (s. 1. &2.) 
Die Sttfel, -, pi -n, the island ; 
Dig^glanb, -eg, (the) Iceland; 



£etb tfjun, to be sorry ; 
Die £eure, pi. the people ; 
Dag Wtalta, -g, (the) Malta; 
Der 9Jfttt$, -eg, the courage; 
Der 9Mb, -eg, the envy; 
Der Dxtf -eg, pi. -e, (Uerter) place; 
Dag Sarbt'men, -g, (the) Sardinia ; 
Die ©flange, -, pi. -n, the serpent; 

Sd)neien, to snow ; 
Der ©oiuttag, -eg, pi. -e, Sunday; 

lteoerjeu'a,en, to convince* 

Berjldn'big, sensible; 

Butragen, to happen, (see 6.) 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 218 

Exercise 114. $ufga£e 114* 

L 23 tft it)m enblid) getungen, fetnen greunb in iiBerjeugen. 2* 
<?ein $Ian ift gelungen, unb bod; ift er uttjufrtebetu 3* @3 fragt 
fid), oB nrir morgen gefyen fonnen ? 4. 2* geprt fid), ben ©onntag 
ju fyeiligen. 5* 23 fd)tdt ftcb, altere Seute gu ad)ten* 6* 2s ereig^ 
net ft* felten, ba(3 gute, setftanbtge Scute fid) ent^eien. 7. 23 tfcut 
tern ^tnaten fe^r leto, bafj er fo nad)la$ig gemefen ift* 8. 23 ttiirbe 
tntdj fe^r freuen, it)n fttefcerjufe^ett* 9. Surftet @ie ? 10. 9tetn, 
after mid) l)ungert urit) friert. 11* S3 $erftet)t fid), bafj er $eute nid)t 
!ommen nnrb, benn bie SBege finb ju fd)led)t. 12. S3 tragt fid) 
jumeilen gu, bafj an^altenber 9iegen bie gauge Srnte serbitBt. 13. 
Sluf ber 3nfet 9Jta(ta gibt e3 feine <Sd)langen; in ©arbinien giBt 
e3 feine SQSoIfe ; in £eutfd;lanb gift e3 feine $rofobife; auf33lanb 
gibt e3 mdt3 ©i[tige3, after in ber gangen SBelt ift fein Dxt, foo e3 
feinen 9Wb gitt. 14. Sin Sftann, fct>eld)em e3 an SRuttj fef)lt, ift 
fein guter ©olbat. 

Exercise 115. Slufgafte 115. 

1. I would be very glad to accompany you home, but I am 
afraid it will rain ; do you not see how it lightens, and hear 
how it thunders % 2. I think it will snow to-morrow ; it is 
questionable whether our friends will be able to come as they 
have promised. 3. The peasants have finally succeeded in sell- 
ing their horses. 4. I am very sorry not to have seen them, 
but it was so cold while they were in the city that I could not 
go out. 5. It sometimes happens that lazy people are very 
rich, but never that they are wise, learned, asefui or happy. 
6. This man is not hungry, but he is very cold. 7. Of course 
you will visit us as soon as you can, will you not'? 8. It is 
questionable whether he can do that. 9. Is there any thing 
more useful in the world than cold water % 10. They say they 
are very sorry that they did not succeed in convincing us that 
we were wrong. 11. What is the matter, why are all those 
people running into the house % 



214 



LESSON LVIII. 



LESSON LVIII. 



1. FiHABIGI OF 
© e 1 1 e 6 1 to e r t> e n, 





INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 




PRESENT TENSE. 




PRESENT TENSE. 




III 


id) werbe 


I am 




id) werbe 


I may 




bu wir ft 


^ thou art 




bu werbeft 


^ thou mayst 


T3 


er wirb 


^ he is 




er roerbe 


^ he may 


0? 

> 


t\l 


wir werben 


**£ we are 


* > 



wir werben 


5 we may 


• 


ir)r werbet 


^ you are 


r ™ 1 


itjr werbet 


** you may 




* (3 


fie werben 


they are 




fte werben 


they may 






IMPERFECT TENSE. 




IMPERFECT TENSE. 




a P 


id) wurbe *) I was 




idj wiirbe 


I might 




| 2 


Du wurbeft ^ thou wast 




bu wurbeft 


^ thou mightst 


*G 


80 (3 


er wurbe 1 -§ lie was 
wir wurben \ >2 we were 


tS 
v 


er witrbe 


^ he mio;ht 


> 


t\l 





voir wurben 


"5 we mi^ht 


• c 


ifyr wurbet ^ you were 


*"*' 


ir)r wurbet 


^ you miaht 




* (8 


fie murben J they were . 




fit witrben 


they might 






PERFECT TENSE. 




PERFECT TENSE. 




d I 1 


idj tun 


I have 




t<$ fet 


« I may 


n3 


1^2 


bu M|l 


^ ^ thou hast 


bu feieft 


^ thon mayst 


d 


M (3 
« i 1 


er tjl 
wir ftnb 


*S jg he has 
*2 we have 


O 


er fet 
wir feien 


§ he may 

++ w r e may 


s]' 2 


tl)r fcib 


*** S you have 




iljr feiet 


.Si you may 




* (3 


fte ftnb 


they have. 


^ 


fte feien 


& they may 






PLUPERFECT TENSE. 




PLUPERFECT TENSE. 




r! t 1 


idj war 


I had 




idj ware 


« I might 


y 


§2 


bu war ft 


^ ^ thou had 


n3 


bu ware ft 


-g thou mightst 




w (3 


er war 


/§ j> he had 


O 


er ware 


g he might 


0) 


a I 1 


wir waren 


'So we had 


a 


wir war en 


-« we might 


pQ 


5 i2 


if)r waret 


***£ you had 




ifyr waret 


.Si you might 


> 


$ (3 


fit waren J they had , 


rO 


fte waren 


«j they might # 


c3 

pd 




FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 




FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 




cfi P 


idj werbe 


g I shall ( " 




id) werbe 1 g (if) I shall 




§42 


bu wir ft 


•£ thou wilt 


H3 


bu werbeft % " thou wilt 


d 


B (3 


er roirb 


§ he will 


O 


er werbe 1 § " he will 


> 


« P 


.w werben 


~ we shall 


O 


wir werbert f ~ " we shall 1 





3 i2 

* (3 


i()r werbet 


.Si you will 




ifyr wcrbet i J§ " you will 


X 


fte werben 


*§> they will 




fte werben j & " they will ] 






SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 




SECOND FHTURE TENSE. 




rf p 


id) werbe 


. I shall # " 


rS 


id) werbe 1 « ( if ) I shall 


ji 


2 


bu wirft 


^ -g thou wilt 


' * 


bu wtrbej! 


tSi " thou wilt 





s (3 


er roirb 


-g'Z" he will 


53 

. CD 


er werbe | 


f> "he will 


<o 


d P 


wir werben 


y ~ g we shall 


X 


wir werben 


g " we sliall 


P o 


Mi 


tl)r werbet 


*° § you will 


* tjr werbet 


Z tL you. will 


0> 


fit mxbtn . 


* they will , 


jal 


lit werben 


^ " they will t 


J 



PASSIVE VERBS 



215 



Section LVffi. 



A PASSIVE VERB. 

TO BE LOVED. 



CONDITIONAL. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



S 72 



FIRST FUTURE. 

tdj rrwrbe 
bu roitrbefl 
er nmrbe 
\mx rtuvben 
ifir rciirbet - 
fie witrbett 

SECOND FUTURE, 

id) nutrbe 
bu nriirbej! 
er wfirbe 
nnr rritvben 
it>r tuitrbet 
fie tourben , 



IMPERATIVE. 



«T3 



PRESENT TENSE. 

tt)erbe bu 
ir-erbe er 
tterben rotr 
reerbet ifyr 
roerben fie 

IMPERF. TENSE. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



PLUPERF. TENSE. 



FIRST FUTURE. 



INFINITIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE, 

geliefct Herbert, 
to be loved. 



IMPERF. TENSE. 



PERFECT TENSE. 

geltefcttoorbenfetu, 
to have been 
loved. 



PLUPERF. TENSE. 



SECOND FUTURE 



,.- c ^30 



i-SJ 



FIRST FUTURE. 

tterben geliebt 

tterben, 
to be about 
to be loved. 



SECOND FUTURE. 



PARTI CI 



PRESENT 



IMPERFECT 



PERFECT, 

geliebt, 
loved. 



PLUPERF, 



1st. FUTURE 



2d. FTJTL'Uf , 



216 LESSON LVIII. 

2. The passive voice is formed by connecting the auxiliary 
ft e r b e n, through all its modes and tenses, with the past parti- 
ciple of the main verb : 

SDaS 3)ferb ftnrb £efd)taa,en* Tin horse is being (becoming) shod. 

£)a$ 3>ferb tx>urbe fcef^lageth The horse was (became) shod. 

£)a$ 9)ferb ift kfdjlagen ttorben* The horse has been (become) shod. 

3. The form of the perfect, with omission of to t X t> e n, is 
used to indicate a present state or condition, as the result of a 
previous action ; as, 

£)ct3 9)ferb ift Befdjtctgen, the horse is shod — is now in a state resulting 
from the act of shoeing (i. e. in a shod condition) ; ba£ $ferb ift befd)Iagen 
t$ r b e n, on the contrary, merely indicates a like previous act, while 
the result (namely, a present shod condition) may no longer exist. 

4. Passive verbs are often used impersonally to denote an 
action or event in progress : 

(£$ ftnrb cjefungen* There is singing ("going on"). 

(£$ tturbe V\§ faat itt Me 9£a$t §t* The figlfting continued (it was 

fod)'iem fought) till late in the night. 

g)ort fturbe aEe £age getan&t' unb ge* There was dancing and playing 

ftielr\ there every day. 

(£$ tturbe \x)m Son aEen Setten $u From all sides it was run to his 

■fmlfe geeilt'* assistance. — Milton. 

&)ie Sd)5nljeit ftnrb nut SBunber cmge*= Beauty is looked at with admira- 

fclicf t, bo$ nur © efal'ligfett ent$<f t* tion, but only kindness enchants. 

-SB, 

33 e if p tele* Examples. 

£)a$ ®IM bet ©efedfdjaft ftnrb efcett The happiness of society is inter- 

fb feljr burd) Sfjorijeit ctlS burd) $er** rupted quite as much by folly as 

Bremen unb £ajter geftort — €>♦ by crimes and vices. 

©en (Sd)laf, ben 9Md)tf)um unb bie Sleep, wealth and health (L. 42. 1. 

©efunb'ljeii gentegt' man nur, mm «.) are enjoyed only when they 

fte untet6rod)en roorben (ftnb)* — $* have been interrupted. 

£)er ®emuS ftnrb nur vom ®eniu3 ge^ Genius is comprehended only by 

fagt', bie eble ^atur' nur »on i!jre3 genius, a (the) noble nature only 

©leic§en (L. 35. 4. 5.)— $t. by its peer. 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 

£>er STugenBTttf, -e$, pi. -e, moment ; . Die (ErBit'terung, -, pi. -en, the ani- 
SMfmben, to find out, p. 348 ; | mosity ; 

$3etrubt', afflicted; CErt'let'tcrn, to climb; 

>Deretnft', in the future; ' (Srujl, earnest, stern; 



PASSIVE VERBS, 



217 



CErfdjet'ttetT, to appear, p. 348 ; 

©rfdjie'jsen, to shoot, p. 354 ; 

gortfdjleppett, to drag away; 
jDer (^emfenjd$cr, -3, pi. -, the cha- 
mois-hunter; 
£)a§ ®ertd)t', -e£, pi. -e, tribunal ; 

©itttfttg; favorable, propitious; 

§erBei'fiiBren/ to bring on; 
£>er Supttcrr -$, (the) Jupiter; 

Sftelbett, to announce; 

fJhdjbem, after; 



£)er 3)rome't$eu§, (the) Prometheus; 
S)er ©d)metd)ler, -3, pi. -, flatterer; 

©cfymteben, to chain; 
Die ©ettCf -, pi. — itr the side ; 
2)er <Streti, -e$, the combat; 

Slaufc^en? to deceive ; 
£)a$ Unglixcf , -6, e§,the misfortune 

©erfam'melitr to assemble ; 

$oEen'ben, to finish ; 

Berpo'rettf to destroy. 



Exercise 116. 



SlufgaBe 116. 



1* Der gletgtge mtrb geloBt, unb ber £rage toirb getabelt. 2, Die 
fteilften getfen toerben son ben ©emfenjagern erflettert. 3* £)er 
giinftige 2lugextBttcf ftirb son bent $lugen ergriffen. 4. 23 nmrbe 
meljr gefptelt ate gearBettet. 5. 2)er ©trett fturbe aitf Betben ©etten 
mit grower SrBitterung gefittjrt* 6* £)a3 23ud) ift enblid) softenbet 
ttorben unb nrirb Balb erfdjeinen. 7. Snbltd} tft e3 ausgefunben mor* 
ben, toer ber £)ieB tft. 8. &3 n>irb bereinft ein ernftes ©ertdjt ge^al^ 
ten merben, nadjbem afle SSolfer werben serfammelt ftorben fetn* 
9* £)er 9iad)6ar glattBt, bafj ber SSater son feinem $tnbe getihtfd)i 
toerbe. 10. Sr melbet, bafj bie gcmje ©tabt gerftort toorben feu 11. 
Wan fagt, ba$ ber arme Warn forigefd)leppt tvorben feu 12. £>er 
BetritBte better glauBt, fern @o^n tserbe son bent geinbe erfdjoffen 
ttorben fein. 13. Die greunbin Befyauptete, bafj ba£ Ungltid burd) 
bie ©djutb be3 9tad)Bar3 ^erBeigefitfjrt ftorben foare 14. 5)rome^ 
t$eus n>ar son Suptter an einen gelfert gefd)miebet ttorben. 15. 
£a3 £au3 ftirb son einem fdjr gefdjtdien SSKanne geBaut. 16. Diefc 
Ztutt glauBen, fie feien son uns getihtfdjt toorben. IT. SSijfen 
@ie son wm biefe Stiver gefdjrteBen tsorben fmb ? 



Exercise 117. SlufgaBe 111. 

1 , Do you know why you have been blamed by your friends ? 
2 1 was blamed by them because the letter that has been prom 
ised by me had not been written before they arrived here, 3. 
I hope the enemy will be defeated and driven out of the coun 
try. 4. My letter will have been read before yours will have 
been written. 5. We are not often hated by those who are 
loved by us. 6. The bad will be punished and the good will 

10 



218 1ESS0J? LIX. 

be rewarded. 7. Good men are often blamed whf.e they Iivo, 
and praised after they are dead. 8. The ring of the rich young 
traveler has been found by one of his servants. 9. These beau- 
tiful baskets are said (L. 45. 9. b.) to have been made by the 
blind man to whom the flute was sent yesterday. 10. Those 
indolent boys deserve to be punished. 11. There has been more 
done to day than yesterday. 12. We are often deceived by 
those who praise us, for we are often praised by flatterers. 13, 
The hunter says he has been bitten by a bear that had been 
shot by one of his friends. 14. Has it not yet been found out 
by whom the money was stolen 1 



■— O * » ^ » ■ »' 



LESSON LIX. Uttion LIX. 

PROPER AND COMMON NAMES. 

1. The proper and common names of places and countries, 
as also of months, are placed in apposition : 

SDie <3tabt fDiihtdjen iji bit §au£tfkbt The city (of) Munich is the capital 
be$ $5nigretd)3 Satenu of the kingdom (of) Bavaria. 

2>er Sftottat Sfttirj ifi ftitrmtja) Uttb im* The month of March is stormy and 
angenetym. disagreeable. 

2. The date of the month (without a preposition intervening) 
precedes its name : 

£it 9lati)t &tt>if$en bem srierten urti) The night between the fourth and 
funften 9tyril ttar gu btefem flrojjsen fifth of April was designated for 
Unteme^men Beftimmt. — <&. the execution of this great un- 

dertaking. 

3. Nouns denoting weight, measure, quantity and kind 
usually stand in the same case as those that they limit. When 
followed by nouns in the plural, the feminine takes the plural 
form, while those of the masculine and neuter retain that of 
the singular : 

Cr faufte cine GSffe £udj mtb imi (£Hen He bought an ell of cloth and two 
^eibe, cin 9)funb itaffee imb jfeei ells of silk, one pound of coffee 
9)fuub j&udiv. and two po mds of sugar. 



PROPER AND COMMON NAMES. 



219 



3J) ?abe etne tteue 5Trt $aptei\ I have a new kind of paper. 

(Er fyat btei <StM 2Uefy. He has three head of cattle. 

4. When, however, the latter noun is qualified hy some 
other word, it usually stands in the genitive ; in a few phrases, 
also, the genitive occurs when not thus qualified : 

Srirtge mtr em ©laS MefeS Karen Bring me a glass of that clear wa- 

Staffers ♦ ter. 

Sine imjd^lige Sftenge SQvlU war \)tx* A countless multitude of peoplehad 

befoeirrijmt* — ©♦ flocked together. 

5. yjlann, when referring to organized bodies of men, re- 
tains (like sail, horse, etc., in an analogous use) the singular 
form, with the plural signification : 

Sin f$foebtfdjer©eneral,ber mit etnem A Swedish general, who had re- 

acr)t tanfenb Sftann jrarfen §eere an inained on the Elbe with an ar- 

bcr (SIBc jurMgeblieben Wax, fytelt my of eight thousand men strong, 

bte <Stabt SSJcagbetwrg auf $ engfre held the city of Magdeburg close- 

eutgefdjtoffen. — ©♦ ly invested. 

6. Sin $aar {literally a pair) often answers to a few, and 
Is used, undeclined, before nouns in any case : 

SStarten <Ste nocc; ein tyaax Stunben* Wait a few hours yet. 



Setfptele* 



Examples. 



ttnb fammelten aHe <Spetfen ber fteBen And he gathered up all the food ol 

3af)re fo tm £anbe (Sg^ten ttaren* the seven years which were in 

— Gen. XLi, 48. the land of Egypt. 

©te tlnfcfyulb l)at etne $?enge Slnne^m* (The) innocence has a multitude of 

Itdjfeiten. — SB, graces. 

(Etn neueS ^an^igtaufenb Wlam jlarfeS A new army twenty thousand men 

§eer entjlanb in $ur$em unter feinen strong soon came into existence 

$a^nen. — S* under his banners. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Slbfaftren, to set out; 
©er 9tprtt\ -3, (the) April ; 
©te 9lrmee', -, pi. -n, the army; 
©te Sfrt, -, pi. -en, the kind; 
©a3 latent, -3, (the) Bavaria; 
©a£ SBremen, -e, (the) Bremen; 
©te (Site, -, pi. -tt, the ell ; 
©er Rebruar', -4, (the) February; 
Die %xud)t, -, pi. $rit:toe, the fruit; 
©ie $aui?tjiabr, -, pi. -{tabu, the cap- 
ital, chief city ; 



©er ^anuar', -3, (the) January , 

©er ^UXlit -§, (the) June ; 

©a3 Jtomgreitf), -3, pi. -e, kingdom 

Sfteulici), recently; 
©a$ $aar, -e£, pi. -e, the pair, 
©a£ $reugen, -3, (the) Prussia; 
©a£ <3ad)fert, -§, (the) Saxony; 

Sed$# six; 
©aSStittf, r-e^* pi. -e, piece, head; 
©er Scaler, -3, pL -i the thaler; 
©er SQittyarfoUx, -3, pi. -# drover 



220 LESSON LX. 

Exercise 118. 2lufga6e 118* 

1. Sin-, erften Sunt tinrb Me 9lrmee in Me ©tabt gte^em 2> Set 
alte 33ief)l)anbler |at t)unb.ert ©titd Sid) gefauft 3. Sr trtaft jeben 
Sftorgen g»et ©las SBaffer. 4. SMen ©te mir eitt ©tiicf 23rob 
gtien ? 5* 3d) feitt S^nert groei ©titd gleifd) gefcn. 6. SBir fufy* 
ren am fiinf unb 3tt>an3igften 3<*nuar son ber ©tabt 9lew*§)orf ab, 
unt> famen am adjtjefynten gebrnar in ber ©tabt Sremen cuu 7. 
£er Sftonat Sftiai ift »iel angenefjmer ate ber Sftonat 2tpril. 8. £>ie 
©tabt 23erlm ift tie £anptftabt bed ^ontgretdjs $ren£en. 9. £a* 
ift eine 2trt grudjt, Me idj nie gefetjen t)at>e. 10* Sr §at jmei $>aar 
£anbfd)ufye unb fe&)d Stlen £ud) ' gefauft 11. Ser Dom in ber 
©tabt 3JJagbehtrg ift fefyr \d)6n, 12. 2Da3 ^onigreic^ ©adjfen ift 
fefyr Hem. 13. Sr |at nod) ^in tt>enig @elt>, bemt etn guter greunb 
fyat tt)m neultd) ein $aar Scaler aud Saiern gefdjidt 

Exercise 119. 2tufgabe 119. 

1. Here is a little piece of paper for you. 2. Our friends 
live in the city of Vienna. 3. The shoemaker has sent you a 
pair of shoes. 4. I have bought three barrels of flour and a 
hundred pounds of coffee. 5. The kingdom of Prussia is larger 
than the kingdoms of Saxony and Bavaria. 6. We were in 
the city of Dresden in the month of June. 1. The city of Dres- 
den is rich and very beautiful. 8. This man says he has a new- 
kind of paper. 9. Will you give me a glass of water? 10. 
Will you not take a glass of wine? 11. I have already drank 
a glass of wine. 12. We remained only a few days, and did 
not see much. 13. On the sixteenth of August we were in the 
city of Cologne. 



-« 3 *9 <» » » +» ■ 



LESSON LX. Cecticm LX. 

PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 

1. The following prepositions are construed with the geni 
tive; namel ", 



PREPOSITIONS. 



221 



STnjlatt or ft a tt, instead; 

21 u jj er | a Us outside of, without; 

2) i e f f e i t (3), on this side ; 

§ a I b, § a I b e n or l) a I b e r, on ac- 
count (oi ) ; 

3 n n e r I) a I b, inside, within ; 

3 cnf eit ($), beyond, on the other 
side; 

$ r a f t, by virtue of j 

8 a it t/ according to ; 

D bertyctlb, above; 

11 m — to t X I e H/ for the sake of ; 



It n g e a d) t e t , notwithstanding j 

Unterfyctlb, below; 

llnfern, unn>eit/ not far from, 

near ; 
^ermiiteift, mittelfr, by mean* 

of; 
3$ e r m o g e, by dint of; 
2Ba§r enb, during; 
2£ e g e rt, on account of; 
£ang<3, along; 
%XQ§, in spite of; 
3 u f 1 g e, according to. 



In German grammars the list is sometimes found as follows \ 

<Steljen mil bem ©eniti t>, 
Dber cwf bie $rage, tr> e f f e n ? — 



1)0(1) ift fyter nid^t &u sergeffen, 
£)a§ bet biefen I e J t e n 1) r c i, 
5(uc§ ber 2) a i i 9 rid)ttg feu 



UntweiU mittelfb fraft unb ttafyrenb, 
£aut, sermbge, tmgead)tet, 
Dberfyalb unb unterfyalb, 
3nner^aX6 unb augerfyalb, 
£)te6feit, jenfeit, Ijalben, ttegen, 
©tail, and) lang3, sufolge, trog, 

2. 2 a n g 3 and t r o % may be used also with the dative • 

£ang3 bem ©ejlabe (or be3 ©ejrabeS) Along the shore of the ocean. 
be$ 2D?eere3.— ©♦ 

£ro$ meiner 5lufftd)t, metnem fc&ctrfett In spite of- my inspection, my clos<; 
<oud)en nod) Jl'oftbarfeUen, nod) ge=* scrutiny still valuables, still sc* 
f)eime <Sd)dj?e. — ©♦ cret treasures (are concealed). 

3 u f o I g e preceding the noun, takes the genitive ; following it the 
dative : 

Sufctge be$ S3efer)Xs3 (bem 33efef)Ie §u* In conformity to the order I shall 
folge) bletbe i$ §ier* (L. 38. 1. c.) remain here. 

3. Sntlang, before a noun, also requires the genitive; 
after a noun, the accusative : 

9kufd)e Slug ba3 £§al entlang. — ©♦ Rustle river along the vale. 
2Bir fatten ben ganjen Sag geiagt txiX* We had hunted all day along the 
lang be3 2Balbgebirge$. — ©♦ woody mountains. 

4. ipctlb, tjalfcen or ^ alB e r must follow the noun; un* 
g e a ct) t e t and ft e g e n may precede or follow it : 

fi\d)t be£ SBetf^ieX^ fyalben, fonbern ber Not on account of the example, but 
3>flid)t wegen fell man in ber ©efell^ on account of duty should one 
fd)aft pfltd) fein. be po^te in society. 



LESSON LX. 



5. The geniti ^e is placed between it m and ft t II e tt t 

Urn fcme^ frreimbeS n>tHen tyat cr e3 On his friend's account he has done 
gctfjatu it. 

G. £ & 1 6 e n, it> e g e n and tt) i II e n are often compounded 
whh pronouns, t being substituted for the final r, or added after n: 

$Mne t ttegert (instead of metne r ttegen), for my sake ; 
(Seine t fyalbtn (instead of feiite r fyalben), for his sake ; 
Urn beffentttriEen (instead of urn beffenttnllen), for the sake of whom 

or which. 

T. 31 tt fl a 1 1 may be divided ; ft a 1 1 taking its original char- 
acter as a noun : 

(Sr btent an fetne3 $ater$ <Statt (or He serves in his father's stead (or 
anftcttt fetneS $ater3). 'instead of his father). 

8. SB e g e n, preceded by $ o n, was formerly employed as a 
substantive ; hence certain expressions like the following still 
occur : 

33 o n SRedjtS tt> e g en* On account of justice (right), 

©e&t 0le$enf$aft d o n tt) e (J e n be$ Give account of (in reference to) the 
jjergoffnen SBluteS. — <£♦ spilled blood. 



23etj>iele* 



Examples. 



Sftcm mug bte Sugenb urn u)rer fef&ft One must love virtue for its own 

tDtflen Uefcen, ober fie ganj aufgeben* sake, or give it up (renounce it) 

— ©♦ entirely. 

SnbienS ttegen $atte man bte fpanifdjen For the sake of India the Spanish 

fidnber ent^olfert. — ©♦ territories had been depopulated. 

Sflttteljl feineS SSeiftonbeS fefcte ic^ e^ By means of his assistance I accom- 

burd). plished it. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



5lntana,en, to arrive; 

3lu*fufyren, to accomplish; 

5lu§erf)alb, outside of; 
Der 23efer>i'r -e3, pi. -e, command ; 

33cgret'fcn, to comprehend, 350; 

Dcnnod), notwithstanding; 

DieffeitS, on this side; 
Die Dunfelfycit, -, the darkness ; 
Die greunbfcfyaft, -, pi. -en, friend- 
ship ; 

£alben, fjatber, on account of; 

Snnei fyalb, \* ithin ; 



3enfett3, on the other side$ 

^dng^i along; 

Dbevfyalb, above; 
Die $efl, -, pi. -en, the pestilence 

§)rdd)ttg, magnificent; 
Der Sftfyctn, -e$, the Rhine; 

£ro|, in spite of; 
DaS lifer, -3, pi. -, the shore; 

Um-nnflen, for the sake of; 

Unfern, near, not far from; 

Una.ea.d)tct, notwithstanding* 

ttttiertyaib, below. 



PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 



223 



Hmt>ett T near, not far from; 

Sfrrmttteljif by means of; 

Serntoge, by dint of; 
£)er S>erjianb', -ed, understanding; 
Dei SBarmbrutmen, -d, pi. -, the 
warm-spring ; 

Exercise 120. 



Die SBarnungr -» pi- -ctt, warning; 
SSegen, on account of; 
353 insert, to rage ; 
Bufolge, according to; 
Burucf fefyren, to retuxm. 



Slufgafce 120. 

]. SCrtflatt be3 #errn lam ber .Utencr. 2. 3nner^aI6 ber ©tabt 
imitate bie $e(i, unb <iujjerfjaft terfeften ber geinb. 3. 2Bad tie^^ 
feitd bed Seemed ttegt get)ort ju Eeutfdjlanb, mad Jcnfeit-3 tiegt, su 
granfreid). 4. ®ekn @te tym bad Oefo, ber greunbfdjafi ober ber 
Strmutij ^alfcen? 5. Sir (egelien langd ted Uferd, ttd t»tr an ber 
©tabt anlangten. 6. Sr erlrielt tie 33eIof)mntg fraft eined Sefel^Ied 
ber Stegterung. T. Dferljalb ber SBriicfe am tern Serge (tel)t etit 
priidjtiged @^(o^ 8, Srofc atter SSaromtgen sor ben ©efaljren 
wagte er ed bennod;. 9. Urn feirter Silent widen feJjrt er Balb ju* 
riicf. 10. Ungea&fcet ber Xunfelfceit i)ak id) i§rt erfannt. 11. Sr 
n?o!)nte wttertyalb ber ©tabt, imnmt ltd Stuffed. 12. Unfern bed 
Sheered lag bad ©d)Iog cwf ^otjem gelfen. 13. Unrocit ber ©taM 
ijl be,r Berii^mte SBarmfcrimnetu 14. Sr faun ed aermittetji feined 
®elbed auefutjren. 15. Tadfannfi In ttermoge beined SJerftanbed 
begreifen. 16. £tefer ^Rann ijt tta^renb [eined gan^en Set end nie 
tranl garcfen. IT. SBegen biefed Ungliidd ijl er fetjr Betriifct. 18* 
Bufolge biefed Sefeljled ift er gteid) atgereift. 



Exercise 121. 



[ufgafie 121. 



1. The servant came instead of m) friend. 2. The pestilence 
* raged within the entire state. 3. That which lies on this side 
of the river belongs to the rich merchants, and that which lies 
on the other side, to poor fishermen and day laborers. 4. Do 
you visit him on account of his money or his poverty? 5. Wo 
walked along the shore of the river. 6. He received this re- 
ward by virtue of a command of the king. 1. We saw the clack 
slouxis above the city. 8. In spite of his promise he did it 
nevertheless. 9. For the sake of his poor mother he still re- 
mained in his native country. 10. Notwithstanding the deep 
snow and the cold weather he went. 11. The building stands 
below the city, near the stream. 12, The oastle lay upon lofty 



224 



LESSON LXI. 



rocks, not far from the sea. 13. The celebrate! Warm-spring 
in Germany is near the Giant-Mountains. 14. He can accom- 
plish it by means of his friends. 15. He did it by means of 
his diligence. 16. He saw his friend during his journey. 17, 
He is so sad on account of the death of his friend. 18. Accord- 
ing to the officer's command he remained. 



LESSON LXI. 



Section LXI. 



ADJECTIVES WITH THE GENITIVE. 

1. The following adjectives are construed with, and usually 
follow, the genitive : 



55ebitrf tigr in want, wanting ; 
Bett{Jrt)'igt, necessitated, needing; 
33ettmJ3t'f conscious, aware ; 
(Eittgebettf, mindful; 
gatyig, capable; 
gro$, glad; (see 4.) 
©etoctrt'tg, expecting; 
® ett>iJ3 r , sure, certain ; 
$tmbi$, having knowledge; 
£ebtg, free, single, void; 
$fla&)ti$, powerful, master of; 
Duitt/ clear, rid; 



£$eil|aftig, participant, sharing; . 
UeBerbrujHg, tired, disgusted; 
^erbadjttg, suspected, suspicious ; 
SJerlttft'tg, deprived of, having lost; 
2B«rbtg, worthy; 
@ett>a$r', aware; 
®mo1)nt', accustomed; 
£o$, free, rid; 
TCbe, tired, weary ; 
'Bait, satiated ; 
Sh>ff, fall; 
SBert^, worthy. 



%tutt, bit einc grog e 2Bo$lt$at gteidj, 
o$ne SBebenfen, anne^men fimnen, 
(tub ber 2Bj>p$at felten tturbtg*— 

©o Mfl bu beineS (£ibe^ quitt 
xxiv, 8. 



People who can at once, without 
hesitation accept a great kind- 
ness are seldom worthy of the 
kindness. 
Gen. Thou shalt be clear from this thy 
oath, 



2>ie metjlen $erluj?e ftnb etneS QsrfctfceS Most losses are capable of a repa- 
fatytg* — ©♦ ration. 

2. The last seven adjectives of the above list are more com- 
monly used with the accusative : 

2)ett $imfHer tturb man nic^t gettcttjr* The artist is not perceived. (One 

— @, does not become aware of, etc.) 

£)er SBeutel tji Sell ©elb* The purse is full of money. 



ADJECTIVES WITH THE GENITIVE. 225 

£>a$ $euU(je ©efdjtedjf tx>irb biefett The present race will not get rid 

Scmtmer ntcijt Io3 + — ®. of this misfortune. 

!£)er akr fagt er (ei e3 mub\— <^. He, however, says he is tired of it. 

3. 33 o II, as employed by many writers, often takes, with 
the accusative, the ending e r : 

6te ir-ar geifimdj, cotter £alente.-@> She was witty, full of talent(s). 

4. %xo§ is often followed by ii 6 e r with the accusative ; 
g e vo t § , leer and & o II by $ o n, and f ii ^ i g by 3 u : 

Sie [tub in aUtm SBofen fd^ig. They are capable of every thing bad. 

5. @ cf) it t b t g with the genitive signifies guilty ; with the 
accusative, indebted: 

(£r tjt gen>ig feine$ $erfcred)ert£ fdjut* He is certainly not guilty of any 

big. crime. 

£Bte snet tjt er im3 tt>o§( f^ulbig ? How much is he probably indebted 

to (does he probably owe) us ? 

8. SSevttj with the genitive answers to worthy; with the 
accusative it denotes the value of a thing, and is rendered by 
worth : 

QEr tft after QEtyren roerr^. He is worthy of all honor. 

<£$ tjt feutett ©ro f^en "tt> crt^ ♦ It is not worth a groat. 

In referring to one's wealth, r t\§, instead of to txity, is employed: 
(Er tft §tmberi tctltfenb ®ttlben ret$* He is worth a hundred thousand 

florins. 

T. Formerly, in denoting the relation of magnitude, the gen- 
itive was used ; and it is thus, in a few expressions, still re* 
tained : 
(£2 tfi euteS £)aume3 bid. N It is a thumb's thick(ness). 

8. The genitive is often employed adverbially, in which case 
feminine nouns sometime take & : 

©efyeit <Sie be$ %fl r g e rt 3 ? Do you go in the morning ? 

$d) ijefje ;ftac(jt3 twt t»ie eirt a,equal* I go about at night as a tormented 
ter ©eifL— ©♦ spirit (goes). 

9. The genitive, denoting possession, frequently precedes 
the governing noun : 

*£>er $TItett SftctU> ber Suttgen The advice of the old, the action 
2 bat madjt $rumme$ grab*" of the young makes crooked 

straight. 
10* 



226 LESSON LXt. 

Qfy'dix tjt b e $ $? n b e 3 mttbcrc Jttar* Beautiful is the moon's milder 

tyett witter bcr Sterne bli£enbem clearness amid the darting glow 

©lam,; fcfton if* bci Sautter lteb* of the stars; beautiful is the 

Itdje §ofyett &n>ifd)en ber ©btyne feu** mother's lovely majesty amid the 

rtger $rctft. — ©♦ nery strength of her sons. 

'Siller £eute greunb tjt alter (To be) every body's friend is (to 

Rtutt ©etf." be) every body's fool. 

10. The genitive of personal pronouns, when used part- 
itively, precedes the governing word; as does also, frequently, 
that of nouns: 

£>er SIrbeiter in bem SBetnberge The laborers in the vineyard of 

beSjentgett, ber ben le^ten £of)n er* him who gives the last reward 

n)eilt, finb 2Bentge. are few. 

U n f e r (£tner mug son alien Sorten One of us (our race) must live upon 

Sftenfdjen leben. — £♦ all sorts of people 

Sill e r guten 2)inge finb breu <&$t\§* All good things are three. Adage, 

toort* ("Three is the charm.") 

11. The genitive is often used parti tively with omission of 
the governing word : 

©orgfemt bradjte bie Gutter be 3 tla* The mother carefully brought (some 

ren tyerrltcfyen 2B e t n e 3 ♦— ® ♦ of) the clear excellent wine. 

(£r tranf b e 3 SB a ct) e 3.—-1 Kings He drank of the brook, 
xvii. 6. 

12. Formerly the genitive was often used as the predicate 
after the verb f e i n, but now seldom occurs : 

j£)ie CErbe tjt bes £erm.-— 1 Cor. x. 26. The earth is the Lord's. 

®eot bem ^atfer tt>a3 beS flatferS tfL Render to Csesar the things that 

—Mark, xii. 17* are Caesar's. 

33 e i [p i e 1 e. Examples. 

Dtefe; 2ftenf$ tjt eineS £)iebjt<u)t3 fet)r This man is strongly suspected of 

»crbdd/ttg* theft. 

<£r ift fcine^ SftcmgeS aerlu'jttg erHcirt' His rank has been declared for* 

roorben. feited. 

2Der 2Irme, ber enter <Sct$e bebiirfttg The poor (man) who is destitute 

ift, tft geroofyn'lid) ctud) etner ctttbent of one thing is commonly also 

beno fl)tgt. (needy) in want of another. 

!£5c3 gabren£ gett)o^nt'r bin id) balb Accustomed to ride, I am soon tired 

be3 ®efyen3 mitbe. of walking, 

fcte SBelt i|l roller 22 iberfprucb.— ©♦ The world is full of contradiction (s). 



AftrfienVES WITH THE MSttttfc. 



22? 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



£a$ 2Tmt> -e8> pi. STemter, the office ; 

9ftmrtrcmen, to intrust-; 
£)er Siufent^aTt/ -ed, the sojourn; 

Sdnbtgen, to break, tame ; 

SBebitrf tigr in need of; 

SBeno't^tgt, in want of; 
SDic SBejttm'mung, -, pi. -en, destiny; 

93enmjjt'> conscious; 
SDer (ErfafV, -e$, the restitution ; 

<£rn>e-i'd)en, to soften; 

(Enug, eternal; 

$af)tg, capable; 

$rcl), glad; 

<£tner <Ba$z ffo$ iuerbcn, to en- 
joy a thing; 

©eroa^r'i aware; 
£)a3 ©lite!, -e£, 3, the fortune ; 
2)er £aber, -3, the quarrel ; 

©errfdjen, to rule ; 
•Die £iilfe, -> pi -n, the aid, help; 



Crafty by virtue of; 
Die tone, -, pi. -n, the crown; 

$Md)ttg, master Of ; 
Der <£inn, -e£, ph -e, the mind; 
Da3 ©taDtlefcen, -$» the- city life ; 
Die ©tdrfe, -, the strength ; 
Der£ell,-g, (the) Tell; 

UekrbriiBtCj, tired, weary, 
Die Uefcerei'tung, -, pi. -en, the pre* 
cipitancy ; 

Unetngebenf, unmindful ; 

Ungewc^nt, unaccustomed; 

Xlntreu, faithless ; 

25er(mn'cjen, to spend, p. 346; 

©erbticfy'tig, suspected; 

SJertyaf ten, to arrest ; 
Der ©eriujV, -c3, pi. ~e, the loss; 
Der SScrrcttf)', -e3# the treason; 

2Burbt$# worthy. 



Exercise 122. 



StitfgaBe 122, 



1. $&?m ia$ 5Pferb fetner ©tarfe Bemuft mare, fennte 9tiemanfc 
U fcanfcigeiu 2. 3d) fin »iel ©eft fdmlrig, afcer id) Bin femes SSer^ 
fcredjend fcfeulrig* 3- dr mttrte tiefe Strfeeit, fceren er ganj ungemoljnt 
tft, nid*t ttyurt, »emt er nidjt bea ©eftes Benotfyigt mare. 4. 3fl tern 
SBrutf r tttner -Spiilfe kfciirfttg, fo fragc ntd)t, t>B er fcerfeften mitrttg 
ifh 5. 9J?and)er 9Jienfd) serMngt fetrt 2ekn uneingefcenf fetner 
enrigen 33efttmmung. 6. ©otd)e Serlujlc fto etned firfafcea fafyig. 
%% $ein ©etjtger fann feints Set end frol) Mrbeft* 8* fir tft feiner 
Uefcereilung gema^r gettorten. 9. 3d) Bin ted SeknS unt> £err* 
fdjend mfoe. 10. Der tapfere SeU ift fret unt) feined Sinned miidj* 
tig. 11. fir $at meinen $ut anfiatt ked feimgen genommen. 12. 
SBa^rent) meined 2iufent{)altd in 3D. wurtre id) ted ©tafctlekn* ganj 
ukitrufug. 13. tftaft feiner Slutted »er$aftete er atle, tie er fces 
Serrate $ertad)tig tjielt. 14. Urn feined Saterd SBtflcn Wcift er in 
fcicfer ©telle, ofrgleid) er enter fcejfern mtetg ifl> 15. "£er $bntg 
urtt tie ^aifertn ted langen Jpafcerd mtoe, erroeidrten i^ren Garten 
©inn unt) marten entlid) grtete." 16. Dtefer Sag mar ed, urn 
tej[entmtllett er $rone utti Seben bem unti'eucn ©tiicfe ant3ertraute, 



228 lessor txih 

Exercise 123. SlufgaBe 123, 

1. We live on the other side of the city, 2. During the cold 
weather we remained at home. 3. He has taken your hat instead 
of his cap. 4. Those people are destitute of money, and in want 
of help. 5. They are not tired of walking, but they are weary 
of the road. 6. This is a labor to which I am entirely unac- 
customed^ and I do it only because I am in want of money, 
7. Men often become guilty of a crime because they owe much 
money. 8. I am sure of his innocence, for I know that he is 
not capable of such a crime. 9. Every industrious man who 
is mindful of his destiny does not become tired of his life. 10. 
Our friends live within the city. 11. During our sojourn in 
Berlin my friend became master of the language. 12. For his 
friend's sake he remains here, although he is tired of city life. 
13. He is conscious of his strength, sure of his aim, and certain 
of his cause. 14. This scholar is in want of money, and in need 
of good books, 15. By virtue of his office he has at length 
arrested the criminal. 16. He is not conscious of his strength, 
1 7. This young stranger is worthy of a better situation. 



-^fr~»- > ^ » f ^"° 



LESSON LXII. Cettion LXIL 

REFLEXIVE VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE. 

1. The following reflexive verbs require the genitive after 
the accusative (or dative) which they govern ; namely, 

2ftmtaj3ett, to usurp; (EntMo'ben, to dare ; ©etro'ftett, to be assured; 
Statesmen, to protect; Gimtf>red)'en, to forbear; £Riu)men, to boast of ; 
SBebte'nettr to avail; (Enttyaften, to abstain; (BfyamiXi, to be ashamed*, 
SBefUt'jjjett orkftet'jngen, (Etttfcfylct'gen, togetridof; UekrtjeBett, to boast; 

to endeavor; ©Mfm'nen, to remember; ttttterfariien, to attempt; 

SBege'ktt, to yield up ; ^xbax'mtn, to pity ; Unterttinben, to venture; 

SBemct^'ttgett, to seize; (£rfredj'ett, to presume; SSermeffett, to vaunt; 
SBemet'fterttf to master; (Sritt'netn, to recollect; £5erfe'l)en, to expect; 
Befcfyet'ben, to concede; (Erfuf)'tten, to dare ; SBeljren, to resist; 

^efuVnett, to consider; (grroetj'ten, to keep off; SBeigent, to decline; 
Stttau'gertt, to abstain ; greuen, to rejoice ; S5hmbem» to wonder at 



EEELEXIVE VE&BS WITH THE GENITIVE. 229 

Snt^alten is often followed by $ on; erBarmen ; freuen, (c^amen 
and munDern by it b e r 5 and iefmnen and freuen by an f : 

V 

Seiner feiltgett Qtifytn, D 2Ba^r^eit> Thy holy signs, Truth, deception 
§at ber £ktntg fid) cmgemafji* — i <S* has usurped. 

3$ benf be* 2lu§bra(J3 ttocfytedjt ix>o^X I still very well remember the ex- 
beg einft bu felkr bi^ son i^m Be* pre&sion that you once used in 
bienteft— £♦ reference to him. 

<Bie erimxert fid) il)re3 2}erfpre$en#. She remembers her promise. 

SDcr Ravfomcm rii^me fid) be3 $fhsg3* Let the peasant boast of the plow. 
— S* 

Obs. — S3 e § a I i e Itf "when referring to a thing learned^ answers to re* 
member : 
3c§ farm bie $lamtn nid)t ft e $ a 1 1 e tt, I ean not remember the names. 

2. ®3 getiifiet (or e3 lufiet), e£ jamtntvt, e3 reuet, 
e 3 1 lj nt ft dj, also take a genitive after the accusative : 

£o$nt ftdf£ ber 5S?lu^e $tt ^cffcn imb $tt Is it worth the trouble to hope and 

ftreBett ?— <Su to strive ? 

ttnb ba er ba3 2SoIf fa$ jammerte i^tt But when he saw the multitude^ 

beffelfceiu — Matt, ix, 36. he was moved with compassion 

on them. 

££ 3 geluftet is sometimes followed by net $ (L, 57. 2.) t 

SBenn bid) fo ttadj Jlam^fen liijlete. If you so longed for contests. 

TRANSITIVE VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE. 

3« The following transitive verbs govern the genitive of a 
thing, and the accusative of a person : 

-STttHagen, to accuse; SJertrofVen, to put off, Sntlaffen, to dismiss; 
23ele|)'ren, to instruct; feed with hope; (Sntfefc'eit, to displace, 

S3crau'^en f to bereave; SBurbigett; to deign; QtnDvty tten, to disuse; 

§3efd)itlb'igett, to accuse ; Qtitytn, to accuse ; £j}3ftn*ed)en, to acquit ; 

£ntf)e'ben, to exempt (See 4 next page.) UeBerfiil/rett/ to convict^ 

from; (SmtMn'ben, to release; '■ tte&efseu'gen, to con 

Smle'bigett, to set free (SntMo'pett, to uncover;* vince; 

5 i£a1jnen, to warn ; (Sntffet'ben, to divest; $erfid/ern, to assure, 

Heterfje'kn, to exempt (£mla'ben, to discharge; ascertain. 

SBeld) anbercr Simbe fUgt ba$ £er$ Of what other sin does your (the) 

bid) an? — ©♦ heart accuse you ? 

Qiiner grogeit gurdjt flnb mi* enttebtgt Of a great fear we are relieved. 



S30 L8S6GH tXXL 

SJUdjt $leumuii$3 &et$t Ucr. (Edfarn He who knows Don Csesar does not 

tote xiya fennt.- -<S>. accuse him of want of courage. 

<£r ufcer^eugte [te feiner Unfdjulb. He convinced them of his inno- 

cence. 

4. The last- eleven of the above list are often followed fey 
ton; mafynen by a n, and sertroftert by a u f t 

W\x ftnb »oti feiner Unfdvulb itkr^eugt. We are convinced of his innocence. 

!>er £ob entMft'Set son er^rsun^nsn Death releases from compulsory 

§)fltd)ten.-^S. J (compelled) duties. 

T>u$ SRantfcp ftrtc&t Io3 ba$ $eer ttott This manifesto releases the army 

beS ©e^or'jamS $ [listen.— 8. from the duties of obedience. 

VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 

5. The following verbs, though sometimes construed with 
the genitive, oftener take, except the last two, the accusative ; 

SBebiir'fett, to need; (£rtt)a§'it«t# to mention; SSergeffen, to forget; 

S3egef)'ren, to desire; ©ente'§en, to enjoy; SBafyren, to preserve ; 
18 raudjen, to need ; ©eroafy'ren, to perceive ; 2Ba§rne$men, to pe$> 

€ntl)ef)'ren, to lack; 9)ffegen* to take care of; ceive; 

<£ntrcttf)'en, to dispense (Shorten, to spare ; Gsrmcm'geut, to lack 

with; Skrfefy'len, to miss; 

<£r Bcbarf be3 ©elbe§ (of baS ©elb). He needs (is in need of) money. 

€rtt)tu)nte er ber (or tie) Sacfye ? Did he mention the matter ? 

©d)one ben (or be3) &rmen. Spare the poor man. 

*£r faun biefe (or biefer) <Sadjen leid)t He can easily do without (lack) 
ftttfcetyreiu these things. 

6. 21 § t £ n and n> a r t c n govern the genitive or accusative : 
Sd) a^te it)n (or feiner). I regard (esteem) him. 

With a u ft ft dj t e n signifies to pay attention to> to observe ; and Mat* 
Xtxit with an f, to wait for; 

S$ ctct)te ftuf ba3 tt)a3 er fagt* I attend to what he is sayirg, 

©te nurten auf unS. They are waiting for us. 

1. fatten governs the genitive, or is follewed by the &o 
cusative with a it f : 

2Bir barren betner (or auf bid))* We wait for (depend on) thee. 

8. ©-cDenlen (of b e n I e n) governs the genitive, or is Cal- 
low ed bj the accusative with a n : 

©ebenSe metner (or an mi$)» Think of (remember) me. 



VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 



231 



9. £ a cfc e n, f p o 1 1 e it and fatten govern the genitive, or 
are followed by the accusative with it b e r : 

3d) fpotte ifj'rer {or fiber fie). I mock (deride) them. 

<E$ finb nid)t Me frei, tie i&rer tf etten They are not all free who deride 
fpotten. — ©. their chains. 

10. Many other verbs and adjectives were formerly followed 
by the genitive, some of which are still retained : 

£ie perben £unger3. They are dying of hunger. 

©ie finb be* $Pretfc3 einig. They are agreed as to the price. 

$)icr tjt mcirte^ 33leikn3 nidjt. Here is not my Abiding-place. 

tylcrn fyai i()n be3 £anbe$ serroiefen. He has been banished from the 

country. 
Verbs governing the genitive, when used passively, take the imper- 
sonal form : 
Reiner roirb nod) gebadjt. You are still remembered. 



Setfpief e. 



Examples. 



(Sdjtime bid) nidjt ber ©pctrfamfett* Be not ashamed of frugality. 
Wlzfyx aU j.e, t)ebt ifyn ka$ ©lucf, benft More than ever, does the man of 



feiner alien greunbe berSfjvenmann. 

— o. 



honor, if prosperity elevates him, 
think of (remember) his friends. 



£>er greunbe ttnrb nid)t me|r gebadjt'. The (your) friends are no longer 

remembered. 
We could have dispensed with his 

company. 
O, spare me. 



— <b. 
Sffiir fatten feiner ©efeE'fcfraft entfceJj'' 

ren fonnen. 
D fd)onet me in ! — 8. 



©enie'BC be<3 £eben3, after mil (Eljren. Enjoy (the) life, but with honor. 

SBenn id) feine3 53etra'gen^ and) o>c* Even if I would be silent concern- 

fdjrcei'gen tooUttt mug id) feme SRe* ing his behavior, I must blame 

ben tabeln. his talk* 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SBerau'fcett, to rob; 
^Die (Erfyal rung,-, the preservation; 

(Erin'nern, to remind; 

QErrodl) ; nen, to mention ; 

Qeben'fcn, to think of, p. 346 ; 

£erl', harsh, bitter; 
£)er $ampf, -e£, pi. Jtampfe, contest; 

5laum, scarcely; 
f £er JTbrper, -o, pi. -, the body; 
:I>er Summer, -3, the grief; 

SPflecjen, to take care of, nurse; 
ill, to spare ; 



£)te Scele, -vpl. -tt, the soul; 
2)ie S>org,e> -, pi. -n, the care; 

Sorgfaltig, careful; 
Die ©rtjare, -, pi. -n, the sphere; 

©Vctten, to deride; 
£)er £cb, -ev, the death; 
2)ie SSereb'Img, -, pi. -en, the in 
provemenr, ennoblement; 

2UvfcI)'len, to miss; 
t)tx 2Becj)fel, -4, jil. -, vicissitude; 
"Die SBiegd -, pi. -n, the cradle; 
1 Die 2Bur$e* -, pi. -tt, the seaAouing. 



232 



LESSON LXlh 



Exercise 124. 



SlufgaBe 124. 



L g$ (L. 28. 9.) fdjont ier ^rteg au§ (§ 156. 2. A.) ttldjt fce* 
Ainbleittd in t>er SBiege* 2* £)er $ranfe ^erga§ feiner ©djmerjttt, 
t>er Srauembe feiner Summers, Me Sttmuif) i|rer ©orgetu 3* 
Wlan&jtv Sftenfdj pflegt fo fotgfalttg fetnes ^iirpers, i>a§ er feiner 
©eele faum gebenfh 4. 3tjr filrc^tet fcer S^are gu tterfeljlen, bie 
eutes (Setftes witrbig tft* 5. ©entejje bes 2e6en3, after gefcenfe aucfj 
iDes £ot>e3, 6* Die grenben ber Srbe bebtirfen ber SBiirje be$ tjer* 
ften 2Ged)fet^ ju i^rer Sr^altung unb Sereblung* 7* SSer be$ Un^ 
glMtdjen rtid)t fdjont, fonbetn beffelften (potten lann, ber serbient, 
ba$ man cmcfy feiner im Ungliid sergeffe* .8* 3$w$ Sreunbes mx* 
tet nod) ein fdjfoerer Stamps 9* ©e3 jlimigs mnrbe l)eute gar nid)t 
ewii^nt 10* Sr erinnert ffd) ber ®iite btefes grembetu 



Exercise 125. 



2lufgafte 125. 



1. He often thinks of thee, but them he has forgotten. 2. 
Among others, he mentioned his cousin. 3. Do not forget the 
poor, while you are enjoying so many pleasures. 4. He who 
ridicules the poor shows a bad heart. 5. Never forget the love 
and kindness of those who instructed you in your youth. 6* 
Your friend does not need your assistance. 7. We should for- 
get our sorrows and remember our joys. 8. He spares the 
guilty and punishes the innocent. 9. The matter was not men* 
tioned. 10. He has taken care of his sick friend. 11. The 
good man does not forget his friends. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



Sfttflagen, to accuse ; 
SfafdjitXMgen, to accuse; 
Stoefenbr present; 
$u$enMt(?Hcf), instantly; 
33eflet'§en, to be studious of; 
Bege'kn, to renounce, p. 348; 
SBe^at'ten- to retain, remember ; 
S3ereit§'f already; 
SBefdjufbtgen, to accuse; 
23qit$'tigett, to convict; 
(Stttblojft'f destitute; 
(Sntye'fcett, to exempt from ; 350 ; 
(Enrte'btgen, to release ; 
(£utfd)lct'0ett, to divest, p. 354; 



(StBar'men, to pity; 

(Srfla'rett, to declare; 
£>te geffef, -, pi. -it, the chain; 
£)ie gretforedjumj, -, pi. -en, the a©* 

quittal ; 
2)er ©ebcmfe, -nS, pi. -n, thought; 

®ef$tt>ei # gettf to pass over ia 
silence, p. 354; 

3ebod)', however; 
£)er Verier, -3, pi -, the prison; 
Die £attbftra§e, -, pi. -n, highway; 
£)a$ Wxtttl, -$, pi. -, the means ; 
£)er Sflafyt -eS, the counsel, advice; 
£>et fRaui, -e«3, the robbery; 



VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE. 233 



£>er D?a!t$er, -3, pi. -, the robber; 
IRut)men, tD boast o; ; 
©djamett (jtdj), to be ashamed; 

2He %'hat, -, pi -en, the deed; 



Uekrfiilj'rem to convict; 
23ielmef)r, rather ; 
SSortg, last ; 
SBthbiaett, to vouchsafe. 



ExEh^isB 126. ' Stufga&e 126. 

1, @ie ertmtem fid) root)! (§ 151.) no&j be* jungen 3Jlanne3, 
tcr tm wigen 34 re &"** 3taufce$ angeflagt mar. 2. Sr tx>ar Be^ 
fcfcuibigt dnen reic^en Ste^antler auf ber Sanbftrajje feineS ®elbe3 
BcrauBi an IjaBen. 3. 9Jtcm fonnte it)n iebod) itefes SerBredjenS ntdjt 
«Berfu|ren. 4. Sr ^atte fid) Beretty alter ipoffmmg enter greifpre^ 
d)ung BegeBen uriD fid) &e3 ©et^anfen^ entfdtfagen, ate unfdjulbig er^ 
fldrt ju fterben. 5. Scr fftidter jebod) entl)oB itjn alter Sorge. 6* 
9iad)bem er ben StngeHagten aufgeforbert tjatte, gutes 9Kutlje3 #x 
fetn unb fldj afle3 Summers gu entfdjfogen, erflarte er: 3$ Bin bet 
ttotten SOIetnung, taf man biefen jxtngen SRann nid}t be3 9iauBe3 
Beaiicfytigen fann. 7. £enn nid)t 3eber, ber ftdj be3 33etteln3 fdjami 
unb alter SBittet entBKp ift, ttirb em Lanier. 8. 3d) ttitt feined 
guten 33etragen3 gefdjftetgen, benn er Ijat fid) immer eine3 orbentli^ 
^en SeBenS Befttffen. 9. 3d) ertnnere eu^ aBer ber Stjaten tm tejj* 
ten $riege, beren er fid) mit 9ied)t riiljmen fann. 10. greuet eudj 
fetner gretfpredjung unb tttirbtget ttjn enrer greunbfdjafh 11. ©pot* 
tet (einer md;t, meit er tm Verier mar, fonbern erBarmet end) sietmetjt 
fetner unb gebenlet fetner Setben. 12. Seber, ber feiner ladjt, fd)iime 
ftcB feiner eigenen 23etragen3. 13. Side Slnmefenben freitfett fid) bie^ 
[er 9toe,unb man enttebigte augenBlMid) ben 2Ingefd)uMgten fetner 
geffeln. 14. 3d) form mid) biefer Seute erinnem, aBer id) lann tfjre 
Vlamtn nidjt Be^alten. 15. Sr [rente fid) be$ flugen States unb 
ging $tnau$ unb BegaB fid) an bie StrBeit. 

Exercise 127. StufgaBe 127. 

1. The old soldier boasts of his valiant deeds, 2. Do you 
remember the promise that you gave me? 3. 1 do not remem- 
ber that I gave you a promise. 4. Can you remember all 
the long words that you have found in this book ? 5. Have 
you accused any one of this crime % 6. Who has robbed the 
traveler of his money % 7. He has been convinced of his er- 
ror, but convicted of no crime. 8. The tyrant avails himself 



2&4 LESSON LXIH. 

of his pot.ei 9. An honest man would be ashamed of such 
an action. 10. Do you remember the old man whom we met 
in the city? 11. Do you remember the old gentleman with 
whom we traveled from Berlin to Bremen? 12. Yes, I still 
remember him. 13. It is difficult for' those who have a bad 
memory to remember the rules of a language. 14. Are you 
of the opinion that he is guilty of this crime? 15. 1 remem- 
ber the man who accused your servant of robbery. 1G. We 
rejoice to leave the country of the tyrant. 17. Our enemies 
have robbed us of our money, but they can not rob us of our 
hoi or. 18. The happy parents greatly (fefyr) rejoiced to see 
the^r lost child again. 19. He remembers still the happy days 
when he w T cnt to school with these children. 



■ ^} i «-»- ^> » o (^ 



LESSON LXIIL Section LXIII. 

ADJECTIVES WITH THE DATIVE. 

1. The dative is governed by many adjectives, and is then 
usually rendered by our objective preceded by to or for; some- 
times by other prepositions. The dative generally precedes 
the adjective by which it is governed : 

(£3 tft ben Sftenfcfyen leister &u fdjmet* It is easier for man to flatter than 

d)elrt aU in toktu— 9L to praise. 

SBefy 1 £>em, ber ju ber 2Ba$r$eit ge$t Woe to him who comes to the truth 

buret) @d)ittb; fie tturb tt)m mramer* through guilt, it can never be a 

mci)x erfteulict) fetn. — ©♦ source of pleasure to him. 

<Ev i|l miv crtnnerltd). I can remember it. 

(£g tft mir inwcvgejSHd), I can not forget it. 

*2Be!j) bem armen Dpfer, ttemt berfetk "Woe to (woe is) the poor victim, if 

SJttmb ber baS ©efej? gaB, cmcl) ba$ the same mouth that gave the 

Urt^eil ftrtcfjt." law also pronounces the sentence. 

SBptyt Dem, ber frei turn ©cfyulb tmb Happy he (well to him) who, free 

gefyle bmal)tt bie ftnbltd) rente from guilt and error, preserves 

Steele. — 3. his soul pure as a child. 

2. The dati ve is often substituted for a possessive pronoun, 
or for the gen'tive of a noun j 



ADJECTIVES WITH THE GENITIVE. 235 

Ktf rofLnt In ber §affe £etm unb My helmet and my shield are rust- 

<Sdulb (for meirt §elm k.). — ^* i n g i Q tne hail. 

2>cr ©ott be* <Siege3 ttanbeit \i)x %vlx The god of victory walks at her 

<3cite. — ©♦ side. 

3. The first and second persons of pronouns, in the dative, 
ate often used to indicate, in an indefinite manner, some special 
participation or sympathy on the part of the individuals which 
they represent : 

(Ee jtnbSudj oar trofctge $amera'ben. They are right insolent fellows (for 

— ©♦ you). 

"DantatS ttaren nnr bir fe§r ser* At that time we were very joyous. 

4. The dative, with Bet, Son and 311, often denotes one's 
place of residence or business, and is rendered by our possess- 
ive preceded by at, from or to : 

£)er Mantel tft Betm <Sl)nciber. The cloak is at the tailor's. 

(Sr ge^t \ u fctncm Dyeim. He is going to his uncle's, 

©ie fommt » it t^rer Xante. She is coming /rowi her aunt's. 

The dative of the personal pronouns is used in the same manner; 
usually rendered by the possessive case of our pronoun followed by a 
noun: 

©ie ttcfynen Bet un3. They bVe at our house. 

SSir get)en [;cutc ju t§m. We are going to his house to-day. 

S3 e i f p i e 1 e. Examples. 

Unb crregt tf>m ben ©rhnnt in ber And excites rage (anger) in his 

<3eele. — S-§. soul. 

(£r tfr bet feinem ^reunbe. He is at his friend's. 

SSotynen <Ste bet tfynen? Do you live at their house ? 

Set bctnen grcimben erge'ben unb bet^ Be devoted to thy friends and ohlig- 

nen getnben gefaTltg. ing to thy enemies, 

3eber redjtltdje Sfftamt ifi bent ©uten Every upright man is inclined to 

geneigt' unb bem 33ofen afcgeneigt. (the) good, and disinclined to 

(the) evil. 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



2)er (E(;araf'ter, -3, pi. -te're, the 
character; 

©anfbar, thankful, grateful; 
%\i tV>ilf tH)cit f -, pi. -en, falsehood; 

©efa&r'Ud), dangerous; 



DaS ©egenrtyetl, -8, the contrary , 
C^ct)or'fam f obedient; 

2>a3©cmutl/, -e$, pi. -er, mind 
©(ci.b, like, equal; 
® nab uj, gracious; 



236 



LESSOV LXIII. 



£>et ©runbfafc, -e8, pi. -fafce, the 

principle; 
Die |>eucl)elei,-, pi. -en, hyrocrisy; 
£>te JUirdgtn, -, pi. -nen, the queen; 

£afterf)aft, wicked, vicious; 

£afitg, burdensome, trouble- 
some ; 

£ebig, free; 

2kb, dear, pleasant ; 
£)a$ L*ob, -e3. the praise; 
SDie ^etgung,, ■, pi. -en, inclination ; 
£)er Sfrmg, -e3, pi. danger the rank; 

©djmetdjelfyctft, flattering ; 

Exercise 128. 



Der (Sonne nfcktn, -3, the sunshine; 
"Da 3 Spanten, -3, (the) Spain ; 
£)er &fcel, -3, the blame ; 

Ueberle'gem superior ; 

Unertrcigltc^,- intolerable ; 

Untert(>in (adj.), subject ; 

Itoergejjlid), memorable; e$ ift 
mir — , I can never forget ; 

©erelj'ren, to honor; 

S3er$agt', hateful; 
£)a$ 2£ad)3tf)um, -e<3, vegetation • 

SBertty, worth, dear ; 

SBibrig, repugnant; 

Stufgabe 128. 



1. Sin gutes $inb ift fetnen Sftern getyorfam unb banfbar. 2* 
£>as 3^au^ert ift t>enen fe()r xinangene^m, bie eg nid)t gemol)nt finb* 
3. 3JUr ift e3 lieb, ba§ id) bir in biefer (&a&)t niifcltdj fein fann. 4. 
2)a£ SQBetter mar un3 geftern feljr giinftig, aber t)eute ift es ganj ba$ 
®egentt)etl. 5. ®ut ju werben ift bem Saftetfyaften fctytoer, benn er 
bleibt gett>5t)nlt(^ feinen Sfteigungen treu. 6. 2)em ^onigreid) @pa^ 
nien ift granfreid) itberlegen. T. 23a$ it)n euc^ mibrig mad)t, madjt 
it)n mir frertty. 8. 3^ Ktb biefer tonight nid)t unterffyan. 9* 
23iele3, tt>a3 un3 ntdjt gefat)rfid) ift, ift una bod) feljr laftig. 10. 3nt 
Stange ift er feinem SSruber gletd), im £f)arafter feinem 35ater a^rt^ 
lid). 11. SfticfytS ift mir fo fel)r mljafyt als galfd$eit unb £eud)elei. 
12. £u bifi be3 Setter totg, ®ott fei ber ©eele gnaDig. 13. 2Bcu* 
rum ift biefer afte 33ud) unfern gremtben fo lieb? 14. 23 ift mir 
nnttergejjlttf), nrie fe|r id) bir t)erBunben Un. 15. T)en ©ofraten 
mar bas Sob i$re$ $erel)tten gelb^errn fet)r fdjmeidjelljaft. 16. %\z* 
fer Slufettttyalt ift it)m faft unertragHd) gemorben. 17. £abel unb 
£ob finb Um ©emiit^e bes 9ftenfd)en, tt>a$ ©turm unb @onnenfd)ein 
bem 2Bad)3tt)um finb. 18. 3$ ftot)ne bei meinem DnfeL 



Exercise 129. 



Slufgabe 129. 



1. These things may be useful and agreeable to you, but 
they are very unpleasant to me, and injurious to my friends, 
2. Every good man is grateful to his benefactors. 3. This 
weather is very unfavorable for us. 4. It is very unpleasant 
to me that I am obliged to remain here so long. 5. Every 
good citizen is obedient to the just laws of his country. 6. 



VERBS WITH THE DATIVE. 23 7 

Will this happy country ever be subject to a king ? 7. What 
is more hateful to a good man than hypocrisy % 8. I am much 
obliged to you that you have been useful to my friends in this 
matter. 9. The soldiers were with blind obedience devoted to 
their leader. 10. This house is very similar to the one in which 
you live. 11. No country in the world is superior to ours. 

12. The few friends that this man has are very dear to him. 

13. Many things are burdensome which are not dangerous to 
v s. 14. Those are to be called good, who remain true to their 
principles. 15. The praise of a good man is very flattering to 
us. 16. He Is gracious to those who are obedient to him. 17. 
Is he at his brother's 1 



LESSON LXIV. Union LXIV. 

VERBS WITH THE DATIVE. 

1. The dative is governed : 

a. By transitive verbs, which in addition to the direct ob- 
ject (in the accusative), require the object to be specified, for 
or in relation to which an action is performed. In this use, 
as also with ge^oren, fd)etnen and tt>etd)en, the dative is rendered 
by our objective with a preposition expressed or implied : 

(£r ttct^m e$ itjnen tt>e$* He took it away from them, 

liefer $ut gefort mir* This hat belongs to me. 

b. Many German verbs are called intransitive, and govern 
the dative, whose English equivalents are transitive, and gov* 
ern the objective ; as, cmtoorten, Befe^lert, Begegnen, banlett, tie;* ' 
not, broken, fdj(en, fludjen, folgen, frozen, frommett, ge&iifjren 
gefatten, gdjotcljen, geretdjen, gletdjen, $elfen, ^u&tgen, totmett, mans 
geln, naljen, mxfym, pajfett, ratten, fdjaben, fcfenteidjeln, trauen, tro^ 
P-tn, mtytn, gtemen: 

SBer btr fd)meidjelt, fdjabet bit, i&etm He who flatters you injures you, 
bu i^m (jlau&fL if you believe him. 

e. With the impersonally used verbs e3 afjnet, e£ fc audit, e3 



288 LESSON LXTV. 

fciinft, c3 elelt, e3 grant, e3 fcfcrolnbelt, e3 traumt, as also e$ folrt, 
e£ ift, the dative is frequently rendered by our nominative : 

£>5rct, n>a$ mtr getraumt tyat. — Gen. Hear what I have dreamed (hear, 
arsxvii. 6. I pray you, this dream which I 

have dreamed). 

<£. Intransitive verbs, governing the dative, take, when usee 
passively, the impersonal form; the logical subject being put 
in the dative, in which position (like the impersonal verbs, 
see c.) it is rendered by the nominative : 

(E3 tturbe ifjm (or tf)m ttmrbe) gefefyabet* He was injured. 

2)emto<$ rourbe bem 2lbet metyr gefdmtei* Still, to the nobility, there was ac- 

cfyett, aU nnrfiidjer ©influjj gegektu corded more of flattery than of 

— €>♦ actual influence. 

2. Some verbs govern the dative or the accusative, accord 
ing to their signification : 

2Bir riefen ttynen, after jie prten un3 We called them (to them) but they 

tttd)t. did not hear us. 

SBir riefen fie in ba$ §au$. We called them into the house. 

3. $ oft en is generally used with a dative and accusative; 
sometimes, however, with two accusatives : 

"(£$ rcitrbe $reu)ett mtr imb £ekn It would cost me freedom and life, 
fcjlen." 

23 e i f p i e I e* Examples. 

(£nblt$ gelcmg' e3 i()m fetnem Sreunbe Finally he succeeded in opening 

bie Stagert ju offnen. his friend's eyes. 

£rcmc ntd)t jebem SD^cnfc^ctir imb am Trust not every one, and least of 

aflewentgfien benjemgen, bie bir all those who flatter thee. 

fd)meict)eln. 

£>ie (Lmafy'mmg etneS greunbeS gilt The admonition of a friend is cf 

mir uiel, unb t$ folge ifyr gem. much value to me and I follow 

it gladly. 

VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



ST&fagen, to renounce ; 
9(tu)angen, to adhere to ; 
Shujefyoreitr to belong; 
2lntroerten, to answer; 
SSetfommen, to get at; 
SBetftcfyen, to assist; 
fBeijlimmen, to assent toj 



SSefXa'gcn (ftdj), to complain; 
33euvoi)nen, to be present at, I* 

take part in ; 
£)anfcn, to thank; 
@beimuu)tg, noble; 
(Eigenftmitg, obstinate; 
5Die Beinbfeiigfeitr pL -en, hostility 



"VERBS WITH THE DATIVE. 



239 



d$e$cr$nt, tc obey; 

$eifen, to help, avail; 
£cr £er^co., -eo, pi. -e, the duke; 
©as fvmereffe, -$, pi. -n, interest; 
Der l*on>e, -n, pi. -,t, the lion; 

3Radttig f powerful, mighty ; 
£>cr 9JUnifter, --$, pi -, minister; 

Deffnett/ to. open; 



■DaS Defterreidj, -3, (the) Austria; 

9>affcrii to fit; 

©dpbftti to injure; 

$ctpflii)'ien, to bind (by oath), 
DaS ^)crl)aben, -*, the design; 

33 c I) ll)un, to hurt; 

SSiberjprccfy'ctt, to contradict; 

Bugeljoven, to belong to. 



Exercise 130. 



SHufgafce 130, 



1. 3^ tonfe Sfyntn, t>ap @ie mir getjctfen Ijafaiu 2* Sr muite 
mir gemip fdjaten, menu er mir kifommen fonnte. 3* liefer ipitt 
pajjt mir fceffer ate jener. 4. 20a$ fe^It S^n, marum miterjpre* 
d)en @ie 3§rem greunte ? 5* S3 fe^It mir ntc^ts ; oB itym etma3 
fe^ten mag, roeifi id) ntdjt* 6. £er $na6e fyat fid) in ten ginger 
gefdmitten. 7. ©an^ Defierreid) lag tern etelmiitfyigen Ungarn gu 
gujjen. 8* Eiefem eigenftnntgen SDienfdjen ift gar nid)t gu l)elfen* 
9. £$ fyut mir feijr left, t?a^ er fid? mel) getf)an Ijat. 10, Xem $i^ 
nig, melcfcer ftd) fiber tiefe gemtfeiigfeit Beflagte, murk geantmortet, 
"ter staffer ^a6e ter ©ol&aten gu ss>iel 5 er miiffe fetnen guten greuru 
ten tamtt tyclfen." ll.fintUd) gelang e3 tern 9Kimfter, tern ^bnig 
liter fein mat)re3 3ntereffe ** e Slugen 3U open. 12. SBenn in alten 
3eiten ein SKadjiiger tern anient feint) mar, fo fagte er temfelben a&. 
13. 2lu£ alien Dvten, tie iljm ange^orten, fammelte tiefer -madtige 
iperr tie Scanner, tie tf)m ant)ingen. 14. 9lad)fcem fie feinem S5or^ 
$abtn Beigeflimmt fyattin, serpfltcfeteten fte fid) il)m tetgufiefyen unt 
tern ^riege freigumoljnen. 15. ©old) ein mad)tiger £err mar Jpetn* 
rid) ter Some, £ergog son 23aiern, meld)em gro£e Siinter gugefyorten 
unt Saufente son itriegcm get)ord)ten. 



Exercise 131. 



JtufgaJc 131. 



1, Why do you not answer him % 2. I have answered him, 
but he has not answered me. 3. Do they wish to injure their 
friends ? 4. They have assisted us, and we will assist them. 
5. Will you not help this boy ? he has hurt himself. 6. The 
soldiers that adhered to him, bound themselves to take part 
in the war. 7. He calls them obstinate, because they will not 
assent to his desigr. 8. Do you know what ails those people ? 
9. This hat fits me better than the other one. 10. He does 



240 



LESSON LXIV. 



not contradict them, though he thinks that they are wrong, 
11. How was the king answered when he complained of certain 
hostilities % 12. Is it my duty to obey such men, and to help 
them? 13. Have you succeeded in finding them? 14. Do 
you succeed in learning Spanish % 



33eij>We, 

fk in fleuter Wlann f etrt grogeS 9)ferb; 
ein fur^er 2lrm, ein Xange^ S'cfymert, 
mug eut3 bem anbern tyelfen.— U. 

(Etne grew, ber bie (Srfulmng i$rer 
$flid)ten am 4?er$en Itegt, jeigt ifyre 
Siefce sum ©crimen mcfyt in einem 
foji&aren ^njuge, fonbern in ber p* 
ten (£tnrid)tung i§re^ #au$i»efen$* 



Examples. 

A small man, a large horse, a shoi t 
arm, a long sword must help each 
other (i. e, ought to go together). 

A woman who has at heart the 
fulfillment of her duties, shows 
her love of the beautiful, not in 
costly apparel, but in the appro- 
priate arrangement of her house- 
hold. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



£)er SBefetyk -e$, pi. -e, the com- 
mand, order; 
£)te $L$t, -, pi. -en, the outlawry ; 

2)ro^en, to threaten ; 
g)a§ (Etenb, -e$» -3, the misery ; 

(Srlie'gen, to succumb, p. 350 ; 

©rtttti'fen, to show, render, 358 ; 
S)ie gamt'lie, -, pi. -n, the family ; 

glucfyen, to curse ; 

gitgen (ftc^), to submit; 

©ebufy'ren, to be due; 

®efal'len, to please, p. 348; 

®leid)en, to resemble, be like ; 

©enii'gen, to suffice, satisfy; 
£>er Qtr^Ottyut, -e<3, pi. -Jjitie, the 
ducal hat ; 



£>er $rieg$jug, -e$, pi. -juge f cam- 
paign ; 
Siftipngen, to fail, miscarry; 

<&ti)tDtbtn, to wave; 
£)er ©toljf -e6, the pride ; 

£rauen, to confide in; 

Xxo§tru to defy ; 

Uebel toolkit, to bear a grudge; 

Ueoer&ie'§en# to invade, p. 358 ; 
$)ct$ SSerlcm'gen, -3, the demand; 
£>te $ermmft', -, the reason ; 

SBiberjte'^ettf to resist, p. 356; 

SBiberftre'ben, to oppose, to 
struggle against; 

Bitrnen, to be angry ; 

Busor'fommen, to anticipate. 



Exercise 132, 



Stufga&e 132. 



1* 2)oc^ bie $rone eines $atfer$ fdjfoefcte i^m immer sor Slugetu 
%, ©er jperjog^ut geniigte ifym nid)h 3, Sr trautc feiner etgnen 
,Rrafi nnt> iro£te tern jtaijer, 4. 2)et deafer forfcerte \\)w cwf ftcfc 
fcinen 33efet)len git fitgen, tmb tro^te itjm mit ser 2lc£)t 5. S>rt) 
tent •'petgoge, fcer einem Somen gild}, gait toefcer 33enutnft nod) guter 
Stall) > 6. 3t)m geftel nur feine eigne Sftetnung, unt> er wtoerftvebte 
Sent Serlangen, toem Jtatfer eine S()re gu erwetfen, tie fcemfelfrcn 



INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 241 

geBu^rte* 7*-3Dcr $aifer, ber bun -^perjoge l&on felt tcmger 3elt 
xibel ttotlte unb t$m megen feines ©toljes jurnte, fam tf)m gusor unb 
iibergog t$n mil JMeg* 8. 3Der ^rieg^ug mtfjlang bm ^aifer 
ni$t 9* £er iperjog fonnte ber feinbltdjen SSJlad)t ntd)t fctoerjktjen 
unb erlag bem ^aifer in ber @d)lad)t 10, Sr mufjte nad!) @nglanb 
flie&en unb nur fcine gamilie unb einige greunbe folgten tym. 11. 
£ier entfagte er jeber ^offnung unb finite bem ©tolje, afe ber Ur* 
fadje feined @lenbs* 

Exercise 133. SlufgaBe 133, 

1. Threaten them as you will, they will never succumb to 
you. 2. Will no one render them this service? 3. These men 
will not submit to his commands. 4. What does not please 
them is of no value to them. 5. All that he has heard and 
seen does not satisfy him. 6. They will not be able to resist so 
powerful an enemy. 7. The laws of nature are opposed in 
vain, there no resistance avails. 8. Why do you defy him 1 
9. He is angry at his friends. 10. Those people will injure 
you if you confide in them. 11. He anticipated us in every 
thing. 12. So great an honor is due to no man. 13. These 
children resemble their parents. 14. He struggled against the 
demand, but could not resist his enemy. 15. Your advice is 
of no value to him, for he can not renounce his evil company. 



LESSON LXV. Cation LXV. 

INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 

1. 21 n b e r, with words denoting time, signifies next, following 
and never refers, like other, to indefinite past time : 

<£r gef)t itkrmorgen unb roir ben an* He goes the day after to-morrow 

bern £ag. and we the next day. 

£)er Warn, ber ttor einigen Sagen $ter The man that was here the othei 

roar, tft frcmf* day (a few days ago) is sick. 

a. Instead of a n b e r ; as the equivalent of other, in denot- 
ing something additional, the adverb n d) is employed : 

SRimm nod) einen SKatttel, einer ijt Take another cloak (in addition to 
ntdjt genua,. this), one is not enough. 

11 



$42 tESSow „xv. 

fJHmm etnen mtbcm Mantel, biefex tfr Take another cioak (instead (f this), 
$a biiurt* this is too thin. 

b. The adverb anteer3, otherwise, differently, else, sometimes 

occurs in the signification of namely, that is : 

fBer etnen 3\m& Witt, mug aud) bie He who wishes a result must also 
$Uttel ftoHen, roemi er cmberS tter* wish for the means, that is, if 
(lanbtg ift. — ®el. (provided) he is judicious. 

2. 23 £ i £> e, unlike flofA, may refer to objects taken separately ; 
with ntd)i or f eirt, 6 e i D e often answers to neither, not either : 

Corge fiir bie ©efunbfyeit beine^ £ei* Take care of the health of (thy) 

£e3 nnb beiner Seele# akr aerjartle body and soul, but do not pam- 

Mbe mcfyt. — $e. per either. 

S£BeIdje3 son ben kiben 3)ferben wirb Which one of the two (both) hor*.ss 

er fan fen ? will he buy ? 

(£r ttrirb feine$ »on Mben faufen. He will buy neither of them. 

3. In referring to two things, different in kind, the neuter 
form singular, b e i t> e 3, is often employed : 

<£r T;attc ben Oiing unb bie $eber, after He had the ring and the pen, but 

cr fyat fceibeS serloren. he has lost both. 

©ie irren ftdj, benn I>eibe3 liegt auf You mistake (yourself), for both arc 

fetnem SLifc^e* (each is) lying on his table. 

4. S t to a 3 is sometimes used before nouns in the singular, 
and before adjectives, in the signification of a little, somewhat: 

©te Bracken tym et»a3 Sftitdj* They brought him a little milk. 

£>ie Sage roerben etttaS lander. The days are getting somewhat 

longer. 

5. @ &tto CL& signifies such a thing, something of the kind: 

3$$atte ja)on fo (Sttt>a$ getyort, e$e er I had (already) heard something of 
(mfanu the kind before he arrived. 

6. 3*3 £ttk denotes great indefiniteness ; it is often fol- 
lowed by the indefinite article, and generally rendered any, 
some, whatever : 

(Ex $atte tmmer irgenb eine unangeneV He always had some disagreeable 
me SBctfcrtyett auf ber Sippe.— $fce. truth on his lips (lip). 

7. S3 i e t and toenig, in referring to a quantity, or to a 
number taken collectively, are not usually inflected, except when 
preceded by the definite article, or an adjective pronoun : 

$>er SitnaUng $at fein steles (Mb nnb The youth has lost his large sum 
feine fctelen greunbe tterloren. of money and his many friends. 

2Bic »iel VLf)t ift e$ ? What o'clock is it ? 

In the last, example the phrase, in German as ii Englisli, is abbre- 



INDEFINITE NUMERALS, - 243 

riated ; the full form being, rote iriel aitf bzx Vfyx tj! e3 ? bow much of 
the clock (o'clock) is it ? The time may be reckoned either from a pre- 
ceding or a following hour : 

5$ ijt ein SBieriel nacfy bret; or It is a quarter past three; or 

(£3 tfi ein ^BierteX auf suer* It is a quarter on (or toward) four. 

S3 fel)lt ein SHertel an (or 1) i$) ac^t> it lacks a quarter to eight ; or 

&$ tft bret £>tertel auf acf)L It is § toward B (*. <?., it lacks J of 8). 

After fyctlB, a it f is omitted; as, e3 ift § al^ a$t, it is half (toward) 
eight; i. e., half past seven. 

8. 55 i e 1 and xo e n i g are declined, when they refer to a 

L amber taken as individuals ; or substantively to persons; and, 

often, when preceded in the singular by prepositions : 

DStele SSftenfdjen trinlen feittett SBein. ' Many men drink no wine. 
SSenige 9J?ctifd)en ftnb ganj pfrtebem Few men are perfectly contented, 

9. When declined in the singular, except as above speci- 
fied, 9 i e ( and \v e nig signify many or few kinds: 

(£r trinft ml 2£etn, akr nidjt soielen He drinks much wine, but not ma* 
2Betn. ny kinds of wine. 

10. The superlative of tt i e I (meift) is often preceded by 

the definite article, or a possessive pronoun : 

ttnfere nteiften £etben ftnb bie golge Most of our sufferings are the con- 
imferer etanen gefyler* sequence of our own errors. 

11. 211 le, alt, in some phrases, is equivalent to all (/one, 
spent, wasted; with i e tfc e it does not require translation : 
<&nn ©etb tft a lie. His money is all gone. 

SI 1 1 e SB e i b e tt>aren franf ♦ Both (of them) were sick. 

12. The plural of all, applied to divisions of time, answers 

to every. The English all, in such phrases as all day, all th# 

week, etc, is rendered by g anj : 

(£r gel)t a He Xa$t* He goes every day (all days). 

(£r war btn ga n§ e n Xa$ $ier* He was here all (the whole) day 

23 e i f p i e 1 e ♦ Examples. 

£)te 2Ba^rI)eit tmb bie Sfofe ftnb fel)r (The) truth and the rose are very 

frfjim, aber beibe ^aben £>ornen. beautiful, but both ha\e thorns. 

3d) ^abe u)n me mit irgenb etnem I have never offended him by a 

2Borte belet'btgt. single word. 

Suroetlen effen bie $enntl)tere ttM)t$ Sometimes the reindeer ea* noth- 

anb er e3 aU SftooS* ing but (else than) moss. 

l£rtn'nere bid) ber tttelen 2Bo$lt$atett Remember the many good deeds 

bie id) btr ertt)te$, (favors) that I showed you. 

5luf fold)e 5lrt toiU id) nidjt rctdj I do not wish to become rich in 

fterbett. such a manner. 

ttnfer SlU e $ ift auf bem S^teL Our all is at stake 



244 



LESSON LXV. 



VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 



SHIerkfr, very best; 

SluSgebett, to spend, p. 348; 

S3eibe, both; 
t)tx SSefarttt'te, -tt, pi. -tt, the ac- 
quaintance; 

(Ehuger, some (§ 52. 3) ; • 

(EutfteHett, to appear; 
2)er (Empo'rer, -6, pi. -, the rebel; 

(Srbettr to inherit; 
$>te glafd)e, -, pi. -n, flask, bottle ; 



£)te gotge, -, pi. -tt) consequence; 
£)er ©ei^alS, -fc$, pi. -§dife, the 

miser; 
£)a3$fotm, (the) Mayence; 
£)a$ SRamt^etm, -3, (the) Manheim , 

@d)Untm f bad, sad ; 
£)er tleberrod, -e$, pi. -rode, the 

overcoat ; 
2)a$3£erpu'gett, -<3, the pleasure; 
$orfej?ett, to place before. 



Exercise 134. 



Slufgabe 134. 



1. gr $etjjt atteS a geinbe unb gmporer, ttaS nid?t mil if)m tjt. 
2. 33erfte^ft Du atte3, fta3 id) bir [age? 3. 2Clr atte a woflen mit 
Mr gefyen. 4* Der Sauer fe|te una ben atlerbeftcn d 2Cein sor. 
5. Sr mifl nod) Slepfel unD eine cmfcere g(afd)e SBein. 6. SBofleu 
@te 23itd)er laufen? 7. 3d) $ctbe fdjon meld)e & gefauft, afcer id) mill 
nod) einige faufen. 8. 33eibe3 eretgnete fid) unb Me fd)Ummen gol^ 
gen son Severn ftellten ft* ein. 9. £a3 Setter ift fd)on etoad 
(or ein menig) falter getoorben. 10. SBer ^atte [o ttm$ geglautt ? 
11. $ennft bu irgenb 3^ntanben ; ber fo tttva$ tf)un miirse? 12. gin 
3eber c bon feinen greunben t)at tfyn serfaffen. 13. gr tjat iriel 
28etn getrunfen unb ftiel ®elt> bafiir au^gegeten. 14. IDaS siete 
©ell), ba<3 er erftte, fjat er au^gegefcen far ^n fcteljn 2£ein, ben et 
getrunfen ^at. 15. Seme nicfet auf einmal 3Stete$, fonbem ttteL 
16. 3^ben Sag, ^tn @ie gu un3 fommen motten, moflen nrir 2l'tte mit 
S^nen fpajieren getjeru 11. Xiefer Uefcerrod ift gu flein, ne^men 
©te i!>n meg nriD bringen ©ie mir einen anbern (see 1. a.). 



Exercise 135. 



2Iufga£e 135. 



1. The weather is so cold that I must have two overcoats, 
bring me another one (see 1. a.). 2. As soon as my money was 
all gone I had no longer any friends, 3. Which of these car- 
riages shall you buy ? 4. I shall not buy either of them, for 
neither of them pleases me. 5. If you wait another day we 
will all go with you. 6. Do you wish to buy any thing more? 



a. § 53. S; b. L. 39. 4; c. L. 43, 3; d. L. 32. 7. 



PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 24-5 

1. I have a little money and he has a great deal. 8. Many of 
my acquaintances reside in this city. 9. The few friends that 
he has are more powerful than his many enemies. 10. Who 
has more enemies and fewer friends, more trouble and less 
pleasure than the miser? 11. I understand all that you say 
and can read all the letters that you have written. 12. I would 
like to buy a few pears and a few more apples. 13. To-mor- 
row I shall go to Manheim, and the next day to Mayence. 14. 
Every book that I have is in this room. 15. Do you wish to 
buy some more horses? 16. The weather is becoming some- 
what warmer. 



LESSON LXV1. Cectian LXVI. 

PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE DATIVE. 
1. 21 U<3, § 112. 

$ n 3 ben 9htgen, au $ bem Sinne. Out of sight, out of mind. 

(Er ifr an $ Berlin. He is from Berlin. 

3$ t^at e^ttu^ ®el)orfam gegen <Sie. I did it through obedience to yon. 

21 it 3 Btogem $erbacf)t foft man ntdjt On mere suspicion one should not 

fo fyanbeln. act thus. 

T)a$ ftefjt man an 3 bem SBrtefe. One sees that by the letter. 

9(n 3 biefem ®ntnbe BletBt er. For this reason he remains. 

(£r lief a n$ alien ifrd'ften. He ran with all his might. 

2Ba3 ifr an 3 tfym geroorben? What has become o/him? 

SlnS grennben roerben oft gehtbe, Friends often become enemies, ene- 

feltener grennbe a n 3 getnben. mies less frequently friends, 

©r ifyat eNu^ freien ©tiicf etu He did it of his own accord. 

3te roiffen roeber au$ nod) ein. They are entirely at a loss. 

(Er r)at jtcb au^ bem StanBe gema$t. He has run away ("cut sticks"). 

(5(3 ijr a n 3 mtt ifmt. It is all over with him. 

(Er fdjrieB feinem SBrnber Dun ^iin^ He wrote to his brother from Mu 

cfyen an 3. nich. 

2. 2Juf)er, § 112. 2. 

9tt$t3 if! fo feljr nnfer etgen, at$ nnfere Nothing is so much (so completely) 
©ebanfen; aHeS $nbere ifr anger our own as our thoughts; all 
nn$. — 2B. else is without (exterior to) us. 

2Ber mdjt$ HeBen tt>ttl alS fettt (EBen* He who will love nothing but his 
Mlb, t)at anger ftdj ntcfjtS Jtt He* 5 own image, has except (beside) 
Ben. — ?R. himself, nothing to love. 

(Er roar an g e r ftd) ttor SBnttj. He was 6mcfe himself with rage. 

3d) bin gam anger Sltfjem. I am entirely out of breath. 

©on biefer ©etDofjn^ett ge^t er ntdjt aB From this custom he varies not, e&> 
anger roenn gi :mbe Bet ifjm ftnb. cept when strangers are with him 



246 



LESSON LXVI. 



3. Set, 

Sdj Bo Be Fein ©elj Bet mtr. 

Ste ftanben B e i mir. 

Sty ic|e ntvi)t gem bet ber £ampe. 

S3 e t biefer Arbeit geroimtt man mcljt 

(£3 i)1 nidjt <Sitte Bet unS. 

(Er iji nti)t B e t ©imten. 

SB e i after fehter JTlugbeit lagt 

pr STr)or^eit ^erletten* 
$8 e t bem ftarfen SBinbe griff ba< 

fdjnell urn ftd). 
<£r serBot e3 Bet £eBen§flrafe. 
2Bir fyradjett Bet iB,m ettt. 
3d) Iteg mid) Bei ttym amnelben. 
SBemt Semanb Befdietben Bleibt, ntd)t 

Betm £obe, fonbern Beim £abel, 

ifl cr c3.— $t. 



er ftd) 



getter 



§ 112. 3. 

I have no money with (about) me. 
They stood near (by) me. 
I do not like to read by the lamp. 
One earns (gains) but little at tLia 

work. 
It is not the custom among (with) us. 
He is not in his senses. 
With ail his prudence he allows 

himself to be seduced into folly. 
In consequence of the high wind the 

fire spread rapidly. 
He forbade it on pain of death. 
We called on him. 
I had myself announced to him. 
If one remains modest, not under 

praise, but under censure, then 

he (really) is so. 



4. &xitc$t§tn f § 112. 5. 



<£,$> if! flug vmb fu^tt bem mwermeibli* 
d)cn ilebel entgegen &ugef;en.-®. 

£)em alien Sftamte, ber in jroanjig 
(Sd)lad)ten bem Zob ftir @ie e n t g e=* 
g e n gmg, fallt e3 i)-od) §art fid) fo 
entfernt ut fefyen. — <S. . 



It is prudent and bold to go toward 
(to meet) unavoidable evil. 

But, to the old man who in twenty 
battles encountered (went to meet) 
c . th for you, it seems hard to 
fL himself thus removed. 



5. ©egeniiter, § 12. 6. 

£>ie JtircBe |M)t btm alien ©d/bffe ge* The church stands opposite to (ovei 
g c n it b -e r. against) the old castle. 

Sometimes g,e.g.e n precedes, and itB e r follows the dative : 



It stands opposite the castle, 
it, 112. 7. 

He plays with the children. 

She writes with the pen. 

He took it by force. 

Through God we shall do valiantly. 

At the break of the day he set out. 



(£3 )M)t gcgen bem ®d)loffe itber. 

6. a 

(Er fpiclt mit btn JUnbern. 

(Sue fdjreibt mit ber geber* 

(Er na!un e^ mit ©emalt. 

SW'it ©ott roollen rrdr Xfyattn t^un. 
Ps. lx. 12. 

SKi'i SageeanBrud) rcijre er aB. 

SHejeS SMlb fyat grofje 5lef)nltd)feit mit This picture has (bears") a great re- 
born Srembett. semblance to the stranger. 

(Er grbeitete mit mir. He worked (in company) with me. 

02 r llieb bei mir. He remained with (by or near) me. 

i£r tt>'ad)te mit mir Bei t^m Strati* He watched with me (helped me 
fen. watch) ?m;<'A the sick man. 

3d) lemte m i t tfynt. I learned with him (when he did) 

7. After mit compounded with verbs, a pronoun is often re 
quired to be supplied in translation : 
SBrino/c bu fommjt. . Bring him with you, if you come, 



SBen 



nut. 



If you go, I will go with you. 



PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 



24T 



sJBcittt er ge$t r a,et;e tdj rait* 
SBoto ©ie untf md)t mttne^meu? 
£)a3 geljt ntd)t ^u nttt red)tett ©ing,etu 
34 will e3 mit ti)m aufite^mett. 
(£r jiel mit gleijj ttteber. 
a 1 ? it nidjtett. 

<5te mad)t aUc SDEoben mit* 
"(£tle mit 2£?Ue." 



If lie goes I shall go wzf/i Mm. 

Will you not take us along? 

There is some witchcraft in it. 

I do not fear him. 

He fell down intentionally. 

By no means. 

She follows all the fashions. 

" Slow and sure" (hasten slowly)* 



8. 9ta$, § 112. 8. 



€r \\t bar <£rj!e it a $ 3§nett. 

<Ste fd)t(ften it a dj bem 2Ir L tf e. 

©ie burtfet tt a d) Ohtljm. 

(£r erfuttbigte ftcf> n a d) i§ttett. 

2(13 i$tt bee" STmtcS 3>fl£c^te» balb bar* 
auf n a d) grattfreid) rtefett, fanbtc 
er mid) rt a d) 9R§ctme\ — <3. 

S'ie fd)o|7ert nadjiljra. 

£Bte fd)ieit er tt a d) beu £a'ttbett !— £♦ 

9?a$ ber SBefdjreiomtg mujij e$ fet*r 
f$Sit fein. 



He is the first &/£er you. 

They sent for (after) the physician. 

She thirsts for fame. 

He enquired after (for, about) them. 

As the duties of his office soon af- 
terward called him to France, he 
sent me to Rheims. 

They shot at him. 

How he looks (peers) at my hands! 

According to the description it 
must be very beautiful. 



£r icmbelt tt a $ feitter UeBerjeupttg. He acts in accordance with his cor.« 

viction. 
Cole fyielt tndjt tt a d) SSotetu She does not play by note(s). 

©te jetdmet tta d) ber 5^atur. She draws from nature. 

2)a3 gletfd) fd)mecft n a ct) SttneMtt. The meat tastes of onions. 

9. $1 a&) frequently follows the word that it governs : 

©enter SIMmmg tt a d) §aBett roir gattj According to his opinion we are 

red)!. perfectly right. 

Sd) fewte fie nitr bent Harnett tt a <§♦ I only know them 5y name. 

10. Db is generally construed with the dative; sometimes 
with the genitive : 



&$> tji metrt ©eijt ber imgefe$ett o o 

beittem ©djeitel fdjtocot. — 5>. 
<£ie eljrtett i$tt o b feitie^ SJhtt§c$. 

11. 

Sett bent Sage, b& id? bk Jlittber 
Israel au$ Sle^^tett fiujrte. 

(Er ift f e 1 1 eittem 3al)re frattf. 

3d) t)abe u)tt feit je§n Saljrett ttid)t 
gefetyen. 



It is ray spirit that, unseen, hovers 
over (the crown of) thy head. 

They honored him on account of 
his courage. 

©ett. 

Since the time that I brought up the 
children of Israel out of Egypt. 

He has been sick /or (since) a year. 

I have not seen him for (these) tea 
years. 



12. Son. 



(&r tt^m ka$ %$ufy s o tt km £tfdje. 
S) o ni §errtt fommt, \x\\§ bte 3uricjc 

rebett foil. — Ps. xvi. ]. 
Wlan fommt o o tt einem Drtc roorauf 

(wo man), tmb a it 3 ciuem Dvte 

jpotitt trait ftd) oefutbeU 



He took the book from the table. 
The answer of the tongue is /row 

the Lord. 
One comes from- a place in (at N 

which, and out of a place ea 

which one is. 



248 



LESSON LXVI. 



<Sr fommt Hn bem Wlaxftt. 

3d) fommt au$ ber £tyer> 

SBaS fagt man Don i^m ? 

®ie fut^en »on £en& imb £ieoe. — U. 

'Diefer &ifd) ift Don (£&en$ol&* 

Unb Ixegert fid) taufen Don i|m. 

<£r ifl ein Sdvjoebe Don ©eburt. 

S5 o n toem ift MefeS ©emdlbe ? 

(£r todr Don SBonne trunfen. 

CSr ijt flein Don $erfon. 

£;u foil ft ©ott, beinen £errn, lieoen 

Don gan^em £>ersen. 
vfr lebt Don fetnen CStnfitnften* 
&$> ging gut Don ©tatten 
£r tfyat e3 d o n freien <StMen. 
33Iau Don £lugen, fteig Don ©time. 
1)er (£m 1 in golbnen £ocfen, ber $(nbre 

grau Don £aar. — U. 



He comes from the market;. 

I come from (out of) the opera. 

What is said of him? 

They sing of spring-time and love, 

This table is (made) of ebony. 

And were baptized of (by) him. 

He is a Swede by birth. 

By whom is this painting ? 

He was intoxicated with delight. 

He is small in stature. 

Thou sb alt love the Lord thy God, 

with all thy heart. 
He lives on his income. 
It went off (succeeded) well. 
He did it of his own accord. 
Blue-eyed (blue of), white-browed. 
The one in golden locks, the other 

gray-haired. 



13. 3«- 



(Sr ge^i i u SDtorfte, i u £ifd)e. 

(Bit oetteln Don §am zu §au$. 

(£3 gereid)t iljm 3 u x (£Ijre. 

<5te jieljen tyn &ur £krcmtroortung. ■ 

3d) ge£e $ u meinem SSruber, 

<5r fag nod) $ u £ifd). 

©ie lagen iv)m i u gii^en. 

©ie jlanb tljm jur ©eite. 

<£r falj ein Sreffen jur See. 

2$ir famen jur rec|ten 3eit. 

(£r bient jri §ofe. 

@ie ift nod) %vl §aufe. L. 43. 2. 

t£r fauft £ud) in einem £Kocf. 

2)a3 fann sum Beroeife bienen. 

(£3 ill bir jiim SBefien gefd)e^en. 

£>u fyajr i^n^m lefcten 3M gefefjen* 

©ie ftaroen ju £aufenben. 

Sttan fctngt fte i u taufen. 

<£r reiji § u 2Baffer, id) $ w £anbe. 

©te reifen £ u $ferbe, id) j u gujj* 



He is going to market, to table. 

They beg from house to house. 

It redounds to his honor. 

They call him to account. 

I am going to my brother's. 

He was still sitting at table. 

They lay at his feet. 

She stood at his side. 

He saw an engagement at sea. 

We came at the right time. 

He serves at court. 

She is still at home. 

He buys cloth for a coat. 

That may serve for (as) a proof. 

It was done for your good. 

You have seen himybr the last time. 

They died by thousands. 

They are caught by (in) multitudes. 

He travels by water, I by land. 

They travel on horseback, I on foot. 



14. 3 H often occurs after a noun preceded by a U f or n Ct d)* 

CEr ging a u f ben gremben i u. He went up to the stranger. 

15. The dative with g u in connection with ft) etben, is often 
rendered by our nominative ; after rn&dCj en, by our objective: 

^on 9?atur Bejt^en toir leinen Seller, By nature we possess no fault that 



ur Sugenb, leine £ugenb, 
urn ge^ler fterben fonnte. 



ber nidjt 
bit nici)t 

SBier^ig 3afyre bauerte ein iltieg, ber 
ben SBeftfecr be$ golbreicfyen 9)eru 
$um armen Sftantte mac^te. — <S. 



might not become a virtue, (and) 
no virtue that might not become 
a fault. 
Forty years a war continued, which 
made the possess or of gold yield- 
ing Peru a poor man. 



PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 



249 



16. Idioms with ju and nacf)* 



2Jtott$ateS enbtid) ^u Stanbe $efira$U 

(£r mad)te fid) ben Umfranb $u 9?u£e. 

£>tefe £eute fallen baS Styrtge in Sftat^* 

£r null jur 2lber laffen. 

Sd tyabe ifm ju ©efidjte Mommen. 

(£r fonnte ntdjt $u 2Borte fommen. 

(£3 !am tfmi fefyr $u ©tatten* 

^Die £aare ftanben i§m p SBcrgc* 

Qtt fonnte »or £ad)en faum &u 2W)em 

fommetu 
3>tir Ifl ntdjt n>o§I W 3ftut$e* 
i 2)ay tjl nurfltd) kinase pm toft tter* 

ben* 
£)ie $remben logirten im 35Mrt$3$au$ 

utm Slbler. 
£)te £§ur if! ju, ba$ genjler auf. 
fe fjat ju sue! ju t$un* 
9?ur immer &u! 
©d&roerorotty unb £rcmrtgfett madjen bie 

©eele nad) unb nad) fcfylaffunb roeid^ 

mitt^tg* — 2B* 



It has finally been accomplished. 

He profited by the circumstance. 

These people take care of their own. 

He wishes to be bled. 

I have got a sight at (of) him. 

He could not make himself heard. 

It was very favorable to him. 

His hair stood on end. 

He could scarcely get his breath 

for laughing. 
I feel ill-at-ease. 
That is really almost enough to 

make one mad. 
The strangers lodged at the Eagle 

Hotel. 
The door is shut, the window ope,a : 
He has too much to do. 
Keep on ! go on ! 
Melancholy and sadness gradually 

(by degrees) make the soul re- 

miss and effeminate. 



4'i»l ' » 



LESSON LXVH. 



Cation LXVII. 



PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 

1. ©urdj* 

(£r gtng burdj ben SBalb* He went through the woods. 

fBfit ftnb nod) ntd)t burdj. We are not yet through. 

£!rm an ©emtg unb nod) armer burdj Poor in enjoyment, and still poorer 

ben ®enu§, toa$ fyctBen roir anber^ through enjoyment, what have 

aU §offmntgen? — $♦ we but hope(s) ? 

(£r me tnt, er tonne t§ bur $ ©elb au$* He thinks he can accomplish it 

rid)ten«. by (means of) money.. 

£ u r d) ntcfytS Be^eicpen bie SRenfdjett In nothing do men more (perfectly) 

meljr tfyren (£fjctrctfter aU bur $ ba§, indicate their character, than in 

toa$ fie ladjerlidj ftnben* — $♦ that which they call ridiculous. 

2. giir* 

E>cx mtr fitr fid) unb nidjt audj f it r He who lives only for himself, and 



$nbere leot, ijr nie ajucfltcr). 
3$ fityle roeber £ieoe nodj §ag fur 

thu 
3$ f e t) e Ujtt £a$ fur Sag. 
Sr §at ek Simmer fitr fid)' 
Sd? f>alte e3 fitr metne tyjlifyt. 
£>u Mft unfere Suflfedjt fitr unb fitr* 

— P*. xc. 1. 



not/or others also is never happy. 
I feel neither love nor hate for 

(toward) him. 
I see him day after (by) day. 
He has a room by (to) himself. 
I consider it (regard it as) my duty 
Thou hast been (art) our dweliingr 

place in all generations. 

11* 



25C 



LESSON LXVII. 



<£r fanfte fiir eaten ®ulben $affee 
5<t; fya&e e$ fiir meutikben gern. 
3d; bin nti)t bafitr. 



He bought a florin's worth of corTe© 
1 am extravagantly fond of it. 
I am not in favor of it. 



3. ©eg en. 



He is polite to (toward) them. 

He left us toward evening. 

They are united against me. 

Is no remedy known for {against') 
the bite of a mad dog? 

He sells it only for money. 

Life compared with eternity resem- 
bles the fleeting breath that es- 
capes the dying man. 

If I am to pledge myself to them, 
they must also do it to me. 



Sr tjr pfltdj gegen fte. 
Sr wlie^ tm* gegen STbenb. 
Bie finfc verounben g e g en mid). 
Betj3 man fein 9JUttel g e g en ben 23if 

eine£ tollen £uttbe3 ? 
(Sir ^erfauft e3 nur gegen (Mb. 
Da3 ikben gteidjt gegen bie (Enug=* 

hit, bem fdmellen $aufy ber bem 

(Btetbenbeu entfltel)t. — .ft. 
SBenn id) mid) gegen fie !oer^f{td)ten 

fell, fo miiffen. fte'S ' and) gegen 

mid).— <S* 

4. D I) tt e 

$idjt3 SBern)ttolIe3 ift o^ne Arbeit Nothing valuable is to be obtained 

gu erlangen. without labor. 

£) § ne tfyn tt)dre id) glucfltdj. But for him 1 should be happy. 

Dfyne ^s sometimes substituted for ctH: 
(£3 tft fein (£rbe o I) n e (al£) bu unb There is none to redeem it hut thee, 

id) nad) bir. — Ruth. iv. 4. and I after thee. 

5. Urn. 

£)e3 gan;,en ©aue3 SBauern fte§en um The peasants of the whole province 



'Dm Drt gefd)aart.— U* 
SBcijj erum bie @ad)e? 
£)er (£ngei be3 $errn iagert ftdj u m 

bie f)cr, bie tfyn fitrd)ten. 
C£r fommt um fimfUtyr* 
Urn xo'mid #§r (n>eld)e Beit) ge$t bie 

Sonne auf V 
SSerbicne id) ba$ nm bid) ? 
Wit ftel)t e$ um iljn? 
(£c tft u m jcl)it Saftre alter* 



stand gathered round the place. 

Does he know about (of) the affair ? 

The angel of the Lord encampetL 

round about them that fear him. 
He is coming at five o'clock. 
At what time (what o'clock) doe* 

the sun rise? 
Ho I deserve that from you? 
How stands (is) it with him! 
He is older by ten years. 



^ratter roar nod) in Bamorra um bin There still was mourning in Zamo- 



£otrbc$ gro]]en it'outg^.— §♦ 
Sr ftel fcinem Sreunbe um ben $>al3. 
II m fo (um befto) fceffer fiir un$. 
Bie Bcu ift um. 

fommt etnen &ag um ben anbern* 
5tc fommen tiner um ben anbern. 



ra/or the great king's death. 
He fell upon his friend's neck. 

So much the better for us. 
The time is up (past). 
He comes every other day. 
They come on alternate days. 



(£r l;.u fid) um ba$ $aterlanb serbtent He has earned the gratitude of hi 



..id;:. 
©r fprii)t n>ie e3 u)m um 1 3 |)erj tft. 
£€ banoclt ft$ nid)t u m iUeintgfetten* 

Sie laufetrum bie SBette* 



Umbie : 
might. 



country. 

He speaks as he thinks (feels). 

It is not a trifle that is under con- 
sideration. 

They are running for a (the) wager. 
I e tt e is often equivalent to e i f r ig zealously, with all one's 



PREPOSITIONS WiTfi THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 251 



6. Urn in compounds frequently marks loss or privation ; 

df fom urn fern ®elb* He lost his money. 

SRann fcracfyte tl)tt urn. He was destroyed. 

<Die gaitje 3ftar.nfd)aft fctnt urn* The whole crew perished. 

7. The accusative with u m is sometimes "best rendered by 
our nominative : 

(£■% tjt etn fojlltd)e3 Ding um bic ©e* The health is a precious thing (as 
funfc§eit» to the health it is, etc.). 



=*C^ ■* ' ft ^ ^- C » " ^>8* ' 



LESSON LXVIIL 



UttUm LXVIIL 



PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE, 



1. 21 n* 



<£r fte$t am genjler, an ber £pr* 

(Er fagt er fet Iran! am $erjcn(L. 20.4). 

(Er leijntc jtd) an tie 2Banb. 

Der £tfd) jlanb an ber 2Banb» 

3dj erfannte t§rt an ber Stimme* 

(Er nafym jte a it ber $anb. 

(Er letDet an itopfroelj. 

#m £oge ftc^t man u)n nie. 

(Er ifl re id) an £ off nana,. 

3d) tfjue e$ an fciner ©tatt, 

(Er jrarb an eater 2Bunbe. 

§1 n tfyn bad)te id) nid)t. 

Die ©tabt Uegt an bem gluffe* 

Der §ut t)dngt an bem $ageL 

(Er ge v t a n bte £pre. 

©djretOen @ie an u)n? 

®al>en <&k e$ an tyitafc? 

(Er ijr a n $e§n Sa^re att» 



He stands at the window, at the door. 

He says he is sick at (the) heart. 

He leaned against the wall. 

The table stood against the walL 

I recognized him by his voice. 

He took her by the hand. 

He suffers from headache. 

During the day one never sees him. 

He is rich in hope. 

I do it in his stead. 

He died of a wound. 

I did not think o/him. 

The city lies on the river. 

The hat hangs on the nail. 

He is going to the door. 

Are you writing to him? 

Did you deliver it to him ? 

He is about ten years old. 



2. Idioms ivith cttu 



(Er ift no$ am £efcen» 

(Er t)at e<3 fo an ber $rt* 

9JUr licgt ntd)t3 a n ber <£a$e» 

§1 n bcr <Bad)t ijr nid)t3» 

&r y-at (Efel a n Slllem. 

De? £unb Uegt an ber £>tte. 

Die $Rei y e.fommt morgen an mtd)> 

Dtt 9to v e iji an Synen; nein, fie i(l 

a u mir. 
Da# i|t ntdjt a n bem. 
(E$ tft a n bem, bag id) geljen mu$. 
(Et gtng i y nen a n bte $aub. 
(Er ijat eHn ben SWamt gebradjt. 
©on jefct an roerbe i$ fleiptg fern* 
(Er jlejt chtn an. 
€ie i»t)$nen ttefceu a x*. 



He is still alive. 

It is his way (custom). 

I care nothing about the mat*-*. 

The affair is of no consequence. 

He is disgusted with every thing. 

The dog is chained. 

It will come my turn to-raorrow. 

It is your turn j no, it is mine. L. 

46. 2. 
That is not true (is nothing in it). 
It is time for me to go. 
He assisted them. 
He has found a customer. 
From now on I will be diligent. 
He stands at the head* 
They live next door* 



LESSOH LXVin, 



3. SUf. 



(Er Befte^t bar auf* 

Bie ftnelt auf bim glitgeL 

3$ serlaffe mi$ auf Bie* 

(Er get)t a u f ben (ftetjt auf bem) Imgel* 

(Er ift auf ber §ocr)jeit* 

SBaS fanben Bie auf ber $o(H 

SBar er auf bem 8kE? 

(Er ift Bofe auf un$* 

%fy Ijore auf ba3 n>a$ er fagt* 

Bie ger)en auf ber SBtefe* 

(Er rooljnt auf bem Bcryiog* 

Stub fte auf bem Sanbe ? 

Sluf biefeSBeife get)t e3 rncrjh 

(Er fleibet ft<$ auf engltfcfye 5lrt* 

(Er ir>artete auf mid). 

^eii;eu Bie e$ mir auf einige Xage* 

©el)t er auf ben^arft? 

(Er tretbt bad £Hei) auf bie SBeibe* 

(Er tjr jloX^ auf fein ®elb, unb eifer* 

fitcf)rtg auf feme 9?acr)Barn. 
(Er pit »iet (grope <BtMt) auf fie* 
*£3 fofret auf fcierjig ®ulben* 
(E$ tiegt auf bem (er legt e$ auf ben) 



He insists ^^9o?^ it. 

She plays on the piano. 

I depend upon you. 

He goes cw (stands on) the hill 

He is at the wedding. 

What did you find at the post-office I 

Was he at the ball? 

He is angry at Us. 

I listen to what he says. 

They are walking in the meadow. 

He lives in the castle. 

Are they in the country. 

In this way it will not succeed. 

He dresses in the English fashioi*. 

He waited for me. 

Lend it to me for a few days. 

Is he going to market? 

He drives the cattle to the pasture. 

He is proud of his money, and jeal* 

ous of his neighbors. 
He thinks a great deal of them. 
It costs about forty florins. 
It lies (he lies it) on the table. 



4. 3n- 



(Er ift in bem ©arren* 

2Ba# I)at erje^t im Binne? 

(Er gerjt in bzn ©arten* 

'Bie jtnb in bem (Ecnjert* 

Bern ^ermogen fcejietyt i n ©runbjtMen* 

(Ertyatee in biefer 2Ibftd)t* 

Bie gei)en in bao (Eonjert* 

(Er jagte fie in bie giucfyt* 

(Er fyrang in bie £ot)e* 

(Er flaifcfyre in bie &dnbe* 

£)a£ fattt in bie Slugen. 

3<$ r)a£e tr)n in $erbacf)t* 

(Er lefct in ben £ag rjinein* 

(Er fcr/lug bie $rme i n einanber* 

Bie brangen t n t^rt fid) p er liar en* 

•DaS fann idj in ben %ob nicr)t leiben* 

(Bie famen tn 1 3 ©ebritnge, a£er er 

iegtefi^fiir ftein^$tttteL 
(Er fagte fte in 1 3 9tuge* 
(Er liegt i n ben lefcten Sugen* 
Bie liegen ftd) in bm £aaren* 
Bie rebete i n einem fort* 
(Er ret(te in after ^riit>e ab* 
<Er ijr nod) nid)t t m 3foinen baritfcer* 

(Er fagt, fte $a$e ftdj in ilm serlieot* 



He is m the garden* 

What has he in mind (on foot) now t 

He is going zwfo the garden. 

They are at the concert. 

His property consists of real estate. 

He did it with this intenticn. 

They go to the concert* 

He put them to flight. 

He sprang up. 

He clapped his hands. 

That attracts attention. 

I suspect him. 

He lives extravagantly. 

He folded his arms. 

They pressed him to declare himself. 

To that I have a mortal aversion. 

They were in a dilemma, but he 

interposed in their behalf. 
He looked sharply at them. 
He lies at the point of death. 
They are together hy the ears. 
She spoke without cessation. 
He started very early. 
He has not yet decided (is not clear* 

in reference to it. 
He says she has fallen in love will* 

him, 



FREFOSITIOHS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCtTSATim 25i 



€t( tteiben in ben erjlert £agen a~h* They will depart in a very ietf 

reifen> days. 

<£r ijr in ber lejten Sett fe^r traurig For some time past lie lias Does 

gen) e fen* very sad. 

<Sed)3 SBiJrtteitt ne^metf mi$ in $n* Six words claim my attention everj 

fprud) jeben &ctg. — CfcU day. 

&ie fvaben i^n in <Scfyu£ genommen* They have taken him under tbeii 

protection. 

5. Ue6et\ 



Die Scmtpe $anat iib er bem £ifc|e, 
C£r fa§ it b e r mir am £ifdje* 
<Ste ge§t u b e r bie 93rM e* 
£)a3 ift it b e r Sftenfcfyen 2*erm8geru 
Gr befommt SSrief it b e r S3rief* 
gaffer, bie <Sonne it ber euren Born 

nidjt untergeljen. — Eph. iv. 26* 
£ter it b e r §at er ntcfyt nad)gebad)"t* 
Unb toollen, ba§ mein fQolt meineS -Dk* 

men3 ijetge'ffe it b e r il;ren Xraumen, 

gleidjnne tfjre better meine$ 9£amen3 

sergagen it b er ben 33aaL-Jer. 23. 
It e b e r biefe tangtteiiige IRebe fcfyiief 

er ettu 
H e b e r ba§ <Sditmni§ f)aben eudj bie 

Ranter ha§ 9£e$ it b e r bie D^ren 

ge^ogen* — ®* 
5D^ofe^ aber jto$ itber biefe fftebe* 
>oie ijr bbfe it b e r mein £a$en. 
^o mir $eure rr>erben gericfytet itber 

biefer 3Bo§It^at* 
5ftan §at ttjn it b e r ber £fjat ertapipt 
(Er Ijatte fid) getrojtet it b e r 2tmnon.— 

2. Sam. xiii. 39.' . - 
£eute ub er adjt Sage fommt er* 
IReifen ©ie itber Bremen? 
11 e b e r ben ©ommer wctyrtt er anf 

bem £anbe* 
It e b e r furj ober tang fommt er an 

ben ®algen. 
Bet i§m ge^t bie IRebXit^feit fi B e r 

(Er fonnte e$ nidjt itber ba$ £er& 

bringen. 
©it finb it b e r Selb gegangen* 
it e b e r ben fauten $erl ! 
D, it b e r bie 23Iinben, bie ni$t fefjen 

ttJoXten ! — £♦ 



The lamp hangs over the table. 
He sat above me at the table. 
She is going across the bridge. 
That is beyond {above) human powe? 
He receives letter after (over) letter. 
Let not the sun go down upon 

your wrath, 
On this he has not reflected. 
Which think to cause my people 

to forget my name by their 

dreams, as their fathers have for* 

gotten my name for Baal. 
Under (during) this tedious speecb 

he fell asleep. 
During the delay the Spaniards 

have drawn the net over your 

ears. 
Then fled Moses at this saying. 
She is angry at my laughing. 
If we this day be examined of this 

good deed. — Acts, iv. 9. 
He has been caught in the act. 
He was comforted concerning Am* 

non. 
A week from to-day he is coming. 
Do you go by way of Bremen ? 
During (through) the summer he 

lives in the country. 
Sooner or later he will come to 

the gallows. 
With him honesty is prized above 

every thing else. 
He could not find it in his heart 

(make up his mind to it). 
They have walked into the country. 
0, the lazy fellow I 
(0,) shame on the blind that will 

not see I 



6. U titer* 



2Bir fafjen nnter bem SBaum. 
(£r fag n n t e r mir am £ifdje. 
2)a3 ijt unrer feiner Sitrbe. 
it nter biefer SBebingur.g time idj e$* 



We sat under the tree. 
He sat below me at the table. 
That is beneath his dignity. 
On this condition I will do it, 



254 



XBSSOtt LX1%> 



Hitter fetnat <So$nen fyaBe idj mtr et* 

uen ^oni-g enoat;lt. 
<2r befiteg unter bem @'d)aHe ber 

■Drommeteu bag 9tojj. 
eo lange ur ©rk ein Jltnb t|l f fo tjt. 

untez i§m unb cittern $ued)te fetn 

Umerfdjteb.— Gal. ^v. I 
Wlan femttt^it nur unter otefem 9?a* 

men. 
Mommt mix nit nneber unter bte,$u* 

gem 
€r ti't unter ber Arbeit eingefd)Cafeu* 
£>a3 SBucl) iji unter ber $reffe. 
(£3 iji unmcgUl) aUe tfityfe unter et* 

nen $ut ju brina/en. 
<£r bat urn eine Unterrebuna, unter 

ster 5lugen» 
<Sr gmg unter bie ©olbaten* 
<£$ Xiegt OTe3 unter einanber* 
€r fiecft unter etner Decfe mit t^nen. 



I have provided me a Ling among 

liis sous. — 1 Sam. xvi. 1. 
Amid the clangor of tiumpetshe 

mounted the steed. 
As long as the heir is a child there 

is no difference between him and 

a servant (Literal). 
He is known only by (under) this 

name. 
Never come before my eyes again. 

He has fallen asleep at his work. 

The book is in press. 

It is impossible to make all men of 

one opinion. 
He sought a private (secret) inter* 

view. 
He became a soldier. 
Every thing lies in confusion. 
He is in collusion (under one cove**} 

with them. 



7. SB o r* 



*Sie (rel)t s o r ber £pr* 
Ste nmnten $or greubt. 
<£r ftorb »or £nno,er. 
S£r roar anger fid) »or 3cm. 
Seipt ftnb nnr ftcfyer » o r tfjnu 
fifanb er Sd)U§ & o r ifym ? 
Stag Sdjijf iiegt t> o r SCnfer. 
Sd) fal) tint »or einer ^tunbe. 
'T)i\$ ijl » or ber £anb fymretdjenb. 
S)ie £utri$tmt<j nurb balb »or ftd) 
gebeit. 



She is standing before the door. 

They wept /or (k>&A) joy. 

Ho died of hunger. 

He was beside himself with anger* 

Now we are safe from him. 

Did he find protection against himf 

The ship lie3 at anchor. 

I saw him an hour ago. 

That, for the present, is sufficient 

The execution will soon take place 



LESSON LXIX. 



Ccctioit LXIX. 



ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS, 



1. Slber. 



id if! gut, altt rtkl)t fd)5m 
£Sr, a ber, tooflte ntdjt ge'^en* 
Sie fann e$ tfmn; nnllfte a ber? 
Unb a ber erflang bie £>rommete. 
£Er ft fyod)jl aber-(« & uberJaJauMg. 



It is good, 6w£ not beautiful* 
He, however, would not go. 
She can do it; will she though f 
And again the trumpet resounded. 
He is exceedingly superstitious. 



2. SHIetn. 

Ste ftnb max reidj, a tie itt fte nu^en They are, it is true, wealthy, but 

ifjren Sfccicbtyttm ntdjt. they do not use their wealth, 

^r ift itidjt a V ein retdj, f onb :rn and) He is not only (alone) rich, bat aU© 



ADVERBS AND COHJTOCTIOtfS. 



255 



5)ct %hx bletbt und aid ©eigel.-S. 
(£r ;;ei)i autf> aid ol> er franf tvare. 
©liper ift nuf)td, aU i'teDe; -pontQ 

iff ®aUe jU ti)i\ — £>. 
©r l)vU md)td u Id bad £eben. 
fftiemanb aid er fann ed tfyurt. 
3d) fpred)e fo oieI( — )id) fann. 



Max remains (to ns) as (a) hostage, 
lie looks as though lie were sick. 
Sweeter than iove is nothing; ho- 
ney is gall (compared) to it. 
He has naught but. yetee than) life. 
IS one but him can do it. 
I speak as much as I can. 



"Note, — After fo, as in the above example, aid is often omitted. 

Sdj nutjjte at fo ^anbeln. I was obliged to act thus (so). 

(£r l*at ed oerfproa)en, at fo mug er He has promised it, consequently 

Cd ttjun. (hence) he must do it. 

©te fennen ir)n a t f o ? You know him ^71/ 

5. %u&)* 



t)tx Stiller ift a u d) t)ier geroefen. 
©ie fennen il)n, id) ferine il)n and), 
©te fennen i^n nid)t, id) fenne tytt a u c^ 

nid)t. 
<8d)redliuj burner, aufy in gerecljter 

<&ati)Z ift ©eroalt. — ^>. 
(£d ift bras unb loblid) einen $8oferoidjr r 

roo er aud) ftelje, furd)ilod anju* 

greifen. — <3. 
!!Dad &Saljre, ©ute unb 35ortreffticC)c ijl 

einfad) unb fid) immer gleid), roie ed 

and) erfdjeine.—- ©» 



The scholar also has been here. 
You know him, 1 know him too* 
You do not know him, neither (L> 

21. 8.) do I (L. 38. 7.). # 
Dreadful always, even in a just 

cause, is violence. 
It is noble and praiseworthy fear* 

lessly to attack a villain, wher* 

ever he may stand. 
The true, good and excellent is 

simple and always alike, bow* 

ever it may appear. 



6. SBalb* 



QEr roirb b a I b anfommen. 

©r roirb balb bofe. 

(Er ware balb gefaEen. 

<£d itf balb trier llljr. 

&alb $5rt man eg tyier, ^ alb bort 



He will soon arrive. 

He is easily provoked. 

He almost fell (was likely to fall)* 

It is nearly four o'clock. 

Mow it is heard here, now there. 



7. au. 



5Barte Bid id) jurMfomme. 
(Er a/ma, bid an bie 33rud:e fc 
8ie amgen bid an ben $ald in bad 

Staffer. 
&r ift- bid & it m (Sterben franf. 
Set) fytbe iijn bid auf ^n lefctett 

^>fennta bejal)lt. 
S: tyatte bad ®elb bid auf einige 

Ghofdjen erl)alten, 
Stffc bid auf @ie (tub uifrieben. 
gljer nid)t erfolgt bed Jtampfed (£nbi, 

aid b t d ber lefcte ^Iznn gefaEen ift. 

-€>. 



Wait ^ 1 return. 

He went as far as (to) the bridge. 

They went in to the water up to 
their necks. 

He is sick even unto death (dying). 

I have paid him to the last far- 
thing. 

He had received the money within 
(except) a few groats. 

All but (except) you are satisfied. 

The end of the contest did not come 
until thQ last man fell (had fall* 
len)* 



§56 



LESSOR LXI£, 



8. S)a> 



£> a er ntdjt ge^t, fo ge^e i<$. 

2) a nod) SCHc^ lag in wetter $erne* 

2) a ijattefl Du (5ntfd)lug uxfo Wlufy 

...2) a ber (Srfolg tterjtdjert tft 

fang ft 2)u an &u sagen — <3. 
$)u ftanbeft l)ier, id) ftanb b a. 
1) a Bin idj fdjon rcieber. 
Seltg ftrtb, bte ba Setb tragen. 



-4s (since) he does not go, I go. 

As (when or while) all yet lay in th& 
distance, (£A<m) you had resolu- 
tion and courage, and now that 
ba the result is secured (now) you 
begin to despair. 

You stood here, I stood there. 

Here I am again already. 

Blessed are they that mourn. 

D-af. 

Did he say that he goes to-day? 

How long is it since he was here ? 

Wait till (that) he comes. 

Tliat I might only see him ! 

Do not move from the spot. 

As though I did not know it I 

In order that he may soon forget it 

£)entu 

Saturn ge^t er b e nn ntdjt mit tm$ ? Why does he not go with us then? 
3$ mug i^tt acfjten, b e n n cr ifi ein I must respect him, for he is an 

aufrtdjtiger SKann. upright man. 

<Sie effen mdjt$ b e n n 23rob. They eat nothing but bread. 

(£r jM)t ljof)er ctl$ JMeger, benn aU He stands higher as a warrior than 

<3taat3mann. as a statesman. 

<Der ^ftenfdj !ann ntdjt roatyr^aft gIM* Man can not be truly happy (i. e, 

lid) feitt, e 3 f e i b e n n , bag er tit* unconditionally), be it then (as £A<2 

genbfjaft fei. condition)^ that he be virtuous; or, 

Man can not be truly happy unless he is virtuous. 

11. 

£)a3 ifi b o dj fonberfon 

3d)tnodjte bod) rotffen, roarnmer ba* 

ijtn gef)t. 
Oe^en @te b o dj mit mtr. 
3a, bod)! Stout, bodj! 



<8agte er, bag er ^eute ge^c ? 
SBte lange ijt e3, bag er |ier mar? 
SBarte MS bag er fommt. 
g) a g idj i^n nur feljen fonnte ! 
X) a g bu ntdjt »on ber ®tefte ge$ji 
© a g id) eS ntdjt roitgte ! 
Qluf bag er eS Mb sergeffe. 

10. 



£u lennft fie ntd)t. ) b & , b * x 

12. 

©te ijt eften fo alt roie er. 
&8ir geljen eb en (or fo efcen) auS. 
2)a3 bad)te tdj e B e n ntdjt. 
(£ f> e n barum null id) n'd)t meljr fdjret* 
ben. 



That is really singular. 

Why, I should like to know, why hr 

goes there. 
Do (pray do) go with us. 
Yes, indeed! So, indeed! 
You do not know them. O yes I do. 
He has no book. Yes he has. 



3d) falj u)n, e$ e er ntidj fa$. 

34 ntod)te etyer (lieber) fterben, aU fo 

libtn* 
(£r ging ntdjt e \) e r 

gefefyen $atte. 



SB en. 

She is just as old as he. 
We are ^'ws^ going out. 
That is not exactly what I thought 
For that very reason I will not 
write any longer. 

13. &f)e. 

1 saw him before he saw me. 
I would rather die than to liv© 
thus: 
att MS er jte aHe He did not go till (before) he haci 
seen them all, 



ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 



25T 



14. Srft. 



©r ft Bete, bann ctrMte*" 
Bit x\t e r ft ^efjtt 3a§re alt, 
(£r Ijat e r ft angefangeiu 
2Bir toerben e r ji morgen geljen. 



i%s2 pray, then work. 

She is only ten years old. 

He lias only just begun. 

We shall not go till to-moriow. 



15. gtttXt. 



(£r tjt e t ro a fitttfstg 3af)re alt. 
£>abe tc& <Ste e t tx> a oeleibtgi? 



He is about fifty years old. 
Have I (perhaps) offended yon ? 



16. 



)ar. 



Q$ tft ntd)t fo gar lange Ijer. It is not so very long since. 

3d) roeig eg mtr g ar u: ftoIjL I know it but (altogether) too well 

(£g ifi gar ju fd)on. It is very (too) beautiful. 

(£g tft fdjdblid), roenn ntdjt gar ge* 5 It is injurious, if not even dangerous. 

fdfjrltd). 

(Eg biirftete fie gar fe^r. Tk e y were exceedingly thirsty. 

(£t, roarum ntd)t gar? Hey, why not then (indeed) ? 

3d) fetye eg g a r ntdjt. (L. 19. 3.) I do not see it all. 

17* ©era, /am, gladly, comparative liibtx, rather, often answers to 
Wee, be fond of, etc. 



£)te $inber, fte f)oren eg g erne* — ©. 
3d) irhtfe g.ertt $affe. 
9Jlod)ten ©te gern 3)eutfdj lernen? 
(£r fyat fte fcr)r gern. 



The children (L. 28.) like to hear it. 
I am. fond of coffee. 
Would you like to learn German t 
He likes them very much. 



£)te[e 9) flange |at gern einen fanbtgen This plant likes (flourishes best in) 

SBoben. a sandy soil. 

(£g mod)te gern regnen. It "is trying" to (looks like) rain. 

£>tcg $ferb fd)Idgt gem. This horse is inclined to kick. 

©rxiXe SBaffer jinb gern tief. Still waters are (apt to be) deep. 

18. © I e t d) is often equivalent to o o g I e i d) (L. 53). 

3)1 eg g l e t d) nid)t fd)on, fo tjt eg bodj Although it is not beautiful, it is 

gut. (nevertheless) good. 

Sftgletd) ber 33intamn>alb aufDun^ Though Birnam wood be come to 

finan Ijerangerucft* — ©♦ Dunsinane. — Shak. 



19. 



Smtner. 



So fet eg tmmer. 

©it (tub nodj tmmer $ter. 

<£g ill tmmer ein getuagteg tinted 

neljmen. 
®o fdjltmm eg tmmer (or andj) tfr. 
©te mogen tmmer roiffen, ba£ id) 

ntd)tg tne§r ^)aoe. — £. 

(£r fann eg tmmer glanften. 
(Er fagc, tr>ag er i miner ttofte. 
©te roerben tmmer ftoljer. 



Thus be it ever (or always). 

They are still ( — ) here. 

It is a hazardous undertaking, at 
any rate. 

However bad (bad as) it is. 

It is a matter of indifference to me 
that they should know I no long- 
er have any thing. 

He may (for aught I care) believe it. 

Let him say what he pleases. 

T aey grow prouder and prouder. 



WESSON LXIX. 



20. 



3 a. 



SMciour c'c ja ju £aufe. 



Remain, % a£Z means, at home. 
Do not, 6?/ any means, do it. 
tt*4) red)ncn Why, I can not read, nor cipher 
nor write. 

Q&ewtici) j.a uittger au^MeikufoHte, fo But if I should remain longer do 
roaric nid)t auf mid). not wait for me.. 

21. 3e. 



£t)un Sie cu j a md)t, 

3d) fann j a ntd;t lefen 

unb fd) ret b en. — 23 



©i: iff: ie unb je traurtg. 

3ft er je §ter geroefen? 

£)a3 §at son je fyer bte (Erfa^rung Be* 

fcnefen. 
€>ie gingen ie jroet unb ^roet. 
&3 tied t j e etner ben anbern. 
3 e nad)bem er geljanbelt fyat, rotrb fein 

2 oo0 fein. 
3e longer l;ter, ie (bejlo) fpaterbort. 



She is always {ever and ever) sad. 
lias he ever been here? 
Experience has always (from the 

first) proved that. 
They went two by two. 
Each teases the other. 
According as he has acted will hia 

lot be. 
The longer here the later there. 



22. tfettt. 

(£3 tfi Fein <2>d)net. — @ It is not (is no) snow. 

Unb ntrgenbS fein S)anf. — S>. And nowhere any (no) gratitude. 
2Bte elenb ware ntd)t ber Sftenfd) ofyne How miserable would (not) man 

§offnung. be without (but for) hope. 

Note. — Where two negatives occur, as above, only one should be 

translated. 

23. 9t o <$. 



(£r roo^nt nod) Ijter. 
&$ [ft roeber fd)ott n o dj nu^Itd)] 
3d) ()abe it)n nod) nidjt gefefyen. 
©tngen ©ie c$ nod) einmal. 
SRetymen <5te nod) etnen STpfet. 
tBeenbige eine Sacfye, toenn fte and) 

n o d) fo fletn fd)eint, el)e hu eine an** 

bcre anfdngfi. 



He s^Z lives here. 

It is neither beautiful nor useful. 

I have not yet seen him (L. 21. 7). 

Sing it again (yet once). 

Take another apple (L. Qo. 1. a,). 

Finish one thing, even if it seems 

ever (never) so small, before you 

besnn another. 



24. 91 u n. 

2Ba3 tjt nun in tljmt? What is to be done now? 

9iun, roa3 tjt tfl if)un? PFe//, what is to be done? 

££cld)en (Smfdjiug nun fte fasten, er Whatever resolution they adopted 

l;cme feiiten Svotd erretd)t. he had gained his end. 

UttD nun bie3 SSlatt un£ fur bte And since (now that) thia sheet 

Sirufcpen fcurgt. — @« secures to us the troops. 

25. %l it r. 

;Dctv lociB er nur ui gut. That he knows fo^ too well, 

(£r ^at nur etnen grreunb. He has only (but) one friend. 

"SBcfyin id) nur fcfye." "Wherever 1 look. 

Ca[? tint nur frmmen. J^ let him come. 

&}'iz id? ctf nur tnuner serlangeu mag. However I may demand it 



4DVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 



25S» 



26. @ d) o n. 



Sie fommen f dj o tt. 
Sic roev&en f d) o n fommen. 
£)a3 til tym fd) on red)t. 
^)abe id) fd?on # roentg (obfdjon idj roe* 
nig §abc) fo $xbe id) bod) genug. 



(£r ijt cBctt f o alt roie id). 
© o em 93udj fteljt man felten. 
SMe faun er fo etmaS gtauben? 
@o ifyr Mei^en rocrbetanmettterSftcbe, 

f o fcib ifjr metne redjten Simger. 
3d) bin cudjetnSorn tnbenQlugen, fo 

fte in id) bin. — $. 
fttid)t fo balb roar etner fort, aU ein 

anberer fam. 
© o geben ^>ie fdjon? 
<B o grog tyre gitrcfyt »or bent geinbe 

tt>ar, fo angenebm roar tt)re Ueber* 

rafdjung itber feine 2ftajngung. 

28. 



They are already coming. 
They will come at the right time. 
He is perfectly satisfied wit that. 
Although I have but little, still I 
have enough, 

@ 0. 

He is just as old as I am. 

Such a book one seldom sees. 

How can he believe such a thing! 

If ye (will) continue in my word, 
then are ye my disciples indeed. 

I am a thorn in your eyes, small aa 
(however small) I am. 

~No sooner was one gone than an- 
other came. 

Ah (indeed), are you already going? 

Great as was their fear of the ene- 
my, so agreeable was their sur- 
prise at his moderation. 



©ottjl. 

£$ue ed ni$t, fo n jt rotrjt bu bejlraft Do not do it, otherwise you will be 

roerben. punished, 

©ie miiffen e$ tbun, fonjt ger)t er You must do it, or else he will go 

ttKg. away. 

dx b-U fie fo ttjt roo gefetyen. He has seen them somewhere else, 

© o n |t bacrjte nnb r)anbe(te er gattj an* Formerly he thought and acted en- 

ber3. tirely otherwise. 

Sie fonnten c$ ttyun, roenn fie e3 fonjt You could do it, that is, if you 

rooflten. would (if you only would). 

29. Unb. 

£)er Sfttenfcr) tjr fret gefdjaffen, tjr fret, Man is created free, is free even 
Unb roitrb er in Jletten geboren.-S. (and) were he born in chains. 

30. 33 1 e It e t d)t. 



Perhaps you know him. 
Do you know him (perhaps)*. 
Can you (perhaps) tell me wheis 
he lives ? 



an 



t e. 



Sie fennen tr)rt » t e It e t d) t. 
itennen Sie ilm o i e U e i d) t ? 
^onnen Sie mir oielletd)t fagen, 
roo er roo^nt? 

81. 

^Biffert Sie, rote er futgt? 

(£r fprtdjr, n> i e er benfr. 

Sie rool):tert nod) bier, ro te tdj $ore. 

Sr t>eutt ro t e ein ©olf. 

£)er Sttenfdjen Zijmn unb ©ebanfen, Men's thoughts and deeds, know 
&'l$t, jtttb ntd)t «) i e SReereS roilb (ye), are not like (not as are) 
beroegte JffieUen. — S. ocean's wildly agitated waves 



Do you know how he sings ? 
He speaks as he thinks 
They still leave here as I hear. 
He howls like a wolf. 



260 LESSON LXX. 

32. 51 H tt> t e sometimes occurs in the signification of rt> i f j 

£>er See tte<tt ru^tg ba, aU xoit em The lake lies quiet ther* (so as) 
ebener Spiegel.— S. like a smooth mirror. 

33. SB i e (or aU rote) sometimes follows an adjective in the compar- 
ative, and answers to than : 

SBemger rei^ to t e fte fcfyetnt ijt tm* Less rich than it seems is our lan- 
fere S:pr&ct;e. — $. guage. 

34. SBcH 

(2r kfmbet jf<$ tt> o r) I. He is (finds himself L. 28. 9.) well 

3d) Mn nicr)t fo recfyt W % L I am not so very (right) we^. 

SWir tji nic^t tt> o H I do not feel well (L. 57. 2.). 

(£$ tf)Ut (£inetn tt) o t) T. It is pleasant (grateful) to one. 

35. SB o 1) I often denotes a doubt, a supposition, or a probability. 

(Bte fyctt ttn$ to o ^ X noc^ ntcfyt gefefjen. She has probably not seen us yet 

£)er Waiter roagt 1 feirt Seften bran; bod) The peasant risked his life at it, 

jf)at er 1 3 ft o f) I urn ©olbeS ^lartg ? but did he do it probably for the 

—23. „ clink of gold ? 

(£3 ftnb U) o f) I §unbert 3cifjre Ijer. It is perhaps a hundred years since. 

2$te fcmn berSftenfd) ftc^ f ennen lernen ? How can man become acquainted 

£>itrdj 23etrad)ten mentals, ttotyt with himself? by reflection never, 

akr burdj £anbeln. — ©. but he can by acting. 

Soji ijt fte fd)im, bie Sett.—©. The world is indeed beautiful. 



4> « » > >> - 



LESSON LXX. Cation LXX. 

1. iperr, 5r<*u and grauletn, placed before proper 
names, answer to Mr., Jfrs. and i¥m. In address, when the 
name is omitted, 9ft tin $m answers to Sir, and SSJJein griiu^ 
lent, to -Miss ; SJletne ^)erren, to Gentlemen, and metne graulem, 
to Ladies. SUiaDam' (singular), and metne £)amen (plural), 
are addressed to married ladies. 

2. £err, ^rait and gtauletn are used before words denoting 
relationship (except in reference to one's own relatives) ; and 
the first two before titles : 

3d) r)aBe tyettte £errtt 91., great 9t\ I have to-day seen Mr. K, Mrs. 

rtnb grdulein 91. gefetyen. N. and Miss. IS". 

(bitten 9J£org,en, metn £>err, rote fcefm* Good morning Sir, how is your 

bet fid) 3t)r §err Slater? father? 

©men SCbenb,. metn grdulein, tone £e* Good evening Miss, how are your 

ftubert ftd) 31jrc grau Gutter unb mother and your sisters ? 

3f)re grdulein ©cfywejtew? 
itonncn ©ie mir fagen, vx>o ber §err Can you tell me where M*. Secret- 

©ecretctr 8. roofmt? ary L. resides ? 

3d) fyabe 3|re $errett §8riiber unb 3§re I have seen your brothers and your 

grduletn ©cfyroejterrt gefetyen. sisters. 

(bitten Sfbenb metne §e:ren, tt>te fceftn^ Good evening Gentlemen, how do 

bzn <3te ftefj ? , you do ? 

3ft ber £err 9)rofeffor ju $aufe ? Is 'the Professor at home ? 



ABBREVIATIONS. 261 



Abreviations. STHiirjungem 

dft.D am cmgefittjrten £)rte, at the place mentioned. 

$t>|a)tt. 2Cbfci)ntti, section. 

Slum, or -State rf Sfomerfuttg, observation. 

&nm>. Slntttort answer. 

a. St. . . , alien Sh)U, old style. 

91. X... STlteS Sejiament, Old Testament 

$ufl Slutlage edition. 

au£g auSgenommett, except. 

S3 S&ud), SSattb, book ; volume. 

GL, Sap. or Rap, Sapiiel or $apitel, chapter. 

GEeittn., St. or Str (Eenitter, hundred weight. 

3> r £>r. or Doct doctor, Doctor. 

©cm. or ©emotf. ©emotfeUe, maiden, lady, miss, 

b. 5- - • • • ba£ tyetjjjtf that means. 

b. t ba$.tft# i. e. , viz. 

b. 3 biefeS 3a§r, this year. 

b. 9ft ; biefeS 9JtaatS, of this month. 

b. $$ ber Skrfaffer, the author. 

<£» Gssangeltum, Gospel. 

©tt) (£uer, Sure your. 

f. or folg foigenb, (%) ) . 

ff. foI B enbe,(^r.)....p- tliefollowm ^ 

8r Srau, lady, wife. 

8?r$r greiljen, baronet, baron. 

gefc. geftorett, , born. 

gejl gejrorkrt, died. 

£r. , £rn §etr, #errn, Mr., Sir, Sirs. Messrs 

$. 6 fyeiltge Sdjrtft, Holy Scriptures. 

3. & 3eflt3 GS^rifhiS, Jesus Christ. 

$aif. or faiferl faiferlicfy, , . , . . imperial. 

$on. or fimtoj fomgticr), .royal. 

I . . IteS/ read. 

HD^atj SRabam, Madam 

2ftaj 3ftaje|Mt, Majesty. 

OTe Sftabenurifelle, Mad unoiselle, Miss. 

SKfcr. or SKfcrpt SJtottttfcrtyt, manuscript. 

9?. or 9t. 9? Sfaxme or Harnett, name or names. 

9? ^orbett, north. 

9t. S S?ad;fd)rtft postscript 

9J. St rteuen <StyU, new style. 

9*. £ SKeneS £e (foment, . . . "New Testament 



262 ABBREVIATIONS. 

D, . . . Dffett, East 

ob , ober, or. 

9>f. or 3>fb 9)fimb; pound. 

fPrcf. SprofeflTot, professor. 

fftec Slecenfcnt, reviewer, eriti@ s 

{jttyix 9ta$3t$aler, Rixdollar. 

<3 Seite ; Siibeit, page ; South. 

2>. or f. ft el)e, see, vide. 

fel fc'Iig# late, deceased, 

<St. or <8ct t&antt, Saint. 

<Sib <5tunbe, hour. 

%$ £f)eil, volume, part. 

£l;lr Zljaltx, dollar. 

it unbr and. 

it. a. nt unb attbere mef)r &c, farther. 

u. bgl. m unb berglet$en mefyr/ and similar instai ««&§ 

u. f. f. unb fo fort, or ferner, n 

u. f. m unb fo metyr, I . . etc. 

it. f. tt>. or k unh fo roetter ) 

U. &. 51 unb stele $nbere, and many others,, 

3$ %$zx§, verse. 

<o ttcn of, from. 

IBerf. or 33 f. $erfaffer, author. 

sjcrgt. or s>gt $ergletct)e, compare. 

9. c. toon often, from above. 

SJorr , S3orreber preface. 

». U fcott itntettf from below* 

SB. . . , SBeffen, West. 

3 « Beile, line. 

|. ©. o? j. (£.,..,..... . sum SBeifinel; &itm(£renu>elfor exampk . 



S 1. ETYMOLOGY. 

Etymology regards words as individuals ; discloses theif 
origin and formation ; classifies them according to significa- 
tion ; and shows the various modifications, which they 
undergo in the course of declension and conjugation. * 

§ 2. Derivation and composition. 

(1) In respect to derivation, all German words are divi- 
sible into three classes : Primitives, Derivatives and Compounds. 

(2) The Primitives, which are also called roots or radicals. 
&re all verbs ; forming the basis of what are now generally called 
the irregular verbs, and of about fifty, or sixty others, which 
were once irregular in conjugation, but are so no longer. They 
are also all monosyllables ; and are seen in the crude form, (so 
lo speak,) by merely dropping the suffix (e n) of the Infinitive 
mood : thus, fcinb(en,) to bind ; fd/fief (en,) to close ; fangfen,) 
to catch. 

(3) From the primitives, sometimes with, sometimes toith- 
o?/i, any change in, or addition to the crude form, comes a 
numerous train of derivatives : chiefly nouns and adjectives. 

Thus, from 6inb(en,) to bind, we get ber 33 a nb, the volume, 
and ber 33 u nk, the league, where the derivatives are pro- 
duced by a mere vowel change. The derivative is, also, often 
distinguished by a mere euphonic, or orthographic termination : 
changing the form indeed, but in no wise affecting th^ sense. 
The terminations employed, in this way, are e r, e I, e n, e, b e, 
t e and e t ; thus, from fpred)(en,) to speak, comes bie @!ptad)e, 
speech; language. In some cases, moieover, in forming de- 
rivatives, the syllable ge (tuithout meaning) is prefixed ; as, 
getiu#, sure; certain; ber ©efcmg, the song. 

* The inflection of all parts of speech, except the Verb, is, in Grammar, 
cared declenson: the regular arrangement of ihe moods, tenses, numbers, 
persons, and participles of a verb, is called Conjugation : in a get.crtl way, 
however, all words capable of inflection are said to be declinable. The »V- 
declinable parts of speech are often called F articles. 

263 



264 ETYMOLOGY. § 2. 

(4) But there is another and a most extensive class of do* 
rivatives, sometimes called secondary derivatives formed bv 
the union of radical * words with suffixes, that are significant : 
thus, from l)eilig, (holy, sacred;) we get by adding en, the 
verb J)eiligen, to make holy ; to consecrate. The suffixes of 
this class (the significant ones) are, however, most of them, 
used in forming nouns and adjectives. They will be found ex- 
plained under those heads respectively. Several of them are 
the same inform exactly as the terminations mentioned above, 
as being often added to primary derivatives. From these, 
that is, from the merely orthographic endings, the significant 
suffixes are to be carefully distinguished. 

(5) Among the secondary derivatives must, also, be in- 
cluded those formed by means of prefixes as well as suffixes. 
These are mainly verbs, and are treated somewhat at large 
under the head of Compound Verbs. 

(6) In respect to compounds, properly so called, that is, 
words formed by the union, not of prefixes and suffixes with 
radicals, but of radicals, or other independent words, one with 
another, the German is peculiarly rich. Not only is it rich in 
the abundance of such compounds already in use ; but it 
possesses a rare facility of forming them, as occasions arise, 
out of its own resources. 

(7) In forming these compounds, the two components are 
often merely joined together as one word ; as ttl)rmad)er, (from 
Vfyx, a clock or watch, and 9Kad)er, a maker.) But in numerous 
cases, the union is marked by the insertion of certain letters, 
which may be called letters of union : thus, 

SDie S'ob e 8 noti), (from S'ob, death and 3fot1), need, agony;) the 

death-agony ; 
2)a8 £immel8 ticr/t, (from #immel, heaven and Sidelight;) the 

light of heaven ; 
5)ie «§etj e n § gftte, (from -gerj, heart, and ©file, goodness ;) the 

goodness of heart; 

* The word radical, however, in this place, is designed to indicate any 
word capable of assuming a suffix. In this looser sense, the word is often 
employed for the sake of convenience. 



FARTS OF SPEECH. § 3 # 265 

®er $ferb e atjt, (from $fetb, horse, and Qlrji, doctor;) the 

horse-doctor ; 
2)a3 ^5iti e n lefcen, (from £irt, shepherd, and Sefcen, life ;) the 

pastoral-life ; 
5)er (Si e r fudjen, (from @i, egg, and itudfyen, cake;) the 

omelet. 

(8) Some of these letters of union are nothing more than 
the signs of the genitive case of the first component : others 
are mere euphonic additions. 

(9) In some instances, the union of the parts of a com- 
pound is characterized by the omission of some letters ; as, 
bcr (Scmntag, (@onn e, the Sun, and Sag, day;) Sunday ; tent* 
nmtbtg, (benfett, to think, and toiirbig, worthy;) worthy of 
thought. 

(10) In all compounds, finally, the main accent falls upon 
the first component which, also, always qualifies or defines the 
second, as containing the fundamental idea. 

§ 3. Parts of speech. 

( 1 ) The parts of speech in German are usually reckoned ten : 
Articles, Verbs, 

Nouns, or Substantives, Adverbs, 

Adjectives, Prepositions, 

Numerals, Conjunctions, 

Pronouns, Interjections. 

(2) Of these, six, namely, Articles, Nouns, Adjectives. 
Numerals, Pronouns and Yerbs, are capable of inflection ; that 
is, admit of various changes of termination by which various 
modifications of meaning are expressed: the other four, namely, 
Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections, are in 
form invariable. 

(3) All parts of speech capable of inflection have two 
numbers : the singular, which denotes but one, and the plu- 
ral, which denotes more than one. 

(4) All parts of speech capable of inflectior, except the 
verb, have four cases; namely the nominative, genitive, 

12 



266 THE ARTICLE. g 4. 

dative and accusative: also, three genders; namely, the mj* 

€UL1NE, the FEMININE aP(l the NEUTER. 

(5) Cases are variations made in the form of a word, to in- 
dicate its several relations to other words : the nominative being 
that form which denotes the subject of a verb; the genitive that 
which is chiefly used in signifying source or jivssession ; the 
dative that which indicates the person or thing for or to whom 
or which any thing is directed ; and the accusative that which 
points to the immediate or direct object of an action. 

The cases in German correspond well to those in the Latin 
language. The Vocative, however, is never counted, because 
it is the same exactly in form with the nominative ; while the 
Ablative (as in Greek,) is wholly wanting: its place being ge- 
nerally supplied by the Dative (with a suitable preposition). 

§ 4. The article. 

(1) There are two articles in German : the Definite, bet, 
the; and the Indefinite, tin, a, or an. They are inflected 
thus . 

Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. For all genders. 

Norn. Set, bte, ba£, the ; Norn. ®ie, the ; 

Gen. 2)e3, ber, be3, of the; Gen. 3)er, ofthe; 
Dat. 35em, ber, bem, to, or for the; Dat. 2)en, to, or for the; 

Ace. 3)en, bie, ^, the. Ace. JDte, the. 

Singidar. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 

Norn. Sin, erne, em, an, or a ; N. "| 

Gen. (SuteS, einer, eineS, of an, or a ; G. ! ,y . 

Dat. Sment/eiuer, etnem, to, or for an, or a; D. f °" 

Ace. Sinen, eine, ein, an, or a. A. J 

(2) In familiar style, certain prepositions are frequently 
contracted with the dative and accusative of the definite article 
into one word. 

EXAMPLES. 

D. am, for an bent, as, am 'gfeuer, at the fire ; 
A an3, for an ba3, as, an$ 2id)t, to the light ; 



NOUNS. 



§ 5, 



267 



D. cmfm, 

A. cmfS, 

D. fcetm, 

A. burdjS, 



for auf bent, 

for auf ba3, 
for 6ct bent, 
for burd) ba§, 



A. fur«, for fur ba3, 



as, aitfm Jfytrnt, on the tower; 
as, cutfS ^aud, upon the house ; 
as, fcetm SSater, with the father; 
as, fcurdjS SBaffer, through the 

water ; 
as, fitry Oelb, for the money ; 



D. Jjintetm, f° r Winter bem, as, I;interm *§aufe, behind the 

house • 

D. tut, for in bem, as, im «j5immel, in (the) heaven; 

A. in6, for in ba3, as, in 8 <$au$, into the house ; 

D. i>om, for fcon bem, as, &om Uefcet, from (the) evil ; 

A. i?or3, for to or ba6, as, i>et£ genfter, before the 

window ; 

D. fcorm, for i»or bem, as, toorm S'f)ore, before the door ; 

J), itberm, for fiber bem, as, iiterm belter, upon the fire; 

A. iiber0, for fiber ba$ f as, libera ?an$), over (the) land ; 

D. unterm, for unter bem, as, unterm SBaffer, under (the) 

water ; 

D. gum, for $u bem, as, jtun fjlitffe, to the river; 

D. jur, for ju ber, as, jur @(;re, to the honor. 

§ 5. Nouns. 

(1) In German, as in English, the nouns, that is, the names 
of persons and things, are divided into two great classes • 
viz : Common nouns, which designate sorts, kinds, or classes 
of objects ; and Proper nouns, which are peculiar to indi- 
viduals. 

(2) Under the head of common nouns * are commonly 

* 1. In German all Nouns, as also all parts of speech when used as 
nouns begin with a capital letter. Ex.: I. ^er eobit, the son ; tie Xocfoter, 
the daughter. 2. Der ©ate, the good (man) ; tie @utc, the good (woman). 
3. 5\iS Stugen, the singing. 

II. 77/e Indefinite Pronouns. Ex.: ^semanb, (any body, somebody). 
Setermauu, (every body). (SfroaS, 'anything, something, and s Jiirf)t$, 
(nothing). 

Note, that when (vfroa § and 9? ici)t§ are connected with a noun, or 
with an adjective used as a noun they do not begin with a capital. Ex. : 
(Si hat e tiv a 3 33wfc, he lias sonic bread; tv t>ot ntct)ts ®IUCS, he has 
nothing good. 

III. The al/solufe Possessive Pronouns {when used substantively. L 
35. 2.) Ex.: Tic fltfctiitqeti, (hiy family ; bag "iDtetutqc, (my property) 

IV. The Indefinite Numerals, when used without a substantive. Ex.: 
51LUS, %\U, (all. ; diuta,e, (some) ; 3)Jaud)er, (many a); SBtele, (many). 



268 GENDER. § 6. 

included sei erai subdivisions ; as Collective nouns, which are 
the names oi a plurality of individuals considered as unity ; and 
abstract ncuns, which are the names of certain qualities, or 
attributes regarded as separate from any given substance. 

(3) The nouns, both common and proper, as before said, 
are regularly inflected : exhibiting thus by means of termina- 
tions the several modifications of gender, number, and case. 
The numbers and cases will be made sufficiently clear under 
the head of declension of nouns. We here introduce the sub- 
ject of 

§ 6. Gender. 

(1) Strictly speaking, the masculine gender belongs ex- 
clusively to words denoting males ; the feminine to those de- 
noting females ; and the neuter to such only as, are neither male, 
nor female. And in English, accordingly, with very little ex- 
ception, this is found to be actually the case. 

(2) Not so, however, in German; for there the names of 
many things witltout life, from their real, or supposed posses- 
sion of qualities pertaining to things with life, are considered 
and treated as masculine, or feminine. Often, moreover, words 
indicating things without life, are deemed mascuiine or feminine 
merely from some resemblance inform to those designating 
things properly male or female. Hence arises, in Grammar, 
the distinction between the natural and the grammatical gender 
of words. 

(3) Were the natural gender alone regarded, it would be 
necessary only to know the meaning of a word, to know its 
gender ; but since this is not the case, we are often obliged to 
determine gender chiefly by the form. We give below, 
therefore, the principal Rules for determining the gender in 

V. The Personal Pronouns, *£n 3>frv, (thou, you), &c, when we would 
listincruish thereby the person addressed. 

VI. (Sin, when an adjective, and likewise, when pronoun as distinguished 
*om th'j article Ex.: 3d? babe nitr (5"iueu ^teuub, 1 have only one" friend. 
.Dae (5 t it e s 4>fevb ift blinb, M anbeve tft lafjm, the one horse is blind, the 
jtlier is lame. 

VII. Adjectives derived from names of persons. Ex : £>ctg €d)iflerfd)e 
$a\\§. Observe that adjectives derived from the names of countries do not 
begin with a capital. Ex.: -£cv beuifctoe sBuub, the German confederacy. i)it 
ftonjoftfct)C (sprocbe, the French language. 



GENDER. § 7. 



2*59 



either way: suggesting only, as the best mode of learning 
the exce} tions (which are numerous and here purposely omit- 
ted,) the custom of constantly and carefully noting them in 
reading and speaking. 

§ 7. Rules for determining gender 
by the meaning ; by the form. 

(1) To the masculine be- (1) To the masculine be- 



long names of 

male beings ; * as, ber Sttaitrt ; 

ber Soire ; &c. 
days; as, ber 3JJcmtag; ber 

2)ienftag ; <fec. 
months ; as, ber Scmitar j ber 

g-ebruar; &c. 
seasons ; as, bei $r fitting ; ber 

©ommer ; &c. 
winds ; as, ber 97orbtotnb ; ber 

©iibttrinb ; &c. 
points of the compass ; as, bet 

9?orb ; ber ©lib ; &c. 
mountains ; as, ber 45ar$, ber 

2UIa8; &c. 
stones ; as, ber SHamant ; ber 

SKufcin; &c. 
fruit-trees ; as, ber SirnBaum ; 

ber Sfyfeftaunt; <fcc, 

(2) To the feminine be- 
long the names of 
female beings ; * as, bie Sfrau j 

bie $od)tcr ; &c. 
rivers ; as, bie SBefer ; bie 

STjemfe; &c. 
fruits ; as, bie 33ime ) bie Sftufi ; 

&c. 
trees ; f as, bie 33 trie, bie (Me j 

&c. 



long 



a. Those primary derivatives 
(See § 2. 3.) ending in e r, 
e I, en; (without meaning ;) 
and those also that are with- 
out affixes of any kind. 



b. Those secondary deri- 
vatives formed by means ot 
the (significant) suffixes, et 
e I, c n, i n g, and I i it g* 



(2) To the feminine be- 
long 

a. Those primary derivatives 
ending in e, be, t e, or f t : 

b. Those se ondary deri- 
vatives formed by means of 
the suffixes e, e i, i n, ^ e i t 
f e i t, f d) a f t, u tt g. 



* Under the name of male brings must be included that of the Almighty 
as also those of angels and other superior powers ; those of mythological deities 
and of human beings ; those of beasts, birds, reptiles, and hshes. The term 
female beings must nave a like latitude of signification 

■f This includes also plants and ftiwers. 



270 



DERIVATION OF NOUNS. § 9. 



(3) To the neuter belong 



a. Ill os e secondary deriva- 
tives formed by means of the 
suffixes, d) e n t e i n f a 1, f e I. 
n i {}, ti)u m. 

b. Those nouns having the 
augment g e. 



(3) To the neuter belong 
the names of 

places; as, ^Berlin; &c. 

metals ; as, ba3 (Sitter ; &c. 

materials ; as, bci3 <$ol$ ; &c. 

letters ; as, ba3 -21 j ba6 S • &c. 

infinitives used as nouns ; as, 
bag Men 3 bag Stetten; &c. 

many individuals taken to- 
gether ; (i. e. collective 
nouns;) as, ba3 £eer; &c. 

adjectives used as nouns; (4n 
an abstract, and indefinite 
way;) as, ba3 ®uU f ba0 
©cfyone; &c. 



§ 8. Gender of compounds and foreign words 

(1) Compounds in general adopt the gender of their last 
component : as, 

(from £of, court, or yard, ) , , . 

and jtitdje, church ;) \ C0Ult clmrch ' 
the church yard ; 
(from bie @id)e, the oak, and bet 33aum, 

tree;) the oak-tree ; 
(from bet SSinb, the wind, and bie 2Jtu(;te« 

mill ;) the windmill ; 
(from ber dlatt), council, and ba3 $au0 ; 
house ;) the council-house. 

(2) Foreign words, for the most part, when taken into the 
German language, retain their original gender. Those, how- 
ever, that have become fairly Germanized, often take a dif- 
ferent gender as they take a different form : thus, Corpus, 
(the body,) 'which, in Latin, is neuter, becomes, in German, 
bet Jtorper, which is masculine. 



bie ^offirdje, 

ber Jtirdjljof, 
ber (§td;t>aunt, 

bie 3Btnbmui)Ie, 

ba£ JRat^auS, 



§ 9. Derivation of nouns. 
(1) To what has been already said (§ 2. (3 ) ) concerning 
the derivation of nouns, we add here, before entering upon 
the subject of Declension, a brief view of those (the secondary 



eesraxES used in forming nouns. § 10. § 11 27i 



ott, ivaeiwa } t\*t arc made by significant suffixes. And that 
the matter msty have the most practical shape, we subjoin a 
list of the Icadir^ suffixes of this class : putting in brackets 
the eyrivrient -English terminations, explaining severally their 
force raid use, and illustrating the whole by suitable examples. 

§ 10. Gcf?IXE3 USED IN FORMING NOUNS. 

Suffixes. English equivalents. 

it [er, ier, or, yer, zen f\ designates {male) jiersons , 

alse, agents, or instruments ; 

ittg/OrltttgJViVi^, <*ste> ,] denotes (often contemptu- 

ously) persons, animals and 
things ; 

In or inn [ess, ix ;] designates (female) per sons ; 



ct 

img 

e 

§eii 

Ceit 

mft 

(bum 



faC 
fet 

ni§ 

Urn 



[y, ry, ary, ery, ory ;] indicates the act, practice, 
or place of business ; 

[ing, ure, ton ;] signifies the act, or th«» 

continuing to act; 



[ness, ity, zfi : ) 
[ness, ity, th ; > 
[ness, ity, th ; ) 
[ship, hood, ity ; \ 
[dom, hood, ity ; J 



i) 



[ude, cy ; 

[ude, cy 

[ness, cy 

[kin, ule, et, let ; i 

[kin, ule, et, let ; j 

§ 11. 

' ©anger, 
33ftrget, 
Sager, 
er -{ @d)neiber, 
SRomer, * 

Petyjtger f f 

.QBicnev, 



denote qualities, or attributes; 

express rank, grade, office ; 
also, anumberof things taken 
collectively; often, merely ths 
quality ; 

denote the state, or condi- 
tion ; also, the quality ; 
sometimes the result ; 

indicate dzminutivene$s* 

Examples. 

a singer; 

a citizen ; 

a sawyer 

a tailor ; 

a Roman; 

a resident of -Leipzig; 

a Viennese ; 



* Apfwltatives derived from die names of people often have *he termina- 
cicn e : as bev .fteffe the Hessian ; ber £ii*fe, die Turk ; &c. 

t Nouns derived from the name of a city or town, are often used indeclt- 
nably as adjectives. Ex. : £>aS ^eipjt^er &ier, the Leipzic tnex- Geu. §c$ 
i-et;p|tflfr i&UxS. 



272 



EXAMPLES. 



in. 



ling 



«§au!ptTmg, 
SKidjtling, 
SRtetpng, 
JDidjierling, 

@d) of ling, 
r®rafht, * 
I £elbin, 
in or inn ^ Jtonigin, 

I ^tofefforin, 

L £Stotn, 

©tefcetei, 

^eucfyetei, 

gifefyeret, 

Srauetei, 

{Selefyvung, 
(Srfcauimg, 
Jttommg, 
@i|ung, 
f®ute, 
| ©tfcfe, 
] Jtranfljett, 
3)ummljeit, 
«&eiligfett, 
Sfeudjtigfeit, 
r gmmbfd)aft, 
$Pricfterfd)afit, 



img 

t 

l)ett 
fctt 



fel 
nifi 

Wn 

cfyctt 



93eteitfef)aft, 
4?etben4um, 
Stjttftentljum, 
(Sigentf/imt, 



< 



£a<ffef, 

©ebutfhifi 
©leicfynif, 



r Sficfyleln, 
JtnaHein, 

l®idjen. 



a captain ; 

a fugitive ; 

a hireling ; 

a poetaster ; 

a linnet; 

a shoot, or sprig 

a countess ; 

a heroine ; 

a queen ; 

a professor's wife ; 

a lioness ; 

thievery ; 

hypocrisy ; 

fishery ; 

brewery ; 

teaching,i.e. the act of teaching; 

the building, or erecting; 

the crowning, or coronation ; 

the sitting, or session ; 

goodness ; 

strength ; 

sickness ; 

stupidity ; 

holiness ; 

humidity ; 

friendship ; 

priesthood, that is, the body of tha 

priests ; 
readiness ; 

heathendom ; heathenism ; 
Christendom ; Christianity ; 
property ; 

the state of being in trouble; dis- 
tress ; 
that which has resulted from hacking 
and cutting ; i. e cuttings ; 
the state of being in want ; necessity ; 
quality, or state of being like ; like- 
ness ; 
a little book* 
a little boy ; 
a little stool ; 
a little egg. 



SSCLENglOS OF COMMON NOUNS- § 12. 2?S 

(1) It should be observed, in forming derivatives of the 
order illustrated above, that when a, o f or u, is contained in 
the ladical part* it is modified into a, 0, or ii, upon receiving 
any one of the suffixes e x, ling, in, d) e tt, I e t n, e, n i $ 
and f e I; as, in the case of danger, (from £ang,) 33utget, (from 
©utg,) and others of the Yke kind. . 

(2) Often, moreover, in forming secondary derivatives 
certain euphonic letters are inserted between the suffix and the 
word to which it is added ; as, t g in f5eud)ttgfeit, humidity. 
Other letters employed in this way, are en, n and t These 
euphonic parts are easily distinguished from those having m 
influence on the meaning, by merely resolving the derivative 
into its elements. 

(3) Here, too, may be noted the particle g e, which being 
prefixed to certain primary words, forms a class of nouns 
denoting either frequency of action, or a collection of things* 
These words, also, most commonly suffix the letter e ; ©erebe, 
constant talk; ©eljeut, frequent crying; ©dnrge, a range of 
hills, are examples. 

§ 12. Declension of common nouns. 

\Y) In German there are two declensions, distinguished as 
the Old and the New. The characteristic of each is the termi- 
nation of the genitive singular. In the former, the genitive ia 
formed from the nominative by adding e % or % j when other* 
wise formed, the noun is of the new declension. 

(2) To the old declension belong almost all masculine and 
neuter nouns ; that is, by far the greater part of all the nouns 
in the language. 

(3) In both declensions, the nominative, genitive and accu- 
sative plural are, in form, alike ; while the dative terminates 
always in the letter n. Unless, therefore, the word under de- 
clension already ends in that letter, it is, in the dative, uni- 
formly assumed. 

(4) All feminine nouns are invariable in the singular ; in 
the plural, they are, for the most part, inflected according to 
the new declension. 

12* 



S74 TUE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. 

(5) In compounds, the last word only is subjected to thi 
rariations of declension. 



§ 13. OLD DECLENSION 
TERMINATIONS* 

Singular. PluraL 

Nominative — e (5; -4)* 

genitive — — e3 or g, (see 3). — — e* 

dative e or like nom, — —en (9)* 

ACCUSATIVE — * - — tk 

SINGULRR NUMBER* 

(1) Feminine nouns in the singular number are not lti* 
fleeted ; those of the other genders ending in e, el, en, er, cfjeit 
and lent, add 3 in the genitive ; the dative and accusative being 
like the nominative : 

N. ber ©paten, the spade; baa 33iid)(ettt, the book; 

G. tea ©patent, of the spade; t>e^ 33ud)lein-$, of the book; 

D. bem ©paten, to the spade; bem 33it(Mein, to the book; 

A. ben ©paten, the spade ; baa 33itd)lein, (L. XXIV. 1) 

(2) Nouns of the old declension which do not end in e, el, 
en, er, (^en and lent, add ea (see 3) in the genitive, and e (see 
8) in the dative ; the accusative remaining like the nominative i 

N. ba^ 3at)r, the year ; ber $$aum f the tree ; 

G. te3 3afy~e3, of the year; bea 83aum-ea, of the tree; 
D. tem3af}r--e, to, for the year; Itm 33aum-% to, for the tree; 
A. la$ 3at)r, the year ; %m 33aum, the tree. 

NT. ^a$ $utt, the desk ; ber ©tafyl, the steel ; 

G. tea $uft-ea, of ^he desk; bea @taf)i-ea, of the steel ; 
1). tern $utt-e, to, for the desk; bem ©ta^l-e, to, for the steel | 
A. taa tyult, the desk; ben ©tat)t, the steel. 

(3) The e of the genitive and dative is often omitted in 
words not ending in el, en, er, &)tn, lent. Its omission or re* 
tention is to be determined by euphony al ^e* In nouns of 



Iftfc olLt> biaiENsio^. I 13. SB 

two or more syllables, unless the last one be under the full 
accent, e is commonly omitted in the genitive, and sometimes 
also in the dative ; as, ted Somgd, tent Mbni$ f instead of teS 
Roniges, tern $imig& 

FORMATION OF T^E PLURAL. 

\i) Nouns ending in e, el, en, er, fym and lent, have the 
same form in the plural as in the singular t 

Singular* Plurul. Singular. Plural, 

ber ©paten, tie ©paten? bad SBiidjletn, tie 93ud)feift$ 

ter ©goffer, tie ©differ ; bad SRtttel, tie SRttteL 

Exceptions, a. The following take the umlaut (L. 2. II.) : 

STpfet, £ammet* $anbet> hansel, SRantet, 9kM, 5»agtl r battel? ©djnakl, 

JBcgel, 3<iben ? (Garten, ©ra&cn> $afett> £)fcn> ©djabett* 3ftfer> SBruber, ©am* 

mer, ©djtoager* Scaler, Softer ; as, ber Slpfel, the apple; bie SCepfel, tlw 

apples etc. 
6. 5trageit> ?D?agen and SBa^ctt, also, sometimes take the umlaut in this 

plural. 

(5) Neuter nouns not ending in e, el, en, er, d)en, IHn, form* 
their plural by adding c ; 

ead $a$x, tie34 r "^; tad ©tM, bte©iM-e; 

sad $tt&, bie$ult-e; tad ©<i)af ? bie ©djaf^t* 

Exceptions. <& f$Io^ and Sto^r take the umlaut; Soot has tha 
regular form 33oote, or 23ote. 

6, The following neuter nouns add er in the plural, and those 
capable of it take the umlaut : 

9fo$» Stmt, Sdab, SBtib, &fatt» Sk<$, $>a<$, <Dorf» <Et> '8a<$, gag, gclb, 
©elb, ®cmfit§, ©ef$te$t, ©efpenft ©la3, - JY teb, (Draft, ©ra$> ©ut, $aupt, 
§>aud, 4>ofottaI> ©u^ttf $alfc» ^arnifol, $tw>, ^etb, flow, $raut, Samm, £ieb # 
£odj, SWauU $ejr, g>arlamettt> $fanb, $ab, SRegtment, 9kid, $inb, <£d)Ic§, 
€'<$»crt, ©pital, t^afc #cu> 2Bet&; as, bad *mt, the office ; bie Sfcmttr, 
th e offices, etc. 

c. All nouns, also, ending in n)um» masculine as well as neuter, add 
tx and take the umlaut; as, ber 9£eic§u)um, bie 0ieidjn)itm e r tc. 

(6) Masculine nouns not ending in e, el, en, er, form theic 
plural by adding e, and taking the umlaut, if capable of it : 



27 S the old declension: § 13. 

feer 23aum, bteSaume; ber @tut)f, bie @hi$fe; 

t)er «o^ f bie ^od^e j ber Satf, Me Salle* 

Exceptions, a. The following add er i 

SBofettidjt, £>orn, ©etfl, ®ott, £ei6, 2foum, Drt, 9tat& SotmtfflB, 2Mb, 
IBurm; as, ber ;Dorn, the thorn 5 bie ©timer, the thorns ete. 

b. The following reject the umlaut : 

tal, Star, 2ftenb, Sfortofr 2fa»alt, $rm, £>*$, £>ol#, XJorfcf, (Sibam, ®e* 
m-a^i, ®rab, §>aMd)t, $alm, £audj, §er&o(j, §uf, $unb, ^apcum, ih)Mb, $orl, 
Jhani#, Saut, geidjnam, fttdjs, $M$, SKonat, SOtonS, $lorb, 9>fab, 3)ropf, 
$>ul$, 3>unftr ©aim, <5<$aft, @<$u$, <3taar, ©toff, Sag, SrunfenWb, Un^oib, 
2>ielfraf, SBkbe^opf, Soft (men); as, ber 2fal, the eel; bie Slale, the 
eels; etc. 

(1) Feminine nouns ending in Iitttft and n i fj , as also 
those of the following list, form their plural by adding e, and 
taking the umlaut, if capable of it : 

Stngft Sfoaftuty, 3W, 33anf, Sraut, Sruft, Sauft, Sruc^t, ©an*, 
©ruft, ©ef^muift, §anb, £aui, fltoft, flrafi, $ui Aunfl, 2au« # 
Suft, Suft, 2Ra$t, SJkgb, 3Rau« f SRacfct, 5Ra$t, 9fot$, 9to$, ©an, 
®d)nur, ©tabt, SBan^, 2Beft, SCurft, 3unft, ijufammenfimft* 

(8) The two nouns Sautter and 2tocf}ier form their plural by 
taking the umlaut. 

DECLENSION 0# NOUNS IN THE PLUEAL* 

(9) Nouns whose plural ends in en, have all cases in this 
number alike ; those of other terminations have the genitive 
and accusative like the nominative^ and add n in the dative : 

N. bie <&$aten f the spades; tie SBiidjteln, the books, L. 24; 

G. ber ©paten, of the spades; ber 33M)fein, of the books; 

D. ben (Syatm, to the spades ; ben 33iid)Ietn, to the books j 

A. bie ©paten, the spades; bie 33M)Ietn, the books. 

N. bie SBaume, the trees ; tie ^itlte, the desks , 

G. ber 93iiume, of the trees; ber $ulte, of the desks; 

D. ben33aume-n, to the trees; ben $ulte-n, to the desks ; 

A. bie Saume, the trees ; bie §>utte, the desks, 



THH HEW DECLENSION. §14. 2?7 

§ 14. The new declension, 
terminations. 
Singular. Plural. 

Kom. , - — en or if. 

Gen. en or n. * en or it 

Dat. ——en or n. —en or tt 
Ace. en or n. — — en or it 

Singular. Plural. 

ST. 3 nr ®raf, the count ; bie ©tafen, the counts ^ 

G-. j§ei ©rafen, of the count; ber ©tafen, of the counts; 

D. bent ©tafen, to the count ; ben ©rafen, to or for the countsj 

A. %m ©Tafen, the count. bie ©rafen, the counts. 

K. ber ffalfe, the falcon; bie JJalfen, the falcons; 

G. be3 graifen, of the falcon ; ber ^affen, of the falcons; 

D. bem fallen, to the falcon; ben ftalfm, to the falcons; 

A. ^m SctKen, the falcon. bie Sfatfen, the falcons. 

(1) Feminine nouns which are indeclinable in the singular^ 
are, for the most part, of this declension, f Those ending in" 
the suffix i n, in the singular, double the n in the plural. These 
last are, also, often written with the double ft in the singular % 
as, tgelbitm, a heroine. 

Singular. Plural. 

ST. bie Sdjulb, I the debt; bie <Sd)ulben, the debts; 

G. ber <Sd)utb, of the debt ; bet ©djulben, of the debts ; 
D. ber Sd)Hlr>, to the debt ; ben Scfyulben, to the debts; 

A. bie ©cfyulb, the debt. Vu Sdjitlben, the debts. 

k 

- ' ■ ■ ■ r^V 

* When the singular ends in e, e (, a v or e v, the plural takes rt only. 

f SSI u 1 1 e r, mother, and X ci) t e r, daughter, are the only feminine nouns 
that have the terminations of the Nom., Gen. and Ace. plural like the singu- 
lar. They add n to the dative. 

I Feminine nouns, it will be remembered, have no variations of declension 
in the singular. As exceptions to this rule, however, some examples remain 
(vestiges of the ancient mode of declension), in which the Gen and Dat. ap- 
pear under the government of a preposition and varied by terminations. Thus, 
mtr or in (Sbrctt, with or in respect or honor: (S'bmt, from (S'bve • auf (£rbeu, 
on earth: (frbeti, from (§m ; mtt fvreuben, with^joy: Steuben, from Sreube ; 
von or cut Scifcn, on the part of:. 'S.eiten. from &ettt. 

The ending of the Genitive is sometimes, also, retained, when the word is 
under the government of a noun succeeding. Thus, 'SteS tjl mcittev ^raueB 
gc^wefler, this is my wife's sifter, 



ftVS OBSERVATtO^S Oft T&E bECtENSlOft, &C. § 1§„ 



N. bte £trCm, the shepherdess ; bte <§itttmten, the sheperdesses ; 

G. bev «§irun ; of tin) shepher- ber ^irtmiien, of the shepher- 
dess; dosses; 

£>. ber $inin, to the sheplier- ben <§ttitntteft, to the shepher* 

dess ; desses 5 

A. bte §irim, the shepherdess* bte <§itittmeit, the shepherdesses, 

§15. Observations on the declension of common nouns 
(1) Some have no singular : as-, 



Sicltern (Sftetti), parents. 
2(f) nen, ancestors, 
^fyett, alps. 
'Mnnaten, first fruits. 
■Betnfletbev, small clothes. 
Slattern, small-pox. 
'Q3rieffdjaftert ; tetters-, papers. 
tS'tnfiinfte, revenue, 
tyaften, Lent, fasts. 
fyerten, Holidays. 
lyuBftapfen, footsteps, 
©ebriifcer, brothers. 
©efatte, rents. 

©efdjnnftet, brothers and sisters, 
©liebmaftft, the limbs, 
£>anbei, quarrels. 
§efen, dregs, yeast. 
4?ofen, trowsers. 
^snftgmeft, marks, badges. 
Statbaunen, entrails. 



jtflften and Unfoftett, costs. 
Jtrteg$taufte, events of war. 
$niU, * people, folks. 
aJtafern and SRottyeltt, measles*, 
©Mfen, whey. 
Dftettf, Easter. 
$ftngftet't, Whitsuntide* 
Srcinfe, tricks. 
Steiprejfalien, reprisals, 
©djranfen, bounds. 
<S:pefen, expenses, 
©pottefn, fees. 
S^clien, spoils, 
©tubten, studies. 
S'raber or 3refcer, husks, teefc, 
Stitmmet, ruins. 
Stamen, troops. 
ffiBetfynadjten, Christmas. 
3ettlaufte, events of the times* 
Binfeu, interest of money. 



* ?ente mefely expresses plurality of persons. In this it differs from Wetts 
(rheu, {hrnnan beings) which has regard to the kiiid or species, as also from 
9ft aimer {men) which denotes particularly the sex. Those comjViunds, how- 
ever, of which, in the singular. sDtai'.ii tarns the last part, take generally, iu 
the plural, ¥eit e instead of banner ; thus, 
Singular 
^rfrettSniauti, workman; 
(SftehminH, nobleman; 
&mtfiiMmt. merchant ; 
$anbm<iiui countryman; 
The distinctive difference between ?ettfe and (Uiftuner may be forcibly shown 
by reference to the words C?beltute and (£fr«mianuer : (gbrleute means married 
people; (Stycmauuer signifies married men, i e husbands* 



Plnral 
SHrfatt* kit re workpeople. 
(Ibellcure. noblemen, 
.^aufleur*^ merchants. 
Sai'bleute, countrypeople 



OBSERVATIONS ON fftE i>£ciENSiOft, <frC. § 15. 2?® 

(2) Some have no plural. 
These are, 

a. Generic names of material substances; as. ba§ ©olb, gold! 
Silber, silver ; (Sifen, iron ; &c. 

b. General terms and those expressive of abstract ideas ; as, 
9ku6, pillage : SRufym, glory; ba£ 9Jie^ cattle; $ em unfit, rea- 
son ; @te(j r pride ; Jtctlte, cold ; &c. 

c. Some names of plants ; as, bet jtelji, the cabbage ; Jqo* 
fefeu, hops ; jtteffe, cresses ; &c. 

d. All infinitives employed as nouns, as also all neuter ad* 
jectives so employed; as, $tbm-, life; SJerlangen, wish; i>a§ 
2£ei§, white ; &c. 

e. Nouns* for the most part, denoting quantity* number*, 
weight or measure ; * as, 93uitb, bundle ; 2)u|enb, do^en ; ©ralD 
degree ; $funb, pound ; 3^, an m ch ; &c. 

(3) Some, in the plural, have two forms; conveying, 
however, in general, different, though kindred significations ; as^ 

Singular. Plurals-. 

bet 3?<mb, 5?cmbe, bonds, fetters ; 53cinber, f ribbons. 

tic 33anf, 33anfe, benches; 93<mfeit> banks (of com* 

nierce) fc 
ber 3?o<$ett, 3?ogen, sheets of paper; SSogert, arches, bows, 
ba^ 2)tng, £inge, things in general ; 2)tnger, little creatures* 
ber 3>ortt, Socmen, kinds of thorn ; ©otttet, thorns (more 

than one)* 
ber gfuf?, 8> «fk> feet ; $u$ e, feet (as meas- 

ures)* 
fca3 ®eftd)t, ® eft d)te, visions, sights ; ®e fleeter, faces. 
&a6 £ont, $ erne, sorts of horn; Corner, horns (more 

than one)* 
ba6 <$vb f $i?tje, sorts of wood ; *&5I$er, pieces of wood, 

* It should be noted that words expressing quantity, number, weight or 
measure, even if qualified by numerals signifying more than one, are rarely 
Found in the plural. Thus, in German, we say, ncmi .fflaffer. nine fathoms ; 
j>HHbn t l%at>, a hundred degrees; &C, where, though the numeral expresses 
tiore than one, the noun of measure is still in the singular number. 

Note, however, that femihines ending in e and words denoting periods of 
time, as also the names of coins, are, in general, excepted from the rule given 
in the note preceding 

t The singular of this is bag (neuter) 95cinb. from ber SBaub, we have afl* 
ether form: 33a use., volumes. 



280 FOREIGN NOUNS OF T»E OLD DECLENSION. § 16. § it. 



ber %abm, £aben, shutters ; 

ba3 £anb, £anbe, regions ; 

ba§ 5£fla% SKafyle, marks, seasons ; 

ber 9J?cmtt, Scanner, men; 

ber 3Konb, SKottben, months J 

ber Oxt f ©tie, places (any) ♦ 

bie (Ban, (Sauen, wild boars * 

ber ©cfyitb, ©cfyilbe, shields; 

bie ©djnut, ©djnute, tapes ; 

ber Sttaufi, ©trance, nosegays j 

ba$ 2Bort, SBorter, words (more than 

one) ; 

ber Qoll, Bofte, inches ; 



Cabell, shops. 

£ ember, states. 

-DHfyler, meals. 

SJftcmnett, vassals* 

SJJionbe, planets. 

©ertet, places (parti- 
cular). 

©cine, swine. 

©djitbcr, * sign-boards. 

<&<fymittn, daughters- 
in-law* 

<Strauj?eit, ostriches. 

SBotte, words (in con- 
struction)* 

gotle, tolls. 



§ 16. Foreign nouns. 

(1) Some nouns introduced into the German from foreigi: 
languages, retain their original terminations unaltered : as, bet 
3Kebicu$, a physician; plur. 9JJebict, physicians ; gcictutn, deed; 
gctcta, deeds. 

(2) Some masculines and neuters from the French and the 
English, merely affix $ to the genitive singular, which is re* 
tained in all the cases of the plural ; as, ber IPorb, gen. be£ ScrbS j 
plur. bie £orb$ ; ber Sljef ; gen. be3 G'ljefS ; plur. bie S'^efS. 

(3) But foreign nouns, for the most part, drop the termi* 
nations peculiar to the language whence they come, and sub* 
stitute those characteristic of the German. Some, accordingly, 
are found to be declined after the old declension, some aftei 
the new, and others, again, partly after the one and partly af* 
ter the other. 



§17. Foreign nouns of ti*e old declension. 

(1) Foreign nouns of the neuter gender, as also most of th« 
masculines, are of the old declension. 



Eri the singular * bdS ©$tl&* 



FOREIGN NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. § 18. 281 

(2) Among the masculines must be noted those appella 
tions of persons ending in 

al; as, jtatbtnat, cardinal, 
at; as, %lctax, notary. 
an; as, jvaftellcm, castellan, 
atter; as, 3)omituf atter dominican. 
ittet; as, 33 eneb if titter, benedictine. 
To which add 9lfo, $ro^fi, SPrtpfc SSifdfyof, Wtfyox, ©Jrtmi, %a* 
trott, Dfftjier. 

(3)' Some have, in the plural, the form er (e + r); as, »§c3* 
Vital, <&pital, iRamifbt, 3regtment, ^atlament; plur. <j5o&tntaIcr ; 
(Scaler, &c. 

(4) Some, in the plural, soften the radical vowels; as, 516 i, 
Rltat, SHfdjof, Qfyvx, Sacral, $ofyital, <S$ital, Stanal, Saltan, 
^arbitral, Softer, 2)Zatfrf), SKoraji, $atafi, $atft, $n>£ft; plur 
Slefcte, 3Htare, Stftfjofe, &c 

§ 18. Foreign nouns of the new declension. 

(1) To the new declension belong all foreign nouns of the 
feminine gender, and nearly all masculines which are the ap- 
pellations of persons. These latter are chiefly those ending in 

at j as, 3ibt>ocat, advocate, 
ant; as, *}lbjutattt, adjutant. 
tut; as, Stubent, student. 
if; as, Jtattyolif, Catholic. 
aft; as, $ljantafl, humorist, 
ijt ; as, Suriji, lawyer, 
eft ; as, <5taxo% Polish magistrate, 
et; as, $cet, poet. 
it; as, Sefuit, Jesuit. 
ct ; as, 3bict, idiot. 
e; as, Slebe, pupil. 
log ; as, Specie g, theologian. 
fo}>$ ; as, 5P^tIofo^ ; philosopher, 
item ; as, Qlfttonom, astronomer. 

(2) To these are to be added some othsr foreign mascu- 
lines ; as, bet @*kp$attt, the elephant; ber 2)ufat, the ducat; be? 



282 DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. § 19. §. 20. 

hornet, the comet; ber planet, the planet; bet Jtoufonant, the 
consonant; for Sprtitj, the prince; ber Stream, the tyrant. 

§ 19. Foreign -xquns partly of the old and partly of 
the new declension. 

(1 ) These are, first, neuters ending in fib; as, ba§ %a\ jiij, 
gen. ?j?afitt)$; plur. ^Jafjfoen; — secondly, titles of males in ev; 
as, JDoctor; gen. 35octor§; plur. ©octcten; — thirdly, neuters 
ending in a t, i I and u va, which, also, often have i before the 
en of the plural; as, jta^ttal, plur. Jtafcttattett; Stofitl, plur. 
S'ofjtUen; Stubtum, plur. (Stubien; — fourthly, the following 
masculines, 5lfteri£f, 3)tamant, ^afan, Jtapaim, 3m£ott, Jtonful, 
flRuSfct, fPantcffel, *Prafeft, jpfaim, (RuBin, @taat, £C;cr, Sraftat, 
J$in8 ; to which add 3ufeft, Qltont, 3$ronom, ©tatut and SJerB 
which are neuters. 

§ 20. Declension of proper nouns, 
in the singular number. 

(1) Names of males and females, except when the latter 
terminate in e, take 3 to form the genitive, which is their only 
variation ; * as, 

N. ^einrirf), (SltfaBcttj, 

G. £einrid)3, (S(ifa6etl;S, 

D. <$timld) f <S(tfa6etf^ 

A. <£>ehmrf). (SlifafcetJ). 

(2) Names of females ending in e, -is also of males ending 
in £, $ f d), X, or g, form the genitive in e & § ; f as, 

N. eutfe, M6nifc, 33o£, 

G. £uifen§, SeiGnifcenS, 23effen3 , J 

D. SJuife, S?cttni$, 83o£, 

A. £uife, Jeifcnig, 93of. 

* It ic customary with some writers to affix e n to the dative and accusative 
bf prope'r names ; but a better usage distinguishes these cases by prefixing the 
article; as, VM.HiUi; gen. Venture; dat. tun Ceffiiij] (instead of ^tfjuuuu) ; 
ace r e n V e f fin fl (instea d of 2 e f fin ^ e i ) . 

+ Th* 1 c« nifive dative and accusative of names ending in a, are sometimes 
formed by adding respectively t n e and c u, after dropping the a ; as, &taua; 
gen It -iiiv ii£- : dat ITiancn : ace Tiaiirn. 

t The urminatioD e n * sometimes suffers contraction ; as f 2Soj}'£, Sttbuifc'a. 



PROPER NAMES OF COUNTRIES, CITIES, <bC. § 21. § 22. 283 

(3) Names whether of males or females, when preceded 



by an article, 


are in-declinable ; as, 




N. 


ber Sniffer, 


bic S?uife ; 


G. 


bc3 <2d)iUet, 


bcr I'uife ; 


D. 


bem ©drifter, 


bcr Puife ; 


A. 


ben ©filler, 


bic Suife. 



(4 ) Foreign names, also, having the unaccented terminal 
tions a 3, e 3, i3, u 6, admit no variations of form, either in the 
singular or the plural. When, therefore, their case and num- 
ber are not otherwise sufficiently indicated, an article or a pre- 
position is used to point them out. 

§ 21. Proper nouns in the plural. 

(1) Proper nouns, when employed in the plural, conform, 
for the most part, to the rules for the declension of common 
nouns : the masculines being varied according to the old de- 
clension, and the feminities according to the new. * 

(2) Their inflection is in no wise affected by the presence 
of the article, nor do the radical vowels a, o, a, a\i f ever as- 
sume the Umlaut. 

Examples. 

N. bic £ctr3nt£c, ©djlegel, Suifett, 9Iimett; 

G. bcr Peifcm§e, ©djlegel, Puifen, Qlnncn ; 

D. ben Pei6m§en, ©djlegcln, Suifen, 5(imen; 

A. bic £ei(mifce, ©djlegel, Putfen, 5lnnen. 

§ 22. Proper names of countries, cities, <tc. 

(1) Proper names of places admit no changes of form for 
the purposes of declension, beyond the mere addition of $ to 
the genitive singular ; as, SSerlin ; gen. £8erlin$. 

(2) If, however, the word end in a sound not easily ad- 
mitting an after it, the case is distinguished by placing be- 



* Sometimes the plural is made by the addition of § to the singular; as. 
fcte&rbiliere tie.frevfcers; the Schillers, the Herders. Those ending in o add 
or lb j plural ue or tie u; as, (5au>j nom. plur (iatuiu or (Sattmcii, &*\ 



284 adjectives. § 23. § 24. 

fore it a noun preceded by the article ; or it is expressed by th§ 
prep, "o on. Example : bte ©tabt SDMtt}, the city Mayence* 
3>r Stonier <oon $reuperu S5te Sinmo^ner tton $ari$* 

§ 23. Observations. 

(1) When several proper names belonging to the same per* 
son, and they not preceded by the article, come together, the 
last one only is declined; as, Solemn ©)rijio!pI) 5lbcttmg3 ©prad)* 
lel;re ) John Christopher Adelung's grammar : — if, however, 
the article precede, none of them undergo change; as, bie SBetfe 
De$ Solemn ©ottloB Berber ; the works of John Gottlob Herder, 

(2) When a common and a proper name of the same per- 
son, preceded by the article, concur, the cominon noun alone is 
inflected ; as, ber Sob be§ St o rt i g 3 Suiting ; the death of king 
Louis : — if no article precede, the proper noun is declined ; * 
as, jtontg 2 u b to i g 8 Sob j king Louis' death. 

(3) When a Christian name is separated from a family name 
by a preposition (specially t> o n), the Christian name only ad- 
mits of declension; as, bie @ebtd)te SrtebrtdjS fc>on ©emitter; the 
poems of Frederick of Schiller : — if, however, the genitive 
precede the governing noun, the family name only takes the 
sign of declension ; as, grtebtid) fcon ©d)iHer3 SBetfe ; Frederick 
of Schiller's works. 

§ 24. Adjectives. 

(1) Adjectives are, in German, generally so varied in ter- 
mination, as to indicate thereby the gender, number and case 
of the words with which they are joined. Before treating of 
their inflection, however, we shall present and explain those 
significant suffixes, which are most commonly employed in for- 
ming adjectives from other words. 

(2) Here, as was done in the case of derivative nouns 
(§10. §11.), each suffix is given with its corresponding English 
equivalent ; its meaning explained ; and its use further illus- 
trated by a series of examples. 



* When the word Jq c r r is used with a proper noun, it is declined ; a% 
.germ ©cfcleflels ®ebtct)te, not »§err ©^legelS ©e&icfcte. 



EXAMPLES. § 25. § 26. 

§ 25. Suffixes used in forming adjectives, 
suffixes-, English equivalents. 



28B 



bav 


[a5&, eWe, ifo;] 


implies ability; sometimes, dig* 
position. 


en 


[«»;] 


points to something made of that 
expressed by the radical. 


*«ft 


[iVe, isA ;] 


denotes tendency, or inclination ; 
also resemblance. 


*9 


b/,fui;] 


represents a thing as being full 
of that denoted by the radical. 


idjt 


[y, o#s, tsA;] 


marks similarity of nature, or 
character. 


tier; 


[ly, ish, able ;] 


implies likeness or sameness either 
of manner or degree ; also, ability. 


tfd> 


psA, some, al ;] 


represents something as pertain* 
ing, or belonging to. 


fam 


[some, a6Ze ;] 


expresses inclination; sometimes 
ability. 




§ 26. 


Examples. 



en 

i;afi 

i.8 

Hi) 



\ ©tenjlbar; serviceable; tributary. 

| <Sid)t6at; that can be seen; visible. 

j ©often ; made of gold. 

(S31ei(er)n; * leaden. 

j Sngenbr/aft ; inclined to virtue ; virtuous. 

( SKeiftetfjaft; resembling a master ; masterly. 

i95lumtg ; full of flowers ; abounding in flowers 

Slum id) t ; flowery, that is, like flowers. 

SBcilbig ; woody, i. e. abounding in woods. 

©aljjtdjt ; saltish ; somewhat like salt. 

iSSritbetUd) ; brotherly, or like a brother. 

JMnttid) ) sickly. 

<Sit£jlid) ; sweetish ; somewhat sweet. 

33efregiid) ; movable. 



* The letters e r in this word are simply euphonic; while the t of c n if 
dropped, also, for euphony ($ 2. (8).j 



286 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. § 2?. 

t 3rbtfdE) ; earthly ; belonging to earth, 

tfd) -j^oetifd); poetical. 

( 33»fifrf) ; * quarrelsome. 



ant 



j 5(r6eitfantj inclined to work ; diligent. 
( 8'plgfam; inclined to follow (orders), L e. obe- 

dient. 



§ 27. Declension of adjectives. 

(1) Whether an adjective is to be inflected at all or not, 
depends wholly upon the way in which it is used ; for, when 
employed as a predicate, it is never declined ; f when as an at- 
tributive, almost always. Be the noun, therefore, masculine, 
feminine or neuter ; be it singular or plural ; if the adjective, 
to which it is applied, be used as u predicate (L. 14. Note.), its 
form remains unchanged : thus, 

3)er SHann ift gut; the man is good. - 

2>ie fix an ift gut; the woman is good. 

JDa8 Jtinb ift gut; the child is good. 

2>ie Planner [tub gut; the men are good. 

JDie Staucn finb gut; the women are good. 

3d) nennc ba3 Jtinb f dj n ; I call the child beautiful. 

3d) ttenne bie Jtinber f d) o n ; I call the children beautiful. 

S)er JtnaBe, Hug unb arttg j J the boy prudent and polite. 

(2 ) The following adjectives (and a few others) are never used 
otherwise than as predicates, and are, of course, indeclinable s 
aH;otb, averse. feirb, hostile, 

angfr, anxious. G^tffSit, hating, hated, 

anljeifdjtg, bound by promise. gar, done ; cooked enough, 

fcerett, ready. gang unb gete, current ; usual 

brad), fallow. eingebenf, mindful. 

* This is the ending commonly added to nnmes of places pointing fo 
things belonging to them ; as, ntflltfcb, fcbu^ebtfcb ($ 5. Note VII ), p &c. If 
however, a name be a compound, the suffix e r is used in place of t f c$ ; aa, 
bits l^crfcbiiv^ev $iev ; the Merseburg beer. 

t For the form of the adjective substantively employed after itidjf 8 or etttaS, 
see Lesson 14. 6, 

\ In this last example, the predicative use of the adjectives may be madj 
more obvious, by completing the structure, thus, bcr Aluabe, n>elcber i\\\c\ mid 
Mtig ift; th- 3 boy who is prudent and polite ; s( also, (S3 far, flng x\n> \ipfer. 



RULS | US. § 20. 287 

gefrofr, cneerfuj. nvtf), needful. 

getr*artiv], aware. mi&e, useful. 

gram, grudge-bearing, enter, crosswise* 
tjabiyafi, possessing, or possessed of. quitt, rid of. 

I; a us cie in em, skirmishing. tfydlfyaft, sharing, 

itre, wrong;, erring. un^a§, ill; sick. 

fimft, known. fcerfufttg, forfeiting. 
kto, distressing * sorry. 

§ 28. Declinable adjectives. 

(1) There are two declensions of adjectives, as there are 
two declensions of nouns : the Old and the New. In either of 
these, according to circumstances, are attributive adjectives 
declined. The following are the terminations of 

THE OLD DECLENSION. 

Singular. Plural 





Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


For all genders 


Kom. 


er. * 


e. 


e§. f 


Horn, e. 


Gen. 


e3 (en J). 


cr. 


eS (en J). 


Gen. er. 


Dat. 


em. 


er. 


em. 


Dat. en. 


Ace. 


en. 


9. 


e3.f 


Ace. e- 



§ 29. Rule. 

When the adjective stands either entirely alone before its 
substantive, or preceded and restricted by a word that is un- 

* Adjectives ending in el, en, e r, commonly drop the c upon receiving a 
suffix; us, 

fbel, nob-le ; eblev (not ebefcv) Sftamt; 

eben. even; rtner (not ebnter) 2Bea; 

lauter. pure ; lautres (not laftitercti) ©ofb. 

Upon adding en, the e of the termination (en) is dropped, while that of the 
root is retained; as, ben tjeitevu (instead of t;citve«) yft&rgeu ; ;l\e serene 
morning. 

t In these two places (nom. and ace neut.) the termination e § is often 
Knitted, when the adjective is under no special emphasis; as, fait (for faU 
teg) 3Baffer ; cold water. 

X Note that here (gen. sing masc. and neut ) it is now the common custom 
te adopt the new, instead of the old form; en, for the sake of euphony, beinq 
substituted for e$ : as, otn (Suit? fincb en (not ee) probed; a piece of fivsb 
bread. In a few adverbial phrases, however, the old fojm is still gene.mll} 
•wed ; as, gufeS 3JiUtt)§; of good courage. 



288 



Rule. § 30. §31. 



declinable (see L. XIV, 3) it follows the Old form of d >elensioii • 



thus, 

Masc, Sing. 
1ST. guter SSater, 
G. guteS (en) Setters 
D. gutem 93ater, 
A. guten 33ater. 

Plural, 

M . gute 3Jdter f 

G-. guter SSater, 

D. guten 33atem, 

A. gute 33ater. . 



Fern. /Sing, 
gute Gutter, 
guter Gutter 
guter SRutter, 
gute SDtutter. 

Plural. 
gute 9Rittter, 
guter abutter, 
guten aRnttetn, 
gute Sftutter. 



gutea ©eft>, 
gute§ (en) ®etbe8, 
jutem ©etbe, 
guteS ©elt>. 

Plural. 
gute ©elber, 
guter ©efoer, 
guten ©etbero, 
gute ©elber. 



(1) The following are examples, in which the adjective in 
each instance is preceded by a word, either undeclined or in- 
declinable (§33): 



Sttoa3 guter ffietn, 


some good wine. 


93tet frifdje 3RtId}, 


much fresh milk, 


SBenig falteS Staffer 


a little cold water. 


©ef)r gute Sttenfcfyen, 


very good men. 


©enug rotter 2Bein, 


enough red wine. 


%hnf lange 3al)re, 


five long years. 


9ltferlei fu^e 5rud)t, 


all kinds of sweet fruit. 


§ 30. The new declension. 


TERMINATIONS. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Masc. Fern. 


Neut For all genders 


Kom. e. e. 


e. en. 


Gen. en. en. 


en. en. 


Dat. en. en. 


en. en. 


Ace en. e. 


e. ca 



§ 31. Rule. 

(1) When immediately preceded and restricted by the de- 
Snite article, by a relative or demonstrative pronoun, or by an 



RULE. $ 31. 



289 



indefinite numeral (declined after the ancient form *), the ad- 
jective follows the new form of declension : thus, 

Masc. Sing. 
N. ber gute 2ftann, 
G-. beg guten 20?atme3, 
D. bent gutett 9Kanne, 
A. ben guten Warm. 



Plural. 



Fern. Sing. 
bie gute %xau, 
ber guten 8rau, 
ber guten grew, 
bie gute 8rau. 

Plural. 



NeuU Sing. 
ba§ gute Jtinb, 
beg guten Jtinbeg, 
bent guten <$tinbe, 
bag gute Jtinb. 

Plural. 



K. bie guten SKanner, bie guten grauen, bie guten Jtmber, 

G. ber guten 3Mnner, ber guten grauen, ber guten Jtinber, 

D. ben guten 3Rannew, ben guten Srauen, Un guten «Sinbecn, 

A. bie guten 3KSnner. bie guten %xaum. bie guten Jtinbet. 

Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. 
N. biefer fcfyone ©arten, btefe fcfyonen ©arten. 

G. biefeg [crimen ®axtm&, biefer fc^onen ©arten. 

D. biefem fdjonen ®arten f biefen fcfyonen ©arten. 

A. biefen fcfyonen ©arten, biefe fcfyonen ©arten. 

Feminine. 
N. toetcfye fcfyone 93lume, toeld)e (crimen f SSlumett 

G. tr>eld^er fcfyonen 33Iume, fretd)er fcfyonen SStuntett. 

D. toelcfyer fcfyonen 23Iume, toeldfjen fcfyonen aSlumen. 

A. toeldje fcfyone SSlume, toeldje [crimen f SSlumen. 



* $5 a S, however, the neuter of the definite article, differs from the old form, 
in having the ending a §, instead of e $ ; so also in compounds ; as, baSfelbe, 
the same ; baSJetttge, that. The other words referred to in the rule, are 

biefer, this. aller, every; all. 

jener, that. etmgev, some; several. 

rocldKV, who ; which. etftdSev, some ; several. 

folcfcev, such. manner, many a. 
jebev, jegltcfyer, each. 

Thiee of these, it may farther be noticed, viz. ttjeldjer, toelcfie, ttelc&eS, which ; 
4Ui)er, folcfye, folcfyeS, such ; and mauler, manege, mand)e§, many a ; some- 
:smes appear without the terminations of declension : in whi&h case the ad- 
^rctive assumes the suffixes denoting gender, &c. Thus, memci) fc^ihteS 53itb, 
many a beautiful picture. 

t With many authors it is the custom to reject the final n of the nom. ana 
ace. plural of adjectives preceded by etntije, etltcfye, mehrere, manege, rncle, 
fllle wcldn (oldpe and toenige: as, eintge b eutf d)e Jfritfet; some German 
empejors. 

13 



290 MIXED DECLENSION. § S2. 

Singular. Plur tL 

Neuter. 
N. mancfyeS fdfjotte $elb, mandfye fefyonen ^elber. 

G. mand)e§ fdjonett ffelbeS, manner fcfyonen §eft>&> 

D. mancfyem (rfjottett gelbe, mandjett fdjonen gelbtv • 

A. mandjeS fdjone gfelb, inandje fatten gfelbet. 

§ 32. Mixed declension. 

(1) We have seen that an adjective, when standing oJmi* 
before its noun, is varied according to the ancient declension ; 
and this, because the gender, number and case of the noun 
being very imperfectly indicated by the for n of the noun it- 
self, the terminations of the old declension, which, in this re- 
spect, are more complete, seem necessary in order the more 
fully to point out these particulars : thus, qui e t Sftcmn, good 
man; gute %xau, good woman; gute 3 8 eft, good field. 

(2) When, however, as often happens, it is itself preceded 
by some restrictive word (such as b e r, b i e, b a 8, the ; b i e* 
fer, biefe, b i e f e 3, this, &c), declined after the ancient 
form, and, therefore, by its endings, sufficiently showing the 
gender, number and case of the noun, the adjective passes into 
the less distinctive form, called the new declension : thus, bte* 
fer gute Sftcmn, this good man ; biefe gut; ftxau, this good wo- 
man ; btefe§ gute gfelb, this good field. 

(3) But there are some restrictive words which, though, 
in the main, inflected according to the more complete form of 
the ancient declension, are, in three leading places (nom. sing, 
masc. and nom. and ace. sing, neuter), entirely destitute of 
significant terminations. These words are, 

eta, a. fern, hw; its. 

fein, no ; none. \Sft t bar; your; their, 

mem, my. unfer, our. 

bein, thy. euer, your. 

(4) Hence it happens, that, while in every other case, the 
words just cited, follow the old form, and consequently require 
the subsequent adjective to adopt the new one, the adjective 
is itself made to supply the dktoiency, in ihe three places 



rule. § 33. 291 

named above, by assuming therein the terminations proper to 
the ancient form. In this way, is produced a sort of mixed 
declension, which, in books generally, is set down as the Third 
Declension. Thus, then, will stand the 

Terminations of the Mixed Declension. 





Muse. 


Fern. 


NeuU 




Plural. 


N. 


er (old form). 


e. 


e$ (old form). 


N. 


en.* 


g. 


en. 


en. 


en. 


G. 


en. 


D. 


en. 


en. 


en 


D. 


en. 


A. 


en. 


e. 


e§ (old form). 


A. 


en.* 



(5) It must be added, also, that the personal pronouns, 
id), I ; bu, thou ; er, he ; fie, she ; eS, it ; toit, we ; \f)v f ye or 
you ; fie, they ; cause the adjective before which they stand, 
to take this mixed form of declension. Hence the 

§ 33. Rule. 

(1) When the adjective is immediatly preceded and re- 
stricted by the indefinite article, by a personal or possessive pro- 
noun, or by the word f e i n, it assumes the endings charac- 
teristic of the mixed declension : thus, 

Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. 
N. eht gutet SSruber, 
G. eineS guten Stuberi, 
D. einem guten SSruber, 
A. einen guten S3ruber. 

Feminine- 
N. ntetne gitte ©djtoejiet, meine guten ©cfytoefiem. 

G. meiner guten ©d)tt>efier, meiner guten (Sdjtoeftern. 

D, meiner guten ©djtoejler, mehten guten ©dEjtoeftent 

A. meine gute ©d^ruejier, metne guren ©djtoeftern. 

Neuter. 
N. unfer guteS <$au$, unfre guten «§8ufer. 

G. uuferS guten £aufe3, unfrer guten ^ciufer. 

D. unferm guten <§aufe, unfern guten «§aufenu 

A. unfer gireS <§cm3, unfre guten £aufer. 

* See note page 105, also 2d note, page 289. 



292 FURTHER OBSERVATIONS ON ADJECTIVES. $ 34. 





Singular, 


PZwra?. 


ST. 


bit gute SKutter, 


tt)r guten abutter. 


G. 


betnet (ber*) guten Sautter, 


euer guten 9Mttet. 


0. 


bir guten Gutter, 


eucfy guten SHitttent 


\. 


bid) gute Gutter, 


eud) guten 3Riitter. 



§ 34. Further observations on adjectives. 

(1) When several consecutive adjectives come before and 
qualify the same noun, each has the same form, which accord- 
ing to the preceding rules, it would have, if standing alone ; as, 
guter, tottjer, tautrer 2Bein, good, red, pure wine; bte retfe, 
fdjone, gute 8rud)t, the ripe, beautiful, good fruit. • 

(2) But when of two adjectives which relate to the same 
noun, the second forms with the noun an expression for a single 
idea, which the first qualifies as a whole, the second adjective 
takes (except in the nom. sing, and in nom. and ace. plural) 
the new form of declension ; as, mit trorfn e m tt>eifi e n @cmb, 
with dry white sand ; where white sand, that is, sand which is 
white, is said also to be dry. 

(3) When two or more adjectives terminating alike, precede 
dnd qualify the same noun, the ending of the former is occa- 
sionally omitted ; such omission being marked by a hyphen ; 
as, ein rot^ (for totr)e8) unb toetfieS ©eftdfyt, a red and white 
face; bie fcfynmt^toflpgotbene &a1)ne, the black red golden 
banner. 

(4) Participles are declined after the manner of adjectives : 
thus, bet geltefcte SStubet, the beloved brother ; gen. be£ geltel)* 
tm a3tubet6, &c. 

(5) Adjectives, in German, as in other languages, are, by 
ellipsis, often made to serve in place of nouns. They then be- 
gin with a capital letter, and, excepting that ( they retain the 
forms of declension peculiar to adjectives, are in all respects 
treated as nouns. Their gender is made apparent either by 
their terminations or by the presence of an article or other defini- 
tive : as, ein 2>eutfd)er, a German; btefer JDeutfdje, this Ger- 

* Note that after the personal pronouns, in the genitive case, the article 
must be used ; as, betner, ber guten SJlutter ; of thee, the good mother. 



EUPHONIC CHANGES. § 35. § 36. 293 

man; bte $)eutfd)e, the German woman ; ba6 ©dfyorte, the beauti- 
ful; ba6 ©ute, the good; that is, that which is beautiful ; that 
which is good. So; also, ba£ SBeifi, the white ; ba£ ©run, the 
green ; ba6 9totr), the red ; <fcc. 

(8) When of two adjectives preceding a noun, the first is 
employed as an adverb to qualify the second, the former is 
not declined: thus, em g a n J neueS <$au&, a house entirely 
new : not ein g a n 5 e § neue§ $au$, which would mean, aw m- 
tire, new house. 

§ 35. Comparison of adjectives. 

(1) In German, as in English, the degrees of comparison 
are commonly expressed by means of the suffixes e X and e ji t 
thus, 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

toilb, wild; toilbet, wilder; totlbeji, wildest. 

feft, firm; fejter, firmer; fejieft, firmest, 

oreiji, bold; btetjiet, bolder; bteifieft, boldest. 

1 3, loose ; 1 f e t, looser ; 1 f e ji, loosest. 

na% wet; naffer, wetter; naffefi, wettest, 

rafd), quick; rafter, quicker; rafd)eji, quickest, 

ft 1 g, proud; ji 1 j e r, prouder ; jiolgeji, proudest. 

§ 36. Euphonic changes. 

(1) When the positive does not end in b, t, ft, 3, % fdj, 
or j, the e of the superlative suffix (e ji) is omitted ; as, 

bfanf, bright; Hanfer, brighter; Hanf ji, brightest. 

flat, clear; flarer, clearer; ftarji, clearest. 

rein, pure; reiner, purer; reinji, purest. 

fd)i5n, fine; fdjo net, finer; fd)onji, finest. 

(2) When the positive ends in e, the e of the comparative 
suffix (e r) is dropped ; as, 

toeife, wise; toetfer, wiser; toetfefi, wisest. . 

m u b e, wear y ; m u b e x, more weary ; m u b e ji, most weary. 



294 DECLENSION OB COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. $ 37* 



(3) When the positive ends in el, en or et, the e of 
these terminations is commonly omitted, upon adding the com- 
parative or superlative suffix ( e V or ft) ; as, 

e b e I, noble ; ebler (not ebeler), nobler • e b e I jt, noblest, 
ttocfen, dry; itoefnet (nottrocfenet), drier; ttocfen ft, driest. 
ictVfer,brave; t apfrer (not tctyferer), braver; ta!p f erfl, bravest, 

(4) When the positive is a monosyllable, the vowel (if it 
be capable of it) commonly takes the Umlaut, in the compara- 
tive and superlative ; as, 



alt, old; 

g r o B, coarse ; 

Hug, wise ; 



alter, older; 
grower, coarser ; 
finger, wiser ; 



a 1 1 e ft, oldest, 
g r i ft, coarsest, 
f I u g ft, wisest. 



(5) Exceptions. From this last rule, however, must be 
excepted nearly all those adjectives containing the diphthong 
a u : as, laut (loud), lauter, lauteft; raul? (rough), ranker, 
X a u ^ e ft So, also, the following : 

Bunt, variegated. faapp, tight, 

fabe, insipid. lai)m, lame. 

fat)l, fallow. la% weary, 

falb, fallow. lo3, loose, 

ffad), flat. matt, tired. 

ftoffj glad. na&t, naked, 

gerabe, straight £latt, flat, 

glatt smooth. Iplitmp, clumsy. 

t)or/l, hollow. rot), raw. 

I)oib, amiable. rimb, round. 

tdf)l, bald. fadjt, slow, 

fatg, stingy. fanfi, gentle. 



fatt, satisfied, 
ftfjlaff, loose, 
frfjlan?, slender, 
fcfytoff, rugged, 
fiarr, stiff. 
jlotj, proud, 
jiraff, stiff; tight, 
ftumm, dumb. 
ftutttyf, blant. 
toll, mad. 
fcoll, full. 
gat)m, tame. 



§ 37. Declension of comparatives and superlatives. 

(1) Comparatives and superlatives are subject to the same 
laws of declension, that regulate adjectives in the positive. 
Thus, after adding to fd)5n, fair, the suffix (et), we get the 
comparative form fct) Otter, fairer; which is inflected in the three 
wrays : thus, 



DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. § 37. 295 







a. 


OLD 


FORM. 








Singular 






Plural. 




Masc. 


Fern 




NeuL 


For all genders 


N. 


fcfyonerer, 


e, 




eg, 


fdfyonerc. 


a. 


fcfyoner e § (en) 


, et, 




e$ (en), 


fcfyonerer. 


D. 


fcfyoner e m, 


er, 




etn, 


fdjoner e n. 


A. 


\djOmx c tt, 


e, 




t6, 


fdjoner e. 






b. 


NEW 


FORM. 






Masc. 


Fem. 




NeuL 


For all genders 


N. 


ber [porter e, 


(bie) 


-e, 


0>aS) -e, 


bie fdfyonerett 


G. 


bc3 fdfyoner c tt, 


(ber) 


-en, 


(beg) -en, 


ber fdjoneren. 


D. 


bent fcfyoner e it 


r (ber) 


-en, 


(bent) -en, 


btn fcfyoner e it 


A. 


ben fdfyoner e tt, 


(bie) 


-e, 


(baa) -e, 


bie fdfjoner e n. 






c. 


MIXED FORM. 






Masc. Sing. 




Fem. 


Sing. 


Neut. Sing. 


N. 


imfet * fcfyoner e r, 


(unfere) -e, 


(unfer) -e §. 


G. 


unfereS fdfyoner e tt, 


(unferer) -e n, 


(unfereS) -e tt 


D. 


unferem f potter e n, 


(imferer) -e tt, 


(unferem) --ett 


A. 


unferen fdfyoner e tt, 


(unfere) -e, 


(unfer) -e *. 



Plural for all genders, 
BT. unfer e fdfyoner e n. 
G. unfer e r fcfyimer e tt 
D. unferen fdfyonerett 
A. unfer e fdfjoner e tt 
(2) So likewise the superlative. In the superlative of the 
Bid form, however, the vocative case only 'is used. Thus we 
have in the 

a. OLD FORM. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 



TS. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

V. 



S3 



3 
03 



riefcft e r ®ater ! f tyetterfi e ©djtoefter ! fcfyonjt e 6 JEtnb ! 



* Sometimes the e in the endings of pronoun? and comparatives, is omitted, 
or transposed : thus instead of unfeveS fdjoiicren, we may say unfer € fcfco* 
ner n, or unfres, fcfconevtt. 

t Heretofore the vocative has not been set down in the paradigms, because 
r is, in form, always like the nominative. 



296 



OBSERVATIONS. § 38. 



Plural 
N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. liefcfi e 93aier 



Plural. Plural. 



Masc. 

N. ber fcfyonjl e, 
G. be3 fcfyonjt e n, 
D. bent fdfjonfien, 
A. ben fd)onfi e n, 



i ttjeuerjl e ©cfytoeftem ! 

6. NEW FORM. 

Singular. 

Fern. Neut. 

(bie) -e, (baS) -e, 

(bet) -e n, (be3) -e n, 

(ber) -e n, (bent) -e n, 

(bie) -e, (ba^) -e, 






fcfyonjte Jtmber! 



Plural. 

For all genders* 
bie fdjonfiett 
ber fdjonfiett 
>en fdjonjTea 
bie fd)onjien. 



ilfasc. Sing. 

H". unfer fdjonfi e r, 

G. unfereS fcfyonji e n, 

D. unferent fd^ottjl e n, 

A. unferen fcfyonji e n, 



(unfer) -e & 
(unfereS) -e n. 
(unferent) -e tt 
(unfer) -e 0. 



MIXED FORM. 

Fern. Sing. 
(unfere) -e, 
(unferer) -e n, 
(unferer) -e n, 
(unfere) -e, 

Plural for all genders. 
N. unfere fdjonjien. 
G. unferer fd)onjien. 
D. unferen fdjonfien. 
A. unfere fdjonft e n 

§ 38, Observations. 

(1) In place of the regular form of the superlative, prece- 
ded by the article and agreeing with the noun in gender, num- 
ber and case, we often find a circumlocution employed ; which 
consists in the dative case singular of the new form preceded 
by the particle a nt : thus, bie $age ffnb im SBinter am furje* 
jien, the days are shortest in the winter. The explanation is 
easy : a ttt, compounded of an {at), and bent, the dative of 
ber (the), signifies at the. Translated literally, therefore, the 
sentence above will be : The days in winter are at the shortest ; 
that is, at the shortest (limit) : where, in the German^ furje* 



iitfttfGtJLAfc AttD DEFECTIVE FOfcMS. § 39. 



291 



ftett agrees with some noun in the dative understood, which ft 
governed by a tt. But the phrase is used and treated just as 
any regular superlative form would be under the same circum* 
stances. In like manner, auf (upon) and jit (to) combined 
respectively with the article (auf b a 8 and $ it b e m), and 
producing the forms auf§ and jum, are employed with adjec* 
tives in the superlative : thus, aufS fd)#nfl:e eingetid)tet, arranged 
upon the finest (plan) ; $um fd)$nftett, to, or according to the 
finest (manner). These latter forms, however, are chiefly em* 
ployed to denote eminence, rather than to express comparison* 
Freely rendered, therefore, cmf3 fcfjonfle and jitrn fdjonftett will 
be : very finely > most beautifully or the like. 

(2) Sometimes aller (of all) is found prefixed to supertax 
tives to give intensity of meaning ; as, bet alletBefte, the best 
hi all, L e. the very best ; bte allerfcfyonjle, the handsomest of 
all, i. e. the very handsomest. 

(3) When mere eminence > and not comparison, is to be ex* 
pressed, the words au^etjl (extremely) and f)od$ (highest) ar8 
employed : as, bie3 iji etne auf etfi fdjone 93Iume, this is a veiy 
beautiful flower. 



Positive* 
gut, good; 
f)od), high; 
na^e, near; 
btel, much ; 
toentg, little ; 
qxo% great; 
&atb, early; 
wanting. 



n 

to 
to 
n 



§39* Irregular and 

Comparative. 
Beffer, better; 
^ofjer, higher; 
naljet, nearer; 
tneljr, more; 
mtnbet, less; 
grower, greater ; 
eljer, earl/er; 
icantong* 
aufete, outer ; 
inner, inner; 
fcotbet, fore; 
Winter, hinder; 
cBet, upper; 
untet, under ; 
13* 



DEFECTIVE FORMS* 

Superlative, 
Beft or am Bejten, best. 
l?od)fi or am ^od^ften, highest 
nadjji or am nacfyfien, nearest, 
meift or am meljien, most, 
minbeft or am minbeften, least, 
gtof? t or am grof ten, greatest, 
etfi or am etften, earliest. 
h%t or am le|ten, latest* 
auferjl, uttermost* 
tnnetft, innermost* 
fcotbetft, foremost, 
^interft, hindermost* 
oBerft, uppermost, 
unterfi, undermost. 



198 ADJECTIVES COMPARED BY MEANS OF ADVERBS* § 40. § 4x 

§ 40. Observations. 

(1) Note that t)od) (high), in the comparative, drops, while 
ttat) (near), in the superlative, assumes the letter c : thus* 
i)od), comp. l)0l)et; ttal), comp. tta1)et, sup. ttacfyft. 

(2) That ittel)t (more), the comparative of inel, has two 
forms in the plural, ntei)t e or mel)r ere; and that the latter 
(met)tere) is the more common one. It has the use and mean* 
ing of the English word several : as, 3d) faJ) metjtete ©olbatett, 
I saw several soldiers. 

(3) That the superlative of gttffi (great) is contracted into 

(4) That etft, the superlative of etjet (earlier), is a con- 
traction for el) eft. 

(5) That from bet etfte (the earliest or first) and bet legtt 
{the latest or last), are formed the correlative terms etftetet, 
the former, and te|tetet, the latter. 

(6) That the last six words in the list (§ 39) are formed 
from adverbs, and are comparatives in form rather than in 

fact. 

§ 41. Adjectives compared by means of adverbs. 

(1) When the degrees of comparison are not expressed by 
suffixes, the adverbs met)t (more) and am meiftett (most) are 
employed for that purpose : thus, 

Positive, Comparative. Superlative. 

Gttgft, anxious / mel)t attgft ; am meiftett angft 

betett, ready ; mel)r Berett ; am meiftett Bereit 

dttgebettf, mindful ; metjt eutgebettf ; am meiftett etttge* 

bent 
fetttb, hostile ; mel)t feittb ) am meiftett fetttb, 

gang unb gefce, current; mel;t gang uttb gefce; am ttteiftett gang 

uttb gefie. 
gar, done ; cooked ; mef)t gat j am meiftett gat. 

gram, averse ; mef;t grant j am metfiett gtattt 

tare, astray ; mel)r irte ; am meiftett itte, 

fimb, public ; mel)t funb ; am meiftett futtl 



¥ttfe CARDINAL NUMBERB. § 42. § 43. $ 44. 2§§ 

*eib, sorry ; mtifx letD ; am metften letb. 

nu|, useful ; me^r nu| ; am meiften nu|. 

red)t, right ; tnet)t xt&jt ; &m meijien recfjt 

t^ei^aft, partaking ; meijT il)eilf)af(: ; am meiften tf)eil* 

§ 42. Observations. 

The above method of comparison, which is commonly called 
the compound form^ is chiefly used in cases: 

(1) Where a comparison is instituted between two different 
qualities of the same person or thing : as, er ift xntijx lufiig aU 
trautig, he is more merry than sad ; er teat mef)r gtitcfttcfy -aI8 
ta^fer, he was more fortunate than brave. 

(2) Where the adjectives, like those in the list above, are 
never used otherwise than as predicates. 

(3) Where the addition of the suffixes of comparison would 
offend against euphony, as in the superlative of adjectives end- 
ing in ifdj-j thus, batfcarifd). 

§ 43. THE NUMERALS, 

In German, as in other languages, the numerals are classi- 
fied according to their signification. Among the classes thus 
produced, the first, in order, is 

% 44. The cardinal numbers. 

The cardinal numbers, whence all the others are derived 
are ttose answering definitely to the question : "How manyV 
They are 



(Sm§ (eitt, cine, 


em) 1. 


jefyt 


10. 


jtoei 


2. 


elf 


II. 


bret 


3. 


jtuolf 


12. 


Jriet 


4. 


bretse^n 


13. 


ffotf 


5. 


inerjefyn 


14. 


fed;S 


8. 


funfjefjit 


15. 


fleBcn 


7. 


fedfijetjn 


16. 


adit 


8. 


ftefcenjefyt or ffefcjeljn 


17. 


etetm 


9. 


«djt§el)n 


1& 



$ao 



fti& CARDINAL NUMBERS. § 44* 



neunje^n 


19. 


^uubext 


100, 


jtransig 


2a 


Ijunbert unb ein§ 


101. 


eht unb gwaftjtfj 


21. 


|unbert unb pm 


102. 


jtoei unb jtoanjig *c. 


22. 


^unbert unb brei : 


R. 103. 


bretfiig 


30. 


gfoei !)unberi 


200. 


eitt unb breifitg 


31. 


brei ljunbert 


300. 


jtoei uni breiftg jc 


32. 


taufenb 


1000. 


kterjtg 


40. 


gtoei tauftrto 


2000. 


fiinfjig 


50. 


brei taufenb 


3000. 


fedfoig (not fedf^tg) 


60. 


je^n taufenb 


10,000. 


fiefcenjig or ffetijtg 


70. 


^unbert taufenb 


100,000. 


atf)t$tg 


80. 


etne SKUIlon 1,000,000. 


neunjig 


90. 


jtoei SMumeft 2,000,000. 



(1) Observe that the cardinals are, for the most part, 
indeclinable. 

(2) (Sin, (one) however, is declined throughout like the 
indefinite article. It is, in fact, the same word with a different 
use ; and is distinguished from it, in speaking and writing, only 
by a stronger emphasis and by being usually written with a 
capital initial* This is the form which it has, when immediately 
before a noun, or before an adjective qualifying a noun. Thus % 



Masculine. 



Feminine. 

Sine Stau, 
©Ln guter Sftamt, @ine gute gran, 

q j (§me8 SRamteS, (Shier $rau, 

* ( (StneS guten aJtamteS, Siner guten ftrau, 



-*r j din $Jamt, 



Neuter. 

@n Jtinb. 
(Sin guteS Jttnb, 
(SineS itinbeS. 
(SineS gutenitin* 
be3; &c. 



(3) In other situations, tin follows the ordinary rules of 
declension: thus in the 







a. Old l<orm. 




N. 


einer, 


eine, eme§, 


one. 


Gk 


tw% f 


einer, etneS, 

b. New Form. 


of one, <fec. 


N. 


ber etne, 


bie etne, H$ etne, 


the one. 


G. 


beS einen, 


ber einen, beS einen, 


of the one, &c, 



OltDIITAL NUMBERS. $ 45. SOI 

c. Mixed Form. 
N nrntt etnet, meine erne, meitt etoeS, my one. * 
G. ntetneS emeu, metner einett, meine0 eitten, of my one, &e 

(4) j&tvti (two) and ferei (three), when the cases are not 
sufficiently pointed out by other words in the context, are 
declined : thus, 

ST. Btoei, f two, fetei, three. 

G. Stotitx, of two, breiet, of three. 

D. Qtvekn, to or for two, Steiett, to, or for three* 
A. 3to'*i, two ? &***/ three. 

(5) All the rest of the cardinals, when employed substari^ 
lively, take ett in the dative : except such as already end in thes# 
letters; as, id) tjate ei Sunfett gefagi, I have told it to five 
(persons). 

(6) $ u n jD e 1 1 and £ a it f e n $ are often employed as col- 
lective (neuter) nouns, and regularly inflected ; as, nom. bct§ 
<§imbett, gen. be6 <§unUTt%, plural (nom.) bie «§tuftette. 9JJU* 
I i n is, in like manner, made a noun (feminine,) and is, in the 
singular always preceded by the article ; as, dine CRiHien, a 
million. 

C7) In speaking of the cardinals, merely as figures or cha* 
racters, they are all regarded as being in the feminine gender i 
as, bie din3, the one, bie Sttiti, the two, bie $)U'i, the three j 
where, in each case, the word, $afjl f (number), is supposed td 
be understood : thus bie (Qofyl) brei, the (number) three. 

§ 45. Ordinal Numbers. 

(1) The ordinal numbers are those, which answer to the 
question : " Which one of the series ? " They are given below, 

* In relation to the numeral t i ti note, further, these three things : 

1. That in merely counting, it has the termination of the neuter, with *, 
however, omitted ; as e t it 8, $ m e t, b r e t, one, two, three, &c. 

2. That e t n may be used in the plural, when the design is to distinguish 
classes of individuals; as, bie (linen, the ones, ber (5tnen, of the ones, fyc just 
as, in English, we say, the ones, the others. 

3. That e i rt, unlike the English one, cannot be employed in a suppletory 
way, to till the place of a noun: thus, we cannot say, in German, a new one, 
a good one, Sfc. In such cases, trie adjective stands alone. 

t In place of B w ? i, betbe (both) which is declined like an adjective in the 
plural, is often employed ; as betbe Stiifleii. both eyes; bie betben ^ruber, both 
the brothers. The neuter b e i b e § never refers to persons. 



ORDINAL NUMBERS. % 4&. 



for the purposes of comparison, side by side with the cardinals, 
and in the form required, by the definite article preceding • 
for the ordinal numbers are regularly inflected according to 
fcho rules already given for the declension of adjectives. 



CARDINALS. 

^m6 (em, cine, em) 1. 
toei 2. 



bret 
t»ier 
funf 



ftetjen 

acfyt 

neun 

|e$tt 

elf 

jtoolf 
bretjef/n 
t>terjel)n 

Hmfjefjrt 

Te<%(;n 



3. 
4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

t). 
10. 
II. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 



fieten^n or jfeBfcc^ft 17. 

tdjt^n 18. 

neun^ti 19. 

gtoanjig 20. 

tin tmb jruanjig 21, 

^>ei unb jrt>attjig it 22. 

breifHg 30. 

em unb bretf ig 31. 

$n?et unb btetfjig ic. 32. 

ineqtg 40. 

ffinfjig 50. 

fecf>$ig (not fed&Sgtg^ 60. 

fiefcen^tg or jleBjtg 70. 

ad)t ? tg 80. 

&eun$i$ 00. 



ORDINALS. 

ber etfte (not ber etnte), the first. 

v jjtoeite (also ber anbere), the 
second. 

„ brttte (not bretie), the third. 

„ fctette, the fourth. 

„ fiinfte, the fifth. 

„ fed)e>te, the sixth. 

v fietente, the seventh. 

„ acfyte (not adfjtte), the eighth 

j, tteurrte, the riinth. 

„ jetynte, the tenth. 

„ elfte, the eleventh. 

1t Jtoolfte, the twelfth. 



it 



btetje^nte, the thirteenth. 
„ inetjetjnte, the fourteenth. 
ff funfjet^nte, the fifteenth. 
f , fed)jel)nte, the sixteenth ; ite 
■„ fteBertje^nte or ftetjetjnte. 
„ acfyt$el)nte. 
„ tteunje^nte. 
■ v gtoangigjie, 
„ ein unb stoanjtgfte. 
n jtoei unb Jtoanjtgfte it 
„ breiftgjle. 
v em unb breif tgjie. 
„ $tt>ei unb brei^igjle it 
i, fcierjlgfte. 
,, funfjigjte. . 

if W9f*'-' 

n ftefeen^igfie or fieBjigfifc. 

r; aAtjtgjfc. 

„ neunjtgfie. 



STuMeRALS. § 46. 



SCMl 



pimbert 100. 

fnmbert unb ein§ 10L 
fcunbert unb #wi 102. 
Ijunbett unb bret ac. 103. 
jtt?et fmnbett 200. 

bret ^unbert 300. 

taufenb 1000. 

jttet taufenb 2000. 

bret taufenb 3000. 

jet)n taufenb 10,000. 

fnmbert taufenb 100,000. 

(2) Obse 



ber t)unbertjle. 

r/ ljunbert unb erjte* 

„ tyunbert unb jtoettt. 

„ tyunbert unb britte* 

„ jtoettjunbertjie. 

„ bret^unbertfte. 

„ taufenbfte. 

„ jftettaufenbfte. 

f) brettaufenbfie 

n ^etnttaufenbfie. 

„ ljunberttaufenbfte it 



iTE tliat, in tlie formation of the ordinals from 
the cardinals, a certain law is observed : viz. from jteet (two) 
to neunjeljn (nineteen) the corresponding ordinal, in each case 
(b r i x t e and a d) t e excepted), is made by adding the letters 
t e ; as, Jfrei, two ; jfret t e, second ; fcier, four ; sner t e, fourth^ 
&c. Beyond that number (nineteen), the same effect is pro* 
duced by adding ft e ; as, jftanjtg, twenty ; Jtoanjtg ft e, twen- 
tieth ; &c. (Srfte is from e^er (before). 

(3) Note, also, that ber anbere (the other) is often used in 
place of ber jtoette ; but only in cases where two objects only 
are referred to. 

(4) In compound numbers, it must be observed that the 
last one only, as in English, bears the suffix (te or fte) ; but in 
this case, the units usually precede the tens : thus, bet biet 
unb jfranjtg fi e, the four and twenties. 

(5) We have, also, a sort of interrogative ordinal, formed 
from tone (how) and inel (much), which is used when we wish 
to put the question : Which of the number ? as, ber ftneinetfte 
tft Dcute ? what day of the month is to-day ? 5£>a6 tmebtelfte ijl 
e§ ? how many does that make ? 

§ 46. Distributive Numerals* 

The distributives, which answer to the question : "£&& 
many at a time ? " are formed* as in English, by coupling car- 
dinals by the conjunction unb ; or by using before them tb# 
particle j e (e»er ; at a time) ; tl usj 



S04 fftrtte&Ais. § 47. § 48. § 49. 

itoei unb jtoei, fa>o ara£ *wo, or je jVt>ei A *wo a* a time; 
brei unb bf et, tfAree and three, or je brei, three at a time, M 

$ 47. Multiplicative Numerals. 

The multiplicatives, which answer to the question : "How 
many fold ? " are formed from the cardinals by adding th& 
suffix fad) (fold) or faltig (having folds) ; thus, 

einfadj or etttfalitg, * onefold or single ; 

$toeifadj| or jtoetfatttfj, twofold or having two folds \ 

bteifad) or bmfaltig, threefold or treble ; 

kietfad; or tjterfaltig, fourfold or having four folds, &c, 

§ 48. Variative Numerals. 

Variatives, which answer to the question ; " Of how many 
kinds ? " are formed from the cardinals by affixing 1 e i (a sort 
or kind), the syllable e X being inserted for the sake of eupho^ 
fry; thus, 

emetlet, of one kind ; fcteretlet, of four kinds J 

#toeterlel, of two kinds ; fimfetlei, of five kinds ; 

btetetlei, of three kinds ; tnancfyerlei, of many kinds ; <fc& 

§ 49. Dimidiative Numerals. 

The dimidiatives, which answer to the question : " Which 
(l e. which of the numbers) is but a half? " are formed from 
the ordinals by annexing the word 1)at6 (half) ; thus, 

jtoeitel;at6, f the second a half, that is, one whole and a 

half; 11 
bttttel)at6, third a half, i. e. two wholes and a half ; 2£. 
frtertri)aI6, the fourth a half i. e. three wholes and a half J 

3^ ; &c. 



* (Slnfaltitj is applied to what is simple, artless or silly. 

t Instead of ^tvetfeftdb, the word in common use is anbevthan>: the pat 
i\ \\ o c v t being from b e x a n b er e, the second. The word jtould be an* 
ber e fyalb ; but the final e is exchanged for a t, probably, for ihe sake of as 
similating it, in form^ to the rest of the words of this class 



NUMERALS. § 50. 5 51. 305 

§ 50. Iterative Numerals. 

The iteratives, which answer to the question : " Hem often 
or how many times ? " are formed from cardinals and from in- 
definite numerals, by the addition of the word mal * (time) ; 
thus, 

e i n m a I, one time ; once ; b i e x m a t, four times ; 

fiinfmaf, five times; jtoeimal, two times ; twice ; 

b r e t m a I, three times ; f e <f) $ m a I, six times ; 

iebeSmal, each time ; & i e I m a I, many times ; <fec. 

§ 51. Distinctives. 

( 1 ) The name, distinetives, has been applied to a class of 
ordinal adverbs, which answer to the question : " In tvhat place 
in the series ? " and which are formed by affixing e it 8 to the 
ordinal numbers : f ,hus, 

e r ft e n 3, first or in the first funftenS, fifthly ; 

place ; 

a to e i t e n 0, secondly ; f e d) 3 1 e it 3, sixthly ; 

britten^, thirdly ; f i e 5 t e n 3, seventhly ; 

b i e r t e n 3, fourthly ; a d) t e n 3, eighthly ; &c. 

(2) Under the name, distinctives, may, also, be set down a 
class of numeral nouns, formed from the cardinals by the addi- 
tion of the suffixes e X, i n and 1 i n g, which are used to desig- 
nate one arrived at, belonging to, or valued at a certain num- 
ber : thus, 

5 e d) 1 1 g e x, sixtier, i. e. a man sixty years of age, or one 

of a company of sixty ; 
3) r e i c t, one valued at three, i. e. a coin of 3 pfennigs 

Prussian ; 
(5 1 f e r, eleven-er, i. e. wine of the year 1811 ; 
3 to 1 1 1.t n g, two-ling, i. e. a twin, &c. 



* 3ft a I is sometimes separated from the numerals, and is then regularly 
declined as a neuter i sun. 



300 NUMERALS. § 52. % 53. 

§52. Partitives or Fr actionals. 

Under this name (partitives) are embraced a class of neuter 
n<mns, answering to the question : " What part ? " which are 
formed by affixing to the ordinals the suffix t c t f (part) : 
thus, 

3) r i 1 1 e I, a third ; • ©teBentel, a seventh , 

93 t e r t e I, a fourth ; 51 d) t e I, an eight ; 

8 ii n ft e t, a fifth ; 0J e u n t e I, a ninth ; 

@cd)8tel, a sixth ; 3*^tttel, a tenth ; &e. 

§ 53. Indefinite Numerals. 

(1) The indefinite numerals, which are, for the most part, 
used and inflected as adjectives, are commonly divided into 
such as serve to indicate number, such as merely denote quan- 
tity, and such, finally, as are employed to express both. 
Those denoting number only, are 

f ebet, jebe, jtebe§, each, every ; 

jegtidjer, — e, — e3, „ „ ) old and unusual forms of 
jebtoeber, — e, — e8, „ „ J jeber. 

manner, mancfye, tncmdjeS, many a ; many (in the plural). 
meljrere, several ; plural of mtijX, more. 

(2) Those denoting quantity only, are 

e t to a 8, some ; which is indeclinable. 

g a tt }, the whole, as opposed to a part ; declined generally 
like an adjective ; indeclinable, however, when placed be- 
fore neuter names of places and not preceded by an ar- 
ticle or pronoun ; as, ganj JDeutfdjIanb, all Germany ; (with 
the article or pronoun preceding) ba6 ganje S)eutftf)tanb, 
the whole of Germany ; fern gcmjet ditid)fyum f his whole 
riches. 

6 a I i, half, follows the same law, in declension, as the word 
gait J above. 

t X e I is simply a contracted form of the word X f) e 1 1, a part. From 20 
upwards, note that ft e I (instead of t e I) is added ; as, Jttanjiflftel, the twea- 
ftenih, &c. 



INDEFINITE NUMERALS. §53. SO? 

(3) Those denoting number and quantity both, are 

filler, a 11 e, a 1 1 e 3, all ; applied to quantity, in the singu- 
lar only • as, alter didfytfum, all riches ; alfe Tladjt, all 
power ; alleg (Soft), all gold ; biefe£ alleS (not alle) frill 
id) geben, all this will I give ; n)eld)e3 atteS, all which. Pla- 
ced before a pronoun, which latter is followed by a noun, 
the terminations of declension are often omitted ; as, all 
(for alteS) biefe£ ®elb, all this money ; all (for allet) biefer 
SBetn, all this wine. In the neuter of the singular, it 
often denotes an indefinite number or amount ; as, alle3, 
tva§ reifen f ann, retfet, all that can travel, do travel ; er 
fefyehtt alfe3 ju unffett, he seems to know everything. In 
the plural, the word denotes number ; as, alle £Wenfd)en, 
all men ; an alien Drten, in all places : — it is never used 
in the sense of whole, which is expressed by ganj ; as, bet 
ganje S'ag, the whole day ; nor is it followed, as in Eng- 
lish, by the definite article ; as, alle3 ©elb (not alfe3 bag 
©elb), all the money ; — finally, the phrases " all of us" 
" all of you," &c, are in German: tint alle, we all, &c. 
The plural is used like our word every ; as, id) gef/e alle 
$age, I go every day. 

flntger, einige, e i n t g e 3, some ; few ; applied to num- 
ber in the plural only. 

« 1 1 1 d) e r, — e, — e6, some ; synonymous with etntger. 

? e i n, f e i n e, f e t n, no ; none ; declined like em, erne, em ; 
as, fein abater, feme Sautter, fetn Jttnb ; when employed as 
a noun, it takes the old form of declension ; as, fetner Der 
alten SSere^rer, none of the ancient worshippers. 

fammtlicfjet, — e, — e6, entire ; ) regularly declined like 

g e f a m m t e r, — e, — e$, „ J adjectives. 

fc i e 1, much ; (in the plural) many ; when it expresses quan- 
tity or number, taken collectively, and is not preceded by 
an article or a pronoun, it is not declined : as. luel ®olb, 
much gold ; but, ba3 inele ®olb, the quantity of gold ; — 
when applied to a number as individuals, it is regularly 
declined: as, iiieler, fciele, luele^ &c. ; thus, iriele 2ftdnner 



308 TJLBLE OF THE PRONOUNS. § 54. § 55. 

ffob ttage, many men are indolent ; et Ijctt fel)r ijiele 
Steunbe unb id) lja.6e and) x> i e I e r lie has a great many 
friends and I have a] so a great many. 

ft e n i g, fo'Wfe ; (in the plural) /ew ; follows the same rules 
of inflection as inel above. 

mf^r, more ; ) are indeclinable ; for the plural of ttteljf, 

ft> e n i g e r, /ess ; j however, see above. 

g e n u g, enough ; sufficient ; never declined ; ®etb getmg, mo- 
ney enough. 

tauter, merely; only; never declined ; lautel «Jttt!pfet, copper 
only or nothing but copper. 

n t d) t $, nothing. 

§54. PRONOUNS. 

In German, as in other languages, will be found a number 
of those words, which, for the sake of convenience, are em- 
ployed as the direct representatives of nouns. These are the 
pronouns. They are divided, according to the particular offices 
which they perform, into six different classes : viz. : Personal, 
Possessive, Demonstrative, Determinative, Relative and Inter- 
rogative. 

§ 55. Table of the Pronouns. 

Personal Pronouns. Possessive Pronouns. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

3<f>, I. SBir, We. 2Mn, My. Unfet, Our. 

<Du, Thou. 3Jjr, Ye. JDein, Thy. (Suer, Your. 

(St,- He. ©te, They. Seta, His. 3$r, Their. 

@te, She. @le, They. 3fo Her. 

@3, It, @te, They. ©eta, Its. 

Indefinite Pronouns. Reflexive and Reciprocal 
Sftan, one ; a certain one. Pronouns. 

Semanb, some one ; somebody, (Bid), Himself, Herself, 
!lftiemanb, no one ; nobody. Itself, Themselves 

Sebermann, every one ; everybody. (Sinanber, one another 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. % 56. 



309 



Demonstrative Pronouns, 

®iefer, This. 
Setter, That. 
5Der, This or That. 



Relative Pronouns. 

5Beid>er, Who, Which. 
£)er, That. 

SCBer, Who, He or she, who 
or that. 



Determinative Pronouns. 

£>er, That, That one, He. 

©etiettige, That, That person 
2)erfelfce, The same, 
©eflnger, The same. 
Soldier, Such. 

Inter roga tive Pronouns . 

2Ber, Who ? nwS ? What q 
SBetdjer, Who? Which? 
SBaSfur, What sort of? 



§ 56. Personal pronouns. 

There are five personal pronouns; namely, id), (T) which 
represents the speaker and is, therefore, of the first person ; 
bu, {thou) which represents the hearer or person addressed, 
and is therefore, of the second person ; and er, (he) fte, (she) 
and e3, (it) representing the person or thing merely spoken of, 
and, therefore, of the third person. They are declined thus 



Singular. 


Plural. 




First person. 




N. 


Uh i. 


nur, we. 


G. 


meitter, tttettt, of me. 


unfer, of us, 


D. 


tttir, to me. 


uni, to us. 


A. 


mid), me. 

Second person. 


uttS, us. 


N. 


bu, thou. 


u)r, ye or you. 


G. 


beitter, beitt of thee. 


euer, of you. 


D. 


bir, to thee. 


end), to you. 


A. 


bid), thee. 


tufy, you. 




Third person, Masc. 


N. 


er, he.- 


fie, they. 


G. 


feiner, feitt, of him. 


tf)rer, of them. 


D. 


il)m, to him. 


i^ttett, to them 


A. 


tt)n, him. 


fte, them. 



310 REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. $ 57. 

Singular. Plural. 

Third person. Fern. 
N. fie, she. fie, they. 

G. il)ter, of her. tfytet, of them. 

D. ityr, to her. tljnen, to them. 

A. fie, her. fie, them. 

Third person, Neut. 
N. eS, it. fie, they. 

G. feiner, of it. ifyrer, of them. 

D. iljm, to it. itynen, to them. 

A. e8, it. fie, them. 

§ 57. Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 

(1) The genitives, mem, bein, fetn, are the earlier forms. 
The others (metner, betner, feiner) are the ones now commonly 
used. 

(2) When construed with the prepositions ^altett, toegen, 
and um-ftnlien, (signifying for the sake of, on account of) these 
genitives are united with the preposition by the euphonic letters, 
et, or (in case of imfer and euer) simply t. Thus : meinettoegen, 
on account ofme; um unfertttrillen, on account of us, dkc. 

(3) The personal pronouns of the third person, when they 
represent things without life, are seldom, if ever, used in the 
dative, and never in the genitive. In such instances, the corres- 
ponding case of the demonstrative bet, bie, bct§, is employed : 
thus, beffen, (of this,) instead of feiner; and beren, (of these,) 
instead of tl)rer. 

(4) The word fetBfi or fetter (self, selves) may, also, for the 
greater clearness or emphasis, be added not only to the pro- 
nouns, but even to nouns. Thus ; 3d) fef&ft, I myself ; bie %tutt 
felBft, the people themselves, 

(5) Here, too, observe, that the personal pronouns have, 
also in the plural, a reciprocal force. Thus : fie IteBen fid), they 
love one another. But as fie Uefcen fid), for example, might 



RfiMAiiKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 57. 311 

signify, they love themselves, the Germans, also, use the word 
etnanbev, {one another) about which there can oe no mistake : 
as, fie lief en ehranber. (§ 60.) 

(6) In polite conversation, the Germans use the third per- 
son plural, where we use the second. Thus : 3d) Ijafte ©ie ge* 
fet)?n, I have seen you. To prevent misconception, the pronouns 
thus used are written with a capital letter ; as, id) ianh 3l)nen, 
I thaak [them) you. A similar sacrifice of Grammar to (sup- 
posed) courtesy, may be found in our own language. For 
we constantly use the plural for the singular ; thus : " How are 
youV instead of "How art thou?' 1 The Germans proceed 
just one step beyond this, and besides taking the plural for 
the singular, take the third person for the second. With them, 
our familiar salutation "How do you do ?" would be, " How 
do they&oT 

(7) It must be observed, however, that the second person 
singular, £)u, is always as in English, used in addressing the 
Supreme Being. It is, also, the proper mode of address among 
warm friends and near relatives. But it is, also, used in angry 
disputes, where little regard is paid to points of politeness. 
The second person plural is employed by superiors to their 
inferiors. The third person singular er, fie, is used in the like 
manner, that is, by masters to servants, <fcc. 

(8) The neuter pronoun (e£) of the third person singular, 
like the words it and there in English, is often employed, as a 
nominative, both before and after verbs, singular and plural, 
as a mere expletive ; that is, more for the purpose of aiding the 
sound than the sense of the sentence. In this use, moreover, 
it is construed with words of all genders. Thus: ©8 ift ber 
SRcmn, it is the man ; (§3 ifl bie ftxau, it is the woman ; (&$ finb 
Scanner, they are men ; @§ bonttert ; it thunders ; (E3 folgten 
tuele, there followed many, &c. <fcc. 

When (§3 is thus used with a personal pronoun, the arrange- 
ment of the words is precisely the reverse of the English. 
Ex. : 3d) hin e6, It is I. 3)u 6 ijl e$, It is thou, ©ie fmb e«, 
It is they, &c. 



312 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 58. 

§ 58. Possessive Pronouns. 

(1) The possessive pronouns are derived, each respectively, 
from the genitive case of the personal pronouns ♦ thus, 

l st pers. meht, my: from nteiner, gen. sing, of 3cr). 



24 


If 


beitt, thy : 


It 


beiner, 


rt 


it it 


2)u. 


3 d 


ff 


fettt, his : 


it 


feiner, 


ft 


it it 


(St. 


3d 


ft 


tyx, * her : 


ft 


itjrer, 


it 


tr it 


®te. 


3d 


r; 


fein, its: 


tt 


feiner, 


ft 


it it 


m 


1st 


it 


urtfer, f cmr ; 


tt 


unfer, 


tt 


plur. fl 


3d? 


2-i 


if 


euer, f your : 


tt 


euer, 


it 


it it 


£>u. 


3* 


It 


ifyt, their : 


tt 


it;rer, 


tt 


it it 


(§r, ©ie or (5$. 



(2) By their forms, therefore, these pronouns indicate the 
person and number of the nouns which they represent ; that 
is, the person and number of the possessors. As, moreover, 
they may be declined like adjectives, they, also, make known 
by their terminations, the gender, number and case of the 
nouns with which they stand connected : for, in respect to 
inflection, a possessive pronoun agrees in gender, number and 
case, not with the possessor, but with the name of the thing 
possessed. 

(3) The possessive pronouns, when conjunctive, that is, 
when joined with a noun, are inflected after the old form of 
declension ; except in three places (nom. sing. masc. and nom. 
and ace. neuter), in which the terminations are wholly omitted ; 
tfius, — 



* Formerly, in ceremonious addresses, the words ^ero (old gen. plural o/ 
bev, that person) and 3ftvo (old gen. plural of er, he), were used instead of 
i$VM {your)' and 3ftr (her) ; as, 3fyvo 3ftcrjept, her majesty, &c. 

(guer was formerly written ewer, and the syllable (§tt). as an abbreviation 
is used in address to persons of high rank, with the verb in the plural. 
Ex. (£ro. Sftajeftat baBen foefof)len, your majesty has ordered. 

t Note that in declining unfev and euer, the. e, before t, is often struck 
out: thus, 

wtfm (for mtferer), unfre (for unfeve), unfreS (for imfeveg), &c 
eurer (for euever), eurc (for euere), eureg (for euereS), &c. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 58. 



313 







Singular, 




Masc. 


Fern. 


N. 


mein, 


meine, 




meines, 


meiner, 




meinem, 


meiner, 




mehtett, 


meine, 



Neut. 
mein ; 
meineS ; 
meinem ; 
mein ; 



Pluial 

For all genders 

meine. 
meiner. 
meinen 
metne. 



however, these pronouns are absolute, that is, 
when they stand alone, agreeing with a noun understood and 
demanding a special emphasis, the terminations proper to the 
three places noted above, are of course affixed : thus, biefer 
^Q\xt iji mein e t, nidjt bent e r, this hat is mine, not thine ; bie«- 
fe3 33ucfy ifi mein e 3, this book is mine. 

(5) But when a possessive pronoun absolute is preceded by 
the definite article, it then follows the New form of declen- 
sion : thus, 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A, 



Masc. 
bet meiue, 
be3 meinen, 
bent meinen, 
ben meinen, 



Singular. 
Fern. 
bie meine, 
ber meinen, 
ber meinen, 
bie meine, 



Neut. 

ba3 meine ; 
be§ meinen \ 
bent meinen ; 
ba3 meine ; 



this case, the syllable i g 
" thus, 



(6) Often, too, in mis case, t 
without any change of meaning : 

Singular, 
Masc. Fern. Neut 

N. ber meinige, bie meinige, ba% meinige 



Plurat. 

For all genders. 

bie meinen. 
ber meinen. 
ben meinen. 
bie meinen. 

is inserted, but 

Plural. 

For all genders, 

bie meinigen. 

ber metntgen. 

ben meinigen. 

bie meinigen. 



N. ber metmge, bte metntge, ba$ metntge ; 

G. be6 meinigen, ber meinigen, be§ meinigen ; 

D. bem meinigen, ber meinigen, bem meinigen; 

A. ben meinigen, bie meinige, ba§ meinige; 

(7) When, finally, a possessive pronoun is employed as a 
predicate, and merely denotes possession, without special em- 
phasis, it is not inflected at all ; thus, ber ©atten ijt mein, the 
garden is mine ; bie 6tu6e tfi bein, the room is thine ; ba$ 
<$au3 iff fein, the house is his. 



814 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. % 59. 

(8) It should be added that tue Germans, when no ol us 
rity is likely to grow out of it, often omit the possessive pro- 
noun, where in English it would be used : the definite article 
seeming sufficiently tc supply its place ; as, 3d) 1ja6e e£ in ben 
«g>anben, I have it in the hands ; that is, I have it in my hands 
(Sr naljm eg auf bte ©djultern, he took it upon the (his) shoul 
ders ; (St Ifjai ben 5lrm gefcrocfyen, he has broken (the) an arm 
or his arm 

§ 59. Indefinite Pronouns. 

(1) Pronouns employed to represent persons and things in 
a general way, without reference to particular individuals, are 
called indefinite pronouns. Such are these, 

SKan, one ; a certain one. 
Semanb, some one ; somebody. 
Cfttemanb, no one ; nobody. 
Sebetmann, * every one ; everybody. 

(2) The German man (like the French on) is used to in- 
dicate persons in the most general manner : thus, man fagt, 
one says ; that is, they say, 'people say, it is said, &c. It is in- 
declinable, and is found only in the nc inative ; when, there- 
fore, any other case would be called for, the corresponding 
oblique case of e i n is employed : thus, et ttritl e i n e n me 
tjOten, he will never listen to one, i. e. to any one. 

(3) Semanb and ^Jiemanb are declined in the following 
manner : 

Singular > 
N. Semanb, somebody. 9?iemanb, nobody. 

G. Semanb^ or SemanbeS. 9tientanb§ or 9?iemant>e& 

D. Semanb or Semanbem. 9ltemanb or UUemanbem. 

A. Semanb or Semanbem SWiemanb or Dliemanben. 

* The following, which also belong to this list of indefinites, have already 
Deen treated of under the head of indefinite numerals : viz. 

(StroaS, something. 3*flltc&ev, each; everyone. 

vfttcfytS, nothing. (*tntfle, somewhat ; some. 

Reiner, no one ; none. (§tlict)e, some ; many. 

(Sitter, one ; some one. 21 (lev, every one ; all. 

3ebev, each ; every one. Wlanfytv, many a; irany ; several, 

3ebtt>eber each ; every one 



REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. $ 60. 311 

'Jebennatm is declined thus : 

JST. Sebermann, everybody. 

G-. 3ebennann3, of everybody. 

D. Sebermarm, to everybody. 

A. 3ebennann, everybody. 

^4) Note tliat the second form of the dative (^entarrbem, 
Kiemanbem) is seldom employed except when the other fcrm 
would leave the meaning ambiguous. Thus, e§ tft Memanbem 
ttu§tid), it is useful to nobody ; where, were ^temanb" used, 
the sense might be, nobody is useful. This remark applies, 
also, to the accusative : as, fie Itefit Sfttemanben, she loves no- 
body : in which instance, were the other form (SWemanb) sub- 
stituted, it might mean, nobody loves her. 

§ 60. Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns. 

(1) When the subject and the object of a verb are iden 
tical, the latter being a personal pronoun, the pronoun is said 
to be reflexive ; because the action is thereby represented as 
reverting upon the actor : thus, et riit;mt fid), he praises him- 
self. 

(2) When, however, in such case, the design is to represent 
the individuals constituting a plural subject as acting one upon 
another, the pronoun is said to be reciprocal : thus, fie 6efd)im* 
!pfen fid), they disgrace one another. 

(3) But, as (for example) fie £efd)hn£fett fid) may equally 
mean, they disgrace themselves, the reciprocal word einanbei 
(one another) is added to or substituted for fid), wherever 
there is danger of mistake ; as, fie fcetftefyett fid) emanber. or fie 
t>erfict>en emanber, they understand one another. 

(4) In the dative and accusative (singular and plural) the 
German affords a special form for the reflexives ; viz. fid), him- 
self^ herself, itself, themselves. The personal pronouns, there- 
fore, in all ths oblique * cases, are used in a reflexive sense ; 
except in the dative ami accusative {third person), where, in- 
stead of i()m, tf)n, tt)t ic, the word fid) is employed. Re- 

* All cases, ej:c*pt the nominative, are called oblique cases. 



816 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § 61. 

garded as reflexives, the personal pronouns are declined 
thus : 

Singular. Plural 

First person. 
N. None. None. 

G. meiner, of myself unfer, of ourselves. 

D. mtr, to myself. un$, to ourselves. 

A. mid), myself. utt$, ourselves. 

Second person. 
N. None. None. 

G. beiner, of thyself. tmx, of yourselves. 

D. bir, to thyself. tu$), to yourselves, 

A bid), thyself. end), yourselves. 

Third person masc. 
X. None. None. 

G. feiner, of himself. ir/tet, of themselves. 

D. fid), to himself. fid), to themselves. 

A. fid), himself. f i d), themselves. 

Third person fern. 
N. None. None. 

Gr. if/rer, of herself. tf)ret, of themselves. 

.0. fid), to herself. fid), to themselves. 

A. fid), herself. f i d), themselves 

Third person neuter. 
N. None. None. 

G* feiner, of itself. tt)rer, of themselves. 

D. fid), to itself. fid), to themselves. 

A. fid), itself. fid), themselves. 

§ 61. Demonstrative Pronouns. 

(1) The peculiar office of a demonstrative pronoun is to 
point out the relative position of the object to which it refers 
Of these there are three : 

biefer, this (pointing to something near at har?d) ; 

jener, that (indicating something remote) ; 

ber, this or that (referring to things in either position). 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE DEMONSTRATIVES. § 62. 31 7 

1 2) 35iefer and jener are declined after the Old form of ad- 



jecl 


ives : thus 


, 










Singi 


ilar. 


Plural 




Masc. 


Fein. 


Neut. 


For all genders. 


N. 


biefer, 


biefe, 


biefeg (bieg), this ; 


biefe, these. 


G. 


biefeg, 


btefer, 


biefeg, of this ; 


biefer, of these. 


D. 


biefem, 


btefer, 


biefem, to this ; 


biefen, to these. 


A. 


biefen, 


biefe, 


biefeg (bieg), this ; 


biefe, these. 



(3) 2)er, when used in connection with a noun, is inflected 
(like the definite article) thus : 

Plural. 
For all genders. 
bie, these or those, 
ber, of these or those 
ben, to these or those, 
bte, these or those. 

(4) When used absolutely, that is, to represent a substan- 
tive, it stands thus : 

Singular. Plural. 







S 


ingular. 




Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


JS T . 


ber, 


bie, 


bag, this or that ; 


G. 


be^ 


ber, 


beg, of this or that; 


D. 


bem, 


ber, 


bem, to this or that ; 


A. 


ben, 


bte, 


bag, this or that ; 





Masc. 


Fern. Neut* 


For all genders. 


N. 


ber, 


bte, bag ; 


bie. 


G. 


beffen (be#), 


beren (ber), beffen (befj) ; 


beren. 


D. 


bem, 


ber, bmt; 


benen. 


A, 


ben, 


bie, bag ; 


bie. 



§ 62. Observations on the demonstratives. 

(1) The neuters biefeg (contract form bieg), jeneg and bag, 
are, like eg (§134. 1.) employed with verbs, without distinc- 
tion of gender or number : thus, bieg ift em Wlcam, this is a 
man ; bieg finb Sftenfcfyen, these are men ; jeneg ifl eine #rau, 
that is a woman ; &c. 

(2) 2)iefer, when denoting immediate proximity, signifies 
"this ;" as, in biefer 9Belt ift atleg ftcrgangltd), in this world all 
is transitory. More generally, however, it answers in use to 
Hhat" 3ener a] ways denotes greater remoteness than biefeg 



318 DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. § 63. 

and signifies "that" "yon" "yonder ;" as, jenet ©tew iji fawn 
flcfytfc at, that (or yonder) star is hardly visible. 

Sener and btefet, when employed to express contrast or com- 
parison, cften find their equivalents in the English expressions 
"the former" — "the latter ;" "that, that one" — "this, this one." 

(3) The demonstrative bet, Me, ba3, is distinguishable from 
the article, with which it is identical in form, by being uttered 
with greater emphasis, as in the following example : b e r SKcmn 
J)at e3 gefagt, ntcfyt jener, this man has said it, not that one. 

(4) The form be$ is chiefly found in compounds ; as, be§* 
toegen, on this account 

(5) Sometimes ber is, for the sake of greater clearness, 
employed in place of a possessive : as, et matte fetnen SSettet 
un'D beffen ©ctjn, he painted his cousin and his son ; literally, 
and the son of this one, i. e. the cousin's son, 

(6) The pronouns, both demonstrative and determinative, 
are frequently made more intensive by the particle efcett, even ; 
very : e6en btefe 33lume, this very flower ; etert ba$ Jttttb, that 
same child ; eben betfelBe, the very same. 

§ 63. Determinative Pronouns. 

(1) The pronouns of this class are commonly set down 
among the demonstratives. Their distinctive feature, however, 
is that of being used where an antecedent is to be limited by 
a relative clause succeeding, and so rendered more or less pro- 
minent or emphatic : thus, ber, toeldjet Hug I)anbelt, fcerbtent £e$, 
he (that man) who acts wisely, deserves praise. From this 
use they derive the name determinative. They are 

ber, that * that one ; he ; 

berfentge, that ; that person (strongly determinative) ; 

berfelBe, * the same (denoting identity) ; 

(elbtger, the same (seldom used) ; 

folcfyet, such (marking similarity of kind or nature). 

(2) 3)er, when used in connection with a noun, is declined 
like the demonstrative ber ; that is, like the definite article : 



* Where two words precede, 'ither of which might be taken for the ante 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 64. 



319 



when used absolutely, it differs from the demonstrative ber on- 
Iv in the genitive plural : taking beret instead of b e X e rt 

(3) Serjenige and berfelte are compounded of ber and the 
parts jenige and felfce respectively. In declining, both parts of 
each must be inflected j ber, like the article, and ienige anji felBe 
after the New form of adjectives : thus, 







Singular, 




Plural. 




Masc 


Fern. 


Neuu 


For all genders. 


N. 


beriemge, 


bieientge, 


baSienige ; 


bieientgen. 


G 


beSjienigen, 


betjemgeit, 


beSJettigen; 


berientgen 


D. 


bemjenigen, 


betieniget*, 


bemientgen ; 


beniemgeu. 


A. 


benienigen, 


bieientge, 


ba^ienige ; 


bieientgen. 



(4) <SeI6tger, ©efinge, ©eHngeS and ©oldfjev, ©cldje, ©old)e$, 
are declined after the Old form of adjectives; the latter, 
however, when the indefinite article (eitt, erne, exit) precedes, 
takes the Mixed form : * thus, 





Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 




N. 


eitt foldjet, f 


erne foldje, 


ein fold)e3, 


such a. 


G. 


eine§ folcfyen, 


einer fold) en, 


eine3 foltfjen, 


of such a. 


D. 


eiuem fold) en, 


eitter fold) en, 


etnem fold) en, 


to such a. 


A. 


euten fclcfyen, 


eine folcfye, 


ein foldjeg, 


such a. 



% 64. Relative Pronouns. 

(1) The proper office of a relative pronoun is to represent 
an antecedent word or phrase ; but, while so doing, it serves 
also to connect the different clauses of a sentence. The Rela- 
tives in German are these : 



cedent of a personal pronoun of the third person, berfel&e is used to prevent 
doubt: thus, ber Suiter fctjrteb fetnem eobne, berfetbe muffe nad? bonbon retfert, 
the father wrote the son, that 'Ae (berfelbe, the last one named, i. e. the son) 

must set out for London. 

* When ein comes after fo!d)er, the latter is not inflected at all ; as, foI<$ 
ein SKatm. such a man. 

m t Nearly synonymous with ©oldver are the words, beSgletcfyen, berfllefc&en, 
rtneSgietdjeu, tbregflleidjen, all which are indeclinable ; as/td) habe fettten UiH* 



jam] mtt beraleicfccu Seufen, I have no intercourse with such people. 
untet eucfe tji ftmHQkityw 'i Who among you is his equal 1 



m$% 



820 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE RELATIVES. § 65 



2BeId)er, who, which. 

SDcr, that. 

2Ber, who, he who, or that, or she who. 

<&o * which, (nearly obsolete, and indeclinable.) 

(2) 2Beld)er is declined after the Old form ; thus, 
Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 

N. frelcfyer, toeldje, tuelc^eS ; rceldje, who, which. 

ft. toefcfyeS, toeldber, tr>elrf)e0 ; tr»eldf»er r of whom, whose. 

D. mldjtm, tr»cldf|cr weldjem ; toeldjen, to whom, to which 

A. roetcfyen, tt>elcfye, toetdjeS; toelcfye, whom, which. 



(3) 3)er is declined, thus: 

Singular. 
Masc. Fern. 



Plural. 

Neut. For all genders. 

N. bet, bie, bag ; bie, that, who, which. 
G. beffen, beren, beffett; beren, of whom, or which, whose. 
D. bent, ber, bem; benett, to whom, or which. 
A. ben, bie, ba3; bie, that, who, which. 



(4) 2Ber stands thus : 

Singular, 

Masc. 

N. h>er,t 

G. tveffert (or toefi ,) 

D. toent, 

A. rt>en, 



Plural. 



Fern. 

toer, 

tDeffen (or tw%) 

toem, 

toen, 



Neut. 
wanting \ 






S3 

4 



§ 65. Observations on the Relatives. 

(1) Of the pronouns declined above, toetcfyet, fretdfte, 
toelcfye §, is the only one that can be used in conjunction with 
a noun, after the manner of an adjective : thus, toeldjer 9ftamt, 



* © o is really an adverb used as a relative. 

t SLSer has no plural, but like " e$, " is sometimes used before plural verbs 
Example: 2Ser [tub btefe Seute ? Who are this people 1 

I TM? dative is supplied by an adverbial compound ; as, tooju, itt>o-j~$U, 
whereto, or to which. 28omtt, where-with. with what, ivooon, whereof, of 
what, &c. 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE RELATIVES. § 65. 821 

which man; (not toer 9Jictmt ;) and, except when so joined with 
a noun, the genitive (both Sing, and Plural) of toelcfyer is never 
used, but, in place of it, the corresponding parts of fret; that 
is, beffen, beren, beffen, for the Singular, and beren, for the plural; 
as, ber 9Jicmn, beffen (not fr>eld)e§) Sfreunb id) tin, the man, 
whose friend I am; bte Saunte, beren (not tutftfjer) Slutljcn ab* 
gefallen finb, the trees whose blossoms have fallen off. 

(2) 35 ef, bte, ba§, as a relative, like the English word that, 
Is used as a sort of substitute for the regular relative. Thus 
(See obs. next above) its genitive is employed in place of that 
of to el d) e r, because the genitive of the latter, (n3eld)e3, toeldjer, 
fr>etd)e3,) being the same in form as the nominative masc. and 
neuter, might occasion mistake. So alter the pronouns of the 
first and second person, (and of the third, when used for the 
second,) fr>eld)er is never employed, but ber, thus: 

3cfy, ber id)* Hjn \at), I, who saw him. 

35u, ber bu * un8 fegneji, thou, who blessest us, 

SBtr, bte nnr * Ijter fcerfammelt finb, we, who are here as- 
sembled* 
SJjr, bie tf)r* etter Satertanb tieBt, ye, who love your 

country* 
©ie, bte ©ie* mtr Betftimmten, ye, who agreed with 

me. 
3)er, bte, bag, after folcfyer, is equivalent to the English "as" . 
thus, folcfye, bte cm -33aumett fr>ad)fi, such as grows on trees. 

(3) 2B er, to a 3, is an indefinite relative employed where - 
ever any uncertainty exists about the antecedent : thus, fomteti 
©ie nttr fagen, fr>et biefe$ gett;an §at? Can you tell me, who has 
done this ? 3d) toe iff nidjt, tva$ er fagte, I do not know, what 
he said. 

(4) Often frier, toct§, has at once the force of both a rela* 
tive and an antecedent ; as, toer auf bem SBege ber Xugenb Ivan* 

* In each case, it will be noted, the personal pronoun is repeated after the 
relative. In translating, of course the pronoun repeated, is to be omitted ; 01 
the order of the words being reversed (ify ber, instead of ber tci)) the rendering 
may be : I, I who saw, &c It must be added, that, when the pronoun is not 
repeated, the verb will be in the third person and in agreement with the re* 
kitive: asj bu n?avjl eg, bev e§ mix fagte, thou wast the one, that told me so 



322 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 68. 

belt, ift glfuflid), he that walks in the path of virtue, is happy ] 
fra3 getecfyt tfi, ttetbtent 2oh, what, or that which is right, de- 
serves praise. 

(5) 2B c r always begins a clause or sentence and never 
comes after th ) word which it represents ; to a 3 may, or may 
not begin a clause, and may or may not come after its proper 
antecedent : thus, toer tttdjt I;oren frill, bet mu§ fallen, he who 
will not hear* must feel ; id) fage, toa§ id) toetf, I say what I 
know ; alle3, toa3 id) gefe^en t)a6e, all that I have seen ; toa3 
geredjt ift, Derbient £ofy what is right, deserves praise. 

The form to e $ occurs in the compounds toefi toecjen, toenail, 
on which or what account. 

(6) SBelcfjer, -e, -e$, is often employed as an indefinite 
adjective pronoun. See Lesson 39, 4. 

§ 66. Interrogative Pronouns. 

(1) The interrogative pronouns, that is* those used in ask* 
ing questions, are 

toer, toa8 ? who ? what ? 
toeldjer ? who ? which ? 
toa§ fur eitt ? what sort of a ? 

(2) They are the same in form, as the relatives ; or rathei* 
the relatives themselves employed in a different way. 28et, 
toa§, and toetdjer, toeld)e, toeld)e§, are declined just as when they 
are relatives, except that toetdjer, -e, -e§, when interrogative 
never adopts the genitive of ber. 

(3) 2Ber and toct§ (Wio ? w/*a£ ?) can never be joined with 
a noun. They are used when the question is put in a manner 
general and indefinite. 2Betd)er, toeldfje, toeld)e§, on the other 
hand, has a more definite reference, and may be employed ad a 
jectively : thus, toeldjer Sftantt? which man ? &c. 

(4) 2Ba3 fur etn (literally, what for a?) is a form used in 
inquiring as to the fdnd, quality or species of a thing : as, toa6 
fur etn 9Kamt ? what sort of a man ? toa§ fur eine gxait ? what 
sort of a woman ? toa§ fitt etn Jttnb ? what kind of a child ? 

(5) The only part of toa3 fur etn, capable of inflection, is 
tilt ; which, when the thing referred to in the question, is e& 



Wb%s. § 61. § 68. 82S 

pressed, takes tlie form of the indefinite article : when it is left 
understood, ein is inflected like an adjective of the Old form. 
The plural, in both cases, omits the article, and stands simply 
thus, tva§ flit. 

(6) 28 a3 fur ein, with a substantive. 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern- Neut. For all genders. 

N. ft>a$ fiir ein, eine, em; nw3 fur, what sort of ? 

G. xva§ fur ernes, enter, eine3 ; toaS fiir, of what sort of? 

D. hmg fiir einem, enter, einem ; &a3 fiir, to what sort of ? 

A. fraS fiir einen, eine, tin ; ft>a6 fiir, what sort of ? 

(7) 2Ba3 fiir ein without a substantive. 

Singular. Plural. 





iM^sc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


JPor aZZ genders 


K. 


tea3 fiir einer, 


cine, 


emeS ; 


nm3 fiir 


G. 


nm$ fur eine§, 


einer, 


eincS j 


toaS fiir. 


D. 


toa$ fiir einem, 


einer, 


einetn ; 


toa§ fiir. 


A. 


tt>a3 fiir einen, 


eine, 


eineS ; 


toaS fiir. 



§ 67. Observations* 

(1) Observe further that ein, in toa§ fiir ein, is sometimes 
omitted in the singular, especially before words denoting ma- 
terials as, Xva& fiir 3?ug, what sort of stuff? tea3 fiir SBeitt, 
what kind of wine ?* 

(2) That tva§ fiir ein, and also toel-d) (that is, toeldjer, with- 
out the terminations of declension) are occasionally employed 
in expressions of surprise or wonder ; as, ft?a§ fiir ein 5D?ann, 
or, toeldj ein 33?ann ! what a man ! 

(3) That hmS is sometimes used for toarum: thus, toal 
fdjiagjt bu mid) ? why strikest thou me ? 

§ 68. VERBS. 

(1) A verb is that part of speech which defines the condi- 
dition of a subject ; that is, shows whether it acts, is acted 
upon or merely exists. 



324 PARTICIPLES. § 69. 

(2) In respect to form, verbs are either legular or irregu- 
lar ; simple or compound ; all which will be more fully explained 
Hereafter. 

(3) In respect to meaning, verbs are active transitive, active 
intransitive, passive, neuter, reflexive, or impersonal. These 
terms have in German the same general signification which they 
have in English. Their application will, however, more large- 
ly appear in subsequent sections. 

(4) The German, like the English verb, has its moods, ten- 
ses, numbers, persons and participles. 

(0) There are five moods: viz: the Indicative; the Sub- 
junctive, the Conditional *, the Imperative and the Infinitive. 

(6) There are six tenses : viz : the Present, the Imperfect, 
the Perfect, the Pluperfect, the first Future and the second 
Future. 

(7) These names (the names both of the moods and tenses) 
designate in German, just the same things as do the correspon- 
ding ones in English. For their general signification, see the 
paradigms on the pages following ; for more particular expla- 
nation of their uses, see the Syntax. 

§ 69. PARTICIPLE3. 

(1) There are three Participles : viz : the Present, which 
terminates in ettfc and answers in signification to the English 
participle in ing; as, left e n b , praism^. 

(2) The Perfect, which, besides prefixing in most 2ases the 
augment ge ends in verbs of the Old Form, in en or n, and 
in those of the New Form, in et or t ) and has a meaning cor- 
respondent to our participle in ed ; as, gettagen (ge+rrag+en) 
carried?; gelobet (ge+loB + et) praised 

* This (the Conditional) is made up of the, Imperfect Subjunctive of the 
auxiliary verb ro e v b e rt, (which see) and the Present and Perfect Infinitive 
of another verb. It is used to denote what is, also often denoted by the Sub- 
junctive, (Imperfect and Pluperfect) namely, a supposed condition of things, 
i e. possibility without actuality. By some it is treated as a distinct mood: 
by others, it is made to consist of two lenses ; its use (which see more at Iargs 
in the Syntax' is the same in both views. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. § ?0 82 B 

(3) Tl.e Future, which is produced by prefixing the par* 
hcle ju (fc) to the i)rm of the Present Participle, (lofcenb) 
thus, p lobenb, which means to-be-praised, that is praiseworthy. 

(4) The Particle ® e mentioned above, as being generally 
prefixed to the perfect participle, was originally designed, it 
would seem, to indicate completed action. It is commonly 
accounted merely euphonic, or at most intensive. The instan- 
ces in which it is altogether omitted, are these : 

First : in the case of all verbs compounded with inseparable 
prefixes ; (See § 94.) as, Bele^rt, (not ge£elel;tt) informed : 

Second : in the case of verbs from foreign languages, which 
make t? e infinitive in i r e n or i e r e n : as, ftubttt, (from fiu* 
biren), studied ■ instead of geftubttt : 

Third: in the case of the verb Herbert, when joined as 
an auxiliary to another verb: as, id) 6tn gelott ftorben, (not 
geftwrben) I have been praised. 

§ 10. Auxiliary Verbs. 

^1) In German the auxiliary verbs are usually divided into 
two classes. 

(2) The first class consists of three verbs, without which 
no complete conjugation can be formed. They are fiabm, to 
have, feift, to be, and ttferfceri, to become. These verbs, though 
chiefly employed as auxiliaries, are often themselves in the con- 
dition of principal verbs. In that case, they aid one another 
in the formation of the compound tenses. A glance at the 
paradigms will show, how this is done. 

(3) As auxiliaries, these three verbs enter into the composi- 
tion of the compound tenses, active and passive, of all classes 
of verbs. 

(t) <$ a b e n is used in forming the perfect, pluperfect and 
second future tenses in the active voice: thus, from £*>6en, ti 
praise, we have 

Perf. d) $ a 5 c geloBt, I have praised. 

Plup. id) i) a ti e geloR 1 had praised. 

2. Fut. id) ruevbe geloBt lj at en, I shall have praisecL 



82$ REkARKs on the use of tyabett and feltt. § 71. 

(£ ) @ e t n is used in forming the perfect, pluperfect and 
second future tenses, both in the active and passive; thus, from 
lofim, to praise and toad) fen, to grow. 

Active, Passive. 

Perf. id) 6 i n getoadfjfett, id) 6 1 n getofct tootbett, 

I Aave * grown. I have * been praised,, 

Plup. id) to a r getoadjfett, id) to a r gelofct toorbeit, 
I had grown. I had been praised. 

2. Fut. id? toerbe getoadjfen f et ft, id) toerbe gelobt toorbett f ei rt, 
I shall have grown. I shall have been praised. 

(6) SBerbenis used in forming the future tenses md tins 
Conditionals f : thus, from lofreit, to praise, we have 

Futures. Conditionals. 

1. id) to e? b e lofiett, id) toiir b e lofieft, 

I shall praise. I would praise. 

2. id) toerbe getofct ^aBett, id^tourbe geloBt ^aBci% 

I sAa/Z have praised. I should have praised. 

§ 71 . Remarks on the use of f) a 6 e n and f e i rt. 

(1) As the Perfect and Pluperfect tenses of verbs must be 
Conjugated, sometimes with f) a i e rt and sometimes with f e irt, 
it becomes important to know when to use the one and when 
the other. The determination of this question depends chiefly 
upon the signification of the main verb. The general rules 
are these : 

(2) $a&ett is to be used in conjugating all active transitive 
verbs, all reflective verbs, all impersonal verbs? all the auxiliaries 



* It will be noticed here, that wherever, in the formation of these tenses, 
any part of f e i n occurs, it is Englished by the corresponding part of the verb 
b a b e i! : thus, ub b in gercacfyfen, 1 have grown, &c. This grows out of the 
necessity t>f suiting the translation to our language, Which in these places re- 
quires the verb have. 

t It is, also, employe:! with the perfect participle of a principal verb, to form 
the Passive voice ; (See § 84). iNote, also, above that ro e rt> e and w it v b e 
are rendered by their equivalents shall and sJmuld) in the conjugatka o< 
the English verb. 



&£Mar&s on the use of l)a6en and fein. § tl. 32? 



of the second class (viz. biitfen, fonnett, mogen, tooflen, follen, 
luuffcu and lafjen), and many intransitives. 

(3) (Sent is to be used in conjugating all intransitives, sig 1 - 
flifying a change of the condition of the subject ; as, gebetfyeit, 
to prosper ; genefen, to recover ; rctfen, to ripen ; fcr/uunbetf, 
to dwindle ; ftetfcen, to die ; all those indicating motion towards 
or from a place ; eilen, to hasten • gel)en, to go ; teiiert, to ride ; 
finfen, to sink ; and, also, all verbs in the passive voice. 

(4) Some verbs take, in the formation of these tenses-* 
either f)aht\\ or fein, according as they are employed in one 
sense or in another. This, however, will be best understood 
by practice in reading and speaking. The following are ex- 
amples : 



<gr iji in fetnetn mum SBagett 

fortgefatjrett. 
SKein §3rubet $at forigefatjren 

bcutfdr) ju lefen. 
S)a8 SBaffer tft gefroten. 
£)e;t annett 9Watm Ijat e3 ttt 

bent fallen Btotmer gefroren. 
£)ie J^ranen ftnb iiBer bie 2Ban* 

gen geronnen. 
5>a3 ®efci$ t;at geronnen, 
£>a3 ©djtff ift auf einert get 

(en geftofien. 
5)a§ 9Mf Ijat ben JWntg Bom 

S'Srone geftopen. 
ta% ©djlff iji cms Ufer ge* 

triefcen. 
feer SBaum I;at itene Btoeige 

gettlefcen 



He has driven off in his new 

carriage. 
My brother has proceeded to 

read German. 
The water is (has) frozen. 
It has chilled the poor man 

in the cold room. 
The tears have flowed over 

the cheeks. 
The vessel has leaked. 
The ship has struck upon & 

rock. 
The people have thrust the 

kino; from the throne. 
The ship has been driven up- 
on the shoie. 
The tree has shot forth liftt* 

branches, 



828 



PARADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES 



72. PARADIGMS OF THE AVX 

(1) *>flben rf 



li 



II 



INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT Z ENSE 



id) babe, 
bit baft, 
er fyat, 
nnr baben, 
ibr fyabet, 
ft> (jaben, 



I hav. 
thou hast, 
he has. 
we have, 
you have, 
they have. 



IMPERFECT TENSE* 



id) fyatti, 
bu battejt, 
er jjatte, 
tvtv ijattctt, 
tt)v fyatret, 
fte fatten, 



I had. 
thou hadst- 
he had. 
we had. 
you had. 
they had. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) I) a be 
mi baft 
er fyat 
tmt baben 

ibr babet 
fte baben 



I ** 



I have had. 
thou hast had. 
he has had. 
we have had. 
you have had. 
they have had. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



id) ijatre 1 

er fyattt [^ 
tvtv haiUn f ^ 
tbr batkt I <*> 



fte fatten 



I had had. 
thou hadst had. 
he had had. 
we had had. 
you had had. 
they had had. 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) voerbe ") 
mi tvtrft | ^ 
er an vb L ~ 
mix wet ben «* « 
ibr tverbet j • 
fte iver&en J 



I shall have, 
thou wilt have, 
he will have, 
we shall have, 
you will have, 
they will have. 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) merbe 1 g 
bit tmrft 
er tvtvfc 
mix tucrbeit 
tbr toevbet i jg. 
fte tverbeu J « 



K 



I shall ^ . 
thou wilt | 'S 
he will f ^ 
we will ! P 
you w 
they will 



»* 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

id) fyabe, 
bu babeft, 
er fya' 



tvtr baben, 
tbr babet, 
fte baben, 



I may have. 

thou mayst haves, 

he may have. 

we may have. 

you may have. 

they may have 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) biitte, 
bu fyatteft, 
er fyatte, 
totr fatten, 
tbr tyatUt, 
fte fatten, 



I might have 
thou mightst have* 
he might have. 
We might have, 
you might have, 
they might have 



PERFECT TENSE. 



Id) §afce 
bu fyabeft 
er fyabt 
tvtt baben 
tbr babet 
fte baben 



J 



I may have had, 
&c. 



u 



I might ;jave had, 



PLUPERFECT TENSE 

id) batte 
bu batteft 

er f)titte 1 

tvtr batten j 

ibr fyatttt j 

fte biitteu J 



(if) I shall hav£, 
&c. 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 

id) tvevbe "] 
bu toevbeft | - 
er tverbe L j* 
tvtr tveibeR \ « 
ibr tverbet | 
fte tverbeu J 

SECOND FUTURE TENSE 

id) tverbe ") = (£) I shall navfr 
bu tverbefi | >g had &c. 

er tverbe I ^■ 
tvtr iverben f J2 
ibr tverbet | Jg, 
fte tverbeu J ^ 



OF THE FIRST CLASS, 



§ 72. 



329 



ILIAETES OF THE FIEST CLASS. 
to hare. 



CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE 



FIEST FUTURE. 

tcfe iviirbe ^ © 
Ml HM'ivbcfl 
er tv iine 
tttr tint i ben 
tbr huirbet 
ftt n>iivben j 






SECOND FUTURE. 

ten nmrbe "] ~ £ 
bii unit Deft | *§ j2 6 
er miirbe i Jl ^^ 
i»it miirben fs 3-3 
tor nmrbet | J* J J 
fie nnirteu J & ^ 



PRESENT TENSE 

1. wanting 

2. bate bit, 
have thou. 

3. babe ev, 

let him have 

1. babett wix, 
let us have. 

2. babet tt>r. 
have ye or you. 

3. baben fte, 

let them have. 



IN FINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 



PRESENT TENSE, 

baben, to have. 



PRESENT. 

babenb, having. 



PERFECT TENSE. PERFECT 

getjabt baben, flefyaK *xad. 
to have had. 



FIRST FUTURE. 

baben toetbeit , 



to be-about to 
have. 



330 



PARADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES § 72. 

(2) <Setn, 



Si 2 



•if* 



3. 



LNDICAT TE. 



td& bin, 

bu bift, 
er ifi, 
m ir ftnb, 
ifjr fetb, 
fie ftnb, 



PRESENT TENSE. 

I am. 

thou art. 
he is. 
we are. 
you are. 
they are. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id? mar, 
bu 113 a v ft, 
er toav, 
roir mamt, 
tin* maret, 
fte mareu, 



I was. 
thou wast, 
he was. 
we were, 
you were, 
thej* were. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) bin 
bu bift 
er ift 
mtr ftnb 
thv feib 
\u ftnb • 



I B 



J 



I have been, 
thou hast been, 
he has been, 
we have been, 
you have been, 
they have been. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
1 



id) mar 
bu marf 
er mar 

\\)iv mareu f 2 
U)v maret « 
:n J 



|te mareu 



I had been, 
thou hadst been, 
he had been, 
we had been, 
you had been, 
they had been. 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) tt>erbc 1 

bu mjrft ! 
er nnrb ic 
mir merben f «£. 
tbr merbet j 
fte merben j 



I shall be. 
thou wilt be. 
he will be. 
we shall be. 
you will be 
they will be. 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) merbe 1 .S 
bu mir ft | £ 
er mtrb i c 
mir merben f E. 
ibr merbet j g 
•fte met ben 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will ■ 
we shall 
you will 
they wilJ J 



r « 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



ify fet, 
bu feteji, 
er fet, 
mtr feien, 
it)x feiet, 
fte feien, 



I may be. 
thou mayst be. 
he may be. 
we may be. 
you may be. 
they may be. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

id) mare, I might be. 

bu mareft, thou mightst be. 

er mare, he might be. 

mir mareu, we might be. 

tbr ma ret, you might be. 

fte maren, they might be. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) fet 
bu feift 
er fei 
id ir feien 
ijjr fetet 
fte fete u 



I may have been, 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



I might have been 
&c. 



icf) mare 1 
ou mareft | « 
er mare I *£■ 
mir maren f g 
tl)r maret j «> 
fte maren J 



FIRST FUTURE TEjJSE. 



(if) I shall be, &c 



id) merbe 1 
bu merbeft j 
er merbe 1: 
mir merben (3 
tbr merbet j 
\k merben j 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



icfy merbe ") « 
bit merbeft I 5. 
er merbe '. c 
mtv merben f £l 
tbr merbet | § 
fte merben j & 



(if) I should have 
been, &c. 



OF THE FIRST CLASS. § 72. 



331 



to be. 



COJSTITIONAL. 



FIRST FUTURE. 



id) nuirbe 
bu tinivbeft 
cr wtitbe 
tott tmivbeit 
tbv roiirbet 
fie tiuirben 






SECOND FUTURE. 

id) tmirbe ) «' J 
fcu univbefi I 5. J 2 
er tiuivbe L - 2 
koit nnirben ' ,5 B a 
tfc wiivbet | g J S 
fte toiirbcu J ^ ^"° 



IMPERATIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

1. wanting. 

2. fet bu, 
be thou. 

3. fet er, 

let him be. 

1. fetcn nnr, 
let us be. 

2. feib %, 
be ye. 

3. feten fte, 
let them be. 



INFINITIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

fern, to be. 



PERFECT TENSE. 

getDefen fein, 
to have been. 



FIRST FUTURE. 

fein toerben, 
to be about to be. 



PARTICIPLE, 



PKESENT. 

feienb, being. 



PERFECT, 

getoefen. 



332 



PARADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES § 72. 

(3) Sffetta* 



INDICATIVE. 






PRESENT TENSE. 



id? roerbe, 
m roivft, 
er roirfc, 
mx roerben, 
tl)t- roevbct, 
fte werben, 



I become, 
thou becomest. 
he becomes. 
we become, 
you become, 
they become. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) rourbe,* 
bu nuirbeft, 
er rourbe, 
wir nnirben, 
ibr rcuvbet, 
fie rourbeu, 



I became, 
thou becamest 
he became, 
we became, 
you became, 
they became 



PERFECT TENSE. 



tcfy bin 
bu bifi 
er ift 
mix ftnb 

tbr Uit> 
fte [tub 



le- 
ft 



J 



I have become, 
thou hast become, 
he has become, 
we have become, 
you have become, 
they have become. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

id) max "} ^ I had "J 

Mi roarjt S thou hadst | 

er roar ! ^ he had 

mix roaren f § we had 

ij)r toaret I §, you had 

fte roaren J they had 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roerbe ^) 
bu rotrfi | £ 
er tDtrb 1% 
roix roerben f |> 
tbr roerbet j 2 
jle roerben J 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roevbe ) 3 
bu mix ft I £ 
iv totrb i z 
xoix toerben f -S 
tbv toerbet j g 
fie roerben j & 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



1 s 



11 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id) roerbe, 
bu voerbeft, 
er roerbe, 
roir roerben, 
it)t roerbet, 
fie roerbe n, 



I may become, 
thou rnayst become, 
he may become, 
we may become, 
you may become, 
they may become. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



tct) roitrbe, 
bu rourbefi, 
er roiirbe, 
nnrvoitr ben, 
ifyr roiirbet, 
fte roiirben, 



I might become, 
thou mightst become 
he might become, 
we might become, 
you might become, 
they might become. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



1* 



I may have be- 
come, &c. 



td) fet 
bu feift 
er fet 
roir feten 
ii)v fetet 
fte feten 



PLUPERFECT TENSE, 

tcf) roare 1 „ 

bu roarefi | g 

er tocire i £ 

rotr roaren f § 

ii)r roarer ^ 

fte roaren J 

FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



I might have be- 
come, &c. 



(if) I shall become, 
&c. 



id) roerbe "| 
bu roerbeft | g 
er roerbe '. jg 
roir roerben f | 
tbv roevbet | s 
fte roerben J 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roerbe 
bu rocrbeft 
er roerbe 
totr roerben 
tbv rutrfeet 
fte roerben 






Of) I shal hum 
becorre, &c. 



Orrtarb, L.46 3. 



OF THE FIRST CLASS. $ 72. 



333 



to become. 



CONDITIONAL. 



FIRST FUTURE 

{$ ttitrbe > 
t>u roiivbeji | « 
er rcurbe ' £ 
03tv t»uvben f § 
'fcr roiirbet | s 
fte tt)iirbert ^ 



Is 



SECOND FUTURE. 

td) wiirbe ) s g t 
bu tDurbefi | IE j§sS 
er tmube I g 
tDtr ftiirben f £ 
tljr tourbet | g 
fte toiirbeu J ^ 



IMPERATIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

1. wanting. 

2. roerbe bu, 
become thou. 

3. roevbe er, kt 
him become. 

1. roevben nnr, 
let us become. 

2. tuerbef tf)r, 
become ye. 

3. tuerbeu fte, let 
them become. 



INFINITIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



ruevben, to 



be- 



o ? ! 



PERFECT TENSE. 

geworbett fein, 
to have become. 



FIRST FUTURE. 

merbett wevbeit, 
to be about to 
become. 



PARTICIPLE. 



PRESENT. 

roevbettb, becom- 
ing. 



PERFECT. 

getoor&en, become 



334 SYNOPTICAL VIEW, <fec. $ 78* 

§ 73. SYNOPTICAL VIEW 

OF 
THE THKEE TENSE AUXILIARIES 



€> e tt, t& be. 


fy a b e n, to have. 


roerben. 


to become* 




INDICATIVE MCOD 






Present Tense. 




J am, 


I have, 


Z become. 


id) bin 
bu bifi 
ertft 
mx ftnb 
ikx feib 
fte fticb. 


id) f)abe 

bu fcafi 

er \)at 

mx babett 

tbr f)abet or fjabt 

fte I)aben. 

Imperfect Tense. 


id) roerbe 
bu roirfi 
er roirb 
roir roerben 
iljx roerbet 
fte roerben. 


/ was, 


J had, 


/ became. 


id) roar 

bu roareft (or roarfi) 

er mar 

ten roaren 

tbr roaret (or roart) 

fte teattii. 


id) fcatte 
bu foartejt 
er Jjatte 
roir batten 
ibr fyatttt 
fte fatten. 

Perfect Tense.*- 


id) rourbe 
bu rourbefr. 
er rourbe 
roir rourben 
ibr rourbet 
fte rourben. 


I have been, 


I have had, 


I have become.- 


id) bin ") 
bu bift | 

SAnbN e » e ^ 
tbr fcib 
fte ftnb J 


id) f)abe 
bu t>aft 

er f>at 
roir fyahm 
tfyr fyabet 
fte fyaben 


> a,er;abt. 


id) bin ^ 

tu bift 

er ift Ueroorbett <i 

rotr ftnb f roorben. 

ibr hit) \ 

fte ftnb. J 




Plttt^rfect Tense. 




1 had been, 


I had had, 


/ had become. 


id) roar 1 
bu mar eft 1 

er . roar i aeroefen. 
tetr roaren f ° 

tbr roaret 

fte roaren J 


id) fyatte ' 
bu battefl 
er fyattt 
mx batten / 
i&r&attei | 
fte fatten J 


»a,el)abt. 


id) roar 
bu roareji 
er roar 
toir roar en 
tbr roaret 
fte roaren 


geroorben m 
roovfcen. 




First Future Tense, f 




/ sAaZZ fee, 


/ sAa/Z have, 


I shall become*- 


id) roerbe 
tu roir ft 
er mi I'D 
roir roerben 
tbr roerbeiv 
fte roerbe n ( 


- feii 


id) roerbe 
bu roir ft 
er roirb 
rotr roerfcei 
ifc>r roerbet 
fie roerben 


l 

j }• f)aben. 


ity roerbe 
bu roirfi 
er roirb 
roir roerbt 
t'br roerbe 
fU roerben 


n 

t 


' roe-.-b«» 
! 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW, etc. § 73. 



38a- 





Second Future 1 ense. 


I shall have been. 


i s/iai/ have had. 


id) roerbe ]' 

bit wirg j 

er mixt I a, ewe fen 

urn- werben j feitt. 

ibr roerbei 

fie werben ) 


id) werbe 
bu n>tv ft 
er wirb 
wtr werben 
ibr werbet 
fte werben 


tyaben 




SUBJUNCTIVE MOOU, 




Present Tense. 


1 may be, 


/ may have, 


id) fet 

bu feteft (or fetji) 

er fet 

wtr feten (or fein) 

tbr Kief 

fte feten (or fetn.) 


id) fyabt 
*u babefi 
er fyabt 
wtr fyabtn 
ibr fyabtt 
fte £>aben. 





I might be, 

id) ware 

bn warefl (or warfl> 

er ware 

wir waren 

ii)x waret ior wart; 

fie waren. 

/ may have been, 
id) fet -> 
bu feift 

er fet 
wtr feten 
tbr feiet 
fte feten 



r ftewefen. 



Imperfect Tense. 

/ might have, 

ic£ batte 
bu battel 
er batte 
wtr fatten 
ii)x fyatUt 
fie fatten. 

Perfect Tens*. 
I may have had, 
id) babe 
bu babefi 
er babe 
wtr baben 
tbr babu 
fte fcaben 



/ shall have become 
id) werbe ] 

wirwerbeni or ^^ 
tbr werbet |em ° 
ue werben J 



i ?«<zy become, 

id) werbe 
bu werbefl 
er werbe 
wir werben 
tbr werbet 
fte werben. 



/ might become* 

id) witrbe 
bu wiirbefx 
er wiirbe 
wtr rmivoen 
tbr witrbet 
fte witrben. 

/ may have become* 

id) fet 



$d)abt 



bu fetfr 
er fet 
wtr feten 
itjr feiet 
fte feten 



Pluperfect Tense. 



I might have been, 

id) ware 

bu wtireft 

er ware 

wtr waren 

tbr waret 

fie waren 



geroefen. 



/ might have had, 

id) batte 

bu fjatteffc 

er i)ixttt 

wtr' batten j 

tbr battet 

fte WUn J 



gefjaM 



(If) I shall be, 
tcb werue 
bu werbefl 
er toerbe 

wir werben 
tbr tuerDet 
f?e werben 



|etn. 



. fjaben. 



geworben, 
or werben* 



I might have become* 

■'cb ware 

bn warefl: 

er ware I geworbeti, 

wtr waren J (worbuU 

tbr waret 

fie waren 



First Future Tense— 

(If) I shall have, 

id* werbe 

cu werbe ft 

er werbe 

wtr werben 

tbr werbet 

fte t&erben 



(If) I shall become. 

id) werbe 
bu werbefl 
tr werbe 
wtr werben f 
ibv merbet * 
fie werben. j 



werben t 



336 



SYNOPTICAL VIEW, &C. % Id, 



Second Future Tense. 



(i/) / shall have been, 


(//) I shall have had, 


(If) I shall nave occams* 


id) frer&e 1 

bu roerbeft ! 

er roevbe 1 geroefen 

ivix roerben r fetn. 

tbr tocrret J 

fte merben j 


id) wer&e ] 

bu tuevbeft | 
erroerbe | gebabt 
unv nxrben f I) a ben. 
tjjr luevbef | 

fte nxvbeu J 


id) roerbe ] 
bu merbefl | 
evmevbe j geroorV 
mtr loerben ^(worbt-n 
tbv roerbet | feis 
fte merbni j 



/ should be, 

id) rourbe 
bu roitvbeft 
ev ttmvbe 
tutv ttjitrben 
tbr nntrbet 
fte nntvben 



fetn. 



1 should have been^ 
id) ttiirbe 

bu nntrbeft 
er nriirbe 
nur rotirben 
tjjr nntrbet 
fte toiivben 



geroefen 
fetn. 



CONDITIONAL. 

First Conditional 
I should have, 
id) anirbe 1 
bu roitvbeft 
ev roitvbe 
tutr nritrben 
tbv nntrbet 
fte tinivbeu 

Second Conditional. 
/ should have had, 
id) rourbe ") 



[ t,almx. 
I 
J 



bu roitvbeft 
er roitrbe I 
roir rourben f 
iv)x roitrbet ', 
f!e roitrben J 



gefxtbf rja= 
ben. 



roerben. 



/ should become 
id) roitvbe 
bu roitrbeft 
er roirrbe 
roir roiirben 
tbv roitrbet 
fte roiirben 

/ should have become* 

id) rourbe ) 

bu roiirbefi | 

er roitrbe i geroorbe* 

roir roitrben ' 

ifyr roitrbet 

fte roitrben 



(roorbtK 
few. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Be thou, 
wanting, 

feibu 

fet, er, fte or e8 
feien roir 
feib tl)r 
feien fit. 



Present Tense. 
Have thou, 
wanting, 

r)abe bu 

fyabe er, fte or e$ 
ijaben roir 
t)aM tfyr 
fyaben fte. 



Become thou, 
wanting. 

roerbe bu 

roerbe er, fie or e$ 
roerben roir 
roerbet ifyx 
roerben fte 



INFINITIVE MOOD 





Present Tense. 




to be, 
fetn. 


to have, 

l)aben. 


to become* 
roerben. 


to have been, 
geroefen fetn. 


Perfect Tense. 
to have had, 
ge&abt Ijaben. 

Future Tense. 


to have become, 

geroorbcn fetn. 


w be about to be. 

fetn roerben. 


to be about to have, 

fcaben roerben. 


to be about to beam* 

roerben roerben. 



AUXILIARIES OF THE SECOND CLA8S. § T4. 33? 





Present. 




being 

feicub. 


having, 

^abeitb. 


becoming, 

njerbenb. 




Perfect. 




been, 

gerocjVn. 


had, 


become, 

geworben. 



§ 74. Auxiliaries of the second class, 

(1) The second Class of auxiliaries embraces the following: 

3d) mag, I am allowed ; {may ;) 3d) barf, I am permitted ; I dam, 

3d) tciiif I will ; {'purpose ;) 3d) mufj, I am obliged; (must.) 

3d) foil, I am obliged ; (shall ;) 3d) lajfe, I let. 
3d) faun, I am able ; (can ;) 

(2) These verbs are, for the most part, very irregular in conjuga- 
tion, and serve simply the purpose of modifying with the ideas of 
liberty, possibility, or necessity, other verbs ; which latter are in thai 
case required to be in the infinitive mood ; thus er mag lacfren, ho 
may (has permission to) laugh ; id) tann fd)retben, I can (am able to) 
write ; where ladieu and fd)reiben are both in the infinitive, governed 
respectively by nt a a, and fan n. 

(3) In the perfect and pluperfect tenses, however, the past par 
iiciple of these verbs is used only, when the principal verb is not ex 
pressed. Its place is supplied, in such cases, by the infinitive, the 
translation of course being the same in either case, as : 

3d) fyabe iljn feljcu f onnen (instead of gefonttt) ; 

I have been able to see him. 
(St ijat toarteu muffeu (instead of gemufrt) ; 

he was obliged to wait. 
Sftan fyatte fiber iijn (adieu mogen (instead of gemccfyt) ; 

one might have laughed at him. 
Qx l)at bent 33efe()te md)t geijetcfoen toollen (instead of getoottt) ; 

he has not been willing to obey the command. 
3d) fyabe fein (Se^etmntf nuffen butfen (instead of gebutft) ; 

I have been allowed to know his secret. 
&t fydtte c3 tijim felleit (instead of gefoUt) ; 

she ought to have clone it, 
15 



£M*8 CONJUGATIONS OF YERBS. | 75, 

<&te tyaben t$n aetjjen laffen (instead of gelaff en) ; 
they have suffered him to go. 

For a full display of the forms of these verbs* and for futhe* 
remarks on their uses, see the Section on the Mixed Conjugation 
§83. 

§ 75. Conjugation of Verbs. 

(1) There are two conjugations of verbs : the Old and the New. 
The difference between them lies mainly in the mode of forming the 
Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Participle. 

(2) The verbs of the Old form are commonly denominated "ir- 
regular Verbs." But, as nearly all the primitive verbs in the lan- 
guage are conjugated in this way, and few, except the derivative 
verbs (now the larger class), ever assume the other form, it is the 
custom of the best German grammarians to adopt the classification 
which we have given. This will occasion no confusion or incon- 
venience to those who prefer the common classification : since it is 
only necessary to remember that the things a*e the same, though the 
names have been changed. 

(3) In order to afford the ready means of comparing the tcrmu 
national differences between the Old and the New forms of conjuga- 
tion, we subjoin the following tabular view of the simple tenses ard 
participles, in which alone differences of this kind can exist. 

(4) In the compound tenses, the auxiliary alone being subjected 
to terminational variation, the mode of inflecting these tenses be- 
comes of course perfectly uniform in all classes of verbs. Hence tc 
secure a complete acquaintance with the forms of the compound 
tenses, little more is necessary than a bare inspection of tho para- 
digms. 



* Except laffen {to let) which is not there, because it does not belong to the 
Mixed conjugation. This verb is used either in permitting or commanding : 
as, id) fjctbe tfyn gdjett laffen, I have allowed him to go ; itf) babe ihn fommett 
laffen, I have ordered him to come, which two meanings are near akin. When 
used with a reciprocal pronoun, it has its equivalent in such phrases as, is to, 
ought to, may ; as, bag ia&t fid) md)t tbnn that is not to be done ; literally, does . 
not allow itself to be done. The i ifinitive active After laffen, must often be 
translated passively. 



TERMINATIONS OF THE SIMPLE TENSES. J 76. 



339 



§ 76. TERMINATIONS OF THE SIMPLE TENSES. 

Old Conjugation. New Conjugation. 





INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNC. 


INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE, 


co cS 


« 


03 


6 


© 


M Z P* 


a 2 


PS 


Z .-) 


z 5 


£ 2 p 


s a 


Ph 


9 A 


O A 


H ? § 


? s 


4 




? § 


• • H 


a 




a 


a 


P3 r* 02 m 


E* » a. 


n 


£* 03 00 


Hot 03 


S O Z pj 


o z cs 


M 


O Z tf 


O Z <£ 


to o w a 


O H H 


to 


OH h 


o » a 




SB M H * 


ps &=< & 


z 


PS H p. 


PS H p. 


9 


f 'a ( 1 — « 


— e 


CI 


— t 


— e 


s 


5?2 - ^ e ?'? 


- < eft 


)5 


- * e?.ft 


- * ^ 





50 ( 3 — .jf ct f t 


— .g e 


(3 


— .y ^, t 


— .§ e 


■<< 












£ 


s 




8 


8 


tt 


os C 1 — | en,n 


— | en 


(1 


— | en, n 


— § en 


fc 


2<2 — s et,t 


— s et 


I 2 


— s tt,t 


- S £t 


EN 


* (3 — tn,n 


— en 


(3 


— en,n 


— en 


v*" 










♦B ( • ( 1 — — 


— e 


(1 


— t or et -f c 


— t or et + e 


6 


03 ( 3 .8 


- * *b 


)5 


— t or et 4- eft 


— t or et -f eft 


I 


— i e 


(3 


— t or et + e 


— t or et + e 


Pi 


b5 C 1 — 1 en 


— | en 


J* 


— t or et - 


- en 


— t or et -f- en 


s 


to J 2 — s ct 


— s et 


— t or et - 


- et 


— t or et -j- et 


^ £ ( 3 — en 


— en 


— t or et - 


- en 


— t or en -j- en 




IMPERATITE. 


INFINIT. 


IMPERATIVE. 


INFINITIVE. 


oS o 




GO 


6 




PS ;J Z 

h z _i 




PS 


z £ 




S 9 O 




p» 


O A 




* I " 


© 


^ 


f H 


05 


B E* OQ 03 


H 2 


n 


n co a 


tf 2 


S O Z g 


O A 


s 


O Z pS 


C A 


to C « 


O Z 


to 


© H « 


O Z 




Z PS H 04 


PS y 


z 


OS H <u 


PS U 


SI 


z<2 — h - c 




il 


— s e 




•< 


■g 


— en 




8 


— ea 


V 


« C 1 — | en 




(1 


— § en 




h 


$<2 - s tt,t 




i 2 


— 8 et, t 




& 


* ( 3 — en 




(3 


— en 






PARTICIPLES. 


PARTICIPLES 


Present. 


Perfect. 


Present. 


Peri'ect. 


—enfr 


ge— en 




— enfc 




ge— ct or t 



Rim ark. The Bign + in the table above is used as in Arithmetic, i. e. to indicate 
lhat the parts et f- e are to be united ; ao, ete. 



$40 VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. § ?7. 

Observations on the preceding table. 

(1J Observe, in the table above, that the terminations in all pla. 
ces, except the Imperfect of the New form, are to be added directly 
to the root* In the place excepted (Imperfect of the New form), there 
comes between the root and the personal ending, a sort of tense-sign 
{et 01 t), which is not necessary to verbs of the Old form : because 
in them the Imperfect is made by means of a change in the radical 
vowel. 

(2) It may, also, be noticed that a characteristic difference in 
form, between the Indicative and the Subjunctive (3d person sing ) 
is that the former ends in et or t, the latter always in e ; and that 
the personal ending in the first and third person sing, of the Imper- 
fect of the Old form, is wholly omitted. 

(3) It may further be observed, that the e in the terminations 
eft and et, of the Indicative, is retained or omitted just according to* 
what is demanded by euphony. In the Subjunctive, for the most 
part, the full termination is preserved. 

(4) For the same reason, also, that is, for the sake of euphony, 
when the root of a verb ends in el or er, the vowel e of any termi- 
nation beginning with that letter, is commonly omitted; as, fy&m* 
mem (not Ijammer e n), to hammer; fammelrt (not fammelen), to col- 
lect. Sometimes, however, the e of the root is rejected : as, id) 
fcimmle (not famm e te), I collect. 

§ 77. Verbs of the Old Conjugation 

(commonly called irregular verbs). 

(1) In the Old Conjugation, the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect 
Participle are distinguished from the Present, chiefly by a change of 
the radical vowels. Thus, in some verbs, a different radical vowel 
is found in each of these three parts : 

Present. Imperfect. Perfect Participle. 

23itteti, beg. S3 at, * begged. ©efcten, begged. 

«6elfen, help. «§alf, helped. ©efyolfen, helped, 

©tnnen, reflect. ©cum, reflected. ©efonnen, reflected. 

SSrinfen, drink. %xa\\l, drank. ©efrunfen, drunk. 

* When in the course of the changes noted in the text above, a long vowsi 
or diphthong becomes short, the final consonant of the root is doubled > as : 
JRetten, to ride. fRitt, rode. ©euttert, ridden. 

£eiben, lo suffer. Sttt, suffered. @5 el iften. suffered. 

In the case of Seiben, note also, that v c is changed into its cognate t. 



VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. § 77 



341 



(2) Tn some the vowel or diphthong in the Imperfect and the 
Participle, is the same, but is different from that in the present : as, 



Present. 

©Ifcnmen, glimmer. 
£eben, lift. 
ftlimmen, climb. 
Xiaren (f uljven), choose. 
Cciben, suffer. 
§5cutgen, suck, 
©ctueben, shove. 
SdUetcben, sneak; 
ecbnauben, snort. 
€>dbteiben, write. 
Stieben, scatter. 
Xreiben, drive. 
Svugen, betray. 
2Beben, weave. 



Imperfect* 

©lomm, glimmered. 
<&eb, lifted. 
itlomm, climbed. 
Stcx, chose. 
SUV suffered. 
€>og, sucked. 
(Sctieb, shoved, 
©dfoltd), sneaked. 
(gcmtcb, snorted. 
€>dmeb, wrote. 
&tob, scattered. 
Xrieb, drove. 
£rcg, betrayed. 
$&cb, wove. 



Perfect Participle, 

©eglcmmen,glimmered. 
©eijoben, lifted, 
©eflemmen, climbed. 
©eforen, chosen. 
©elitten, suffered, 
©efogen, sucked, 
©efcboben, shoved. 
©efcbltdben, sneaked. 
©efcbueben, snorted, 
©efdbrteben, written. 
©eftoben, scattered, 
©eivteben, driven, 
©etregeu, betrayed, 
©erscben, woven. 



(3) In others, the vowel or diphthong of the Present i3 changed 
in the Imperfect, but resumed in the participle : as, 



Present. 

53tafen, blow, (sound) 

gallon, fall. 
gcmgen, catch, 
©eben, give. 
£cutgen, hang. 
Rummen, come, 
fccmfert, run. 
©cbaffen, create. 
©dhrlagen, beat. 
(Seljen, see. 
©tejkn, pusn. 
£rcten, tread. 



Imperfect. 

23lie3, blew, 
giel,' fell. 
girtg, caught. 
®ab, gave. 
•Sing, hung. 
jtcnn, came. 
Sief, run. 
@dmf, created. 
@d)lug, beat. 
<Saf;, saw. 
©ttejj, pushed. 
£rcit, trod. 



Perfect Participle. 

©cblafen, blown. 
©efallen, Mien, 
©efangen, caught, 
©egebeu, given. 
©er)angen, hung. 
©efcmmen, come* 
©elaufen, run. 
©efdbaffen, created. 
©efdblagen, beaten. 
©efefjeu, seen. 
©ejlefjen, pushed. 
©etreten, trodden 



When, on the other hand, a short vowel is mus made long, the second of 
two radical consonants is ommitted : as, 

©itten, tobe^; -Sat begged ; ©ebeten, begged, 

ftommen, to come ; ^am, came ; ©efcmmen, come 



See th? Note above 



342 



VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. § 77. 



(4) Boaides the vowel changes indicated above, verbs of the an- 
cient Conjugation have the following characteristics: 

a. The Perfe< t part eiple ends in en or n, and is thereby dis- 
tinguished fron? that of the New Form, which terminates in e i, or 
t, thus ; 



Old Form. 

<$er)olf en, helped ; from §elfen. 

©efatten, fallen; from gatlett. 

©etvag e n, borne ; from £ragen. 

(&tbcl e n, bidden ; from 33teten. 



Neio Form. 

(Mob e t (gelcbt), praised ; from 

£cben. 
©elteb e t (gelte&t), loved ; from 

Steben. 
©etab e t (gelabt), quickened ; from 

£aben. 
©etaufd) e t (getaufcfyt), exchanged ; 

from £aufd)en. 

b. Those having a in the first person singular of the Present In- 
dicative, assume the Umlaut in the second and third persons ; thus, 

Indicative. 



td) fcuige, I catch, 
bu f d n g ft, thou catchest, 
er f & n g t, he catches, 
tint faitgcn, we catch, 
fyx fcutgt, you catch, 
fie fdngert, they catch, 



Indicative. 
Present. 

ifa fd)lage, I strike, 
bu f d) I a g jt, thou strikest. 
er f d) I d 9 1, he strikes, 
fair fd)lagen, we strike. 
ir)r fdMagt, you strike, 
fte fcfylagen, they strike. 



c. Those having e (long) in theirs* person singular of the Pre- 
sent Indicative, take, in the second and third persons, te ; those, in like 
manner, having e (short,) take in the same places, the vowel t ; and 
in both instances, the Imperative (second person singular) adopts 
the vowel-form of the second person of the Indicative, thus : 



Indicative. 

Present. 
id) lefe, I read, 
bu ( t e f e ft, thou readst, 
er i\ e f i 1, he reads, 



Imperative. 

wanting. 
Me* bu (for Tiefe).* 
lefe er, let him read. * 



* The verbs that thus adopt the vowel-form of the 2. pers. of the Indie. los« 
also the characteristic e final : giving, as above, lies, for itefe ; fyilf for fyilfe, &c. 
[t should be noted, further, that the unaccented e final, is, in other instances, 
^iso sometimes omitted. 



VERBS t)F THE OLD CONJUGATION. § 77. 



341 



Indicative. 

Present 
toit tefen, \* e read^ 
il)r lefet, you read, 
fie lefen, they read, 

id) t)elfe, I help, 
bn fy U f ft, thou helpest, 
er f) i I f i, he helps, 
It it l) elf en, we help, 
i\)x ijeifet, you help, 
fie fyeifen, they help. 



Imperative. 



Xefen tmr, let us read. 
Xefet ii)T, read ye or you. 
lefen fie, let them read. 

wanting, 
f) i I f bit (for Ijtlfe),* help tnouu 
^eXfe er, let him help. 
t) elf en nnr, let us help. 
I)e!fet U)r, help ye or you. 
Ijelfen fie, let them help. 



d. The inal e, of theirs? and ZfaW persons singular of the Im- 
perfect Indicative, is always omitted, and in this tense the radical 
vowel, if it be capable of it assumes the Umlaut in the Subjunctive 
thus : 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Imperfect. 

Id) frracb, (for faracbe,) I spoke, id) fardcbe, I might speak 

bu fprctcbft, thou didst speak, 

er fpracb, (for fpracbe,) he spoke, 

tmr fpracb en, we spoke, 

ihx fpracbei, you spoke, 

fie fpracb en, they spoke, 



bu fprddyett, thou mightst speak, 
er fprdcbe, he might speak, 
totr fprdcben, we might speak. 
iijx fpr debet, you might speak, 
fie fprdefyett, they might speak. 



icb febfog, ' I struck, 

bu fcb'lugfl, thou didst strike, 

er febfrtg, he struck, 

ftur fcblugen, we struck, 

U)r febtuget, you struek, 

jle fdilugen, tney struck, 



id) fdbluge, I might strike, 
bn fcblitgeft, thou mightst strike, 
er fdtfttge, he might strike. 
t&k fdvtugen, we might strike 
iijx fcblixget, you might strike, 
fie febtiigen, they might strike. 



See Note page 342. 



344 



PARADIGM OF A VP^RB § 78. 



§ 78. .PARADIGM OF A 



INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



icr; fcrdage, 
bit frrdagft 
er f$I&gi, 
niv f.blaa/u, 
ti)V fcblaflet, 
fte fdjlagen, 



I strike, 
thou strikest. 
be strikes. 
we strike. 
you strike, 
they strike. 



~ IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) fdjlug, 
tu fdjtugfi, 
er fcblug, 
voir fdHugen, 
tyx fcblugef, 
fte fctyfugeu, 



I struck, 
thou didst strike, 
he struck, 
we struck, 
you struck, 
they struck. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



tf (1 

5 J* 

* f 3 



r id) fyabe 1 

! 5 

IS 



!2 K^u baft 
« ( 3 ev t>at 



timv baben 
ifcr babet 
fit- fyaben J 



I have "] 

thou hast | j 
he has \ "6 
we have ,' 2 
you have | m 
they have J 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



id) batte 
tu f>attefl 
ev fyotte 
mix batten 
il)r (jattet 
fie fatten 



1 ^ 



I had 1 

thou hadst | . 
he had '• 'o 
we had / £ 
you had | ra 
they had J 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) ruevbe ") 
u totrft 
er ^tvb 
mix roevben 
ibv roetbet j 
fte roevben J 



I ^ 

1 «• 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

id) roevbe "] £ I shall 1 ^ 

bu roivft | ^ thou wilt | " 

ev roirb [ §,«* he will f 

voir roevben ( ^^ we shall f ™ 

thr roevbet | g_ you will j > 

fte roevben J £, they will J -d 



g 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id) fd)lage, 

bu fd)lagefi, 
ev fcrdage, 
tow fd)lagen, 
ti)v fcMagef. 
'fte fcfyiagen, 



I may strike, 
thou mayst strike 
he may strike, 
we may strike, 
you may strike, 
they may strike. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) fd)(uge, 
bu fd)lngeft, 
ev f (tinge, 
roii- fd)lugen f 
ii)v fdUiiger, 
fte fddugeu, 



I might stiike. 
thou mightst strike. 
he might strike. 
we might strike, 
you might strike, 
they might strike. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) oabe 
bu fyabefi 
ev (jabe 
tt>tr fyaben 
ibv v)abtt 
fie fyaben 



*") * I may have struck, 



Is. 



(if; I shall strike, 
&c. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

id) l)citte 1 „ I might have 
bu Ijditeft | g struck, &c. 

ev f>citte I g 5 
loiv batten ( ^ 
ibv fcattet I **r 
fte fatten J ^ 

FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 

i$ roevbe 1 
bu roerbeft j g 
er roevbe i «> 
rotv roevben j J| 

tyc nxrbet | 2. 
fte roevbeu J 

SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

id) roerbe ") « 
Mi roerbeft j ^ 
er roevbe J ^j 
uur loevbeu [ JH-* 
ibv roerbet g 
fie roevbsti j ^, 



(if) I shall have 
struck, &c. 



Of THE OLD FORM. § ?8. 

\TERB OF THE OLD FOEM. 
io strike* 



S4S 



CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. 



frifiS* FUTURE. 
i& it>urbe T 

er ibiirbe 
tote roiirben 
1 1> r mitrbet 

fte roiivben „ 



Cms 



SECOND FUTURE. 

tci) rinirbe ] g £ . 
bu nnivbeft | £ Jgjg 
er tuurbe I i» ^ „ 
nnr n>uvben f s 1^ 
ff)r t»iirber J | J| § 
% win-ben 



J ' ca ►-* 



PRESENT TENSE 

1. wanting. 

2. fcblage b«, 
strike thou. 

3. fcfylage er, 

let him strike, 

1. fc&lagen nnr, 
let us strike. 

2. fc^laget tf)i*. 
strike ye. 

3. fcfolagen fte, 
let them strike, 



INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE* 



PRESENT TENSE 

fdjlagett, to strike 



PERFECT TENSE. 

gestagen IjaBen, 
to have struck. 



PRESENT* 

fd)lagenb, 
striking. 



PERFtCf 

flefdtfagett — 
struck. 



FIRST FUTURE. 

fc&Iagert Herbert, 
to be about to 
strike 



16* 



846 AIPHABETICAL LIST OF VEftBS § ?8. 

(1) ALPHABETICAL LIST Of 
(commonly called 

S'otE that iii the following list many compound forms are not set down. 



INS INITIVE. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


IMP. INDIC. 


iBacFen a), x>bake, 


id) bacfe, t>u bad\t, ev biid f, 


id) but 


^eb in gen 6), to bargain, 


id) bebinge, it. 


id) bebung 


$3e&uvfeu, to need, 


id) bebaif, i>u bebavffi, ev be&avf ; 
tt)iv bebiirfen, it 


tcb bebuvfte 1 


Sefeblen, to command, 


id) befeble, bu beftefylfi, erbeftefclt. 


icb befabl 


aBefkijjeu (fid)) c), to apply 


icb beflcijje, it 


tcb befltjj 


one's self. 






^Begtuneu d). to begin, 


id) bcajnne, it. 


icb bt$ann 
id) bip 


^Hfcett, to bite, 


id) bet&e, bu bei jjeft er beifit, 


^eflemmert e), to pinch, press 


id) beflnnme, ic. 


id) befiemmte 


(by anxiety), 






Serge it. to conceal, 


id) bevge, bu bivgft, ev btvgt 


icb bavg 


^SetTteit, to burst, 


id) bevfte, :c. 


id) bovft or bavfl 


sBeftlltiett (ftd^); to think of, 


id) beftune, jc. 


id) btfawxi 


SBeft^en, to possess, 


id) beftfce, it. 


id) befag 


SBetrugeil, to deceive, 


id) betvitge, ic. 


id) betiog 


§Ben>egett f), to induce, move, 


tcb betvege, it. 


icb beroog 


£3tegeu, to bend, 


id) btege, ic. 


icb bog 


IBteten £), to ofM, to bid, 


id) bittt, it. 


tcb bot 


§3inben, to bind, 


id) binbe, ic. 


id) banb 


§8 it tett, to entreat, to beg, 


id) biite, it. 


id) bat 


U3lafen, to blow, 


id) blafe, hn btafefl, ev btaft 


icb blieS 


.^Bletben, to remain, 


id) bleibe, it. 


id) blteb 


*blti$etl h)> to fade, 


icb bletcbe, ic. 


id) bltdj 


^3vaten, to roast, 


icb bvate, bu bvatejt or bvatft, ev 
bxattt or bvdt 


icb bviet 


^Bvecfyen, to break, 


id) bvedje, bu bvtcfcjt, ev bvtcbt 


tcb bvacb 


SB venue n £), to burn, 


icb bvenue, k. 


tcb bvanutl 


SBvtllgeil, to bring, 


id) bvingc, ic. 


icb bvacbte 


& en fen, to think, 


tcb benfe, it. 


tcb bacbte 


2)ingen &), to bargain 


id) binge, ic. 

icb bvefefoe, bu bvtf$efr> ev bvifc^t 


icb buna 
icb bvafcf) oi 

bvofeb 
tcb bxan^ 


&)iefd}eil, to thresh, . 


Qft'uoett i), to press, to urge, 


id) bvtuge, it. 


£)iivfen, to be able, 


id) bavf, tu bavfft, evbavf; mx 
butfeit, ic. 


Id) buvfte 


C^mpfattgen, to receive, 


icb empfange, bu em.pfangfr, ev 

empfcingt 
id) empfeble, bu emj>f?ef)lft, ev 

empfteblt 
icb empfinbe, it. 


id) empftna. 


(Smpfeljlen, to recommend, 


icb empfabl 


(gmvftnben, to feel, 


tcb empfatA 


SSntvinuen, to escape, 


id) eutvinne, it. 


icb entvanu 


@tuf$lafen, to Mi asleep. 


tcb entf^lafe? it. 


tcb etttfcblfcf 



t>t the Old FORii. $ ^8. 



m 



TEEBS OF THE OLD FORM 

irregular verbs'). 

In such case, axe student has only to look for the verb .ti its simple form. 



IMP. SUB J. 


IMPERATIVE. 


PARTICIPLE o 


REMARKS. 


id) biife 


bacfe 


gebacfeti. 


a) Regular when active; as, C£ 
badU sSwb; ba§ SBrob but 


id) bebitn^e 


bebtrtgc 


bebungen. 


b) Regular when it means, to 


id) bebiufte 




bebuvft- 


add a condition, to modify. 
53cbtttgt, conditional, is re- 


?$ befoble 


bcftef)l 


btfoblen. 


gular. 


id) befltffe 


befleijj 


befit jfe-n. 


c) £3etfetfHgert (ftd)), to apply 
one's self, is regular. 


i<^ be^dnrte 


beajime 


begonnen. 


d) In the Imperf. subj. begOtttte 


tc^ biffe 


bet$ or htifc 


gebtffeu. 


is also used. 


ic& beflemmete 


beflemme 


beflommen or 


e) ©eflcmmt is not frequently 






beflemmt. 


used, and is employed, onhy 


id) barge 


bir$ 


gebov^en. 


in the sense of compressed 


id) bctrfte 


berate or birfi 


gebcujteu. 




Id? befamte 


teftttrte 


befouueti. 




tcb befafce 


beftfce 


befeffeu. 




id) betvoge 


betriige 


betrogen. 




'id) berooge 


Ijewege 


bewogett. 


/) Irregular when it means, to 


id) b'Sge 


biege 


t^ebogeiL 


induce; regular when it means, 
to move a body or affect the 

sensibilities. 


id) bore 


$ktt 


geboteti. 


■g) SBeutft and betit, in the 


id) b autre 


btttbe 


gebunbett. 


present, are poetical. 


id) bait 


bitfc 


<jtbeteu. 




id) bltefe 


blafe 


geblafett. 




id) bite be 


bletbe or bleit 


gebltebeu. 




id) bltdje 


blete^e 


gebCtdjeii. 


%) 53let#ett. to bleach in the 


id* bviete 


t>rctte 


gebratra. 


sun, active, is regular. 


id? bra<$e 


txid) 


gebtod)en. 




ic^ bventute 


b refute 


gebraitnt. 


'&) Often regular when active : 


id? bxad)H 


bringe 


gcbrad)t. 


3d) b v e it n' e $q\%, nml e! 
beffer bra ante <U8 £ovf. 


id) \>ad)tt 


benfe 


gebac^r. 




id) btinge 


binge 


flebungen. 


l k) ^Dittgte is sometimes used ifa 


id) fcrafcfce or 


&tiff& 


gebvofdjen. 


the imperfect, in the sense 6i 


brofdpe 






hire. 


icb brange 


brtnge 


•ge^rungeft. 


i) For brattg, btrattg wa« ft* 


*d) burfte 


— 


geburft. 


merly in use. 


id) cmvffrige 


ertfpfange 


empfangett. 




ify emy f of)& 


sm^ftet)! 


*mvfol#en. 




id) emvfanbe 


empfmbe 


errrpfunbett. 




id) entraime 


entvtmte 


entvonrteru 




lis ettffrlitefe 


erttf^Iafeorents 
f*Uf 


entf$Iafta 





us 



AtPHABETICAL LIST Of VERBS § ?5. 



INFINITIVE. 



PRESENT INDICATIVE. 



IMP. IND1C. 



©lltfpyedjen, to answer, 
(Svbleicben ra), to turn pale, 
©rfrieren, to freeze, 
$rgreifen, to seize, to catch, 
(Smefen «), to select, 

drfltf)mt 0), to choose, 

(gvlofcfyetlp), to extinguish, 
(Srfaufeu, to be drowned, 
$vfd)allen, to resound, 
{Sfr fit dtl en, to appear, 
(Slfchvecfetl q), to be frightened, 

(Srtvtttfeu, to be drowned, 
{Snocigen r), to consider, 
(S fieri, to eat, 

^of)en 5), CobsoleEe,) to catch, 



Sa^ren t), to drive a carriage, 
Baden, to fail, 

fatten u), to fold 



Sangcn d), to catch, 
Bectyten, to fight, 
Stnben, to find, 
^iecfyten, to twist, 
^liegen w), to fly, 



jpltefjetf x), to flee, 

^(te^en y), to flow, 
^vagen, to ask, 
$veffeu, to devour, 
gvtevett, to freeze, 

(Balivcn £*, to ferment, 
©ebaven, to bring forth, 

©ebeu a), to gf*-% 

©ebteten b), to command, 
©ebetbeu c), to prosper, 
©efallen, to please, 

@eben d). to go, 
©elingen, to succeed, 
@elten e), to be worth, valid. 
$>gtt?fen, to recover, 



id) eutfpved)e, n. 
id) erb(ei4)e, it. 
id) erfvteve, it. 
tot) evgretfe, ic. 
id) evfiefe, it. 

id) evfu()Ve (etiiive), it 

id) erfaufc, bu erfaufeft, ev erfaitfc 

id) evfdjmlle, je. 

id) evfcbeine, it. 

id) evfcfcvecfe, bu evfcbvicfft, ev ev* 

fcbricft 
ici) ertrfnft, it. 
id) evrocige, ic. 
id) effe, bu tffejl, ev iffet or tf?r 

icr) far)c, bu fatjeft, ev fa^ef 

id) fal)re, bu fafytft, er fci^rt 
ic$ faiie, bit fallft erfattt 

fdj frtlfe, ft. 



id) fange, bu fang ft, ev fangl 
id) fedjte, bu ftdjtft, ev ficb't 
ic^ ftnbe, 2c. 

id) fledjre, bu fltd)tfr, ev fKcfff 
icb fiiege, bu fliegjt, ev flie^t 



Id) fliefje, ic. 

tcf) ftiefie, k. 

id) frage, bu fragft, er fva&t 
id) fveffe, bu fvtffeft or fript 
id) fvteve, k. 

idj> gaBre, w. 

tch gebave, bu gebavft (gebicvff) 

ev gebcivt (a,ebtevt) 
id) gebe, bu gtbff, ev gibt 

id) gebiere, it. 
id) gebeifye, it. 
id} gefaUe, bu grfattfr, ev gef<f It 

id) gebe, ic. 

es geftngt 

td) gelte, bu fjittjl, ev gtlf 

1$ genefe, n 



id) entfyrac^ 
id) evblidj 
id) erf voir 
id) ergvtff 
ia) evfiefte 

id) evfofjfr 
(evfov) 

tch evfoff 
id) erfcboU 
id) cvfd)ieri 
id) evfd)va£ 

id) evrvanf 
id) evroog 
id) aj? 



id) fuljt 
id) fid 

id) faltctf 



kr)ftng 
id) foci)! 
id) fanb 
id) floc^l 
id) flog 



icfc ffo^ 

ic& ffofj 
id) fvua 
tcb frag 
id) fvor 

idfei geba* 

id) gab 

icr) geBof 
id) gebie§ 
tct> gefiei 

It* fltng 



,i«| genaS 



0* THE OLD FORM. § 18. 



u§ 



IMF. fcUUJ. 



IMPERATIVE. 



PARTICIPLE. 



REMARKS. 



id) entfpvadje 
cd) erblidje 
ity erfrove 
«d) evgvtffe 
ict> cvfiefete 

id) erfitbre 
(evfiive) 

\6) erf off e 
id) evfd)olle 
id) eifc^teue 
\d) erfcbrciJe' 

id) ettranfe 

id) evrooge 
i$ afje* 



Id) fiibre 
id) ftele 

idp faitete 



id) focbte 
id) fanbe 
td) flocbte 
id) fioge 



'$ flo&c 

t* flSffc 

Id) friige 
teb frafe 

id) fveve 

icb tfoftve 

icb gebclfe (gfe* 

b5re) 
id)' tjabe 

fd) gcbofe 
\d) gebiebt 
id) gefide 

;^ Hinge 
ces gelange 
id) galte 
id) genafc 



entfpvid) 
ybleicfre 
erhieve 

ergretfe orergreif 
erfufe 

erfiilji'e (evfitte) 



evfanfe 
rfdjaiie 
erftyeine 
erfdjvtcf 

ertrtn! 
erroage 



fat)* 



fa&ve 
falte 

falte 



fange 
ft d)t 
ftnbe 
«t 
fliege 



fftc^e or flief) 

fliefje 
frage 

frig 

fvieve 

fi5Jr.e 

gebave (gebkv) 

jib 

f^ebtefe 
qetetb 
gefalle 

gene or get) 
geltnge 
gilt 
genefe 

I 



entfprocben. 
•;bltd)en. 
erfrorett. 
evgvtffen. 
evfojcn. 

evfol)t*en 
(erf oven) 

erfoffen. 
evfcbolfen. 
erfdnenen. 
erfdj'vocfeit 

erfninfen. 
em o gen. 
gegeffen. 

gefafyett. 



gefabren. 
gefalien. 

gefalten. 



gcfatigen. 

gefocbtett. 
gefunben. 
geftod)ten 
geflogen. 



geflo^en. 

gefloffen. 
gefvagt. 
gefreffen. 
gefroven. 

gegofjren 
geb overt. 

gegeben. 

geboten. 
gebiefeert. 

gef alien. 

gegangen. 
gelnngen. 
gegolten. 
geneferi. 



m) Derived from bleid)en, to 
whiten, as in the sun, which 
is regular. 

h) It is used in sublime style and 
in poetry. 

0) This verb is very seldom 
used. 

p) Like tferlofdj'etl and <M^ 
lofcfyett, irregular only when 
intransitive. £i?fci)ert is al- 
ways transitive and regular. 

f ) Irregular always as an intran- 
sitive verb, but regular when 
transitive. 

f) More often used as a regular 
verb. 

8) This poetical word is rarel^ 
used, and in the imperfect not 
at all. 

t) All the compounds of fdljverl 
are irregular except tt)tu- 

faljren. 

u) Irregular only in the partici 
pie now, for which gefatfet is 
often used. 

t>) The forms fteng and fteng£ 
are obsolete So also empftertg 

and empftenge. 
to) Sleugfl and fleiigt in thi 

present, and flCrtg in the im 
perative are forms used onlj 
in poetry. 

x) Slencbjx, jleudjt and fleucf, 

poetical. 

y) ^leugejt, fUufjt and fleuf, 
poetical. 



z) Sometimes regular, gabrfe. 

a) Some writers prefer gtebff, 
gtebt, gieb, to gtbft gtbt, gtf>. 

b) ©ebeutfi, gefecuf, poetical. 

C) ©ebfegeit is but a strength-- 
ened adjective form of th3 
past participle. 

d) ®ieng for gtug is antiquated. 

e) Formerlv golt, 0,6lte, wers 
used in the hnperf. indie, ami 
suhj 



5fo> 



ALPHABETIC AL LIST OF VERBS $ t&. 



INFINITIVE. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


IMP. INDIC. 


Jenietfenjfy to enjoy, 


id) geuief e, k. 


icb geno|3 


©eratben, to hit upon, 


id) geratbe, bu geraibft, etgeratl) 


id) gevietb 


<Scfct)et)ett, to happen, 


t€ gefd)iel)t 


e§ gefd)ab, 
gefebabe 


©eunuueR, to gain, to Win, 


id) genrinne, it. 


icb genxwtt 


®)te£en g), to pour, 


id) giejie, it. 


id) go§ 


®leic$eu &), to reserrbte, 


i$ glet$e, re. 


icb glidfc 


©lettett i), to glide, 


feb gieite, jc 


icb glt» 


©limmen fc), to shim 


icb glimme, k. 


icb glomni 


"@iaben. to dig, 


id) grabe, bu gra'bfter gra*bt 


id) grub 


OvetfeH, to seize, 


id) gretfe, it. 


icb griff 


^cibett I), to have, 


icb babe, bn baft, er bat 


icb batte 


fatten, to hold. 


icb 6alte, bu baltft, er bait 


icb bielt 


^augen m), to hang, 


tcb ^ange, bu ba»gft, «* baflgt 


id) btng 


©aiten n), to hew, 


id) batte, K. 


id) bteb 


4?ebeit. to heaVe, 


id) b e ^e, 2C. 


td) bob orbuft 


•feei^fU, 10 be named, 


id) t)eijk\ bu tjetgef^, er fyetfit 


icb bieS 


©el fen, to help, 


i<| belfe, b« bilfft, et ^ i If t 


icb balf 


lie if en.©), to chide, 


ic^ fetfe, jc. 


tebfiff 


xHeuueu, to know, 


id) fenne, k. 


icb fanntc 


■tfUteben, to cleave, 


id) fliebe> it. 


icb Hob 


vftiimmen^ to climb, 


icb t limine, it. 


id) flomm 


dtliltgeU, to soiind, 


id) fltu^e, jc. 


icb Hang 


<&lietreit, or 


id) Uneire, or fneipe, it. 


i$ fniff or !uip& 


-iftnetpen #), to pincri, 






jlomnnu, to come, 


id) fomnrc, bu fommfl, et fommt, 
or bu fSmmft, er fommt 


id) fam 


$5lUteft> to be abte, 


id) faun, bn fating et tann 


icb fonnft 


ftriedjen T), to creep 


id) fvtecbe, k. 


id) hod) 


ftubren a), to choose 


te§ tub re, &• 


icb fob* 


£afcen, to load, 


id) fabe, bu labe'ft or labft, er te= 
bet or Icibt 


icb Iub 


^\}M t). to let. 


id) laffe, bu faffeft, er lafft t (lafjf / 


id) tie? 


Vciufcn, to ran, 


id) laufe, bu Iciufft, er leuft 


id) lief 


^etben te), to suffer, 


id) leibe, k. 


icb lift 


Vet ben, to lend, 


id) letbe, jc. 


icb lieb 


\lt\n\, to irad, 


id) iefe, hu liefeft, er ttefet (IteSt) 


icb la§ 


I'iegen, to lie down, 


icb liege, it. 


icb lag 


H.$t*, in te, 


id) lu#e, ic 


tJ$ in 



m THE OLD FORM. § t8. 



S5i 



ftb gcnoyfe 
tcl) gertetbe 
ce gef#abe 

id) genninrte <'ge= 

roomie) 
tcb gdjfe 

Cd) glidje 



1$ g litre 



tci) glBmntr 
id) griibe 

tc^> t)arre 
ict> bielte 
td) r)tnge 



tcfe f)tebe 
tct) ho be 
»$ bte§e 
ici l;itIfeort)alfe 

tcb fiffe 
let, fen u ere 
tcb flobe 
!c^> fl omine 
lei) flange 
id) fnijfe or 

fnippe 
id) fame 

id) fonnte 
td) froefce 

id) fobre 



id) lube 

id) IteBe 
td) liefe 
td) line 
tcfe lie t>e 
td) Idfe 
it^ lage 



IMPERATIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


REMARKS. 


geutejje 


genoffen* 


/) ©encuisejt, geneufet, ant! 


gerarbe 


geratben. 


imperative gi'lieiljj, poetical , 


gef$e§e 


gefc&efcett. 


seldom used. 


getmnne 


getuonnett. 




gfege 


gegoffett. 


g) ©eugejl, geufjf, and imp's- 
rative gcu£. See gentefjett. 


gletdje 


gegltdjen. 


h) Regular as an active verb, 
to make similar, to compare. 
93evglet$en, although active 
is irregular. 


gietre 


geglttteu. 


i) ©eieiteu and begleiten ans 
not derived from gletten, but 
from teitett, and therefore re- 
gular 


q\i m me 


g eg font men. 


k) Now more frequently regular 


ijrabe 


gegvaben. 




greife 


gegvtffett. 




babe 


gebctbt. 


I) <gattbfjdbert is regular. 


halte 


gebalten. 




bange 


gefyangett. 


t?i) *§teng, btenge are old forms, 
This verb must not be mis- 
taken for f)augeu, to suspend, 
which is active and regular. 


bane or Ijau 


gebanett. 


ft) tjptillte (regular) is used whert 


be be 


geboben. 


cutting wood, carving stone,&LC. t 


betfee or fjeiji 


ger)et£en. 


are meant. 


bilf 


ge^olfen. 




fetfe or fetf 


gefiffen. 


0) This verb is sometimes used 


fen ne 


gefannt. 


as a regular verb. 


fltebe 


geflobett. 




fltntme 


geflommen. 


p) Sometimes regular, t Itmmtl* 


flinae 

file if e or fnetye 


geflnugen. 




ge fniffe n or fie* 


2) jtneipre, gefnetyt is mote 




fnippen. 


frequently used. 


fomm 


gefommett. 




fvtec^e or fried) 


gefonnt. 
tjefiodjen. 


r) &reud&ft Freud)t, Jreud), ob- 
solete. Only poetically used. 


?ut)re 


gefot)ren. 


&) iftiifyreil is entirely antiqua- 
ted, ttxifylen having taken US 
place. 


labe 


gelaben. 




isffe or laf 


gelaffen. 


1) ^Beranlctfl en is regular. 


lanfe or Canf 


g'elaufen. 




letfre 


gelitten. 


u) SSertetbeit, to disgust, !» te- 


letrye 


geltefjen. 


gular 


ties 


gelefen. 




liege 


gelegen. 




iiigc 


gctogetl. 





152 



AtPHAfcETICAL LIST OF VERBS § IB. 



INFINITIVE. 



WafyUp jj), to grind, 

DMben, to avoid, 
WhiUn 10), to milk, 

SD^effen, to measure, 

3fttfifallert, to displease, 

3J?t£lutgeil, to go amisg, 
Iftogen, to be able, 

SJHtffeit, to be obliged, 

%lct)tneu, to take, 
^emieil, to name, 

ipfetfcn, to whistle, 
^fiegert x), to cherish, 
$ vet fen, to praise, 

Snellen y), to gush, 

^adjeu £), to avenge, 

fHatfyen, to advise, 
Sftetbcn, to rub, 
«Sei$en, to tear, 
d'intux a), to ride, 



Bennett 6), to run, 

ifltecfyen, to smell, * 
Sftingen, to wrestle, 
fftumen, to run (of fluids;, 

Sftufen c), to call, 
^aljen d), to salt, 
€>aufcn, to drink, to tipple, 
<Saugen e), to suck, 

€>djaffen/ v , to create, 



Scfyetbett g), to separate, 
^d)ftlt$tt to appear, 



PRESENT INDICATIVE. 



i$ mettle, bu maf)left (mdhjfi), 

ev matylt (mdf)lt) 
id? metbe, k. 
ici) melfe, bu melffi or mi If ft er 

melft or mtlft 
id) meffe, bu miffeft ev miffet or 

mtft 

i mifjfalle, in mi fifdUft er mifi* 

faUt 
e§ mifHingt 
ic^ mag, bu magft er mag, mi 

mogen, jc. 

i mufj, bu mujjt, ev muj?, tint 

muffen, Ujv muffer or mu$t, k. 
icty nefyme, \>u nfmmft ev nimmt 
irf) nenne, jc. 

ic§ :pfeife, jc. 
id) r>f(ege, jc. 
id) pvetfe, k. 

fcj quelle, bu qiiillft ev qutllt 

icr) vac^e, k. 

ic^ varlje, bu varfyft er ratf) 
icfe retbe, ac. 
let) veife, k. 
t$ reite, ac. 



td) rentte, ac. 

i$ rted)e, ac. 
id) ringe, jc. 
id) vinne, ac. 
tcib rufe, ic. 

t$ fal^e, it. 

tc| faufe, bu (dufft er fduft 

16) fauge, :e. 

icr; fdjaffe, it 



IMP. INDlCd 



id) ma&lte 
(mubl) 

Uh mteb 
id) molf 

ic^ ma§ 

ic^ mifjftei 

es mif lang 
tc|> modjte 

id) muftc 

id) nafmt 
ic^ nannr? 

i* Vftff 
id) ppog 
id) v>8 

ic^ quoft 

icfe vacate (toe}! 

id) vtefj) 
ic^ rieb 
id) vifj 
id) rtti 



id) tamtle 6i 

rennte 
id) rod) 
id) rang 
id) ranit 
icfy vief 

id) fatjte 

tebfoff 

t* fog 

id) fcj)uf 



icb fdjetbe, k. 
i$ ferine, at. 



id) febtefc 

i$ fdnVa 



OF THE OLD FORM. § Y8. 



353 



IMP. SUB J. 



id) mahlete 
(mu blc) 
id) nitebe 
id) miHfc 

id> mafte 

tc^ mtgftele 

e3 melange 

id) mochte 

ic^ miigte 

id) nabme 
id; nenuete 

id) pftffe 
id) pfloge 
id) prtefe 

id) quelle 

tc^ rad)te (rod 

id) vtetfje 
l<$ viebe 
id) rtffe 
icfy ritte 



id) rennele 

id) rod)e 
id) range 

id) ran uefvoune; 
icb rtefe 

id) faille 

id) foffe 

iffe foge 

tit fdjiife 



;$ fdjtebe 
kfr fc^iene 



IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. 



ma&le 

meibe 
melfe 

mt£ 

mi gf a lie 

miflinge 



ntmm 
uenne 

Vfeife or pfetf 
pflege 

pre if e 

quelle 

radje 

raifye 
ret be 
retge 
rette 



rennc 

rtedje or ried? 
rtnge 
rtnne 
rufe 

palje 

faufe 
fang: 



f*affe 



fcfyetbe 
fcfcetne 



gematylen. 

gemteben. 

gemolfen. 

gemeffen. 

mij) fallen. 

mttilungen. 
gemocfyt. 

gemnfjt. 

genommen. 
genanut. 

gepftffen. 
gepjiogen. 

geyrtefen. 

gequoflen. 

geracrjt (geros 

d)en). 
geratbeu. 
gevieben. 
geviffen. 
gevttten. 



gerannt or ge- 

renut. 
gerocfoen. 
' erungen. 
geronnen. 
gem fen. 

gefal&en. 

gefoffen. 

gefogen. 

flefcjaffen. 



gefa^ieben. 
gefcfytenen. 



REMARKS. 



v) Except tlie past participle ge* 
mafjlett, no irregular form 13 
in use. 

w) Sometimes regular. Sfttlfffc 
&c , rarely used. 



x) When it signifies, to wait 
upon, or to be accustomed, it ia 
regular. 

y) Duelien, to swell, is regular 

Z) The irregular form is no long- 
er used Where it occurs in 
former writers it must not be 
confounded with the same 
forms from Uedjen. 

a) 93ereiten, to ride to, like all 
the compounds of retfen, is 
irregular ; but bcretteit, to 
make ready, from berett, rea- 
dy, is regular, like all deriva- 
tives. 

b) $ennte and gerennt, no* 
often used. 



c) Regular in som« writers, bus 
improperly so. 

d) Irregular only in the parti- 
ciple, and in that when use*? 
adjectively ; as, gefaljeiie %U 

fcbe ; er fyat fie gefafyt 

e) (gailgft and faitgt are not 
supported by good usage, but 
faugen, to suckle, is regular. 

f) In the signification of to pro- 
cure, to get, it is regular, as 
also anfdjaffen, to purchase, 
to buy ; abfcfyaffett to part 
with, to dismiss. 

g) The active verb fdjetben, to 
part, 10 disjoin, to divide, is 
regular. 



854 



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 78. 



INFINITIVE. 



Scbelten, to scold) 

<2cbemt, to shear 
©cbtebeu, to shovj, 
(&d)ie§eu, to shoot, 
©cfctuben, to flay, 

2>cfelafcu, to sleep, 
<gcblaa,en A), to beat, 
®d)letdjeit, to sneak, 

©d)leifett t\ to sharpen, to 

whet, 
Scbieifjen, to slit, 
Scbliefen, to slip, 
©cfyliegen, to shut, 

Sd)lingett, to sling, 
©cimmjjen, to fling, 
edjmeljeu k), to melt, 

©cbuaiibeit, to snort, 
£>d)imben, to cut, 
ea)vcrabeu Z), to screw, 

(g 4) vet ben, to write, 
® cforeieii, to cry, 
(gel? ret ten, to stride, 
&d)XQttll, to bruise, to gnaw, 



(gdmniren m), to suppurate, 
(gebweigen, to be silent, 
feet) we lien ra), to swell, 

(Solmumnten, to swim, 
$Bd)n)in&en, to vanish, 
<&cbwina,eu o), to swing, 

(Scbworen, to swear, 

Sebett, to see, 
Sent, to be, 
©en be it, to send, 

i&tcbenp), to boil, 

^tllften, to sing, 
<2 in fen, to sink, 
©tnnen, to think, to muse 

Sifeen, to sit, 
eoUett, to be obliged, 
(Spdten q), tospht, 
©peien, tosp'.t, 
Bjnmien, o spin, 



PRESENT INDICATIVE. 



id) fdjelte, bit febittjt, er fd)ilt 

id) febere, 2C. 

\id) febiebe, jc. 

id) fcbiejse, k. 

id) fd)inbe, k. 

tcb fcblafe, bu fcblaffl, er fcblaft 
id) fcblaa,e, bit fcfylaajt, er fcfjlagt 
id) fd;lei$e, k. 

id) fc^leife, jc. 

id) febtetfje, k. 
i(^ fd)liefe, K. 
ic$ fdpltefje, K. 

id) fcblina,e, :c. 
id) fcfametBe, tc. 
id) fdjmelje, bn fcbmeljefi (fcbmte 

&eft). er fdjmeiU (fcbmiljt) 
td) fd)tttebe or febnaube 
id) febueibe, k. 
id) fd)raube, k. 

id) fd)reibe, ic. 
id) febveie, k. 
id) fdjreiie, jc. 
ic^ febrote, k. 



tcf) febweire, jc, 
tc^ febweicje, k. 
id) fcbwelle, bit fdjttnUfr er 

fcbmillt 
id) febwimme, 2C. 
icfo febwiube, jc. 
tc^> fcfytutntje, :c. 

id) fcfywore, k. 

id) febe, bu fteljfr, er jtefct 
id) bin k. 
id) fenbe, :c. 

tcb ftebe, k. 
id) ftnge, c. 
id) finfe, 2c. 
id) ft nne, tc. 

id) ft|e, jc. 

id) foil bu follfr, er frU 

id) ft) a I re, ic. 

t<t fpete, ic. 

tc$ fpmne, *c 



IMP. INDIC. 



id) \d)ci\t (f*oIf 

id) fd) ol- 
id) febob 
id) febojj 
td) fctjuttb 

ity febttef 
tcfe fdpdifi 
id) fd)lii| 

t* fdMff 

i* f*K6 
id) fdrfoff 
t$ fcblog 

id) fdjlang 
id) fd)mi£ 
ic^ fd)mol$ 

icb fdjnoB 
id) febnitt 
id) febraubtf 

(fd)tob) 
id) fcfarteo 
id) fd)rte 
t* febritt 
icfy fc&rotete 



icfj fdjwor 
t(^ febwiea 
teb fcfyroou 

tcb febwamm 
tcb febmanb 
id) febwana, ©f 

fd&wung 
tcb febwor or 

febraur 
id) fab 
tcb war, k. 
tcb fattbte aad 

feubete 
tcb fott 
tcb fang 
jicb fanf 
tc| fann 



tcb fa^ 
id) follte 
id) ft>altete 
tcb fpte 
1 4 fa>«tt« 



OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. 



355 



IMP. BUBJ. 


IMPERATIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


REMARKS. 


Id) feinlte 


f*nt 


gefdjolfen. 




(fcbiute) 








id) jcbbve 


fcbere or fd)ter 


gefebovert. 




id) fcfeobe" 


fcfetebe 


get Robert. 




id) feboffe 


frbiepe 


gefeboffeu. 




id) fd.)uube 


t^iube 


gefdjitnben. 




id) fcbltefe 


fiVafe 


gefdjlafett. 




id) fct)tii^e 


fdi^ae 


gefcblagen. 


h) 2tatbf$lagett and betafy* 


tcfy \d){\d)i 


fcfcttJifc 


gefc^itcbert. 


fcblageu, to consult, are re 
gular. 
i) Regular in all other signifies 


t$ f*ltffe 


fcblevj* t* ^tetf 


gefebitffen. 








tions, as, to demolish, or to 


tcb fcfcltffe 


f*let{i 


gefcbltffert. 
gefdjfofrfen. 


drag 


id) fdjioffe 


fc&ltefc 




tcb fc&loffe 


fcbltejH 


gefchloffeu. 




td) fdHange 


fcbltngt 


gefcblungen. 




id) fcbmijfe 


fcbmeifk 


gefebmiffert. 




id) fd) mi l$e 


fcbmtlj cr 


gefcbmoljeu. 


k) As an active verb it is regu 




fcbmei^ 




lar. 


id) fdmobe 


fd) uau be 


gefdmoben. 




id) fcbiiitte 


fcbnetbe 


gefdmitten. 




tcb fduaubete 


fdjraube 


gefdjrau bt 


1) Commonly regular, fcfcraubte 


(fcbrobe) 




(gefebvoben). 


gefdjraubt. 


id) fdmebe 


ferret be 


gefebvteben. 




id) fdjricc 


febrcie 


gefebrieen. 




tc^ fcbritte 


febveite 


gefd)vitten. 




id? fdjvotetc 


fc&tote 


gefebrotett. 


Regular now except in the parti 
ciple. and this is frequently 
gefebrotet. 


id) fdjrccre 


febrcare 


gefd)TOoren. 


m) <Sd)TOterft a\ in the present 


tcb fdbmege 


fd)TOeige 


gefcfjrmegen. 


is provincial. 


id) fd?n)5lie 


fcbroili or 

fdjroeUe 


gefcbrocllen. 


n) Regular, when active. 


id) fd) to am me 


fdjtwimme 


gefd)TOommen. 




id) fdnuanbe 


fd) to tube 


gefdnvunben. 




ic^ fdjrocittije 


fefcrrringe 


gefcbTOuugen. 


o) (&dj)TOung is less in usaga 
than fcfcmang. 


ict fdbtuore or 


fd)TOore 


gefcbTOoren. 




fd) 113 i'tve 








id) fcibe 


ftefye 


gefeben. 




id) n>are 


fei 


geroefen. 




id) feubete 


fenbe 


gefanbt and 




tit fotte 


ftebe 


gefenbet. 
gefotteu. 


p) When active it is mostly re- 


id) f tinge 


ftnae 
ftnfe 


gefimgen. 


gular. 


tcb fa nfe 


gefmifen. 




°d) fanne 


ftmte 


gefomten. 




(fdntie) 








td) fajje 


fffec 


gefeffen. 




id) foUte 


— 


gefollt 




id) fpattefc 


foalte 


gefpcilfen. 


q) Irregular only in the parti- 


id) fptee 


fpete 


gefpteen. 


ciple, and this is sometimes 


icb fpcinne 


(pinne 


gefponnen. 


gefpaltet when the verb u 


(fp&mte) 






active. 



856 



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 78. 



INFINITIVE. 



Spletfkn, to split, 

(Spvecben, to speak, 
(fcpriejjeit r), to sprout, 
<S princ} en, to spring, 
(Siecben, to sting, to prick, 
©tccfen e), to stick, to be fast 

ened. 
Steven, to stand, 

5tel;len, to steal, 

&kiattt, to ascend, 
etevben, to die, 

©fteben t), to fly (as dust), 
(BiinUn, to stink, 
©to Sen, to push, 
Stveicfyen, to stroke, 
(5 tret ten, to contend, 



PRESENT INDICATIVE. 



IMP. INDIC. 



£f)im, to do, 
Xvagen, to bear, 
£veffen, to hit, 
£veibeu, to drive, 

£refen, to tread, 
Xrtefen, to drop, to trickle, 
£rin£eu, to drink, 
$4Ugen, to deceive, 



sBetbergen, to conceal, 

93evbteten, to forbid, 
93erbletben, to remain, 
33erbletd)eu, to grow pale, 
Berber ben u), to perish, 

CBcrbrte^cn, to offend, 
SPergeffen, to forget, 

95crf)et)(en to conceal, 

9L J erltcren, to loose, 
33erl5fd)eu, to extinguish, 

Ukrfdmlien to), to die away in 

sound. 
SHevfcfytmnbeil, to disappear, 

S&nmvxm, to perplex, 

$etjeifyen ; to pardon, 



id) fyletfje, 2C. 

id) fprecfce, bu fprtc^fi, er fprtdpt 

id) fpriefce, ic. 

id) fprtugc, 2C. 

id) fted?e! bu jitcfcfi, er jitefct 

id) \Udt, it. 

id) fie&e, ic. 

id) fhfcle, bu fitebift, er jitefctt 

td) fietge, k. 

tcfy ftevbe, bu fHrbjt, er jtirbt 

id) fHebe, :c. 

id) fttnfe, jc. 

tefc fto§e, bu ftofeft, er ftogt 

id) ftreidje, k. 

id) ftreite, 2C. 



tc^ frlteji or 

fpU§ 
id) tpradj 
id) fprojj 
t# fprana, 
id) ftad) 
icb ftedte or Pa!. 

id) ftatf Iftunb) 

id) Mi ftofci) 

id) ftieg 
id) fiarb 

tdjftob 
id? ftanf 
id) ftteij 
icfo find) 
id) firtti 



t* fbat 
icfc trua 
ids tvaf 
tc$ trteb 

\d> tvat 
id) troff 
td) franf 
id) trog 



tr^ t|)ue, bu fbuft, er tt)ut 
id) trage, bu tvaafl, er trdat 
id) treffe, bu trip, er trifft, 
id) freibe, jc. 

idj trefe, bu trtttfl, er tritt 

tc^ fviefe, n\ 

tc^ trinfe, jc. 

id) triige, bu tviigjt, er triigt 

ic^ oerberge, bu feerbtrgft, er oer* id) oerbarg 

birgt 
id) yerbiete, jc. tcb oerbot 

id) oerbletbe, K. icb oerblieb 

ic^ oerbletd&e, 2C. id) ocrbltcfc 

id) oerberbe, bu oerbtrbfl, er »er? i^ oerbarfc 

bfrbt r 

e§ oerbrtefjt e$ verbrofj 

id) oergeffe, bu oergtffeft er m~ id) i>ergaf* 

ic^ oerfye^e, tc. tc^) oerljeljlte 

icb berltere, k. id) oerlor 

id) uedofcfye, bu oerlofdjejtoruet^ id) oerlofd) 

lifebeft, er oerlBfdjt ort>cr r fd)t 
id) oerfcfcalle, k. id) verfc^oIX 

id) mfdjtmnbe, jc. id) t?et'fd)U)aufe 

to) »erwtrre, :c. id) S)ert»trrte 

id) uersei^e, k tc^ oerjte^ 



OF THE OLD FORM. 



§78. 



35? 



IMP. SUBJ. 


IMPERATIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


REMARKS. 


id) foltjfe 


fpletjjc 


gcfpliffcn. 




id) fprad)c 


i>vtd) 


gefpvodmt. 




td? frroffe 


fpriefce 


Qefproffeti. 


r) This must not be confounded 


id) ftoriiuge 


fprinae 


geftmmgen. 


(in the imperfect) with the re- 


id) ftcicfce 


fitd) 


geftod)en. 


gular verb fpioffen. 


tcb ft c die or 


fieefe 


gefiecft. 


8) This verb is commonly regu 


ftfife 






lar ; when active it is always 


tc$ jtdnbe 


jtefce 


gefiauben. 


so. 


(ftiinbc) 








id) ftdble 


fttefcl 


gefto^len. 




(ftol)le) 








id) {liege' 


jieige 


gefttegett. 




id) ft civ be 


fife* 


gefiovbcn. 




(ftiivbe) 








t$ ftobe 


ptebe 


geftoben. 


t) So 3?*fHebett, to be scatter©! 


id) ftcinfe 


fttnfc 


gefhmfen. 


as dust. 


id) fUcfje 


fto£e 


geftofjen. 
geftrtd)en. 




id) ftrute 


ftreid)e 




tcb ftrttte 


ftreite 


g eft fir ten. 




td) tbcite 


tt)tie 


getljan. 




ic^ triige 


trage 


getvagen. 




icb trdfe 


triff 


getvoffett. 




id) trtebe 


tvetbe 


getrieben. 




[cfe trcitc 


tvttt 


getveten. 




id) tvoffe 


trief or tricfe 


getvoffen. 




id) tranfe 


tviufe 


ge trim fen. 




id) tvoge 


tviige 


getrogen. 




ic^ &evbcirge 


ttevbtvg 


fcerbovgen. 




tc^ fcerbote 


oevbtete 


oevboten. 




id) »evbltebe 


i>erbleibe 


oerblt'eben. 




i^ uerblidje 


oevbletdbe 


t>erblicben. 




id? uerbatbe 


mbivb ' 


ijerborben. 


tt) 93erbe*bett, to destroy (act- 


(uevbiivbe) 






ive), is regular. 


es »evbw>fle 


Derbriefle 


oerbroffen. 


V) Sklbreujjt, JC., nearly obso- 


id) wgafe 


ttevgtj? 


sergejfen. 


lete. 


id) »erbe$tete 


yevbe^le 


fcetJeljCt or 
oerboblen. 




td) fcerlove 


sevltere 


yerloren. 




ic^ feerlofdje 


ocrlofcbe or 
»evlifdj 


seriofdjen. 




icb vcvfcbolle 


oevfc^alle 


uevft^ollen. 


«?) But little used, exocpt in ttvs 
imperfect and participle 


tc^ t>evfc§n>anbe 


i>erfd)ttnnbe 


serfcbnnutben. 




id) bernntTte 


bettDtrre 


fcernuvrt or 
Derwonen. 




Icfc ter^ie^e 


»et$eif)e 


fcer^ieben. 





358 



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 78. 



INFINITIVE. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE. 


IMP. INDIC. 


SBacfrfcn, to grow, 


id) road)fe, bu tvadpfefl, er road)ft 


ic|) rouc§3 


SOB ii 3 on or SBie^en #), to weigh, 


id) toage or rotefle, bu rocigft or 
roiegft, er rocigt or rote$t 


id) roog 


2Bafd)eu y), to wash, 


id) roafc^e, it. 


icfc Umfc$ 


SBebett z\ to weave, 


id) roebe, k. 


id) roob 


3Beic^en a), to yield, 


idjj.roetctye, jc. 


id) n)tc^ 


SBeifen, to show, 


id) roeife, k. 


ic& rotes 


IZBenben 6), to turn, 
iffierben, to sue for, 


tcfy roeube, jc. 

id) roerbe, bu roirbfi, er roirbt 


icfy roenbete or 

roanbte 
tcfy roarfc 


2Berbeu, to become, 


id) roerbe, bu roirft, er rotrb 


id) roarb or 
rourbe, bu 
rourbefi, er 
roavborroutDe, 


SBetfen, to throw, 


ic§ roerfe, bu roivfjt, er roirft 


rotrrouiben,K. 
i# roarf 


SBhtben, to wind, 


id) roinbe, k. 


id) roanb 


S3 iff en, to know, 


id) roeif?, bn tvetgt, er roeifj 


id) rougte 


%BoHen, to will, 


t$ rotU, bu roillfi, er mill 


id) roollte 


Sdrien, to accuse of, 


t* $ei$e, k. 


*$ Jtefj 


Steven c), to draw, 


idj jtelje, k. 


i*MJ 


Sroutftett, to force, 


ic§ jrotVge, w. 


id) jroaufl 



§ 79. Verbs of the New Conjugation 

{commonly called "regular verbs"). 

1) In verbs of the New, or simpler form, the Imperfect Tense 
«nd the Perfect Participle are not produced, as in the Old conjuga- 
tion, by a change of the radical vowels ; but by means of the suffix 
e t or i, which serves as a tense characteristic : thus, taking tin rad- 



OF THE OLD FORM. 



$78. 



350 



IMP. SUB J 


IMPERATIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


REMARKS. 


id) nnictfe 


mactfe 


geroacfcfen. 




id) n>6gc 


njage or roiege 


gemogen. 


x) 2Bcig.cn is active, and has 
rocige in the irnperf. subj. • 
tDtcgeit is neuter, and has 
nnege. SBiegen, to rock; is 
regular. 


td? wiifcfce 


n)cif$e 


getuafc&en. 


y) 28 a fd) efi and U) ci f cf) t are also 
used. 


id) tvdbe 


roebe 


gercoben. 


z) Regular except with the poetSg 
or when used figuratively. 


id) md)t 


metdbe 


gen)i$en. 


a) 2Betd)en, to soften, to raoli 
fy, is regular. 


id) rotefe 


roeife 


getmefeu. 




id) wenbete 


wenbe 


gemcnbet or 
gevuanbt. 


b) Regular when active 


tcb xouxbt 


rotrb 


geroovben. 


.- 


id* ttiirbe 


werbe 


gettJOVben ; (and 
as an auxiliary) 

rcorben. 




id) tvcirfe 


tmrf 


gcroovfen. 




(roiirfe) 








id) tttitibe 


roinbe 


gevunnben. 




id) ttjii^te 


roiffe 


geroufst. 




t$ ivoUtc 


— 


gewoflt. 




id) jtelje 


jet^c 


ge$ter)en. 




t$ *oge 


5te^e 


gejogen. 


c) 3 e «$f* *C. antiquated, and 


t$ jtocinge 






only in poetical usage 


Swinge 


gejtmmgen. 





.cal part (lob) of loben, to praise, and affixing thereto et or t, we 
get bb e t or lob t ; to which add the personal endings and we have 
tobere or lobte (lob + et + e), I praised ; lobeteft or lobtejt, thou didst 
praise, &c. 

(2) The verbs of the New form differ again from those of the 
Old, in that the former have in the Perfect Participle the termination 
et or t, instead of en : as, gelob e t or gelcb i, praised. See the 
table of terminations $ 76. 



360 



PARADIGM OF A TERB § 80. 

§ 80. PARADIGM OF A 





INDICATIVE. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 




PRESENT TENSE. 


PRESENT TENSE. 




g(f 


iif) lobe, I praise. 


id) lobe, I may 






6U lobeft, thou praisest 


bu lobeft, thou mayst 




BO ( ;j 


ei^ lobt, he praises. 


ev lobe, he may 


a: 

rg 


«v 


roir lober, we praise. 


roir loben, we may 


s ; 


ij)v lobet, you praise. 


tl)r lobet, you may 




£ (3 


fie loben, they praise. 


fte loben, they may 






IMPERFECT TENSE. 


IMPERFECT TENSE. 




6 P 


id) lobte, I praised. 


id) lobete, I might 




1 h 


bu lobte ft, thou didst praise. 


bu lobeteft, thou mightst 


a5 


K (3 


er lobte, he did praise. 


er lobete, he might 


■ i 




id tr lobten, we did praise. 


rotr lobe ten, we might 


^ C3 


ifyv [obfet, you did praise. 


ibr fobetet, you might 
fte lobeteu, they might J 


3- 


fte lobteit, they did praise. 






PERFECT TENSE. 


PERFECT TENSE. 




e (1 


i$ babe 1 I have ") 


id) Ijabe 1 1 may have 
bit babcfi 1 ^ praised, &c. 




du l)aft | ^ thou hast | ^ 




-(..3 


u t)at 1 ^ he has '. g 
nut buben \^z we have [ 'g 


er babe { •» 
rotr baben f*z 




g 2 


ibr babet | ^ you have | a- 


tbv fabtt <* 
fte fyaben J 




* f 3 


fte fyaben J they have J 






PLUPERFECT TENSE. 


PLUPERFECT TENSE. 




sji 


id) fcatte 1 I had ] 


ify fyatt? "] I might have 


bu b,atteft | ^ thou hadst I ^ 


bu batteft [ ^ praised, &c 




w (3 


er fyattt \ *» he had '• g 
iott batten (~z we had / '3 


er fyattt 1 ^> 
ivtr l)atten j ~z 




« i j 






ibr lyattet | ^ you had | a 


ibr fydm ** 
fte fatten J 




2 Is 


fte j'attcn J they had J 






FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 


FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 




6 (* 


id) toevbe ] I shall 1 
du tvirfi . | * thou wilt 1 ^ 


ic^ wevbe ") (if) I shall praise. 


2 


bu uxtbeft j - &c. 




« (3 


er wtrb [ 5 he will 1 .g 
roir roerben f o we shall f S 


er roevbe ^ S 




* I 1 


lv ir werbert 


o 




B 2 


ibr roerbet j you will j °* 


ibr tverbet 






fc (3 


fie roerben J they will J 


fte werben 








SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 


SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 




r * ( 1 


id) roerbe ] g I shall "} -6 


id) tvevbe "] a (if) I shall ha v e 


P 1 <i 


bu rotrft | £ thou wilt | .& 


bu werbeft | -» praised, &c. 




53 ( 3 


er rotrb 1 «> he will ( S 
voir roerben f « we shall f °* 


er tverbe ! & 
totr tverbeu f *-» 




^^3 




ibr roerbet | © you will j > 


ibr tverbet | ^ 




fte roerben J & they will J Jg 


fte toerbett J 


a 





OF THE NEW FORM § 80. 

VEEB OF THE NEW FOEM. 
to praise* 



361 



CONDITIONAL. 



FIRST FUTURE. 

(d) noiirbe " 
bu tmirbejt 
cr triirbe 
»tr tofirbeit 
tfcv nntvbet 
ftc tour ben 



5?* 

1 1.8 

Mg 



SECOND FUTURE. 

<ct) witvbe 
bu miirbeft 

cr toiirbe 

rotr rourben f -g 
thr win-bet 
f:e rtuiibeu 



IMPERATIVE 



PRESENT TENSE 

1. wanting. 

2. lobe bu, 
iraise thou. 



P 



3. lobe ev, 

let him praise. 

1. lobeu mv, 
let us praise. 

2. lo bet tpr. 
praise ve. 

3. lobctt fte, 

let them praise, 



> o 

:s-al 

o.S2 



INFINITIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

to 6 en, to praise. 



PARTICIPLE. 



PRESENT. 

looenb, 
praising. 



PERFECT TENSE, 

geloot tjaoen, 
to have praised. 



PERFEdf 

gelobt 
praised 



FIRST FUTURE. 

Ioben toerben, 
to be a "'pout to 
praise. 



10 



362 list of verbs of the mixed conjugation. j 82. § 92, 

§ 83. The Mixed Conjugation 

{embracing the irregular verbs properly so called). 

There are a few verbs (sixteen in all), which have a sort of mixed 
conjugation : partaking of the Old Form, in that they change their 
radical vowels to form the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Parti- 
ciple ; and at the same time, partaking of the New Form, in that 
they assume, in the same parts, the tense-sign te and the participial 
ending t. These are they which, strictly speaking, are the irregular 
verbs of the language, and accordingly, they are here so classed. 
They will be found, also, in the general List of (so called) "irregular" 
verbs (page 346), which, for the sake of convenience, we have 
there inserted. 



S 82. 
LIST OF VERBS OF THE MIXED CONJUGATION, 





PRESENT 


IMPERFECT. 


PAST 


> 


INFINITIVE, 


ef the indicative. 


-**- 


PARTI- 
CIPLE. 


» 






* 


3 






Indicat. 


Subjunct. 




g 


©rennen, to burn, 


_ 


id) btannte 


id) brennte 


gebrannt. 


b renin 


SBtingen, to bring, 


— — 


id) brad)te 


id) bra'd)te 


gebrad)t. 


— 


Serif en, to think, 


— . ■ 


id) bad)te 


td) ba'd)te 


gebad)t. 


— 


Snitfen, to be permitted, 


id) barf, bu barf % er barf 


id) burfte 


id) biirfte 


geburft. 




£aben, to have, 


id) I)abe, bu Ijafr, ft bar 


id) ()atre 


id) hatre 


gebabt. 


habt. 


5?ennen, to know, 


— — 


id) fannte 


id) fennte 


gefannr. 


— 


ftonnen, to be able, can, 


id) fann, bu fannfr, cr fann 


id) fonnte 


id) fonnte 


gefonnt. 




W6 gen, to be allowed, 


id) mag, bu magfr, er mag 


id) uiod)te 


id) m'od)te 


gemod)t. 




may, 
Wiiffen, to be obliged, 


id) muft, bu mufct, er mufc 


id) mufcte 


id) nn'ifcte 


gemu&t. 




must, 












Wennen, to name, 


— — 


id) nannre 


id) nennte 


genanttt. 


— 


Dvennen, to run, 


— __ 


id) rannfe 


id) rennte 


gerannt. 


— 


£ en ben, to send, 


— — 


id> fanbte 


id; fenbere 


gefanbi. 


~*. 


SoO en, to be obliged, 

shall, 
SBenben, to turn, 


id) fott, tu foKfr, tt fott 


— 


— 


— 




• 


id) ivanbte 


id) roenbete 


geroanbt. 





KStffen, to know, 


id) reeifi, bu rociftt, er weijj 


id) nmfcte 


id) wiifat 


gtreujjt. 


roift. 


S3 o Ken, to be willing, 


id) wiU, bu wiB0, et mi. 


— 


— 


— 





PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. $ 83. fctf3 

$ 83. Paradigms of irregular verbs. 

(1) In order to a better display of the irregularities of some oi 
these verbs, we append the following paradigms. They will be found 
exceedingly convenient for ready reference. Some of these verbs, 
also, have certain peculiar uses, which require special attention. 
For this reason we have, immediately after the paradigms, added a 
series of explanatory remarks, with copious examples illustrating fchg 
several wa?s in which they are employed. 



864 PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. 

(2) JSurfcn, to be permitted, 



Si 



Iji 

« h 



i 



§2 



INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



ttf> barf, 
bu barfft, 
ev barf; 
irtr biivfeu, 
tf)i biirfd, 
fte biufen, 



I am 

thou art 
he is 
we are 
you are 
they are 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) turf t J, 
bii burfteffc, 
er burfte, 
unrburften, 
tbr buvftet, 
fte burfien, 



I was 
thou wast 
he was 
we were 
you were 
they were 



PERFECT TENSE. 



let babe 
bit baft 
ev fyat 
voir baben 
tbr fyabet 
fte tjabett 



1 

it 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
they have 



M 






PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



ify hattz ) 
bu batteft | ^ 
er f;atte ( ^ 
wtr fatten \ Z 
tbr fyciiUt | « 
fte fatten J 



I had 
thou hadst 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had 



l.i 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



tci) roerbe ") 
bu rotrfi | ^ 
er wirb 1§_ 
rotr roerben [£ 
tbr roerbet | *° 
fte u>erben J 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



H 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) tuerbe 1 g 
bu nnrft | -g 



er uurb 
tvir rcerben 
tfer roerbet 
fte roerben 



>~ 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



8* 

^| 

r <v g 
43 a, 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id) biirfe, 
bu biirfeft, 
er biirfe, 
rotr biirfen, 
tbr bitrfet, 
fte biirfen, 



I may 
thou mayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



1-d 
S 

U 

i *> 

J J3 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



tcfy burfte, 
bu biivfteft, 
er burfte, 
rotrbiirften, 
tbr burftet, 
fte biirften, 



I might 1 -g 

thou mightst | js 
he might I "g 
we might f £ 
you might | a 
they might J jg 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id} babe 
bu babeft 
er fyabe 
rotr baben 
tbr t)abet 
fte ^abett 



I may have oeer 
^ permitted, &e 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



tcb ba'tfe 
bu f)atteft 
er bcitte 
rotr fatten 
ibr battel 
fte fyattui 



I might have been 
j£ permitted, &c. 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



mitted, &e. 



bu roerbejt | ^ 
er roerbe '. J[ 
rott roerben f .£ 
tbr roerbet | ■** 
fte roerben J 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE 



i$ roerbe 1 g 
bu roerbeft | >» 
er roerbe 



• «■ 



(if) I shall havft 
been permitted, 
&c. 



tbr roerbet | 
fte roerben j 



PARADIGMS 01 IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. 365 

to dare. (See Remark 9.) 



CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 



Wanting. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

biirfen, to be per- 
mitted. 



bitvfenb, 
being permitted 



PERFECT TENSE 

geburft t)ahtn, 
to have been 
permitted. 



PERFECT. 

Qeburfr, 
permitted. 



H3t3 



FIRST FUTLUE 

{$ toitrbe ] 

bu roiivbejt | 

er raiirbe I JL 211 

toix tnuvbcn j £ §£ 

tbr roiirbet 

fte wiirben J ^ ^ 

SECOND FUTURa. 



>"? 



tct) roiivbe 1 ~ 
be uuirbeft J> 
ct roiirbe I £ ^ 
tinr tiuivbcn ' «£- 3 o. 
tbr wiivbet I -§ g 
ffr nmrbtn J % ™£ 



866 PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. $ 83 

(3) &imueit 



i\\ 






IS5 



INDICATIVE. 



tdj faun, 
bu faiutft, 
er faun, 
rotr fomten, 
il)v fonner, 
fie fbnnen, 



PRESENT TENSE. 

I am 
thou art 
he is 



you are 
they are 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

I was 
thou wast 
he was 
we were 
you were 
they were 



tcj Fcmnte, 
bu fonntefi, 
er fouute, 
rotr founfen, 
ibr fonntet, 
fie fonuten, 



PERFECT TENSE. 



icfy ^abe 
bu baft 
er \)at 
rotr baUn 
tbr fjabet 
fie tyaUn 



1 have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
they have 



L.2 

r-3 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



td) batte 
bu batteft 
er fyatt? 
rotr batten 
tbr Ijatret 
fte batten 



I had V . 

thou hadst | -§ 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had j 



[2 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roerbe ^ 
bu rotrft | g 
er U)irb I ^ 
rotr roerben f .§ 
tbr roerbet | *~ 
fie roerben J 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roerbe 
bu roirfi 
cr rotrb 
rotr roerben 
tbr roerbet 
fte roerben 



1 J 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



1 « 

( ^ a3 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id) fonne, 
bu foniiefi, 
ev fonne, 
rotr fbnnen, 
tbr fonner, 
fie fbnnen, 



I may 
thou mayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



1 



1 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



icb fonnte, 
bu fonntefi, 
ev fonnte, 
rotr fonnten, 
tbr fonuter, 
fie fonnten, 



I might 
thou mightst 
he might 
we might 
you might 
they might 



1 



PERFECT TENSE. 



tc^ t)abe 
bu babeft 
er fyabt 
rotr baben 
ibr b^bet 
fie t)abett 



I may have been 
able, &c. 



►I 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



td) batte 
bu pttefl 
er batte 
rotr batten 
tbr l)atM 
fte fatten 



I might have been 
*? able, &c 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



(if) I shall be 
able, &c. 



id) roerbe 
bu roerbefi | g 
er roerbe I § 
roir roerben [ .g 
tbr roerbet | **- 
fte toerben J 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE, 



id)*roerbe ") g 
bu roerbeft 
er roerbe 
wit roevben 
ibr roerbet 
fie toerben 



(if) I shall have 
been able, &c. 



PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR "VtfRBS. § 

to be able. (See Remark 10.) 



36$ 



CONDITIONAL. 



IMPERATIVE 



INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE* 



Wanting. 



PRESENT TENSE, 

fomtett, 
to be able. 



PERFECT TENSE, 

gefonnt fyaben, 
to have beei 
able 



# IRST FUTURE. 

id) roiirbe ] jg 

er wurot ! 2* 2°« i 

age m&rben ( S ojj! 

tf)r ro&rbet | ^ "§2j j 

fte njiirben J _ ! 

SECOND FUTURE. 

<cft roitvbe ]s Jd 
bu nnirbeft | •» jg ^ 
er roiirfce I i> ^jf 
rotr jourben f "S 315 
il)t toiivbet ! S -§ g 
fie ojurben j « £j 



PRESENT. 

ionnenb, 
being able 



PERFECT, 

gefomtt, 
been abk. 



PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. 



(4) SJfdgett, to l»e allowed^ 



INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id) ma $, 
Mi magft, 
er mag, 
mix mogen, 
it>i* mijget, 
fte mba/n, 



I am 

thou art 
he is 
we are 
you are 
they are 



J" 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) mod)te, 
bu mod)tefi, 
er mocfyte, 
mix mod) ten, 
tfjr mocfytet, 
fie mocbren, 



I was 
thou wast 
he was 
we were 
you were 
they were 



) 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) f)abe 
bu fcaft 
er fyat 
mix baben 
tbr &abet 
fie I) a ben 



J* 



V 



\i 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have | § 
they have J £ 






PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



id) t)atfe 
bu f)atteft 
er t>atte 
nm* batten 
tbr fyattet 
fie batUn 



1^ 

! lr 



I had ) -a 

thou hadst | §J 

he had Ijz 

we had ' ^ 
you had 
they had 



J .a 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



td) werbe 1 
du wivft \ g 
er nnrb [ ^ 
wir tuerben f : » 
tbr tuertet | ~ 
fie werben J 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 






J 



SECONI> FUTURE TENSE. 

V 



id) rcerbe ) 2 
bu wirft [ Is 
er vutvb (^f 
nnr tuerben f -g" 
ibr werbet I g 
fte toerbett J Sj 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



If 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



1$ rnoge, 
bu mo^ef*, 
er mocje, 
mix mogen, 
tbr mijflet, 
fie motjen, 



I may 
thou mayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) mod)te, 
tu modjteft, 
er mod)te, 
mir mod) fen, 
tjt mocbtet, 
fte molten, 



I might 
thou mightst 
he might 
we might 
you might 
they might 



I 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) l)abz 
bu fyabefi 
er fyabt 
mix fyaben 
tbr fyabet 
fie \)abzn 



! o 



I may have been 
allowed, &c. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



*• 



I might have been 
allowed, &c. 



id) im* 1 

bu l)dttefi I ~ 
er (nitre I 
mix fyatUn \ 
tbr pttet 
fie fatten J 



FIRST FUTURF. TENSE. 



(if) I shall be %l 
lowed, &c. 



id) werbe ") 
bu toerbefi | 
er toerbe I ■ 
mix werben f ; 
tr>r n>cvbet 5 
fte toerbeu J 



SECOND FUTURE IENSE. 

iff) twerbe 1 S (ii) I shall hav« 
bu werbefl [ ' 



er toerbe | *^ 
mix roerben | 
tbr tverbet J 
fie toerben J 



t f * 



been 
&c. 



allowed, 



PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. $ 83. 369 

10 have liberty. (See Remark 11.) 



CONDITIONAL. 



IMPERATIVE 



INFINITIVE. 



PARTICIPLE. 



Wanting. 



PRESENT TENSE, 

mogen, 
to be allowed 



PRESENT. 

mogenb, 
being allowed. 



f IRST PUTURE. 

id) tviirbe 

fcn rciirbeft 
er toiirbe 
nur nuirben 
ifyr nuirbet 
fte njiirben 



! -a | 



SECOND FUTURE. 

ten iuiivbe 
bu nntvbefi 
n nuivbe 
tntv nnirben [ 
ifyr nmrbet 
fie nntrben 






JO Q H 
§ -al 
W *-4JB 



PERFECT TENSE. PERFECT 

fjemocfct tyaben, Uemrdtf, 
to have been al- 1 all ? wed 
lowed* 



BIO PAttADl&MS OF IRREGULAk Verbs. J 83. 

(5) SJtuffim, to be obliged \ 



Hi 

15 s 

K (3 



INDICATIVE. 



tdj mu|, 
bu mufit, 
er mu§, 
row miiffeu, 
ifjr muffet, 
fie miiffeu, 



PRESENT TENSE. 

I am 

thou art 
he is 
we are 
you are 
they are 



•8 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id? nutftte, 
bu mufjteft-, 
er mufjte, 
roir muiten, 
tbr mu&tet, 
fte mufUeu, 



I was 
thou wast 
he was 
We were 
you were 
they were J 



V WO 



PERFECT TENSE. 



ify babe 
bu baft 
er £>ctt 

roir baben 
tbr r)abet 
fte babeu 



L 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
We have 
you have 



1* 



they have J Jj| 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



1- 



t$ batte 
bu batteft 
er fyattt 
rotr f>ctttett f S 
ifyv fjattct | «> 
fte §atteu J 



I had "1 ts 

thou hadst | §t 
he had ! 2J 
we had f ® 
you had 
they had 



JJ 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



td) roerbe ") 
bu rotrfl J jj- 
er rotrb i sc- 
roti* roerbeit f *■* 
tbr roerbet 5 
fte roerbeu j 



1 shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
We shall 
you will 
they will 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roerbe "] g 
bu rotrjt j *§ 
er rotrb l^ 
roir roerbeu f •§■ 
tbr roerbet g 



& ( 3(fte roerbeu J 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



~ 4) 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



mufje, 
bu muff eft, 
er miiffe, 
rotr muff en, 
tbr miiffe^ 
fte miiffeu, 



I may 
thou mayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



IMPERFECT TENSE 



{$ ntufjte, 
bu miiiteft, 
er miijjte, 
rotr mujjtett, 
tbr miifstet, 
fte mit^teu, 



I might , ) . 
thou mightst | <u 
he might [-Js 
we might 
you might 
they might 



i 
J" 



ify Ijabe 
bu babeft 
er fyabt 
rotr babeu 
tbr t)dbet 
fte fyabzn 



PERFECT TENSE. 

I may have beets 



.*> obUged, &c. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



trb batte 
bu pttefl 
er batte 
rotr fyatttn 
tbr b^tttet 
fte fatten 



I might have beeij 
*-? obliged, &c. 
8 

B 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



Of) I shall be 
obliged, &c 



i$ roerbe 1 
bu roerbefi 
er roerbe 
rotr roerbeu 
tbr roerbet 
fte roerbeu 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE 

id) roerbe ") 



IS? 
J-" 



bu roerbeft 

er roerbe ( ^ 

rotr roerbeu ; ^ 



(if) I shall havfc 
been obl'ged 
&c. 



tbr roerbet 
fte roerbeu 






£A*ULDiGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. $ 83. 

must (See Remark 12.) 



mi 



CONDITIONAL. 



IMPERATIVE. 



Wanting. 



'FIRST FUTURE, 



ity wiirbc 
bu tmtrbefl 
tx tt)iirbc 
roix toiirbeu 
ihx tmirbtt 
fte tourb.n J 



jftd 

■^ o *> 



SECOND FUTURE. 



id) nmrbe 
bu toiitbefi 
er tviirbe 
aur ttjiirben 
tfcr toiirbet 
fie tmtrben 



12 J 



INFINITIVE, 



PRESENT TENSE 

miiffen, 
to be obliged. 



PERFECT TENSE 

gemuft fyibtn, 
to he\re been 
obliged. 



PARTICIPLE. 



PRESENT. 

muffenb, 
being obliged. 



FERFSC&. 

gemufjt, 
obliged. 



SYS! PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. % $$, 

(6) <&olUn, to be 



e: 

0, 



INDICATIVE; 



PRESENT TENSE. 









t* foil, 
bu folift, 
er foil, 
follen, 
fpEet, 
fallen. 



( 1 rotr 
} 2 ibr 
( 3 fie 



I am 
thou art 
he is 
we are 
you are 
they are 



CD 

f 3 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) feUte, 
bu foiltefl, 
er folite, 
rotr follten, 
ibr foUtet, 
fie follten, 



I was ") 
thou wast | -y 
he was I §q 
we were | g 
you were | © 
they were j 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) Jjcibe 
bit l>afl 

ev fyat 
rotr bctben 
ibr fyabzt 
fte ^ciben 



1 have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
they have J g 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



tdj batte 
bu battefl 
er r^atte 
mtr batten 
ibr fyattet 
fie fyatm\ 



H 



I had 1 ■* 

thou hadst | Jjo 
he had !§. 
we had ( ° 
you had | .§ 
they had J j§ 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE, 



id) roerbe ) 
cu rotrfl | . 
er rotrb L 2 
roir roerben f *§ 
ibr roerbet w 
fte roerben J 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



SECONE FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roevbe 1 g 
bu rotrfl f ^ 
er roirb L^ 
rotr roerben f £ 
ibr roerbet 5. 
fie roerben ) & 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id) folle, 
bu foEefi, 
er folk, 
roir foil en, 
ibr foiled 
fte follen, 



I may 
thou rriayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



I G8 

[1 
J 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) foilte, 
bu fctltcjl, 
er foilte, 
rotr follten, 
ibr folltet, 
fte foUten, 



1, 



I might 

thou mightst [ "§ 
he might yj$ 
we might f © 
you might j « 
they might J •** 



£ 



I may have been 
obliged, &c. 



PERFECT TENSE. 

id) ijabe 

bu feabeji 
er b«^ 
roir baben 
ibr babet 
fte fyabeu 

PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



CD'XJ 



trb bcttre 
bu ptteft 
er bcitte 
rotr fatten 
ibr l)atkt 
fte ptten J 



I might have been 
^ obliged, &c. 

m 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 

Of) I shall be 
obhged, &c. 



id) roerbe 1 
bu roerbefl | 
er roerbe 



rotr roerben f |§ 
ibr roerbet | 
fte roerben J 

SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

id) roerbe )s (il) I shall hav« 



bu roerbejt 
er roerbe ( ^ 
rotr roerben [23 
ibr roerbet £_ 
fie roeiben J & 



been oblig&i, 
&c. 



PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 88. 

Obliged. (See Remark 13.) 



CONDITIONAL. 



IMPERATIVE 



INFINITIVE. 



PARTICIPLE. 



Wanting. 



PRESENT TENSE 

foUett, 
to be obliged. 



PRESENT. 

foflettb, 
being obliged* 



PERFECT TENSE. 

gefollt Ijafcett, 
to have been 
obliged. 



PERffCf, 

gefoflt, 

obliged 



FIRST FUTURE, 
1 



bit rciivbeft 
tt nntrbe 
toit ttmrben 

tbr tmitbet 
ffe tinivben 






V£ 



3~3 



SECOND FUTURE. 

tdj it'iivbe ) s 
bit uritt&eft 

er rciirbe 

nj ir wurben , k 

ij)v wiirbet I §. -| g 






5 S? 



Be ttjiirben 



¥t4 PXRXDXGfts OF IRREGULAR VERBS. $ 83 



(7) SStffett, 



INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id? roeifj, 
bu wet ft, 
er n>et)3, 
roir lmffni. 
ibr rutffet 
fie tuiffen, 



I know, 
thou knowest. 
he knows. 
we know, 
you know, 
they know. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

I knew, 
thou didsfc 
he knew, 
we knew, 
you knew, 
they knew. 



ttf) lUltfjte, 

bu uuifteft, 
er nmgte, 
mix tuufkett, 
ifyv roufjtct, 
fte wufsieu, 



know. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



ify fyabc 
bu fafi 
er |at 
tint t)abcn 
r$r ^abet 
fte ^abeit ' 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
tney have 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



id? \)atk 
u baiteft 
er fyattt 
imr v)attm 
ibr (jattet 
fte fatten 



>I 



I had 1 

thou hadst 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



ici) merbe 1 
du nurft j ~ 
er mxb [S 
wtr roerben f ^ 
ibr roerbet e 
fte roerbeu J 



I shall 
thou Wilt 
he will 
We shall 
you will 
they win 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) 



werbe "] g 
bit nnrft I -| 
er nmb (^ 
wit tuerben f *£• 
ibr rcerbet I | 
fte t&erben j g, 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
We shall 
you will 
they will 



id) tmffc, 
\m unffeft, 
er wiffe, 
mtr raiffen, 
ibr uuffet, 
fte yd iff en, 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



I may 
thou mayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



tc$ rouSte, 
bu roufkefi, 
er wujjte, 
roir n)u£reft, 
tfcr wii|tet, 
fte roujjten, 



I might 
thou mightst 
he might 
we might 
you might 
they might 



PERFECT TENSE. 



tc$ fxibe 
bu ^abejl 
er v)(iht 
mix fyabtn 
ibx t)abtt 
fie ^abert 



I may have 
known, &c. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



tdj fyattt 
bu i)atreft 
er ptte 
nnr pttett 
iv)x t)<xtkt 
fte v)attm 






I might have 
known, &e. 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



ify raerbe^ 1 



bu roerbeft 
er merbt 
wtr roerben 
tfjt rocrbet 
fie werben j 



(if) I shall know, 
fee. 






SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

I ss (if) I shall hav& 



id) tDerbe 
bu rcerbeft 
er werbe 
nnr roerben 
ibr roerber 
fte merben 






known, &c. 






PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. 



875 



lo kcow. 



CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE 



FIRST FUTURE. 

f$ roiirbe 
mi roiu'beft 
iv tDiirbe 
roit rouvbert 
tin- roiitbet 
fte roiirbert 






PRESENT TENSE. 

1. wanting. 

2. roiffe bit, 
know thou. 

3. roiffe er, 

let him know. 

1. ivtffeu rotr, 
let us know. 

2. tviffet tfyr, 
know ye. 

3. rot fieri fie, 
let them know. 



PERFECT TENSE. 

geroitft t)aBeu, 
to have known. 



SECOND FUT'JRE 

td) roitrbe 
bit roiivbefl 
er rortrbe 
roit rourbert \ & 
tor roiirbet | | 
tie roiivbert J £ 



> 6 



-S s 
°°-^ 



PRESENT TENSE. 

rotffen, 
to know. 



PRESENT. 

rotffenb, 
knowing. 



PERFfedf* 

geroujit, 
knows** 



376 PARADIGMS Off IRREGULAR VERBS. $ 83* 

(8) 9£5olletf, to ft* 



INDICATIVE. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



IS 



& { 2 
K (3 

eh 



id) toili, 
bu nnlift, 
er nnll, 
wtr tuoUen, 
ibr woUef, 
fie ttwUett, 



I will, 
thou wilt, 
he will, 
we will, 
you will. 
they will. 



id) n>oUe, 
t>\\ tuoUefi, 
ei' u>oUe, 
rotr tuollen, 
ibr luollet, 
fte nwUen, 



I may 
thou mayet 
he may 
We may 
you may 
they may 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) totfllte, 
bu wollteft, 
er tvoUte, 
txnr roollteu, 
ibr roolltet, 
fte roolltett, 



I was 
thou wast 
he was 
we were 
you were 
they were 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) babe 
bu baft 
er tjat 
ruix babctt 
ibr babtt 
fte baben J 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
they have 






PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



id) batte 
Mt batteft 
er fyatte 
wix batten 
ibr Ijattet 
fte fatten 



IS 



I had ) 

thou hadst [ 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had 



- 

J ia 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roerbe 
on unrfi 
er nnrb 
mx roerbeu 
it)r roerbet 
fte roerben 



I tftiall 

thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



be 

! 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

id) n>erbe 1 « 
bu nnrft I *» 
er roirb [<£ 
mix roerben [ 3 
tbr roerbet | g 
fte toerbeu J £ 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



1 « 

III 



td) rooflte, 
bu ruoUteft, 
er tDotlte, 
mir tv oil ten, 
ijbr roolltet, 
fte tuolltett, 



I might 
thou mightst 
he might 
we might 
you might 
they might 



S 

2 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) babe 
bu fyabeft 
er fyab? 
tmr baben 
ibr feabet 
fte ijabett 



I may have beet 
*? willing, &c. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



I might have beefa 
willing, &c. 



id) fyaU* 
bu bcittefl 
er fyattt 
mx fatten 
ibr fjiattet 
fie fatten 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE 

id) tuerbe 1 
bu wevbefi j ^ 
er njerbe [ js 
unr roevben f "3 
tljr tuerbet 9 
fte tr»erben J 

SECOND FirURE TENSF. 

id) njerbe ) 
bu toerbeft | i 



(if) I shall be wil* 
ling, &c. 



er werbe 
tt)ir roerben 
tbr tuerbet 
fte Herbert 



(if) I shall hav« 
been willing, &&. 



o 

§ 



PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR YER3S, § 88. 



sn 



Willing. (See Remark 14.) 



CONDITIONAL. 



IMPERATIVE, 



INFINITIVE. 



PARTICIPLE 



1. Warding. 

2. SBofle bu, will 

thou. 

3. SBolIcet, 

let him be* 
willing. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

moilen, 

to be willing. 



PRESENT 



rcoflenb, 
willing 



PERFECT TENSE, 

geroollt fyabcn, 
to have willed, 



PERFECT* 

getuoflt, 
willed 



FIRST FUTURE 

\$ murbe " 
in rviirbcjl 
tx toiirbe 
tuir rnurben 
if)r miirbet 
fte miirben u 



o 



fS 



-H £ 



SECOND FUTURE. 

icfc wurbe ] g g d 
bu roiirbefi | e j3 4 
<?r tviirfre l^ -a *i* 
rotr tmirben f 5 3 £ 
tfcr mutbet | | J§ g 
fte aitvben J s> « J 



378 remarks on burfen, fonnen and mogen. § 83. 

(9) Remarks on b it X f e tt. 

Thia ver: is ojmmonly rendered, to dare, though the primary sense 
seems to be that given above, viz, to be permitted: the signification-, 
to dare, is one in which it is now seldom used. The verb is also 
employed (only in the Imperfect Subjunctive, however,) to denote 
what probably may be, and may then be translated by such words as 
might, need, would, &c. : thus, (f $ btirfte je^t $u fpdt fetn, it may or 
might be too late now : (£# burfte ineHei<i)t \x>ai)x fetn, it might per- 
chance be true. It also signifies, to need, to have occasion, &c. : as, Qt 
barf nur reben, he needs only to speak ; dr barf fid) barufcer ntd)t toun* 
bern, he must not or should not wonder at that. When us«d without an 
infinitive after it, one must be supplied to complete the construction : 
thus, (§r barf tticfyi in bag |>aug (fomroen), he ventures not (to come) 
into the house. 

(10) Remarks on f 6 tt n e n. 

The original signification of tounen was to know, or to know how ; 
nence the present sense, to be at liberty to do a thing, to be able ; 
as, id) Farm lefen unb fd)retben, I can {know how to) read and write. 
its chief power now, is to indicate bare possibility, and hence it is 
often aptly translated by the English, may: as, (£r faun e£ fcetftanben 
fyaben, he may (possibly) have understood it. It differs, therefore, 
from bfitfen, when it (burfen) is used (in the Imperfect Subjunctive) 
to express possibility ; for burfen not only signifies that the thing 
may be, but that it probably is or will be. Bennett like burfen, has 
sometimes an infinitive understood after it, to complete the con- 
struction. 

(11) Remarks on m g e n. 

•SiJlogcn marks possibility undor allowance or concession from an- 
other : as, (5r mag ladyen, he may laugh ; that is, he has permission 
to laugh, no one hinders him. Qx mag eln braver Sftann fetn, he may 
{T grant) be a brave man; where the possibility of his being a brave 
man, is a thing conceded. Kindred to this are the other significa- 
tions (chance, inclination, wish, &c.) usually attributed to this verb: 
thus, eg moctyte rcgnen, it might rain ; that is, the causes that seem to 
forbid, are likely not to operate ; td) modbte eg be^toetfeln, I am dis- 
posed or inclined to doubt it, that is, / miglti doubt it altogether, but 
Cor certain circumstances seeming to forbid • mege eg ber £tmmel ge* 
ten, may heaven grant it; fit mag eg ntd)t tlmn, I d: not like to dc 
it, that is, I am not permitted by my feelings to do it cheerfully, &c* 



remarks on mufien, fctlen and itwfleit § 83. 379 

(12) Remarks on mix f fen. 

The German muffen and the English must, are very near equiva- 
lents. The predominant power of the word is everywhere that of 
obligation or necessity, and this being kept in mind, it will often be 
convenient to employ in translating it, such words, as, be obliged, am 
to, have need to and the like. Often an infinitive is understood with 
it : as, tcf) mug $urM, I must (go) back. 

(13) Bernards on f o It e tt. 

The prime and prevalent use of fotlen is to indicate obligation or 
necessity. What particular word or phrase shall be employed to 
translate it, in any given case, must be determined by circumstances. 
[t is only necessary always to adhere to the primary idea ; for in 
whatever way expressed, that primary sense must be kept in view. 
The following examples will be sufficient to show this: 
3)u follft bag (Inm, thou art to (i. e. art obliged to) do that : 
(£r foil gefyen, he is to (i. e. is bidden to) go : 
(Sell id) eg fyciben ? am I to (i. e. am I bound or am I permitted to) 

have it ? 
5Die glotte foil gefd)lagen toorben fein, the fleet is said or reported to 

(i. e. must, according to report) be beaten. 
<&ie follen Ujn ntdit beletbtgt fyaben, you are supposed or admitted not 
to (that is, you could not of necessity, in my opinion) have 
offended him. 
Sag foil ber $ut ? what means the (i. e. what must be the meaning 

of the) hat ? 
Senn er fommen follte, (o totll Id) eg u)m fagen, if he should come (i. 
e. should be obligedbj circumstances to come) I will tell him so. 

So with an infinitive understood: toag foil id)? what am I U 
(do)? toag foil bag? what signifies that? (i.e. supplying fern, whs 
is that to be ?) 

(Bx toetjj nid)t frag er ttyun foil, he does not know what to do. 

(14) Remarks on to 1 1 e n. 

SBoflen implies future purpose : thus, \6) totll geJjen, I will (to) gv, 
L e. my purpose is to go. The expression of mere futurity would 
be, x^ toetbe geljen. Kindred to this is another signification of 
toollen : as, er toill bid) gefefyen fyaben, he wills to have seen you, that 
is, he will have it or affirms, that he saw you. 



380 examples on the use of fciirfen, fonnen, inogen, <&c. § 83. 

(15) Examples, 
further illustrating the uses of the preceding verbs. 



3d) barf e3 fmn. 

@3 biirfte ote((eid)t ftafyx fettu 

(&$ biirfte tool)! gefd)el)en. 

JDu barfft eg nur forbern. 

<Sx famt toeber lefen nod) fcfyreiben. 

3db faint mid) trren. 

3d) fonnte it)n nid)t oerjteljen. 

jlonnen @te fyente ju tnir fommen ? 

3d) mag bae; ntefyt. 

3d) mod)te gerne tr>tflfen, toieoiel Uljt 

e3 tft 
3d) mod)te tool)! etttas bason l)a* 

ben* 
ds mag feln. 
3d) mcd)te Iteber. 
3Jloge er (ange (eben ! 
3d) mufi e3 tfjun, 
(£x nmfjte fid) femes 23etragen£ fdjcu 

men. 
STluf te e3 nicftt fo tommen ? 
SBenn id) jkrBen mujjie, fo tr>urb* 

id) r$ nidbt tfyun. 
3d) oolite gerne get) en, 

3d) n)il( $u gufje get>n. 
3d) tooftte, bafi nur geijen fo ((ten, 
• @ie foften fd)reiben. 

28a$ fo(l ba$ i>t£en ? 
(§3 foil fid) §ugetragen l)aben. 
3)er Jtonig fo(( angefommen fein. 
£Bcmt er m org en ft er ben fottte. 
SBenn ba$ fo fein \ciit\ 



I am allowed to do it. 

It might perhaps be true. 

It might easily happen. 

You need only ask for it. 

He can neither read nor write. 

I may be mistaken. 

I could not understand him. 

Can you come to me to-day ? 

I do not like that. 

I should like to know what 

o'clock it is. 
I should like to have some 

of it. 
It may be. 

I had rather ; I would rather. 
May he live long ! 
I must do it. 
He should be ashamed of hia 

conduct. 
Should it not so have happened ? 
If I should die, I would not do 

it. 
I would willingly (i. e. would 

like to) go. 
I will go on foot. 
I was for our going. 
You should write ; you are to 

write. 
What does that mean ? 
It is said to have happened. 
The king is said to have arrived. 
If he should die to-mf xrow. 
If that should be so. 



PASSIVE VERBS. § 84, 381 

§ 84. Passive verbs. 

(1) Tie passive voice is formed by adding to the auxiliary roer ben 
' s to become,) through all its moods and tenses, the I erfect Participle of 
the main verb, thus : 





Indic. Active. 


Indic. Passive. 


Pres. 


idb lobe, I praise, 


id) vocrbe gelobt, I am praised. 


Imp. 


id) lobte, I praised, 


id) routbe gelobt, I was praised, 


Perf. 


\$) (jabe gelobt, 


i&j bin gelobt roorben, 




I have praised, 


I have been praised. 


Plup. 


id) l)atte gelobt, 


id) roar gelobt roorben, 




I had praised, 


I had been praised. 


1. Fut. 


id) roerbe loben, 


i(t> roerbe gelobt roerben, _ 




I shall praise, 


I shall be praised. 



2. Fw£. id) roerbe gelobt Ijaben, id) roerbe gelobt roorben fern, 

I shall have praised, I shall have been praised, &c, 

(2) It will be noted, that wherever the perfect participle of the 
main verb (as gelobt above) is joined with the participle of the auxi- 
liary, the latter is written roorben, not geroovben, whereby an offensive 
repetition (of the syllable ge) is avoided. Sometimes roorben is alto- 
gether omitted in the past tenses, but this should be avoided. 

(3) The German, by confining frerben with the past participle to 
the expression of passivity and using fetn, when the participle is to 
be taken as a mere adjective, has. a manifest advantage over the Eng- 
lish Passive. Thus, if we wish to say, in German, he is feared, it 
will be, er ro t r b gefttrd)tet ; if the intention, however, be merely to 
mark the state or character of the person as one who is feared, that 
is, whose character or conduct inspires fear generally, the German' 
will be, er tfl gefftrd)tet, he is (a) feared (man.) The form of ex- 
pression in English, it will be observed, is the same foi both ideas: 
;< he is feared." 

(4) The Germans, however, employ the passive form far less fre- 
quently than do the English. They prefer other methods: thus, man 
fagt, one says, i. e. it is said; bet @d)luffel tyat fid) gefunbet the lev 
has been found. 



382 



PARADIGM OF A PASSIVE VERB. § 84. 



§ 85. PARADIGM OP 
©elubt toer&ett, 



w (3 



* C3 






INDICATIVE. 



irf) roerbe 
&u roirft 
er roirb I *» 
roir roerben [ *s 
jl)t roerbet I ** 
fie roerben J 



PRESENT TENSE. 

I am 
thou art 
he is 
we are 



i. 






you are 
they are 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) rourbe ] 
bu rourbefi | ^ 
er nniitoe I »g 
roir rourbeu [ ~ 
ij)r rourbet j ** 
fte rourbeu J 



I was 
thou wast 
he was 
we were 
you were 



they were J 






PERFECT TENSE. 



id) hin 
bu btft 
er tft 
roir ftub 
$r feib 
fte ftnb 



n 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
they have 



1-* 

I .SS 

ft 

i c 

J JB 



id) war 
bu roarft 
er war 
roir roaren 
i()r water 
fte roaren 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

1? 



H 



I had 1 -d 

thou hadst | .sj 
he had I fi 
we had j a 
you had | g 
they had j J 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 

I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 



id) roerbe 1 « 
bu roirft | -2 
er roirb ^ g 
roir roerben ,f/~ 
tfyr roerbet j » 
fie roerben j £ 



you will 
they will 



l 



11 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

id) roerbe 

bu roirft 

er roirb i g.g 

roir roerben f-*--^ 

tbr roerbet | 3 

fte roerben J & 



I shall 1 5-j 
thou wilt I $ --; 
he will ! ^ J 
we shall f «"§ 
you will j § °< 
they will J ^ 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



tc$ roerbe "| 
bu roerbeft | ^ 
er roerbe [£ 
roir roerben f *s 
tyr roerbet ^ 
fie roerbett J 



I may 
thou mayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 






IMPERFECT TENSE. 



id) rourbe 1 
^n roiirbefi | ^ 
er roiirbe ! *§ 
roir roitrben [ x 

tbr rourbet I ** 
fie roitrben J 



I might ) . 

thou mightst I g 
he might { •§ 
we might j & 
you might © 
they might J ^ 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) fei 
bu fete ft 
er fei 
roir feiert 
tl)r feiet 
fte feien 



) g I may have been 
§ praised, &c. 

o 
2 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



td) roare 
bu rocireft 
er roare 
roir rociren 
tj)r rociret 
fte rociren 



I might have been 
praised, &c. 



r5 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) roerbe 
bu roerbeft 
er roerbe 
roir roerben » *• 
ir>i* roerbet 
fte roerben 



« (if) I shall be 
§ praised, &c. 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
1 



id) roerbe 
bu roerbeft 
er roerbe 
roir roerben 
tbr roerbet 
^it roerben , 



(if) I shall have 
been praised, 



PARADIGM OF A FASSIVE VERB. 



§85. 



ass 



A PASSIVE VERB. 
to be praised. 



CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PAKTXO, 



FIRST FUTURE. 


icb rcuvbe ^ » 




bu wiirbejl | ^ 


■Li* 


tr wiirbe J § 
B?ir roiivbeu f+* 
\%i BJtttbel | o 


O OJ 


fie wiirben J *§» 


i-i a 


SECOND FUTURE. 


id) rciirbe 1 g 


2 8 


tu ttiirbefi | ^ 
er tuiirbe l § « 
id tr nmr&en j *-"«E 


T3 <U 


s °* 


t&r tx>iirbet 1» 
fie umtbe-a J £, 


51 



PRESENT TENSE. 

1. wanting. 

2. n>erbe bu ") 

3. tuerbe cr | +; 

1. toer&entttr J^js 

2. tucvbet tl)r | S> 

3. tuevbeu ftej 
be thou praised, 

&c. 



PRESENT TENSE, 

gelobt toerben, 
to be praised, 



PERFECT TENSE. 

geloBt tvovben fetn, 

to have been 

praised. 



FUTURE TENSE. 

roerbengetobtwer* 
fctn, 
to be about to 
be praised. 



PERFECT 

gcloM, 
praised 



B84 REFLEXIVE VERBS. $ 86. 

§ 86. Reflexive Verbs. 

(1) A verb is said to be reflexive, when it represent? the subject 
as acting upon itself. We have several such in English ■ he deports 
himself well; he bethought himself; they betook themselves to the 
woods; where the subject and the object, in each case, being identi- 
cal, the verb is made reflexive. It is manifest, that any active transi- 
tive verb may thus become a reflexive verb. 

(2) Strictly speaking, however, those only are accounted reflex 
ives, that can not otherwise be used. The number of these, in German, 
is much larger than in English. Some of them require the reciprocal 
pronoun to be in the Dative, but most of them govern the Accusative : 
thus, (with the Dative,) id) btXbe mix nicbt em, I do not imagine ; (with 
the Accusative,) id) fcfy&me mid), I am ashamed. Further examples 
are the following : 

WITH THE DATIVE. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 

©id) cmmajjen, to presume; usurp. (Sid) anfcfytefeit, to prepare. 

Bid) au^bebmgen, to condition. Bid) ditfern, to intimate. 

Bid) etnbilben, to imagine. (Bid) feebaufen, to be thankful for, 

Bid) getrauen, to be confident. (Bid) Bebenfen, to pause to think. 

Bid) fd)meid)eln, to flatter one's Bid) fcegeben, to repair to ; to 

self. happen. 

Bify voxntymm, to propose to Bid) fcefyelfen, to put up with ; to 

one's self. make do 

Bid) ttorjMen, to represent to Bid) freuen, to rejoice. 

one's self. 

Bid) totberfyrecfyen, to contradict. Bid) tmberfefcert, to resist. 

(3) Since the action of these verbs is confined to the agent, they 
are rightly regarded as intransitives ; for the verb and the pronoun 
under its government, are to be taken together as a single expression 
for intransitive action: thus, id) freue mid), I rejoice myself, that is, I 
rejoice, or delight in. 

(4) In like manner, reflexives often become the equivalents of 
passives : as, ber @d)lujjel fyat ftd) gefunben, the ke y has found itself 
that is, the key is found or has been found &c. 

(5) In some instances a verb is found to have, both in the simple 
iind in the reflexive form, the same signification : as, irren and jtcfy 
ttren, to e*r ; to be mistaken, 






REFLEXIVE VERBS. $ 



385 



(6) It is worthy of remark, also, that some transitives, upon pass- 
ing into the reflexive form, undergo some change of signification: thus, 
from berufen, to call, comes jtd) berufen, to appeal to. It is generally- 
easy, however, in these cases, to account for such changes. The 
following are additional examples : 



33eben£en, to think upon ; 
93efd)etben, to assign ; 
gtnben, to find ; 
gurd^ten, to fear ; 
#uten, to guard ; 
9Jlad)en, to make ; 
€>tel(en, to place ; 
JBetanrroorten, to answer for ; 
iBergefyen, to pass away ; 
Sfcrlaffen, to leave; 



jtd) bebenfen, to pause to think. 

jtd) befd)etben, to be contented 
with. 
jtd) fmben (in eitt>a3), to accommo- 
date one's self to a thing, 
jtd) futd)ten, to be afraid of. 

jtd) Ijuten, to beware. 

jtd) mad)en (an ztcoat), to set 
about a thing. 
|td) ftetten, to feign, pretend. 

ftd) tteranttoorten, to defend one's 

self 
ftd) fcetgeljen, to commit a fault. 

ftd) fcetCaffen, to rely ujpog. 



1* 



386 



PARADIGM OF A REFLEXIVE VERB. 



§87. 



87. PARADIGM OP A 
<&id) fteuett, 



« (3 



INDICATIVE. 



tcf) freite mid), 
bn freueft bid), 
er frcuet fid?, . 

wir fi-cuen un§, 
tt)i* fieuet eud), 
fie fi-euen fid?, 



PRESENT TENSE. 

I rejoice, 
thou rejoices*, 
he rejoices, 
we rejoice 
you rejoice, 
they rejoice. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSF. 



id) fmte mid), 
bu freuefl bic|, 
cv fveue ftct>, 
w ir freuen un3, 
if)r freuet eud), 
fte freuen fid), 



I may 
thou mayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



u 



IMPERFECT TENSE 



id) freuete mid), 
bu freuetefl bid), 
cv freuete ficfc, 
wir freueteu una, 
ibr freuetet eud), 
fie freueteu fid), 



I rejoiced, 
thou didst rejoice, 
he rejoiced, 
we rejoiced, 
you rejoiced, 
they rejoiced. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



id) fyabe mid) ") 
bn baft bicty 
er I) at fid) 
nnr. baben un§ 
ibr habit end? j 
fte Ijaben fid) J 



I have 
^ thou hast 
S he has 
«£- we have 
« you have 

they have 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

id) fyatte mid) 1 I had ] 

bu batteft bid) | ^ thou hadst [ -g 
er fyattt fid) I 5 he had I g 
wtr batten un3 f «£- ««» i™' 1 ' 5 



ibr fyattet eud) 
fie batten ft# J 



we had 
you had 
they had 



J* 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) werbe mid) 
bu wirfi bid) 
er wivb fid) 
tviv werbeu unS 
ibr werbet eud) 
fte werbeu fid) 



1 shall 
. thou wilt 
§ he will 
§ we shall 
,r - you will 
they will 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

id) freuete mid), I might 
bu freuetefl hid), thou mights', 
er freuete ftri), he might 
wir freueteu uuS, we might 
ibr freuetet eud), you might 
fie freueteu fid), they might. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



I may ha^ e re- 
joiced, fee. 



id) bnbc mid) 'l 
bu 1) a be ft bic^ | „j 
er Ijabe fid) IS 
wir babeu uu8 J *£■ 
ibr baber eucfc «> 
fie baben fid) J 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



I might have 
rejoiced fee 



id) bcitte mid) ") 
tn batteft bicfe | ^ 
er t>dtte ft 4 I g 
fair fatten un£ f <£- 
ibr battel eud) I «s 
fie fatten ficb J 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 



id) werbe mid)^ 
bu werbeft hid) \ 
er n>erbe fid) [ 
. wirwerben unS • 
% ;ibr werbet end) 
|fte werbe » ficb, 



(if ) I shall re- 
joice, &c. 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



id) werbe midJVs 
bu wirft bid) | *» 
er wirb fid) l^> 
wir werbeu un§ f » 
ibr werbet eud) | ,g_ 
fte werbeu ftd) J & 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



I .8 



>$ 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 

id) werbe mid)') « (if ) I shall have 
bu werbeft bid) | *|> rejoiced, &c, 
er werbe fid) I ^ 
wir werbeu unS ["S 
ibr werbet eud) £ 
fte werbeu ft$J & 






PARADIGM OF A REFLEXIVE VERB. § 87. 



381 



REFLEXIVE YEEB. 
to rejoice. 



CONDITIONAL. 



FIR SI FUTURE. 

i# tvitvbe mid) ") £ 
in tmirbeft bid) | . * J 
ev nntrbe fid) 1 S 2* 
nuv nuivben uns f 3 § g 
i&r rouroet eud) ^ ^"3 
fie roiirben fid) J ^"^ 

SECOND FUTURE, 

id) rcutvbe mid) ] g > 

bit nnivbefi bid) -§ jg°£ 

er nnube fid? ^J* 2 _^ 

twir anh'fceu un$ 

thr ruiivbet end) 

fte tmirben ftct> J £ ^ g 



IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE 



PRESENT TENSE. 

1. wanting. 

2. fveue (du) bid), 
rejoice thou,&c. 

3. fveue (er) fid), 

1. fveuen (am) 
uns, 

2. freuet (t^r)cuci), 

3. fveuen (fie) fu§. 



PRESENT TENSE, 

fid) fveuen, 
to rejoice. 



PERFECT TENSE, 

fid) (jefi'cut Jaben, 
to have rejoiced. 



PARTIC. 



PRESENT. 

ftc^> freuntb, 
rejoicing. 



PERFEC1. 
Wanting. 



388 compound verbs. § 88. § 89. 

§ 88. Impersonal Verbs. 

(1) Th 3 impersonal verb, properly so called, is one destitute of 
the first and second persons: being confined to the third person sin- 
gular, and having for its grammatical subject the pronoun eg, without 
definite reference to any antecedent, as, 

eg regnet, it rains ; eg W ?i, it lightens ; 

eg fcfynett, it snows; eg ft rt, it freezes; 

2g bonnert, it thunders; eg i \ut, it thaws; 

eg Jjagelt, it hails; eg ta$t, it dawns. 

(2) It must immediately appear, that a verb may be impersonal* 
and yet belong to any of the classes of verbs described in preceding 
sections. Thus some are transitive: some are intransitive; some 
are passive ; some are reflexive ; &c. 

Examples. 

(£g drgert mid), it vexes me, i. e. I am vexed ; 

eg frtert ityn, it chills him, i. e. he is chilled or frozen ; 

eg f)imgert mid), it hungers me, i. e. I am hungry ; 

eg retft, there is a hoar frost; 

ee Ijetjjt, it is said ; 

eg toixb tttel ba&on gerebet, it is much talked about; 

eg t>etftel)et fid), it understands itself, i. e. it is understood ; &c. 

eg fragt fid), it asks itself, i. e. it is asked, it is the question ; 

eg gtebt 9Jlenfd)en, it gives or yields men, i. e. there are men. 

§ 89. Compound Verbs. 

(1) Various derivative verbs in German are produced by the union 
of simple words with prefixes. * Most of these prefixes are separable^ 
that is, may stand apart from the radicals ; some, however, are found 
to be inseparable; some are either separable or inseparable, according 
to circumstances. 

(2) The prefixes are themselves, also, either simple or compound ; 
as, r; e x f ontmen, to come here or hither; § e x u b e r formnen, to come 



* Under the name of Prefixes are here comprehended all those invariable 
w:>rds, (as adverbs and prepositions,) which are combined with other words to 
vary or modify their signification. They are, also, often called Particles. The 
simple words with which they are united, are generally verbs ; but often nouna 
and adjectives are, by prefixes, converted into verbs. 



SIMPLE PREFIXES SEPARABLE. §. 90. 



389 



over here, or hith er. In most instances, the prefixes may be trans- 
lated severally as above ; but often they are found to be merely in- 
tensive or euphonic. * 



§ 90. Simple Prefixes separable. 



m, 


from, on, down ; 


tin, 


to, at, in, on, towards; 


Sluf, 
2lu8, 
Set, 


on, upon, up ; 
out, out of, frojl ; 
by, near, with ; 
there, at ; 


£>ar, 


there, at ; 


<£tn, 

<£mpor, 

govt, 


in, into ; 

up, upward, on high ; 

onward, away, forward ; 


©egett, 


towards, against ; 


3u, 
«§>etm, 


in, within; 
home, at home ; 


£er, 


hither, here ; 


ma, 


thither, there, away ; 
with; 


9*ad>, 


after ; 


Ulimx, ' 


down, downwards, under ; 


Ob, 


on, over, on account of; 



Qibfefcen, to set or put down ; tc 



93or, 

2Bcg, 
3u, 



for, before ; 

away, off; 
to, towards ; 



2infcitt&en, to catch at, i. e. tc 
begin. 

Slufgeljen, to go up ; to rise. 

Slugnebmen, to take out ; to choose. 

SBeifiefyen, to stand by ; to assist. 

SDableiben, to remain there, or at, 
to stay ; to persist. 

SDarveufoen, to reach there, i. e. to 
offer. 

(SMaufen, to buy in ; to purchase. 

(Smporfjebeu, to lift up. 

?5ortfat)ven, to drive or bear on ; 
to continue. 

©eQenfjalfen, to hold against; to 
resist ; to compare. 

3moof)tten, to dwell in. 

«j?etmfeljreii, to turn homewards ; 
to return. 

.gerbringen, to bring hither, or 
along. 

igrnige&ett, to go thither, or away. 

SJiitnefcmen, to take with, or 
along. 

Sftacfcfolgen, to follow after; to 
succeed. 

■Ifttebmretfieti. to pull down. 

DbKegen, to lie on, i. e. to apply 
one's self to ; to be incum- 
bent on. 

23orgeben, to go before; to sur- 
pass. 

SBegbletben, to stay away. 

3ugeben, to give to; to grant. 



* This is likewise often the case in English : thus, ex (which literally signi- 
fies out or out of,) has, in some words the signification very, exceedingly or 
the like ; as, exasperate, to make very angry: so a, (literally, to, at ;) in the 
word ameliorate is merely euphonic ; the derivative form (ameliorate) mean- 
ing nothing more than the sirt pie one, meliorate. 



390 



COMPOUND PREFIXES SEPARABLE. $91. 



§ 91. Compound Prefixes separable. 



$lnfjetm (an + fjetm, to-home) ; 



£)abet 

2) after 

JDabtn 

3)agcgen 

SDitutefrer 

£>aran 

$)arauf 

5t>atetu 

<£>at>on 
£>asor 
^atmber 

£)a$u 

©ajtmfd) n 

(Stnfyer 
©ntgegen 

©ntjroet 

Jgerab 

Qtxan 

•gcvauf 

4JetauS 

*£>erbei 

herein 

.germeber 

..geruber 

.gerum 

•gerutttei 

•jpevoor 

.gjerpt 

.§inab 
4pinatt 

43inau$ 
gtnetn 
£>intan 



(ba + bet, there-by) ; 
(ha -f t)er, there-hither) ; 
(ba + jjm, there- thither) ; 
(ba + a, gen, there against) ; 
(ba + nteber, there-below) ; 
(bar + an, there-to) ; 

tbar + auf, there-on) ; 

(bar + ettt, there-in) ; 

(ba + Don, there-from) ; 
(ba + »or, there-before) ; 
0>a + tmbev, there-against) ; 

(H + gu, there-to) ; 

(ba + fctutfcben, there-between) 

(etn + ber, into-hither) ; 

(znt -f- gegen, apart-towards) ; 

(ent + gwet, apart-two) ; 

(fyer -f- ab, hither-down) ; 



(ber + an, hither-to) ; 
(ber + auf, hither-on) ; 
(bcr + au£, hither-out) ; 
(ber + bet, hither-along) ; 
(ber + (in, hither-into) ; 
(ber + nteber, hither-down) 
(ber -f- itber, hither-over) ; 
(t)er + unt, hither-around) : 



(ber + unfer, hither-under) ; 
(bcr + »or, hither- forward) ; 
(ber + §u, hither-to) ; 
(bin -f ab, thither-down); 
(\)in + an, thither- to) ; 
(bin + auf, hither-on or up) ; 
(bin + a\\8, thither-out) ; 
(l)tn -f dn f thither-into) ; 
(fytnt(en) -J- an, behind-to) ; 



Slnbeimftelkn, to put home to 

i. e. to refer to. 
S)abetfteben, to stand close by. 
5)a()ev(cbleicben, to sneak along 
3)al)tneUeu, to hasten away. 
S)ageo,enfetu, to be against. 
2)auteberfci)lagen, to beat down. 
5)aranfefcett, to put or lay there- 
to, i. e. to risk, to stake. 
£>araufgeben, to give there-on, 

i. e. to give an earnest ; 
SDaretureben, to talk there-in, i. e. 

to interrupt. 
SDauonlaufeu, to run off or away. 
Stattorliegen, to he before. 
SDaunfcerbaben, to have (objections) 

against. 
^ajutbun. to do (in addition) 

tt^reto ; to z.dd. 
; ^ajroifdjenveben, to speak there 

in the midst, 
©tnber jieben, to draw along. 
(Sntgegengeben, to go towards; to 

go to meet, 
(gntjnmbvecfyen, to break or burst 

asunder, 
♦gerabfefcen, to out down; to 

lower. 
^eranfitbren, to brin?on or along. 
»§erauffaf)ren, to dr s or urge on. 
.gerauSfafyren, to d 1 ; e out. 
.gjevbetrufen, to call , or towards. 
•geretnfafyren, to drr- in "or into. 
«§ermeberbltcfen, to look under. 
tgeriiberfommen, to come over. 
4?erumgebcn, to give or hand 

around. 
cgerunterfafyren, to drive down. 
^peruovtveten, to step forward. 
igerjut reten, to step towards. 
^tnabtveten, to step down. 
45tnantreten, to step up to. 
<6iitaitf$teben, to pull up. 
ijptnattSwerfett, to throw ouu 
igmtetngtejkn, to pour into, 
.gtntanfe^en, to put behind; to 

undervalue. 



COMPOUND PREFIXES SEPARABLE. J 91. 



391 



gmf?rber (fjmfer + ber, after-hither) ; 
4? in fiber (bin -f- fiber, thither-over) ; 

•gimtm (fyin -j- nm, thither-around) ; 

•ginunrer (£)ttt -f unrei, thither- under) ; 

^tttttjeg (()«t + njeg, thither-away) ; 

£tn$u (bin + ju, thither-to wards) ; 

Ueberetn (fiber + tin, over-into) ; 

Um^er (nm -f fyer, around-hither) ; 

Umljin (urn + bin, around-thither) ; 

9S-oran (»or + an, before-to) ; 

Sorauf 0>or + anf, before-on or up) ; 

SBorauS (»or -f auS, before-out) ; 

Sorbet <»or -f bet, before-by) ; 

Sorber (vox -f ber, before-liither) ; 

S3oi*fiber (sot + fiber, before-over) ; 

i&orroeg (t>or -f- weg, before-away> ; 

gu»or (?,u 4- uor, before-to) ; 

t rfitf (ju + ruff, back-to) ; 

gnfamiuea (in 4- fammen, to-geth^} 



^tnferrjerferjen, to see afterwards. 

•gmtfibertragen, to carry over. 

4ptuumffattevn, to flutter there 
about. 

^initntevftmngen, to leap down 
there. 

ig inn? eg neb; men, to take away. 

tgjtnjimfen, to hasten away. 

Uebereinfommen, to come over 
into, i. e. to agree. 

Umberfdjanen, to gaze around. 

Umbtnfonnen, to be able there- 
about ; to forbear. 

SBoranftellen, to place before. 

93orauffteto,en, to mount on be 
fore ; to ascend. 

SBorauSfeben, to see or spy ou* 
before hand ; to anticipate. 

SSorbeiretten, to ride along before, 
to ride past. 

3?orberfeben, to foresee. 

SBoriiber fa frveit, to drive along 
past in a coach. 

SovroeiUtebmett, to take away be- 
fore ; to anticipate. 

Sufeovrfjim, to do before ; to eicel 

3itrM£ebren, to return. 

3ufammenjJe|tu, to put together. 



S92 PARADIGM OF A COMPOUND VEEB SEPARABLE. § 92. 

§ 92. PARADIGM OF A COM 

3tttf<tttgett, 



B 



INDICATIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id) fange an, 
! bu fangft an, 
I ev fangt an, 
. auv fangen an, 
g I 2 ibv fanget an, 
* ( 3 fte fangen an, 



*S1 



I begin, 
thou beginnest. 
he begins, 
we begin, 
you begin, 
they begin. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



PRESENT TENSE. 



id) fange an, 
Mt fangeft an, 
ev fangt an, 
wit fangen an, 
tbv fanget an, 
fte fangen an, 



I may 
thou mayst 
he may 
we may 
you may 
they may 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



let fing an, 
bu ftngft an, 
er fing an, 
ttnv ftngen an, 
tbv ftnget an, 
fte ftngen an, 



1 began, 
thou didst begin, 
he began, 
we began, 
you began, 
they began. 



PERFECT TENSE. 



itf) fyaot 
bn baft 
er fyat 
wit tyahen 
ibv fjabet 
fte baben 



it 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
they have J 



U 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



id) Wt* 

bu batteft 

ev $attt 

limit' batten 

2 tbv frattet 

3 fte fatten 



1 « 



1 had 1 
thou hadst | 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had 



i 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE 



id) mevbe ] 
bit mtvft | i 
ev ( tDtvb I g 3 
tvtv tuevben \ £_ 
tbv mevbet | g 
fte mevben J 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



tit mevbe ") « 
bn tuivft j £ 
ev tint's) 1 J^ 
rotv roevben f 
tbv mevbet 
fte werben 



J! 



I shall 
thou wilt 
he will 
we shall 
you will 
they will 



J ^ 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 



icb fjnge an, 
bn ftngeft an, 
ev finge an, 
toil ftngen an, 
ibv fin get an, 
fte ftngen an, 



I might ) 

thou mightst 
he might 
we might 
you might j ■ 
they might J 



' Si 



PERFECT T-ENSE. 



tc^ fyabt 
bn babeft 
ev fyabe 
miv b^ben 
ibv fyabtt 
fte l;aben 



1 e - 

i 



I may have be- 
gun, &c. 



PLUPERFECT TENSE. 



tfb bdtte 
bu pttefi 
ev batte 
rotr fatten 
tbv bcittet 
fte ptten 



1 * I might have be- 
| s gun, &c. 



FIRST FUTURE TENSE, 
(if) I shall 



gin, &c. 



i(h mevbe ") 
bu mevbefi | g 
ev tvevbe ! <? 
miv roevben [ ««_ 
tbv mevbet j 5 
fte njevben J 



SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 



b€- 



icb raevbe 1 s= 
bn wevbefi | ^ 
ev merbe I J& 
aur tvevben , ,^_ 
tbv tuerbet £j 
fte roevben j g 



(if) I shall have 
begun, &c. 






£ARAi>iG&t OF A COMPOUND VERB SEPARABLE. § 92. 3§3 

t^ODTSHD YEBB SBPAEABLE, 
to l>egiii e 



CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFlJSITIYE, PARTICIPLE, 



f UtST FUTURE. 



!3) miirbe 
h a nnirbeft 
er wiirbe 
totr nritrben 
(fjr tviirbet 
(te imirben - 



f M 



SECOND FUTURE. 

id) nntvbe 
bn rourbeft 
rr toiirbe 
ix>ix xvi\x> fit 
ffrr twin-bet 
fte frm&en „ 






O g 



PRESENT TENSE. 

I. wanting. 
'2. faityc (du) an, 

begin thou, &c< 
3, fange (ev) an. 

1. fana,en(nnt)an 

2. fanget (ifer) an. 

3. fangen (fie) an. 



PRESENT TENSE. 

aufangen, or 

an$ufana,en, 

to begin. 



PRESENT. 



anfana,enb, 
beginning. 



PERFECT TENSE. 

angefangen fya- 
bzn, 
to have begun. 



FIRST FUTURE. 

angefangen n>et's 

ben, 

to be about to 

begin. 



PERFidf* 

ar o,efa«$g$, 
began* 



17* 



194 INSEPARABLE prefixes. § 93. § 94. 

§ 93 Observations on the Paradigm. 

(1) An inspection of the Paradigm above will show, that the so 
paiaticn of the prefix from the radical part of the verb, takes place 
in the Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative, Infinitive (when preceded 
by $u,) and the Perfect Participle. In the Indicative and Subjunc- 
tive, however, the separation is not made, when, in dependent sen- 
tences, the verb is placed at the end of a clause or period : thus, al$ 
\>k (Sonne btefen Bergen anfgtng, fo serfefyroanb ber Sftebel when the suri 
t*ose (aufgtng) this morning, the fog disappeared. 

(2) In regard to the position of the particle when separated, it 
must be noted that, in the Indicative, Subjunctive and Imperative, it 
stands after the radical ; often, also, after the several words depen* 
dent upon it : thus, ioo fange ba$ 33ud) an, (where a n belonging to 
f an g e, comes after the object,) I begin the book. 

(3) In the Infinitive and the Perfect Participle, on the contrary* 
the particle comes before the radical : being separated from it, in the 
Infinitive, by $u, (when that preposition is employed*) and, in 
the Participle, by the augment g e , which is peculiar to that part of 
the verb : thus, anjufangen, (an-Hu-f-fangen) to begin; to commence; 
vorgeftefit, (fcor+ge-f-fiettt) placed before one ; represented. 

(4) It remains to be added, that particles, when separated from 
the radicals, receive the full or principal accent ; and, that the radicals 
(if verbs) have the same form of conjugation, old or new, regular 
<pt irregular, as when employed without prefixes* 

§ 94. Inseparable Prefixes. 

The Prefixes of this class, as the name implies, are always found 
In close union with their radicals. They allow not even the augment 
syllable ge, in the Perfect Participle, to intervene; but reject it 
altogether : * as, Bebecft (not kgebecft) covered, from teecfen, to 
cover. Neither is \ u (when Used) allowed to come between tho 
prefix and the Infinitive ; but stands before the two combined into 
one word: as, $tt empfangen, (not em^nfangen,) to receive: except in 
ease of compound prefixes, wherein the first component is a separable 
and the second an inseparable particle; %u being then inserted be- 
tween the two particles; as, anjuerfennen, (from anerf ennen). The 
inseparable prefixes are always unaccented. 



* To this, however, must be excepted the case of the Prefix m t £ ; which* 
in a few instances, allows the augment fl e to be prefixed ; thus, (from ntt|* 
beaten, to misinterpret,) we have, in the Perfect Participle, gemijbeutftt. 



Observations. § 95. § 96. $ 9?. 



§95 



§ 95. Simple Prefixes inseparable. 



flftet 
S8e, 

(Snip, 



SBer, 
SBtber 



afte behind; 

near w, over, to make ; 

in, v> -*hin ; 

apart iway, to deprive of; 
forth, *cr, on behalf of; 

(maMy, intensive or eupho- 
nic; i 
wrong, erroneously ; 
away, a; loss; 

against ; 
apart, asunder; 



Sifterrcben, to talk behind (one e back); 

to slander. 
33efommen, to come by, i. e to get, 

to obtain. 
@ittpfut«>en, to find or feel within, to 

perceive. 
{Sntgefyen, to go away or off; to escape. 
QixtV&xtn, to make clear for (one); to 

explain. 
® ebenf en (same as b e n f e rt), to think 

of. 
'SHtfjbeutert, to misinterpret. 
3Serf#lafe'n, to sleep away, i- e. lose 

by sleeping. 
SBtberftefjert, to stand against ; to resist 
gerfdjimben, to cut apart, or in pieces 



§ 96. Compound Prefixes inseparable. 



5tnbe (an + be, fc, — near) ; 



tflner 
Pilfer 

&uger 



(an + er, u — for) ; 
(auf + er, up — for) ; 
(au§ + er, out — for) ; 



Slnoer (an + »er, to — away) ; 



SBeauf 



5Inbetrcffen, to hit or touch near to ; to 

concern. 
SlnerfVtmen, to acknowledge ; to own. 
Slufcvbauen, to build up for ; to erect. 
5iu§mi>al)leu, to choose out for; to 

elect. 
$n»evtrauett, to give away in trust; 
to confide to. 
Cbe -f auf, near — on or up) ; SBeattfrragen, to bring (duty) upon, i. e. 

to commission. 
SRifber (mtS + t-er, wrong — away) ; 2ftt jh>evfte()en> to understand wrong* 

i. e. to mistake. 
*BorS>e (»w -f be, before — near) ; SB-orb'c-ftaltcn, to hold or keep ahead 

i. e. to put off; to reserve. 

§ 97. Observations. 

\1) S3 e has in German the same power which it has in English. 
It is, therefore, in most cases, better transferred than translated. Its 
uses will be easily learned from examples. Thus, from 
jtlagen, to moan, 33eHagen, to ftemoan. 

€>rmten, to strow. Sejireuen, to fostrow. 

gfolgen, to follow. 33efolgen, to follow after, i. e. to obey. 

^(rbetten, to labor. 33earbetten, to labor upon ; elaborate, 

£ a eft en, to laugh, SBelacften, to laugh at 

$lugel, a wing. tgeflugeln, to furnish with wings* 

©lucf, happiness. 33egtMen, to make happy. 

gret, free. SBefreten, to set freifc. 

In some instances, it s merely euphonic. 



OBSSftVATiOiN-S. | 9?. 



(2) (Smp and exit (£m:p is, probably, only another form of 
exit: occurring, however, only in three verbs; (etrtyftnben, to feel; 
ittpfattgen, to receive ; empfefylen, to recommend ;) and bearing a sense 
but remotely related to its original. The prime and predominant 
power of e n t is that of indicating separation^ departure, privation. 

In some instances it has the kindred sense of approach or transi- 
tion from one point or condition towards another. Examples. 



©el) en, to go. 
3tefjen, to draw, 
^3inben, to bind. 
£au£t, the head 

Mxtft, power* 

fUobe, dim-eyed, dull, bashful. 

33remten, to burn, 
€>prechen/ to speak. 



(£ntcjet)en, to go away, to get off. 
@nt$ief)en, to withdraw, 
(gntbinben, to unbind. 
@nt()cuu;ten, to deprive of head, to 

behead. 
@ntfc&ften, to deprive of power, 

weaken, 
(f ntbloben, to divest of shame, ba 

bold. 
(£ntbtennen, to take fire, to kindle* 
dntfyredben, to answer, or 

correspond to. 

(£ n t is sometimes, also, merely intensive or euphonic : as, entleereu 
(from leer, empty,) to empty out, 

(3) (§r and set. dr, as a general thing, conveys tire idea of 
getting or gaining for some one, by means of that which is expressed 
by the word connected with it ; as, e r b it t e n, to get, or try to get* 
by begging. It finds its exact opposite in x> e x ; which marks what 
is against or away from some one's interest or benefit; as, serbttten, 
to beg off, to decline. The force and use of these particles are best 
illustrated by examples. 

Srfcaben, to get or gain by bathing 
(§rftnben, to find out for one's self, 

invent. 
(£rftef)en, to arise, originate. 
• dtbanen, to erect, to produce. 
23 er fag en, to speak against, to deny. 



33abeu, to bathe, 
ginbeu, to find. 



€>tef)en, to stand. 
*8cuten, to build. 
(Sagen, to say or speak. 
demerit, to wall, or make a wall. 



©pieten, to play. 

gutjren, to carry, or lead. 
&al%m, to salt. 



SSetm cittern, to wall against, stop 

by wall. 
SBet'fpteien, to play away, to lose 

by gambling. 
I8exfu()teu, to lead away, to seduce. 
SSerfalJen, to oversalt, spoil m 

salting. 



UttfcFIXES SEPARABLE AKD JHSEFJUiABLfc. § 98. 39^/ 

(4) ($x andtter are, also, both employed in concerting nouna 
a nd adjectives Into verbs expressive of transition from one state of 
condition into another : thus, 

(Svfalten, (faft, e'old) to take cold. IBetebelft, (ebel, noble) to ennobJ© 

(ftfttfmen, (fitl)n, bold) to become 33erg6ftern, (@cti, God) to deify. 

bold, dare. 

drlcripnetr, (ledjm, lame) to become SBetaften, (alt, old) to grow old of 

lame. obsolete, 

^rfldren, (flat, clear) to make SSeremen, {tin, one) to make one» 

plain. unite. 

In some Instances, moreover, e t and t> e x are only euphonic o? 
intensive, 

§98. Prefixes separable and inseparable. 

(1) The Prefixes of this class, when separable, are always tinder' 
the full accent ; when inseparable, the accent falls upon the radical, 

(2) Their effect, wlien separable, is, in union with radicals to 
produce certain intransitive compounds *, in which each of the parts 
(prefix and radical) has its own peculiar and natural signification. 

(3) Their effect, when inseparable, is, in connection with the ra- 
dicals, to form certain transitive compounds ; which, for the most 
part, are used in a figurative or metaphorical sense. 

(4) We subjoin a list of the prefixes of this class : illustrating, 
each by a couple of examples ; the first being one in which the pr# 
fix is separable ; the second one in which it is inseparable. 

ftftr*, through ; | S«r*'bringen, to press or force through i 

& ' I JDurdbbrm'gen, to penetrate, 

ilhrtet behind • I &*'***&¥*> to S° behind ; 

#mter, behind, j £foferge4Jeft, to deceive. 

tote over - I Ue'uerfe^ett, to set or put over ; 

wmx, ovei , | Ue&erfefc'en, to translate. 

Urn nrmmd ■ \ u ™'9^™/ to go around ; 

Urn, around, j Umgetj'en, to evade. 

tint t .. , | Urt'terf dbteljen, to shove or push under ; 

I tinier fcfne'fren, to defer ; alsc, to substitute* 

aCieber, again ; k ck ; \ ^f f tt ' \° fetch , or bri "^ baek ; 
6 ' ' ( SBteberfyo'len, to repeat. 



* There are, however, some compounds of b it v d) and it nt , in which, 
though these particles are separable, the verbs are, nevertheless, transitive. 
Still, it will be found, that in such cases the signification of the compound i0 
figurative ;• as, iim.bving.en, to ^ring about {one's death}) i e. to kill 



I§B ABVEkfiS FORMED FROk NOUNS. § 99. § 100. § 101. 

§ 99. Verbs compounded with nouns and adjectives. 

(J) A variety of compounds is produced by the union of verbs 
*vith nouns ai.d adjectives. These follow the same general laws 
which govern those produced by means of prefixes. Some of them, 
accordingly, are separable ; as, 



geljlfdilacjen, to miscarry ; 


from 


w 


and 


fcfylctgett. 


$rdj>tect>en, to acquit; 


»/ 


fre-i 


tt 


fpred)eti. 


©tctcbfommen, to equal ; 


»/ 


gletd) 


tt 


fommeft. 


£o$rcijjen, to tear away ; 


» 


to* 


tt 


reifjett. 


(Stattfmbett, to take place ; 


tt 


ftatt 


V 


fmbeiL 


'2) Some are inseparable ) as 


1 








%xcl)lcdm, to exult ; 


from 


frot) 


and forfeit. 


§ruf;fiitcfen, to breakfast ; 


>t 


fritl) 


#/ 


fiiirfen. 


$ud)8fdb?odn$en, to fawn ; 


tt 


fud)$ 





ftfnfcdnje& 


<§cmbljaben, to handle ; 


mtt 


fyanb 


r/ 


fyaben, 


Stebaugeln, to ogle ; 


tt 


lie* 


ft 


dugclM. 


"fitebfofen, to caress ; 


ft 


IteB 


ft 


fofen. 


SDhittyma'fjeit, to suspect; 


tt 


mutfj 


tt 


mafen. 


SDoUjieljen, to perform; 


it 


Dott 


tt 


gie^en. 


EBiUfa^ren, to gratify ; 


it 


wilt 


tt 


fafyrett. 


SSeiffagen, to foretell ; 


it 


toeig 


it 


fagen. 



\ 3) These verbs take the augment syllable g e in the perfect 
|*p rticiple : except fcottjtefyen, which has ttou^ogen. In some cases, 
however, verbs compounded with t> o H, also, take the augment; 
as, v>o(lgegoffen, from t)o(lo[kpeit, to pour full. 

§ 100. THE ADVERBS. 

(1) Adverbs in German, as in other languages, serve to modify 
the signification of verbs, participles, adjectives and, often, also that 
of one another : denoting, for the most part, certain limitations of 
time, place, degree and manner. Hence are they usually classified 
according to their meaning. 

(2) They are indeclinable ; and formed, either by derivation or 
composition, from almost every other part of speech : of some, how* 
ever, the origin is wholly unknown. 

Arranged according to derivation, adverbs are divisible into the 
following classes : 

§ 101. Adverbs formed from nouns, 

Adverbs aro formed from nouns by affixing the letter 6. This 
fcerminati >n £ Is nothing more than the sign of the genitive singula* j 



Ab VERBS FORMED FROM ADJECTIVES. § i02. 



S98 



tvhich ease, not only of nouns, but also of adjectives, participles* 
&c. is often made to perform the office of an adverb. * Exaip* 
pies : 



Sftorgens, in the morning ; 
SlbenbS, in the evening ; 
'%&#$, in the day ; 
XtjziU, in part, or partly ; 
SlugS, swiftly ; 
JDurdbgefyenbS, generally ; 

3ufel)enb$, visibly; 



from ber $0iorgen, morning;, 

„ ber 9tbenb, evening. 

„ ber £ag, day. 

„ ber %i)nl, part. 

„ ber glug, flight. 

„ burdbger/enb, passing 
through, 

# jufeljenb, looking at 



§ 102, Adverbs formed from adjectives. 

(1) Adverbs are formed from adjectives by the addition of th& 
suffixes ltd), I) a f t and It u 9 ; which, except the last, are also 
regular adjective terminations. These endings are chiefly expressive 
of mariner ; and may be translated sometimes by a corresponding 
suffix (as the English ly or ishly), and sometimes by some equi* 
valent phrase. Examples : 



SBctfjrltdb, truly; verily; 
S3ogfyaft, maliciously; 
SBeiglirt), wisely ; 
Sreilidb, sure ; to be sure ; 
93iinblmg$, blindly; 



from tocdjr, true. 

„ bo fe, evil ; wicked. 
„ toetfe, wise. 
It fret, free; sure. 
„ bltnb, blind. 



(2) The letter g, also, as above stated, added to adjectives, gives 
£1 :e to a class of adverbs : * thus, 



SfadbiS, on the right ; 
Smfg, on the left ; 
§luber$, otherwise; 
53erett$, already; 
33efonberg, particularly ; 
<&tet$, continually; 



from red)t, right. 
„ linf, left. 
„ ember, other. 
t , berett, ready. 
„ befonber, particular. 
» ftet, continual. 



(3) Here note, also, that almost all German adjectives, in tfe 
absolute form, that is, in the simple form without the terminations oj 



The letter is, also, sometimes affixed to adverbs ending in nut I ; as, 
DOvmalS formerly; bamalS, at the time; melmais many times. For nu- 
meral adverbs ending in mat, let, &c. See the Section on Numerals. 



400 ADVERBS FORMED FROM PRONOUNS § 103. 



declension, are employed as adverbs : thus, er retmt fcfynetl, hi runa 
rapidly ; er ^anbelt e^rXtd), he acts honestly. 

§ 103. Adverbs formed from pronouns. 

(1) These are, chiefly, ba, there; from ber, bte, ba£, this or that / 
ibo, w/iere ; from toer, toa3, who* wto ; r)er, hither, and fyin, thither \ 
from some corresponding demonstrative pronoun no longer found. 

(2) The pronominal adverbs in combination with other words, 
give rise to a number of compounds. Thus ba and too, united with 
prepositions, serve often instead of the dative and accusative (neuter) 
of the pronouns bet, Wet and toelcfyer, respectively. It will be no- 
ticed, that when the Other word begins with a vowel or with the let* 
ter n> bti and too are written bar and to or ; that is, that r is inserted 
for the sake of euphony. The following are compounds of ba and 
loo : 



J) abet, thereby* 

i. e. by this or that. 
3)afiir, therefor, 

i. e. for this or that. 
5) am it, therewith, 

i. e. with this or that. 
&)ar in, therein, 

i. e. in this or that. 
featimter, thereunder or among* 

i. e. under this or that. 
4) arum, thereabout or therefor, 

i. e. for this or that ; therefor. 

Satan, thereon, 

i. e. on this or that. 
4)arauf, thereupon, 

i. e. upon this or that; 
£)atau3, therefrom, 

i. e. from this or that. 
£)aoott, thereof, 

i. e. of this or that. 
£)aju, thereto, 

i. e. to this or that. 
4)aburd), there-through or thereby 

L e. through or by this or that 



Sofcet, whereby, 

i. e. by which* 
SBofur, wherefor, 

i. e. for which* 
SBonut, wherewith* 

i. e. with whicfr- 
fffiorm, wherein, 

i. e. in which. 
SBorunter, where under, among* 

i. e. under this or ***at. 
SBorum, whereabout, 

i. e. about or for wKchj 
wherefo** ; VT hf, 
SBorau, whereto, 

i. e. to which. 
SBorauf, whereupon, 

i. e. upon which, 
SBorauS, wherefroffi* 

i. e. from which 
2So»on, whereof, 

i. e. of which. 
SBc^u, whereto, 

i. e. to which. 
SBcbimb, whereby, 

L e. br or through uh|0& 



ADVERBS F0RM3JJ BT COMPOSITION. § 104. § 105. 401 

(3) In like manner Ijer and tytn appear, also, combined with 
other ,vords. Between these two particles a distinction exists, 
wherever they are used, whether alone or in composition with othei 
words, which should be well understood and always remembered. 
They are, in signification, exact opposite* : l)zx indicating motion or 
direction towards the speaker; tytrt implying motion or direction 
away from the speaker. The following are examples : 

£ercib, down hither (i. e. where ^htab, down thither (i. e. away 

the speaker is). from the speaker). 

^erauf, up hither. «§inauf, up thither. 

«§erauS, out hither. «§>mauS, out thither. 

4?emn, in hither ; into this place. 4?ittem, into that place. 

$ied)er, or fyiefyet, hither here; Qiexfyn, thither; this way for- 
tius way. ward. 

§eritber, over hither. <§utuber, over thither. 

Remitter, under hither. <§humter, under there. 

$)afyer, from there hither, i. e. £)at)m, from thither (to) there, 

thence i. e. thither. 

SBcfyer, from which p.ace hither, SBotyin, from which place thither, 

i. e. whence. i. e. whither* 

(4) We have no words in English, corresponding exactly in use 
and force with l)tx and fyttt ; and therefore, though everywhere in 
German their force may be felt, it cannot always be expressed by 
single words, in translation. Hence are they often treated as ex- 
pletives. 

§ 104. Adverbs formed from verbs. 

(1) Adverbs are formed from verbs by suffixing to the radical 
part the termination 1 1 db. All adverbs so formed, however, are 
equally employed as adjectives : thus, 

©IciuMid) (from gfou&-{-en, to believe), credibly, 
(gferbftd) (from fterb+ett, to die), mortally, 
jtt&glid) (from flag+en, to lament), lamentably. 
SfterfUd) (from metf+^t, to note; perceive), perceptibly. 

§ 105. Adverbs formed by composition. 

(1) Besides the classes given above, a numerous list of adverbs 
in German is produced by the union of various partes of speech. 
Thus, the word SBetfe (mode, mariner), combined with nouns, 
forms a class of adverbs employed chiefly in specifying things ind> 



#0*1 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. § 106. 

nduaJly or separately: thus, fdmtittetfe, step by step; fljetltocffe^ 
part by part ; iropfemwife, drop by drop ; toogentoetfe, wave by wave; 
like waves. $Beife is also added to adjectives; as, btcbifd)crVoeife r 
tliie^ shly ; Qlh tf ( titer to eife, fortunately. 

(2) Sometimes an adverb and a preposition are united ; examples 
of which may be found above under the head of adverbs formed 
from pronouns. 

(3) Sometimes adverbs are formed by the union or the repetition 
cf prepositions : as, burdbauS, throughout ; thoroughly ; turd) tmb 
buret), through and through. 

(4) Sometimes a noun and a pronoun joined together, serve as 
an adverb ; as, memerfette, on my side ; bteffettS, on this side ; alter* 
bing3, by all means. 

(5) Sometimes one adverb is formed from another by the add,', 
tion of a suffix ; as, rucflttK|3, backwards : sometimes by the uniot 
of another adverb ; as, nimmevmefyr, nevermore. 

(6) Sometimes the several words composing a phrase, are, by 
being brought into union, made to perform the office of an adverb : 
thus, fiktoafyr (for fur toafyr), verily; fonft (for the obsolete fc ne tji, 
if it is not), otherwise ; else, 

§ 106. Comparison of adverbs. 

(1) Many adverbs, chiefly, however, those expressive of manner 
are susceptible of the degrees of comparison. The forms for these 
are the same in adverbs as in adjectives 

(2) It must be observed, however, that, when a comparison, 
strictly speaking, is intended, the form of the superlative produced 
by prefixing a m (See Obs. § 38.), should always be employed ; as, 
er febretbt am fcfronfien, he writes the most beautifully (of all). 

(3) If, on the other hand, we purpose, not to compare individuals 
one with another, but merely to denote extreme excellence or emi- 
nence, there are three ways in which it may properly be done : first, 
by using the simple or absolute form of the superlative ; as, n Qtixfjt 
fmmb'ltdbffc, he greets or salutes in a manner very friendly, very cor- 
dially ; secondly, by employing auf$ (auf-f-ba3) with the accusative, 
or $um (ju-f-bem) with the dative, of the superlative ; as, aufS 
freutibltcbfte, in a manner very friendly ; jam fdicuften, in a manner 
very beautiful ; lastly, by adding to the simple form of the super- 
lative, the termination e n $ ; fecjlenS, the best or in the best manner 
fyo<f)jie»$, at the highest or at the most. 



TABLE OP THE PREPOSITIONS. § 107. $ 108. 403 



§ :.07. THE PREPOSITIONS. 

(1) The prepositions in German, that is, the words employed 
merely to denote the relations of things, are commonly classified ac- 
cording to the cases with which they are construed. Some of them 
are construed with the genitive only ; some with the dative only ; 
some with the accusative only ; and some either with the dative or 
accusative, according to circumstances. 

(2) They may also, on a different principle, be divided into two 
general classes : the Primitive and the Derivative. The primitive 
prepositions always govern either the dative or the accusative : the 
derivative prepositions are found, for the most part, in connection 
with the genitive only. 



§ 108. Table of 


the Prepositions. 


(1) Prepositions 


i construed with 


(2) Prepositions construed with 


THE GENITIVE. 


THE DATIVE. 


Slnjiatt, or 


£>betf)Ciu3, 


2to, 


fte&j*, 


jtatt, 


£vqfc 


9tuftet, 




5lu£jerf)alb, 


Urn — imtteit/ 


93et, 


6» f 


3)tefTett, or 


Unfern, 


33innett, 




bteffettS, 


Urtgeacbtet, 


(Sntgegett, 


<§amint, 


4?alb, Ijalhm, or 


Unterl; alb, 


©egenuBet, 




tyalber, 


Unroeit, 


©emctf, 


@ett, 


Smierfyalb, 


S3ermttteljt, o 






Senfett, or 


mittelji, 


mt, 


Won, 


jenfette, 


SQzxmQfy, 






itraft, 


SBaljrenb, 


fftaty, 


3u, 


SattgS, 


SBegett, 






Sauf, 


3ufolge. 


m$% 


Sutotber 


(3) Preposit ons 


construed with 


(4) Prepositions i 


construed witi 


THE AC 


3USATIVE. 


THE DATIVE Or ACCUSATIVE. 


$>urtf), 


Oljne, 


9a, 


UeBer, 


gur, 


©ember, 


9fof, 


Unfer, 


©ecjen, or 


Urn, 


gutter, 


$ox, 


8**1/ 


SBiber. 


3n, 


3wifd)etL 



Sfte&en, 



404 



OBSERVATIONS. § 109. § 110. 



§ 109 Prepositions construed with the genitive. 

We now give again the prepositions governing the several case* 
respectively, with their proper definitions : subjoining, also, some 
few observations on such of them as seem to require further expla- 
nation. And first, we mention those construed with the genitive. 



Slnftatt, or \tatt, 


instead. 


Urn — tmtten, 


for the sake of. 


9lufer$alb, 


without ; out- 


Ungead)tet, 


notwithstanding. 




side. 


Unter^alb, 


below ; on the 


2)tefieit, or bief* 


on this side. 




lower side. 


feitt, 




Unfem, 


near ; not far 


£alben, or tyal* 


on account of. 




from. 


ber, 




Uwmit, 


near ; not far 


Snnetfyalb, 


within; inside. 




from 


Senfeit, or jen* 


on that side; 


SSermittelft, or 


by means of. 


feftt, 


beyond. 


mittelft, 




«raffc 


by virtue of. 


$ertnca,e, 


by dint of. 


£angg, (also 


along. 


SBafyrenb, 


during. 


gov. Dat.) 








fccmt, 


according to. 


SBegen, 


on account of. 


0berf)aflj, 


above. 






Srois, (also 


in spite of. 


3nfolge, (also 


in consequence 


Sfov Dat.) 




gov. Dat.) 


of. 



§ 110. Observations. 

(1) 51 njt a tt is compounded of an (in) and @tatt (place;) and 
these components may sometimes be separated : thus, an be$ 93rnber$ 
@tatt. in the brother's stead. In this case the part, <§ t a 1 1 , takes 
its proper character, which is that of a noun. 

(2) <§alben, like toegen and nm — ttntten, expresses motive. Strict- 
ly speaking, however, ^ a IB en seems to point to a motive that is 
direct, immediate and special ; tt) e g e n indicates an object less definite 
and more distant ; while nm — toiften looks to the will, wish or wel- 
fare of that which is expressed by the genitive. These distinctions, 
however, are not always regarded even by writers of reputation. 

(3) «j?alfeen or tyaiber is always placed after the noun which it gov- . 
ems : the form, t)alt e n being preferred, when the noun has an article 
or pronoun before it; and fyalB e r , when it has not : thus, ce3 ®elbe3 
Ijatfeen, for the sake of money ; 3krcmitgeng Rafter, for the sake of 
pleasure. <£>alben is often united with the genitive of the personal 
pronouns; in which case the final letter (x) is emitted and its place 



OBSERVATIONS. $111. $112. 



402 



■applied by t : thus, ntemet^aTBett, (instead of mehtetljalBen,) fot my 
sake ; beinetJjalben, for thy sake ; femetfyalbeu, for his sake, &c. So> 
too, it occurs ii? the compounds beJ3t)Cilb, on account of that; t»ef$s 
fyalb, on account 0° which : wherein, as in aujjerijalb, innerfalb, cber* 
l)aih, untexfyalb, the form 1) a I b e it is shortened into fy a I b. In the 
last four, f) a I b has the sense ^«ri or szcZe ; as, aujjerfyalb, outside, &c. 

(4) 2Begen may either come before or after its noun : as, ttegen bet 
grcfjen ©efctfji*, on account of the great danger; [enter ®efunt>(;eit tt>e* 
gen, on account of his health. 

(5) Um — untteu is always separated by the genitive which it gov- 
erns : thus, um ©ottee ttntten, for God's sake. 

(6) Ungeadbtet may either precede or succeed its noun : as, uttge* 
adbtet alter <§mbentijfe, notwithstanding all hindrances ; fetneg gletf e* 
ungeact) tit, notwithstanding his industry. 

(7) SCermoge, by dint or means oft indicates physical ability : as, 
ttermcge beg gleifeS, by means of industry. It thus diifers from fvaft, 
which points rather to the exercise of moral power : as, fraft meineg 
Stmteg, by virtue of my office. 

(8) 3uf elge, when it comes after the word which it governs, takes 
the latter in the Dative : as, bent 33efef;le ^ufcX^e, in consequence of 
(or pursuant to) the order. 

(9J £dng3 and tro£ may, also, govern the Dative. 

§ 111. Prepositions construed with the dative. 



SfttS, 


out ; out of. 


Sta^ 


after; to; ac- 


9iu$er, 


without; outside 




cording to. 




of. 


Sfead&ji, 


next ; next to. 


*8ei, 


by; near; with. 


SteBjl, 


together with. 


SBtnnen, 


within. 


Oh, 


over; at. 


Chitgegen, 


towards ; oppo- 


€>ammt, 


together with. 




site to. 


©cit, 


since. 


©egenubet, 


over against. 


S3cn, 


from; of. 


©em&f, 


conformably 


3u, 


to , at. 




with. 


Sutotber, 


against ; con- 


mt, 


with. 




traiy. 



$. 112. Observations. 

(1) $ u $ indicates the place, the source or the material whence 
any thing is produced ; as, cut3 bem <gcmfe, out of the house ; xu& 
SieBe, out of love ; au6 SfctcBtg fyat ©ott Me SOBelt $emad)f out of no- 
thing has God made the world. 



406 OBSERVATIONS. § 112. 

(2) 51 u f? e r differs from cms, in that it denotes situation rather 

than transition : thus, cm£ bent «§aufe marks motion from or out of 
the house, while cutset bent <£>ctufe signifies position in respect to the 
house ; that is, outside of the house ; abroad : hence comes, also, 
the signification, besides ; exclusive of; as, D^temanb cutper mtr roar 
§ugegen, no one besides, or except me was present. 

(3) 33 e i shows the relation of proximity or identity in respect to 
persons, places, times, &c. : as, er mclmt bet fehtem 33ruber he resides 
with his brother ; bet bent §aufe, by or near the house ; bet ber @d)6* 
A)fung, at the creation ; bet metner Slufunft, at or upon my arrival ; bet 
bent $piato, in Plato, that is, in the works of Plato. 33 e t is also 
■used in making oath or protest ; as, bet ©ott ; bet meinev @i)re ; by 
God ; by, or upon my honor : a use easily derived from the primary 
signification of the word. It should be added that the German bet 
(unlike the English by) is not properly employed to denote the cause, 
means or instrument of an action : this is done by the words bttrd), 
*?on, or ntit : id) fctljre nut ber (£tfenbafm. 

(4) 33 t n n e n is used in denoting a limitation of time ; as, bin> 
nen adit £agen, within eight days. 

(5) (£ntgegen always comes after its noun ; and denotes the 
relation of parties moving towards one another so as to meet : hence 
it gets the significations opposite to, over against : thus, ber $nabe 
(tiuft fehtem 33ater entgegen, the boy runs towards, that is, to meet his 
father ; bent 2Btnbe entgegen, against the wind. 

(6) ©egenuber marks an opposite position of things ; and 
like entgegen, comes after its noun ; as, bent «gaufe gegenuber, opposite 
to, or fronting the house. 

(7) Wl t t signifies sometimes the relation of union ; sometimes 
that of instrumentality ; as, k arbettet mtt fehtem 33ater, he works 
with his father ; mtt etnem 3ftejfer fcfynetben, to cut with a knife : some- 
times, also, it indicates the manner of an action ; as, mit ©emalt; mtt 
Sift 

(8) 3£ a d), in all its uses, has its nearest equivalent in the Eng- 
lish word after ; as, jeljn 2fttnuten nad) titer, ten minutes after four ; 
nad) engltfcber 2ftobe, after the English fashion ; ber 9lafe nad), after 
(that is, following after) your nose ; bent ©trome nad), after (that is, 
in the direction of) the stream ; ber 33efcnretbung nad), after (that is, 
according to) the description ; wit ge^en nad) ber ©tabt, we are going 
after (that is, in the direction of, towards, or to) the city ; ba$ ©duff 
tft nad) 5lmertfa befitmmt, the ship is bound after (that is, for) Ame- 
rica, &c. 

(9) When direction towards a person, instead of a place, is indi- 



PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. § 113. 407 

caied, $ u is employed ; as, tcb toerbe g u rnemem Safer gefyen, 1 shall 
go to my father. Sometimes n a d) is used in connection with § u ; 
iis, er lief nad) ber &a.bt gu, he ran (literally, after to) towards the 
city. When it denotes direction ^i^/i, as in the phrase, bem (Stveme 
nad\ following, or going im'2/i- the stream, it is put after the noun 
which it governs : so, also, when it has the kindred sense, according 
to ; as, metner SJlehumg nad), according to my opinion. If, however, 
in the latter case, a genitive depends on the noun under the govern- 
ment of the preposition, nad) precedes ; as, nad) bet 33efd)retbiuig bz$ 
©d) titer, according to Schiller's description. 

(10) £ftebft and fa mint have the same general signification, 
together with ; but, strictly speaking, differ in this, that fammt not 
only indicates conjoint, but, also, simultaneous action : thus, Slaton 
fammt feinen dolmen f often ifyre -§dnbe anf fetn <j?au£t legem Aaron 'to- 
gether with (i. e. simultaneously with) his sons shall lay their hands 
upon his head. 

(11) D h is seldom used except in poetry. 

(12) Son marks the source or origin of a thing, and has the 
name latitude of signification as its English equivalent from : thus, 
ber 2Bmb ttefyet son Often, the wind blows from the East ; ba3 ®e* 
btcbt tft son il)m, that poem is from (by) him. With an or anf fol- 
lowing, it indicates the extent of a period of time : Don ber crften 
.ftmbfjeit an, from earliest childhood on ; oon fetner Sngenb anf, from 
his youth up. 

(13) 3 n primarily is a mere sign of transition ; but is made to 
denote a variety of cognate relations, from a state of motion to a 
state of rest. Examples best illustrate its use : thus, id) null jn met* 
nem SSater gefjen, I will go to my father ; nur ret fen $n Staffer nnb $n 
£anbe, Ave travel by land and by water; gu $ferbe, on horseback ; gn 
guge, on foot ; gu £anfe, at home ; $u jener 3ett, at that time ; er fyat 
mid) §nm (for $u bem) barren gemad)t, he has made me (to become) a 
fool ; er timt e3 mir gu Stebe, he does it to (show) love for me. It is 
sometimes used as an adverb ; as, gefy $n, go on ; jn otel, too much , 
mad)e bte Xfyiir $n, shut the door to. 

(14) Snnuber, against, contrary to, comes after the word, 
which it governs. 

§ 113. Prepositions construed with the accusative. 



©itrcn, through. 


©onber 


apart; without 


gnr, for ; in place of. 


Urn, 


about; around* 


®egen or gen, towards. 


SBiber, 


against 


Dime, without, 







408 OBSERVATIONS. § 114. §115. § 116. 

§ 114. Observations. 



(1) £) u r et) has its exact equivalent in the English word through ; 
as, buret) bie @tabt gefyen, to go through the city ; buret) Sijreu 33ei* 
ftanb, through your aid ; bci6 ganje 3at)r buret) (where, as often in 
English, the preposition comes after the noun), ike whole year 
through. 

(2) © c g e u (contract form, cjeu) indicates motion toioards ; and 
hence often has the signification opposite to ; but whether it marks 
direction towards, in a manner friendly or otherwise, must be deter- 
mined by the context. In this respect, it differs from tmber; against, 
which denotes an opposition, doing or designing evil. 

(3) D^ne and f o u b e r are of the same import ; but the latter 
is seldom used, and then only, when the substantive has no article 
before "t. 

(4) U m, like the English word about, indicates the going or 
being of one thing around another ; and hence denotes also near- 
ness, change of position, succession, &c. : thus, um bm £tfet) ftfcen, 
to sit about the table ; tmrf bemen SJtantel um biti), throw thy cloak 
about thee ; um jtuet Ufyr, about (literally, close about, i. e. exactly) 
two o'clock ; emeu %a$ um bin aubern, one day about another, that 
is, every other day ; eg tji um Ujn gefetiefyen, it is done about him, that 
is, it is all over with him ; um ®e(b fpteleu, to play about (for) mo- 
ney ; um $el)tt Safyre ]tmger, younger about (by) ten years, &c. Be- 
fore an Infinitive preceded by $u (that is, before the Supine, as it is 
sometimes called), um denotes purpose ; as, um Sfytteu $u jetcjen, in 
order to show you ; um ju fcfyretben, in order to write, or for the pur- 
pose of writing. 

§ 115. Prepositions construed with the dative or 
accusative. 






«tt, 


on; at; near. 


Ue&er, 


over; above. 


9luf, 


on ; upon. 


Uuter, 


under; among. 


•©inter, 


behind. 


$or, 


before. 


3n, 


in, or into. 


Sunfcfyen, 


betwixt ; be- 


9£e6en, 


beside. 




tween. 




§116. 


Observations. 





These prepositions govern either the accusative or the dative ; but 
not without a difference of signification : for, when motion towards, 
that is, motion from one po**nt to another, Is indicated, the accusative 



OBSERVATIONS. § 116. 



403 



is required : when, however, motion or rest in any given place or 

condition is signified, the dative is used ; thus, ber jtnabe Iditft tn ben 
©avfen, the boy runs into (motion towards) the garden ; ber jfrtab? 
Idnfi in bent ©arien, the boy runs in (motion within) the garden. 
This is the general principle ; which will be found, with more or 
less distinctness, everywhere to prevail in the use of the pre* 
positions of this class. We subjoin a list of examples. 

to dwell in or at a place, 
to write to a friend, 
he is working on a book, 
to think on (i. e. turn ondt 
thoughts towards) something, 
he died by consumption. 

I put the table against (towards) 
the wall, 
weak in understanding, 
even to or until evening, 
in the morning and in the 
evening. 
on (i. e. resting on) the tower, 
upon (i. e. climbing) the tower, 
to live in the country, 
to travel into the country, 
at the post-office, 
at school. 

to think (turn thoughts) on a 
thing, 
so much for a, or per man. 
even to four dollars, 
in (i. e. following after) the Ger- 
man way- 
pursuant to an order, 
next Monday, 
he stands behind me. 
he stepped behind me. 
I live in the city. 
I am going into the city. 
he stood near to me. 
he placed himself neai me. 
over (i. e. while at) the work 
beyond my strength. 



Dat. 


£(n etnem Drte tooljnen, 


Aec. 


2Itt etnen gretmb fd)tetben, 


Dat. 


(£r arbettei an etnem 33ud)e, 


Ace. 


$n etn>a$ benfen, 


Dat. 


Qx \$ an ber $u$$el)nmg ge* 




ftorben, 


Aoc. 


3* [telle bm Stfcfc an tie 




SSattb, 


Dat, 


<Sc£nt?acr) an SBerflahbe, 


Ace. 


23t6 an ben 2lbenb, 


Dat. 


9lm SRorgen unb am 5tbenb, 


Dat. 


5(uf bem %i)mmz, 


Aec. 


5(uf bm %i)imn, 


Dat, 


5(uf bem £anbe ttofyneit, 


Ace. 


9M ba$ £anb retfen, 


Dat. 


9tef ber $cft, 


Dat. 


5lnf ber €>dm(e, 


Ace. 


$lnf erne @adbe bmttn, 


Ace. 


@o inel anf ben SJlann, 


Ace. 


23t3 anf ttter Scaler, 


Ace 


Sfof beutfd)c %xt, 


Aec. 


9tuf Eefefji, 


Aie 


9fof 3Kontag, 


Dat. 


(Sr jlet)t Winter mir, 


Ace. 


(£r trat gutter mid), 


Dat 


3d) rccCme in ber (Stabt, 


Ace. 


3d) ge^e in Me (Stabt, 


Dat. 


(St ftanb neben mtr, 


Ace 


(§x fteltte ftd8) neben mid), 


Dat. 


Ueber ber Arbeit, 


Aec. 


Ueber metne jfrofie,, 




18 



>N». 



$.117. 



Ace. ttebet bas Safjr, 

Ace. £en Sag, nber, 

Dat. 3d) fianb unter etnem $3anme, 

Ace. 2)er <§nnb fried)t unter ben 

Dat. <&o totft id) mid) nicftt ttor btr 
tterbergen, 
J)at> 3d) flanb vox bent §aufe, 
Ace. 3d) getje uor bie Xi)irr, 
Dat. 3d) fafj ^tfdien jtoei greun* 

ben, 
Ace. ^d) ftetfte mid) $ttifd)en betbe, 



beyond this (i. tv next) year. 
the day over, i. e. during the day 
I stood under a tree, 
the dog creeps under the table. 

then will I not hide myself from 
thee. 
I stood before the house. 
I go before the door. 
I sat between two friends. 

I placed myself between the two. 



§ 117. THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

(1) Conjunctions are words used in connecting sentences. As, 
however, there are various kinds of connections existing among sen- 
tences, it has been customary to classify the conjunctions according 
to the nature of the connection which they are employed to indicate. 
Hence we have (among other classes) the following 

Copulatives: as, nnb, and; and), also. 
Disjunctives: as, enttoeber, either; obcr, or. 
Adversatives : as, aber, but ; however ; atletn, but ; bod), vet. 
Negatives: as, tteber, neither; nod), nor. 

Comparatives: as, tt>te, as; fo, so; thus, a(3, than; $letd)tt)te, just 

as 
Coiiditionals - as, toenn, if; falte, in case that; tt)o fern, provided 

that. 
Causats: as, benn, for; toeil, since; because. 

Conclusive: as, barum, therefore; bafyer, hence; befrfyalb, there- 

fore 
Concessives : as, cbtootjl, obfebon, obgletd), toenn; although. 
Finals : as, bag, that \ auf baj? and bamit, in order that ; um jtu 

in order to* 

(2) We give below a list of the conjunctions that most commonly 
occur in German : premising only that some of the words here set 
down as conjunctions are also employed as adverbs ; for it will of 
course be kept in mind, that the office performed by a word, deter- 
mines its name and character. For numerous examples illustrating 
their uses, See Lesson 69. 



INTERJECTIONS. § 118* 



411 



2lber, but. 
Weir* but. 
$&U, as ; than : when. 
§Clfo, so then ; consequently ; also. 
Stud), also; ever. 
Wuf bap, in order that. 
Si6> until. 
2) a, since. 

£)a§er, therefore ; hence. 
©afern, in case that ; if. 
£)aff, that ; in order that. 
2>amtt, in order that, 
©arum, therefore ; on that account. 
£>emt, for; because; than. 
3)ennod), still; nevertheless, 
©egftalb, therefore ; on that ac- 
count. 
©efto, the (L. 32. 10). 
2)ocb, yet; however; still. 
@l)e, before- that; ere. 
(Snttoeber, either. 
ga((3, in case that, 
gotoftcfo, consequently. 
3e, — bejle, the— the 
Sebcd), yet, nevertheless. 
Snbem, while ; because ; since. 
SDlitijm, consequently. 



irtadbbem, after-thai 

9locb. nor; nor yet. 

■tftun, therefore; then. 

9lwc, but; only- 

£)b, whether; if. 

£>bo,(eta\ though; although. 

Dbfdbon, though; although. 

Obtt?o()l, though; although. 

£)ber, or. 

Dl)ne, without; except. 

£)fmgead)tct, notwithstanding. 

<2>o, thus; therefore; if. 

(Senbern, but. 

Unb, and. 

tlngead)tet, notwithstanding. 

Sdtjrenb, whilst. 

2BdJ)renb bent, whilst. 

SBdfyrettb ba§, whilst that. 

2Beber, neither. 

SBenn, if; as. 

SBeil, because. 

SBenugletdb, although. 

SSemtfdion, although, 

2Bte, as; when. 

SBietoeljt, though. 

3Be, if. 

3Bofem, if; in case that 



§ 118, INTERJECTIONS. 

(1) Interjections, as the name implies, are commonly thrown into 
a sentence ; without, however, changing either its structure or its 
signification. They are merely the signs of strong or sudden emo- 
tion; and may be classified according to the nature of the emotion 
which they indicate: some expressing joy; some sorrow; some 
surprise, and so on. The list below contains those only that most 
commonly occur. 

a fa ! alas! 

af)! ah! 

et! eigh! 

fya ! ha! tr»er)e ! wo! alas' 

t>el ho! Ijeifa ! hurrah! 



rf) ! o ! oh ! o ! 

£fut! fy! 
*>ft! hist! 
ttebe ! wo ! 



412 SrWTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 11«9. § 120. 

fje ba ! ho there ! jucfcfjeifa ! huzza ! 

fya't! hold! tocfylan! well then! 

fyolla! holla! Jjut! hoa ! quick! 

intfd)! hush! ftefy! lo ! 

letter ! alas ! I)um ! hem ! 

(2) It may be added thai; other parts of speech and even whole 
phrasos, are often employed as interjections, and in parsing are treat- 
ed as such. 



§ 119. SYNTAX. 

Syntax is that part of Grammar which unfolds the relations and 
oFces of words as arranged and combined in sentences. 

The essential parts of every sentence are the subject, which is that 
of which something is affirmed ; and the predicate, which is that which 
contains the affirmation. 

The subject is either a noun or that which is the representative or 
equivalent of a noun ; the predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb 
in conjunction with some other part or parts of speech. All other 
words entering into a sentence, are to be regarded as mere adjuncts. 
The following sentences exhibit the subject and the predicate under 
several varieties of form : 

Subject. Predicate. 

God exists. 

Man is mortal. * 

To be, contents his natural desire. 

Throwing the stone was his crime. 

Sentences are either simple, that is, contain a single assertion 01 
proposition ; or compound, that is, contain two or more assertions 01 
propositions. Of the various parts of a sentenr^ whether principal 
or adjunct, we come now to speak more m detail; so as to show the 
relation, agreement, government and arrangement of words in con- 
struction. 

§ 120. THE ARTICLES. 

Rule. 

The article in German, whether definite or indefinite, is generally 
employed wherever the corresponding article would be used in 
English. 

* In the sentence God exists the verb exists is the predicate : affirming, as 
it does, existence of the Almighty. But in the sentence, man is mortal, mortal* 



syntax of the article. § 120. 413 

Observations* 

This rule is of course founded upon the presumption that the 
student is familiar with the usage of the English in respect to the 
article. In the specifications that follow, therefore, he is to look 
only for the points in which the German differs from the usage of 
our own language. 

(1) The Germans insert the definite article : 

(a) Before words of abstract or universal signification ; as, b c t 
SJlenfdb i)i fterbttdb, man (i. e. every man) is mortal; b a 3 ®clb ift btljn* 
bar, gold is ductile ; b a $ Seben ift tux$, life is short ; b i e £ua;enb 
fiifyvt jum ©lucre, virtue leads to happiness : 

(b) before the names of certain divisions or periods of time : as, 
ber (Scmttacj, Sunday; ber SJlontacj, Monday; ber ©ejemfcer, December 
ber Sluguft, August; ber €>ontmer, Summer: 

(c) before certain names {feminines) of countries ; as, bte Xuxhi f 
Turkey; bte @dn»et$, Switzerland; bte £ombarbei, Lombardy: 

(d) before the names of authors, when used to denote their works ; 
as, id) lefe ben Sejfing, I am reading Lessing: 

(e) before the proper names or titles of persons, when used in a 
way denoting familiarity or inferiority ; as, grujje b t e SJlarie, greet 
(or remember me to) Mary ; fage bent Sutler, bafi id) il)n $it fefyett 
toihtfcfye, tell Luther, that I wish to see him : also, when connected 
with attributive adjectives: as, bte fteine ©opfjte, little Sophia: 

(f ) before words (especially proper names of persons) whose cases 
are not made known either by a change of termination, or by the 

^isence of a preposition ; as, bct3 %tbm ber gtttften, the lite of 
rrinces; bte grew beS ©ocrateg, the wife of Socrates; ber- £ctcj ber 
dlatbe, the day of (the) vengeance : 

(g) before the names of ranks, bodies, or systems of doctrine : as, 
ba$ ^aviament, Parliament; bk Sftegterung, government; bte Wlonax* 
due, monarchy; b a 3 (Sfyrijlentfyum, Christianity : also in such phrases: 
as, in ber (Stabt, in town; in ber Jltrdbe, at church; bte nteijten 
SJlenfcfoen, most men. 

(h) before the words (signifying) half and both : as, bte fyctlbe 
(not fjjalbe bte) 3cu?t, half the number; bte Mben (not betben bie) 
©ruber, both the brothers : 

(i) before words denoting the limit, within which certain specified 
numbers or amounts are confined ; wherein in English, th* indefinite 
article would be used: as, jtoemtat b te SBcdit, twice a wp^: 

ity is what is affirmed of man ; and the verb (is) is ihe mere link mat <*c*»necta 
the subject and ih< predicate together. It is thence called the cop^a. & 158. 



A SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. § 121 

(2) Note, further, that the German differs from the English in 

omitting the definite article, — 

(a) before certain law appellatives, as: 23eflagter, (the) defendant; 
Mdger, (the) plaintiff; £typetfant, (the) appellant; (Supplicant, (the) 
petitioner : 

(b) before certain common expressions such as, in Befter Drbmtng, 
in (the) best order; UeBerBrtnger biefeS, (the) bearer of this; and cer- 
tain adjectives and participles treated as nouns; as, erfterer, (the) 
former ; te^terer, (the) latter ; Befagter, (the) before-said (person) : 

(c) before certain proper names of places: as, Dfttnbien, (the; 
East Indies ; SBefttnbten, (the) West Indies ; and before the names of 
the Cardinal points: as, Often, (the) East; SBeften, (the) West; (Siiben, 
(the) South ; 9lorben, (the) North : 

(d) before a past participle joined with a novi*i, which, in English, 
precedes the participle: as, ba6 tterlorene ^arables, (literally, the lost 
Paradise) Paradise Lost. 

(3) Note, again, that the Germans in using certain collective 
terms preceded by adjectives, employ the indefinite article where the 
English would use the definite : as, etn I)od)toeifet 9£ati), the (lit a) 
most learned Senate ; etne IcBltcfye Untoerftt&t, the (a) honorable Uni- 
versity. 

(4) In German, also, the indefinite article stands before (not after, 
as in English,) the words, such, half: thus, etn fctcfyer Sftcutn, (not 
foidjer etn SWcmn), such a man ; etn fyalbeS 3al)r (not tyaflies em Scujr), 
half a year. In questions, direct or indirect, like the following : (Sinen 
tote (cmcjen ©pajierritt fyat er gentacfyt, how long a ride has he taken; 
it must be noticed that the article stands before tote : thus, etnen tote 
langcn (a how long) and not, as in English, how long a. 

(5) The German differs again from the English in not using an 
article at all in the phrases answering to the English ; a few ; a thou- 
sand ; a hundred. 

§ 121. THE NOUN. 

Rule. 

A ncun or pronoun which is the subject of a sentence must be ii< 
ft e nominative case : as, 

£>er SRenfd) benft, ®ott lenft, man devises, God disposes. 
5Dte 93er$e bcnnent, the mountains thunder. 

Observations. 
(1) The subject or nominative in German, s seldom omitted, ex 



USE OF THE NOMINATIVE. § 122. % 128. 415 

«ept in the case of the pronouns agreeing with veibs in the second 
person (singular and plural) of the Imperative: as, 

£efe (bit), read ! @e()et unb faget ($t)x) ttjra, go and tell him. 
See, however, § 136. 2. 

§ 122. Rule. 

A noun or pronoun which is the predicate of a sentence, must be 
In the nominative case : as, 

(£r rear em grcger jlmttg, he was a great king. 

5Dtefer jtnabe ijt jtcmfmann gettorben, this boy is become a merchant. 

$l{eranber l)tep ber ©rope, Alexander was called the Great. 

Observations. 

(1) This rule applies, where the subject and the predicate are 
connected, as above, by such verbs as fern, to be ; toerben, to become ; 
^eif en. to be called ; Meiktt, to remain, &c. 

(2) So, also, the rule becomes applicable when any of those 
verbs which in the active govern two accusatives (§ 132. 2.), are em- 
ployed passively : as, (Siceia untrbe ber 33ater be$ 93aterlattbe3 aenannt, 
Cicero was called the father of his country ; (Sr tjl Slleranber getcmf-t 
toovben, he has been christened Alexander. From this remark, how- 
ever, must be excepted the verb listen: since it has no passive. 

§ 123. Rule. 

A noun used to limit * the application of another noun signifying 
a different thing, is put in the genitive ; a *, 

3)er 2cmf ber ©omte, the course of the sun. 
£)er ©sfyti meineS Sreimb.c$, the son of my friend. 
2>te (Srgtefjung ber jtmber, the education of the children. 
JDie 2BaI>X emeS greunbeg, the choice of a friend. 

Observations. 
(1) If, however, the limiting noun (unless restricted itself by 
an adjective or some other qualifying word) signify measure, num- 
ber, weight or Quantity, it is then put in the same case with that 
which it limits ; as, gftet ©lag SBein (not SBemeS), two glasses (of) 
wine ; fed) 3 Spfmtb %i)tt (not XljeeS), six pounds (of) tea : but (with 

* How the limitation is made, is easily seen: thus, ber Sanf ber Scmie, 
the course of the sun. Here we speak not of any course indefinitely, but 
of the sun's course definitely : the word ber <Souiie, is the genitive, limk 
in# be* Sauf, which is the governing word. 



416 SYNTAX OF THE NOUK § 123. 

a restrictive term), fed)S SPfunb b t c f e $ £I;jee$ ; jtoei ©lad b f e f e • 
3B«ne& 

(2) It should be observed that the two nouns under this Rule 
must be of different significations ; for two nouns standing for the 
same thing, would be in the same case, forming an instance of appo- 
sition. See § 133. (1). 

(3) The noun in the genitive, that is, the limiting noun, is com. 
monly said to be governed by the other one. This genitive is either 
subjective or objective ; subjective, when it denotes that which does 
something or has something : objective, when it denotes that which 
suffers something, or which is the object of what is expressed by the 
governing word. To illustrate this, we have only to take the ex- 
amples given above : ber Scinf ber (Sonne, the course of the sun ; bte 
(§r$ieljung ber $htber, the education of the children ; where, in the 
first example, the sun is represented as performing or having a 
course, and is consequently subjective ; and, in the second example, 
the children are represented as being the objects of education, and 
the word is consequently objective. This objective genitive, it should 
be added, occurs only after verbal nouns, and chiefly those ending 
in the suffixes er, which marks the doer, and it tig, which marks 
the doing of an action. 

(4) It seems hardly necessary to observe that under this rule 
come all words which perform the office of nouns ; as, pronouns, ad- 
jectives used substantively, &c. ; thus, bte ®nabe ber @rofien, the fa- 
vor of the great. 

(5) We say often in English, He is a friend to, or an enemy fa, 
or a nephew to any one ; where, were these phrases put into German, 
we might expect the dative to be used. But, in such cases, the Ger- 
man always employs the Genitive : thus, er iji em fyinb feineS Satera 
lanbc$, he is an enemy of his native country. 

(6) We say in English, the month of August, the city of Lon- 
don, and the like : where the common and the proper name of the 
same thing are connected by the preposition of. The Germans put 
the two nouns in apposition. See § 133. (2). 

(7) So, too, in English we say, the fifth of August ; but, in Ger- 
man, the numeral is put in direct agreement with the name of the 
month : as, ber fihtfte Slngnft, the fifth (of) August, or August fifth. 

(8) In place of the genitive, the preposition t> o n, followed by 
the dative, is, in the following instances, generally used : 

a. When succeeded by nouns signifying quality, rank, measure 
weight, age, distance and the like ; as, eta Wlamx xm tyoijem (gtmbd 



trsti Oir the Genitive. § 124. $ 125. 4 

a man of high standing ; eut ©d)tff son §t»et ^ltnbert £onnen, a ship of 
two hundred tons; em ©etmcfyt »en fimf $fnnb, a weight of five 
pounds ; em Tlaxm V)cn ad)t$ig Safjren, a man of eighty years ; erne 
Sfceife »on brei SJleilen, a journey of three miles; em (§ugldnbet ben 
©eburt, an Englishman by birthj &c. 

b. When followed by nouns denoting the material or substance 
of which any thing is made : as, ein ^Becfrer x>mx @ttt)er, a cup of sil- 
ver, i,e. a silver cup; eine ttljr Son ®olbe, a gold watch, &c. 

e. When followed by nouns whose cases are not indicated by 
the terminations of declension nor by the presence of the article : as^ 
ber @d)em bon 9£eblid)feit> the appearance of honesty ; tin 53aier ttoti 
fedbS Jlhtbern, a father of six children ; bte Jtimigm fcon (S'nglanb, the 1 
queen of England ; bte ©renjen joou gtcmfreiit, the boundaries of 
France ; ber 33 if d) of »on jtcnftcmj, the bishop of Constance 

d. When followed by a word indicating the uhole, of which the 
Word preceding expresses but a part : as, etner son me men 23efcmnieri, 
one of my acquaintances ; tt)eid)er sen fceiben ? which of the two ? 

§ 124. Rule, 

A noun limiting the application of an adjective, where in English 
the relation would be expressed by such words as of or from, is put 
in the genitive : as, bte meiften SBerlnfte finb ehteg (£tfa$e$ fdfytg, most 
losses are capable of reparation ; bte drbe tft Joott ber ©itte beg <§emt, 
the earth is full of the goodness of the Lord. 

Observations. 

(1) The adjectives comprehended under this rule are such as follow 

©pbutrfttg, in want ; needing. Seer, void. 

SBenoffytgt, needing; wanting. £o£, free; rid. 

&etou$t, conscious, SJtdcfctig; having; in possession* 

fSmgebenf, mindful. $Rukt, tired; weary. 

f5dr)tg, capable; susceptible. (featt, satiated ; weary, 

grelj, glad. <§>d)ulbtg, guilty ; indebted, 

©etoafyr, aware. £ljett!jcift, partaking, 

©etodrtig, waiting; in expecta- UeBetbrnfftg, tired; weary, 

tion. SBerbddbtig, suspicious, 

©ettrifj, sure; certain. SBerlnfttg, having lost; deprived <>!, 

®etocl)ttt, used to ; in the habit. $ctf, full. 

Stnnbtg, having a knowledge; ©etif), worth; worthy. 

skilled. SBurbtg, worthy. 

£ebig, empty; void. &uitt, rid; free from. 



18 



# 



418 



«5yn?ax of the N0tiisr< § 125. § 126. 



(2) After getter, getoofynt, log, nmbe, fatt, ttotl and foertf), the 
accusative is often used : as, et toarb fetnen ©ruber gnr>al}r, he was 
aware of (the presence of) his brother, i. e. he observed his brother* 

§ 125. Rule. 

A noun limiting the application of any of the verbs folio wing, is 
put in the genitive : 



Sid) ten, to mind, or regard* 
$3eburfen, to want. 
^Begefyren, to desire. 
93rcmcfoen, to use. 
Qhttbefyren, to need. 
^ntratl)en, to do without 
(£rmangeln, to want, or be without 
C5rtodfynen, to mention, 
©ebenfen, to think, or ponder, 
©enleften, to enjoy, 
©etoaljreu, to observe. 



barren, to wait 
Sad) en, to laugh. 
Spflegen, to foster* 
©dtjonen, to spare. 
©gotten, to mock. 
SOerfefylen, to miss, or fail* 
33ergeffen, to forget. 
SBafyren, to guard. 
2Ba()rneI)men, to observe. 
SBatten, to manage. 
SBarten, to attend to, or mind 



Observations. 

^Bebntfen, begefyren, braudien, enibeljren, ertodljnen, gentejjen, Jpftegen, 
[c&onen, serfefylen, oergeffen, toafyrnefymen, tt>a§ren and marten, take more 
frequently, in common conversation, the accusative. 9ld)ten, fyarrew 
md to ar ten are more commonly construed with a tt f, and la d)eri, 
gotten and ratten with u b e r , before an accusative, 

§ 126. Rule. 

The following reflexive verbs, take in addition to the pronouil 
peculiar to them, a word of limitation in the genitive : 



6td) 



anmaflen, to claim, 
anneljmen, to engage in, 
bebienen, to use. 
befletfjen, to attend to. 
be$etj3tgen, to apply to. 
begeben, to yield up; 
bemddUtgen, to acquire, 
bemetftern, to seize. 
befebeiben, to acquiesce in. 
beftnmm, to ponder. 
entdu§ern, to abstain. 



@td) entbloben, to dare, or be 
bold 

& enfbrecfren, to forbear. 

it entfyalten, to refrain. 

„ entfd)lagen, to get rid 

,> entftnnen, to recollect. 

„ etbanrten, to pity. 

tt etfrecfyen, to presume^ 

„ ertnnern, to rememl«r. 

„ erfii^nen, to ventur6 

n ertttetjten, to resists 



XSOt Of T&E GENITIVE. J 12^. 



fetd) freuett, to rejoice. 

„ getrojten, to hope for. 

v, tubmen, to boast 

w fdianten, to be ashamed 

■„ itberbebcrt, to be haughty. 

* unterfan$eit, to undertake 



(Sid) uniertombctt, to undertake, 

„ ttermeffen, to presume. 

„ fcerfefjett, to be aware- 

fr ttefyren, to resist. 

„ tteigern, to refuse. 

„ temitbent, to wonder. 



Observations. 

(1) The genitive is in like manner put after the following imper* 
ionals : 

I desire, or am pleased with. 
I pity, or compassionate. 
I repent, or regret. 
It is worth while. 



$0 geluftet mid), 
<£$ jammert mid), 
(§e xcmt mid), 
<$$ lofyrt fid), 



§ 127. Rule. 



The verbs following require after them a genitive denoting fe 
thing and an Accusative signifying a person. 



Untxv 61)nen, to wean. 
2eSfpvcd)en, to acquit 
2Ra(men, to remind. 
UebcrftU;ren, to convict, 
lleberfycben, to exempt 
ileberjeugen, to convince. 
93erftd)ern, to assure. 
SSevtroften, to amuse, or put 6# 
with hope. 
fEBitrbtgett, to deem worthy. 
3et(;cn, to accuse; to charge. 



Slnflagen, to accuse. 
SSelefyren, to inform, 
fcetauben, to rob. 
SBefdmlbtgen, to accuse, 
^ntbtnben, to liberate. 
(£ntblcj$en, to strip. 
ffinti)eben, to exempt 
(Snttabett, to disburden, 
fgnifletben, to undress. 
Untlaffen, to free from* 
drntfebtgen, to free from. 
tgntjVfcen, to displace. 

Examples. 

dx Ijat mid) memeS GMbeS beraubt, he has robbed me of my money. 
3)er S3ifd)of X;at ben $rebtger feineS $lmte# etttfe§t, the bishop ha« 
removed the preacher from his office. 

Observations. 

(1) The verbs above, when in the passive voice, take for theilr 
nominative the word denoting the person : the genitive of the thing 
remaining the same : as, er ift eme3 33erbted)enS angefiagt toorbea, h© 
has been accused of a crinm 



420 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. § 128. § l2'0, 

§ 128. Rule. 

Nouns denoting the time, place, manner, intent of cause of an act 
lion, are often put absolutely in the genitive and treated as adverbs ■ 

as, 

$5e$ 2$orgen$ gel)e id) crag, in the morning I go' out, 
Wlan fud)t tfjn alter Orten, they seek him everywhere. 
3d) Bin ££M((eu£ J^npge^en, I am willing to go there. 

Observations. 

(1) This adverbial use of the genitive is quite common in Ger* 
man. See § 101. In order* however, to express the particular 
point) or the duration of time* the accusative is generally employed, 
or a preposition with its proper ease ; as, 3d) toerbe nad)ften 9Jlonta$ 
m$ ber d>tabt -gel^n, I shall go out of town next monday. 

| 129. Rule. 

A noun or pronoun used to represent the object, in reference to 
Which an action is done or directed, is put in the dative : as* 
3d) banfe bir, I thank (or am thankful to) you. 
(Bx gefdtlt tiizkn £enten, he pleases many people. 
dx ift betn Xflbe ejttgangen, he has escaped from death- 

Observations. 

(1) The dative is the case employed to denote the person of tfi6 
thing, in relation to which the subject of the verb is represented as 
acting. Compared with the accusative, it is the ease of the remote 
object : the accusative being the ease of the immediate object. Thus* 
In the example, i(t) fcfyrtefr metnem ^Better emeu 33nef, I wrote (to) my 
father a letter, the immediate object is a letter ; while father, the per* 
son to whom I wrote, is the remote object. The number of verba 
thus taking the accusative with the dative, is quite large. 

(2) On the principle explained in the preceding observation, may 
be resolved such eases as the following : eS tyut tnir letb, it eauses 
me sorrow, or I am sorry ; e3 roirb mix im «f?er§en tod) tfytm, it will 
cause pain to me in the heart, (it will pain me to the heart,)&e. 

(3) A right regard to the observation made above* namely, that 
Lie dative merely marks that person or thing, in reference to which 
an action is performed, will serve, also, to explain all such examples 
as these : Sfynen hchmkt biefeS £)£fer mditg, to you (i. e. so far ss yoy 



rfiss m TtiE dative. § 180. $ 131. 421 

/ire concerned) this sacrifice means nothing; Me S^ranen, Me Ghtrem 
Strett gefioffeti, the tears v/hich have flowed in relation to (i. e.frorn) 
your dispute ; mir t&btete etn @d)uf bag $fevb, a shot killed a horse 
for m'e, i. e.- killed my horse ; fatte mir nicfot, Kleiner, fall not for me, 
little one. In such instances as the last two, the dative is often 
omitted in translating. 

(4) The Rule comprehends all such verbs as the following : cmf* 
t&crien, to answer ; banfen, to thank ; bienen, to serve ; broken, id 
threaten ; f el/fen, to fall short ; fucfyext, to curse ; folgen, to follow % 
frofmeit, to do homage ; gebiifyt en, to be due ; gefallen, to please ; g& 
^eren, to pertain to ; gefyof d)e«, to obey ; genftgen, to satisfy ; gerefs 
im\, to be adequate ; gleid)en, to resemble ; fyelfen, to help,- &c. 

(5) This Rule, also, comprehends all reflexive verbs that govern 
the dative: as, kt mafe mir fehien Xitel an, tt>efd)en I'd) nkfyf fyabe, I 
elaim to myself no title, which I have not; ; as, also,- all impersonate 
requiring the dative : as, eg beltebt mir, it pleases me, or 1 am pleased j 
eg mangelt mir, it is wanting to me, or I am wanting, &e. 

(6) The dative is, also, often used after passive verbs : as, t^neil 
foffrbe imberjkmben, it Was resisted to them, i. e. they were resisted ; 
'oon (§*eiftern tr>trb ber 2Beg bct#u befd)it|i, the way thereto is guarded 
by angels ; ifym tmrb gelolmt, (literally) it is rewarded to him, i. e. he 
is rewarded. 

| 130.- RULE. 

Many compound verbs* particularly those compounded With e i, 
» e r, e n f, a n, a b, a it f, b e i, it a d), & o s, $ it and to i b e r, require 
after them the dative ; as, 

3-d) fy&be iljm ©etb omgebaten, 1 have offered him money. 

§ 131. Rule. 

An adjective used to limit the application of a noun, where ni 
English the relation would be expressed by srfeh words as to or fafj 
governs the dative : as, 

@>et bemenr £eitn getren, "be faithful to your master. 

S)a-g SSeitet ijl un$ iii'd)t gikftig, the weather is not favorable to us 

Observations. 

(1) Under this Rule are embraced (among others) the following 
adjectives: dlmitcb, like; cmgemeffen, appropriate; cmgeneljm, agree* 
able; auftojjtg, offensive ; befannt, known ; befdueben, destined ; eigefy 
peculiar ; fven-tb, foreign ; geitt&f, according toy gem-e in, common i 



4&2 tSE t>f TBE AOC v cQATlV£. | 135. 

flctoaftfnt, competent; gn&btg, gracious; tyeftfant, healthful; treB 
agreeable ; nafye, near; uberCegen, superior; ttnllfommen, welcome 
ftnbvig, adverse ; bienftbat, serviceable ; geljorfam, obedient ; nu&lid), 
Useful. 

§ 132. Rule. 

A noun or pronoun which is the immediate object of an active 
transitive verb, is put in the accusative : 

£8ir Iteben unfere greunbe, We love our friends. 

2)er |mnb beroaou la$ <$cm$, the dog guards the house. 

Observations. 

(1) The accusative, as before said, being the case of the diredt 
w immediate object (§129. 1.) is used with all verbs, whatever their 
classification in other respects, that have a transitive signification* 
Accordingly, under this rule come all those impersonal and reflexive 
verbs that take after them the accusative ; all those verbs having a 
jausative signification, as, fatten, to fell, i. e. to cause to fall ; as 
also nearly all verbs compounded with the prefix be.* 

(2) Sefyren, to teach ; nennen, to name ; fyeif en, to call ; fdielten, 
to reproach (with vile names) ; tdufcit, to baptise (christen) ; take 
after them two accusatives : as, er lefjrt mid) tie beuifdie &$xa&)e, he 
teaches me the German language ; er nemtt ifyn femen better, he calls 
nim his deliverer. See Lesson LIII. 

(3) The accusative is used with such terms as to i e g e ft, to 
Weigh ; I o ft e n, to cost ; g e 1 1 e n, to pass for ; to e 1 1 I), worth ; 
f &) to e r, heavy ; r e t d), rich ; I a n g, long ; tt) e i t, wide ; to mark 
definitely the measure or distance f indicated by these words ; as, 
fcicfer (&to& ift etnen %u$ lang, this stick is a foot long ; er ift t>tet 
WonaU ait, he is four months old. 

(4) As words expressing time indefinitely are put in the genitive 
(§ 128. 1.), so those denoting a particular point, or duration of time, 
are put in the accusative ; as, id) toaxtcU hen jtoeiten £ag, I waited 
two days. 

(.0) A substantive construed with a participle, is sometimes put 
Absolutely in the accusative ; as, btefen ttmficmb titiSgenommen, ftnb? 
tdb idU$ tedrt, this circumstance excepted, I find all right. 

* The exceptions are begegitfn, bebtiijen, befietjcu, bevuijeu, bebarren and 
b'cwticbfeit. 

t In the ea: ier German, these words of measure or distance were pas 
\r> the srenitiv«» as* etu«r S^ftnite wmt-, a span wide. 



apposition. § 133. § 134. 428 

§ 133. Rule. 

A noun or pronoun used merely to explain or specify that which 
is signified by a preceding noun or pronoun, must be in the same 
lase : as, 

(Stcero, em greyer Sfiebnet, Cicero, a great orator. 

3l)tn, meinem 3Bo(;(t()dter, to him, my benefactor. 

£>er 9iatf) metiteS 33rubet8, beS SftecfytSgelefyrteu, the advice of my 
brother, the lawyer. 

Observations. 

(1) The explanatory noun is said to be in apposition with that 
which it explains . the latter being called the principal term. Be- 
tween these two, that is, between the principal and the explanatory 
term, there often intervenes some connective particle. Thus, er fyafc 
ftcb aU ©efeggcBer fcerbtettt gemadbt, he, as a lawgiver, has rendered 
himself meritorious ; metn Dladibar, ndmltcb bet Matter, my neighbor^ 
namely, the farmer. This latter mode of specifying (that is, with 
the word ncimltcb), is far more common in German than in English. 

(2) The proper names of months, countries, towns, and the like 
appellatives are put in apposition with their common names ; where^ 
in English, the two words stand connected, for the most part, by the 
preposition of; as, ber Sftenat 5lnintft, the month (of) August ; bte 
<&tctit Sonbort, the city (of) London; bte Utifoerjit&i £)x*forb, the uni* 
versity (of) Oxford. 

§ 134. THE PRONOUNS. 

Rule. 

A pronoun must agree with the noun or pronoun which it reprg^ 
§ents, in person, number and gender : as, 

£>er Sftcmn, luefdber tt>etfe [ft, the man who is wise. 
£Dte Srcm, tvetdbc fCet^tg i% the woman who is diligent. 
S)a£ jltttb, toeId)e^ tieiti tft, the child that is small, 

Observations. 
(1) The neuter pronoun, e $ , is used in a general and indefinite 
way to represent words of all gender and numbers : as, eS i|l hex 
ffflaxin, it is the man ; eg ijt bte gran, it is the woman ; e£ ijl ha$ jthtb, 
it is the child; e3 ftitb bte Scanner, they are the men, &c. In lik& 
manner, also, often are used, the pronouns ba^ (that); b t e 8, (this) 
lt)a^ (what) ; as also the neuter adjective a ( 1 e 8, (all) ; as, bal 
fmb meme tfli&tet, th* se are my judges. 



424 SYNTAX OF THE At)JECtiVE. § 13§* 

(2) When the antecedent is a personal appellation formed by diiU 
of the diminutive (neuter) terminations, fyzn and letn, the pro- 
noun instead of being in the neuter, takes generally the gendei 
natural to the person represented: as, too-tft it)x <§>ofynd)en ? 3ft el 
(not eg) tm ©arteit ? Where is your little son ? Is 7ie in the garden 1 
The same remark applies to SBetf) (woman) and Srcwenjtmmet (lady)* 
When, however, a child or servant is referred to, the neuter is 
often employed. 

(3) A collective noun may in German, as in English, be repre* 
sented by a pronoun in the plural number: as, hk (SetjUidbfeii to at 
fur H)te Sfecfyte fe(;r BefovQt, the clergy were very anxious about their 
rights, 

(4) The relative in German can never, as in English, be sup- 
pressed:* thus, in Engjish, we say, the letter (which) you wrote; but 
in German, it must be, bet SSrief, toetcfyett bit fcfyrfebeji 

(5) The neuter pronoun e $ , at the beginning of a sentence, in 
often merely expletive* and answers to the English Word "there" in 
the like situation : as* eg Hoar ntemcmb Ijter, there was no one here ; 
v$ fouimeit Qzute, there are people coming* . 

(6) The English forms, he is a friend of mine; it is a stable q/ 
ow?*s, &c.$ can not be literally rendered into German; for there wfe 
mast say, er ift mem grennb, he is my friend; or, er ift enter metnei 
grHinfce, he is one of my friends, &c. See L. 28; 3; 

(7) The definite article in German is often used, where in Eng- 
(ish a possessive pronoun is required: as, e* toinfte ifym nut ^x <§anb> 
lie beckoned to him with his (the) hand. 

(8) The datives of the personal pronouns are often in familiar 
style employed in a manner merely expletive: as, id) lobe mtr bet* 
Styetnwem, I like Rhenish wine for me> i. e. I prefer Rhenish wine 
Bee § 129. 3. 

§ 135. THE ADJECTIVES. 

Rule. 
Adjectives, when they precede their nouns (expressed or undo* 
Stood), agre^ with them in gender, nurriber and case ; as, 
Stefe fcMne Same, this handsome lady. 
<£iu gfttiger unb gerecbtet better, a good and just father. 
Sen jttrtlften bfefeg SWonatS, the twelfth (<%) of this month, &t. 
£ter ift eht SDligoeritanb, — em (janbgreifliefcer, here is a misundef* 
standing, — a palpable (one). 



* T\ e antecedent is sometimes omitted, and sometimes follows the relative : as, 7> ? fe »int«ttj ;*n«t* 
$?* i.ufct, (cAcwe) that think thus, do not know him ' ' 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 135. § 136. 425 

Observations. 

(j) This Rule of course has reference to those adjectives which 
aie usel attributively; for predicative adjectives it will be remem- 
bered, are not declined, For the several circumstances under which 
adjectives are varied in declension, consult § 27. § S8. 5 &c. 

(2) This Rule applies equally to adjectives of all degrees of 
comparison ; as, Beffere £>Mier, better books ; bev befte SBefcl, the 
best wine ; be3 beften SfidneS, of the best wine, &c. So, too, it ap- 
plies equally to all classes of adjectives; as, adjective pronouns, 
numerals and participles. 

(3) The word "one" which, in English, so often supplies the place 
of a preceding noun after an adjective, cannot be translated literally 
into German : its office being rendered needless in the latter tongue 
by the terminations of declension. See last example under the Rule 

(4) So, also, the English "oneV is the proper equivalent of the 
German f e i n, in such eases as the following : gibt e£ ettt)ci$ (SblereS, 
al3 fetnen Setnben ^u ttergeben ? is any thing more noble than to for- 
give one's enemies ? 

(5) When the same adjective is made to refer to several singula* 
nouns differing in gender, it must be repeated with each and varied 
m form accordingly ; as, em gelefytier €>o!ut imb erne geM)rte £od)ter, 
a learned son and a learned daughter. The adjectives are, also, often 
repeated, though the nouns be all of the same gender. 

§ 136. THE VERBS. 

Rule. 

A verb agrees with its subject or nominative in number and per- 
son; as, 

Seber 9lngenbHc£ tft fcfibar, every moment is precious. 
$)te 33dnme btnfyen tin Stirling, the trees bloom in spring. 

Observations. 

(1) When the subject is the pronoun c $, b a 6 or b t e $, used in- 
definitely (See § 134. 1.), the predicate, if a noun, determines the 
numbei and person of the verb; as", c$ ftnb bk griid)ie SfyreS £()nn& 
these are the fruits of your actions. 

(2) In the second person (singular and plural) of the Imperative 
mood, the pronoun which forms the subject is commonly omitted ; 
js, gefjet Bin nub fagei Soljamtt tineber, tocuS %$x feljet nnb fycret, go and 

tell Jc hn what ye see and hear. 

(3) V 7 hen the verb has two or more singular subjects connected 



426 STNTAX OF THE VERB. § 137. 

by unb, 4 t is generally put in the plural; as, «§aj$ it nb (ftferfudtt 
jtnb fyefti^e Sdbertfchafteu, hatred and jealousy are violent passions. 

(4) When the subject is a collective noun, that is, one conveying 
the idea of many individuals taken together as unity, the verb must 
(generally) be in + he singular; as, ba$ ertglifdie SBolf §at grope 
gteifyeit, the Englisn people have (has) great liberty. In a few cases 
only, as, em ^aar, a pair ; erne Sfte'nge, a number ; em 2)nj$enb, a 
dozen, the verb stands in the plural. 

(5) When a verb has several subjects, and they are of different 
persons, the verb agrees with the first rather than the second, and 
the second rather than the third ; as, bit, beat SSrubet unb id) tooften 
fjpajteren 9 el) en, thou, thy brother and I will go take a walk ; bu unb 
bent 23ruber ttermoget oiel, you and your brother avail much. 

§ 137. USE OF THE TENSES. 

Rule. 
The Present tense properly expresses what exists or is taking place 
at the time being ; as, bte ft>al;re £apfet£eit Befdjufct ben <Sd)n)ad)ejt, 
true valor protects the weak, 

Observations. 

(1) The Present in German, as in other languages, is often, in 
lively narrative, employed in place of the Imperfect ; as, 

2)ie (Sonne gefyt (for ging) wrier, ba fte^t (for ftanb) er am £!)ot, n., 
the sun goes down, while he stands at the door, &c. 

(2) The Present is not unfrequently used for the Future, when 
the true time is sufficiently clear from the context ; or when, for 
the sake of emphasis, a future event is regarded and treated as al- 
ready certain ; as, 

•3d) reife morgen aB, I start (i. e. will start) to morrow. 

£Ber toetfj, ft>er morgen itber nng befte£)tt, who knows who commands 

(i. e, will command) us to-morrow ? 
33alb fet)en (Sie mid) nneber, soon you (will) see me again. 
SMeS ©dblofi erfteigen tt>ir in biefer 9lad)i, this castle scale we (i. e, 

ivill we scale) this very night. 

(3) It should be noted that the Present is, moreover, the propel 
tense for the expression of general or universal truths or proposi- 
tions ; as, bte QSogel fiiegen in bcr Suft, birds fly in the air. 

(4) In English we have several forms of the Present tense ; as, 
/ praise, I do praise or I am praising. In German there is but 
one form (id) lobe) for the expression of these several shades of 
{fieaning. 



USE 07 THE TENSES. § 188. § 139. 427 

(5) The Present in connection with the adverb f d) o n (already) 
often supplies the place of a Perfect; as, totr tuofjnen fd)on fteben 
Scifjve fytet, already dwell we here (i. e. have we dwelt) seven years. 

(6) ]a English, we say often, "I do walk, I did walk," and the 
.ike : where the verb do (Present and Imperfect) is employed as an 
auxiliary. This cannot properly be done with the corresponding 
\erb (t()un r to do) in German. 

§ 138. Rule. 

The Imperfect tense is used to express what existed, or was taking 
place at some past time indicated by the context : as, id) fcfyrtefc an 
<Ste, al$ i<i) Styren 93rtef erl)telt, I was writing to you, when I received 
your letter. 

Observations. 

(1) The Imperfect is the historical tense of the Germans. Its 
proper office is to mark what is incomplete, or going on, while some- 
thing else is going on. It is the tense adopted by the narrator, who 
speaks as an eye-witness; though it may be used by such as have rot 
been eye-witnesses of the events narrated : provided the statement 
be introduced or accompanied by such expressions as, he said (fcigte 
er), it is said, or they say (facjt man). When the speaker has not been 
an eye-witness, the Perfect should be used. 

(2) From the tfse of the Imperfect in expressing the continuance 
of a thing i. e. what was going on at a given time, comes the kindred 
power which it has, of expressing repeated or customary action : as, 
er pflegie ju fagen, he used to say, i. e. was in the habit of saying. 

(3) The Imperfect in German, like the Present, has but one form; 
which, according to circumstances, is to be rendered by any one of 
the three English forms of that tense. 3d) I o B t e, therefore, is either 
1 praised, did praise, or was praising, 

§ 139. Rule. 

The Perfect tense is that which represents the being, action 01 
passion, as past and complete at the time being : as, bit ©dhiffe ftnb 
ungefommen, the ships have arrived ; er ift fcovige 2$od)e gejtovkn, he 
died last week. 

Observations. 

Ol The German Perfect, as a general thing, corresponds closely 
to o^r Imperfect, wnen used as an aorist; that is, when used to ex- 
press an event simply and absolutely, and without regard to othei 
events or circumstances. Hence often it happens, that where in Eng- 



428 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 140. § 141. § 142. 

lish we uae the Imperfect, the Germans employ their Perfect: thus* 
id) tjabz beaten 33ntber geftetn gefe(;en, aber md)t gefprccfyen, I saw your 
brother yesterday, but did not speak to him. 

(2) The auxiliary participle (toorben) in the perfect passive, ia 
sometimes omitted. (See § 84. 2.) 

(3) We may remark here also, that, though in English we have 
a double form for the Perfect, (thus, I have written and I have been 
writing) th^ Germans have but the one. By which of the English 
forms, therefore, the German Perfect is, in any given case, to be ren 
dered, must be determined by the context. 

§ 140. Rule. 

The Pluperfect tense is used to express what had taken place at 
some past time denoted by the context : as, 

9lad)bem bte (Sonne nntergegangen teat, gtng er ireg, after the sun had 

gone down,* he went off. 
©r r)atte ttdfytenb nnferer Unterrebnng gefd)(afen, he had slept during 

our conversation. 

§ 141. Rule. 

The ^rsZ Future tense is employed merely to express what shall 01 
will take place hereafter ; while the second Future is used to denote 
what shall have occurred at some future period. 
Observations. 

(1) The Future tenses are used as in English, and also to indi- 
cate a probability, in which case they are translated by other tenses 
m connection with an appropriate adverb ; as, (£3 ttnrb 3fyr 23 ruber 
fein, it is probably your brother. 

(2) When a future action is represented, or is mentioned, as a 
thing necessary to be done, as in the English phrases, / am to go, 
he is to have and the like, the German employs a distinct verb ex- 
pressive of obligation or necessity : as, id) foil eg v aben, I am {shall 
be obliged) to have it. Grv foil fyrecfyen, &c. 

§ 142. Rule. 

The Indicative mood is used in affirming or denying that which is 
conceived to be certain or undoubted ; as, 

(Bx ttutb morgen ptMfommen, he will return to-mornrv. 

Observations. 
(1) Since the proper office of the Indicative is to express reality^ 
it is employed in all absolute or independent sentences. Even in 



USE OF THE MOODS. § 143. 429 

conditional sentences, moreover, it is used, if the condition is as* 

feiuned as a fact ; as, fetji bit retd), fo gift oiel, art thou rich (i. e. ij 
biou art rich), give much. 

(2) Sometimes the Indicative is employed instead of the Impera- 
tive, where, that which is enjoined, is treated as something already 
in progress ; as, bu trtttft ocr, thou steppest forward, i. e. step 
(tfion) forward. This is regarded as the strongest form of command 

§ 143. Rule* 

The Subjunctive mood is used when that which is expressed by 
the verb, is conceived to be uncertain, though possible ; as, 
3d) fyabe gefyctt, bap er bte getmmfdbte &dk er v alten f)abe, I have 

heard, that he has obtained the desired situation. 
3d) fc)ihtfd)e, bap er gtucflid) tterbe, I wish that he may become happy 

Observations. 

(1) The Subjunctive, from its very nature, stands chiefly in de 
pendent, clauses ; and, in these appears, under various circumstances. 
Thus, it is employed: 

(2) When the design of the speaker is merely to repeat or quote 
a statement, without vouching for its accuracy ; as, er fagt, ber 93 awn 
fciitfjc, he says, that the tree blossoms ; er melbete tntr, bap er fid) oer* 
X;eiratftet §abe, he told me, that he had been married. When, on the 
contrary, the design of the speaker is to set forth the thing repeated 
or quoted, as something real and undoubted, the Indicative must be 
used ; as, er n)ltt eg md)t gtanBen, bap fem 33ruber geftorben tft, he will 
not believe, that his brother is dead. 

(3) In like manner, the Subjunctive is used in subordinate clauses, 
after such verbs as § off en,, to hope ; furcfoten, to fear ; towtfefyen, to 
wish; tootten, to desire; Bitten, to ask; ratljen, to advise; tterbteten, 
to forbid ; etmatynen, to exhort ; since the event, in such cases, may 
be supposed to be always more or less uncertain ; as, er furd)tet, bap 
er (Strafe er^alte, he is afraid, that he may be punished. 

(4) So, also, the Subjunctive is employed in clauses which indi- 
cate an end, object, wish or result ; and which are introduced by bap, 
cmf bap, bamit, or by a relative ; as, fprtd) lant, banut er bid) &er|M;e, 
speak loud, that he may understand you ; er fucbt Stvbett, freidie itjm 
Q3rob gebe, he seeks work, which may give him bread. 

(5) In cases such as those explained in the observations above, 
the student must note, that that tense of the Subjunctive is employed, 
which corresponds with the one used by the subject of the depen- 
dent clause, at the time when he said or did that which is affirme-l qa 



-430 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 144. 

him : as, er fctgte, er Ijafce bieSmat feme 3ett, he said, that he had (lit 
terally has) no time at present ; er I;atte mix gefagt, ba$ er e$ getljati 
fcabe, he had told me, that he had done it. 

(6) The Subjunctive appears, also, in asking indirect question? ; 
as, id) fvagte iijn, oh er mix b&$ ®elb geoen fonne, I asked him, whether 
he could give me the money. When the question is made directly, 
of course the Indicative is used. 

(7) The Subjunctive is sometimes employed as a sort of softened 
Imperative, to express a wish or permission ; as, gebe e$ ber §tmme(, 
may heaven grant it! btefer 23cutm trage nte toieber ftxufyt, let this (or 
may this) tree never again bear fruit ! er fyut tociS er toil!, let him do 
what he will ! 

§ 144. Rule. 

The Conditional mood is used, where a condition is supposed* 
which may or may not be conceived to be possible ; as, 

2B&re id) reid), fo ttmrbe id) ifjm feine 33itte md)t abgefd)lageti Ijafcen, 
were I rich, I would not have refused his request. 

9Betm er nod) kbk, fo toiirbe er 50 Sctljre alt fern, if he yet lived, he 
would be fifty years old. 

Observations. 

(1) Besides the two tenses ranged in the paradigms (See p. 328 
and following) under the head of the Conditional, it must be observ- 
ed that the Imperfect and the Pluperfect of the Subjunctive are 
equally often employed in expressing conditional propositions. In 
point of time, indeed, there is no difference between the Imperfect 
of the Subjunctive and the fir*£ Conditional, and between the Plu- 
perfect of the Subjunctive and the second Conditional. Ordinarily, 
where both forms are employed in the same sentence, the Subjunc- 
tive will be found in the clause expressing the condition, while the 
form peculiar to the Conditional appears in the other ; as, id) toitrbe 
e$ tfyim, toenn e£ tnoglid) toare, I would do it, if it were possible ; toemt 
er l)ter totire, ftmrbe er bid) befucbt fyciben, if he were here, he would 
have visited you. 

(2) When the condition is assumed and treated as a fa /, it is 
expressed, not by the Conditional, but by the Indicative ; as, bift bit 
retch, fo giefc tfiet, art* thou (i. e. if thou art) rich, then give much. 

(3) Sometimes the \erb expressing the condition is merely un- 
derstood; as, id) t)dtte bte (Sadie anbcrg gemacbt; I should have done 
it otherwise (if it had been committed to me) ; in feiner &aae frafte id) 



USE OF THE CONDITIONAL AND IMPERATIVE, § 115. 4ol 

10 uicr-t gettyan, (if I had been) in his situation, I would not hava 
do no it. 

(4) Sometimes, in the way of exclamation, the condition is ex- 
pressed, while that which depends upon it is omitted : in which case 
the whole expression being of the nature of a wish or petition, is 
often introduced (in translation) by u O, " " I wish that, " and the 
like : as. hatxt id) bed) biefen Wlatm me gcfei;en ! as, O, that I had never 
seen this man! literally, had I never seen this man (how happy 1 
should be) ! recite er bed) am Sebert ! O, that he were yet alive ! 

(5) The Conditional is frequently employed in questions designed 
to elicit a negative answer : as, ft are eg bentt toafyx ? could it be true 1 
(it could not be true ;) bit todrcji \o falfd) gettefen ? would you have 
been so faithless 1 (you would not,) 

(6) Not unfrequently the Conditional of the auxiliaries mo gen, 
blirfen, fotten, fennen and trotfen, is employed to render an expres- 
sion less positive, or to give it an ah' of diffidence ; as, td) tocttte, €>ie 
begleiteten micb, I could wish (instead of, I wish) you would accom- 
pany me ; Ut inddtfe fdnret $u uberreben fein, I should be hard to be 
persuaded, or, it would be difficult to persuade me ; biirfte id) <S>te urn 
ba$ 2Jle(fer Bitten ? might I (be permitted to) ask you for the knife 1 

§ 145. Rule. 

The Imperative mood is used in expressing a command, entreat? 
or exhortation ; as, 

Surdbte &ott nub ef)re ben Jlonig, fear God and honor the king. 

Observations. 

(1) The Imperative is sometimes employed to indicate a condi- 
tion, on which something is declared to depend ; as, fei jiel$ unb ba 
tmrft toemg 91 di rung fmbett, be haughty (i.e. if you be haughty) and 
you will find little regard. 

(2) In order to make a request in a manner modest and polite, 
instead of the Imperative, the Subjunctive of mogen and toollen is 
often employed ; as, bu rcctlejt fetner me setgeffen, pray, never forget 
him : megen <&k metnet gebenfen, may you remember, or 'emember 
me, I pray. To express a decided command, however, the Indicative 
is frequently used. See § 142. 2. 

(3) Sometimes, by a peculiar ellipsis, the past Particip.e is em- 
ployed in place of the Imperative ; as, utr nidbi lang gefragt ! do not 
ask long ! where the full phrase would be, e3 toerbe nut nidbt lang gc* 
fragr, let it not long l>e asked ! &n bte Arbeit gegangen let ;heHi go 
lo tlieir worK ! 



432 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 146. 

§ 146. Rule. 

The Infinitive mood either with or without the particle ju {to) 
preceding, is used to represent the being, action or passion, in a 
wanner unlimited : as, 

(EtcrBen ift 9lidht$, bod) Uhm unb ntdbt fer/en, bcu3 ift em Ungtfixf, 
to die is nothing, yet to live and not to see, that is a misfor- 
tune indeed. 
£>er SBunfd) gelofct jit toerben, the wish to be praised. 

Observations. 

(1) The Infinitive without $u, {to) appears, 

a. When, as a verbal substantive (§ 146. 3.), it is made either 
the subject or the object of a verb: as, ©efeen ift feltger aU Dleljmen, 
to give is more blessed than to receive; bctS nennt er arbetten, that 
lie calls working. 

b. When it stands alone, as in a dictionary : as, foktt, to praise ' 
licfeen, to love. 

c. After the verbs 

fyetjjen, to bid: as, id) fyiefj tfyn gd)en, I bade him go. 
fyelfett, to help : as, er r)tfft mir fdiretfcen, he helps me to write. 
lefyren, * to teach : as, er lefyvt ba£ Jttnb lefen, he teaches the child tc 

read. 
ievnen, * to learn : as, ttir letnen tcmjen, we learn to dance, 
fpvert, to hear: as, id) r)ore fie ftngen, I hear them sing, 
fe^eu, to see : as, tdb fefye tt)it fcmmen, I see him come, 
fufylen, to feel : as, id) fuljle bert tyuU fdrlagen, I feel his pulse beat, 
ftnben, to find: as, id) fcmb ba$ 33ud) aitf bem £ifd)e ftegett, I found 

the book lying on the table^ 

d: After the auxiliaries of mood, tnogen, fomten, (affen, bittfen, fcttert, 
wolleu and tnitffen, and after tterbeit, when employed as an auxiliary 
in forming the future tense. 

e. After the verbs following, in certain phrases, 
ftletben, to remain: as, er Hetbt ft|en, he continues sitting, 

fasten, to go in a carriage : as, i^ fctfjre fpajteren, I ride out for an 

airing. 

* Sefoven and lernen form exceptions to the observation in the text : admit- 
ting, as they do sometimes, the particle gu between them and an Infinitive 
fjuccecdinff "The student will note, also, that the Infinitive after all these verbs, 
T £, in English, often best rendered by a participle ■ as, er fiifylle fern (Slut r-abveu, 
im felt his bloor) hoilm% 



USE OF THE INFINITIVE. § 146. 



433 



geljen, 


to go or walk 
to have : 


cgen, 


to lay : 


madjen, 


* to make : 


nennen, 
retten, 


to name : 
to ride : 



ilmn, * to do : 



as, er gel)i fcettctn, he goes begging, 
as, er tyat gut reben, he has easy talking, 
i. e. it is easy for him to talk, 
as, id) lege mid) [deafen, I lay myself down 

to sleep. 
as, er mad)te mid) lad)en, he made me 

laugh. 
ba$ nenne id) fptelen, that I call playing. 
as, i^j rette fya$teren, I ride out for exer- 
cise, 
as, er ifyut md)t3 aU fdjelten, he does 
nothing but scold. 

(2) The Infinitive with $u is employed : 

a. After nouns and adjectives, which, in English, are followed either 
by the preposition to with the Infinitive or by of with a participle : 
as, id) war fvcl) i"l)n $u fefyen, I was glad to see him ; €>te fyciben Shift §u 
fyiclen, you have a desire to play; id) blnnutbee£ ju fyoreit, I am tired 
of hearing it : 

b. After verbs, to express the end or object of their action : as, 
id) lomme mit 3C)iien $u fpvecben, I come to (i. e. in order to) speak 
with you : in which case also, the particle nm often comes before 
$u, to render the expression more forcible : as, liebet tie £ngenb, urn 
glMltd) $u fein, love virtue, in order (urn) to be happy. 

c. After the verbs following and others of like import : 



5lnfangen, to begin. 

Slufijoren, to cease. 

33efer)len, to command. 

#3itien, to beg. 

(Srtoarten, to expect. 

«&offen, to hope. 

gixtditen, to fear. 

$)rcl)en, to threaten. 

<Sidb frenen, to rejoice. 

Std) fdb&men, to be ashamed. 

@td) tubmen, to boast. 



3ogern, to delay. 
@en)ot)nen, to accustom. 
3)tenen, to serve. 
<§inreid)en, to suffice. 
^Barnen, to warn. 
SBeigem, to refuse. 
(Menneu, f to acknowledge. 
^Befennen, f to confess. 
<&d)ehten, to appear. 
28ihxfd)en, to wish. 
SSertangen, to desire. 



* Sftacben however, cannot, as in English, be used to signify to make or 
cause by force : thus, to translate the English phrase, make him go out, the 
Germans say, lajj (not ma$e) ibn binauSgeben. The Infinitive without §U 
comes after tljun, only when Utd)t6 att precedes, in the example above. 

t ©vfemten and Befennen are construed mainly with the preterite of the In- 
finitive : as, ev uhmit, ftc^ gcirrt $u tyaben, he acknowledges that he has been 
in error. 



19 



434 ststtax of the participle. $ 147. 

Sereuen, to regret. Srlcmben, to permit 

fPflegett, to be wont. ©eftatten, to allow. 

%cxt]at)un f to proceed. SSerbtenen, to deserve, 

Uurerlaffen, to neglect. SBageit, to venture* 

#aben, to have. Stiffen, to know. 

©efn, to be. $ht$en, to be of use. 

£elfen, to help. grommeii, to avail. 
£8etmeiben, to avoid. 

d. After the prepositions cfyne (without) and ftatt or anfrati (w* 
©•tead q/*) : as, ofyue ein SBort $u fagen, without saying a word; anftati 
£U fd}rclbcn, instead of writing. 

(3) The Infinitive in German, as intimated before, often performs 
the office of a verbal Substantive. It is then commonly preceded by 
the neuter of the article, and has all the various cases: as, ba$ Cugen 
fcfyabet bem Sttgner am metfrcn, lying injures the liar most; ten Vm be* 
@eljen$ tniibe, I am weary of walking; jum-Sftcifen bifi bu nid)t gefd)icft. 
you are not fit for journeying. 

(4) The Infinitive active, in German, after certain verbs, as, fein, 
lajfen, tterbieten, bcfefylen, &c. is not unfrequently employed passively : 
thus, lajj ifyu rufen, which (literally) means, let him call, may, also, 
signify, let him he called; e3 i)t feme 3ett §u verlteren, there is no time 
to lose, or to be lost. 

(5) The Germans often employ the Indicative or Subjunctive, 
preceded by bag, where, in English, the Infinitive, preceded by to, is 
used : as, id) toeifj, bag er bet* Tlam i% I know him to be (literally, 3 
know that he is) the man. 

(6) The Infinitive, in English, preceded by the words how, where, 
what, when, and the like, after such verbs as, tell, know, say and teach, 
cannot be rendered literally into German : the Germans, in such 
cases, always using the Indicative or Subjunctive of such verbs as 
follen, nutffen, fonnen : as, id) tr>cifj, toie id) eg tljun mug, I know how 
to do it, or (literally) I know how I must do it ; leljren (Sie midb, xcab 
id) fagen foil, teach me what to say. For the use of the Infinitive of 
mogen, toollen, follen, &c, in place of the past Participle See § 74. 3. 

§ 147. THE PARTICIPLES. 

(1) The Participles, in German, are varied by cases : following 
the same rules of inflection as the adjectives. Having the nature of 
adjectives, the Present in a few, and the Preterite in many instances, 
readily admit the degrees of comparison. 

(2) The use of the Participle, as such, however, in German, is 



USE OF THE PARTICIPLES. § 148. 435 

far more restricted than in English. For, in English, it is commonly 
used to form a distinct clause of a sentence ; and is thus made to 
indicate the time, cause or means of effecting that which is expressed 
in the main clause : thus, we say : Walking (that is, by or when 
walking) uprightly, we walk surely. This mode of expression can 
rarely, if ever, be adopted in German ; into which language, if we 
desire to translate the above sentence, we must say : toenn ttnr cmf* 
rfdrtig rocmbein, fo ttcmbelu toil ftci)et, that is, when we walk uprightly, 
we walk surely. 

(3) So, too, we say in English : Having given him the money, he 
went away ; but, since there is nothing in German to correspond to 
this English compound Participle, it would be a gross error to at 
tempt to render the sentence literally, Resort must be had, as in the 
other case, to a different structure : thus, aU er iljm ba$ ®efb gegeben 
t;atte, cjtng er toeg, that is, after or when he had given him the money, 
he went away. In this way must all similar cases be managed : we 
must employ a verb in each clause and connect the two together by 
means of suitable conjunctions; such as, iuetl, ttenn, al$, ta and 
tnbem. 

§ 148. Rule. 

The Present Participle, like an attributive adjective, agrees with 
its noun in gender, number and case ; and may, also, govern the 
same case as the verb whence it is derived: as, 

2)er lacnenbe grufyliug, the smiling spring. 

JtuljlenbeS ©etranfe, cooling drink. 

3)te atfeg belebenbe (Sonne, the all animating sun, i. e. the sun that 
animates all. 

Observations. 

(1) This Participle is seldom, if ever, otherwise employed with a 
noun than in an attributive sense. Its predicative use is found al 
most altogether in those words, that have so fai lost character a 
Participles, as to be commonly recognized only as adjectives : as, 

0tet$enb, charming. £>rMeub, oppressive. 

jtt&nfeiib, mortifying. gliejjenb, flowing. 

(5'mnefymenb, captivating. <§mretj3enb, overpowering. 

SDrtncjenb, pressing. 

Such a combination, therefore, as, I am reading, we are walking 
and the like, which is so common in English, is wholly inadmissible 
in German ; save in the instance of those Participles that have lost, 



436 SYNTAX OF THE P kRTICIPLES. § 149. 

as just said, their true participial character : as, bit Sftotl) tjt bru7(jen&, 
the necessity is pressing. 

(2) The Present Participle, in connection with the article, ia 
often used substantively : the noun being understood ; as, bev 2e* 
fenbe, the reader, (literally) the (one) reading ; tie (Stetbettbe, the 
dying (female). 

(3) This Participle, however, cannot in German, as in English, 
be, by means of an article, turned into an abstract verbal noun. But 
in order properly to render such phrases as, the reading, the writing, 
into German, we must use the present of the Infinitive : thus, ba# 
%t\m, bas vSdjreibett. 

(4) The Present Participle, as stated in the Rule, may govern 
the case of its own verb ; but it must be noted that the word so gov* 
erned, always precedes the Participle : ba3 un6 serfolgenbe ®efd)tcf, the 
us pursuing fate, i. e. the fate that pursues us. In some instances, 
the words are actually united, forming compounds : as, e'ijrftebenS, 
honor-loving, that is, ambitious ; gefe^gebenb, law-giving, &c. 

(5) The Present Participle is sometimes used with the power of 
an A iverb ; that is, to express some circumstance of manner or con- 
dition : thus, tnctnenb fprcid) er $u nut, weeping (i. e. weepingly) he 
spoke to me ; er fc|te ftct) fd)tt)etgettb ttteber, keeping silent (i. e. si- 
lently) he sat down. 

§ 149. Rule. 

The Preterite Participle is not only used in the formation of the 
compound tenses, but may, also, be construed with nouns, after the 
manner of Adjectives : as, 

3d) fycibe fyeute bci3 3?ud) gelefen, I have read the book to-day. 

(£ut geliebte^ Mnb, a beloved child. 

£>ex SJtcimt tft gelefyrt, the man is learned. 

Observations. 

(1) This Participle, in its character as an Adjective, is far mora 
frequently employed in German than in English. Indeed, many Pre~ 
terites in German, having lost all character as Participles, are now 
used exclusiv ily as Adjectives. 

(2) The Preterite, like the Present Participle, is sometimes used 
in an adverbial manner: thus, ba$ 93ud) tft fcerloren gegangeu, the 
book is lost (literally, gone lost). 

(3) This^ is especially the case with certain Participles employed 
with the verb femmen; as, er fommt gefafyten, he comes driven, i. e. 
driving in a carriage • er femmt gerttten, he comes ridden, i. e. riding 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS. §150. $151. 437 

©n horseback ; er Foimnt geflcgen, he comes flying ; er f 5 mint getaufen, 
he comes running, &c. 

(4) Kindred to this, is its use, when connected with a verb, to 
express the condition or state of the subject : as, je£t ftetb' f cb be? 
rufy igt, now I die content ; in feme SEugertb gefyiUU, tregt er ber 93 er- 
ieumfcung, wrapped in his virtue, he defies calumny. 

(5) The Preterite Participle usually in connection with the accu 
sative, is in some phrases employed absolutely: as, tie 2iugen gei 
$immel gertdbtet, his eyes being directed towards heaven; ben ($eunnn 
abgeredwet, the profit being deducted ; btefen %aU auSgencmmen, this 
case being excepted. 

(6) This Participle is sometimes elliptically used for the Impera- 
tive. (See § 145. 3.) 

§ 150. Rule. 

The Future Participle is used, when the subject is to be repre* 
sented as a thing that must or ought to take place : as, 
(£tue ju Icbenbe %l)at, a deed to be (i. e. that ought to be) praised. 

Observations. 

(1) What is called the Future Participle in German, is produced 
by placing $u before the present participle as above. It can be 
formed from transitive verbs only, and is always to be taken hi a 
passive sense. It is chiefly to be found in the case of compound 
verbs : thus, fyod^uefytenber «§ecr, the-highly-to be-honorcd L e. the 
honorable, Sir. 

$ 151. THE ADVERBS. 
Rule. 

Adverbs qualify verbs, participles, adjectives and other adverbs : as^ 

(§x fcfyretfct felten, he writes seldom. 

(£r f)at ben ©egenftcmb fcortreffltd) befycmbelt, he has treated the sub- 
ject admirably. 
£>tefeg 33ud) tjt fefyr gut, this book is very good. 
dx arbettet ntdjt gem, he works unwillingly. 

Observations. 

Almost all adjectives in the absolute form are, in German, em- 
ployed as Adverbs. See § 102. 3. For remarks on the position of 
Adverbs in sentences, see the section on the arrangement of words 
§ 158. 



488 6YVTA2 OF THE PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. % 152. 

§ 152. THE PREPOSITIONS. 

Rule. 

The Prepositions anftatt, aujjevljalb, biejfeitS, &c. (See the List 
§ 109.) are construed with the genitive. 

Observations. 

(1) When the same Preposition governs several nouns in the 
same construction, it is put before the first only ; as, id) bin von met* 
net* «§eimatfy, tnetnem SSaterlanbe unb tneincti greunben getvenut, from 
my home, my country and my friends, am I separated. 

(2) For the right use and position of some of the Prepositions, 
much attention is required. See the Observations on those con- 
strued with the genitive : § 110. 

§ 153. Rule. 

The Prepositions cms, auger, bet, &c. (See List § 111.) are con- 
strued with the dative. (See Obs. § 112.) 

§ 154. Rule. 

x'he Prepositions burd), fin*, gegen, &c. (See List § 113.) are con- 
strued with the accusative. (See Obs. § 114.) 

§155. Rule. 

The Prepositions an, auf, gutter, &c. (See List § 115.) govern 
the native or accusative : the accusative, when motion or tendency 
towaras is signified, but in the other situations the dative. (See 
Ots. § 116.) 

§ 156. THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
Rule. 

Conjunctions connect words and sentences in construction, and 
show their mutual relation and dependence ; as, 
Sobann unb 2Bttl)elm gefjen jut @d)itle, John and William are going 

to school. 
3di fat) eg ; bat)er tteijj td) eg, I saw it; therefore I know it. 
(£r tft alter al$ id), he is older than I. 

Observations. 

(1) Under the general name of Conjunctions in this Rule, must 
be included all words performing the office of Conjunctions, whether 



USE OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. § 156. 439 

properly such or not. Of these connective words th~ee classes nis 
to be distinguished : 1. those that do not affect the order of the 
words of a sentence in which they occur (§ 160. 3.) ; 2. those that 
always remove the copula to the end of the sentence (§ 160. 7.) ; 
3. and finally, those that do or do not remove the copula to the end 
according as they stand before or after the subject (§ 160. 8.). 

(2) The true force and use of the Conjunctions is best learned 
from examples; of which see a large collection in Lesson 69. Wc 
subjoin, however, a few remarks in explanation of the following: 

a. 5lber, aKeht, fonberu. Wotx is less adversative than either of 
the others. It is often merely continuative. SlXfctn always intro- 
duces what is contrary to what might be inferred from what pre- 
cedes : as, er tft fe^r ffetgig, alletn er lerni fer)r raenig, he is very in- 
dustrious, but he learns very little, <sonbern serves to introduce 
what is contradictory. It is used only when a negative precedes ; 
nicbt ebe(, fcnbcrn ffeimnutljicj, not noble, but pusillanimous; eg ijl 
ireber fcbwarj, nod) bvauu, fonberu gvuu, it is neither black nor brown, 
but green. 

b. 2)ajj, also aitf baf , introduces a clause expressing the end, ob- 
ject or result: as, id) toeijj, bap er fommt, I know that he is coining. 
This form of expression is more common in German than in English. 
When baj} is left; out, the copula comes immediately after the sub- 
ject. See Note, page 445. 

c. £>cd) introduces something unexpected or not properly proceed- 
ing from the antecedent: as, er tft feljrreid), tmb fyat bod) wenkj gearbettet, 
he is very rich, yet has he worked little. It is sometimes elliptically 
employed to indicate certainty, entreaty and the like : as, fagen <Ste 
mir kefo, tell me, pray. 

d. 3e, like the definite article in English, is put before compara- 
tives to denote proportion. It, then, has befto for its correlative : thus, 
te fldfjivjer er tft, befto gelefcrier ttirb er, the more diligent he is, the more 
learned he becomes. &?}io sometimes comes before je : as, em 
tffrhtjhverf ift befto fdioner, je ootlfomtnener eg tft, a work of art is the 
mere beautiful, the more perfect it is. Sometimes je is employed 
before both comparatives : thus, je mefyr, je beffer, the more, the betten 

-So«ietimes befto stands before a comparative without je answering 
to it : as, id) enrcirtcie ntcbt meineu greunb ju fmben, befto grower abet 
tfwmein* gmtb?, aU id) iijix fal), I did not expect to find my friend, 
but the greater was my joy, when I saw him. 

*". £>bgletd), cbfdion, obtool)!, indicate concession. The parts are 
»i^n separated, especially by monosyllables: sucb as, id) bu, e^ e& 



440 SYNTAX OF THE INTERJECTIONS. § 15?. 

imr, t1)r, fie. Often two or three such little words come between : as, 
ob er gleid) alt ift, jc, although he is old, &c. ; oo id) mid) &leid) freue, w., 
although I rejoice, &c. 

/. (So, after such conjunctions: as, toetl, ate, ba, ti>enn, nadbbem, ofo 
gletd), cbfcfyon, obtootjl, toenngleid) and ttnetoot)!, introduces the subse* 
quent clause. This is chiefly the case, when the antecedent clause 
is long, or consists of several members : Ex. 2Betl bitty ®ott bieg Silled 
geioafyr toerbeu Itefj, fo ift -Kiemanb fo ttjeif? ate bu, since God hath given 
thee to know all this, so (therefore) is no one so wise as thou. (£>o 
commonly, however, denotes comparison : as, ber Jtnabe ift fo gut, 
ate baS 2Jlabrf)en, the boy is so (as) good as the girl. So in the phra- 
ses, fotootji ate aud), or fotoofyi ate, so (as) well as : fob alb ate, so (as) 
soon as, &c. With aud) (fo — aud)) following, it signifies however : 
as, fo grofj bte (Sdbrerf en be$ Jtrtegeg aud), ic, however great the ter- 
rors of war, &c. ; fo retd) er aud) ift, jc, however rich he is, <fcc. 

# The following are the more common correlatives : as, 



dnttoeber, 


either, 


ober, 


or. 


SSeber, 


neither, 


nod), 


nor. 


2Benn, 


if, 


fo, 


so, or then 


3)a, 


when, 


fo, 


then. 


3e, 


the, 


ie, 


the. 


3e, 


the, 


befto, 


the. 


(Sooatb, 


as soon, 


ate, 


as. 


©otooljl, 


as well, 


ate, 


as* 


2Bie, 


as, 


fo, 


so. 


@o, 


so, 


fo, 


so. 


9tt*t, 


not, 


fonbern, 


but 


ittfd)i atfem, 


not only, 


fonbern, 


but. 


Dlityt mix, 


not only, 


fonbern and), 


but also* 



§ 157. THE INTERJECTIONS. 

Rule. 

Interjections have no dependent construction. 

Observations. 

(1) Interjections stand generally before the nominative or the 
vocative ; as, £) ! tfyeuerfier 33ater ! But sometimes the genitive, 
and sometimes the dative, is preceded by an Interjection : as, D, bet 
greube ! O the joy ! SBetj mtr ! Woe to me ! 



COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 158. 



441 



§ 158. COLLOCATION OF WORDS. 

(1) In the arrangement of words in sentences, the German differs 
Widely from the English. Many differences of collocation, accord* 
ingly, have already been noted and explained in various other parts 
of this work. But, as every word and member of a sentence in Ger* 
man, takes its position according to a definite law of arrangement^ . 
and cannot, without great offense against euphony, be thrown out of 
its proper place, we subjoin here some general instructions on this 
topic. 

(2) The essential parts of every sentence, as already remarked 
(§ 119.), are the Subject and the Predicate. That which is used 
(properly some part of the verb of existence, f e t it) to couple the 
subject and the predicate, is called the Copula. Now, arranging 
these three parts in their natural order, the subject will come first* 
the copula next, the predicate last : thus, 



Subject, 
£)te 23tume 
The flower 
£)aS $ferb 
The horse 



Copula. 

if* 

is 

ttar 
was 



Predicate. 

fd)cn. 

beautiful. 

pat!. 

strong. 



(3) When, as in the ease of simple tenses, the copula and th© 
predicate are both contained in a single word, that word holds the 
place of the copula ; while the place of the predicate either remains 
vacant, or is occupied by the object of the verb. Examples : 



Subject 


Copula, 


Predicate. 


2)te 23utme 


blitt)t. 


— 


The flower 


blooms. 


— 


SQBtr 


lefen 


ba$ 23ucfy. 


We 


read 


the book* 


£)te (Solbaten 


fed)tem 


-*_ 


The soldiers 


fight. 


_ 


3d) 


W 


btefen Sftatm. 


I 


see 


this man. 



(4) In the case of compound tenses, however, the auxiliary lakes 
the place of the copula ; which place is also held by the auxiliaries 
of mood (§ 74.) : the place of the predicate being occupied by the in- 
finitive or participle. If the verb be a compound separable (§ 90), 
the particle stands in the place of the predicate, while the radical 
forms the copula. Examples : 
19* 



442 



Collocation of words. § 158» 



Subject. 


Copula. 


Predicate* 


3d) 


fyeibe 


gclefen. 


I 


have 


read. 


SQBtr 


finb 


getoefen. 


We 


have 


been. 


@t 


fann 


fdiretben. 


He 


c&n. 


write. 


Ste 


tourben 


gefeljen. 


They 


were 


seen. 


Qx 


gel)t 


cuts. 


He 


goes 


out. 



(5) A\"hen any of tl ose verbs which assume the place of the co 
puia, are empl< yed in tl e compound form, the Participle or Infini* 
live belonging to them stands after the proper predicate. Examples* 

Subject. Copula. Predicate. 



Qx 


ift 


tl)6rtd)t getoefetu 


He 


has 


foolish been. 


(St 


trntb 


getefen Ijabetu 


He 


will 


read have. 


(Ste 


fatten 


fdireiben foften. 


6ie 


finb 


gefyort ttorben. 


(§t 


ttnrb 


gefefyen ttcrben feftt* 


®x 


ift 


auSgegcingen. 



(6) The object of a sentence comes between the copula and the 
Predicate; and, if there be two objects, that of the person precedes 
that of the thing. Examples : 



Subject. Copula. 


1st Object. 2d 


Object 


Predicate, 


(Sr $at 


etnen 33tief — 




gefdjrieben. 


Qx fcftrci&t 


metnen 93rief — 




ab. 


(Sr. tjt 


felnem gteunbe — 




geroogen. 


&t ftltb 


etncS 33erbred)en$ — 




befcbulbigt tocttaiu 


3d) fyaht 


bent Jtnaben ein 


53ud) 


gegeben. 


®x $at 


hm ^cijn enter <Sitnbe 


befdmlbigt. 


3d) Ija&e 


metnen greunb — 




urn dlatf) * gefragt. 



* Urn ffiatb with fraflen forms a phrase, (urn 3tath fraaen, to ask for advice,) 
which belongs to a closs of phrases in German, in which a noun or adjective 
Is made to play the same part in respect to a Verb, that is sustained by a sc* 
parable; particle. This 'will account for the position of inn Matt) in trie sen- 
tence : it being treated just like a separable prefix. Other phrases belonging 
to tiiis class are : 



COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 158. 41$ 

(7) Should both objects, however, be persons, the accusative 
comes first: except the oblique cases of the personal pronouns (tdj> 
bu, ev, fie, c$, tour, ifyr, fie), which always take the precedence, 
Examples : 

Sulj. Copula. 1st Object* 2d Object Predicate. 

3d) fyabe bcinen <Sci)n meinem gvennbe cntyfcfytett. 

3d) Ijabe bit ntetnen @o^n empfcljlciu 

($r teirb Unit fehie Scdvtcr geben. 

(8) When two 'personal pronouns form the objects of a sentence, 
the accusative comes before the dative and the genitive. Examples * 

Subj. Copula. 1st Object. 2d Object Predicate. 

Cie fyaben e$ mix cjegefcn. 

SBir ticfymcn nne feincr an. 

dr I;at fids mir empfofjlen. 

(9) Adverbs of degree and manner, or nouns governed by pre- 
positions and serving in the place of adverbs, when they refer ex- 
clusively to the verb, stand immediately after the object. Examples 

Subj. Copula. Object* Advcrfo Predicate. 

Qx M;anbclt feinen ©egcnftanb aortrcjflidv. — 

Gtx l)at feinen ©egenftanb iwtrejf(id) befyanbelt. 

Qx l)zt ba$ ®eCb mit greuben au^gegeBeiu 

(10) Adverbs of time, and phrases used instead of adverbs of 
time, commonly come before the object and before adverbs of place. 
Examples : 

Subj. Copula. Adverb. Object Predicate. 

3d) Ijafce gefreitt einen ©rief gefdme&en. 

(£r ifl doi* bret Slagett in Sonbon — - angefommen. 

(11) Adverbs of place, and nouns with prepositions, used as 
such, generally come immediately before the predicate. Examples: 

Subj. Copula. Object. Adverb. Predicate. 

3d) fyabe einen S3rtef au$ Berlin evfjalteiu 

3d) h)erbe tneinen 8dnt nad) *$axi$ fcfttcfen. 

» " " — ' ' ■ — ■ ■ ■ ■ » 

fiiUff leifieit, to render aid. ItmS Sebeu brm^eit. to deprive of life. 

Bu &filft f oinmen, to come to the aid. £v0| bietcn, to bid defiance. 

Bu fu2tttag effen, to dine. Bu ihtii roerben, to fall to one's part 

^orfle trafleit, to take care. ffi&tb gebfii, to give advice. 

git ©riutbe aehnt, to perish. ©ebSv a.ebcn, to grant a hearing. 

Bu. <$vmtbe rirbteit. to ruin. ©cfafyr'lflufen, to run a risk. 

3n'« 5Bevf fe^eit, to execute. <fettU ftebeu, to stand still. 

gu Stanbe brtngeii. to accomplish. Be(l tjalieu, to hold fesfe 

w<fyt gcb«t, to pay attention. 



444 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 159, 

(12) Nouns and pronouns with the prepositions appropriate to 
the verb employed in the sentence, generally come immediately be- 
fore the predicate. Examples : 

3d) I)al3e mentals itBer ben ©egenftanb tnit tijm gefptod)en, 
3d) toetbe mentals in metnem Seben $n ifym gefjen. . 

When, however, the preposition with its noun is merely used to 
denote the cause or purpose, &c, of what is expressed by the verb, 
it stands before the object. Examples : 

Sir tranfen geftent cms Mangel an fBkx 2Baffer, 
3d) fonnte U)m ttor greubm Mm 2lnttocrt ge&etu 

§ 159. Inversion. 

(1) In all the cases preceding, the natural order of the leading 
parts has been preserved ; that is, the subject first, the copula next, 
and the predicate last. But for the sake of giving special emphasis 
to particular words, this order is often inverted. Thus, the real, or 
logical subject is made emphatic by being put after the copula : the 
pronoun e $ taking its place as a grammatical subject : as, eg fyebt 
bie greifyett tl)te gaijne auf, liberty uplifts her standard. When, again, 
either the copula or the predicate is to be rendered emphatic, they 
exchange places : thus, {'predicate emphatic) fterben miiffen 5ltfe, die 
must alL The chief places in which the copula receives the stress, 
are, 

a. in direct questions ; as, fcfyreifct bev Sftann ? 

b. in imperatives ; as, ^ izn <Ste mil tfym ; 

e. in the case of mcgeu, <vhen used to express a wish ; as, ntoge e$ 

ber #tmmel 
d. in cases where surprise (generally with bed)) is to be expressed; 

as, tfl loti) bie (Siabt tote gefef)rt ! 

(2) When, on any one of those words which, in the natural or. 
der, come between the copula and the predicate, we wish to lay spe 
cial emphasis, it mast be put either before the other words standing 
between the copula and the predicate, or else before the subject. In 
this latter case, however, the subject and the copula exchange places: 
thus, nnx tton (Bbkm famt dbleg ftammen ; where the common order 
would be : (SbleS famt nnr von (Sblem ftammen. These inversions, 
however, chiefly occur when principal and subordinate sentences are 
connected by conjunctions. 



8EKTEKCES : PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE. § 160. 44$ 

§ 160. Sentences: principal and subordinate. 

(1) A principal sentence is one that expresses by itself an inde* 
pendent proposition : thus, It was reported; He deserves ; John toils, 

(2) A subordinate sentence is one, that serves as the complement 
to a principal sentence ; and without which it conveys no complete 
idea. Thus, in the expressions, It was reported, that the town was 
taken ; He deserves, that we should defend him ; John toils, although 
he is rich : the first, in each ease^ is the principal and the second the 
subordinate sentence. 

(3) In the natural order, the principal precedes the subordinate 
sentence. But this order is often reversed; in which case the order 
of the subject and the copula in the principal sentence, is also re- 
versed. Thus, in the natural order we say, id) toeif, baf er e3 nifyt 
ilntn fann, I know, that he can not do it. Putting the subordinate 
sentence first, it will stand: baf er e£ nidbt fyun fann, toeif id), that he 
can not do it, know L 

(4) When, however, the subordinate sentence comes in after the 
copula (i. e. before a part only) of the principal sentence, the natural 
order of the latter remains unchanged : as, id) fanb, aU id) in Sonbon 
anfam, meinen grennb ntd)t. 

(5) In subordinate sentences, the common order of the leading 
parts, differs from that of principal sentences, in making the copula* 
come last, i. e. in making the copula and the predicate exchange 
places. Examples : 







Copula, 


<£r, 


to ef diet mit ben 23rtef 


brad)te. 


He, 


who to me the letter 


brought 


2)er, 


beffen $er$ rein 


i% 


3d) toetf, 


too id) tt)n gefel)en 


fya&e. 


@r fagt, 


baf er eg ntcbi fyun 


faun. 


(£r tft arm, 


toetl er fel)r irage 


ifr 



(6) The subordinate sentence is usually connected with the prill 
cipal one by means of some conjunctive word. The conjunctive 
word so employed, is either a relative pronoun, a relative adverb, or 
some conjunction proper, expressing cause, condition, purpose, /imi* 
tation or the like. See the examples under the preceding paragraph, 

(7) The conjunctions employed in connecting principal with sub 
ordinate sentences, are, o.U, anf baf, Bettor, &te, ba, bafern, banut, baf, j 

* The copula is sometimes entirely omitted ; as, T)a$ 33ud), bad cr mir gegcbr n j the book that he (hao 
given me. 

f ©ajj is sometimes omitted ; in which case the copula stands, not at the end, but just as iv a priacipfc 
wntence : thus, er fctgr, «r fount fc&reiben. 



h kmU, tljt, fm inbent, je, jc it*$bem, na&bem, nun, uB, c^tctcf), oSfaon, 
• OttiW frftbem, nna.ead)tet, n>d'I;renb, tcetl, toerat, J »emt nu$t, toenn glcl^ 
wcnn fd)cn, mernt aud>, wit, »te and), \\mm% too, ibofern, objttar. These all 
remove the copula to the end of the sentence. 

(8) The following are the conjunctive adverbs, which are used to 
connect subordinate sentences with principal ones, after the manner 
of real conjunctions: augctbem, ba^er, bairn, alsbann, barum, begtoeg'en, 
bcg$att, benncd), beflTemmgead&tet, befoletd&en, bcjlo, ehterfelw, anberfelW, cnb- 
It*, ferrter, fota,Ii<$, atetd)^!, §ernad>, tnbeflen, (tnbeg), nadfter, faum, mttfrn, 
mtftebeflottettiger, md)t afletn, tttd&t nnr, nid&t Mop, no$, nnr, fcnjl, t$e'tW, 
tna.leid)en, in fo fern, in fo ttett (fo »elt), jebod), ubrigen^ MerbteS, »tctmc$r, 
1M$I, jubem, gtt>ar. These all reverse the order of subject and copula, 
when they stand before the subject; when, however, thev come after 
the copula, the natural Order of the sentence obtains. 

Se me|r man §at, befio mefir aerlangt the more one has the more on© 

ntun. desires 

|r i]l frartf, bajcr Mettt er §u £aufe. He is sick, hence he stays at home. 
Stoker gtng er toteber toeg> Afterward he went away again. 

(9) OTcto, bemt, fonbern, unb and ober always stand at the head of a 
sentence without influencing the order of the other words. SIfcer and 
ndmltd) may, also, occupy the first place without changing the position 
of the other words. 

(10) Where a mood-auxiliary, or any such verb as takes the infinitive 
without git, occurs together with an other infinitive, the copula stands 
before the two infinitives: thus, mm tdj e3 Jatie t$un mftjTcitic., not 
»f.mt icf) t$im muffen Jdtte. 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 

There are in German, as in other languages, numerous idiomatic 
phrases. Many of these can not be rendered literally into English with- 
out a great sacrifice both of sense and sound. Still their meaning and 
application must be familiar to the student. We give below, therefore, 
a somewhat extended list; adding, to each, either some equivalent 
phrase m our own language, or, where it will bear it, a regular trans- 
ition. In every case, however, it will be highly advantageous to the 
stndonl to put the phrase first in a perfectly literal dress, and then 
deducf from it, if possible, the thought, which it is employed to convey. 

t When tohm is left out the subject and copula stand a3 in a ques- 
tion: taus, mm i<$ e3 gefjjrte&en fymt, it., or (without mm) fiatte U e* 
fteftmfe* \o tDkrte i$ e4 3*nen acfaat $a*m 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



44? 



8tcf)tctt @te e3 nld)t fo genng. 

&n ber 8ad)e i|l nid);3 au$:$ufe§em. 

$fop$ tingenrijfe. 

©ei jhxffmjfcrer 9hd»t 

JSei ber o,i|v t|l em SX^et*. 

barauf ijl e3 eoen cmgelcgt 

Dad &4tjf lag »or 2(nfer. 

DaS 23ud) Idjjt jtd) leferu 

£>a2 [alflt ftd) fcfyeit 

£)as> &at feinc 5SCrt* 

2)a$ lajjjt ftdj ntdjt Mafett. 

SDaS tufce li) mir fcalb gcbadjt. 

£>em ift nt:I)t ^u fyelfen. 

Den flurjern uci)cn. 

£)er 9hme nutt mlr nid)i ktfaKeit 

f £)ie ©aare paiiben mir ju Serge. 

Die gentler ger)en In ben (Garten. 

'Die Saare ftnbet feiiten SIbgang. 

SDte SSacixt ftnbet jlarfen 2(bfa§. 

(£tlc mit SBeile. 

Sin Sr^odjurfe. 

(Sin sornefymer SDfamt. 

(Sinem spferbe bie op or en geBen. 

QEinem auf ben Setb gel)en. 

Sinem an bie §>anb ge^ert* 

Sinen l)erau$forbew. 

Sinen anfafyren. 

£inen anfeinem®eoitrt3tage anMnben. 

(Einen aufiic^cn. 

®ie iji unter bie ©auoe gefommcn. 
(£r pra^It germ or f^neibet gent auf. 
v£r la§t e3 fti) fetjr angelegen jeuu 
(£r fat) mid) jrarr an. 
(Er jleUt ftd) mmuffenb ait 
i£r l)at fid) lo3gemad)t. 
(Si (fit fttrl $oit& 
(£r mitBte fdnt>oren. 
(Et tioetg uoeber and nod) eirt* 
(Er rted)t ben SSrateiu 
<5r I)at jtd) bason gemadjt. 
Sr (ftgt siel barauf gefyen. 
£r i)at fid) mit feinen Qftduoigerit ah* 
gefmtbem 



Do not think so light of it. 

Ko fault can be found with it. 

Upon an uncertainty. 

At the dead of the night. 

There is a 'but* in the matter* 

This was the very aim. 

The vessel rode at anchor. 

The book is readable. 

That looks well ; that will do. 

That is unbecoming ; unseemly 

That cannot be done in a trice. 

I thought so soon enough. 

There is no remedy for it. 

To get the worse of it. 

The name does not occur to me. 

My hair stood on end. 

The windows look into the garden. 

There is no demand for the article. 

The article finds a ready market. 

Slow and sure (hasten slowly). 

An arrant knave. 

A man of rank ; a leading man 

To clap spurs to a horse. 

To attack or assault one. 

To go to one's aid. 

To challenge or call out one. 

To address one harshly. 

To make a present to one * n his 

birth-day. 
To quiz one. 
She has got married. 
He is fond of talking big. 
He makes it his business. 
He stared me in the face. 
He affects ignorance. 
He has got off. 
He is a poor manager. 
He was put to his oath. 
He is sadly put to it* 
He smells the rat. 
He has run away. 
He spends a great deal of money. 
He has come to term with hid 

creditors, 



448 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 



@r $at e3 fo in ber 3trt. 

(Sr $&t entity feme SBaare an ben 

Sftann gebracfyh 
(£r mad)t e3 gar $u bunt 
(Br gcljt nur barauf au#. 
(£3 tinrb ittdjt angefjen* 
(8$ ftcfjt feljr barnad) aug, 
€3 ge$t mtr md)t$ aft* 
®3 getjt bunt &it* 
6 s reigt in ben SBcutel. 
Slau lagi m$t fdjon auf ®rihu 
3d) fjaite soicX auf meine @d)tt>ejrer. 
Sd) fann tf)n gut letbett* 
Si) fann mid) nid)t barauf '6 ejtnnen. 
3d) frage nid)t6 barnadj. 
3d) fann ben SDlann nidjt auSftetyeiu 
3d) tpte e$ fetter nidjt. 
3d) toil! e3 mtt tf)rn nidjt fo genaunetymen. 
3d) Bin bal) inter gefommen. 
3d) laffe e3 gel)en wie e3 null. 
£Ba£ l)at er sor ? 
Sl)m failt j,ebe ^letnigfeit auf. 
Sn Befa)lag rtefmetu 
Sebermann mag xljn gut letbert. 
$ef)ren i Hie ftdj nidjt an ifjtt* 
tein SSlalt »or ba$ $faut neljmen. 
fturj ange'Bttnben fein. 
£angen Sie ju, meine $erren* 
Baffen €ne mid) jufrteben. 
$ccin 9?adjbar Xagt mir fagen* 
Wlix nidjtS, bit nir^t^* 
(Bejp en Sie 3^ren §ut auf* 
Sie §at tljn barum gebradjt. 
<5te ergrtffen ba3 $afenpanter. 
£ Stc gebeu mtt tmmer bte ©djulfo. 
©te ttyun ber <Sielje ju ttieL 
SBaS get)t ba§ midj an? 
f&a$ I)i!ft ntltfs ? 
Sa3 faCt 3feuefn? 
SBaS woftte id) bc«$ fagen? 

8Bcnn Id) fie ut feljerl befomme. 

•4Bcmt 1 3 mir fetjl fd)tagt. 

3Bemt idj anber<3 red)t baxan bin, 



It is his wa/, 

He has found a market at last 

He is too bad; he goes too far* 

He aims at nothing else. 

It will not do. 

It looks very much like it 

I want for nothing. 

These are strange goings on. 

It costs a great deal of money. 

Blue does not look well on greet*. 

I set a great store by my sister* 

I like him well. 

I cannot recollect it. 

I do not care for it. 

I cannot bear the man. 

I would not do it myself. 

I won't stand upon it with him* 

I have found it out. 

I let things go as they will. 

What is he about? 

Every trifle catches his attention 

To seize (goods). 

He is liked by every one. 

Never mind him. 

To speak fearlessly. 

To be irritable. 

Help yourselves, Gentlemen 

Let me alone* 

My neighbor sends me word* 

Without any ado. 

Put your hat on. 

She made him lose it. 

They took to their heels. 

You always blame me. 

You are carrying the thing too fftf 

What is that to me ? 

What am I the better for it f 

What an idea! 

What was I going to say? 

You are quite out. 

If I get a sight of her. 

If I do not succeed. 

If I am not mistaken., 



EXERCISES IN COMPOSING GERMAN. 



It the following list, together with the vocabularies, Eng- 
lish as well as German, the pupil will find an ample stock of 
words for the construction of the proposed sentences (see p. T9) 
according to any one of the several Lessons. Thus, for instance, 
on the 

MODEL ACCORDING TO LESSON X,' 

the sentence, Ex. 16, „©tefer SDtiiller ifl t^er <So§n feneS 33aner£," 
may be changed as follows : 3^er Saner ift fcer 3reunb fctefeS 
9JhUlet3; or, 3^ner 9Jiiitter gteft tern S3auer ta^ te; or, Dtefer 
Saner serfaitft tern littler fca3 $orn; or, £:er SJiMer serfauft bie^= 
[em Saner ta3 s JJM)l; or, the sentence may be so varied as to 
embrace the instructions of several of the preceding Lessons, 
either with or without the introduction of words which have 
not already occurred in former Exercises. 



Exercise 20. 1. 3t)t 2kter l)at eitt ®la$ uni) etnen jammer auf 
tern Stfdjej o?-, 9JWn Srufcer ftat eitt getter in feinem Dfert; or, 
Unfer greunfc tjat mem ©las tmb 3fyren @tul)l; or, SRetn £uni 
ftefct gnriftfyen meinem gretmfce nnt> unferem Setter* 

A similar course may be pursued with any other sentence in any 
given Exercise ; a less or more advanced lesson being selected, as a 
model, according to the progress or capacity of the pupil. 

EXERCISES ACCORDING TO LESSON XXXVI. 

Exercise 68. 1. SBaS §at ber ^fitter in ten fletnen ©iiden? 
2. gr $at SReljl barm. 3. SDer tat He (Surfeit ? 4. £te m$t 
$abm fte. 5. SQer tjat He ftt&ente St^tpufee grijaft? 6. 3So ftnb 
bie ©djaufeln uni: Der ©djaumlBffel ? 7. Seldje ®emal/e I)ate» 
tie 3Raler getjafo ? 



450 



WORDS PJU EXERCISES 



I. Professions and Trades. Jparttfterfe it n fc ©ctoerfce, 



STpctfre'fcr, m. -3,° apothecary. 
9lr$t, vi. -c3; pL 2(ei\ic, physician, 
Savb.er', ?n. --$,;?/. -C, barber. 
SB;m'meifter, m. -3, ^/. -, architect 
SMlb'fjauer, w. -3, pL -, sculptor, 
©ifj&.-fi m. -Q, pi. sBifdpfe, bishop. 
SBottcfyer, wi. -3, i)£. -, cooper. 
trailer, m. -3, pL -, brewer. 
23ud)\ Liber, m. -3, bookbinder. 
33ud)brucfer, m. -3, pi. -, printer. 
Qapetlan , in. -$, pi. -, chaplain. 
(£()trutg', m. -en, pi. -en, surgeon. 
£)ctd)'becfer, m. -3, pi. -, slater. 
garber, m. -3, pi. -# dyer. 
gtf<y&anbler, m. -3, joJ. fishmonger. 
8fleifd)er, n*. -d,j)& -/ butcher, 
gufyrmann, pi. — Icute, wagoner. 
©d|"t'itd)e, in. -n, clergyman. 
©erber, wi. -3, jo£. -, currier, 
©lafer, m. -3, pL -, glazier. 
©elb'fd)mteb, m. -t$, goldsmith. 
^)anb'fd)ubmad)cr, m. -c, glover. 
#trt, m. -en, pi. -en, herdman. 
£uf(d)mteb, m. -e$ r> farrier. 
Suroelier', m. -e3, jeweler. 
$o|ler, m. -3, pi. -, collier. 
$ ufcr, m. -3, />/. (See SBottd)cr.) 
^imftter, in. -$, pi. -, artist. 
3Tup'ferfd)mteb, m. -e3, brazier. 
ilup'ferftecfyer, wi. -3, graver. 
SD?af);r, m. -3, j»/. mower. 
?0?arrt'fd)reicr, w. -3, ^Z. -, quack. 
Earner, in. -3. ;t>£. -, mason. 
S9icff'erfd)mteb, m. -e3, cutler. 
Sttef ger, m. -3. (See gleifeljer.) 
Sftuftfant', m. -en, musician. 



9?.id)l'road)tev, m. -3, watchman. 
^a'tyerin, pi. -:ien, seamstress. 
9taturforf4)er, m. -3, naturalist. 
Dbft'ljanblerht, fruilwoman. 
SP-ipfr, m. -23, pi. tytyftt, pope, 
sperrucfenmadjer, hair-dresser. 
spfavrer, rn. -3, />'. -,• vicar, parsoi* 
spfer'Deljanbler, ^., horsedealer. 
9)i.nltfopl/, m -en, philosopher. 
SPre'Otger, in. -3, pi. -, preacher. 
SPriejkr, m. -3, _p/. -, priest. 
$tebner, in. -3, i?Z. -, orator. 
©Jtttlcr, m. -3, pi. -, saddler. 
©cfyau'fp icier, m. -3, p/. -, actor. 
<3d)loffer, w*. -o, jp£ -, locksmith. 
Si)mieb, in. -ce, -3, pi. -e, smith. 
(Scfyueit-cr, m.-3, jt>/. -, tailor. 
©^crn'fteinfeger, chimney-sweep. 
3 d;r if.' fte Ik r, m. -3, jp/. -, author. 
<Sd)al/ jlid'cr, m. -3, pi. -, cobbler. 
<Sd)iti'lei)rer, wi. -3, schoolteacher. 
(Setter, ^i.-3, /?/. -, rope-maker. 
©pecerei'ljanDler, grocer. 
•Stid'erin, pl.-ixzn, embroideress. 
ZatflbtyitT, m. -3, day-laborer. 
Sape^'rcr, m. -3, pi. -, upholsterer 
SLrobler, m. -3, pi. -# fripperer. 
£ud/i)anbler, ???. -3, jd£. -# draper. 
ll_t)rmad)er, m. -3, watchmaker. 
2Bafd/erin, /?/. -nen, washer-woman. 
28eber, m. -3, pi. -, weaver. 
2Bec^3ler, wi. -3, money-exchanger, 
iBunbar^f, pi. -ar v Ue, See £f)irurg. 
Ba^nar^t, pi. -.ir^te, dentist. 
Bucf'erMder, confectioner. 



II. Man. £et 2Renf*, 



Slltcr, 7i. -3, old age. 
SImmc, /* -, pi. -n, nurse. 
SBraut,/. -, 2^'- Skciute, bride. 
SBrau'ii^am, wi. -3, bridegroom. 
(S'fHjrau,/. -, j9/. -en, wife. 
£ bemann, />/. -aiamter f husband. 
(Enfet, jw. -3, jr/. -, grand son. 
(£n'felin, pi. -nen, grand daughter. 
Sami'lie,/. -/ pi. -ft* family. 
©eburt'//.-, birth. 



©emaW,m-e3,^.-e, ? 
©cma^ltn, /. -, pi. -ncn, j 
©rog'mutter/ -mutter, grandmother. 
©roB'^ctter, -ijdter, grandfather. 
3ugenb,/. -, youth. 
3ungfratt# /• -; pi. -tU virgin. 
3im{iiing, m. -3, }'oung man. 
ftiilitytit,/. -, childhood, infancy, 
$ti\$fcmmt\l, pi. descendants . 
3)atl;e, m. -n, pi. ~i\, godfather. 



* For declension and formati >a of plural, see p. 80 ; connected view oj 
dtdension&t page 104 



IN COMPOSING GERMAN. 



451 



5>attje, /. -, pi -tt, godmother. 
Spflc'gevater, pi. -satev, fosterfather. 
©d)nxia,er, brother-in-law. 
Sdmnt'gcrh, sister-in-law. 
<Suniue'a.ennuttev, motlier-in-law. 
©cfyrote'gerfefyitr son-in-law. 
©<§ro te'^cr^ater, father-in-law. 
Sttef mutter, stepmother. 
©tieffc^n, ^i. -e£, stepson. 



<Srtef sarer, m. -£, stepfather 
Ur'enfel, great-grand son. 
llr'o.roBV'atcr, great-grand father. 
23erto'buna,, pi -en, betrothment 
©or'pfyrcn, pi. ancestors. 
SBatfe, /. -, pi. -a, orphan. 
SBMttroe, /. —i jo/. -n, widow. 
SBirtroer, m. -v, pi. -, widower. 
Buntting, m. -3, pi. -z, twin. 



III. The Human Body. £er menfcfyftcfje $orpcr. 



STfcer,/. ~,jo/. -n, vein. 
51 rm, m. -e$, -3, />/. -e, arm. 
STu^'apfelf pi -apfel, eye-ball, pupil 
5[u'o,enbraune, jo/, -n, eye-brow. 
Slu'otenlteb, w. -e$, ;?/. ~er", eye-lid. 
$[u'anm>tmpern, J^. eye-lashes, 
©atfen, m. -o, ;?/. -» cheek. 
SBatf' enfearr, j?/. -bdrre, whiskers. 
§Ba.; : m. -ee*, -h pi. 33-frte, beard. 
SBetn, w.-e$, --$, />/. -v, leg. 
25lu«, n. -:$, -3, blood. 
23 ru ft,/. -, ^/. Shujre, breast. 
SBufen, m. -3, p/. -, bosom. 
£> airmen, m. -3, pi. -, thumb. 
(Sl'bcgen, m. -4, />/. -# elbow, 
gerfe,/. -, jo/, -n, heel. 
gletfd), w. -e$ ( flesh, 
©atic, /. -, gall, 
©aumcit, m. —3, pi. -, palate, 
©efotm', n. -e3, -3, pi. -c, brain. 
®elent', n. -e£, -3, jo/, -e, joint. 
©ertp'pe, n. -3, jo/. -, skeleton. 
&qid)(, 7i.pl. -z, -er, sight, 
©ejtdjt^purtfi , m. -e3, -4, pi -iu$t f 

lineament, feature. 
©Ucb, n. limb, member. 
£al3, m. -e$, j;>/. $ftlfe# neck. 
$aut,/. -, jo/. £aute, skin. 
§>zx\, n. -tVL$t pi en, heart. 
§itfte,/. ->#/. -n, hip. 
RztyUt f. -i pi -n, throat. 



$me, w. -a, .pZ. $mee, knee. 
$nccr)en, ra. -3/ pi -, bone. 
$orper, ra. -?, #/. -, body. 
£efrer,/. - f pi. -n, liver. 
Sippe, /.-, pi. -n, lip. 
gunge, /. -, pi. -n, lungs. 
3ftagen» w. -3, jo/. -, stomach. 
SRarf, n. -e£, -S, marrow. 
9ttil;, /. -, />/. -en, spleen. 
JWutlb, m. j?/. Climber, mouth. 
SRudfel* /. -, /?/. -n, muscle. 
9Kicfcn, m. -$, pi -, nape. 
Sftaget, m. -3, jo/. 9?aa,el, nail. 
9?afe,/. -, jo/, -h, nose. 
Sfter*, ra. -en, jo/, -en, nerve. 
Sftteven, pi -, loins. 
OJtp^e,/. -, pi -n, rib. 
$Ruc?grat, m. & n. spine. 
©d)dbel# m. -^, _p/. -, skull. 
<5cl)enfel, m. -4, pi -, thigh. 
<Sd)laf, m. pi 3ci)lafe, temple. 
©cfylag'abcr, /. -, pi. -xx* artery. 
<Sd)ufter,/. -, pi. -n, shoulder. 
©etle# /. -, _p/. -n, side. 
(B.irn, /". -, pi -zn, forehead. 
2Babe,/. -, pi. -n, caF. 
SBan^e, /. -, pi -n, cheek. 
8a?mf(eti'd), w. -z$, gum. 
3e^e,/. -, jo/, -n, toe. 
Sunge, /. -, pi -n# tongue. 



IV. Maladies, Remedies. ^Iranl^etten, $cllmittet« 



Sfnfatl, ?H. -ed, -$, joZ. -fdEe, fit. 
S3atfam, ?/i. -o, j?/. -e, balm. 
Slattern, pi the small-pox. 
SBanbfyett,/. -, blindness. 
33 ranntn> e in, 7?i. brandy. 
SBred/mittel, n. -4. pi -, vomitive. 
gieber, n. -4, fever. 
©efd)«)ul|V, ®e(d)o>ul|le, swelling. 
iir'r ». -e^r -3* ^ -Cf ulcer. 



©td)t, f. -, gout, 
£et!uno.,/. -, pi -en, cure. 
^et'ferfett, /. -, hoarseness. 
£mfien, m. -$, cough. 
Sekpfce,/. jalap, 
^oiif, /. -, colic. 
^rampf, rn. ^rdmpfe, cramp. 
RxzHt 7Yi. -e^, pi -e, cancel 
Sftafern, pi. measles. 



452 



WORDS FOR EXERCISES 



$Uttel, n, -g, pi. -, remedy. 
Stofce, f. -, pi. -tt, scar. 
•Ker'ttenfteber, n. -i t nervous-fever. 
fDtynmatyi, f. -, fainting. 
$ocfep, pi. (See Slattern.) > 
jQuetfdjuna,, pi. -en, contusion. 
Ulecept', w. pi. -e, prescription. 
©all)e,/. -, />£. Ht, salve. 
@d)arlad)ftet>er, scarlet-fever. 
©d)teleit, n. -3, squinting. 
Sdntupfcn, wi. -g, cold. 



Sd)Unnbet, m. -g, dizziness. 
<Bd)mtnbfitd)tf /. -, consumption, 
©tammeltt, n. -g, stammering. 
©tummfyeit, /. -, dumbness. 
©itcfyt, bie fattenbe, epilepsy. 
%auhfytit,f. -, deafness. 
Ue'belfetr,/. -, nausea. 
ttn'pajjlicfyfeit, indisposition. 
^erren'fitno,, pi. -en, dislocation, 
SSaffsrfudjt,/. -, dropsy. 
%3mxht f f. -i pi. -n, wound 



V". Articles of Dress, etc. ^leibungSftiide, xu 



Vermel, m. -g, pi. -, sleeve. 
SlrmBanb, pi. -bdnber, bracelet. 
Sltlag, m. -\\t$, pi. -fft, satin. 
33ctrd)ent, m. -g, pi. -e, dimity. 
SBattfi', m. -eg, pi. -e, cambric. 
SBattm'wofte,/. -, cotton. 
SBein'fleiber, pi. pantaloons. 
S5efa^> ; / m. -eg, pi. -fd|e, trimming. 
SBeutel, m. -g, pi. -, purse, bag. 
SriEe, /. -, p.. -tt, spectacles. 
33ruft'nabel,/. -, pi. -n, broach. 
SBitrfte,/. -, pi. -n, brush. 
©ecjen, m. -g, pi. -, sword. 
SDiamant, m. diamond. 
(Ei'fenbein, w. -eg, -g, ivory. 
gdd)er, m. -g, pi. -, fan. 
glor, m. -eg, -g, pi- $liire, crape. 
$ra$, m. pi. grade, dress-coat, 
granfe,/. -, pi. -n, fringe, 
gutter, n. -g, lining, 
©efdjmei'be, n. -g, jewelry, 
©rental', m. -tn,pl. -en, garnet, 
©urtel, m. -g, pi. -, sash. 
£aarnabel, /. -, pi. -n, hair-pin. 
$aIgBanb, n.pl. -Bdnber, neck-lace. 
§algtttd>, n. pi. -titcfyer, neck-cloth. 
£ank,/. -, pi. -n, cap. 
#emb, n. -eg, -g, joZ. -en, shirt. 
■£>ofen, jr>£. breeches. 
•^o'fentrdger, m. suspenders. 
j?amafd/en, pi. gaiters. 
$amm, m.pl. Jl'dmme, comb. 
$a!p k pe,/. -, pi. -n, cap. 
$leib, n. -eg, dress, gown. 
it'cpfpit^, m, -eg, head-dress. 
Jtracjen, m. ■§, pi. -, collar. 
£etn'n>anD, /. -, iinei. 



£ccfe,/. -, pi -n, curl. 

3ftit|Teim', m. -eg, pi. -e, muslin. 
TOU^e,/ -,pl. -n, (See 8am.) 
Sfta'belfiffen, n. -g, pin-cushion. 
SFidfy'nabel, /. -, pi. -n, needle. 
D'berrocf, m. pi. -rMe, frock-coai- 
During, m. -eg, pi. -e, ear-ring. 
Sfel&tterf, n. -eg, g, jt>£. -e, fur. 
$erle, /. -, jt>£. -n, pearl. 
spoma'be,/. -, jt?£. -tt, pomatum. 
^tedj'pfdjdjen, n. smelling-bottle. 
SJUng, m. -eg, -g, jt>Z. -e, ring. 
©ammet, m. -g, p/. -e, velvet. 
©djeere, /. -, joZ. -n, shears. 
©cfytafrocf, m. dressing-gown. 
<Sd)leier, w. -g, j>/. -, vail. 
©d)log, ^. -eg, jt>/. ©c^loffer, clasp. 
(Bc^naUe, /. -, ^/. -n, buckle. 
@d)nitrbruft,/. -, pi. -brufte, staya 
©c^niir'nabel,/. -, pi. -n, bodkin. 
@c§pog, m. -eg, 79Z. @d)DBe, lap. 
(Sc^itrje, /. -, pi. -n, apron. 
©etbe, /. -, pi. -n, silk. 
©otfe,/. -, pi. -n, sock. 
©on'nenfdjtrm, m. parasol. 
©pt^en, joZ. laces. 
<Sporen, m. -g, pZ. -, spur. 
©tecfnabel, /. -, pi. -n, pic 
©tte'felfned)t,m. boot-jack. 
©trumpf, m. pi. (5tritm^fe : stocking 
Xafftt, m. -eg, -g, ^?/. -e, taffeta. 
£af$e,/. -, pi. -n, pocket. 
Utt'ter^ofen, pi. drawers. 
SBefte,/. -, pi. -n, vest. 
SBic^fe,/. -, pi. -n, blacking. 
Balni'Ktrjte, /. tooth-brush. 
i3a^n'fti)d)er, n. totli-pick. 



IN COMPOSING- GERMAN. 



453 



v r I. Town and House, etc. £ ■ i e @ t a b t uni b a 3 § a u 3, k. 

SBalfettf m- -g, ^ 7 . -v beam. 

SBanf, / ~, pi -en, bank. - 

Banm aarten, pi -garten, orchai d, 

^amn'fdutle,/ -,,p£. -It, nursery. 

SBibltotJef,/ -,y. -en, library, 

SBorfe, /. -, #/. -tt, exchange. 

SSrett, %. -eg, -g, p£. -er, plank. 

SBritcfe, /. -, />/. -i!» bridge. 

;8runneit, m. -g, _pZ. -, well. 

t£a$tl'ltt f- -> P^ -ttf chapel. 

dafer'ne, /. -, i?^. ~n, barrack, 

©ad), w. -eg, pi £)dd)er, root: 

£>ad)'rtnne,/ gutter, spout. 

SDetfe, /. -, l -. -n, ceiling, 

£)orf, ??.j^. £)orfer, village. 

(Srb^efcftoH, n. ground-floor. 

gen'jrerlaben, m. -g, j?/. -Iciben, 
window-shutters. 

gletfen, ra. -g, #£. -, borough. 

ftufibobtn, m. -g, pi — bi5beri/ floor. 

©ftfF**/ -, pi -n, lane. 

<$efdttg'tti§, w. -eg, _£>£. -e, prison. 

®ett)d$g'§aug| rc. jo^. -§dufer, green- 
house. 

© en) 61 be, w. -g, j?J. -, vault, 

®lodt, £ -, pi -n, bell. 

©lotf enfpiel, w. -eg, chime. 

©offe,/. -,i^.-n, kennel. f ut 

§auptftabt, /. -, pi -ftahit, metrop- 
olis, chief town. 

£ecfe,/. -, £>£. -n, hedge. 

£of, m. />/. ©ofe, court, yard. 

£ittte, /. -, pi -U, cottage, hut. 

kali, m. -eg, -g, lime. 

$atnin, rc. -eg, _^. -e, chimney. 

hammer, /. -, pi -tt, chamber. 

teller, m. -g, pi -, cellar. 

JUrd)f)cf, m. -eg, #/. -t)5fe, bury in g- 
place, church-yard. 

$trd)[ptel, n. -eg, -g, _p?. -e, parish. 

^ird)tt)urm, m. -eg, -g, pi -tfyitrme, 
tower, belfry of a church. 

^lofter, n. -g, pi itlofter, cloister. 

$M)e, /. -, pi -tt, kitchen. 



Skttbljattg, w. country-house 
Jtkttb'jltage, /. ~,j?/. -n, highway. 
Waiter,/ -, pi -tt, wall. 
$iCt'crt>of, m. -eg, -g, p£. -tyofe, farm. 
Nebcin, jdZ. furniture. 
Nortel, m. -g, mortar. 
3Miltt$e# /. -, j^. -It, mint, coin. 
JDfett, m. -g, pi Defett, stove. 
$>alafi, m. -eg, pZ. $aldfte, palace. 
i>jtafter, n. -g, pavement. 
'$j)oft,/. -, ^. -eit, post-office. 
§htmpe, /. -, pi -en, pump. 
Otot^aug, «. -eg, vjpt Ijditfer, town 

house, council-house. 
8Uea.el, m. -g, p£. -, bolt, door-bar 
©act!, w. -eg, -g, _£>/. ©die, saloon 
©acrifki', /. -, j?Z. -en, vestry. 
©diairfptelbang, ^. theater. 
©d)elle,/. -, pi -v.. bell (small). 
(BdoCime? /". — , granary, barn. 
©d)laf ummev/vi. -g, bed-room. 
©4lo{i, n. -jfeg, castle, lock. 
©d)tefcr, m, -c-, i^. -, slate, 
©d)ontftem, m. (See I'amht.) 
©peic^er, m, -g,j)i -, loft, garret. 
©piial', n, ~t<c,pl. -taler, hospital. 
©tabttI)or, n. -eg. pZ. -e, city-gate. 
©tabtViei'tel, n. quarter of (the) town. 
©tad, m. -eg, pi ©tale, stable, 
©tP(ftx)erf, n. -eg, -g, p^. -e, story, 
©tube,/. -, jp2. -It, chamber. 
Sreil^aug, n. hot-house. 
Sre^pengelanber, n. stair-case-rail. 
£f)urm, m. S^itvme, tower, steeple, 
ttmge'bungett, jpi environs. 
S5o?Ummer, w. ante-chamber.. 
S^crftabt, /. -, p?. -jtdbte, suburb. 
SBatifcf/. -/ SBdnbe, wail (of house) 
SBeinberg, m. -eg, #Z. -e, vine-yard, 
955iefe, /. -# pi -n, meadow. 
Betto/bang, w.p^. -baufer, arsenal. 
Btegel, m. ~$,pl -, tile. 
Ste^elftetit, m. -eg,j?2. -e, brick. 
BoEljaug, w. custorr.-house. 



VII. Furniture, etc. SDi obi lien, U. 



SBec^er, m. -g, pi -, tumbler, cup. 
SBett, n. -eg, -g, pZ. -en, bed. 
SBett'bede,/ -,7^. -it, coverlet. 
JBctt'labe, /. -, jpZ. -it, bedstead. 
SBetttuii), n. -eg, ^. -titter, sheet. 
SBla'febalg, m. pi -fcdlge, bellows. 



SSit'cb.evbrctt, n. book-shelf. 
S3ii'd)erfd)rauf, m. book-ease. 
33u'9eletfeit, n. smoothing-iron. 
Safferol', n. -g, pi -e, sauce pan, 
©ecfel, m. -g, ^. ~, caver. 
(Simer, m. -g, j?^ -, bucket. 



454 



WORDS FOR EXERCISES 



gag, n. -fft$,pl. gaffer, cask, 
ge'berbett, w. ~eo, feather-bed. 
geu'erftafyt, m. pi -ftafyle, steel. 
geu'erjMtt, wi. -e$, -3, #Z. -e, flint, 
geir'er^attge,/ -, pZ. -n, tongs. 
geu'er>eitg, ?>. -co, tinder-box. 
gutftanf, /. -, pi -bank, foot-stool. 
®ebecu', n. -i$>, -z,pl ~e, cover. 
©emai/oe, n. -3, pZ. -, picture. 
£anbtnd), n. -ee, pi. -tinter, towel. 
4>erfc, w?. -e3, -3, jpZ. -e, hearth. 
^)ots'r'Dl;le, /. -, pZ. -:t, charcoal, 
tf fffi$etl# w. -3, pZ. -, box. (L. 24. 1.) 
tfeffeii «*• -3» jpZ. -, kettle, 
^crje,/. -,j»Z. -it, taper, candle, 
tfljle, f.-,pl -it, chest. 
^orno'De,/. -, chest of drawers. 
$opf ftffen, n. -4, pi -, pillow. 
Roxif m. -t$, -3, pi' itorbe, basket. 
Jhott'leucfyter, m. chandelier. 
$rua,, m. -z& pi j?ritg.e, pitcher. 
•S^itl-el, m. -<>, pi -, pail, tub. 
$ud)'eitgef:i)trr, w. kitchen utensil. 
Campe,/. -, pZ. -it, lamp. 
Sater'ne, /. -, pi -;t, lantern. 
£td)t, ra. -co, pZ. -er, (See Jlerje.) 
2t#t'pit$Cr/- -,jpZ. -it, snuffers. 
Sftorfcr, m. -3, j?Z. -, mortar, 
spfatme, /. -, pi -a, pan. 
9)fcf'ferbui)fe,/. -, pepper-box. 
§)fropfe.i» #*. -3, pZ. -, cork. 
sPfropf'enJefjer, m. cork-screw. 



$fu5t, m. -3, pZ. SJfiWe, bolster, 
$olfter, n. -3, pi. -, bolster. 
tyult, n. -:g, -3, pZ, -e, desk. 
Statjmert, m. -3, pZ. -, frame. 
Sat .ftp, «. pZ. -fefffer, salt-cellar 
<Sd)ad)ieI, /. -, (See $aftd)ett.) 
<5d)aufet, /. -, pZ. -n, shovel. 
©djaum'loffclf m. -3, skimmer. 
(3'd)trm, m. -e3, -3, _pZ. -e, screen. 
@d)rcmf, m. pZ. Sd)r<mfe, cupboard. 
©d^il/labc,/. -, pZ. -rt, drawer. 
Sdjuv'eifett, rc. -3, pZ. -, poker. 
Sd)t»e'fel(jiJl$ett, w. match. 
Snfe, /. -, pZ. -it, soap. 
©eitfiopf, m. —topfCf mustard-pot. 
©enuet'te,/. -, pZ. -rt, napkin. 
S'tct), w. -e$, -3, pZ. -e, sieve. 
©cpt)a, ra. -3, pi -3, sofa. 
StetrVfo§lc,/. -,pZ. -rt, coal, 
©up'pettfd&tiffel, /. -, tureen. 
£epptd), on. -3, pZ. -e, carpet. 
Stead, m. -^, ^>Z. -, skillet. 
Zi(d)iiify, n. pi -titter, table-clotl 
ZoXf, m. -c^, pi. Xopfc, pot. 
Srtii)ter, ??i. -^, pZ. -, funnel/ 
SBanb / leud)ter, m. -3, pZ. -, sconce. 
2£arm'f(afd)e,/. -, warming-pan. 
2Baf;l)'becfen, w. -3, pZ. -, washbowx 
SStege, /. -, pi. -rt, cradle. 
Sud'erbofe,/. -, pZ. -n, sugar-box. 
Surtber, m. -3, tinder. 






VIII. Dishes, ©eri^te. 



£cnfeci f , w. comfit, sweet-meats. 
Si, w. -e3, pZ. -er, egg. 
Gt'erfudjen, w. -4, pZ. -, omelet. 
(Srfrtfl/uttgf /• — , refreshment, 
glcti'd/iu-iijie,/. -, pi -\, broth, 
©aftmaljl, n. -:3, -master, banquet 
^vU^melftetid), n. -c^, mutton. 
$am mclieule, /. -, leg of mutton. 
ihlbfletfd), n. -e3, veal. 
^atbs'ccteiet'te,/. cutlet. 



Mop, m. -e6 r pi. $lo£e, dumpling. 
5?ubel,/. — , pi. -n, vermicelli. 
Dvl/i'eitDrateH, m. roast-beef. 
DvVfenfleifd), -e3, beef. 
9) pun' hid) en, m. -o, pan-cake. 
@d)infen, >«. -3, ^Z. -, ham. 



<3v^i\)ei'nef(etfd), n. 



pork. 



©uppe,/. -/ i?Z. -n, soup. 

Sovie, /. -, |)Z. -n, tart. 

SB u r ft,/. -, 2;Z. SOaijte. sausage. 



[X. Grain and Vegetables, ©etreifte unD ©emiife, 



^lu'menfct;!, m. -:^, cauliflower. 
IBc^ne,/. -, pi. -rt, bean. 
(£rbfe f /I -, jp?. -it, pea. 
©evftc, /. -, barley. 
Qfruvttff. -, pi. -n, cucumber. 
$)afcr, 5>2. -^, oats. 
4>irfe, »**• -tt# millet. 



^noHaud), m.-ti, -4, garlic. 

^0^1, m. -ee, -o, cabbage. 

^orn, n.-tt f pi Corner, corn, p-rain. 

5h\tut, n. -co, -3, pZ. ku 'Jer» U^rb 

iTreffe,/. -, cress. 

tt'u\\i,f.- f pi. -a, lentil. 

5)£at3, n, — e^-r mai/;e. 



IS COMPOSING GERMAS. 



41 > 



^ecr'retitg, '.n. horse-rad'sh. 

8>a|ltm'fe, /. -i vl -n, parsnip. 

8>eierft'lte,/ -, parsley. 

Silan c,/. -,i>J. -n, plant. 

§)it;, m. — :3, j?Z. — :, mushroom. 

UhMuVajert, w. -c, turnip-radish. 

ffttij, m. -:3, rice. 

SRettig., mi. -e3, -3, pZ. -£, radish. 

SRocigeit, w. -3, rye. 

Sfcube, f. -, p?. -3t# (brassica rapa); 
a.l.e SRitbe, carrot, rot^e 3£itbe# 
beet; weijje IRube, turnip. 



@alt>ei,/ -i sage. 
Sau'erampfer, rn. -3, sorreL 
S^mamm, m. -e$, (See $il$. 
©ell'erte, m. -3, celery. 
©parcel, m. -2, asparagus. 
Spina,', !». -:£, -3, spin age. 
S^'mun* m. -3, thyme. 
Sritffel,/. -, jpZ. -n, "truffle, 
SBeUen, /». -3, wheat. 
SButjti,/. -, pi. -it, root. 
3tf>iebel,/. -, pi. -n, onion. 



X Fruits and Fruit-Trees. O&jl unb Ofcfi&aume* 



5Titana3,/. -, pt -fe, pine-apple, 
^p'felbaum, m. apple-tree. 
Sfyfelfi'ne, /. sweet-orange. 
2Iprifo'fe,/. -r, jpZ. — n, apricot. 
SMrubaum, m. pear-tree. 
SSrom'beere, /. black-berry. 
Siiro'ae,/. -, pi. -n, lemon. 
'iKtttel,/. -, pi. -it, date. 
©rb'beere, /. -, pi. -n, strawberry. 
$a'felnujj, /. -, pi. -stitffe, hazelnut. 
©ei'Delbeere, /. -> pi. -en, bilberry. 
|>tm'beere,/. -, pi -it, raspberry. 
Sol^it'rtiSbeere, /. -, pi. -it, currant. 
$afta nie,/. -, pi -it, che3nut. 



SRcmbcl,/. -, pi. -it, almond. 
$?aul'beere,/. -, ^. -n, mulberry. 
QMo'rte, /. -# ^- -n, melon. 
9Jlt3peI,/. -, i?6. -it, medlar. 
$fu'ftd)e,/. -, i>Z. -n, peach, 
spflcui'mertbattm, m. plum-tree. 
8)omeran'$e, (7. -, p . -:t, orange. 
Quitte,/ -, pi -it, quince. 
Sfcojt'rte,/! -, pi. -n, raisin. 
©tad)'eli>eeve, /. -, goose-berry. 
(Straud), m. -e$, ^. ©iraudje, bush, 
SSatlnujj,/. -t pi -nujfe, walnut 
SBeinjiocf, m. grape-vine. 
2Beitt'iraube,/l -, i?/. -it, grape. 



XI. Forest-Trees. SBctlb&aume. 



$t§orrt, m. -3, i?Z. -e, maple. 
23irfe,/. -, pi. -it, birch. 
%d)e,/. -, pi. -n, beech. 
(2i.i)e,/. -, pi. -:t, oak. 
Efd&e,/ -, pi -it, ash. 
(icpe,/. -, pi. -n, aspen. 
5vii)te,/. -, p^. -:t, pine. 
Bardje,/. -, #J. -n, larch. 



£ittbe, /. linden tree, lime-tree, 
$Pappel,/. - t pi. -rt, poplar. 
IRinoe, /. -, £>c ; . -n, bark. 
©tamnt, m. trunk. 
£atme, /. -, pi. -tt, fir. 
lilme,/. -, i^. -it, elm. 
SSeice,/. -, pi. -n, willow. 
Smetg, m. -e3, -5, pZ. -e, bough. 



XII. Flowers, etc. 53 1 u m e n f :c. 



Sluri'fel, /. -, pi. -it, auricula. 
SDijiel, j. -, jp/. -n, thistle, 
©etplatt, n. honey-suckle. 
Sa^min', m. -eo, -3, jessamine, 
gesfo'ie,/. -,;;/. -n, j>-ilh^owei. 
mit,f.-,pl. -n,lily. 
SKafiliebe,/. -,^. -rt, daisy. 
StfobivVtitme,/. -, jo/, -n, poppy. 
2)hml)e,/. -, ^. -n, myrtle. 
Kcilc,/ -, joi -u, pin^. 



f^eJTeb/.-,^. -n, nettle. 
S^u'ter.porn, ?n. -:^,— ^, lark-spur. 
SRofe,/*. -, ^. -n, rose. 
<£>d}litff elblume, /. -, jd?. -:t, cowslijx 
©on'nenblttme, /I -, sun-flower. 
Sulpc,/. -, jt?, 7 . -n, tulip. 
Unfraut, n. -e^, -3, weed. 
&>eild)en, w. -0, p/. -, violet. 
$ergij$'meutntc(}t, «. -ed» --3, forget 
me-not. 



456 



WORDS FOR EXERCISES IN COMPOSING GERMAN. 



XIIL Birds, etc. S3 o get, %U 



STbler, m. -g, pi -, eagle. 
$imfel,/. ~, jp^ -a, blackbird. 
SBacfy'jto^e, /. -, pi -n, wagtail, 
SBuc^pnfr m. -en, j^. -en, chaffinch. 
£>ipteifmf, m. goldfinch. 
2)o§le,/ -, i^» -It, jackdaw. 
/Droffel,/. -, i?Z. -n, thrush. 
©Ijter,/. -, pZ. -n, magpie. 
(Ente, / -, .£>£. -n, duck. 
(Eule,/. -, ^. -n, owl. 
galfe, m. -n, pi. — ttr falcon. • 
Safan', m. -en, pZ. —en, pheasant. 
gle'Dermaug,/. -,#£ -mctufe, bat 
glitgel, m. -3, _£>£ -, wing. 
®ang,/. ~, i& ©artfe, goose. 
£abid)t, m. -eg, -g, jpZ. -e, hawk, 
£dnfiing, rn. -eg, -g, pi -e, linnet. 
$ufyn, w. -eg, -g, #Z. £ul)ner, hen. 
$cma'rietWOgel, m. canary-bird. 
ihcifye,/. -, jpZ. -it, crow. 
&iid)[ein, rc. -g, _p£ -, chicken, 
^ncfucf , m. -g, j^Z. -e, cuckoo. 
£erd)e, /. -, pi -n, lark. 



%ladfii$att, f. -, nightingale. 
S?apagei, rn. -eg, -3, p£-e, parrot. 
j)fau, m. -en, pi -en, peacock. 
OiaiC, m. -\\, p)l n, raven. 
SRau&'$j)flel# m. bird of pre} 7 . 
8te&$U$tt, rc. partridge. 
91eif)er, m. -g, pL -, heron. 
dloitftctjldmx, ft. -g, jpZ.'-, redbreast 
Sdjnafcel, wi. -$, pi Sd^itafcel, bill, 
©cfywalfce,/. -, pZ. -n, swallow. 
Sd)tt>an, m. swan. 
(Sperling, m. -g, sparrow. 
O'tord), m. -eg,-g,p£ ©tord)e, stork, 
(Strang, m. -eg, pZ. -e, ostrich. 
£aube,/. -, pi -n, pigeon. 
Xrutbafyn, m. -eg, turkey. 
Sur'teltank,/. -, turtle-dove. 
2£ad)tel, /. -, ^Z. -n, quail. 
SBMb'fd^nepfe, /. -, wood-cock. 
2Baffer|u^n, rc. moor-hen. 
SBaj] 7 erfd)nepfe, /. -, -, pi -n, snipe. 
Bann'fonig, -eg, -g, i?Z. -e, wren. 



XIV. Quadrupeds. SSierfii^ige £ § i e r e* 



$ffe, m. -n, jpZ. ~n, ape. 
SBar, w. -en, pi -en, bear. 
SiBer, m. <-%, pi -, beaver. 
£)a$g, m. -e^, j^. -e, badger. 
(£td/f)ornd)en, n. -g, joZ. -, squirrel. 
grettcfyen, n. -g, #Z. -, ferret. 
$nd)g, m. -eg, jpZ. gudjfe, fox. 
Mullen, w. -g, i?Z. -, colt. 
©emfe, /. -, pi -n, chamois. 
£afe, m. -n, #Z. -n, hare. 
|>irfd>, m. -eg, #Z. -e, deer. 
Sgel, w*. -3/ Pi- -t hedge-hog. 



$antn'd)en, n. -g, p^. -, rabbit. 
£amm, n. lamb. 
£ott>e, m. -n, pi -n, lion. 
SDtaber, m. — g, _pZ. -, pole-cat. 
9)?auFefeI, m. -g, pZ. -, mule. 
SDtautwurfi m. -eg, _^Z. -ix)tirfe, mole- 
Die^, ^. -eg, -g, pi -e, roe. 
Sdjroein, n. -eg, -g f j5?. -e, hog. 
£ia,er, m. -g, ^>Z. -, tiger. 
SBoIf, m. -eg, -g, pi &>olfe, wolf. 
Siege,/. -,i?Z. -n, goat. 



XV. Fishes, etc. gifdje, :c* 



^al, w. -eg, -g, ^Z. -e, eel. 
^lufter, /. -, pi -n, oyster. 
SBarfc^, m. -eg, j?Z. -e f< perch. 
SButflittg, w. red-herring, 
gorel'le,/. -, pi -n, trout 
©arnele, /. -, pi. -n, shrimp. 
£at, m. -eg, ~g, pZ. -e, shark. _ 
faring, m. -eg, -g, pZ. -e, herring. 
£ed)t,V*. -eg, -g, />Z. -e, pike. 
Rummer, m. —§,pl. -n, lobster. 
Il'a'beljau, wi. -eg, jt?Z. -e, haddock. 



^ar'p fen, w. -g,i?Z. -, carp. 
Hrebg, m. -eg, pi. -e, craw-fish. 
£ad)g, m. -eg, p/. -e, salmon. 
^ufd;el,/. -,^. -n, shell. 
©aim, m. -eg, -g, pl.-z, (See ^ac^g. 
©d)eK(tjd), m. -eg, pi. -e, haddock. 
©(^Ub'frote, f -, />/. -n, turtle. 
(Bd)lci1)e,/-, f/. -n, tench, 
©tor, rn. -eg, ~% pi -c, sturgeon. 
SBaUftfd), m. -erf «g, /?/.-<, whale 



READIIG LESSONS, 



The following selections are from various sources; ail excellent, 
however, and embracing a great diversity of style and matter. Th« 
student, therefore, who has become familiar with the grammatical 
course laid down in the preceding part of this book, will enter upon 
these reading lessons with no little pleasure. "With the aid of the vo- 
cabulary, which is sufficiently full, and the references to the grammar, 
which are quite numerous, he can, indeed, find no serious difficu 'ty. 
Many more references might have been made ; but he who duly c n- 
sults those already given, will not, it is believed, be in want of further 
guidance in the use of his grammar. 



I. §f <& ft t 1 m+ 

1. 2)er |>trfdj. 

<Der £irfdj fa$ etnj! in eittem flaren 33a$e feitt 33U&. SBaljrttcfyr fagte er, 
id) ii&ertreffe aEe £$iere an $njtanb imb 9>rac^t! SBie ^errltc^ ragt* ba$ fc 
©ettetfj empcr! — £>odj meitte giige, tine mager unb tydgltdj! $aum $atte 
er ba$ (L. 44. 1.) gefagt e , fo erBHtfte er d einen £otx>en # ber e auf ir)n lodging. 
SDftt grower f <3$ttelle trugen ifyn feme seradjteten gitge in ben nddjjten 2BaIb ; 
after £lb|Ud? ^ telten bie ©e|Mud)e fetne Bretten §omer auf, unb er fcmnte 
ft$ ntdjt ioSftutbett. ©er £otx>e erretdjte unb tobtete itjn. 

(Bd)d|eff bie ©inge rttdjt nadj ber dugertt ©ejtalt, fcnbern nadj bem inncrn 
SSert^e ; fonjt ttnrfl bu oft bent Urt^etl §u fcereuen fjafcen. feigner. 

2. 3>er SBanberer unb ba$ Srrlt^t. 
©in SBanberer fa'§ be$ ^ad^t^ k auf feinem SBege unwett son (Id) etn3rrlid)t, 
gtng i^m gerabe nadj, fam »om redjten 9>fabe aB unb serfanf baburdj in 
etnen tiefen ©umpf. &a, fcerroimfdjteS SrugMib! rief er au$, tt>arum mug* 
teft bu mi(^ $ter$er fiityren? — 3$ btdj gefii^rt? erroieberte ba3 Srrlt^t ; urn 
2kr$ei£ung, idj serbiene biefen SScrrourf nid)t. £)u gingfi mtr ja 1 freinoiHtgj 
nadj. SJftemanb aX^ bu felfcjt* ga$ bir ben Sftatty mtr 1 ju folgen. 

feigner. 

» L. 51. 4; b L. 42. A;; « L. 36. 3; d L. 53. 5; e L. 39; f L. 32. 5; 
• L. 50. 5; h L. 61. 8; • L. 69. 20; J L. 34. 7, k L 29. 3; * L. 64. k 

m 



458 BEADING LESSOR. 

3. £er totlbe &pfelBaniiL 
3n ten ^o^Xen <Stamm eineS toitben STpfetoaumeS lte§ Id) em <3$maiai 
SBtencn nieber. <5le fiiHten iljn™ mit ben <Sd)d$en t§re5 #onig£, unb ber 
IB aunt tsarb fo fiotj barauf, b&% er aHe anberen S5dume gegcn fid) seradjtete. 
jDa rt ef i$m etn fRofenflocf *u: ©lenber <StoI* auf gettebene Sitjngfeiten! 
3)1 beine grud)t barum wentger §erbe? 3n biefe iretoe ben £onig fyerauf, 
irenn bu e3 oermagjl, unb bann erfr nnrb ber Q Sftenfdj bid) fegnen! £effmg, 

4. £>er @pedu unb bte Sauce. 

©in Spedjt unb eine Sauce fatten einen §)fau befudjt SBie geftel blr unfa 
aBirtfj? fragte ber Sped)t auf bem Oiittfroege. 3)1 er ntdjt ein ttibtigee ©e- 
fdjbpf? Sein <StoI$, feine unformlidjen gitge, feine Jdflidje ©ttmme, ftnb fie 
tti$t unertrdglid)? ^Sluf alleS biefeS," antttortete bte gute Sauce, „$atte td) 
feine Beit $u fefjen ; benn t$ $atre genua, an ber Sd)on$eit feineS #opfe#, an 
ben $errli$en $arcen feiner gebern unb an feinem majejldtifdjen <5djn>etfe in 
bemunbern." feigner. 

5. £>ie SBefpen im §ontgtopfc. 

(Sin <Sd)marm 2Befpen° war in einen §onigtcpf gefrodjen? unb HefS efi ftd) 
ba moljl fttymerten. 2>od) }e§t, al3 fie toieber fort n>otften,q fonntcn fie ntdjt ; 
benn bte &atye <5u§igfett fyatte glitgel unb gitgc uncraud)oar gemadjt. flldali^ 
iammerten fte nun itber ifyr natyeS (Snbe. — (Sine einyige 28efpc §atte ft* *or<* 
ftcfyttg ant $anbe er^alten, stoar roeniger genoffen, aber ftd) audj* ntd)t gefan* 
gen. Sin bauert mid), ©djroefrern, fprad) fte, inbem fte fort flog ; abcr tor 
battel audj bte <Sdjtt)ierigfeit be$ ^erauSfommen^ * bebenfen fallen, c^e ijr eur& 
fo tief lutein rcagtet. 

2>er 2Beg yam fitnb^aften ^Bergnugen ifl leid)t. £odj befto fd)toercr fdHt eS, 
son i$m fid) loSpreigen. 2)aran benf> u man* sorter, benn nad$er if: e3 &u 
fc& unb fru$tto$. feigner. 

6. ©teSaube unb bietfrdH 

(Sin mut$n?illtger Jhtaoe marf nad) einer fdmeetoeijSen Saube mit naffei 
£rbe, unb baS gldn^enbe ©epeber berfelben w tourbe fdjmu^ig unb f^iDarj. 9hm 
oijt bu bo(^ aud) getoorben mie unfer* einer! fagte eine alte Jtrd^e ^o^nla^enb ; 
benn bie SBofen ^aoen e^ nid)t gem, ba$ man oeffer fein null, aU fte, unb freucn 
fitf) iiBer ben llnfatt ber ©uten. 

2Bie euer x einer geftorben? ertoieberte bieSCauoe. ileine^mege^ ! 3a) fd&eiue 
mtr fo ; ia) ioerbe aoer nit^t fo Bleioen ! 

Unb fie Mieb aud) nic^t r fo. Sie oabete, fte retnigte fta), unb war totttet 
fo gldn^enb toeig, aU ju^or ; aBer bie $ral)e Wirt, toie fte n>ar ; unb toitrfce* 
c$ * au^ geMieoen fein, wenn fte aud) ein 3af)r tang geoabet unb gepu^t ^dttc. 

-©aXtct bte §erjen nur rein; gegen bie $erldumbung n>irb fc^on 9^at^, unb 
bte ttnfcfyulb ge^t am (Snbe benno^ geredjtferttgt unb gelcitttert ^er^or. So Jr. 

m L. 28.5; n L. 42; 0^.50.3; r L 48. 2; q L. 45.15 r L. 21.8; 
• L. 29. 10; * L. 49. 4; ■ L. 55. 3; v L. 19; w L. 41. b; « L. 2S. 13; 
f L.56. 1; ■ L.28L 10. 



HEADING LESSONS. 459 

7. £)er (Stnftebler unb be; S3 dr. 

Sin (Einftebler t>ite einen jungen 23dren attfgesogen* unb burd) gutter, 
6d)Idge unb man$e SKittye tl)it fo $a$m trie einen £unb gemadjt. Dft Bradjte 
nun ber S3dr feinem Srjte^er ein anfelmlid)eS <StM SBilbpret b Ijeim, trug 
£ot$ unb Saffer tyerBei, Beroadjte feine -grntte, Hx$, er Ictfletc itjm SMenjte 
n tier 2Trt* (£inft lag an einem <8ommertage c ber ©utftebler im ©rafe baljin* 
gejlrecft unb fdittef. 9M<en U)tn fag fetn 33dr unb roe^rte bte gftegen aB, 
Me fd)aarenroeife d ben ©rei£ umfcfytodrmien. ^orpglid) qudlte itm eine; tt>c$l 
jelmmal* fyatte ber SBar fie fortgejagt, unb immer tarn fie toiebcr. 
3e£t, alS jte fid) aBermalS auf bie Stint beS ( S'rf)Iafenben f fe|te, rief ber SBdr 
unroUTig au3: SBarte! roarte! id) rotft bid) ttegbteiBen lefyren!* — S3ci biefen 
SBortcn ergriff er einen (Stein, gicltc ridjtig unb ^erfdjmetterte bie gliege, aBer 
fretltdj audj nut itjr btn $opf be$ Sllten. f 

SBafjTe bir feinen einfalttgen, feinen aU#x rotyen 9ftenfd)en utm fe greunbe ! 
SelBft * mit bent Bejlen SBttfen fawt er bir j oft metyr aU bein drgjrer geinb 
fc&aben. • £asater. 

8. £)ie;fta$ttgan unb ber ©impel. 

£)ie 9lad)tigatf ging etnft auf fReifen unb jur h ©efellfdjaft na§m fie einen 
©impel mit.p Sie flogen itBer £t)al unb SBerg unb famen nad) etltd)en £agen in 
einen fdjbnen Salb, in roeld)em jte ftc6> nieberliegen. $aum fatten jte ftdj auf 
einen SBufdj gefe£t, fo serfammelte ftdj and) fd)on eine gan&e Sdjaar son ben ' 
$ogetn be$ 2Balbe£, um k bte grembltnge §u fetyen. 9HIe Berounberten ben 
©impel unb loBten feinen fdjroar^en $opf, ben grauen SRitcfen unb bad fdjone 
SRot^ feiner SBruft. £)a$ mug ein fefjr sornetymer OMfenber f fein, fpradj einer 
$u bent anbern. £>er anbere $ogel iji fetyr unBebeutenb. 2Baljrfd)einIid) if! er 
ber Wiener. Sftan brangte ftdj immer neugieriger urn ben fdjon Befteberten 
©impel fyer, unb brangte bie ^adjiigatl fo aftmdlidj in eine unBeoBadjtete (Ec!e. 

(Snblidj erfud)ten bie 2>ogel ben ©impel, er moge bofy au&) einmal feine 
Stimme I)oren laffen. l £)emt man ^ermut^ete, bag fein ©efang feinem ^leibe 
gleic^j fommen muffe. ©r lieg fid) oereben'' 1 unb fang. W>tx bie Bogel, bie 
U)n »cr^in Berounbert fatten, ladjten in^ge^eim unb fagtenftd) n ^alblaut in 1 ^ 
• £)I)r: $&tW elenbe ©ttmme! 2Bemt er nur XteBer gefd)n?icgen ^dtte* 

Se^t er^oB bie 5^ad)tigaE in u)rem ijerBorgenen SBinfel ii)re ©ttmmc. %Ba$ 
ift ba^? riefen bie S^ogel mit Serounberung unb gfreube. SBelc^q |errli^er©e^ 
fang! Sie? ber unfd)einBare grembting ftngt fo fdjon? D, greunb, bu 
iiBertrtffjt a lie Sanger an£ieBlid)feit unb Stdrfe be3 ©efange^. ©eine ©timme 
Bef4 v ^nt bein 5lu3fef)en. 

Unfile nic^t nad) bent $[eugern. Sn etnem unfc^einBaren $Ieibe ijr oft ba§ 
ftltenfte talent ^erBorgen. ©riinm. 

* L. 51. 3 ; b L 59, 3; c L. 24. 4 ; d L. 52. 5 ; e § 50 ; f L. 33 ; * L. 
49; H. 42. ,/; * L. 29. 5; J L. 64. 6 ; k L. 49. 5 ; 1 L.49.6; m L. GS; 
6 LiD,6;°L 42. A; p L. 66. 7> q L. 13, 3. 



460 reajjing lessons. 

ii. fPiamibelfau 

1. Der ro^e <£ b elpeitu 

C£;tt ro$er (SbetjMn lag im Sanbe jroifdjen ttielen anberen gemeinen Steinen 
(Sin ftnaBe fammelle son biefen in feinem Spiel unb Brad)te fie nadj #aufe • 
jnaleity mit bem (Sbcljrein, aBer er famtte biefen nidjr. Da fat) ber $ater be$ 
Jfrtaben Cent ©piele $u unb Bemerfte ben ro^en (SbeljMn, unb fagte ^u feinem 
Sofme: gib mir biefen Stein! — Soldje3 b ttjat ber JfrtaBe unb ldd)elte, benn 
er bad)te, roa$ rottf ber Skier mit bem Stein mad)en ? 

Diefer c aBer natym unb fdjliff ben Stein in regelmdgige SXa^en unb (£(fen, 
unb ^erriidj jlrdjtte nun ber gefd^UfiFene Diamant. 

Siefje, fagte barauf ber Skter, fyter ijt ber Stein, ben bu d mir gaBeft Da 
erjtaunte ber $naBe iiBer be3 ©ejieineS ©lan$ unb tyerrlidje3 gunfeln, unb rief 
au$: 2Rem $ater, roie sermodjteft bu biefe$? 

Der $ater faradj: 3§ erfannte be$ rofjen SteineS £ugcnb unb serBorgene 
ifrdfte, fo Befreit 1 tdj ir)n son ber wpflenben Sd)Iade. — 

Darnad) aU ber $naBe ein SimgUng geroorben roar, gaB ifjm ber $atcr t^tti 
fcerebelten Stein aU SumBilb e son be3 SeBenS SBertty unb SMrbe. 

ifrummadjer. 

2. DermujHgt Magnet. 

(Sin $naBe er^ielt einen fel)r guten Magnet $um ®ef$cnf. (£r tootfte i$n f 
fdjonen unb serBarg t§n, son aHem ©ifenroerfe entfernt, forgfdltig in einem 
Sd)ranfe. %lafy langer Sett tyotte er i^n nueber einmal tyersor, urn 9?eugierigen j 
feine ihaft ju jeigen. (£r tytelt ilm an (Sifen; attein ber Magnet $og nun gar 
nidjt me^r, roeil er f burd) bie lange trdge diufyt aEe Jhaft serlcren §attc. 

3. S3 o f e r ttmgang. 

Sopljnm, ein roeifer $olf$lefyrer, erlauBte au$ feinen erroadjfencn Sofjnen 
unb £odjtern ni$t, mit fDlcnfc^cn um^ugeljen, beren SBanbel nid)t gan$ rein unb 
ftttfam roar. $dterd)en,* fagte eine3 £age3 h bie fanfte (Sulalia $u if)m, al$ 
er ityr unterfagte, in @efettf$aft be$ ©rubers bie leidjtfmnige £ucinba ju Befu* 
<$en, $aterd)en, bu rmtfjt un$ roof)l fur fel)r ftnbifdj fallen, roeil bu glauBft, 
biefer 28eg fonne un$ gefdtyrlidj roerben. SIBer ber $ater nalmt ftiUfd^roeigenb 
cine fc^on erlofdjene ^o^;le »om ^amin unb reidjte fte ber Xoc^ter ^in. Sie 
Brennt ni^t; ^inb, fagte er, nimm fie nur. £)a3 t$at (Sulalia, unb fte^e, bie 
garte, roeige §anb rourbe f^mufetg unb um>erfef)em3 au§ ba<3 roeife ®eroanb. 
Dag man bo(^ gar nid>t »orft^tig genug fein !ann, fagte (Sulalia ijerbr:e§Ii(^ f 
roenn man $cf)len Berix^rt ! 3a mo^l, fpradj ber SSater. Du fte^fr mein ^inb, 
bag bie ^o^Ie, roenn fte auc^ 1 nic^t Brennt, bo$ f^mdrjl. Slifo ber Umgang 
mit Sittenlofen. SReBau. 

• L. 43. 2; b L. 41. 9 ; c L. 10. 2; * L. 27. 2; * L. 43. 6; ' L. 28. ; 
i L. 24. 2; h L. 61. 8; J L. 63. 3: j L, 33 



READING LESSONS. 461 



4. £)te bret SBIitfe. 



(£in fnmtmr ^atttt rourbe* einjl gefragt, roofer e3 fomme, bag er, tro§ b 
after £)rangfak b?3 c M'ettf*. bod) folcfyen ©leid)mutlj in ftdj kxoatyren ronne. 
£>er d antroortere: £>a$ fommt baljer, bag e id) meine Stugen roof)l in $idji 
nefyme, benn aE?s3 33i>fe fommt burdj bie <5inne jum £er^en, abe v and) ba3 
©ute. — Sluf bie roeitere $rage, roie er ba$ mad)e, f fagte er: Seben SDtorgen, 
efje td) an bie ©efcfydfte unb unter bie 9ttenf$en ge§e, rid)te id) meine Slugen 
fcebadjtfam anf brei £)inge: (£rfren$ & ^eBc id) fie gen &immet unb erinnere mid), h 
bag mein £auptgefd)dft unb baS Biel meineS £e&en£ unb ©treknS bort often 
fei. BroeitenS * fen! 1 tdj fte pr (£rbe unb kbenfe, rote roenig dlavtm id) Be* 
barf, urn 1 einft mein ©raB barinj $u finben. £)rttten3 enbltc^ fc^au xc^ urn 
mid) unb Betradjte bie $?enge berer, k benen e$ nod) fcfyltmmer ergef)*, 1 aU mtr. 
9faf biefe 2Beife getrojte td) mid) afleS JBeibe^ unb lefte mit ©elt unb 9ftenfd)en 
jufricben in ©ott. $uerftad)er. 

5. SHeitomd^ren. 

(Ein £anbmann ging mit feinem Heinen SoJjne auf m ben 9Tcfer tjinaus, urn 
$u feljen, oB ba$ $om Balb reiffei. <Sie$, $ater, fagte ber unerfatjrene $naBe, 
tine aufred)t einige £alme ben ®o$f ■ tragen! Diefe mitffen roofyl red)t ttornefynt 
fetn; bie anbem, bie ftdj »or ifynen fo tief BMen, ftnb gerotg siel fdjledjter. 
2)er $ater pflucfte ein $aar 5letjren° aft unb ffcradj: SUjortdjteS $inb, ba fte$ 
einmal ! £)iefe $etyre $ter, bie ftdj fo ftolj in bie £otje jfretfte, ijr ganj tauft 
unb leer ; biefe after, bie ftdj fo ftefdjeiben neigte, ijr ooll p ber fdjonjrcn Corner* 

Srdgtq einer gar ju tjod) ben -ftopf, 

<£o tft er rootyl ein eitler £ropf* <S$mib* 

6* £)er erfre <Saftftatf)* 

£)er fedjste Slag ber <Sdjopfung neigte ftdj in feinem (£nbe* £)te (Sonne ^attc 
i^re S3a^n sotlenbet* 2)a3 Dunfet be^ $oenb$ kgann ft(^ iioer bie jugenblidje 
Srbe ju ijeroreiten* per erjrgeBcrene So^n ber ©(^o^fung jtanb auf* einem 
4)iigcl (£ben^, neBen i^m (£loa$, fein ©^ufeengel unb S3cgleiter» 

(£^ roarb r immer bunfler unb bunfler rings urn ben £ugel; bie Ddmmerung 
roanbelte jt$» in ^a^t, unb aertyuttete ioie ein buftiger ^^leier bie $oJen unb 
Scaler* — £)ie Sieber ber S^ogel unb bie frozen 2autt ber £§tere »er|rummteiu 
©elbjl 4 bie fpietenben £uftd)en u fc^ienen einjuf^tummem* 

3BaS ifi ba$ ? fragte ber SD^enfc^ mit leifer Stimme feinen ^immlifd)en 33e* 
gletter* SBirb bie iunge <5djb>fung aufpren unb in i^r alM S^i*tS MX* 
ftnfen ? 

(£loa^ Idc^elte unb f^ra^t (£<3 tjr bie SfJu^e ber (£rbc* v 

• L. 58; b L. 60; c L. 42 ; d L. 44. 3; • L. 50. 6; f L. 55. 5; * § 51; 
h L. 29.9; * L. 49. 5; L. 28.6; k L. 41. 3; l L. 47. 7; m § 116; * L. 
26. 10; ° L.59. 6; p L 61; q L. 53. 3. Obs.; r L. 46. 3. 4; ■ L. 29. 10 
1 L, 29 5; u L. 24. 



462 READING LE8S0HS. 

9?mt erf&tenen bte pmmltfd)en % tester: ber $conb gtng auf unb ba$ §eer bcr 
Sterne trat Beroor in piterem ©tan^e* 

£>er ^Jtenfti) fal) aufrodrtS* gen £immel mtt fitgem (£rfraunen; ber (£ngc( 
be3 £errn aBer Blttfte mtt SBoPgefatten auf b ben emporfepuenben Sop ber 
(£rbe pmteber* 'Die 9cacp roarb (litter; bie Sftadjtigatten feptgen jldrfer unb 
tonenber* 

(Sloaty Berix^rte ben SJcenfcpn mtt feinem StaBe* (Sr lagerte ftcr) an bem £it* 
gel unb fd}lummerte* £)er erfte Sraum lam ju ifym pmieber* Septal) Btl* 
bete tr)m bie ©efdptiru c 

%U nun bieSSJcorgenbdmmerung Begann, Beritpte (Sloar) ben Sdjlummernbett* 
(£r erroatpe unb finite ftdj burd)jtromt son $raft unb£eBen* Slu^ ber£>am* 
merung erpBen ftd) bie §itgel unb Spier; ba3 junge £i(p fam prnteber unb 
$ityfte auf ben SBetten ber Strome (SbcnS, bie Sonne fiieg empor unb Bradjte 
ben Sag* £)er Siftenfd) erBlicfte ba3 neuerfepffene SBeiB, bie Sautter ber£eBen- 
bigen* — Staunen unb 2Bonne erfitttten fein £erj. 

Step ! fprad) (Eloar) — au$ ber Sfcup toirb baS ©ottltdje geBoren* £)arum 
tottji bu biefen Sag ber 8htp e unb bem ©ottlicpn piligen* 

$rummacpr* 

1. Sob unb Sdjlaf* 

SSritberltdj umfdjlungen burdjroanbelten ber QEngel beS Sd)lummer3 unb ber 
Sobe3engel f bie (£rbe* (£3 roarb* SlBenb. Sie lagerten ftdj h auf etnem* £u* 
gel ntcp fern son ben SBopungen ber j SJcenfcpru (Sine roer)mu'ttyige Stitte 
roaltete rings umpr; audj ba3 5lBenbglocfd)en k tin fernen jDb'rflein serfrummte* 

Still unb fdmmgenb, rote e3 ipe SBeife tjr, l fag en bie Beiben m roofyltptigen 
©enten ber $knf(pett in traulid)er Umarmungr unb fcpn napte bie SKacp 

£)a erpB ftd) ber (£ngel beS Scr)lummer3 son feinem BemooSten £ager, unb 
f!reuete mit leifer £anb bie unftcfytBaren Scfylummerfornlein. Die SIBenbroinbe 
trugen fie $u ben flitten SBopungen be3 mitben Sanbmamte^ 9cun umftng ber 
fuge Sd)laf bie SBerooper £er lanbltdjen £ittten, ttom ©reife, ber n am StaBe 
gep Bi£ ju bem Sdugling in bcr SBtege* Der $ranfe sergag feiner Sd)mer- 
$en,° ber Srauernbe feineS Summers, bie 2lrmut§ tper Sorgen* Sitter? Slugen 
fd)loffen ft*- 

Sefet, nad) sottenbetem ©cfdjdft, legte fi<§ ber rooptptige (£ngel be$ Sd)lum- 
mer3 roieber ju feinem ernfterenq 53ruber* wSBenn bie $corgenrotp erroad&t", 
rtef er mit frofylitpr Unfc^ulb, w bann preifen' mid) bie Sttenfcprt aU tpen greunb 
unb SSoptpter! O, roeld)e greube, ungefepn unb pimltd) roo^ljutpn! 2Bie 
glMltd) ftnb roir unftd)tBarm S3oten be$ guten ©etjle^* SBie fc^on unfer (litter 
§3eru.f!" 

So fpracB ber freurtblict)e (Sngel be^ Sd)lummer^ + . Sp far) ber Sobe^engel 
mit (litter SPc^mut^ an, unb eine Spdne, roie bie UnfterBU^en fte» roeutcn, 



» o2."6; b § 116; C L. 23. 5; a L. 33; • L. 64; f L. 24. 4; * L 
46.4; h L. 29.9; 'L 20.3; J § 120; k L. 24. 2; l L. 53; m L. 65 2; 
L. 39; °L. 62,5; p L. 6L 9; q 32. 5; r L. 38. hc\ • L 41. 7. 



BEADING LEeSOJfR. 463 

trat in fein $w$z§, bunflcd Sluge. „$$,'' fora$ cr, M% idj ttt$t, tt>te bu, bed 
fro^UI-en £>aitfed mid) freuen* fann. Sfttdj nemtt bie (£rbe i&rcn geinb unb 
greubenjiorer! — * „£>, mein ©ruber," erroieberre ber Ctngel bed ©d)lafed, 
*roirb rtta>t au^ Mm (£rn)ad)en b ber ©ute in ttr fetnen greunb unb 2Bo$lt$dter 
eifennen uub banfbar bid) fegnen? ©bib t»ir ntdjt 23 ruber, unb 23oten (Eined 
SBaterd ? * 

©o fprad) er ; bx gldngie bad $uge bed Sobedeu^eld* unb $drtli$er umftngea 
ftd) d bie bruberUc^en ©enien. tfrummadjer* 



III. §telliC>4£3!U 

1. €tncr ober ber $nbere* 

3sr Selt §einridjd IV., $onigd son granfrei$, ritt einmat etn Sduertera 
ton feincm £orfe nad) $arid. 9?id)t meljr toeit son ber ©tctbt begeanctc er 
einem jtattttctyen better. 6 (£d war ber $bnig. ©etn ©cfotge roar f abfid)tli$ 
in eintger (Sntfernuna, geblieben. „2Sofyer bed 23egd, mein grcunb ? §abt 3$r 
©efdjdfte in 9>arU ? " 

„3a," anttoortete ber 33auer ; „aud) mo$te i<$ gem einmal unfern guttn 
flimia, fe^en, ber fein SSoIf fo $drtli$ Iiebt." 

£)er ilottig ladjelte unb fagte: t&ain fann (£u$ Otai§ merben." 

„2lber ttenn td) nur roiijjte, tocldjer ed iji unter ben »ielen ^ofiingen, son 
benen er umgeben fein nurb." * 

»2)ad t» ill id? eu$ fagen : 3§r bitrft nur Sprung gebcn, toel^er brn k $ut 
auf bem #opfe fce^alten nrirb, roann aHe 5lnbern flc§ e^rerBiettg tterben etttM5|5t 
$a&en." 

SHfo ritten fie mit einanber in 5)arid §inein, unb ^mar ba^ Sauerldn auf 
ber rect)ten ©eite bc^> $i>nigd ; benn road bie liebe (Sinfalt, ed fei* mil 5Xbfic§t 
ober buret) 3ufatf, Ungefd)tcftcdj i$un fann, bad t$ut fie. 2)er S3auer gab bem 
$Mg auf aUt feine graven gefprddjige ^ntroort. (Sr erjd^Ite it;m Sftandjed 
iiber ben gelbbau, and feiner §audt)altung unb hue er jutoeiten bt^ ©onntagd 
aud) fein $utynin bem £cpfe $abe, unb merfte tange ntd)td. 5(ld er aber fatj, 
tt?ie alle gentler ftd? ojfneten unb aEe ©tragen (i$ mit fW-enf^en anfiiGten, i»lc 
Sebermann e^rcrbietig k audroi^, bo, ging i^m ein £id)t auf. „3)tein §err, wl 
fagte er ju feincm unkfannten ^cgletter, ben er mit SIengftlid)!eit unb ©erwun* 
beruna, anfd)aute, „entraeber feib S^r ber H'onig, ober ic^ bin 1 d ; bmn tt?ir beib< 
Jaben aflein noc^ ben $>ut auf bem $cpfe." 

©a ldd)elte ber tfonta, unb fagte : „3d) bin 1 d/ /m S55ann 3^r Suer Stofiiin 
in bzn ©tall geiMt unb (Suer ©efd&dft beforgt l)xl)t, fo fommt in mir auf mein 
©d)IoH ; id) rotE (£uc^ bamt mit einer TOttagdfu^e aufwarten unb &n$ ben 
©auv^in jeigen. . 3otyann $aul &UL 

* L.62; b L. 49.4; c L. 10 4; d L.29. 6; e L. 64.6; f L. 48.2; r I* 
6& 2; k L, 42. */ * 65. L 3; K 14 6; * L, 34, 7; » L. 70; ■ L 28. a 



464 READING LESSORS. 

2* <Sdjer& unb <£rnft 

2Bdtyrenb a eineS ©etorg$marf<$e$ im b ftefcenid^rtgtn $rtege, ging ° Sriebridj 
ber ©roge einmal, ungebulbig itkr ba$ langfame $orritden be3 ©ef$u£e$, 
burd) ben (Sngroeg $uSujje krgan; mit ifym ber ©eneraEeutenant®vaf<5djmet* 
tau* SBd^renb biefeS serbrie pitmen ©angeS roanbelte ben $onig, um d ftd) bie 
£angeroeiie $u sertreikn, bie £ujt an, ben ©rafen, einen fe$r reiigtofen Warn, 
em roenig p neden* (Er erfunbigte fidj® nadj bejfen f SBeidjtsater in Berlin, ol> 
ftcf> berfelk nod) rootyl kfinbe unb Xieg einem Strom son Sdjerjreben nub 
©poitereien freten £auf. 

„(£tt>.& 5^a}ejtat fmb »iel tx>i^iger, al$ ic^r unb aufy fe^r »iel gele^rter,* 
erttieberte ©$mettau, al$ er enbiidj einmal $u 2Borte fommen tonnte. ,Atef>er*« 
Me3," fiigte er tyinp, „fmb Sie auc^ mein $i>mg ! 2)er geiftige tampf ijl alfo 
&nrifd)en 3fmen unb mir in jeber fftudftdjt ungieidj. £>enno$ lonnen <Ste mir 
metnen ©laufcen nic^t nefymen. Unb gelange h e$ auty ; nun! fo fatten Sie mit 
ivoax unermepd) gef^abet, after pgleid) bodj audj ftc^ feifcer ntdjt unkbeutenb 
mit." 

£>er $imig Wiefc freten 1 ux^> madjte gronte gegen ©djmettau, ba$ S5Ii|enj 
be$ k UnroiEenS in bm mddjttgen $ugen. — *Ba$ foE ba$ $ei§en SWonfteur 
<S$mettau? fagte er. »3dj foEte mir f^aben, tt>enn t$ i$m l feinen ©foufcen 
nd$me ? 2Bie meint er m ba$ ? 

Sftit unerfdjiitterlidjer 9htfje entgegnete ber (General t ,,(£nn Sttajefrdt gtaufcen 
}e|t einen guten Dfft&ter an mir p §akn, unb idj §offe ©ie irren nic^t* $onn- 
ten <£ie mir after metnen ©lauften ne^men, ba fatten ©ie ein erftdrmli$e$ Sfing 
an mir — ein fRo^r im SMnbe, roorauf ° ni$t ber mmbejie £krla£i rodre, ioeber 
Bet a3erat$f$Iagungen, nod) in ber <S$Iad)t." 

£)er $onig fdjnrieg unb ging eine 3eitlang im piUen f^a^benfen n>eiter* 
2)ann fagte er mit freunblic^er Stimme : „<Ba$t er mir bo$ <S(^mettau f roasj ijl 
eigentli^ fein ■ ©lauBe ? « 

ir3^ glauBe," fagte ©c^mettau freubig^ „an gottlic^e SJorfe^ungf bie jebe^ 
#aar auf meinem §au^)te jd^It ; an bit gb'ttlidje ©rlofung son alien meinen 
©iinben, unb an ein enrig felige^ Se^en nad) bem k %obt." 

„T)a$ glauBt i$r° njirfli^ ?* fagte ber $imig, „b<i$ glauBt er fo re$t mit 
cotter Buijerft^t?" 

„Sa, n>a^afttg, (£nn 9J?ajej!dt^ 

T)er ^onig fagte fcetoegt S(|mettau^ §anb, brudte fteP i$m r f!ar! unb 
fagte : „(5r i(t ein gliidlic^er ^enf$ ! " Qam ging er nad)benfenb toeiter, unb 
me, feit jener Stunbe, ^at er <3c|mettau^ religtofe Sfhjt^ten »erfpotiet» 



• L. 60; b 20. 4; c L. 53. 5; d L.49. 5; e L. 29. 9; f L. 44.3; * L. 27. 
3. note; h L. 55. 6; r L. 49; J L. 49. 4; k L. 42; J L. 64; m L. 27. 4; 
• L. 28. 6; • L. 27. 3. Ohs.; P L. 28. 5; q L. 41. 4, b. ; r § 129. 3. 



READING LESSONS* 46fr 

L Jbit ein&ige $rt, feme 6 greijelt $u fce^aupten, fcejleft barin, me UroaS 
&nberc£ ju rwEen, als man jbtfj bann barf man t^uttr #a<3 man tt>ilL 

ftutf<$c&c« 

2* (Sin ptes ©enuffen ift fceffer al$ $mei Beugen* @3 sersetjrt Deinen 
Summer, ate bte ©onne ba$ (Sis* <£$ tfr ein Srumten, ttenn £)id) b bitrftet, 
dn <3tab, ttetm £)u fmfefr, ein <Sdjirm, ftenn £>i$ bie ©cnne flidjt, ein $ul)e* 
fiffen im £cbe* §tpt>el. 

3» $leine greuben iafcen, n>ie $au$bxob, immer o^ne (Efel; groge* »ie 
Sucferkob, §eitia, mit (£fel* 0Ud)ter^ 

4, £>er %xitl bed ©etr>iffen$, unb bie umeriidje <£djaml)aftia.feit $cr bent 
fBofen ftnb bk <Sdjuj?ena.el beS ©uten* d £)$ne £)emut$ ijt ber SDlenfd) eine 
fttuge £itge* ©effert* 

5* gitrdjte bie ©infamfeit nid&t* @ie ijr$armIo$ rote ber reine Sftonbfdjetn, 
bejfen 6 Silkrjtreifen im $atafte beS ©ciitofen $51Itfc§e ©efpenfter, unb in ber 
■gmtte be$ grommen finelenbe (Sngel be3 pummels a&Mlben, Saper* 

6* fftimm mit (Eljrfurdjt bie SBiM in bie |>anb, benn fte entptt ©otted 
Sort* SSHffe, bie f leincn Stirrer fatten auf bem gefatymtfen 2Bege be$ £e* 
fcen§, bie feinen £rofr fatten in Bitterer 9fot$, unb feinen SSeijlanb in tfjrer lej3* 
ten <Sftmbe, benen f tt>ar bie 3HM gitfjrer, £rojl unb 33eijranb, <5te$e r bie 
fbxbtl ijr eine Gutter, roeldje atte glauMgett $inber nd^ret unb jtiHet, H% fte 
erreidjen ba$ reifere * filter einer tyot)eren * 2BelU &arm$* 

7* &1)t 2)u ein ©efdjdft untermmmft, seraBfdume nie, 31 %)mz $aT&z &*tU 
in ©ott, bem UrqueH affeS ©uten, inMnjlig * p erljekn, unb tyn urn S3ci{fom& 
unb urn ^iarfuna, Reiner eignen fdjroadjen Jhafie bemitt^ia, » an^ufle^en* 

(£ampe. 

8* SBenn £>u auf bie <SdjauM1jne J bed gefdjaftigen £e$en$ trittjr, f* k 
nwfle nidjt gldn^en, fonbern nu|en unb gtudlic^ fettu Sampe* 

9. S)ie tmtfr ijt lang, ba^ £e^en furg, ba§ Urt^eil f^aierig^ bie ©elege^ 
Beit ftudjtia.* ©ot^e* 

10* ©iele^ ! ttilnf^t ft^ ber 5Plenf$, unb bo$ Bebarf er nur ttenig; 
!Deim bie 3:age ftnb fur$, unb Bef(^rdn!t ber ©terHi^en m ©^itffal. 

©ijt^e, 

1U ©in« redji roiff en ut& aMubtn gi&t l^ere ^Bilbung aid §al^ett m 
|)unbertfdltigen* ©fit^e. 



6 L. 19. 2; b L. 57. 2; c L. 10. 3; d L. 33; e L. 39. 3; f L. 40. 6; * L. 
82. 5; h L. 53. 8; J L, 34 " ? ; j § 116; k L. 53, 2; ] L. 65 ; m L, 61. 9. 



4^66 READING LESSONS. 

12* £>er 3urd)tfame erfdjretft sor ber ©efa$r f ber gelge in i$r,* to 3fttf* 
i^ige nat§ ityr* Stickler* 

13* 2Bir Jabeu 2llk fd)on geweint; jeber ©IMUdje einmal »or 2Be$, teber 
Unaiutflicfye einmal fcor £ufh 9vid)tcr. 

14* (£§rfutdjt beftetytt Me Sugenb au§ b im S&ettlerfleib* ^djitler. 

15* 2Ber c auf ber (£rbe ofyne 23ejitmmung Ie£t, gteidjt einem ®d)iffe, d auf 
Stem trocfnen £anbe; unb mx ntd)t in baS gro§e IRab ber 5ftenfd)fyeit etna, re if., 
ber c gleidjt ben jinnernen Xaf$enu$ren ber $tnber, bte ttoji 3eiger unb Btffer* 
flatter, aber leine medjanifdjen (Eingeroetbe fyaben. £efFing* 

16* 3ur (£rit>erbung eineS ®*ii<fe$ gefyort gleijjj unb ®ebulb f unb jur (Sr* 
tyaltung beffeiben geijort SKajnguna, unb $orft$t* Sangfam unb ©djritt fiir 
©cfyritt jleigt man eine £rep:pe ^inauf; aber in einem SlugenbUcfe fdHt man 
§inab unb bringt SBunben unb <Sd)mer$ genug mit auf bte (£rbe* $ebel* 

17* <Bo f gettig ber fatten bem £id)te folgt, d fo gen>ig folgt bie £$at 
bem SBiHeitr roemt er * nur rein i|r* S3orne* 

18* Senn Du mit £>einen ©efdfligfeiten ioartefr, bi£ £)id) ber greunb an* 
fimdjt: fo erniebrigil ©u bte ©efdKigfeit ium $ftmofen nnb beinen greunb 
jum* Settler* flleifh 

19* 3m ttnglucfe erfdjeint bie £ugenb in. i^rem tyetfjten ®Ian$e. SRan 
fonnte fagen, ba§ fte 2ler)ntidje3 mit ben roitr&reidjen $flan$en §ak, bie man 
briic?t,< um h i§r n>o$lrted)enben 93atfam ab^ugeroinnen* $lofcjtocf. 

20* Slufmcrffamfeit auf unfere einjelnen £anbtungen fdjit£t un$ »or Ucbcr* 
eilung, fcor Sftadjjtdjt gegen unfere SSegierben, ttor ©leicfygiiltigfett gegen unfere 
Seller* SBtelanb* 

21* Urn fRu^e an einem femen, freunbttdjen ©ejtabe $u ftnben, mug ber 
©differ erft einen $ampf mit ben emporten Sogen bejleben* Surfer** 

22* Sftandje 9)flan$e fannnur auf einer anbern befteben unb ftdj er^alteiu 
<So manner Sftenfdj* Sflhtn erfydlt er |tdj ni$t, burd) anbere nur bejrebt er* 

Surfer*. 

23* 2Hele ftenntniffe madjen einen £§eil ber 25eba$ifamfeit unnotbig* 

Okinicfe* 

24* £>a$ unfeparjle SRtttct fid) £iebe $u erroerben, i(r (BefaHigfett. 

^P elanb* 

25* Die Religion i(t ba^ !e£te 3tel f tropin aHe unfere ©ebanfen unb §anb* 
Ittngen ge^en muffen* 2Ber bie^ noc^ nid)t geternt $at, ber roeig nic^td, ber 
lennt toeber jt^ feibftj nodj ©ott, unb if* feiner 1 eigentlidjen ®lMfeligfeit 
fd^ig* ^iopjrotf* 

* L. 28. 5; b L. 69. 5; * L. 40; d L. 64. S\ • 41. 4; f L, 69. 3; f L. 
42. jL; h L. 49. 5; * L. 61; j L, 29. 4. 



ftEADifto LifcsofcrS. 



m 



26. SBor alien Sfctgen tta^e «&er Sid), bag &u lite Me tern SiwcrfHjt 
$u 2>tr felber, * baS 2>crtrauen auf ©ottunb guie SWenfdjen »crltcrft! <3obatb b 
£ein <8cfd$rtc obcr ©e^iilfc auf Werner ©tirn 3JKgmut$ imb ©trjwetjriuifl liejl 
— fo tft SUIeS au$. @e$r oft akr tjl matt fan ttnglutf ungerecfyt geg.n bie SDfen* 
$jen. Sebe Heine obfe £aune, jebe fleiite fWienc son fldhc beutet man auf ftdj; 
man meint, jeber fe§e c e3 una an* bag »lr teiben, unb u>eidje° son ber SSifcte 
§aru<& bie fcir tym t§un fonnten. flnigge* 



• £ ft J '^ 4 1* 



h flRallleb. 



teie $errti<$ Icatye't 
SKir bie Sftatur ! 

fEBie gtdnjtbie Sonne I 
©ielafybicSforl 

€$ brtngen bie S3Iut$cn 
#u$ jebem SNetg* 



Unb taufcnb Sttmmett 
&n$ bcm ©cjlriucj. 

Hub greub 1 unb Sonnt 
STu3 icbcr Brufl. 

D €rb 1 unb Sonne, 
D ®IM unb 2-ttfL 



GKfyfe. 



2. 2)ie £$etTung ber ffir'be. 

!Re$mt $in bie Selt ! rief 3eu3 son fetnen §o§en 

£>en 9ttenf$en $u, ne^mt, fte d foil euer fein. 
€udj f$enf 1 i$ fte sum* (£rb 1 unb era'gen £e§en; 

£)o<§ ttjetlt eu$ oruberlt$ baretn. ff 

SDa eilt, tta$ £dnbe $at ? ft<§ ein$utid)tett, 

<£$ * regte fld^ gef^dftig Sung unb Sit* 
£>er 9Ctfer3mann griff nad) bed §elb*3 griid&tett 

2>er Sunfer Mrfdjte burd) ben SSBatb. 

£)er $aufmann nimmt toad feine Spei$er fa(fen> k 

£)er Slot todljtt ftdj ben ebeln gimemein. 
S)er itonig fpcrrt bie SBrutfett unb bie Stragen* 

Unb fpridjt : ber 3e§ente » tjr mein. 

©anj fpdtf nadjbem bie £$ettung langfi gefd)e|eu^ 

5fta$t ber 3>oet, er lam and toetter $ern\ 
$$! ba tsar uoeralt nidjtS metyr &u fe§en, * 

Unb alleS ^arte feinen ^errn 1 . 

• L. M 3; b L. 69. 3.7«?te; c L. 55. 6.; d L. 28. 5; • 42.,;.; r L.1 
6; «L28.9; h L* 38. a; * § 45. 2; 1 L. 40. 8; k L. 49. S. 



468 reading lMzeom* 

9BtV mix I fo foE benn i$ aUtixt son Elicit 
SSergeffen fein, 1<§ bein getreu^fter St^n? 

^0 iieg er tout ber JHage Otuf * erfcfyaEen, 
ttnb toarf fldj fin *>or SoviS £f>ron* 

SBemt bu im £anb ber £raume bi(^ semettet, * 
33erfe£t ber ©ott,\ft fabV nidjt mitjnir: 

gBo toarjt bu benn, all" man bie $3eft getyeiltt? * 
3$ tt>ar/ faradj ber $cei ki bir* 

SKein $uge tying an beinem $ngeff#te, 
$n beineS £>tmmel3 ^armonie mein Dtyr; 

&er§eity 1 bem ©eifre, 6 ber $on beinem £t$tc 
S3eraufd)t, ba$ 3rbifd)e d »er!or! e 

£Ba$ ttyun?' fyri^t 8tm — /bie 2Belt if! ioeggegefcej?,; 

£)er £erojt, bie 3agb, ber Wlaxh i|i nidjt metyr f mete* 
SBitfji bu in meinem $immel mit ntir left en, 

(Bo oft* hn fommjr, er b foil bir offen fete* 



&<$tffe? 



3* £offnung* 

©3 1 reben unb txdumtn bie J SP^enfc^en sriel 

#on oeffern fimfttgen £agen; 
fftad) einem glitctiidjen, golbenen Siel 

@tef t man k fie rennen unb jagen* 
$)ie SQBelt roirb alt unb toirb roiebcr jung# 
2>oc§ ber SUlenfdj tyofft immer $erf>efferung, 

£)ie #o fronts fiu)rt l ityn in 1 3 m £eoen ein, § 
©ie umflattert ben fro§lic$en ^na&en. 

£)en Simgttng ioc?t f ityr Qau h erfdjein,* 
<5te toirb * mit bem ©rei3 nidjt fcegrafcen | 

£)emt fcef^iiegt er im ($xabt bm miiben £auf, 

fRodj am ©raoe pflattjt er— bie §ofmmg auf. 

£$ ijt fein leerer, fc&meidjelnber SBafyxt, 
CErjeugt im ©etyirne be$ £tyoren. 

3m £erjen fihtbet e# taut fidj an : 
3u toaS p 9$ejfer.em ftnb nrir gefcoren, 

ttnb tt>a$ q bie innere (Sttmme fprid^t^ 

$>a$q taufdjt bie ^offenbe (Seete nid?t. 



GQUUt. 



• L. 61. 9; b L. 40. 8 ; e L. 64. 6. ; d L. 33. 2; • L. 38. 2; f L 
84. 10; * L. 69. 3; h L. 28. 5; * L. 28. 9; J L. 42; k L. 19; l L 
61. 4; m L. 20. 4; n L.53. 5; • L. 58; p I*. 18; q L. 40, 1. 3; ' 49. 6. 



HEADING LESSONS. 46$ 

4* £>a$ $men ber <gtetne. 

Uon Salter Mtnb, fu$r SBeba bennodj fort 
Su prebigcn bie neue fro|c SBotftyafh 
£hm Stabt &u Stabt, son Dorf §u Dorf waUtt 
2Cn fetne^ gitf rerS £anb ber fromme ®ret§ 
Hub fcrebigte ba<3 Sort mil 3imgKng3feuet. a 

(£injt leitef i$n fcin $nak in ein %%al,* 
t)a$ ukrfdV mar mit geroalf gen Steinen* 
£et$tjtnmg nte|>r, ate ooSfaft, ftrad) ber $tta$C $ 
,,(£$rrourb 1 ger $ater, iriele 2ttettf<$en ftnb 
^erfammelt §ier unb marten auf bie §>rebigt." 

Der Blintre ©rei$ erljuo fid) c alfofcalb, 
SBdtylt 1 einen £ert, erlldrt 1 i$m roanbt 1 i§n atf, 
^rmatynte, marnte, ftrafte, trofiete 
©o fyerjlidj, bag bie £§rdnen ntiibiglt$ 
3fjm d nieberfloffen in btn grauen SBart, 
$13 er Befdjlieg enb brauf ba§ ^aterunfer, 
Sie ftd) 1 3 ge$temt, e geoetet unb geftrod)en: f 
»Dein ift bas Sfteid) unb Dein bie $raft unb Deis 
Die §errlidjfeit MS in bie Qsroigfeiten," — 
Da riefen rings int %$al &iel taufenb Stimmen t 
$men, e^rnwrbiger $ater, 2lmen, %mtn I 

Der $na& 1 erf^raf ; reumiitttyig Met er niebet 
Utib fceidjtete bent §etligen bie ©rmbe. 
*<So$n," ftradj ber ©reis, »$aft Du benn nidjt gelefeif I 
SBenn 5ftenf$en fcfyroeigen, roerben ©teine f$rei 1 n?—> 
fftidjt ftotte funftig, (Sop, mit ©otteS Sort! 
£efcenbtg ijt eS, frdftig, fdmeibet fdjarf, 
£Bte ein ^roeifdjneibtg @d)roert. Xtnb foUte gtei<f 
2)aS SKeufdjentjerj ftdj itym $um %xo§ ijerjteinew, 
8o roirb im <3tein ein 2P$enf$ enters fldj regent' 

tfofegatfc*. 

6* Die Sorte be$ ©laufcens, 

Drei SBorte nenn 1 i$ euclj, infjaltf^roer, s 

<Sie gefyen son Siftunbe ju $lunbe, 
Dodj ftammen fte rnt^t son aupen |er ; 

Das £erj nur giefct bason $unbe. 
Dent SWeufdjett ijt alter SGSertt) gerauBt, h 
SBenn er nid)t mefjr * an bie brei Sorte glauot. 

*L. 24. 4; b L. 20. 3; c L. 29. 9; d §129; • L. 51. 6: ' L. 40 
; «L.24. 7; b L. 64, 1; ^,34.10. 



m 



fcSA&nm t»sso&& 



£>er SDhnfdj iji fret gefdjaffen, if* fret/ 
ilnb toitrb 1 * er in itetien geboren. 

£aj?t cud) itid)t irren bev $>obel3 ©ef$ret» 
•fticfyt ben $hjjbraud) rafenber 1 Sfyoren! 

$or bem ©ctoen, toenn er bie itette bri$i# 

©or bem freten Sttenfd&en er^iitert md)t ! 

Unb bie Sugenb, fte « tfl fein teerer <Sd)atf* 
£>er 5ftenfd) fann fie d ixbett im £eben$ 

Unb foUt er aufy* j!raud)etn itberau% 
(£r fann nadj ber gottUdjen frreben, 

Unb ioa$ fein#erfranb ber $erfrdnbigen f f!e$t* 

£)a3 itbet* in (Sutfalt ein finbli$ ©emittM 

Unb ein ©ott ifi, cin fjeitiger 2Bitfe lebt, 
2Btc and) ber menfdjlidje toanfe ; h 

$o<$ fiber ber Beit unb bem $aume mU 
£ebenbig ber fyodjjle ©ebanfe, 

Unb ob Me3 in etoigem 2BedjfcI freiPr> 

(£3 » befyarret im SBedjfel ein rugger ©eifh 

Die brei Sorte betoa^ret j end), in^altfc^rocr^ 
<Ste fcflanjetj son SEKuube $u Sflunbe, 

Unb jrammen ftc gletdj ni$t oon augen fyer, 
(£uer Snn'reS gtebt bason $unbe, 

Dem fWenffyen ijr nimmer fein 2Bert$ geraubt, 

©o k lang cr no$ an bie brd SSorte glaubt* 






differ. 



?♦ ©cfunben. 



3$ gtng im SBatbe 
@o fur mtdj tyin? 

Unb ntdjtS &u fudjen? 
Da3 toar meln ©inn* 

3m ©fatten fafj 1 id) 
Sin S3iumd)en fkftt, 

fSie ©terne leudjtenb, 
SS3ie Sleugtein fdjon, 

3d) looHt 1 e$ bre^ettp 
Da fagt e£ fein j 



©off t$ ^urn SBctfcn 
©ebro<$en fein ? 

3$ grub 1 3 mit affett 
Den SBurgletn auS, 

Sum ©arten trug ic^S 
&m pbfdjen §au3. 

Unb £flan$t e$ toiebei 
Sim filHen Drt ; 

iftun jtoeigt e$ immer 
Unb biu$t fo fort. 



®ot$e» 



* L. 5G. 2; b L. 32. 9; c L. 28. 12 ; d L. 28. 5; ■ L. 69. 5; f L 
&3; • L 53. 5; b L. 55. a. ; * L. 28. 9; J L. 50. 5; k L, 60. 8. note. 



VOCABULARY 

«?OE THE EXERCISES AND READING LESSONS. 



adj. adjective. 

adv. adverb. 

art article. 

c. or conj> conjunction 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

pi 



comp. 

/• 

imp, 

int. 

nu 

n. 

P- 



comparative* 
feminine gender* 
imperfect tense, 
interjection, 
masculine gender, 
neuter gender, 
participle. 



plural. 

prep, prepositi on. 

pm. pronoun. 

v. a. active verb. 

v. a. <fe n. active and neuter verK 

v. aux. auxiliary verb, 

v. imp. impersonal verb. 

v> ir. irregular verb. 

v. n. neuter verb. 

i>. r. reflexive verb. 



$tal, m. -e3, pL ~e, eel. 

Slbbtlben, v. a. to portray, represent. 

$benb, m. -3, pi. -e, evening, eve, 
west; -oWfldjeiw w. -3, ;?/. -, 
vesper-bell, evening-bell; -rotfj, 
«., -rotter /. evening-red, even- 
ing-sky; -rotnb, m. -e$, -3, ^. -c» 
evening-wind, zephyr. 

9Iber, co?i}'. but, however. 

STbermat or abtxmaU, adv. again, 
once more, anew. 

STbfafyren, see fafyren, /?> 348, v. n. ir. 
to set off, set out, depart. 

Slbgenutmert, v. a. ir. y to win from* 
gain. 

Stbtommen, v. n. ir., to come off, de- 
viate, lose, 

Slbmattett, v. a. to harass, weary, 

$lbpfliufettr v. a. to pluck off, gather. 

$breifen, to depart, set out. 

$bfagen» to countermand, refuse, 
decline, renounce. 

$bfcbret''bett, see fd)reiben, p. 354 ; v. 
a. ir. t to c< py, transcribe 



9tt>jt$t, /. -, />£ -en, view, inten* 

tion. 
9n>(td)lUd)» a^/. designed, purposely 

(see L. 34. 7), 
STbftetcjen, see ffetaen, p. 356; v. if. 

n., to descend, dismount, put \ip. 
31 fa, m. -t$,pl, SCebte, abbot. 
9fbroel)ren# v. a. to keep off, ward off! 
$d)! int. ah! 0! oh! alas! 
$d)fe, /. -, ^)^. -it, axle, axis. 
$d)t, eight, 
£lcfa,/. -, care, attention, outlawry; 

in 9ld)t nel)mctt f to take care. 
$d)tet, n* -3, />£. -, eighth. 
9(d)ten, v. a. to regard, attend to> 

value, deem, esteem^ take for. 
$td)titttfl, /. -, esteem, respect, esti- 
mation, regard, attention. 
Slcb^efytt, eighteen. 
$lda f m. -c, pL Reefer, field, acre. 
$cfer3mann, m. -e3, pL -leute, liufr 

bandman, tiller. 
5Xbler f ??i. -3, pi. -, eagle. 
5XbcXp^/ m. Adolphus. 
9(ed)t, ac/j/. genuine, authentic 



in 



$e$— m 



3t n t — 9t rm 



$fetyre, /. -, pi. -n, ear (of grain)* 

§Tengftltd)fett, /. *•, anxiety, unea- 
siness. 

^11 Bern, adj. silly, foolish. 

Sllbre^t, ra. Albert. 

$[ffein, ail;, alone, only; c. but* 

Mer, all (L. 65. 11% every* 

Werfcejl, best of all, very best. 

Mertet, adj, various, of all sorts. 

$Mmal)lxQ, by degrees, gradually. 

OTjUf rf<iw. too, too much, over, 

SUmofen, w. ■*$, jt>J»-*- alms charity. 

%LU, conj* than, but, when, as, like, 
except, besides, namely, <d$ 
el) en, just as. 

Sttfo, adv. thus, so; c. therefore* 

^ttjobalb, immediately, directly. 

TO, «$. old, ancient, aged. 

filter, n. -3, ^>Z. -^, age, old age. 

£(mbo§, 9w. -e$- jo/, ^e, anvil. 

£Tmen, m£. amen. 

STme'rtfa, -3, America. 

3fmertrVner, ra. ~3, ^?. -, American. 

5lmt, n. «-e3, jt>£ Slemtet, charge, of- 
fice, employment, business. 

^(n, prep, in, at, on, by, to, unto, 
with, up, about, against. 

^Tnber (ber, bie, ba3 $nbere), d$. sec- 
ond, other. (L. 65.) 

UnberS, adv. otherwise, differently. 

SCnbert^aXbr ad;, one and a half* 

§lnefbo'te. /. ■». pi. -n, anecdote. 

^fnfcmgen, see fangen, p. 348; v. «V. 
a. & ft., to begin, act, open* do. 
(L. 51. 4.) 

5lnf(el)en, v. a. to implore, entreat. 

9fnf it'll en, v. a. to fill up. 

Slngepren, v. n. to belong. 

Stngel, /. *>, pi. -tt, fishing-hook, 
angle. 

^fngeneljm, adj. agreeable, pleasant. 

£lngeftd)t, n. -e$, -3, p£. ~er, face, 
countenance. 

Kn!)altenb, adj. constant. 

2fru)angen, see tyattgen, p. 350; v. ir. 
n. y to be attached to, adhere to. 

tinier, m. -#, pi. -, anchor. 

SInrtagen, v. a. to accuse. 

%Cniommen, see fommen, p. 350; v. h\ 
n., to arrive; ** auf, to depend 
upon. 

5 3(iUuitben, anfimMgen, v. a. to pro* 
claim, announce, declare, publish. 

tefimft, /. -, arrival. 






2TttTangen, v. n. to arrive, come at* 

Stnfdjauen, v. a. to look at, regard. 

9(nja)ltlbtgett, v. a. to charge with, 
accuse of. 

^nfetjen, see fefjen, jo. 354 ; v. ir. a.* 
to look at, behold, view. 

2tnfet)ttH$# adj* considerable, import- 
ant, of consequence. (L. 34. V.) 

$nftd)t, /. -, pi. -en, sight, view, 
opinion, prospect. 

$nfpred)en, v. a. ir., to accost, ad 
dress, speak to, beg, ask. 

$nfprud), m. -e3- pi -fpritcfye, claim, 
demand; in -nefymen, to call for, 
claim, request. 

$n|Mt, /. -> pi. -^en, preparation, 
institution; ^CnftaXtcn or 9lnfialt 
tnacfyen, to make preparations, 
prepare. 

^Inftanb, m. —e$, gracefulness; sta- 
tion, stand, behavior. 

$nfratt, prep, instead of, in lieu. 

STnftrengenb* adj. toilsome. 

Slntroort, /. -, pi. - en, answer. 

5lntn?orten, v. a. to answer. 

Qtoertrcwen, v. a. to intrust to, 
confide to. 

3lnroanbeln, v. n. to come upon. (£$ 
rcanbelte t|n bie Su(l an, the desire 
came upon him ("he took a fan* 
cy," "he took it into his head.") 

$ntt>enben , v. a. to apply, employ, 
make use of, apply to. 

$ntt>efenb- adj. & p. present, those 
present. 

$n^tel)en, see $tet)en , p. 358 ; v. ir. a, 
to draw, put on, attract, interest. 

$pfel, m, -3, pL 5lepfel, apple. 

$pfelbaum P m. -i§ , ~$, ^. -Mumc# 
apple-tree. 

$prtfo 1 fer /• -* !>*. -n apricot. 

^ptifofenbaum, m. -e$, -3, jpZ. -Mu* 
me, apricot-tree. 

$pril', m. -$,. April. 

$rkti, /. -, i?/. -en, work, labor. 

SlrBeiten- «. ft*, to work, labor. 

S(r better, m. -i, ^)^. -, workman, ia« 
borer. 

3Xrg , «4;. bad, \x icked. 

STrntf a^'. poor, indigent. 

5trm, m. -es3, jo/, -e, arm. 

Slrmee',/. -, jp/. -n, army. 

Vermel , m. -$, jt?^. -, sle^^a- 

5lrmut^, /. -, poverty. 



«rt— 3to« 



Sua— 33au 



173 



&rt, f. -> />£ -en species, kind, na- 
ture, quality, propriety, way. 

STrtig . «$. polite agreeable. 

kxit, hi. -e$» jp/. SXer^te-f physician, 
doctor. 

STfdji,/. ashes. 

51tlap, m. — ffe^r j?£ ffer safcin. 

Sttmofptyd're,/. -, atmosphere. 

Shtcfy, «wy. also, too, even. 

Suf, jor<?p. on, upon, in, at, to, up ; 
-eittmal, at once, all at once; 
-bctfcj, in order that. 

§lufent§aft, m. -e$, stay, sojourn, 
delay. 

5Iufforbertt, v. «. to summon, chal- 
lenge, ask, invite. 

^Xufgabe , /. -, pi. -tt, exercise. 

Slufge^en, see get) en, p. 348. v. ir. n. 
to rise, open, see £t$t. 

2tuffjaltett, v. a. ir. to stop, hinder, 
detain. 

Sfttftjoreitr v. w. to cease, end. 

9lufmerffam, adj. attentive. 

^ufmerffatttfeit , /♦ -, pi. -ett , atten- 
tion. 

2htft>flatt&ett, t>. a. to plant, mount, 
set up. 

Sfttfredjt, a<fo>. upright, erect. 

$uffdjttetbett, see fcfytteibett, p. 354; v. 
ir. a. to cut up, cut open. 

9Tttf|>eidjertt, v. a. to store up. 

^ufftefyett , t see jietyert, ^. 356; v. ir. 
n. to arise, get up, stand open. 

Sfafjleigen, see jteigett, ^.356; v. ir. 
n. to mount, ascend, rise. 

SfotftoartS , aefo. upward, upwards. 

$uftt>artett, v. n. to wait on, attend, 
serve. 

^uftiefyett , v. a. ir. to bring up, ed- 
ucate draw up. 

2Ut$e, n -3, jpZ. — n, eye, bud; -n* 
Micf , wi. twinkling, moment ; -it 
Mttfltcfy, instaneous, instantly. 

STeugleitt, n. -&, pi. -, eye (L.24. 2). 

$lu# , prep, out, out of, from, of, 
by, on, upon, in ; adv. over, out, 
at an end, finished. 

$(u3beijttett, v. a. & r. to stretch, ex- 
tend, expand. 

SfaSbrefcfoen f see brefdjett, _p. 346 ; v. 
to thrash out. 

2(u3fmbett, see ftttbett, p. 248; v. ir. 
a. to find out. 

9tu3fitf)rett, v, a. to accomplish. 



$tt3ge£ett, see ge&ett, ^>. 348 ; v. ir 

a., to give out, spend. 
3fu3a,e$ert, see ge$en, £>. 348; v. ir 

n. y to go out, go abroad, proceed. 
StuSgrabett, v. a. ir., to dig out, ex 

eavate. 
$Iu3ljaltett, v. ir. n., to hold out, sus 

tain. 
SfaSrufen, v. w. sV., to call out, cry 

out, exclaim. 
$fot$fe|ett, n. -$, face, appearance. 
2luJ3ett, adv. out, on the outside, 

without, abroad. 
Sleugere (ber, bie, ba3), adj. outward, 

exterior, outside. 
Slugerfjalft, prep. & adv. abroad, 

without, out of, outside, beyond. 
SfuSfrrecfyett, see fprec^ett, p. 356; v. a. 

& n. ir., to pronounce, utter, ex- 
press. 
$ttftra'liett, n. -3, Australia. 
SIu^uben P v. a. to exercise, practice, 

execute, perpetrate. 
SfuSroanbern, v. n. to emigrate. 
$tu$XDU&)tn, v. a. ir., to give way, 

turn aside, evade, avoid. 
2lrt, /. -, pi. 2(exte, ax, hatchet. 

93ad), ra. -e$, pi. $$a<$t, brook. 

SBatfen, v. ir. v., to bake, dry, p. 346. 

2M(fer, m. -3, pi. -, baker. 

33abett, v. a. to bathe. 

33aljtt, /. -, pi. -en, way, road, ca- 
reer, course, 

Setter, rn. -tt, pi. -tt, Bavarian 

33aiertt, n. -$, Bavaria. 

33 alb, acfo. soon, early, nearly. 

Sail, m.-t$,pl. 33dtte, ball. 

SBalfattt, m. -3, pi. -e, balm, balsam. 

SBattb, n. -e3, jt>£. 33dttber, ribbon, 
string; m. pi. 33dttbe, volume. 

33dttbia,ett, v. a. to tame, break. 

33attf, /. -,pl. 33dttfe, bench, seat. 

33aittter, m. -$, pi. -, banner. 

33 dr, m. -ett, pi. -ett, bear. 

33arfe, /. — , pi. -tt, bark, barge. 

S3 art, m. -e$, -3, pi. 33 arte, beard. 

SBauett, v. a. to build, raise ; Jig. auf 
eittett -, to rely upon one. 

'SBauer, m. -^, j?/. -it, peasant. 

33duerleitt, n. -3, j?£. -, peasant. L, 
24. 1. 

SBaum, ?». -c$, i>/. 33dume, tree. 



4*? 4 



Salt— Set 



Set— 8ef 



SBaitftetfler, m -3, pJ -, architect. 

SBaumwolIe • /. -, cotton. 

SBeifem «. -3, pi -# basin. 

Sebadjt'fam, 0//. considerate. 

33eba t)t'famrett. /. -, circumspection, 
caution, prudence. 

Stbcttt'ern, 0. a. to pity. 

S8ebecf'en, a. to cover, shelter. 

SBebenf'en, a. «. ir., to consider, re- 
flect upon, mind. 

SBebten'te, m. -n# />/. —it, servant. 

SBebitr'fen, see burfen, p. 346; v. ir. n. 
to need, want. 

SBeburf tig, a$. wanting, in want of. 

SBefefyl', m. -t$, pi. -e, command. 

SBefefy'len, v. ir. a., to command, or- 
der, charge, desire, p. 346. 

SBefte'bert, plum aged. 

SBeftn'ben, see finbcn, p. 346; v. ir. u. 
to find, think; v. ir. r., to be; 
tote - fie ftdj, bow do you do? 

SBcflet'pettf ?>. ir. r. to be studious of. 

SBefrei'en, v. a. to free, deliver. 

£3ege'ben, see geben, p. 348; v. ir. r., 
to betake. 

§3egeg'nen, v. w. to meet. 

f8ege|'en, see gefyen, p. 348; v. a. tr., 
to commit. 

Hkgel/ren, v. a. to desire, demand. 

SBegier'oe, /. -/ pl.-xii desire, lust. 

SiBetftn'nen, ». a. <fc n. ir., to begin, 
do, undertake. 

SBeglet'ten, v. a. to accompany. 

SStgtet'ter, m. -3, p/. -, companion, 
attendant, follower, guide. 

SBegra'bcn, see graben, p. 350; v. ir. 
a., to bury. 

SBegrct'fenr see gretfen, jt>. 350; v. ir. 
a., to feel, comprehend, under- 
stand. 

iBefyat'tcn, see tyatteit, ^?. 350; v. ir. a. 
to keep, retain. 

§3ef)an'Deln, v. a. to treat, manage. 

83efyav'ren, v. n. to continue, persist, 
insist, persevere. 

53efyaup'ten, v. a. to affirm, maintain, 
pretend. 

33et, />rep. at, near, beside, by, on, 
with, to, in, in the presence of. 

S8etd)ten, v. a. & n. to confess. 

£3eut)tttater, m. -3, pi. -»ater, con- 
fessor. 

SBeioe, « $. both, twd ; Feinet von -, 
e either of the two 



SBetfommeit, see fommen, p. 350; a 
i?\ n., t* get «it. 

§3etn, n. -e£, j?^. -e, leg, bone. 

SBeiftriel, n. -eS# pi. -e, example, in- 
stance, pattern ; jum -, for exam- 
ple, for instance. 

23et]ien, p. 346; v. a. to bite. 

SBctftctnb, m. <-e$, — 3, assistance. 

33ei)lefyen, v. n ir. y to assist. 

33etfttmmen, v. n. to agree with, as- 
sent to. 

SQtitoo^ntn, v - w « to DQ present at 
assist. 

SBefann'te m. &/.-n, pJ.-n, acquaint 
ance. 

23eflct'gen, v. r. to complain. 

23ela'gertmg, /. -, -en, siege. 

23elcf btgen, v. a. to offend, insult 

23ellen, v. n. to bark. 

SBeloI/ncn, 0. a. to reward. 

S3elcl/nung, /. -, jd/. -en, reward. 

SBemer'fen, v. a. to perceive, mark, 
observe, note. 

SSemooff, adv. mossy. 

SBenei'oen, v. a. to envy. 

SSeno'tfyigt, adj. in need, in want. 

SBeratl/fdjlagung,/.-, pi. -en /consult- 
ation, deliberation. 

SSercm'uen, v. a. to rob, plunder. 

§Beraufd)i', frenzied, intoxicated. 

23erc'ben, v. a. to persuade. 

SBereitS, adv. already. 

33ereu'en, v. a. to repent, regret. 

33erg, m. -e3, pi. -e, mountain. 

SBergcm', bergauf, adv. uphill. 

33ergen, p. 346; v. ir. a. t to save, 
conceal. 

23erlt'n, n. -c t Berlin. 

SBeruf, m. -e^, -c, pi. -z f vocation, 

S3eru^mt , > ac?;. celebrated. 

S3eritfy'renf f. a. to touch, handle, 
mention, hint at. 

S3efd)d'men, v. a. to shame; Jig. to 
excel, be superior to. 

SBefcfyei'ben, adj. modest. 

SBefdjlie'tfen, to decree, determine. 
resolve, to finish. 

3Befd)ran'ren, v. a. to confine, limit, 
bound, restrain. 

S3efd)rei'i>en, see fd)retBen, p. 354 ; v 
ir. a., to describe. 

SBefcfyitl'Dtgen, v. a. to accuse. 

33efen, m. -$, pi. -, broom. 

Skfie'gen, v* a. to vanquish, conquer, 



SPefl — Sift 



Cift— 53re 



m 



Sefttp'cn, see u^en, p. 354 ; * ?V. a., 
to possess. 

93ef?r\jen, v. a. to take care of, pro- 
vide, apprehend, fear. 

SBcftan'bta, adj. constant, durable. 

9Beftdt'tgett# v. a. to confirm. 

93*fte (ber, Me, ba*) f adj. best. 

SScjle^'eit/ see jlefyen, jo. 356; v. ir. a. 
& »., to suffer, be, endure, con- 
sist of, encounter ; - aitf, to in- 
sist upon. 

SBeftet'len, v. a. to order, appoint. 

§3e|M'img, /. -, pi. ett, order, com- 
mission. 

Sefttrn'mung,,/*. -, pl.-tn, determin- 
ation, destination, destiny. 

33ejlra'fen, v. a. to punish. 

33efu'd)en, r. a. to visit, see, frequent, 
go to see. 

S3etcn, v. a. db n. to say a prayer, to 
pray. 

33etvad/ten, v. a. to look upon, con- 
template, consider. 

S3etrad)t'img, /. -, pi. -en, view, con- 
sideration. 

SBetra'gen , see tragen , p. 356 ; v. ir. 
a. to amount to ; v. ir. r. to be- 
have one's self. 

33etra'gen, n. -3, conduct, behavior. 

S3etru'bt, a<//. afflicted, sad. 

23ctru'ge%p. 346; to cheat, deceive. 

23ett, n. -e3, pi. -en, bed. 

23etteln, v. n. to beg. 

33ettter m. -3, jo/. -, beggar. 

SBcttlerftcib , n. -e3, -3, #/. -er, beg- 
gar's di ess. 

23erc>ad)'en, v. a. to watch, guard. 

SSewajfnen, v. a. to arm. 

23ett)al/ren , v. a. to keep, take care 
of, preserve, guard. 

SBeroe'gen, v. a. to move, excite. 

35eix>e4,t, adj. moved, touched. 

23en)et/ner, m. -$, pi. -> inhabitant. 

SBen>un'bcrrtr v. a. to admire, wonder. 

SBenwn'Deruna,,/. -# admiration. 

SBttMijHr adj. known, conscious of, 
— feitt, n. consciousness. 

23e}td)'ttgett , v. a. to charge, accuse. 

SBe&itdb'ugen, see bejtd)tio,en. 

&iM,f.-,pl. -n, Bible. 

SSiene, / jo/, -n, bee. 

§3ier, ». -e$, -3, jo/, -e, beer. 

S3 lib , n. -e3 , pi. -er, image, idea, 
representation, portrait, picture. 



S3 lib en , v. a. to form, cultivate, civ- 
ilize, improve. 
33ttbimg,/.-, pl.-tn, culture, learn- 
ing, accomplishment. 
23inbe, /. pi. -n, band; -tt>ort # n. 

conjunction. 
23utben, p. 346; v. ir. a. to bind, tie. 
SStrne, /. -, pi. -it, pear. 
23trfd)en , v. a. to shoot, go a shoot 

ing, shoot with a rifle. 
S3t3, adv. & conj. till, until ; M3 an 

-auf, -px f up, to, as far as. 
93tttc,jT. i?J. -n, request, entreaty, 

petition, suit, 
bitten, p. 346 ; v. ir. a. to beg, pray, 

request, entreat, invite. 
§3ttter, adj. bitter, sharp. 
S3lafen, p. 346 to blow. 
33latt, n. -e3, pi. flatter, leaf. 
33 latter, /. -, pi -n blister ; bie -n, 

pi. the small-pox. 
SSlau, adj. blue. 
S3(ei, n. -e3, -3, lead. 
SSleiben, #. 346; v. ir. n. to remain, 

continue, perish. 
S31etd), apj. pale, faded. 
SMetfUft, m. -e3, ^/. -e, pencil. 
S3ltcf, m. -e3, pi. ~e, look, glance. 
33Uc£en, v. n. to glance, look. 
S3ltnb, adj. blind. 

§3ltt?en, v. n. to lighten, flash, gleam. 
SBlume, /.-, pi. -tt, flower; -u'cjarten, 

wi. flower-garden. 
S3lumd)en, w. -3, jo/. -, floweret. 
SBlittfye, /. -, pi. -n, bloom, flower. 
SBlutio,, adj. bloody. 
SBcben, m. -3, pi. S35ben, ground, 

soil, bottom, loft, garret. 
95oa.en, m. -3, pi. -, bow. 
33oi)ne, /. -, pi. -n, bean. 
S3o|rer, m. -3, p/. -, auger. 
S3ofe, adj. & adv. bad, ill, wicked, 

hurtful, angry, sore. 
33o$fyaft, adj. malicious, wicked. 
SBote, m. -n, pi. -n, messenger. 
SSotfc^aft,/. -,^« -^n, message. 
S3ottd)er, m. -3, jo/. -, cooper. 
23raud)en, v. a. to want, need, use. 
S3rcmer, m. -«3 p^. ~, brewer. 
S3rann, ac?/. brown. 
SBraufcrtf v. n. to rush, roar, buzz. 
23red)en, jo. 346 v. ir. a. & n. to 

break. 
23reit# a#. brf/ao^ large, wide. 



476 



Srem— Dalj 



Dofy— £cm 



33remett, w. -8, Bremen. 

§3rennen, p. 346; i. £r. a. & n. to 
burn, scorch, parch, distil, cau- 
terize, brand. 

SBrett. n -eg, pi. -er, board. 

SBrtef, m. -eg, j?Z. -e, letter; -papier, 
letter-paper. 

SBringen , p. 346. v. &r. a. to bring, 
carry, convey, bear; an jtdj -, to 
acquire, get possession. 

SBrob, w. -eg, _pZ. -e, bread, loaf. 

SBrM e, /. -, ^. -tt, bridge. 

Bruber, m. -g , pi. SBriiber, brother. 

33ruberZtdj, adj. brotherly, frater- 
nal ; -umfcfyitmgett, in fraternal em- 
brace. 

SBruffett, v. n. to roar, low. 

SBrunnen, m. -g, pi. -, well, spring, 
fountain. 

33rujr,/. -, pi S5rujle, breast. 

SBrufhtctbel, /. -, pi. -n, breast-pin. 

23ud), n. -t$,pl. S8iid)er, book, quire; 
-Mttber, m. bookbinder; -|dnbler, 
m. bookseller, stationer. 

SBitdje, /. -, pi. -en, beech. 

23 Men, v. r. to stoop, bow. 

33mtbeg$enog, m.-tn, pl-tn, confed- 
erate, ally. 

SBiirger, m. -$,pl. -, citizen. 

SBitrjle, /. -, pi. -n, brush. 

33ufdj , m. -eg , pZ. SBiifdje , bush, 
thicket. 

Gutter, /. -, butter. 



dtyctraf'ter, m. -g, jt>£. — te're, charac- 
ter. 
<£$rtfl'en$ett, /. -, Christendom. 
£oupne,/. -,^£. -n, cousin. 



Da, at?v. <fc cow;, there, present, 
then, at that time, when, as, 
while, because, since. 

Qabti'r adv. by that, thereby, there- 
with, thereat, near it, present. 

Dad), n. -eg, pi. Ddcfyer, roof. 

Daburdj, adh. by this, by that, 
through it, through that place. 

Dafit'r, adv. for it, for that, instead 
of that. 

Dafyer', adv. & c. thence, hence, out 
o p that, therefore. 



Dafjtn', adv. thither, there, away, 

down, gone, past; -jrrecfen, to 

stretch out, spread out. 
Dame, /. -, pi. -n, lady. 
Damit', adv. & conj. therewith, with 

it (this, that), by it, by that, in 

order. 
Ddmmerung, /. -, twilight, dusk. 
Dampf, m. -eg, pi. Ddmpfe,- steam, 

vapor, smoke, fume. 
Dane, m. -n, pi -n, Dane. 
Dan!, m. -eg, thanks, reward. 
Danfbar, adj. thankful, grateful 
Danfen, v. a. & n. to thank. 
Dann, adv. then, thereupon. 
Daran', adv. thoreon, thereat, on it, 

at it, by it. 
Daran f, adv. thereon, thereupon, 

on that, on it, upon it, at that, 

to that, it, after that; ft 4 -fd)nnn* 

gen, to leap upon, swing upon. 
Daraug', adv. thereout, out of that* 

therefrom, thence, from this, of 

this. 
Darein', adv. therein, into it ; jtd) - 

ttyetfen, to shar$ therein. 
Darin', adv. therein, in that, in this, 

in it, wherein. 
Darnad/, adv. after that, upon that, 

for that, for it. 
Darum, adv. around that, for that, 

for it, therefor. 
Qad, art. the ; prn. t^at, which. 
Dag, conj. that; - ni$t, lest; Mg -, 

till. 
Dauern, v. n. to last, continue; v. a. 

& imp. to grieve, cause to pity; 

ifjr bauert mid), you grieve me, 

I pity you. 
Dauphin, m. -g, dauphin, crown- 
prince, eldest son of the kings of 

France. 
Datton', adv. thereof, therefrom, of 

that, of it, from it, whereof by 

it, off, away ; -jagen, to hasten 

away. 
Da$n', adv. thereto, to that, fo* kK^t* 

for it, at that. 
Decfel, m. -g, pi. -, cover. 
Decfen, v. a. to cover, screen. 
Dein, prn. poss. thy. L. 12. 2. 
Demant, see Dtamant. 
Demofrtyeneg, m. Demostnenes. 
Demutf),/. -, humility, meekness 



Dem— £rart 



£ratt— Styr 



411 



©emitting, adj. humble, meek. 
£>enfen, p. 346; v. ir. a. <fe n. y to 

think (of, upon, cm, auf), to mind, 

reflect upon. 
£>enffprud), m. -e£, -3, pi. -frritdje, 

sentence motto, maxim. 
<Denn, conj. for, then, than ; e3 fet - 

ba$, unl5ss, if, provided, 
©emtodj, conj. yet, however, not- 
withstanding, nevertheless. 
£cr, zrt, the; ^rn. this, that, who. 
<Deret'ttjr, a^y. once, in the future. 
©erientge, biejentge, bc^ientge, pra. 

demonstr. he, that, 
©erfetoe, btefel&e, baffetBe, jmti. the 

same, he, she, it, that; eben-, 

the very same. 
<De3§aI&, adv. therefore, for this 

reason, on that account. 
JDeffentTOiffen, prep. &prn. therefore, 

on that account. 
£>efto, adv. the; - kffer, the better, 

so much the better. 
£)euten, v. a. to explain, interpret; 

— , v. n. to point. 
£)euttidj, adj. clear, distinct. 
<Deutfd), a$. German. 
£)eutfd)lanb, n. -6, Germany. 
©tctmcmt', m. -en, pi. -en, diamond. 
£)tcf, ao/. thick, big, large, stout. 
£)iefc, m. -e3, jo/, -e, thief. 
£)tener, m. -3, jt?/. -, servant. 
2)tenjr, m. -e$, />/. -e, service, office, 

employment; -e neljmen, to enter 
-service. 
5Dtenjtmdbdt)ett/ m. -3, _pj. -, servant- 
girl. 
£tte3|ett3, «cfy. on this side. 
£)tefer, £)tefe, SHefeS, jsm. demons. 

this (L. 10). 
£)tng, n. -e$, -3, j?J. ~e, thing, affair, 

matter. 
S)o$, con;, yet, however, never- 
theless ; but. (L. 69. 11). 
©otdji m. — cdr jt>£. -e, dagger. 
£)om, m.-e3, jt>l-e, cathedral, dome. 
©omtern, v. n. to thunder. 
£)o£pett, adj. double, twofol-d; adv. 

doubly, twice. 
•Dorf, n.~t$,pL 2)5rfer, village. 
SDom m. -eg, jo/, -en, <fc ©enter, thorn. 
©ort, ac?y. yonder, there; -often, 

there, above, up there, 
©rcmcjen, v. a. to throng, press. 



£wi3fctl, n. -e<3, -3, i>/. -e, calamity. 

©rctuf, see ©ctrcmf. 

©reljett, v. a. & r. to turn, revolve. 

©ret, three ; -mal, adv. three times. 

©retjjjtcj, thirty. 

©reftfjert,_p. 346; w. *r. «. to thrash. 

Drifter, m. -3, pi. -, thrasher. 

©vcyben, 7i. -3, Dresden. 

©ringen, v. w. ir. to press forth 
crowd, urge, penetrate. 

©rittel, n. -3, joZ. *-, third. 

£>ritten3, thirdly. 

©ro^en, v. w. to threaten. 

©rucf, m. ~e3, ^. -c, pressure. 

©rMen, v. a. to press, squeeze, op- 
press. 

©u, #nz. thou. 

©ufttcj , a$. vaporous, fragrant. 

^umm, adj. dull, stupid. 

T)\mM, adj. dark, obscure. 

©imfel, n. -3, darkness, obscurity. 

©unfel^eir, /. -, darkness. 

©tmjt , m. ~e3 , _p/. ©ihtfte , vapor, 
steam. 

©urd), jorep. through, by means of. 

©urdjjrro'men, v. n. to permeate. 

©ttrcfytoan'betn , v. n. to wander, or 
pass through, or over, to tra- 
verse. 

©itrfen , to be allowed, be permit- 
ted, be able, need. (L. 45. 4. & p. 
346.) 

©ur jlen , ©itrjlen , v. n. <fc imp. to 
thirst, be thirsty. 



(SB en, adj. & adv. even, level, plain, 
even, just, exactly, precisely, ctl$ 
-, just as. 

<£cfe, /. -, pi. -n, corner, edge. 

(£bel, adj. & adv. noble, precious, 
choice ; -mittptcj, adj. noble, mag- 
nanimous. 

(Sbetjtein , m. -e$ , pi. -e , precious 
stone. 

(Sben, n. -§, Eden, paradise. 

(Sfye, adv. ere, before. 

(Sfyer, adv. sooner, rather. 

(£§re, /. -, jo^. -tt, honor. 

(£t)rer5tettgf adj. reverent, respectful, 

(Styrfurdjt, /. -, veneration, awe, rev« 
erence. 

&§x\\§t ad/, honest, faithful. 



478 



s^r— m 



ma— snt 



(£$rft>{trbl(}, adj. reverend, venerable. 

(£i ! int. eh ! hey ! ay ! 

(£t$e,/. -, pi. -n. oak. 

(£i$en, adj. own, self, proper, pecu- 
liar, singular, strange, accurate; 
-tyett , /. property, peculiarity ; 
-nu^ig , adj. seltish ; -jtimtg , adj. 
capricious, willful, obstinate. 

(Etgem(td), proper, exact, real. 

(Stien, j. n. to hasten, hurry, speed. 

(Etrt, ar£. a, an; ae?/. one. 

©tncm'ber, adv. one another, each 
other. 

(Etnerlet, the same. 

©infalt, /. -, simplicity, silliness. 

(Stnfalrig, adj. simple, silly. 

(Sinfitfyren, v. a. to introduce, im- 
port, conduct. 

(£ma,ett>eibe, n.-$,pl -n, inwards, 
entrails, intestinas. 

(Sngfteg , m. — e^ , pi -e , defile, nar- 
row pass. 

(Smcjretfcn, v. n. ir. to catch, lay 
hold of, exert influence, inter- 
fere. 

(Eintger, ©huge', ©tnigeS, prn. some, 
any. 

(£mmat, adv. once, one time. 

(£ijmi)ten, v. a. & r. to set right, ar- 
range, adjust; ftdj enrtcfyten, to 
accommodate, establish one's self. 

(Ein3, adj. one, one thing, one and 
the same. 

©infant, adj. solitary, lonely. 

(Stnfamfeit , /. -, pi. -en , solitude, 
reti redness. 

(SinfijUimmem , v. n. to fall into a 
slumber, fall asleep. 

©tnfammeln, v. a. to gather in, col- 
lect. 

©tnftebler, m. -3, pi. -, hermit. 

©trtft, adv. once, one day, one time. 

©tnjMen, v. a. to suspend, stop; 
v. r. to appear. 

(5ttm>of)ner, m. -3, pi. ~, inhabitant. 

©ut;eltt, adj. single isolated. 

©itt.ia., adj. onl} r , single, alone. 

©t3, n. -eg, ice, ice-cream; -bar, m. 
polar bear. 

©ijen, n.-$ f iron; -tt)erf , n. -3, iron 
work. 

©tferit, aiy. iron. 

(Site I, at?/, idle, vain, frivolous. 

©item, v. w» to fester. 



CEfel, m. -$, aversion, disgust. 
©knb, w. — ee\ misery, distress. 
©lenb, ac?y. miserable, wretched. 
©lepfyant, m. *-en, #Z. —en, elephant. 
6ttc, / -, j>*. -a, elL 
GStoaty, m. Eloah. 
©Item, pi. parents. 
©mvfm'gen , p. 346 ; v. ir. a. to re- 
ceive, take, accept. 
(Empfefy'len, .p. 346 ; v. ir. a to record- 

mend. 
©mftor', acft;, on high, upward, up 

aloft. 
©mpo'ren, v. «. to stir up, excite ; -, 

v. r. to rebel, revolt. 
(Empo'rer, m. -3, jo£. -, rebel. 
©mpor'ragen , v. n. to tower up. 
©mpor'fcfyauen, v. n. to look or gaze 

up. 
©mpor'ilet^en, v. n. ir. to rise, mount. 
(Enbe, n. -3, pi. -n, end, aim. 
©nbltd) , adj. finite, final ; adv. at 

last, finally. 
(£ng or ©nge, a$. narrow, tight, 
©ngel m. —3, pi. -, angel, 
©nglanb, n. -6, England. 
©ngldnber, m. -$,pl. -, Englishman. 
©nglifd), adj. English. 
©Mblofjen, v. a. to uncover, bare. 
©lttOlojjr', ad/, destitute, deprived 

of, p. see entblonen. 
(Sttte, /. -, pi. -n, duck. 
©ntfer'mma,, /. -, jo/, -en, distance, 

removal, departure. 
©ntferm', ad/, distant, remote. 
©ntgc'gen, jor^p. <fe adv. against, op 

posite. 
©ntgeo/engefyen, v. n. ir. t to go to 

meet. 
©ntgeg'nen, v. n. to answer, reply. 
©ntfyai'ten, r. a. ir. to contain, com 

prehend; v. r. ir. to abstain from, 

avoid. 
©nt^e'ben, see fyekn, jo. 350; v. ir. a. 

to exempt from. 
(Sntle'oigen, v. a. to release. 
©ntrtn'nen, see rtmten, ;?. 352 ; v. i.\ 

n., to run away, escape, 
©ntfa'gen, v. n. to renounce, resign. 
©ntfd)la'fen, see fi)lafen, p. 354; v. ir. 

n., to fall asleep, expire. 
(Erttf$la'0cn# see fc^lagen, p. 354; w, 

tr. r., to got rid of, divest. 
©ntfd)lie 'pen, see ftyliefen, p. 354; ft. 



ffntfl— ®rf Crf— Cfd 4T9 

If. a., to unlock, disclose; #- r. to (Ertofdj'eit, v. n. m\, to go out, be ex- 
resolve, determine. tingxaished, expire. 
2ntfte'f)en, see jtefcen, jt>. 358, t>. ir. (Srfo'juifig, f.-,pl-zn, redemption, 

n., to arise, originate. deliverance, salvation. 

(Entroe'oer, cow/, either. (Srmor'oen, v. a. to murder. 

Csmur-ei'en, v. a. to disunite, set at (Ermafj'nen, v. a. to exhort, admonish. 

variance; t>. r. to quarrel. remind. 

(&t, prn. he, it. (L. 28. 5.) (Erme'brigen , v. a. to lower, abase; 

(Erbar'mett, t\ r. to pity, have mercy. v. r. to humble one's self. 

Sr&drm'Ud), ac?/. pitLul, miserable, (Srnjr, <£ntjt$;tjr, (SrrtftooK, a$. earxa- 

w retched, est, serious, grave, stern. 

Srbe, w. -3, inheritance, patrimony. (Entte,/. -, p£. -it; harvest, crop. 

(Srben, v. a. to inherit; v. n. to de- (Ero'berer, m. -3, jp^. ~, conqueror, 

volve by inheritance. (Errei'd)ett, v. a. to reach, attain. 

(Erbtt'ten, v. a. ir., to get, or try to (Erret'tett, v. a. to save, rescue. 

get by entreaty. (Erricfy'tert, v. a to erect, build up, 

(Erbii'tevung,/. -, jpJ. -en, animosity. (Erfaty, m. -e3, compensation. 

(Erblufen, v. a. to descry, see, view. (Erfdjal'ten, v. n. ir. to sound, resound* 

(Erbfe,/. -, jt>/. -en, pea. spread. 

CErbe, /. -, pi. -it, earth, ground. (Erfd)et'iten, j?. 348 ; v. ir. n. to appear. 

(Eretc/nert, v. r. to happen, chance. @rfcfjle'jjctt , see <3d)ie^en, i?. 354; v. 

(Erftt'ben, see ftnben, j?. 348; v. ir. «., ir. a. to shoot. 

to invent. (Erfd)re'den, v. a. to terrify, fright- 

(Erful'lea, v. a. to fill, do, fulfill. en; v. r. ir. to be terrified, be 

(Ergc'ben, see geben, p. 348; v. ir. r., frightened. 

to surrender, submit, devoted, (Erfe^'en, v. a. to supply, replace. 

addicted, given. (Erft, adj. & adv. first, prime, at 

(Erge'fyen, v.n.ir. y to happen, befall ; first, before, only, not till. 

r. imp. to go, fare with. (Srftou'nen , v. n. to be astonished, 

Qtrgrei'feit, see $mfen, p. 350; v. ir. amazed. 

a., to seize, catch. (ErftenS, adv. first, in the first place. 

CErfyal'teit, see l)alten, p. 350;, v. tr. a. (Srfu'djen, v. a. to entreat, request. 

k n. % to keep, maintain, save, (Errrm'fen, see trlnfett, p. 356; v. ir. m, 

receive, get, gain. to be drowned, drown. 

(ErfyaKumg, /. -, preservation, main- (£rtoa'd)en, v. n. to awake, appear 

tenance, support. (Emad)'fen, adj. full gro .rn, adult. 

iEr^e'ben, v. a. ir., to raise; v. r. ir. y (Ermcuynen, v. a. to mentkn. 

to rise, arise. (Emar'ren, v. a. to expect, await. 

(Erin'ttern, v. a. to remind, mention ; (Erfted'en, v. a. to awaken, rouse. 

v. r. to remember, recollect. (Snttet'djen, v. a. to soften. 

(Erfal'ten, v. r. to catch cold. (Erttet'fen, see wctfen, jo. 358 ; v. ir. d„ 

©rfcn'nertf see femtcn, p. 350; v. ir. to show, do, render; v. r. to 

a., to perceive, distinguish, re- prove. 

cognize. (Emergen, v. a. ir. to acquire, earn, 

(Evfla'rert, v. a. to explain, interpret, gain, obtain. 

define, declare. (ErnxT'bung,/. acquisition. 

(Erflei'terrt, v. a. to climb. (Srttne'bent, v. a. to answer, reply. 

(Erftm'bi^en, v. r. to inquire, make (Er^'Ien, v. ,t. to tell, narrate, re- 

inquiry. port. 

(Srlau'ocn, v. a. to permit, allow. (Er^eu'gett , v. a. to beget, produce, 

(Erlie'gen, see lv.Qtvc t p. 350; v. ir. n. y engender. 

to succvmb, be subdued, sink (Ev^ie'fyer , m, *-3, pi. -, instructor. 

under. master, governor. 

{£r$it'tern# «. n. to tremble, shake. 



480 



®a— %tini 



getnt— %\u% 



<£$, prr* it, so. 

(£fel, m. -0, ^£. -, ass, donkey. 

(Effen, j9. 348 ; v. ir. a. to eat. 

(Sfftg, ra. -3, vinegar. 

(Etlid^e, adj. some, any, several. 

(Ettt>a§, prn. something, somewhat, 

some, any, a little. 
(£u<§, you, to you. 
(Euer, euere, euer, _p?7i. your. 
gitla'lict/. Eulalia. 
(Eule, /. -, #£. -n, owl. 
<£uro'pa> n. -3, or en3, Europe. 
(Europd'er, m. -3, jt>Z. -, European. 
(£tt)., your. L. 27. 3. 
(Snug, a$. eternal, everlasting. 
(Ehnojett, /. -# eternity. 



gaM, /. -/ pi -n, fable. 

gdcljer, m. -3joZ. -, fan. 

gdf)i$, a<$ able, apt, fit, capable. 

gatyren, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to drive, 
carry, convey ; v. ir. n. to move 
quickly, run, start, rush, to go 
in a carriage, to sail, navigate. 

gatfen, p. 348; v. ir. n. to fall, de- 
cline, fail. 

galfd^eit, /. -, pL -en, falsehood. 

gamt'lte, /. -, pi. -n, family. 

gangen, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to catch, 
take, seize. 

garbe,/. -, pi. -n, color. 

garden, v. a. to color, dye. 

gdrber, m. -£, J?;. -, dyer. 

gap, w. -ffeS, ^t gaffer, cask, barrel. 

gaft, acfo;. almost 

gaffen, v. a. to seize, contain; v. r. 
fast to collect ones self; recover. 

gaul, adj. putrid, lazy, idle. 

gaulljeit,/. -, laziness, idleness. 

geftrua'r, m. -3, />£. -e, February. 

ged)ien,^>. 348 ; v. ir. n. to fight, fence. 

geber,/. -, pi. -n, feather, pen. 

gegen, v. a. to sweep, cleanse. 

geljlen, v. n. to fail, miss, err, mis- 
take, to be wanting, want, to be 
deficient ; ttctS fe^lt Stynen ? what 
ails you ? 

get)ler, m. ~§ jt>£. -, fault, error. 

getg , adj. coward, faint-hearted. 

getn, adj. fine, delicate, pretty. 

getttb, adj. hostile, inimical. 

geinb, m. ~e8, pi. e, enemy. 

getriolt'i), adj. hostile, inimical, 






gembfettoMt,/. -, pi. -en, hostility. 

gelb, n. -e3, pi. -tr, field, plain; 
-Mume,/. wild-flower ; — frud)t, pro- 
duce of the fields ; -tyerr, m. com- 
mander in-chief ; -webel, m. ser- 
geant. 

gelbbau, m. -e3, -3, agriculture. 

gel3, m. -fen3, pi. -fen, gel) en, m. 
-3, pi. -, rock, cliff. 

genfter, n. ~§, pJ. ~, window. 

gent, adj. far, remote, distant. 

gerrte,/. ~, #£. -it, farness, distance 

gertto, a$. ready, prepared, done. 

geffel,/. -, pi. -n, fetter, chain. 

geffeln, v. a. to fetter, shackle, chain, 
captivate. 

geft, adj. fast, fixed, steadfast. 

gett, adj. fat, greasy. 

geuer, n. -3, p£. -, fire. 

gitlbert , p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to find, 
think ; (Statt -, to take place ; v. 
r. ir. to be found, offer, com- 
prehend. 

ginger, m.-§, pi.-, finger; -^ut, fw» 
thimble. 

girnettem, m. -e£, pi. -c, wine of 
the last year, old wine, ftriw from 
the root of sent, fern. 

gif$, m. -e3, pi. -e, fish. 

gifcfycn, v. a. to fish. 

gifd)er, m. -3, p£. -, fisherman. 

glad), adj. flat, plain, level. 

glacfye, /. -, j»Z. -n, plain, flatness, 
tract, surface. 

glacl)3, m. ~fe^, flax. 

g(afd)e, /. -, pi. -n, flask, bottle. 

gled)ten, p. 'ii8 ; v. ir. a. to braid. 

gletfd), n. -e3, flesh, meat. 

g(etfd)er, m. -^. ^9^. -, butcher. 

gleip, m. -e^, diligence, industry. 

gleigtg, adj. diligent, industrious. 

gliege,/. -, pi. ~n, fly. 

gliegen, jo. 348 ; v. ir. rc.. to fly; §0(^ 
-, to soar. 

gltei;en, p. 348 ; v. ir. n. to flee, shun. 

gliefjen, p. 348 ; v. ir. n. to flow, run. 

gtote, /. -, pi. -n, flute. 

gluten, to curse, imprecate. 

glud>ttg, adj. flying, transient. 

glug* m. -e^-, ^4,pL glitae,. flight. 

gtiigcl, m.-Z,pl. -, wing. 

glui',/. -, p/ 7 . -,!t, field, plain, floor 

glug , m. ~j>c , ^. gtUiTe, river, 
stream ; -pferb, hippopotamua 



ghi— %xm 



greu— ®ax 



481 



8?fat$, /. -; j& r-en, flood, deluge, 
inundation, tide. 

golge, /. -, ^-.-Jif sequel, conse- 
quence. 

golgen, v. w. to follow, succeed, obey. 

golgttd), cow/ consequently. 

gorette,/. -,#£ Ht, trout 

gortr adv. forth, gone off, away. 

gortblu^en, v. w. to continue blos- 
soming. 

Rortfa^rcrtf to continue, go on with, 
drive off, depart. 

gortfliegen, v. n. ir. to fly away. 

©CTtjageitf v. a. & n. to drive away, 
turn away, 

gortfd)le£pen, v. a. to drag away. ^ 

gortmollen , v. n. ir. to wish, or in- 
tend to go. 

Stage,/. -, jt>Z. -it, question. 

gragen, v. a. <fe n. to ask, question, 
interrogate. 

grcmffurt, n. ~g, Frankfort. 

granfretd), n. -g, France. 

gratis m. Francis. 

grcmjo'fe, m. -n, j?Z. -n, Frenchman. 

gran$i> ; ftfdj, adj. French. 

gran , /. -, jp£ -en , woman, wife, 
lady, madam, mistress. 

grdulem, n. -g, pi. -, young lady, 
miss. 

gred) , adj. impudent, bold, saucy, 
audacious. 

grei, adj. free, exempt, disengaged, 
vacant, independent, open, pub- 
lic; -fprcd)ung,/ acquittal. 

greigeMg , adj. liberal, generous. 

greiijeit, /. -, pi. -en, liberty, free- 
dom, privilege, license. 

greiltd), adv. certainly, to be sure, 
indeed. 

gretrottHg, adj. voluntary. 

gretnbe, m. &f. foreigner, stranger. 

grembling, m. -g, pi. -e, stranger, 
foreigner. 

greffen, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to eat, de- 
vour, corrode. 

greube, /. -, pi. -n, joy, pleasure. 

greubenftorer, m. -g, pi. -, disturber 
of joy, marfeast. 

greubig, adj. glad, joyful, cheerful. 

greuen, v. r. to rejoice; iiber ettrxtg, 
auf ettx>a^ f to rejoice in, be glad; 
v. imp. to afford joy, pleasure; 
e$ freut mid), I am glad. 



grennb, ra. -eg, pi. -e, friend. 

greunbin,/. -, pL -nen, female friend. 

greunblici), adj. friendly, kind. 

gretmbfdjaft, /. -, p^ -en, friendship. 

griebe, ra. ~ng (grieben, ra. -g)-, peace. 

grieblid), adj. peaceful, peaceable 

griebrid), ra. Frederic. 

grteven, v. n. & imp. ir. to freeze, 
be chilled; eg frtert mid), I am 
cold. 

gro§, adj. glad, joyful, joyous. 

gro^ltd), adj. joyous, joyful, cheer- 
ful. 

gromm, adj. pious, gentle. 

gronte,/ -, pi. -en, front; -madjen, 
to face. 

grud)*,/. -, pL grille, fruit. 

grud)tlog, adj. fruitless, useless. 

grilling, m. -g, %l. -e, spring. 

giigen, v. a. to join, unite; v. r. ac- 
commodate one's self to, submit. 

gitljten, v. a. & n. to feel, be sensi- 
ble of, perceive. 

giifyren, v. a. to carry, convey, lead, 
guide, manage, wear. 

gutter, m. -g, pi. -, guide, leader 

gilEen, v. a. to fill, fill up. 

gitnf, see §. 45, (1). 

gihtfte, adj. fifth. 

giinfje^n, see § 45. 

gunfeln, v. n. to sparkle, glitter. 

gitr, prep, for, instead of, by, after; 

- unb -, forever and ever. 
gitrd)ten, v. a. to fear, be afraid ; v. 

r. to be in fear. 

gurd)tfam, adj. timid, timorous. 

giirft, m. -en, pi. -en, prince. 

giirttort, n. -eg, pi. '-sorter, pro- 
noun. 

gu§, m. -eg, pi. guge, foot. 

gutter, n. -g, pi. -, food, fodder, 
provender, case. 

® 
©a&el, /. -, pi. -n, fork. 
®ang, m. -eg, -g, jt?J. ©ange, going, 

walk, way, direction, course, 
©ang,/ -, />Z. ©anfe* goose. 
®an§, a$. whole, all, entire, total, 

full, perfect, complete, quite, 

- redjt, quite- right. 

©ar, adj. & adv. prepared, entirely, 

very, even. 
(Sam, n. -eg, pi -e, yarn. 



21 



482 



©ar— <&$ 



®e$— ©era 



(Garten, m. -g, /)£. Garten, garden; 
-blume, /. garden-flower. 

©drtner, m. -g, pL -, gardener. 

©aft/ m.-eg, pZ. ©dfte, guest; -freunb, 
m. guest, host; ~lyau$, n. hotel. 

©curt, m. -eg, 7.^. ©ante, horse, nag. 

©ebdube, n. -g, pi. -, building. 

©eben, p. 348 ; to give. 

(Bebie'teit/ j9. 348; v. ir. a. to com- 
mand, order. 

©ebir'ge, n.~$,pl.-, chain of mount- 
ains, mountains. 

©ebtrgg'marfd), m. -eg, />£. -mdrfcfc, 

- mountain-march. 

©ebo'ren, ad/, born. 

©ebraud), w. -t&i pi. ©ebrdudje, use, 
custom, usage, practice. 

©ebred/en, see bved)en, p. 346 ; v. ir. 
imp. to be wanting, be in want 
of, want. 

©ebiuyren, v. n. to be due, belong 
to ; v. r. & imp. to be fit, becom- 
ing. 

©ebdd)t'ni§, n. -ffeg, memory. 

©eban'fe, m. -ng/ pi. -n, thought, 
idea, notion, meaning, purpose. 

©eben'fen, see benfen, p. 346; v. ir. 
n. to think of, remember, men- 
tion, intend. 

©ebic^t,, n. -eg, -g,#/. -e, poem. 

©ebrdn'gf, jp. pressed, crowded. 

©ebuuV, /. -, patience, indulgence. 

©ebul'bicj, adj. patient, forbearing. 

©efafyr'/ /. ~, jp^. -en, danger, periL 

©efafyr'lid), adj. dangerous. 

QJefa^r'te, m. -n, j?J. -n, companion, 
consort. 

©cfdfor'tut/ /. -/ jdJ. -nen/ new, com- 
panion, consort. 

©efafyr'soll, ac(/. fraught with dan- 
ger, dangerous, perilous. 

©efal'len, see fallen/ p. 348 ; to please; 
eg gefdHt mir, I like it. 

©efdl'licjfeit/ /. -/ pi. -en/ complais- 
ance, kindness, favor, service. 

©efana'Mj?, n. -jfeg, pi. -ffe, prison. 

©efd'p, n. -e^/ p/. -e, vessel. 

©efte'Der/ n. -g, plumage, feathers. 

©efol'cje, w. -0/ train, retinue. 

©ecjen, prep, toward, to, against, 
for, about, near, compared to; 
-t^eil, n. contrary. 

©e§en, p. 348 ; v. ir. n. to go, walk 
fare, be ; tt)ie cje^t eg ? how are you \ 



eg cjetyt mir rootyl, I am well; fcer 

SBinb gefyt, the wind blotvs. 
©efjirn', w. -eg/ jo£. -e, brain. 
©efyor'd)en, v. n. to obey, 
©efyb'rcn, v. w. to belong, 
©efyor'fam, adj. obedient, dutiful, 

m. -g, obedience, duty, 
©epl'fe, m. -\\,.pl. -rt, assistant, 
©etcje, /. -/ pi. -n, violin. 
©eift, m. -eg/ jo/. — er, ghost, spirit 

soul, genius, 
©eifttcj, adj. spirituous, spiritual, 

intellectual. 
©ei$, m. -eg, avarice; -Ijatg, m.-z$ 9 

miser. 
®ei$tcj, ad/, avaricious, covetous, 
©efrod/en, see friec^eru 
©etb, ac£?. yellow, 
©elb, w. -eg/ />Z. -er, money, coin. 
©eie'cjenfyeit, /. -, 7?/. -en/ occasion, 

opportunity, 
©elefyrt', aa)'. learned, skilled. 
©elie'fjen, see leityen. 
©eltna/en, p. 348 ; v. fr. n. to succeed, 

prosper, speed. 
®eltett/_p. 348. v. ir. n. to be of value. 
©emdl'De, n. -g, joZ.-, picture, paint* 

ing. 
©emein', adj. common, ordinary, 

vulgar. 
©emfenjdcjer / m. -g, pZ. -, chamois- 
hunter. 
©emihfy', 7i. -eg; p3. -er# mind, soul, 

heart, nature, 
©en, pr^p. toward, to. 
©eneral', m. -eg, -g, pi ©enerdle, 

general, commander. 
©enerariteutenant, m. -g,jt>/-g, lieu 

tenant-general. 
©ene'fen, p. 34$ ; v. tr. n. to recover. 
©eme'ijen, jo, 350; v. ir. a. to enjoy, 

take, taste, eat, drink. 
©enittg, m. -, pi. ©enien, genius, 
©enu'a,/ acfe. sufficient, enough. 
©emt'gen, v. n. to suffice, satisfy. 
©era'0e ; adj. straight, right, plain, 

immediately, dirrctly, just ex 

actly. 
©erber, m. -g, pi -, tanner, 
©ered)t , adj. just, righteous. 
©ereiMkn, v. n. to tend, redound. 
©eri'ebt, w.-eg, jo/.-e, judgment, tri- 
bunal, 
©jrn, a^v. willingly, gladly, cheer 



©ev— ©en? 



©e»— ©Kta 



483 



fully, -with pleasure; -$<tbtxi, to 

like, be fond of. 
©erfte,/. -, barley. 
©efrng, m. -t$, pi. ©efan$e, song. 
®e)o?A]-y, n. -es, pi. -i, business, 

employment. 
© efd)fl ft i§,adj. busy, busied, bustling. 
©e|a)e'fyen, p. 850; v. jr. n. to happen, 

take, place, chance, be done. 
©efd)ent', n. -z$,pl. -:, present, gift. 
©ei'uju/ie,/. -t pi -lit history, story, 
©efindt, adj. fit, apt, skillful. 
©ejdjop'f', 21. -e3, pi. -e, creature, 
©efcfyrei', w.-eo, cry, clamor, scream, 

lamentations. 
©e[d)u$/, n. ~t§, pi. -e, artillery, 

cannon. 
©efttywet'gen, see fd)roctv3en f p. 354; 

v. ir. n. to pass over in silence. 
© t\i) \x> tnb', adj. swift, fast, rapid, 

quick. 
©eidmiir', n. -eo, pi. -e, sore, ulcer, 
©ei'eil'fdjaft,/. -t pi. ~en, company. 
©efeip', n. -ee, pi. -e, law, decree. 
©eipenft', n. -eo, pi. -er, ghost, 

specter, spirit, phantom, 
©ejpra'cfyto,, adj. affable, talkative, 
©efta'fce, n. -e$, pi. -e, shore, coast, 
©eftalt',/. -i pi. -en, figure, form, 
©efieui', n. -eo, pi. -e, stone, rock. 
©eftern, adv. yesterday, 
©eftraud/, n. -t$, pi. -e, bushes, 

briars, thicket, 
©efunb' adj. sound, healthy, 
©ejunb'fyett,/. -# i>^ -en, health. 
©etrei'De, w. -3, corn, grain, 
©etreu', adj. faithful, loyal, true, 

honest, devoted. 
©Ctroft'f confident, courageous, with 

confidence, 
©etrb'ften, v. r. to console one's self, 

trust in, to be not afraid of. 
©eroafyr', adj. perceiving; -Herbert/ 

to see, perceive. 
©esualt', /. -, pi. -en, power, force, 
©ewai'iic], adj. powerful, mighty, 

very large, prodigious. 
©eu>anD', n. -e$, pL ©eroanber, gar- 
ment, drapery cloth, dress. 
©ett)eit/, n. -co, pi. -t, horns, bran- 
ches, antlers, 
©enun'nett, p. 350; to win, earn. 
©enUjj', adj. certain, sure, fixed. . 
©enu^'fen, n. -&, pi. -, conscience* 



©etDoIjn'tid), usual, common. 

©eftofyni 7 , used, accustomed. 

©en>i>l'bc# n. -3, p£. -, <&-r, vaalt, 
arch, 

©ewur/, n. -eo, jp?. -e, spice, aro- 
matic. 

©e^tc'men, v. imp. to become, be« 
seem, be fit. 

©te^en, p. 350; v. ir. a. to pour, 
spill, cast. 

©Citlg, adj. poisonous, venomous. 

©impel, m.-0>, pi.-, chaffinch, sim- 
pleton. 

©lam,, m. — e$r splendor, luster, 
brightness, glance. 

©Idnien, v. n. to glisten, glitter. 

©Ia3, n. -ee, pi. ©Idfer, glass. 

©lafer, m. -e, pi. -, glazier. 

©la fern, ad/, glass, glassy. 

©latt, adj. smooth, even, plain. 

©laube, m. -it$, faith, belief, credit. 

©lauben, v. a. to believe, think. 

©idu big, adj. believing, faithful. 

©laubige, m. & f. believer. 

©letd), adj. like, alike, equal, level, 
plain,straight, just, immediately 

©letcbfemtnen, to equal. 

©leidjen, p. 350; v. ir. n. to equal, 
equalize, level, resemble. 

©leid)gulrtgtetr, /. -, pi. -en, equal- 
ness, equivalence, indifference. 

©letdmtult), m. -ee, equinimity, 
calmness. 

©litcf, n. -e3, fortune, happiness, 
prosperous condition. 

©ludlui), adj. happy, fortunate, 
prosperous. 

..©lutf j'eitgfeit,/.-, happiness, felicity. 

©naDtg, adj. gracious, merciful. 

(Both, n. -t$ t gold; -fd)mieb, m. gold- 
smith. 

©olbcn, adj. gold, golden. 

©ott, m. -e3, God. 

©oitlici), .adj. divine, godly, godlike. 

©ottlo3, adj. godless, impious, 
wicked. 

©rab, n. -e§, pi. ©rafter, grave, 
tomb, sepulchre. 

©rat en, m. -3, pi. ©rab en, ditch, 
trench, canal. 

©raben, p. 350; v. ir. a.& n. to dig, cut, 

©raf, m. -en, pi. -en, earl, count. 

©uUtjC, see ©ren^e. 

©rao, n. -fesS, p\ ©rdfer, grass. 



484 



©ran- -#anf 



£ang — iper 



©rait, adj. gray, grizzle *. 

©ret fen, v. a. & n. ir. to gripe, 
grasp, seize, lay hold of. 

©ret£, adj. gray, hoary; - m. -fe$, 
pi. -fe, an old man. 

©tense* /. -* />£. -it; limit, border. 

©ned)ertlanb, w. -3, Greece. 

©ri-fe, aa)'. croarse, clumsy, gross, 
rude. 

©ro§, aa}\ great, large, vast, huge, 
high, tall, eminent, grand. 

©rube,/. -, pi. -n, pit, cavity. 

©rittt, a$. green, verdant, fresh. 

©rtmb, m. -e<3, />£. ©ritnbe, ground, 
bottom, foundation, reason. 

©itttfitg, adj. favorable, propitious. 

©Ujto, m. Gustavus. 

©Ut, acZj?'. good, well, sufficiently, 
good-natured, kind, pleasant, 
convenient; -, n. -e£, pL ©liter, 
good, possession, estate, commo- 
dity. 

©itte,/. -, goodness, kindness. 

©ititg, adj. kind, benevolent. 



§a, int. ha! 

■&ctctr, n. -e6, ^?Z. -e, hair, wool. 

£>aben, v. ir. aux. to have, possess. 

.yabidjt, m* -e3, pi. -e, hawk. 

£ab3burg, w. Hapsburg. 

<£)aber, m. -6, quarrel, brawl. 

£$bern, v. n. to quarrel, brawl. 

£afen, m. -g, pZ. §dfen, harbor. 

£>ctfer, m. -3, oats. 

£>ager, adj. haggard. 

£alb, a<^'. half. 

4>alb, fyalben, (jalfcer, ^t^jo. by reason 
of, on account of. 

$albfyeit, /. -, pi. -en, mediocrity. 

£alMaut, adv. in an under tone. 

§alm, /w. -e3, jp£. -e, stalk, halm. 

fatten, p. 350; v. ir. a. to hold, 
keep, support, contain, stop, 
maintain, manage, value, deem, 
estimate, think, celebrate, treat. 

jammer, m. -$,pl. jammer, hammer. 

£ammern, v. a. to hammer. 

£anb,/. -/ pi. §dnbe, hamd; -fd)itlj, 
m. glove, gauntlet. 

£anbeln, v. a. to handle, treat; v.n. 
to act, trade, deal. 

£)cmbiung,/ -, pi. -en, action, deed. 

£>anjf, m. -e$, hemp. 



§ana,en, jt>. 330 ; v. ir. n. to hang, 
dangle. 

§ctrmlo$, adj. without grief, harm- 
less. 

§ctrmome', /. -, pi -n, harmony. 

4>art, adj. hard, severe, rigorous. 

£afe, 7/i. -n, jo/, -n, hare. 

£)affen, v. a. to hate. 

§d|3ltd), adj. ugly, wicked, dirty. 

£>aft, /. -, haste. 

§aupt, n. -e3, pi. ^dupter, head. 

§aupto.efd)dft, n. -e3, -3, j»£. -e> main 
business. 

£auptmann, m. -e$, pi. -manner, 
-leute, captain. 

§aupt|labr, /. -, pi. -ftdbte, capital, 
metropolis. 

£ait$, 7i. -fe<3, #>£. §d'ufer, house, 
household, family; - frau, /. 
housewife. 

£au3brob, n. -e£, pi. -e, household 
bread, domestic-bread. 

§au$fyaltmtg, /l -, p/. -en, house- 
keeping, household, family. 

§tbn\, p. 350; v. ir. a. to lift, raise, 
elevate. 

■£>eer, n. -e§, pi. -e, army, host. 

4>eil, ao)'. healed, sound, unhurt; 
7i. -e$, welfare, health. 

§eilig, adj. holy, sacred. 

■^eiltgen, v. a. to hallow, consecrate. 

|>eimbrmgen, v. a. ir. to bring home. 

^etmltd), adj. secret, private. 

&einrtd), m. -3, Henry. 

k>ti§, adj. hot, ardent, torrid. 

§eipen, p. 350 ; v. ir. a. & n. to call, 
bid, enjoin, to be called, be said, 
mean, signify, be considered; 
tt>a# foE bct<3 -'< what does that 
mean ? what do you mean by 
that? e$ tyetpt, it is said, they 
say ; ba$ l)ei|3t, that is to say, that 
is ; rflie tjeipen @ie ? what is yc ur 
name ? 

fetter, af//. serene, clear, fair, 
bright, cheerful. 

§elfen, p. 350 ; v. ir. n. to help, a*v 
sist, save, avail. 

§ell, «c&'. clear, bright, light. 

£)er, adv. hither, hither ward. 

§erab', adv. down from, down, 
downward. 

^eran', aa 7 ^. on, aear near to, up, 
upward. 



^>er — ipier £tm — S&xtfjtt 485 

$eran'ritifen, v. n. to advance, ap- pummel, m. -3, pi. -, heaven, hea- 

proach, march on. vens, pi. sky, zone, climate. 

•£>ercmf , adv. up, upward. §tmmlijo), a$. heavenly, celestial. 

§eranf'tretben, v. a. ir. to force or §in, aav. thitner, away, gone, lost, 

press up. on, along, down. (L. 52.) 

^erau^'fommen, v. n. ir. to come out. §inab', «<i^. down, down there 

£erauo'|a)reiten, v. n. ir. to step (see berunter, gaunter). 

forth. §inab'faEett, v. n. ir., imp. to fall 

§erb, t)erbe ; adj. acerb, bitter, eager, down. 

harsh, sour. §irtaur\ adv. up, up there. 

$irbet'# adv. hither, near, on. -CUttaufftetgen, v. n. ir. to step or 

£ert et'bringen, v. a. ir. to bring for- climb up. 

ward, produce. Qimm', adv. out, out there, 

^erbei'fufyren, v. a. to lead near, ^uncme'gefyen, v. n. ir. to go out. 

bring on. £)inem'retien, v. n. ir. to ride into, 

£erbei'iragen, v. a. ir. to bring or Innein'tMgen, v. r. to venture in. 

fetch to or in. £hmel)men, v. a. ir. to take, receive, 

£erbfi, m. -e£, harvest, autumn. £>inreid)en, v. a. to reach, hand; -, 

£enue'Der, adv. down, downward. v. n. to suffice. 

^erme'oerbHtfen, v. to look down. «£>tnjict)t, /. -, view, respect, 

.^enue'oerl^mmen, v. n. ir. to come Winter, prep. & adv. behind, after, 

down. back, backwards. 

$>err, m. -en, pi. -en, master, gentle- §tnuber, adv. over, across, beyond. 

man, lord, sir. ^insu'fugen, v. a. to add to, join, 

£errlid), adj. magnificent, glorious, adjoin. 

splendid. £trjcl), m. -e$, pi. -e, stag, hart. 

§errlid)feU, /. -, pi. -en, magni- £0 b el, m. -%, pi. -, plane. 

licence, glory, splendor. £od), adj. high, lofty, sublime. 

£errfd)en, v. n. to rule, reign, govern, £>od)ft, adv. most, extremely. 

prevail. &offen, v. a. 6s n. to hope, expect* 

^erfiammen, v. n. to descend, issue trust. 

from, come from. £offnung,/. -, pi. -en, hope, ex- 

£eritber, adv. over, across. pectation. 

$erunter, adv. down. £orling, m. -3, pi. -e, courtier. 

|>enWger)en, v. n. ir. to go forth, -ptJt;e, /. -, pi. -n, hight, highness. 

proceed, follow. elevation; tn-<£>ot)e, up, upward 

^ervcr'tyolen, v. a. to fetch out. §ot)l, adj. hollow, concave. 

#emr'n:eten, v. n. ir. to step forth, £ct)nlctd)en, v * n - t0 laugh in scorn, 

appear. scoff. 

§erj, n. -en3, pl.-txi, heart, courage. £otitfd), adj. hellish, infernaL 

^erjlid), adj. hearty, cordial. £olen v. a. to fetch, go for ; -laffen, 

^er^og, m. -e0, pi. -e, duke. to send for. 

4>er£oget)ut, m. -e6, pi. -t)itie, ducal §olp n. -e3, pi. -e & §oljer, wood 

hat. timber; -Ijauer, woodcutter. 

§e(fe, m. -n, pi. -n, Hessian. ^ol^em, adj. wooden. 

|>eu, ». -ev, hay. £onig m. -e$, honey. 

£eud)elei',/. -,pl. -en, hypocrisy. £tmtgtopf, m. -e$, jo/. -, -tfyfo 

£eulen, v. ^. to howl. honey -jar. 

$eute, adz;, to-day, this day ; - ju -poren, v. a. do n. hear, give ear. 

Sage, now-a-days. |>orn, ft. -e$, jo£ Corner, horn. 

$ier, adv. here, in this world; -t)cr, £>iibfd), aa}'. pretty, fair. 

hither, here. £mf, ?w. -e$, pi. e, hoof. 

$}tert)er'ttfir\nen, v. n. ir. to come -pugcl, m. -o, jt?/. -, hillock, hilL 

hither. |)ui)n, r^. -e^, pi. ^iibner, i< wL 



486 



£fil-3ag 



Sag— £auf 



§itlfe, /, -, aid, help, succor, as- 
sistance, relief. 

|)ulrTo3, wlj. helpless. 

Irnnb, m. -e£, pi. -c, dog. 

Imnbcfyen, (L. 24. 1). 

fmnbert, see § 45, (1). 

£imberifdl:tg, hundredfold, a hun- 
dred things. 

pungent, v. n <fc e;^. to hunger. 

■tmpfett, v. n. to leap, hop, skip. 

£ut, w. -e$, js/. £itte, hat, bonnet ; 
-mctdjer, m. -3, pi. -, hatter. 

^utte f /. -, pi. Ht, hut, cot, cottage. 

3 (35oM). 

S$, JO^W. I. 

Sfjr, _£>»*?&. your, to her, her, its, 
you, their. 

Smmer, adv. always, ever. 

Sn, prep, into, in, at, within, to, of. 

Snbrtinfttg, adj. ardent, fervent. 

Snbem', conj. while, when, because, 
since. 

SttfyattSfdjroer, adj. significant, full 
of meaning. 

Snnere, adj. inner, interior, intrinsic, 
fig. heart* soul. 

Snnerfyatb, prep, within. 

Snnerltd), adj. inward, internal, in- 
trinsic, hearty, mental. 

Snfelr /. -r pi- -tt, island, isle. 

3n$gc$etm' r adv. privately, secretly. 

Sntereffant', adj. interesting. 

SntercffCr n. -3, pi. -jt, interest. 

St'btfd), adj. terrestrial, earthly; ba3 
3rbifd)e, earthly portion, posses- 
sion. 

Snren, v. n. to err, go astray ; v. r. 
to mistake, commit an error. 

SrrUcfyt, n. —&, pi. -er, ignis fatuus, 
Will- o'-the-wisp, Jack-o'-lantern. 

SSlanb, n. -3, Iceland. 

Stalte'ner, m. -<3, pi. -, Italian. 

Stctlte'ntfd), adj. Italian. 

3 (Sonfonant). 

2>a f adv. yes, why, indeed, on any 
account ; bit tfycttft e3 jet fretttnfttg, 
why you did it voluntarily; ay 
yea; jctttJofyl, certainly. 

Sacfe,/. -, pi -n, jacket. 

3agb, /. -, chase, hunt. 

Bag'Dfyunb, m. -e$ pi. -e, hunting- 
dog, pointer, hound. 



Sag en, v. a. & n. to chase, hunt; in 
bie glu$t -, to put to flight. 

Sd'ger, m. -3, pi. -, hunter. 

Sal)r, n. -e3, pi. -e, year; -3$etr,/. 
season. 

Sammerrt, v. a. & n. to lament, 
mourn, pity, feel pity. 

Satutar'r m. -3, January. 

3e, adv. ever, always ; -nadjbem, 
according as. 

Seber, prn. every, each. 

Sebermcmn, prn. every body. 

3ebocfy', conj. however. 

Sefyo'ttafy, m. -3, Jehovah. 

Semcmb, prn. somebody, any one. 

Setter, jette, jeneS, prn. that, you, 
yonnder, the former. 

SenfeitS adv. on the other side. 

Setpt, adv. now. at present. 

3oiu3, (gen. of Suptter), of Jupiter. 

Sugenb, f. -, youth. 

Sugeablti), «4/. juvenile, youthful. 

Sung, adj. young, new, recent. 

Sungting* m. -4, pi. -e, youth, lad. 

StmgltngSfeuer, n. -3, youthful 
ardor. 

Sunt, m. June. 

Sunfer, m. -§, pi. -, young noble- 
man, squire. 

Supiter, m. -3, Jupiter. 



\, m. -3, coffee. 
$aftg, w. -3, jt>/. -e, cage. 
$ai)n, m. -3, pi. $atyae, boat. 
$atfer, m. -3, p/. -, emperor. 
$atferin, /. -, pi. -nert, empress, 
flalb, rc. -3, jo/, ^alber, calf. 
$alf, m. -e$, jo/, -e, lime. 
$alt, ac?y. cold, chill, frigid. 
$d'lte, /. -, cold, coldness. 
$ameei/, -e3, pi. -e, camel. 
^amerab', m. -en, pi. -en, comrade. 
^ctmut', w. -eS, jo/, -e, chminey, fire- 
place, fire-side. 
$ctmm, m. -e3, pi. $dmme, comb. 
ihmpf, m. -e3, jo/, j^ampfe, combat 
$amte,/. -, pi. -n, can, jug. 
Staxtytl,'/. -, jo/, -n, pulpit. 
Papuan', m. -3, jo/, -e, capitain. 
Raxl, m. -3, Charles. 
$afe, m. -3, jo/. -, cheese. 
^aufen, v. a. to buy, purchase, 
^aufmann, m.~3,p/.-leute, merchant 



&aum — JtorB 



Stoxn — Sag 



481 



Staxtm, adv. scarce, scarcely. 

itefyrcn, v. a. to brush, sweep. 

Iteiijen, v. n. to pant, gasp. 

Stiiti (feirter, feitte, fcttteS), adj. prn. 
no, not any, no one, none. 

$etite$tt>e$6# adv. in no wise, by no 
means, not at all. 

teller, m. -3, pi. -, cellar. 

$eEner, m. -3, pi. -, waiter. 

itemten, p. 350; v. ir. a. to know, 
be acquainted with. 

tfeimtmj?, /. -# jo/, -e, knowledge, 
science, acquirement. 

jlerfer, m.-o t pl -» prison, dungeon. 

£effel, m.-3, jp/. -, kettle. 

i!ette, /. -, />£ -it, chain. 

$eui)en, see $eid)en. 

$eule, /. -, jo?. - ; club. 

Htnb, ?i. -e3, pi. —err .child, infant. 

^intufi), adj. childish, childlike. 

$tri)e, / -, pi. -rt, church. 

.fttrfdpaum, ra. -e3, pL -bdumc, 
cherry-tree. 

Hirfdje* /. -i ^/. -tt, cherry. 

.ftlagen, v. n. to complain, lament. 

$lctge/. -, pi. -;i, complaint, lamen- 
tation, plaint. 

Jtldglid), adj. lamentable, mournful, 
pitiful. 

JHar, adj. clear, bright, fair, plain. 

J!lett>, n. -e3, jd/. -er, garment, 
dress, garb. gown. 

$letn» a#. little, small, trifling. 

ii'lemprtev, m. -3, p/. -, tinman. 

iltettern, v. ?i. to climb, scramble. 

Ulug, «$. prudent, ingenious wise, 
judicious, skillful. 

$nabe, ?n. -n, jt?/. -it, boy, lad, 

5?rtecfyt, m. -e3, joi — e, servant, slave. 

tfnofcf, m. -e3, J9^. $nopfe, button. 

£no3pe,/. -/ pL ~n, bud, eye, 

$06, w. -e3, j»Z. i?5$e, coot 

florin (L. 23. 5.). 

itoffer, m. -5, joZ. -, coffer, trunk. 

JM)le, /. -, pi -it, coal. 

it om men, p. 350; v. ir. n. to come, 
arrive at, get to. 

PJ\m^?n. -3, jb?. -e, king; -ret$, 
n. kingdom, 

^onigin,/ -, pi. -iteit, queen. 

j&mnett, w. n. ir. to be able, be per- 
mitted, know. (L. 45. 5. & p. 850). 

.$ opf, m. -e$, ^Z. Jtopfe, head. 

$art), m. -e$ # pi. $6rbe, basket 



$ont, n. -t$,pl. Corner, gn-in, corn. 
-il;re,/. ear of corn. 

$orper, m. -3, pi. -, body. 

Soften, v. n. to cost. 

Shaft, /. -, pi. $rdfte, strength, 
lorce, vigor, faculty, power. 

StxafUprep. by virtue of. 

ftraftig, adj. strong, powerful. 

Sfrctgert, m. -s, pi. j?rdgert, collar 

$rdk, /. -, pi -it, crow. 

$ranui), m. -e3, pi. -e, crane. 

$rcmf, ad/, sick, ill, diseased. 

$rdnfen, v. a. & r. to grieve, vex. 

$retbe, /. -, chalk. 

flretfen, v. n. to move in a circle, 
turn round, revolve, whirl. 

Stxtn\ t n. -z§, pi. -e, cross, crucifix^ 
-jug, m. crusade. 

JMecfyeit, p. 350; v. ir. n. to creep, 
crawl. 

$rteg, m. -e3, pi -e, war. 

$rteger, m. -3, p£. -, warrior. 

,ftrtea3uig, m. -t$, Rrit$$ii\$z, cam- 
paign.^ 

^roi'obtl', m. & n. -e3, j>?. -e, cro- 
codile. 

$rorte,/. -, _p£. -rtr crown, coronet, 
head, top (of a tree). 

Jh'ito., m. -3, jdZ. ^riige, pitcher. 

^iifer, m. -4, pi -, cooper. 

i?ut),/. -, joZ. ^ii^e, cow. 

$iti)t, adj. cool, fresh, cold. 

$it()tt, ac|/. bold, hardy, dauntless. 

Summer, m. -3, sorrow, grief. 

ihmbe, /. -, pi. -n, knowledge, in 
formation, news, notice. 

$imfii$, adj. future, next, comings 
tn£ Sunftige, for the future. 

$un\i, f. -, pi ^iinjle, art, skilL 

^imftkr, m. -3, pi -, artist. 

$upfev, n. -3, copper. 

^upfern, adj. copper, of copper. 

Rux\t adj. & adv. short, brief, short 
ly, in short. 

$ utfdJer, m. -3, pi -, coachman. 



^aBen, v. a. to refresh, recreate. 
^dd)eti, v. n. to smile. 
£acheit, to laugh, smile, 
Qa&txlid), adj. ridiculous. 
&ad)$, m. -fe3, pi -e, salmon. 
2ager r n. -3, pL -, & Sager# couci^ 
bed^ canm 



488 



Sag— Scife 



2 eft— 2o3 



Magew, v a. to lay down, store, en- 
camp, lie down. 

Sat)rrt, adj. lame, halt, halting. 

Samm, to. -eg, ^Z. hammer, lamb. 

Sanb, n.-i%,pl. Sanbcr, land, ground, 
soil, country; — tuft f /. country- 
air; -mcmn, ra. peasant; -frrajije, 
f. high-road, highway. 

Sdnbltd), adj. rural, country-like. 

Scmbfd)aft, /. -, pi. -en, landscape. 

Sang* «$. long, tail, during; -roei^ 
tig, tedious, tiresome. 

Sange, a<iv. long, a long time. 

Sangewetle, /. -, ennui, 'heaviness, 
tediousness. 

Sang 3, «rfv. along. 

Sangfam, a$. slow, dull, heavy. 

Sang ft, adv. long ago, long since. 

Saffen, to let, permit, allow, give 7 
suffer, fit, become. (L. 45. 11. & 
p. 350.) 

Safttt)ier,TO.-e$,jp£.-e,beast of burden. 

Safteryaft, adj. vicious, wicked. 

Safttg, adj. burdensome, trouble- 
some. 

Sauf, m. -e$, pi. Saufe, run, course, 
currency, current. 

Saufen, p. 350 ; v. ir. to. to run. 

Saune, /. -, pi. -n, humor, temper, 
whim, freak. 

Sant, m. -e#, pi. -t, sound, tone. 

Saut, adj. <fe adv. loud, aloud. 

Sautern, v. a. to purify, refine, clear. 

Seben, v.to to live; to.-|, life, vivacity. 

Seben, to. -3, life. 

Se^en'bigf a$. living, alive, quick. 

Seber, to. -3, ^/. -, leather. 

Sebig, adj. empty, void, vacant, free. 

Seer, adj. empty, void, vain. 

Segen, v. a. to lay, put, place ; v. r. 
to lie down. 

Set)en, n.-§,pl.-, tenure, possession. 

Sei)ren, v. a. to teach, instruct. 

Set)rer, m. -3, pi.-, teacher, instruc- 
tor, professor, master. 

Sefjrerm (L. 23. 5). 

Sealing, m.-t§, pi. -e, apprentice. 

Sefyrmct), adj. instructive. 

Setb, m. -e£, j?Z. -er, body. 

Setcfyt, adj. light, easy, fickle. 

Seid)tfinmg, adj. light, light-minded. 

Seib f a$. sorrowful, troublesome; 
e$ tft mir -, e$ ttyut mir -, I am 
sorry for it. 



Setb, to. -e$, hurt, pain, sorrow. 
Seiben, p. 350; v. ir. a. & to. to suf 

fer, endure, bear, tolerate ; to. — 6, 

jt>£. -, suffering, misfortune. 
Setbenfcfyaft, /. -, pi. -en, passion. 
Seitjen, p. 350; v. a. to lend, borrow. 
Seip§ig, n. -%, Leipsic. 
Setfe, adj. low, soft, light. 
Seiften, v. a. to do, render, perform, 

accomplish, execute. 
Seiten, v. a. to guide, lead 
Serd>e, /. -, pi. -n, lark. 
Semen, v. a. & to. to learn ; au3tt>tft* 

big -, to learn by heart. 
Sefen, p. 350 ; v. ir. a. & to. to read 

gather. 
Set)t, adj. last, ultimate, final. 
Sen, m. -en, pi. -en, lion. 
Seucfyten, v. n. to shine, light, give 

light. 
Seucfyter, m. -3, pi. -, candlestick. 
Seute, pi. people, persons. 
Sid)t, w. -e3, pi. -e & -er, light, 

candle ; e3 ging it)m etn - auf, he 

began to see, understand. 
Sieb, ad;, dear, beloved, pleasing* 

e# ift mir -, I am glad. 
Siebe,/. -, love, affection. 
Sieb en, v. a. & to. to love. 
Steber, comp. of Ueb & gent/ <*$. 

dearer; acfa;. rather, sooner. 
Siebiid)feit, /. -, loveliness, amiable- 

ness, sweetness. 
Sieb, to. -e$, jpJ. -er, song, hymn. 
Siegen, jo. 350 ; v. ir. to. to lie. 
Sinbe, /. -, pi. -n, linden-tree. 
Sin!, adj. left, left-handed. 
Sob, to. -e3, praise, commendation, 
So ben, a. a. to praise, commend. 
Sod), to. -e$ r j?£. Sodjer, hole. 
Socten, v. a. & to. to call, decoy, bait, 

allure, entice. 
S off el, m. -3, pi. -, spoon. 
Sofyn, m. & to.. -z$,pl. Sb^ne, reward, 

wages, pi. hire, pay, salary. 
So 3, adj. <fe adv. loose, free, rid. 
Sofcfypapter, to. blotting-paper. 
So3get)en, v. to. ir. to come off, begin, 

go off; auf ©inert -, to attack one. 
So^retfien, v. a. ir. to taar off, Ireak 

loose ; v. r. ir. to disengage one's 

self by force. 
So^roinben, v. a. & r. ir. to untwist* 

tear away, die engage one's self. 



Sito— SWaf 



mty—m 



489 



Corse, m, -tt, pi. -n, lion. 
£ucin'be, /* Lucinda. 
Suft,/. -, ^. Mfte, air, breeze, 
Mftdjen, n> -4, pi -, breeze. 
£itge,/. -, pL -n, lie, falsehood. 
£ugen, j>. 350 ; %h ir. a. & n. to lie* 

tell a lie* 
£uft, /* -, joZ, Stifle, pleasure, joy, 

enjoyment, delight, inclination, 

fancy, desire! 



fflla&jttlt v. a. to make, fabricate, 

produce, represent 
5D?ad)t, f. -, pi $?ad)te, might, force. 
Sftadjttg,, adj. mighty, powerful; einer 

Sprad}e *■ fein, to be master of a 

language. 
§ftabd)en, n. -3' j?£. -, maiden, girl. 
Sftagbeburg, rc. *4, Magdeburg. 
Stager, adj. meager, lean. 
Magnet', m. -3, pZ. -e, load-stone, 

magnet. * 

it, p 352 ; v. ^r. a. to grind. 
fyrdjen, w. -3, £>£. -, tale, legend, 
SDfat, m. ~t§,pl -e, & -en, May. 
Sftatlteb, w, -*e3, May song. 
Sftai<3, m. maize, Indian corn, 
Wl&\i\iai' , f. -r pi. -en, majesty. 
SRaiejM'tifdj, adj. majestic. 
SJtol, w. -3, .p£. -e, time. (§ 50.) 
Scaler, m. -3, pL -, painter. 
Wlalta, n. -3, Malta. 
Wan. (L. 19). 
$fland)er, mandje, mattdjeS, pm. ma* 

ny a, many a one, much. 
fflanfyt, pi many, some, several; 

mandje3, many things. 
Kftanbel, /* -, pi. -tt, almond. 
Hftann, m. -e$, ;?£. banner, man, 

husband. 
ffftannfyeim, n. Manheim. 
Mantel, m. -3, pi Mantel, cloak 
Marfan, see Wlafyx&jtn. 
Sftctrft, m. -e3, pi SMrfte, market, 

mart, marketplace* 
$? armor, m* -3, ^>Z. -^e, marble. 

marshal. 
3JMr$, m. -e3, joJ. -e, March. 
Sftafer, /, -, p£* -n, speck, spot ; Me 

~tt, measles 



iig, #$. moderate, temperate. 
Sftdgigung, /. -, pi -en, moderation 

temperance. 
$tct|r, m, -e3, p/.-en, mast. 
Sftatro'fe, m. -tt, j?£. -it, sailor, 
Sftctulttyier, w* -§, pi -e, mule. 
SJkuver, wa. -3, p£, -, mason. 
SD^cc^a'ntfc^r adj* mechanical. 
Slfteer, tu -t$,pl. -e, sea, ocean, 
SfJleere^woge,/.-,jt?Z.-n, wave, billet 
-9)?el)l, w» ^e3, jt?^ e, flour, meal, dust. 
$kf r, <z$. more, longer 
Sftetyreve, a$. pi. several. 
Sftetben, p> 352 \ to avoids shun. 
SDTein, meine, mein, prn. my, mine. 
Sfteiltett, v. a. & n. to think, suppose. 
Wnimna,, f.^t pi -en, opinion,. 

meaning, intention, mind. 
SDWjjel, w. -3, £>^ -, chisel* 
SDMjrer, m* -3, pi -, master. 
9)Mben, #* a. to announce, notify, 
Sftelo'ite,/. -, pi. -n, melon. 
SBtagc,/. -, pi -n, multitude, great 

many, great deal, plenty. 
3D?enfd), m. -en, ^>^. -en, man, human 

being, person, mankind. 
$knfd)enf)ers, n. -in%,pl-%n, human 

heart, 
5rcenfc^v)eit,/. -, humanity, mankind* 
$?enf(i)Ud}, adj. human, humane. 
S[ta!cn, v. a. to mark, note, perceive, 

observe, 
SPCeffen,jp. 352 ; v. ir. a. & n. to mea- 
sure, survey, compare. 
fDkffer, n. -3, pi -, knife ; -fd)miefc, 

m. cutler, 
?Dhfftngett, adj, brass^ brazen. 
SWiene, /. -, pi. -n, mien, air, look, 

countenance, 
3JWfyj£-» milk* 
9JUlbigltd), mildly, charitably. 
5ft tub eft, fl^'« smallest, lowest, 
SDitnift'er, m, -d, _p/* -, minister. 
s jftipraudj, ??i. -^, 3ftiprciu$e, abuse, 

misuse* 
Sfti^licb, a<^;'. doubtful, precarious. 
Sftif Htt'gett, j?* 352 ; v. ir. w. to go 

amiss, fail. 
SJttgntutty, ?w. ^e^, ill^humor, melan- 
choly, sadness. 
9ftt6*)er|lel)eri, see jrefyen, jo* 35fi. ; v, 

ir. a. to misunderstand. 
Wlit, prep, with, by, at, upon, undo? 

to. 



490 



$ttt— 9U$ 



3ia<$— flity 



TOtltefyflett, v. a. zY. to take along 
with. 

Wit\d)i\Ux, m. -3, W -, fellow- 
scholar, 

2JUtfd)ulertn,/ (L> 23. 5.) 

URittag^fuppe, /. -, p£. -n, dinner. 

Sfttitet, Wi —3, />&-, middle, medium, 
mean, means, expedient, remedy. 

fDftttett, acfo. in the midst, in the 
middle of, in the heart of, amidst. 

Wtytn, to have a mind, like, wish, 
be able. (L. 45, 7. d p. 352* 

fDconaf, m. -eS, jo& -e, month, moon. 

Sftonb, ra. -e3, p/. -e <fe -en, moon, 
month. 

SJfonbfdjetn, m. -e3, -3, moon-light, 
moon -shine. 

D^tonftcur (French \ Sir, Mr. 

Sftorgen, wi. -n£, jp£. -, morning, 
morn, Orient*. East ; adv. to- 
morrow. 

SWorgenbamntenmg, /. -, day-break, 
morning-twilight. 

Sftorgenlicfyt, w. -e#, pl.-*tx, morning- 
light, 

Sft era, enrobe, /. -, aurora, morning* 
dawn, twilight. 

TOibe, adj. weary, tired, fatigued. 

ffiityt, /. -, pi. -n, toil, pain, trouble. 

Soulier, m. -i>, pi. -, miller. 

SD?und;en, n. -$, Munich. 

SJhntb, m. -e3, y. 3ftimbe (timber), 
mouth. 

Sfturren, v. n. to grumble, growl. 

SJftiftt', /. -^, pi. -en, music. 

Sftitjjia,, «$'. idle; dormant. 

IfltoSfel, m* -3> pi. -it, /. -, jp£ -it, 
muscle. 

Sftitffen, v. w. ir. must, to be obliged, 
be forced (L. 45, 8), p. 352. 

$hut), m. -e$, courage, spirit, mood* 

$hu I) to,, a^'. courageous. 

SftutljttiHtg, ad/- petulant, pert. 

WmtXt f.^ t pL Gutter, mother. 



f^ad), prep, after, behind* in, at, to* 
for, toward, upon, according to. 

S? act) bar, m> -$, pi. -n, neighbor. 

$acfybarin (L. 23. 5), 

Pc\id)bem', conj. after, when. 

s Jcad)Denfen, see benten, p. 346; v. ir. 
n. to meditate, reflect. 

fftadkn, m. -3, />/. -, boat, skiff. 



Sftacfygetjen, v. n. ir. to go after, follow. 

9£ad)$er', <?<&;. afterward, after that, 
hereafter. 

Sftadjlcifftg, «<$/. negligent, careless, 
slovenly, inattentive. 

3?ad)rid)t, f. -, pi. -en, account, ad- 
vice, intelligence, news, tidings 

9frtd)|*e£en, v. n. to sed after, run after. 

dlad)\id)t f f. -, forb.earance, indul- 
gence. 

9cad)ft, prep, next, next to. 

9>la.4tf / -, pL $la%tt, night. 

^adjttgall,/ -, pi, -en, nightingale. 

?cabel, /. -, pi. -it, needle. 

9£acjel, m.-$,pl. 9cagel, nail, pin, peg. 

dlafyt, adj. near, n gh. 

9?al)en, v. n.&r. to approach, draw 
near. 

Sftctfyen, v. a. <& oi. to sew, stitch. 

9?at)ren, v. a. & n„ to loster, feed^ 
nourish. 

Name, m. ~n$, />£. -it, name; title, 
renown, reputation* 

9?ajj, adj. wet, moist. 

$latux',f. *-, j»Z. -en, nature. 

5^ebel, m. *-$, pi. -^, mist, fog. 

9ceben, jorep. by, near, beside, be* 
sides, by the side of, next to, 
close to, with. 

Sweden, v. a. to banter, tease, pro- 
voke, irritate, vex. 

jfteffc, m. -n, pi. -n, nephew. 

9?ct)men,jp. 352; v. ir. a. to take, re- 
ceive; \id) in &d)t -, to beware. 

9Mb, m. —eg, envy, jealousy. 

SftetDifi), adj. envious, grudging. 

^cetcjen, v. a. to bend, incline; v. f, 
to approach, bow, turn* 

SMguno,, /. -, pi. -en, inclination, 
proneness, disposition. 

9Mn, adv. no. 

ffttlU, f. -, £>/. -n, pink. 

S'tennen, p. 352 ; v. ir. a. & r. to namo, 
denominate, ealL 

^er^enfteber, n. -i>, pi. -, nervous 
fever. 

9c eft, n. -3, pi. -er, nest* 

9ceu, adj. new, fresh, recent, modern, 
aufS 9?eue, »on 9^enem, anew 
afresh, again. 

Sftcuerfcfyaffen, ac?;. new-created. 

9kucjicrtg, adj. curious, iuquisitivd, 

^euiid), adj. late, recent. 

9teim&tg, § 45. (1)* 



ftldjl— De|i 



f aat— $tett «\ 



SU&t, aJv. not. 

9ttd)t3, prtt. nothing, naught. 
Sftte, «<m never, at no time. 
jWieberfitejjertf v. iu ir. to flow down, 

or under. 
9?tebcvfnieen, v. n. to kneel down. 
SMeDerlaffen, v. a. ir. to let down ; v. 

r. ir. to settle, sit down, alight. 
SflkimUt adv. never, at no time. 
fftiemcmb, prn. nobody, no one. 
$lo&)f adv. yet, still, more ; conj. nor. 
SftorDen, m. -3, north. 
Slorweger, m. -3/ Norwegian. 
Clotty, adj. needful, necessary; c$ 

tfyut ~, it is necessary; /. *-, pi. 

Vlofytn, need, distress, calamity, 
fftitn, adv. now, at present, well, 

well then, 
$iux, adv. only, just, but, ever. 
fRufen, ntii?en, v. «. & w. to use, make 

use of, be of use, be useful. 
fRitjplid)* adj. useful, profitable. 



0&, tonj. whether, if though ; aU *-, 
as if; prep, over, on account of. 

Dfcen, above, on high. 

Dbeton, m. Oberon. 

Dberljalb, prep, above. 

Obcrftr m. -en, ^/. -en, colonel. 

Dbgleid)', conj. though, although 
notwithstanding. 

DMate,/. -, pi -n, wafer. 

Dbfr n. -•£, fruit, fruits ; -^ar ten? 
m. orchard. 

£)d)3, m. -fen (or Od&fe -n), #/.-n, 022. 

£>bcr, con;, or, or else, either, or. 

£)fen, w. -3, #/. Defen, stove. 

£3 [fen, 0$. open. 

Dffeter', m. -$, pi -e, officer. 

£>effnen, v. a. to open. 

£)ft, adv. oft, often, frequently* 

Cfyeim, m. -3, pi. -e, uncle. 

jD^ne* without, destitute of. 

Dfyr, «. -3, jo/, -en, ear. 

Oel, ». -e$# jt>... -e, oil. 

Dnt'el, ?ra. -e, p£. -, uncle. 

£)rbentlidj> adj. orderly, regular. 

IDrt, m. -t$,pl, -c, <fe >0erter, place, 

D|l, »w. East 

Often, w. -$, East. 

Defierretdj, w. -3, Austria. 

Defierretdjer, m. -3, p£ - f Austrian. 



IP 

$>aar> n. *-i 6, #/. -e* pair, couple, 

a few. 
SPalaftVwi -e§» plAafkt palace. 
papier', n. -e$# />/. -e, paper. 
Spars' be I, /. -, p/. -n, parable. 
Paris', w, Paris. 
3)affe», y. a, ■& n. to fit, suit. 
9)atrio'tif$, adj. patriotic 
Stoia, n. Pavia. 
$eiic, /. -, pi. -en, pearl. 
§)efi,/.-,^/.-en, pestilence, plague. 
3)etfo)aft, n. --■:§, pi. *c, seal. 
9)f;ib> w&. -e3, -3, />£ -e, path. 
spfau, wi. -e3 & -en, 3^. ~e <fc -en* 

peacock. 
SPfejfer, m. -3, pepper, 
${etfen, p. 352 ; v. ir. a, & n* to pipe* 

whistle, 
spfeil, m. -e£> pi. -e, arrow. 
§)fcrb, n. -z<o, J9Z-. -e, horse. 
9>ftrfid)e, /. -, ^. -n, peach. 
S>f£anse» / -, />£. -n, plant, veget» 

able, 
3) pan;e it, v. a. to plant, set, trans* 

plant. 
§)[iaume,/. *-, pi. -n, plum. 
3)[lcgen, v. a. to take care of, nurse* 

attend to; v. n. to be accustomed* 

indulge. 
§)flid)t ? / -/ joZ.-cn, duty, obligation, 
9>flMen, v. a. to pluck. 
§)funb, n. -eo,i?Z. -e, pound. 
ptfen, w. -^, Pilsen. 
3>mfel# m. -g, j?Z. -, paint-brushy 

pencil. 
9) .an, m. -e$, pi -e & 9)tdne, plan, 

design. 
9)lD£Uci), a<i/. sudden, instantaneous, 

on a sudden, at once. 
3>obeU wz. -*^# mob, populace. 
3)oet/ m. -en, jt>^. -en, poet. 
^)ole, m. -n, ^/. -n, Pole. 
3)oti'ren, 2;. a. to polish. 
Spor^cuVn, n. -^, porcelain, china, 
9>rctct)tf /. -, pomp, state, splendor. 
^rdc^ttg^ adj. magnificent, splendid, 
8)rafttfci}# adj. practical. 
§)rebtgen, v. a. & n. to preach. 
9)rebij5t, /. -, pi -en, sermon. 
3)reifcn» p. 352 ; v. ir. a. to prais^ 

commend r call. 
95reHpe« m* -tv pL -n# Prussiaa- 



492 



fxm— ; 



Dfafr-^tel 



JPreugen, n. -3, Prussia. 
9)rome'tfeu^, m. Prometheus. 
§htlt, rc. ~e$, jp£. -e, desk, 
Shitoer, w. -3> pi -v powder. 
j)u$ett, v. a. & r, to dress, attire, 
trim, clean. 



Dud'Iettf v, 05, to pain, torment, 
plague. 



fftctBe, w. Ht, j?/, ~tt, raven, 

fftad^e, /. -, vengeance, revenge. 

fftdcfyen, v. a. to revenge, avenge; 
v. r. to revenge one's self* take 
vengeance. 

Stab, w. -e$, ~3, jt?/, fRabzif wheel. 

Iftattb, m. -e$, -$, ^, Member, edge, 
brim, brink, margin. 

fftcmg, ra. ~e£, pi, Sftange, rank, order, 
rate, dignity, quality, row. 

fftafen, m. -3, ^Z. -, turf, sod, clod. 

fRafen, v. n. to rave, rage, bluster, 

fftcttf), m. e$, counsel, advise, means, 
expedient • bagegen ttrirb f^on 9tat^ 
for that there is redress (a re- 
medy); bapi fault ifym 9tat$ fterbett, 
in this he can be helped, this he 
can do. 

fftauh, m. -e3, robbery; -^ogel, m, 
bird of prey, 

Uaubtn, v* a, to rob, spoil, steal, 

fft&vibtx, m. -$, pi. - t robber. 

fftaudjen, v, a. & n. to smoke. 

fftaum, *n. -e$> pi Slaumt, room, 
space.. 

fRecfyt, adj. right, just, true, real, 
legitimate, rightly, weil, very. 

fftecfyt, n. -e3, jt?Z. -e, right, claim, 
title, privilege, immunity, law, 
justice. 

ffted)tfertigen, v. a. to justify, vindi* 
cate, exculpate. 

Otebe, /. -, pi. -XI, speech, harangue, 
oration, discourse, 

9tebett> v. a. & n. to speak, talk, dis- 
course. 

fftebtter, m. -§, pi. ~, orator. 

9hget, f. -, pi. rtl; rule, principle. 

Sftegelmajng, adj. regular, 

Otegett/ v. a. do r. to stir, move, 
rouse, be active. 



fHegert, m< -4, pi -, ra&n, shower, 
— fffyintt, m< umbrella. 

fRcgie'ren, v, a. <fc w. to reign, rule, 
govern. 

fftegie'rimg, /. -♦ pi -"-etb reign, gov- 
ernment, 

fftegtment', n. -e$> pi ~tx, regiment. 

fRetd), «c^', rich, wealthy, opulent; 
W. —eS, pi. -*e, empire, realm, 
kingdom. 

fReif, «$, ripe, mature, 

fReifen, tf. n. to grow ripe, ripen. 

fftttyt, f. - f pi. -tt, row, rank, file, 
range, order,, series, turn. 

fjttin, «$. clean, pure, clear, in- 
nocent, 

Otomgen, v. a. to purify, cleanse. 

9Mfe,/. -, £>/. -nt, jonr'ney, voyage. 

fReifen, #.- w. to travel, journey. 

OMfenb, «# traveling ; ber SRdfenbe, 
the traveler. 

(Reijj, ?n. -e<3, rice. 

fHeitettr J?- 352 ; v. ir. a. & n. to ride, 
go on horseback. 

Sfteiter, w. -3, pi. -~, horseman. 

^Religion', /. -, jo£. — en^ religion. 

S^eligtd^'r adj* religious. 

Bennett; v. n. ir. to run, race. 

Sftepublif',/. -, pi -en, republic. 

Sfoumut^ia, adj< repentant. 

SResoIutto'n,/. -, j^.^en, revolution. 

9R$eitt, m, -eg, Rhine, 

£Rid)ten, v. a. & r. to direct, raise* 
arrange, adapt, judge, execute, 
criticize ; ^u ®runbe -, to ruin, 
destroy. 

9Ud)ter, m< -§, pi. -, judge. 

OUcfytig, adj< right, exact, just, true 

3ttefe, m,-n, pL -n» giant ; -ngeHrgft 
w. Giant Mountains. 

9littg, m. -t$,pl. -c, ring. 

fRing^f «<^. around. 

9^dc!, w. -t$,pl. 9li)<fe, coat. 

^oggen, m. -^ f rye. 

sftof , «^'. raw, crude, rough, rude. 

Sfto|)r, ^. -e^f pi -e, reed, cane. 

JRom, n. -g f Rome. 

$Kofc,/, *, p^. -rif rose. 

S^ofen|lo(f, -e^/ jt)£. -ftocfe, rose-b istu 

Sfto^, n. -ffe^/ jo^. ffe, horse, steed. 

Oto'Hlettt, ^ -§, jf>^. ~, horse. (L. 24). 

^ojltg, adj. rusty, 

Sfcotfyf «4/. red, 

$t\ibin', m, -5 ^. -e, ruby. 



mud— @d)af 



<8$aH— (B&jt 



4S3 



$ucf, rw. -z$,pl. -e, stroke, pull, fit, 
jolt, jerk. 

fftutf en, m, -3, _p/* -, back, ridge. 

Sfcitcf jtd)t, /. — . jt>£- -^-ettr view, respect, 
consideratiou, regard, 

$Rutfn)eg, ra. ~?3, p£. -e, return, 

9ft uf, ra* -t3, pi.-?, call, cry, clamor,- 
sound, voice. 

fftufen, jd, 352 ;• v* in a, & n< to call, cry. 

fRvftjt, f, -», rest, repose, quiet, tran- 
quillity, peace, sleep. 

dluytiiiftn, n< -d, pi. -», pillow. 

SRutyett, v* w* to rest, repose. 

Ohtfyig, quiet, peaceable 

tftvfym, m. -=e#, glory, renown, fame, 

fRu^mertf v. «, to praise, glorify, ex- 
tol ; tf 4 r. to glory in, boast of. 

Sfcuffe, m. -n, pi. -at/ Russian, 

Sfatjjlanb, n 4 -*$, Russia. 



©aWatlj, m.~t§, -3, £>/.—e, sabbath. 
©acfye, /. -, pi -n, thing, matter, 

affair, concern, business. 
©ad) fen, n. -$, Saxony. 
©ad* in. -e3, jpJ* ©dde, bag, sack, 
©agen, v. a. & n. to say, tell, speak. 
©al$, n.-z§, pi. -t, salt, 
Bammcln, v. a. to collect, gather ;' v, 

r. to assemble, collect one's self* 
©anb, m. -e$, sand. 
©anft, adj. gentle, soft,- mild. 
danger, m.^,pl-, singer, songster, 
©arbt'nien. n. -$, Sardinia. 
©attel, m. —3, pi. ©duel, saddle. 
©attler, m. -3, pi -, saddler, 
©a§, p. -e$, j9^, ©aije, leap, jump,- 

sediment, position, thesis, point, 

sentence, period, stake. 
©aufett,_p. 352 ; v . ir. a. & n, to drink 

(of beasts), 
©aufer, m. -%, pi. -, drunkard, 
©dueling (©duokm), m. -3, pi. -e, 

suckiing, babe* 
©d)aav, /. -, pi. -en, troop, band, 

horde, multitude* 
©d)aarenn>eife, adv. (L* 52, 5), in 

bands, by swarms.. 
©cbaben, m*-%, pi. ©cfydben, loss. 
©a)aben, v. n. to hurt, injure, dam- 
age, prejudice. 
©d?af, n. -e$, pi. -?, sheep. 
©d)affen, p. 352 ; to create, procure, 

carry, e<>nvey. 



©d)atf, m. -e$, pi. ©djdtfe, sound. 
©cfydmen, v. r, to be ashamed, 
©d)amfyafitgfeit, /. bashfulness, mo^ 

desty, a shrinking from. 
©djanbe/* -* 9 shame, disgrace. 
©ctaf, adj. sharp, acute, severe, 
©d)avlad)ftefter, n. scarlet-fever. 
©d)atten, m. -§>,pl ~, shadow, shade, 

phantom. 
©^a|, m. -e$, pi. ©c^d|e, treasure 
©cfydj?en, v.- a. to prize, value, esti- 
mate, esteem. 
©$auMI)ne,/.-,_^.-n, stage, theater* 
©d^au-en, v. a. to look, see, view. 
©djaufel, /. ■*, pi. -it, shovel* 
©cfydumen, v. a. to skim; v. n. to 

foam, froth. 
©cfyaufpteler, in. -4, pi. ■*, actor. 
©cfyeinen, p. 352 ; v. ir. n. to shine* 

appear, seem. 
©d)elten,j^ 354 ; v, ir. a, <fe n. to scold* 

©hide. 
©djenfen, v. a. to give* present. 
©d)even, p. 354 ; v. ir. a. to shave? 

shear. 
©u)erj, m. -e$, pi -e, jest, joke. 
©djerjrebe,/. -, pi -n, pleasantry. 
©c^iden, #. a. & w- to send, dispatch* 
©dytcffal, n. ■*%, pi -e, fate,- destiny^ 

change. 
©(^te^en, ^. 354;^ v* ir. a. & n. to 

shoot, discharge, dart, rush. 
©djtff, n< ~e$, i>^ -e, ship, vessel- 
nave (of a church). 
©differ, m. ~$, pi. -, mariner* 
©d)i(bmac^e, /. -,_p^- -n, sentinel. 
©c^inben/ j?, 354; v* ir, a, to flay. 
©d)trm, m.-*i§,pl-t, screen^ shelter, 

shield, protection, 
©d)Iad)t,/. -, pi -en, battle. 
©c^Ia^ten, v- a. to slaughter, kill 
©c^Iade, f.-,pl.~n, dross, refuse. 
©d)Iaf, m. -e$, sleep, rest, 
©(^lafen, jo. 354; v. ir, n. to sleep, res^ 
©d)Iaoi, in. -t$>, pi ©c^lage, blow, 
stroke, kind, sort, stamp, apo- 
plexy. 
©d)tao,en, p. 354 ;- v. ir. a. to beat, 

strike, slay, coin, warble. 
©flange, /-, pi -n, serpent, snake. 
©d)Ied)t, adj. bad. base, mean 
©d^Ietdjettf p. 354 ; v. ir. n. to sneat^ 

slink, raoTe slowly. 
©c^Uier, m. -$, pi -, veiL 



m 



S$I— <5$ul 



fe$fi— -Ste* 



^d)letfett, j>. 354; v. ir. cl to grind, 

polish, furbish-, 
<So)lieyen, p. 354; ;■>. *?■» a. & n to shut, 

lock, close, conclude. 
<Sd)limm, adj. ill, bad* ovil, sad, 

arch, sore, unwell. 
©tyiotf, «. *ne*»i?& ^djlofTe-*, lock, 

castle. 
ed)loifer, or odjlojfer, (L. 26.) 
^5d)(ummet» m. -^r slumber, nap. 
©d)lummertornleut, ^. -0, ^^ -, seeds 

of slumber. (L. 24). 
©d;lumm€rn# v. n. to slumber, 
©ctylujj'el, m. -4, pi..-, key. 
^5a)medett, v. a. & n. to taste, relish; 

fid) e* gut -*la|fe% to eat or drink 

with good appetite ; i. e, to relish 

greatly. 
©a)meid)ei^a(t, adj. flattering. 
©d)metd)elit, v. n. to flatter, wheedle. 

caress. 
< Sd)meid)ler, m. ~3, pi. -, flatterer. 
Sdjmel.en? p. 354 ; v. ir. w. to melt, 

dissolve 5 ra/. a. to melt. 
<Sd)mer> wi. -ee, pi. -en, pain, ache; 

ywp. affliction, grief. 
<Su)utcuau, m. Sehmettau. 
<Scl)iiiieD, -etf, ^)/. -£, smith. 
t5d)uucDert/ v. a. to forge, fetter, 

chain. 
©d)mttden, v. a. to adorm 
<5a)mut;iQ, «a!/. foul, dirty. 
<Spd)itee, m. -s, enow. ' 
'Ba)nmvti$, adj. snow-white* 
©ajnetDen, j>. 351; to out 
£ja)m:iDer, rru -3, ^/. -* tailor. 
@0)tteil» ae#. quic£, swift, sudden. 
&>d)iieli€ r /. -/ rapidity, swiftness. 
(i3rt)on» aay.. already, even. 
©d)on, «<i/. beautiiui, fine, fair. 
Soa)onen, v. a. to spare, save, 
©djoufyctt,./. -*, pi. -en, beauty. 
SSajopfiuig*/. *-« pi. -en» creation. 
Sdmmf, w. -e3, jo/. ©djrdnfe, shrine, 

chest. 
<Bd)retl>papier, n* writing-paper, 
<Sd)mDen, p. 354; to write. 
©d)reien, p. 351; to cry, scream. 
(Bd)ritt, wi. -ee, jt>£ -e, step, stride, 

pace, stalk. 
(&a)i\l), m. -e&, _pk -e, shoe, 
§5d)iU»nad)er, ?>?.-£, jo/.-, shoemaker* 
<5d)itlD, /. ~, pi -en, guilt, debt. 
©djuiDig, o<$, guilty, indebted. 



<Sd)ute, / -, p& ~n, school. 

©emitter, m. -3, pi. -, scholar 

@d)uIeriu{L. 23. 5). 

©djUg.en* v. a. to shelter, defend, 

vSd)ut- er^el* m. *»-d# ^£. *> guardian- 
angeh 

©e&roabeifo ^ Suabia. 

^d)iDad), atfy. weak, feeble, imbe- 
cile, faint. 

<Sd)Jt)ager, m. --§, pZ. ©dodger, bro- 
ther-in-law. 

<8d)im%erut, /. -, pi. *-nen? sister-m 
law. 

<£d)tt)at(>e,/. — / j?£, -it, swallow. 

<&d)\vmmi m. e$# />£ ©(fyrodmmfc* 
sponge. 

<Sd)a>an, m. -eg, jdL (Bfyroant, swan, 

©djroanfen, u. rc. to stagger, fluc- 
tuate, waver, hesitate. 

©d)tt>ctrm, m. — e<3 f jt>Z. <Bdjn)arme<> 
swarm, crowd, throng, cluster*. 

®d)tt>arfr a<#. black, dark. 

<Sd)tt)dr$en, v. a. to blacken, black. 

<8d)tt)eben, v. v. to wave, to hang,, to 
be suspended. 

©d)\t>ebe# m. -n, Swede. 

SdjrDeben^ n. Sweden. 

<Sa)ir>e'oifu), Swedish. 

©cftn?eift m. -e$, p^. -e> tail, train 

@d)n)cioeitf v. n, ir. to be silent, keep 
silent, stop. 

Sd)n)ellen, v. a. to swell, make swell, 
raise; v. n. p. 354; to swell, rise, 
heave. 

<Sd)n)er, adj. heavy, difficult, hard; 
e6 fattt -, it is difficult 

€>d)tt>crmutl> /. melancholy, sadness. 

©d)«)crt # '^. -e^» p^. ~:r ; sword. 

Sitrcejler, /. -, pi. -n, sister. 

<Sd)n)krt0f adj. hard, difficult 

@d)ttricrigfett, /. -, pi. -en, hardness, 
difficulty. 

©djnnmmvogel, m. web-footed-bird» 

<Sd)mmnm\ f p. 354; to swim. 

©djwor-cn, jt?. 354^ to take an oati^ 
swear, vow. 

Sclase, ?/*. -nf ^?. -«r slave* 

©cc^r six. 

Seci)itnb, m. -e^, jt>^. -e, seal. 

<E>eeIe,/. •+, pi. -n, soul. 

©egclitr v. a. ct w. to sail. 

©egnertf v. a. to bless. 

©e|en, z>. 354; to see, look, view, 
behold* 



©el)tT-&d 



5oB — vSp&t 



495 



Sett, a<ft'. very, much, greatly, ex- 
tremely, very much. 

©eibe, /. ~, pi. -n, silk. 

©eil, n. ■*:?, jdJ. -e, rope. 

Better, m. -*c, jo/. -, ropemaker. 

©eht (fetner), pm. his, one's, its, of 
his, of it. 

Sent, v. n. & aux. ir. to be, exist; 
e3 fet, be it (L. 69. 10), 

Sett, adv. & prep, since. 

©eitbem', adv. since. 

Setre,/. *-, pi -n, side, page. 

©clbft, prep. & tftfy. self, even; <- or 
fdber, (L. 2;), 3.) 

©clia,, «d[/. blessed, blissful, happy. 

©eltett, adj. rare, scarce, seldom. 

©enf, m. -e$, mustard. 

©enfen, v. a. to sink, lower, let 
down, lay. 

©e£en, v. a. to set, put, place ; v. n. 
to leap, pass over; v. r. to sit 
down, perch. 

©euf ,en, v. n. to sigh, groan. 

©id), pm. one's self, himself, her- 
self, itself, themselves. 

©te, pm. she, it, they, you. 

©ieben, seven. 

©iebenjdfyrifl, adj. (of) seven years', 
seven years old. 

©leg, m. -*e$# joJ. -e, victory. 

©tegel, ft. -, p/. -, seal ; - latf, m. 
sealing-wax. 

©tegen, v. n. to conquer. 

©ilber, n. -3, silver. 

©tlbern, adj. silver. 

©tlberjlreifen, m. -v, £>£. ~, silver-ray. 

©ino.en,p. 854; to sing, chant. 

©tnfen, p. 354, to sink; - laffett, to 
let fall ; ben $iut§ - la [fen, to be 
disheartened, 

vBtmtr m. -e$, jo/, -e, sense, mind, 
intention, meaning acceptation. 

©ittttbttbj n. *-e3, jo^ -er, emblem, 
symbol, allegory. 

©ttte r /. ~, _p£. -n, custom, manner; 
©itten, pi. manners, morals. 

©Utenlo3, adj. immoral. 

©ittfam, adj. modest, decent, pro- 
per, discreet. 

©t|3en, p. 354; to sit, to be impri- 
soned, fit. 

©maraab', m. -e$, pi. -en, emerald. 

©o, ado. & conj. so, thus, in such a 
manner, such, so as* as, \% when. 



©D"6aib', adv. as soon as. 
©pf.t, n. & m. *-$, pi. -3> scfa. 
©oglei:!/, adv. instantly, iminedi 

ately. 
©ofyn, m. -t$, pi ©iiljne, son. 
@ol;l)er, prn» such. 
©olOat', m. -en, pi. -en, soldier. 
©doner, m. -3, pi -> mercenary. 
©often (L. 45. 9). 
©ommer> m. •*-§, pi -, summer. 
©ommertag, nu *-e$, jt>/. -e, summer 

day. 
©onber, prep, without. 
©onbern(L. 21. 4). 
©omte,/. -, pi -n, sun ; -rtRetn, m. 

sunshine; -Mfcl)trm, m. parasol, 
©onntag, m. -e3, £>£. -e, Sunday. 
©onft, adv. else, otherwise, in other 

respects, besides, moreover, at 

other time3, formerly (L. 69. 28). 
©opl?a,. see ©ef.t. 
©op!j)ron, iru Sophron 
©orge, /. -, pi -n# care, concern, 

sorrow ; - tragen, to take care. 
©orgfalltg, adj. solicitous, careful 
©palten, v. a. & n. to split 
©panien, n. Spain. 
©pantfcl), adj. Spanish. 
©pat, adj. late. 
©paien* m. -§,pl -, spade. 
©pa^te'ten, v. n. to walk; -ge$en, to 

take a walk. (L. 49). 
©pecl)t, m. -c$, pi -:, wood-pecker. 
©peer, m.-i^,pl -e, spear* lance. 
©petct)er, m. -$,pl -, granary, ware- 
house, store-house, 
©peife,/. -,pl -n, food, dish, meal. 
©perlutg, m. -3, pi -e, sparrow. 
©perren, v. a. to shut* close, bar, 

stop, block up. 
©p!)are,/. -, pi -n, sphere. 
©ptegeb rn. — :■>, pi -*, looking-glass, 
©piel, n. -tfy pi. -e, play, game, 

sport, diversion. 
©pielen, v. a. & n> to play^ act. 
©pieler, m. ~§, pi *-, playei*, per 

former. 
©pimten, p. 354; to spin. 
©ptj^ fpi^tg, adj. pointed. 
©pi|ig, adj. pointed, sharp. 
©potten, v. a. to mock, deride, scoff 

banter, ridicule. 
©pctteret,/. -,pl -en# gibe, mockery^ 

derision 



496 



@pra— @til 



©ttmr-JaJ 



©prad)e, /. -, jd£. -n, language 
<8pre$en, p* 356 ; to speak, talk, say, 

pronounce, declare, utter. 
©pricfytoort, -e$, _pj. ©pridjtoorter, 

proverb, adage, saying, 
©prma,en, p. 356.; to leap, spring. 
©tactt, m* -e£, pi* ■~«t# state* 
©tab, m. e3,^*©tdbe, staff, stick,rod* 
©ta$et, ra. **$, pZ* -it, sting* 
©tabids />*• ©table, town, city; 

— Icben, n> city-life* 
©taljl, w^ **§> />& ©td1)le, steel* 
©tai)lern, ad/, steel* 
<Bia6, m»^t$,pL ©tdlle, stable* stall, 

sty. 
©tamm, m. -*e$, pL ©tdmme, stock* 

trunk, stem, stalk, race, family* 
©tarf, adj. strong, stout, loud* 
©tdrfe, /. -, pi. ~n, strength, force. 
©tdrhmg, f. **,pl.~-tn, strengthening, 

corroboration* 
©tattUd), adj. stately, splendid, 
©tattfc, m. ~e$, dust, powder; ftct) 

aug bem -e mad)en, to run a way* 
©tainten, £>* w* to be astonished, 

stare; - w. -3, astonishment, 

surprise. 
©ied)en, j?* 356; to sting, prick, 

pierce, cut, engrave. 
©tel)en, jp* 356; to stand, remain, 

stop ; e$ ftel)t fret 3f)nen, it depends 

upon you ; e$ ftetyt i$m gul> that be- 

comes him well* 
4te|lcttf jo* 356 ; to steal, pilfer* 
©tetgen, p. 356; to mount, ascend, 

descend, 
©teil, aoj* steep, 
©tein, m* -^e$, pL **t, stone, rock, 

chessman, man, pawn. 
©telle, /. -, pi. -*n, place, stand, 

spot, situation, office. 
©telten, v. a, to put, place, set. 
©tempel, m. -0, pi. ~, stamp* 
©terben, p* 356 ; to die, decease. 
©terbltd), adj* mortal, desperate* 
Stern, m, -eo, pi. -e, star* 
©tiefel, ra. -g, pZ. -41, boot* 
©ttet, m. —eg, ^?Z. — e, handle* 
©till, adj. still, silent, quiet, calm. 
©tide,/. -, stillness, silence, quiet- 
ness, calmness, tranquility* 
©till en, v. a. to still, appease, nurse, 

silence. 
©ttl/fd)n)eiflenb, adj* silent, tacit. 



©timme, /. -, j?£. - a, voice, 
©tirn, /*'*-, -*en, front, forehead. 
©tod, m. -e$, jtf£* ©tocfe, stick, can& 
©tolpern, v. n. to stumble, trip. 
©tolj, ctdj> proud, haughty ; ra. -e3, 

pride, haughtiness, arrogance. 
©torenfrieb,m* disturber of the peace. 
©torer, m* ~3, ^Z* -^, disturber. 
©trafen, v. a* to punish, reprove. 
©trai)lett, v* a. & n* to beam, emit 

rays, dart beams* 
©tret |3 e, f -*, pL -n, street. 
©traud)eln, v. n, to strunble, make 

a false step, faiL 
©traug, m * ~z$f pi* ®traitgett> ostrich 
©treben, v. n t to strive, struggle 

endeavor, aspire, 
©trecfett, v* a* & r. to stretch, extend, 

lengthen, 
©treit, -e$, combat, fight, 
©treiten, p. 356 ; to fight, contend, 

litigate* 
©treuert, v* a. to strew, scatter, 

sprinkle, spread. 
©trom, m. — e$, jo/* ©trome* stream, 

torrent, flood, current* 
©tiicf, n. -t$, pi. -e, piece, head. 
©tubt'ren, v> a t to study* 
©mt)l, m* -e3, jt?Z. ©tittle, chai* 

stool, seat, pew* 
©tumm, adj. dumb, mute, silent* 
©tumpf, adj. blunt, dull* 
©tunbe, - f pi. -n, hour, lesson. 
©turm, ra* ^e3, pL ©turme, storm, 

alarm, tumult, assault. 
©tiir&en, v t a. & n. to throw, preci* 

pitate, overthrow, fall, rush. 
©ucfyett, v. a* to seek, search, look 

for, try. 
©lib, ra* -e3, south* 
©iiben, m< ^, south. 
©itmpf, m. -e^, pL ©iimpfe, pool, 

fen, marsh, bog; ^vogel, m. mo* 

rass-bird. 
©iinbe,,/* -, pi -n, sin, trespass. 
©itnb^aft, adj. sinful* 
©u^, adj. sweet, agreeable. 
©upigleit,/. ^, sweetness, saccharin* 

substance, pL /-en, s'W eets. 



tab at, m* -g, p/. *e« tobacco* 
Slab el, m. -^, fauit, blame. 
Sabeln, v* ^. to blame* censure. 



Sag— Zintt Sijty— Sug 497 

Zaq, m. -eg, pi -t f day; -toljner, Sitfdj, m. -z$, pi. -e, table, board. 

m. day -laborer. £tfd)ler, m.-^, pi.-, cabinet-maker. 

£dglid}, £agtda/lidj, a$. daily. Robert, v. rc. to rage, to din. 

Zaltnt', n. -g, jt?Z. -e, talent. £od)ler,/. -, pi. £ocfyter, daughter. 

£cmb, m. -eg, trash. %db, m. -eg, death, disease. 

£cmne, f.-t pi. -it, fir, fir-tree, pine. Sobegengel, m. -g, pi-, angel of 

Xante, /. -, pi. -en, aunt. death. 

£cm$, m. -eg, js/. £dn$.e, dance. £obt, adj. dead, lifeless. 

£air 5 en, v. a. & n. to dance. Stobten, v. a. to kill, slay. 

Sapfer, ae?/. valiant, brave, gallant. £on, m. -eg, jo?, £one, sound, tone 

£afd)e, /*. -, pi. -n, pocket; -ntud), accent, stress, fashion. 

n. pocket-handkerchief. Morten, v. a. & n. to tune, sound, 

£afd)enttf)r, /. -, pi. -en, watch. sound sweetly, to ring. 

%a\Jt,f. -, pi. -n, cup, saucer, dish. £opf, m. -eg, _p/. £6pfe, pot. 

%auh, adj. deaf ; fig, empty. £rdge, adj. idle, lazy, slothful. 

%auU, /. -, pi. -n, dove, pigeon. Sragen, jo. 356 ; to bear, carry, wear, 

£ctucfyen, v. a. & n. to dive, duck, produce, yield, suffer, support. 

dip, irnmerge, plunge. Bremen, v. n. to trust, confide in, 

£auct)er, m. -g, pi. -, diver. have confidence in. 

£dttfcfyen, v. a. to delude, deceive, £rcwern, v. w. to be in mourning, 

disappoint, cheat. grieve, to be afflicted. 

£ctufenb, adj. thousand,; -mctl, a %xcLUtxnb?,m.&f.~n?pl-n, mourner. 

thousand times. £raultd), adj. confiding, familiar, 

£eU, m. Tell. cordial, intimate. 

XtUvc, m. -g, pi. -, plate. %xaum, m. -eg, pi. £xdume, dream. 

Seppidj, m. -g, jt>/. -e, carpet. &rd$men, v. a. & n. to dream, fancy. 

%txt, m. -eg, pi. -e, text. £rattrtg, adj. sad, sorrowful. 

£§at, n. ^-eg, _pZ. Scaler, dale, vale, Sreffen, n. 356 ; to hit, strike, hit 

valley. off, befal, meet. 

Scaler, m.-$,pl -, thaler. ^ Sreiben, jt>. 356; to drive, put in 

Zfyat, f. -, pi. -en, deed, action, fact. motion, perform, float along. 

&fydtig, adj. active. %nx>$t,f, -, pi. -n, staircase, stairs. 

%%tt, m. -g, tea. Sreten, p. 356; to tread, step, enter. 

VCjZ'xX, m. -eg, pL -e, part, share, £reu, adj. faithful, trusty, true. 

portion, deal. %xkh, m. -eg, pi. -e, impulse, action, 

Snellen, v. a. to divide, part, share. drift, motion, instinct. 

S^eiiwtg, /. -, pi. -en, division, par- Srinlen, _p. 356 ; to drink. 

tition, sharing. Srotfen, adj. dry, arid, barren, cold 

%fytx, n. -eg, pi -e, animal, beast. £ro!pf, m. -eg, pi iropfe, ninny, 

%i)QX, m. -en, jd£. -en, fool r simpleton. simpleton. 

£fyorid)t, adj. foolish, silly. £roft, m. -eg, consolation, comfort^ 

£fyrdne, /. -, pi -n, tear, drop. encouragement. 

£f)ron, m. -eg, jo^. — e, throne. S^ojlen, v. #. to comfort, console. 

£§wt, ^?. 356; to-do, perform, act^" %xl\itx, m. -g, pi -, aomforter. (L. 

eg tfwt md)tg, it is no matter ; eg 23. 5. 6.) 

tf)ut 9Zot^, it is necessary; eg tfjut %xo§, prep, in defiance of, in spite 

tmr leib, I am sorry; roefy -, to of, notwithstanding. 

hurt. £ro£en, v. it. to dare, b**9*r«, defy. 

Xfyvix, or %l)uxt,f. -, pi -en, door. XrugMlb, n. -eg, pi -er, phantom. 

£tef, ac?J. deep, low, pr< found, high. %xu§, m. -eg, defiance, daiiag; juri 

Sieger, £tger, m. -g^ ^Z. -, tiger. -, in defiance. 

£tth), m. -g, Tilly. Xn^, ^. -eg, pi Siidier, cloth, hand- 

Xinte, /. -, pi, -it, ink, tint ; -ttfajh kerchief, neckclc th. 

ink-stand. Xu^enb, /. -, pL -en, virtue, 9 a*lity 



498 



£ug — ttm 



Um— Unf 



£ngcitbl)aft, adj. virti.ous. 
SLuvfe, m. -%, pi. -n f Turk. 
£%vhi',J Turkey. 
£i)r;mn', itu -en, pi. -in, tyrar.t. 

It 

Hebel, «$'. & a ^ v ' ev ^i ^^» ^ad, 
badl} 7 : wrong, sick, sickly ; - wo I* 
len, tc bear a grudge. 

Hubert, v. a. to exercise, practise, 
execut* , do. • 

Ikber, prvp. & adv. over, above, 
beyond, besides, on, upon, at, 
during, past, across, concerning. 

He Derail', adv. everywhere, 

Uebevbfe^, adv. besides, moreover. 

Ueb erbrufftg, adj. tired, wearied, sa- 
tiated, disgusted. 

Uebcrei'lung, f.-,pl> ~en, precipit- 
ancy. 

Ueberfufyren, v. a. to lead over, trans- 
port; itberfiil/ren, v. a. to convict, 
convince. 

Ikberge'ben, v. a. ir. to surrender, 
deliver; v. r. to surrender, retch, 
vomit. 

iteberle'gen, adj. superior. 

Kebermorgen, adv. day after to-mor- 
row. 

Uebernad)'ten, v. n. to pass, or spend 
the night. 

ilebemefymen, 6ee ne^men, p. 352; to 
receive, accept, undertake. 

tteberrocf, m. -z$, pi. -rocfe, overcoat. 

Ikberfa'en, v. a. to sow over, strew 
over, cover with. 

ileber[d)uf), m. -e3, pi. -fdjulje, over- 
shoe. 

Ueberfejp'en* v. a. to translate. 

Uebertref fen, v. r. ir. to surpass, ex- 
•cel, exceed. 

Heberjeu'gen, v. a. to convince. 

Ueberjte'fyen, v, a. ir. to cover, fig. to 
invade. 

He bung , f. -, pi. -en, exercise, exer- 
cising, practising, practice. 

Ufer, n.-§, pi. -, shore, coast, bank. 

ttfyr /. -, pi -en, clock, watch; ane 
fctel - ijl e^f what time is it? 
(L. 65. 7.) 

Hbnnad)er, m.— 3, />£ -, watchmaker. 

Um, prep., adv. & con?, about, round, 
near, atj for, by, past, over, as 
for; - in, in order to. (L. 49. 6.) 



Urn - ttfl&it (L. 60. 5). 

ilmar'mung, /. -, p£. -en, embrace. 

Itmfxn'gcii, v. a. ir. to embrace, en- 
circle, surround. 

Umfltctt'ieru, v. a. to flutter or hover 
about, flow round. 

Umgang, m. -:c, -3, jdZ. -gange, inter- 
course, commerce, conversation, 
company. 

ttmge'Oen, v. a. ir. surround, environ, 
inclose. 

Umgcl/en, v. n. ir. to go about, re- 
volve ; nut Semcmbem -# to have 
intercourse with, associate with. 

limber', adv. around, about, round 
about. 

Urn & in', adv. about; id) fann ntd^t — » 
I can not forbear, I can not help. 
(L. 45.) 

ttJH)d)Itn'gen, v. a. ir. to embrace 
closely, enclose, surround. 

Umfcfylim'gen, p. embraced. 

Umfdjwar'mcri. v. a. to swarm around, 
buzz around. 

Umfonfi', adv. gratis, without jpay, 
for nothing, in vain, vainly, to 
no purpose, without cause.* 

ttmftant>, m. -e$, pi. -ftdnbe, circum- 
stance, condition. 

Unangencfym, adj. unpleasant, dis- 
agreeable. 

UnbanMg, adj. indomitable, unman- 
ageable, intractable. 

UnbeDeutenb, adj. inconsiderable, in- 
significant, unimportant. 

Unbefonnt, adj. unknown, unac- 
quainted with. 

Unbeobad)tet, adj. unobserved. 

Unbraud)bar, adj. unserviceable, 
useless. 

Itnb, dory. and. 

Uneingebenf, adj. unmindful. 

Unerfaf)ren, adj. inexperienced. 

Unerme^lid), adj. immeasurable, im- 
mense, vast 

Hnerfd)utterltd), adj. immovable. 

UnemctgUd), Unertrag'lid), adj. intoler 
able, insufferable, ins u portable. 

Unfall, m.~-z$,pL Unfaue# mischance, 
misfortune, disaster. 

Unfc^lbar, adj. infallible, certain. 

Unfern, prep, near, not far from. 

llnformlicb, adj. deformed, dispro- 
portionate. 



Unf_Uns 



Um> — Serb 



499 



Itttgar, m. -tt, pi. -tt, Hungarian. 

Un$ead)tet, prep, notwithstanding. 

itngebulbig, adj. impatient. 

Ungemad), n. -e$, discomfort, fatigue. 

Ungcmetn, adj. uncommon. 

lingered)!, adj. unjust, unrighteous. 

ttttgef^idt, awkward, unapt, un- 
handy. 

Ungefefyen, adj. unseen 

Ungerootmt, adj. unaccustomed. 

Ungleid), adj. uneven, unlike, dis- 
proportionate, odd. 

ttnglutf, n.-z$, misfortune, disaster, 
adversity, calamity. 

ItnglMltd), adj. unlucky, unhappy, 
unfortunate, disastrous. 

Unr)o(ucr), adj. uncivil, impolite. 

Untraut, n. -tc, weed, tare. § 13. 3.b. 

Unnoitjig, adj. unnecessary. 

Unred)t, adj. wrong, unjust; n. -e$, 
wrong, injustice. 

Unrein, adj. unclean, impure. 

Uttfdjeinbar, adj. insignificant, un- 
sightly. 

Unfd)ulD, /. innocence. 

Unfd)ulDig, adj. innocent, guiltless. 

llnfer, prn. of us, our, ours ; -ciner, 
one of us. 

Unftc^er^ adj. insecure, unsafe, un- 
certain, dubious. 

Unfid)tL>at, adj. invisible. 

Un)'terb'lid), adj. immortal. 

Unter, prep, under, below, beneath, 
among, amongst, between, be- 
twixt, amid, amidst. 

Unterbrit'cttn, v. a. to oppress. 

Umerfyalb, prep, below. 

ilnternet/men, v. a. to undertake, 
attempt ; n. -$, undertaking. 

Unterrtd/ten, v. a. to instruct. 

Unterfa'gen, v. a. to forbid, prohibit. 

Untcrjd)teb, m. -e#, pi. -e, difference, 
distinction. 

Untentjan, adj. subject to, dependent; 
m. -tn,pl. -en, subject. 

Untcmer'fen, v. a. ir. to submit, 
subdue. 

Untreu, adj. unfaithful, faithless. 

UlwergeBltd); adj. memorable, not- 
capable of being forgotten. 

Um>erfer)enc>, adv. unexpectedly, un- 
awares. 

Unr»afyr|u)cinltd), adj. improbable. 

; tna>ett, prep, near, not far from. 



ttnttuberftef)ttdj, adj. irresistible. 

H nun lie, m. -n$, indignation, dis- 
pleasure, anger. 

UnnnlUg, adj. indignant, angry. 

ttnroofyl, adj. & ado, unwell. 

Un]dl)l'bar, adj. innumerable. 

Un.atyitg' seelin;al)lbar. 

ttttuifrteben, adj. discontent, discon- 
tented, dissatisfied. 

tinned, m. -e$, pi. -en, fountain 
head, original source. 

ttrfacfye,/. -, pi. -n, cause, reason. 

Urttyetl, n. -e&, -e, judgement, sen- 
tence, verdict. 

Urtfyetlen, v. a. & n. to judge, be of 
opinion, decide. 



$ater, m. -3, pi. better, lather* 

#atercr/en, n. -3. (L. 24. 2). 

SJaterlanb; n. native country, fathei 
land. 

SJaterun'jer, n. -§, Lord's Prayer. 

SSene'Dtg, n. Venice. 

$erab'faumen, v. a. to neglect. 

35erad)'ten, v. a. to despise, scorn. 

$erdn'Derung, /. -, pi. -en, change, 
alteration, variation. 

Skran'kffung, /. cause, occasion. 

SBerber'gen, v. a. ir. to hide, conceal; 
v. r. ir. to abscond. 

$erbef'ferimg, /. -, pi. -en, amend- 
ment, improvement. 

SSerbm'cen, v. a. ir. to bind up, tie 
up, unite, join, oblige. 

SSerbor'gen, adj. hidden, retired. 

2)erbre'd)en, n. -$, pi. -, crime. 

Skrbre'cfyer, m. -3, pi. -, criminal. 

$erbreften, v. a. to divulge ; v. r. 
to spread, be propagated, extend. 

25erbruVgen, v. a. ir. to spend, con- 
sume. 

SSerbctd/tig, adj. suspected, suspi- 
cious. 

£krber'ben,jo. 356; to corrupt, render 
unfit, spoil. 

SSerbte'nen, v. a. to gain, earn, merit, 
deserve. 

^erime'pen, v. imp. p. 356 ; to grieve, 
cause, disgust, trouble. 

£krbrieHlti), or tteitruB'ttd), adj. 
morose, peevish, troublesome, 
irksome, vexatious. 



5U0 



33ert> — 25 err 



Serf— SJtei 



fQnc'Mu, v. a. & r. to improve, en- 
noble 

$ereb'limg, /. -, pi. -en, improve- 
ment. 

$erefj'ren, v. a. to honor. 

Skret'ntgen, v. a. to unite 

SSerei'nigtf united. 

Sfrerfafy'ren, v. a. n. to act, proceed. 

Skrfefy'ien, v. a. to miss. 

SBerfer'tigen, v. a. to make, perform. 

£>ergeffen, p. 356 ; to forget. 

SSergnu'gen, w. -3, pi. -, pleasure, 
diversion, delight, comfort. 

£krf)af ten, v. a. arrest, imprison. 

SBtxfyalt'nifyXDOTt, n. -e3, pi. -sorter, 
preposition. 

SStxtyayt', adj. hated, hateful. 

SSerfml'len, v. a. to veil, cover over, 
wrap up. 

$erfdl'ten, v. r. to take cold. 

£krfcw'fen, v. a. to sell, vend. 

^erlcm'gen, v. a. & n. to ask, demand, 
desire, long for; e3 aerlcmgt mid) 
p ttiffen, I long to know ; n. -3, 
desire, demand. 

SSerlctg', wi. -fleS, reliance, inherit- 
ance, succession. 

SSerlaffen, v. a. ir. to leave, forsake ; 
v. r. ir. ctuf eitten -, to rely upon, 
depend on; adj. destitute, aban- 
doned. 

^erleum'bung, /. -, pi. -en, calumny, 
slander, defamation. 

$erlte'ren, p. 356; to lose. 

SSerluft, m. -e$, jo/, -e, loss, damage. 

SSermie'tfyen, v. a. to let. 

Skrmit'telft, prep, by means of. 

£krmij'ge, prep, by dint of. 

S&ermo'gen, v. a. & n. ir. to be able, 
to have the power; einen^u ettt>ct3 
-, to prevail upon one to do ; n. 
-3, ability, power, faculty, prop- 
erty, wealth. 

SBermu'ttyettf v. a. to suppose, pre- 
sume, think. 

$erimnft',/. -, reason, sense. 

23erttimfiig, adj. rational, reason- 
able; sensible, judicious, discreet. 

2krpf(id)'ten, v. a. to bind by duty 
or oath, to oblige. 

fQzxxcLtfy, m. ~e#, treason. 

©errd'tfyer, m. -3, pi. -, traitor. 

33erfam'meln, v. a. r. to assemble, 
meet, congregate. 



SSerf^al'Ien, v. w. ir. to cease sound- 
ing, die away. 

$erfci)en'fen, v % a. to give away. 

3J er f(^tx> en'b eri fc^ f ad/, prodigal, lav 
ish, profuse, wasteful. 

$erfd)tt>ut'ben, v. n. ir. to disappear, 
vanish. 

$erfe§'en, v. a. to answer, reply, 
respond. 

©erjtn'fen, u. w. ir. to sink down. 

Berfpot'ten, v. a. to scoff, deride. 

25er|pre'd)en, v. «. ir. to promise. 

$erftanb', m. -e3, understanding, 
intellect. 

SSerftdn'big, ad/, sensible, intelligent* 
judicious. 

$erfte'f)en, v. a. & n. ir. to under- 
stand, apprehend, mean. 

$erftei'nern, v. a. & r. to petrify. 

^erftel'iung, /. -, pi. -en, dissimu- 
lation. 

$erftum'men, v. n. to become silent, 
cease to sound. 

$erfu'd)en, v. a. to try, attempt, ex- 
perience, taste, tempt. 

$ertf)ei'bigen, v. a. to defend. 

$8 ertr cm' en, v. «. <fc w. to entrust, 
confide ; n. —3, confidence, trust. 

$ertrei't>en, v. a. ir. to drive away, 
chase, expel. 

Skrur'fctcfyen, v. a. to cause. 

$ern>anb'te, m. &f. -n, pi. -n, rela- 
tion, kin, kinsman. 

$ertt>ei'len, v. n. & r. to tarry, stay, 
delay, retard, loiter. 

Skrmunfctn', adj. accursed, detest 
able. 

$er^el)'ren, v. a. to consume, eat. 

©eraei'tyen, see jetljen, p. 356 ; to par 
don, forgive, excuse. 

SJeraei^img, /. pardon; urn - Bittehr 
to beg pardon; urn SSerjeityung (i4 
Mtte implied), your pardon. 

%$tx%mi'ftln, v. n. to despair. 

SBer^etf'lung, /. -, despair, despe- 
ration. 

better, m. -$,- pi. -n, cousin. 

SHelj, w. -e$, beast, brute, cattle; 
-fydnbler, m. dealer or trader in 
cattle. 

8Hel, adj. & adv. much, many, h 
great deal; -metyr, adv. <fc cow/, 
more, much m^re, rather. 



SBiet — 2Bag 



2Sa§— 2Beg 



501 



$MeHet$t', adv. perhaps, possibly, 
may be. 

gHer, four ; -mal, four times. 

gUertel, fourth. 

$ier§efm ; fourteen. 

$ier^tg, fourty 

$oget, m. -g, pi $ogel, bird, fowl. 

2>olf, n. -eg, J?£. Golfer, people, na- 
tion. 

ISpIfgleljrer, wa. -g, _p£. -, teacher of 
the people. 

Boll, a#. full, whole, entire. 

SBotten'ben, v. a. to end, finish, ac- 
complish, perfect. 

$8 on, prep, of, from, by, on, upon. 

■f8ox, prep, before, from, of, ago, 
since, in preference to. 

IBorgeftertt, adv. day before yester- 
day. 

fSor^abtn, v. a. ir. to design, intend, 
purpose. 

$orfyer', adv. before, previously, 
beforehand. 

HScrfym', adv. before, heretofore, a 
little while ago. 

$orig, adj. former, last. 

©orne$m f adj. distinguished, noble, 
of rank, gentle. 

HSorruden, v. a. & n. to move for- 
ward, march on; n.— g, advance. 

^orfefymtg,/. -t providence. 

©orfe$ertf v. a. to set before, place 
or put before, prefix. 

SJorftdjt, /. -/ foresight, precaution, 
providence, circumspection. 

©orftdjtig, adj. cautious, circum- 
spect. 

SSortxmrf, m. -eg, -8,. pi. -ttmrfe, re- 
proach. 

Iftor^ug'lidj, a$. preferable, excel- 
lent; — , adv. especially, particu- 
larly, chiefly. 

SBadjenr v. n. to be awake, watch, 

guard. 
££ctd)fam, adj. watchful. 
3Bad)fettr ^?. 358 ; to grow, increase. 
SBatfygtfyum, m. & n. --eg, growth, 

increase, vegetation. 
2Bflffe»/. -> jpJ. ~tt, arms, weapons. 
SBagen, m. -g, j?Z.-, wagon, carriage, 

chariot, coach. 

n, v. a. & r. to venture. 



SBd^Ien, v. a. to elect, choose. 
SBct^n, m. -eg, illusion, conjecture, 

conceit. 
SEBa^r, a$. true, genuine. 
$£ai)vtnh,prep. & eonj. during, while. 
SBa^r^aftig, adj. true, real. 
SDa^r^eit, /. -, -en, truth, verity. 
28al)rlid), adv. forsooth, in truth, 

verily, certainly. 
gBatjrfcfyeittlid), adj. probable. 
S&ctife, m. <kf. pi -it, orphan. 
2£a!b, m. -eg, pi. SBalber, forest, 

wood; -l)crn, n. French - horn, 

bugle-horn. 
SBalbbaum, m. -eg, pi -Mume, forest* 

tree. 
SBaften, v. w. to undulate, wave, 

wander. 
SBctltftfd), m. -eg, pi -e, whale. 
SSalten, v. n. to manage, reign. 
SBcmbel, m. -g, conduct, behavior. 
SSanbeln, v. n. to go, walk, change. 
SScmbercr, m. -g, pi -, traveler, 

pedestrian. 
2£cmbertt, v. n. to wander. 
SBcmfen, v. w. to totter, stagger, he- 
sitate, waver. 
SB aim, adv. when; bctmt Uttb -, now 

and then, sometimes. 
SBavm, adj. warm, hot. 
SBarmbrunnen, m. -g, hot springs. 
SBarnettr v. «. & n> to warn of, ad- 
monish, against. 
SBctrmmg,/. -, pi -en, warning. 
SBctrten, v. a. & n. to stay, attend 

to, nurse, wait. 
20 arum', adv. why, wherefore. 
SBag, ^m what 

SBctfcfyen, v. a. & n.p. 358; to wash. 
SBajJer, n. -$,pl. -, water. 
SBebett, p. 358; to weave> work, 

float, wave, entwine. 
2Be5er, ra. -g, jo^ -, weaver. 
35$edjfel, m. -g, jp^. -, vicissitude, 

change. 
SBed'en, v. a. to wake, awake. 
SBeber, conj. neither. 
2£eg, m. -eg, jpJ. -e, way, passage, 

walk, road, manner, means. 
SBegbteikn, v. n. ir. to stay away, 

stay out, be omitted. 
SBegett, prep, because of on account 

of, for, by reascn of. 
SBegfltegen, v. n. ii U> fly away 



502 



SBeg— SBto 



mi— ©or 



SBeggetyen, v. n. ir. to go away. 
SBeglaufcn, v. ra. ir. to run away. 
SBegnefymen, v. n to take away. 
SBe^i a$. & cow/, sore, painful; - 

tfyim, to ache, pain, hurt; c3 It/ut 

ifm wef), it hurts him; ttet) mir! 

wo is me ! 
§3M)mU;f), f. -, sadness, wofulness, 

sorrowfulness. 
2Bef)muU;i' r / adj. sad, sorrowful, wo- 

ful, mournful, melancholy. 
SBctb, ft- -tit pi. -er f wife, woman. 
SBeicfy, ai/. soft, tender, weak. 
SSBetl, acfo. & conj. while, during, 

as, as long as, when, because, 

since. 
SBetn, m. -e$, pi. -e# wine, vine. 
SBeincnv v. w. to weep, cry. 
SBeifc, adj. wise, sage. 
SBeife, f. -, pi. -n, mode, manner, 

way, fashion, method, melody, 

tune. 
2Bei$tyei%/. -, wisdom, prudence. 
SBeirj, ai/. white, clean. 
HBeit/ adj. & adv. distant, remote, 

far, far off, afar, wide, large ; au$ 

better gem\ from afar. 
^Better, farther, else; - gefyen, to go 

on. 
2Sei$en, m. -3, wheat. 
2Beld)er, prn. who, that, which, 

what, some. (L. 39.) 
SBelfen, v. n. to wither, fade, dry. 
SBelle, /. -, jo£ -en, wave, billow. 
SBelt, jr.-, jp/. -en, world. 
SBeltberitfymt, «$. far-famed. 
SBcltmeer, n. o^ean. 
SL&eni.}, aJ/. &adv. little, few, some; 

et^ -, a little. 
SBewtj «dy. <fc co??/. if, in which 

case, when, whenever. 
SBer, prn. who, he who, whoever. 
&i>etben, v. n. ir. (L. 46\ to become, 

grow, turn, be, prove, happen. 
SBerfen, p. 358; to throw, cast. 
Qlknt), adj. worth, dear. 
SBertJj m. -t$ f worth, value, price. 
Si3e|"e:if n. -4, pi. -, being. 
SBcfer, /. Weser. 
;itfetfpe,/ -, jo/. -;i, wasp. 
&5e.tcr, n. -:-, pi.-, weather, storm. 
SliMocr, prep, against, contrary to, 

in opposition to. 
SBtberfprecfy'en, v. n. ir. to contradict 



2Btberjte$'eit, v. a. n. ir. to resist, 
withstand. 

SBtberfire'cen, v.n. to strive against, 
struggle against. 

SBtbrtg, adj. contrary, adverse, re 
pugnant, loathsome. 

SBte, adv. & conj. how, as,when 5 like. 

&5teber, adv. again, anew; -fommen, 
to come again, return. 

S5Keberfd)eutf m. reflection. 

&Heberfefy?tt, v. a. ir. to see again. 

SLbiege, /. -, pi. -n, cradle. 

SASien, n. Vienna. 

£Biefe, /. -, pi. -n, meadow. 

aiHe&iel'jle (§ 45. 5). 

2£ilb, adj. wild, savage, fierce. 

SAHlbpret, n. -ee, game, venison. 

$Bt((e, m. -xt^t will, mind, purpose. 

SBitffom'men, adj. welcome. 

ii5inb, m. -c£, i?/. -e, wind, air. 

&i$tnben, p. 358; to wind, wring, 
twist; v. r. ir. to wind, writhe. 

SBtttfet, m. -i, pi. -, corner, nook. 

&>trHtc[), adj. actual, real, true. 

SLtftrtfy, m.-t§>, pl.-t, host, landlord, 
innkeeper, master of the house. 

Stffen, p. 358; to know, have 
knowledge of. 

SBijptg, adj. witty, ingenious. 

%&o, adv. where, if. 

2£oge,/. -, pi. -n, billow, wave. 

iASofyei', adv. whence, from what 
place. 

SBofytn', adv. whither, which way. 

2Bot)l, adv. well, indeed, probably; 

SAS^lgefallen, w. -3, pleasure, de- 
light. 

2Sofyiitec()enb, ad/, fragrant. 

SBotyUJater, m. -3, pi.-, benefactor. 

SBo^It^atigf adj. beneficent, chari- 
table. 

SBotyLfyun, v. w. ir. to do well, do 
good, benefit. 

2Bot)nen, v. n. to odge, dwell, abide, 
reside. 

SBofynung,/. -, pi. -en, dwellirg. 

2.15 o if, m. -e^, pi. ii^lfe, wolf. 

SBoUe,/; -, ^/.. -n, cloud. 

SBolIe, /. -, wool. 

Swollen (L. 45. 10). 

^Oltne, /. -, pi. -n, delight, plea- 
sure, biiss. 

SByrtu'i adv. wherein, whei unto* 
in which, in what. 



SJort— 3tu$ 



» 



-&* 



503 



SBorf, n. -eg. pi. -e (SBorter), word; 
iu — c fcminen, to have an oppor- 
tunity to speak. 

fBorterbitd), n. -eg, pZ. -"ntd)er, dic- 
tionary, lexicon, vocabulary. 

3Bo»on', flw/y. whereof, of which, of 
what, of whom. 

SBtmbarjtf m. surgeon. 

SBnnbe, /. -, pi. -n, wound, hurt. 

SBunjaV m. **3# pi. 2Bun|1^c# wish, 
desire. 

££i'm[d)en, v. a. to wish, desire. 

3Burfce# /. — , pi. Ht, dignity, honor. 

SBitrbtg, adj. worthy, deserving. 

SBurbigcrti v. a. to deign, vouchsafe, 
value, estimate. 

SBurm, m. -eg, pi. SMrmer, worm. 

SBiirje,/. — # pl.—W seasoning, spice. 

SBftr&lciit, n.-%, pi.-, root. (L. 24. 2.) 

SMr^reid), ao)'. aromatic, spiced. 

SBihfyen, v. w. to rage, chafe, foam, 
rave. 



3<ity, adj tough, tenacious, sticky. 

Batten, v - a - t° number, tell, count. 

Bctfym, aa}'. tame, domestic. 

Balm, ?». -e^, p/. 3<tyne, tooth. 

Bange,/. -,/)*. -n, tongs. _ 

Bart, adj. tender, soft, delicate. 

SctrtUd), see jctrt. 

Baufcerfdjem, m. -eg, pZ. -e, magic- 
light, fascinating appearance. 

Sefyme, m. -n, jt>£. -;t, tithe, tenth. 

Befynmal, ten times. 

Setdjitert, v. a. to draw, delineate. 

Scigert, v. a. to show, point out. 

Scigcv, m. -Z, pi.-, pointer, hand. 

S*it#/. -# £>J. — ctir time, period. 

Seittg, ad/, early, seasonable. 

Bcilaug, a little while, short time. 

SeitlMg,/. -, jo/, -en, news, tidings, 
pi.; newspaper, gazette. 

SerrTe'cfyen, v. a. <fe w. ir. to break 
to pieces, iracture; ftcfy ben $opf 
— , to rack one's brains. 

Bcvfcfymet'tem, #. a. to crash, crush, 
shatter, dash to pieces. 

Serfto'ren, v. a. to destroy, demolish. 

Bertre'ten, v. a. ir. to crush by tread- 
ing on, tread down. 

3eito.e, m. -n,jpl. -n, witness. 

Beug, m. Jupiter. 



S'ttfytTli v c. & n. ir. to draw, pull, 

cultivate, to go, march, migrate 
JSizlt n. -:•;, pi. — ;, term, limit, aim, 

butt, scope, goal. 
Sielert, v. n. to aim, take aim. 
Bifferblatr, n. -eg, pi. -flatter, dial, 

dial-plate. 
Simmer, n. -g, pi. -, room, appart- 

ment; -manrt, m. carpenter. 
3 inn, n. tin, pewter. 
Binnern, adj. tin pewter, made of 

pewter or tin. 
Bittern, v. n. to tremble, quake. 
Bollner, m. -g, pi. -, toll-gatherer. 
Qu, prep. & adv. at, by, to, tor, in, 

on. 
Bucfer m. -g, sugar. 
Bucferfrrob, n. -eg, -g, pi. -e, sugar 

bread, sweet biscuit. 
Bufall, m. -eg, _pZ. Bufaffe* chance, 

accident, adventure; burd) -, by 

chance. 
Bufol'ge, pr^p. according to. 
Sufrie'oen, adj. content, contented, 

satisfied. 
Buge^oren, v. n. to appertain, be- 
long to. 
Bugteict)', adv. at the same time, at 

once, together. 
Busier, n. -eg, pi. -s;, draught 

animal. 
Bufommen, v. n. ir. to come to, ap- 
proach ; v. imp. to belong to, be- 
come. 
Sule|t', adv. at last, lastly, after all, 

finally. 
Bumid)en, v. a. to shut, close. 
Biirnen, v. n. to be angry. 
Burii'i', adv. back, backward. 
Qurucf'refjren, v. n. to return. 
Burucf'iDci^cn, v. n. ir. to recede, 

retire, withdraw. 
Buvufen, v. a. & n. ir. to give a call, 

call to. 
3ufam'mcttyte$en, v. a. ir. to draw 

together, contract. 
Bufetyeu, v. n. ir. to look at, behold, 

connive at. 
Bntragen, v. a. ir. to carry to, to 

bring ; v. r. ir. to ha ppen, chance, 

come to pass. 
Bu^evlafftg, adj. positive, reliable. 
Bimrjtdjt, /. -, confidence, trusty 

assurance. 



604 3w— 3»el d^ei— 3»Mf 

Butter, «»*. n»tl^r«, first, heretofore. Bwctfelrt, v. w. to doubt. 

formerly. j&ti)ti$r m. -e3, jt?£. -e f branch, bough, 

Suttor'fommert, v. w. »r. to anticipate. twig. 

prevent, obviate. Sweigert, v. a. to graft, branch. 

3utt>eitett, adv. sometimes, at times, BttetfdjneiMg, adj. two-edged. 

occasionally. fttotitt, second. 

fluttJt'ber, prep. & adv. contrary to, 3ft>ettett3, adv. secondly. 

against, offensive. Btotefctdj, two-fold, 

fltocmjta,, twenty. Sroingen, p. 358 ; to constrain, force 

'Stoctnjtgfte, twentieth, compel. 

Bttmr, conj. certainly, it is true, to 3tt>ifd)en, prep, between, among. 

be sure, indeed. Swolft twelve; -malt £welv« times, 
Bmit two; -mal* <w&. tvic#* 



VOCABULARY 

FOR TRANSLATING ENGLISH INTO GERMAN. 



Able, fctytg, gefd&tdft, seefomten (L.45). 
Above, oben, v&tx. 
Accompany, Begleiten. 
Accomplish, auSfityren, auSrtdjteru 
According, nadj, gemdf, jufolge, -a3, 

je nacfybem. 
Account, bte fRcd^ttung ; on - of, foe* 

gen, auf $Bfd)lag. 
Accuse, anflagen, Befdjutbigen. 
Acquaintance, bte 23efanntfdjaft, ber 

SSefatmte. 
Acquainted, Befcmnt, sertrcmt, fttnbtg* 
Across, freu$n>etfe, itfcer, queriiber. 
Act, fjanbeln, fid) Benefymen. 
Action, bie £anblung. 
Actor, ber ©djaufpteter. 
Adage, bct3 <Sprid)toorL 
Adapt, ft$ fd&itfeiu 
Adhere, cmtycmgen. 
Adherent, cmfydngenb, 9lnMngtr. 
Advice, ber Sftatty, bte ^adj'rtdjt 
Affair, ba§ ®efd)dft, bie <Sa<$t. 
Afraid, furd^tfctm, Bcmge, to be -, 

furcfyten. 
After, na$, nacfybem; -noon, ber 

5£ad)mittag. 
Again, nneber, nod) einmaL 
Against, nnber, gegen. 
Agreeable, angene|m. 
Ail, fdjmer^en; what ails you ? fca§ 

fe|it3§tten? 
Aim, bat Stel, ber S^ecf, bie 2T6ft$t; 

gteXeru 
Air, bte Shift 
All, aUeS, gan^ uBer^aupt 
Ally, ber 3§unbe§genog. 
Almond, bte SftanbeL 
Almost, faft, kinase. 
Alone, atfehu 
Along, langs, erttlang. 



Already, BereitS, f$ott 

Also, cutdj, gXetc^faG^. 

Although, oBgletd). 

Always, tmmer, ftetS. 

American, amerifcmlfd), Slmertfatter. 

Among, unter, $ttrifdjm. 

Anchor, ber Artier. 

And, unb. 

Angle, bte $ngel. 

Animal, ba3 5Lr)ieT. 

Another, ein anberer, no$ ettter. 

Answer, bie $nttt>ort, anttDortcn. 

Anticipate, jusorfommen. 

Anvil, ber SlmBog. 

Any, -body, Stemanb ; -thing, ettt>a& 

Any one, fiemanb, trgenb Semanb. 

Appear, erfdjeuten, fd)emeiL 

Apple, ber $pfel 

Apprentice, ber £e^rling. 

Apricot, bte ^Tprtfofe. 

Architect, ber SBaumeijler. 

Arm, ber Slrm. 

Army, bte Slrmee, ba3 $rteg$$eet. 

Around, tyerum, urn, itmtyer. 

Arrest, verljaften* 

Arrival, bte Slnfimft 

Arrive, anfommen. 

Arrow, ber 3>fcit. 

Art, bte $unfL 

Artist, ber $imfller. 

As, att, ba, tt>etf, i»tt, fo. 

Ashamed (to be), jtdj fdjd'mett 

Ask, fragen, Bitten. 

Asleep, eingefdjtafen. 

Assent, BctfUmmen. 

Assist, Beiftefjen, ^eXfen. 

Assistance, ber SBeijlcmb, bte £ttfc 

Assistant, ber ©efyitlfe. 

At, p, an, Bei, in, stuf itBer vox, tut, 

mtt, gegen. 
Attentive, anfmerlfam. 
Aug*r, ber 93o$mo 



22 



506 



AUG BIN 



BIR CAL 



August, ber Sfatguft 
Aunt, toe 2ftu$me, Xante 
Austrian, ber Defrerreicfyer. 
Avail, tyelfen, nu£en, ftd) bebienen. 
Avoid, meiben, toermeibeu. 
Away, id eg, fort. 
Ax, bie $xt, ba£ £eti. 
Axis^ bie $$fe. 

B 

Bad, fdjledjt, Ufe, fcfjdb(i$. 

Bag, ber <Satf. 

Baker, ber SSdcfer. 

Ball, ber £atf, ba$ £an$fejr. 

Bark, bie 2krfe ; Men. 

Barley, bie ©erfre. 

Barrel, bctS gag, bie Sonne. 

Basin, ba£ 33ecfen. 

Basket, ber $orb. 

Bavaria, 23a pern. 

Bavarian, ber Sktyer, baiertfet). 

Bean, bie SBoljne. 

Bear, ber S3ar ; ertragen, gebdren. 

Beast, ba$ £fyier ; - of burden, £aft* 

ttyter ; - of prey, Sftaub ttyier. 
Beat, [djlagen, flop fen. 
Beautiful, fapn. 
Beauty, bie <5d)bn$eit. 
Because, meil, begtoegen. 
Become, roerben, fidj fcfyicfen, ge$iemen. 
Bee, bie S&iene. 
Beech, bie SBu^e. 
Beer, ba$ fBier. 
Before, sor, besor, e$e, torn, wtjer, 

bereit$, fritter. 
Beggar, ber Settler. 
Begin, beginnen, anfaugen. 
Behave, ftcr) berragen. 
Behavior, ba$ SBetragen. 
Behind, Winter, fyinten, §urftcf. 
Believe, gtauben. 
Belong, geljbren, ange^oren. 
Below, unter, untertyalb. 
Bench, bie 23anf. 
Beneath, unter. 
Benefactor, ber Sotylttydter. 
Berlin, SBerlin. 
Beside, Besides, neben, auger, aug er* 

bent; to be- one's selfj auger ftdj 

fein. 
Between, ^rMfdjen, unter. 
Beyond, itber, ienfeitS, auger, ^inau^. 
Bind, fctuben, (by oath) wpfiifyttru 



Bird, ber $ogel; - of prey, bet 

SRaubtoogel. 
Bite, beigen. 
Black, fcfyroarj, bunfei; -smith> be* 

®robfd)mteb. 
Blame, tabeln; ber Sabel. 
Bleat, blofen. 

Blessing, ber (Segen, bie 2Bop$at 
Blind, blinb. 

Blotting-paper, ba3 £ofd#a£ter. 
Blue, btau. 
Board, ba£ SBrett. 

Boast, grogttyun, prar)(en, ftc^ ru^mtft, 
Boat, ber $atyn. 
Body, ber £eib, Mxptx. 
Book, ba$ »u4 
Bookbinder, ber 23ud)binber. 
Bookseller, ber 33ud$dnbkr. 
Boot, ber Stiefel. 
Bow, ber S3 o gen. 
Boy, ber $nabe. 
Braid, fledjten, roeben. 
Brass, adj. mefftngen. 
Brave, tapfer, bras, ebel 
Bread, ba3 3$rob. 
Break, bredjen, ^erbredjett. 
Breastpin, bie SBrujrnabeL 
Bremen, Bremen. 
Brewer, ber SSrauer. 
Bridge, bie SBritcfe. 
Bring, bring en. 
Broom, ber SSefen. 
Brother, ber 33ruber;j- inlaw, bet 

<Sd)tt>ager. 
Brown, bramt. 
Brush, bie 33ur(ie. 
Bud, bie $no$pe, ba$ 2foge. 
Build, bauen. 
Building, ba$ ®ebdube. 
Burdensome, Id' (tig. 
Burn, brennen. 
Bury, begraben. 

Business, ba$ ©efc^dft, bte <&aty. 
But, aber, fonbern, auger, nur, aU. 
Butcher, ber gleifdjer. 
Butter, bie Gutter. 
Button, ber ifriopf. 
Buy, faufen. 
By, toon, burdj, ju, mtf), mtt, ftxr> 

neb en, bet, auf. 

C 

Cabinet-maker, ber 5/.f<$lCf. 
Cage, ber Ra$& 



CAL — COM 



COM — DEO 



501 



Calf, bat flattr 

Call, rufen, netinen. 

Camel, ba$ $ameet'. 

Can, tie Marine ; Fomten, tm Stanbe fein, 

Candle, ba$ £td)t, bie fler&e; -stick, 

ber £eud)ter. 
Cane, ber Siocf, bag Sfcoljr. 
Cap, Die £awe, M|e. 
Capable, fdljig, tiicfyttg. 
Captain, ber £attptmann, $a£itdtt. 
Care, bie (Sorge, <3orgfaIt; to take 

-, Sorge tragett, pflegetu 
Carpenter, ber Bimmermatttt. 
Carpet, ber SLe^pi(^. 
Carriage, ber 2Bagen. 
Cask, $>a$ gag. 
Castle, ba3 (Sdjlog. 
Cat, bie $a£e 
Catch, fangen, ergreifett. 
Cathedral, ber 2)om. 
Cattle, ba$ 3tte$. 
Cause, bie Urfadje, @adje ; serurfa^en, 

betturFen. 
Celebrated, berutymt. 
Certain, geroig, $utterldftfg, a,ett)i§Iidj. 
Chain, bie flettc ; feffeln. 
Chair, ber <5mf)l, <3effel. 
Chalk, bie ^retbe. 
Charles, $arl. 
Cheat, betritoten. 
Cheese, ber ftdfe. 
Cherry, bie $irfdje. 
Child, ba$ fltnb. 
Chisel, ber SWctjjeL 
Church, bie $ir$e. 
City, bie Stabt. 
Clean, rein. 

Climb, Htmmen, Ftettern, erjtagen. 
Cloak, ber 9ftanteL 
Cloth, ba3 3eug, £udj. 
Clothes, bie $leibimg. 
Cloud, bie SBolfc. 
Coachman, ber $utf$er. 
Coarse, grot). 
Coat, ber Sftotf. 
Coffee, ber flaffec. 
Cold, fait, froftig; bie flffltc 
Collar, ber Jfragen. 
Cologne, $oln. 
Color, gar be ; fdrbett. 
Come, fommen. P. 350, gelangett 
Comforter, ber Srofrer. 
Command, ber SBefetyt ; befefylen, ge* 

bieten. 



Commi, begetyett. 

Company, bie ©efetffdjaft, ber 33efu<§. 

Compel, tu5tf)igen, ^mingen. 

Complain, fid) beflagett. 

Conceal, serbergcn. 

Conduct, bie 2Iupf)rmtg, ba$ S5e- 

tragett. 
Confide, locrtrduett. 
Confirm, beftdtigett. 
Conjunction, ba3 Sinbettwrt. 
Conquer, ftegett. 
Conscious, bettmgt. 
Consequent, fblgenb, fotgltdj. 
Contented, ^ufriebett. 
Contradict, ttuberfotedjen. 
Convict, uberfiifjren. 
Convince, uberjeugen. 
Cook, ber $oc§, bie ^odjin. 
Cooper, ber 235ttd)er, Pilfer. 
Copper, baS Jhtpfer; adjJupftXXL 
Copy, abfdjreibetu 
Cost, Fojlen. 

Cotton, bie SBaummotle. 
Country, ba$ £anb ; -man, ber £at&* 

mamt, 23auer. 
Courage, ber Wlufy, bie SapferFeit 
Cousin, ber better, bie Soufine. 
Cover, ber 2)e<fel; bete, bebetfetu 
Cow, bie rtu$. 
Crane, ber Jfrantdj. 
Crawl, Frtedjen fdjleidjen. 
Creep, friedjen. 
Crime, ba3 SSerbredjen. 
Criminal, ber $erbre$er. 
Crocodile, ba$ ^rofobiH. 
Cup, bie Saffe. 

Cut, ber <5<$mtt ; fdjueibett, $aueiu 
Cutler, ber $tefferfdjmteb. 

D 

Dagger, ber £>otdj. 

Dangerous, gefdtyrltd). 

Daughter, bie Sodjter; - in-law, 
bie Sdjttiegertodjter. 

Day, ber Sag ; to-day, $eute ; - be- 
fore yesterday, sorgeftertt; -la- 
borer," ber Saglotyner. 

Dead, tobt. 

Deaf, taub. 

Deal, ber X^eil ; a great -, fe$r ijteL 

Dear, tljeuer, roert^. 

Death, ber Sob. 

Deceive, betritgen, $itttergeF)ett, tdu# 
fc&eru 



508 



DEE— EAR 



EAR —FIN 



Deed, Me %x)ai. 

Deep, ttef. 

Defeat, itberttinben, fcfytagen. 

Defy, £ro$ bietcn, trojjen, tterfd)mdfytn. 

Deserve, serbienen. 

Design, ba<3 SSoxljabtn. 

Desk, ba<3 3>ult. 

Despair, t>erjtt>eifettt. 

Destiny, ba^ ^erljangmg, tie SBefHm* 

mung. 
Destitute, entbtogtr tytlflo§. 
Destroy, jerjloren, §u ®runbe rtdjten. 
Devoted, ergekn. 
Dictionary, ba3 Sorterfmd). 
Die, ber ©tempei, bie Surfel; jrer&en, 

umlommen. 
Difference, ber ttnterfdjieb. 
Different, t>erf$ieben. 
Difficult, fdjmer, fcfyroterlg. 
Dig, grab en. 
Dignity, bie SBiirbe, ber $ang, ba$ 

2lmt. 
Diligence, ber Sletg. 
Diligent, flfeigig, emftg. 
Discontented, unjufriebett. 
Distinct, beutlid). 
Disturber, ber <5torer. 
Ditch, ber ©raben. 
Do, fyxrn, madjen, written, ft$ U* 

finben. 
Dog, ber §tmb. 
Door, bie Satire, or £pr. 
Doubt, jroetfeln. 
Down, unten, rtieber, $tnat>, $immter, 

fyerunter. 
Draught-animal, bct3 Bugt^ter. 
Draw, jiefyen, jet^nen. 
Dresden, £)re3betu 
Dress, ba<3 flleib. 
Drink, ber Zxanf, b&$ ©etrdnfe; fan* 

fen, trinlen. 
Drive, tretben. 
Dry, trotfen. 
Duck, bie (Ente. 
Due, gebiifyrenb, angemeffen. 
Dull, bumm. 
During, rodfyrenb. 
Duty, bie'$fltci)t, (Sdjutbigfeik 
Dyer, ber gar ber. 

E 

Eagle, ber SIblex. 

Ear, baz D$r. 

Eavn, wrbienen, gercimten. 



Earth, bie (Etbe. 

Easy, -ily, letdjt, rutytg, fret 

Eat, efTen, freffen. 

Eel, ber 2fol. 

Eight, act)t- 

Either, einer son beiten, enttteber* 

Elephant, ber (Elegant. 

Emerald, ber ©maragb. 

Emperor, ber $atfer. 

End, ba$ (Enbe. 

Enemy, ber geinb. 

English, bie (Engldnber; engUf$. 

Englishman, ber (Sngtdnber. 

Enjoy, ft$ erfreuen, geniegen. 

Enough, gemtg, fyinldngitcfy. 

Entire, gan$, ttoflfrdnbtg. 

Envious, neibtfdj. 

Envy, beneiben. 

Escape, entrinnen, entfommett. 

Esteem, fcfydj?en, adjten. 

Eternity, bie (Erotgfeit. 

Europe, (Euro pa. 

Even, eben, gerabe, fogar, felfc(r. 

Evening, ber Slbenb, bie $benb$ett 

Ever, je, itmaU, immer. 

Every, -where, aEenttyalfcen, iifceralL 

Exercise, bie itebung, bie 2lufga&c; 

uben. 
Expect, erroarten. 
Eye, baa $uge, £)e§r. 

F 

Fail, fetyten, unterlaffen. 

Faithful, treu, rebltc^. 

Fall, ber gall; fallen; to- asleep, 

einfdjlafen, entfcfylafen. 
Fan, ber gddjer. 
Far, entfernt, fern. 
Fast, feft, gefdjrotnb, fdjnetl. 
Father, ber $ater; - in law, btr 

©$ttnegemter ; -land, ba$ #ater* 

tanb. 
Fault, ber geljter, bie Sc^ulb. 
Favorable, gimjtig. 
Fear, bie gurd)t ; fur^tett, 
Feather, bie geber. 
Fellow-scholar, ber $fttf<$ittct, 
Few, rcema; a-, einige. 
Field, baSgelb. 
Fifty, fitnfttg. 
Fifteen, fitnf^e^n. 
Fight, fecl)ten, ftreiteu. 
Final, -ly, cnDlidj, 



FIN GEN 



GEN HAS 



509 



Find, ftnbcn, cmtreffen. 

Fine, fetn, fdjon. 

Finger, ber ginger. 

Fire, fca$ geuer. 

First, erfre. 

Fish, ber gtfd? ; ftfdjett. 

Fisherman, ber gifdjer. 

Fit, paffen. 

Flatter, fd)mei(Mn, Itcbfofctt. 

Flatterer, ber @d)meidjler. 

Flattering, fdjmeidjelfjaft, fdjmcidjefnb 

Flax, ber giad)3. 

Flee, fliefyen. 

Florin, ber ©itfbetu 

Flour, ba$ Witty. 

Flow, fltegert^ frromen. 

Flower, bie 23lume, SBKttfye. 

Flute, bie glote. 

Fly, bte gliege ; fliegen, fliegen. 

Foam, ber ©djaum; fd)dumen. 

Follow, folgertr n&cfyfolgen. 

Fool, ber 3^or, 9?arr. 

Foolish, t^orid^tf ndrrtfdj. 

Foot, ber gug; on-, in gug. 

For, fur, nadj, mit, urn. . . . roiTfen, 

an, au3, rod^renb, auf, in, berot. 
Forest, ber gorft, SBalb. 
Forget, soergcfTcn. P. 356. 
Fork, bte ©akt. 
Four, sier. 
Fowl, baS £u^n. 
France, granfrei$. 
Francis, granj. 
Frankfort, granffurt. 
Free, kfreien, fret. 
French, franjojtfdj, bte gran&ofen. 
Frenchman, ber gran^ofe. 
Friend, ber greunb, bte greunbin. 
Friendly, freunblidjf. 
From, oon, au$. 
Fruit, bte grudjt, ba§ Doft; -tree, 

ber Doftbaum. 

G 

Gain, geroinnen. 

Gallant, tapfer kao. 

Garden, ber ©arten. 

Gardener, ber ©drtner. 

Gather, fammeln, lefen. 

General, atfgemein; ber gelb^err, 

©eneral. 
Generally, geroot)nIt$ ; im Sfffge* 

meinen. 
Generous, grogiritttyig, fretgebig- 



Gentleman, £err, ber geklbete, fetne 

Warn. 
German, beutfc^, ber £)eutfdje. 
Germany, £)eutfcfylcmb. 
Get, erfjaiten, kfornmen, fommen, ge* 

langen, gerailjen, laffen; to -rid o£ 

lo$ roerben; to - at, ktfommen. 
Giant, ber Stiefe ; -Montains, Oftcfen* 

gebirge. 
Girl, ba$ SDMbdjen. 
Give, gekn, fdjenfen. 
Glad, fro^r fetter, .^ufrieben; to be -, 

ftdj freuen. 
Glass, ba$ ®la£, ber ©juegeL 
Glazier, ber ©lafer 
Glove, ber §anbfd)u1j. 
Go, geljen. P. 348. 
Gold, ba$ ©olb; gclben; -smith, bet 

©olbfdjmieb. 
Gone, roeg, fort. 
Good, gut. 
Goose, bie ©an3. 

Govern, regieren, lenfen, k$errf$*&, 
Gracious, gndbig, gittig. 
Gradual, -]y y nad> unb na$, jhif"^ 

tt>etfe. 
Grain, ba§ $orn, ©etreibe. 
Grass, ba3 ©raS. 
Grateful, banfbar. 
Grave, ba$ ©rak 
Gray, grau. 
Great, grog. 
Greece, ©riedjenlanb. 
Green, grim, frifd), imrdf. 
Grieve, frdnfen 
Grind, marten. 
Grow, road) fen. 
Guide, ber git^rer. 
Guilty, fd)ulbig. 

H 

Haggard, $ager. 
Half, Ijalo. 
Hamburg, Hamburg. 
Hammer, ber jammer ; tydmmerjt 
Hand, bie §anb. 
Handkerchief, ba$ $af$entu<$. 
Handle, ber <5ttel. 
Hang, Jjangen, kfydngen. 
Happen, ftd) ereignen, gefdje$en 
Happy, gludttcfy. 
Harbor, ber $a fen- 
Hard, fyart, firoer. 
Hasten, etlen. 



mo 



HAT IF 



ILL LAM 



Hat, ber $ut; -maker, bet §utma$er. 

Hate, Ijajfen, serabfdjeuen. 

Hateful, Joer^ugtr ge^dfftg. 

Hatter, ber £utma$er. 

Have, $clUxl 

Hay, baS £eu. 

He, er, berjentge. 

Head, ber flopf. 

Health, bte ©efunb^eit. 

Healthy, gefunb. 

Hear, fyoren. 

Heaven, ber §tmmel. 

Heavy, fd)tt>er. 

Help, bte£ilfe; Ijelfen, seeftfnnen(L.45). 

Helpless, fyitlfloS. 

Hemp, b er £anf. 

Here, §ter $ter$er. 

Hers, ber, bte, ba$ ttyrtge. 

Hessian, ber £effe. 

High, tyodj. 

Him, ifym, bem, tfyn, ben. 

Himself, felbfr, ftd). 

His, feitt/ ber feintge, or feine. 

Hit, fcfylagen, treffen. 

Hold, fallen. 

Hole, ba«3 £0$, Me §ofyle. 

Home, nadj #aufe ; at -, p §aufe. 

Honest, efyrlidj, redjtfdjaffen. 

Honey, ber £omg. 

Honor, bte (Sfyre; etyren. 

Hope, bte $offmmg; fyoffen. 

Horse, ba3 $Pferb, CRog; on -back, 

ju §)ferbe. 
Hostility, bte getnbfeltgfett. 
Hotel, ber ©ajttjof, ba$ ®aftfjau$. 
Hour, bte ©ttmbe. 
House, ba$ $au3. 
How, rote, auf roeldje 5Crt. 
Howl, Ijeulen. 
Hundred, fyunbert 
Hungarian, berUngar; ungartf<§. 
Hungry, fjungrig ; he is -, e$ fyungert 

if)tt, or if)n fyungert. 
Hunter, ber Sager. 
Hurt, n>e^ tfyun. 
Husbandman, ber £anbmann. 
Hypocrisy, bie §eu(^elei. 

I 

J, idj; I say I $oren <3te bod)! tyoren 

<Ste etnmal. 
Idle, mitgtgr trage. 
Idleness, bte £rdg$ett, gauQeit. 
If, mm, faE& 



Ill-natured, Bofe. 
Image, ba$ SBitb. 
Immediate, gleid), augenWttflt<$, fr* 

gleidj. 
Immortal, unfrerMtdj. 
Impolite, unljofltd). 
Improbable, unttatyrfcfyetnlicf?. 
In, in, Bet, an, p, auf, mtt, unter, 

nadj, itBer, fyeretn, tjinein. 
Indobnt, lafftg, tr&ge. 
Industrious, fletjng. 
Inhabitant, ber (Etnrootyner. 
Injure, fcfyaben, Beletbtgen, Beetntrad)* 

ttgen. 
Injurious, ungeredjt, nadjtfyeittg. 
Ink, bte £mte ; -stand, ba$ £uuenfajj. 
Innocence, bte Unfdjulb. 
Innocent, unfdjulbtg. 
Inquire, ftd) erfunbigen, fragen. 
Insecure, unftdjer. 
Insist, befte^ett. 
Instead of, jlatt, anflatt. 
Instruct, untemd)ten. 
Instructive, Belefyrenb, letyrretd). 
Interesting, anjteljenb, intereffant 
Into, in. 

Iron, ba£ (Stfen; etfern. 
It, e$. 
Italian, italientfdj ; ber StaXtencr. 



Jacket, bte 3ade. 

Journey, bie fRetfe. 

Joy, bte greube. 

June, ber 3unty or Sunt. 

Just, geredjt, red)tfdjaffen, eBett. 

K 

Kettle, ber teffel. 
Key, ber @d)tuffeT. 
Kind, bte®attung, 5lrt; what kin«j 

of (L. 13.), adl gitttg, freunbti*. 
Kindness, bie (Sitte. 
King, ber $5nig. 
Kingdom, ba3 $5ntgret$. ' 
Knife, baS ^effer. 
Know, nnffen, fennen. 



Labor, bte 2TrBett. 

Laborer, ber ^rktter, £agl5$ttcr. 

Lady, bte grau, Dame. 

Lamb, ba$ £amm. 

Lame, Ia$m. 



LAN — MAN 



MAR MT 



511 



Landscape, Me £anbfdjaft. 

Language, bte ©pradje. 

Large, grog* totiU brett. 

Last, lefct. 

Laugh, baa £a<fcen, ©eld^ter; lac^ert. 

Law, ba$ ©efefc.' 

Lay, leg en. 

Lazy, foul, trdge. 

Lead, baa SBIei. 

Lead, fitfjren. 

Leader, ber Stirrer 

Lea$ ba^ SBIatt 

Learn, lernen, erfaljren, 

Learned, gele^rt. 

Leather, baa £eber; lebem. 

Leave, lafjeiu serlajfen. 

Length, bte £dnge ; at -, enbltfy 

Less, fleiner* ttemger. 

Let, laffen, »ermtet$en. 

Letter, ber 33ud)jtabe, SBrtef; -'paper, 

baa SBrtefaapter. 
Liberty, bte gretijett; at -, see bitr* 

fen (L. 45). 
Lie, bie £iige; litgeru 
Lie, Uegen. 
Life, baa £ebetu 
Light, baa £idjt ; to come to -, an$ 

£agealtd)t fcmmen. 
Lighten, leucfyten, bitten. 
Like, gletd>, dr}nlid) ; gefaHen; the -, 

bergleid)en ; he would - to, er 

mijdite gern. 
Lime, baa $alf. 
Little, fletn, gertng* ttenig. 
Live, lebertf fteljnen. 
Lock, ba^> <5$lo§; &ufdjUegett» fdjltef* 

fen; -smith, ber ©differ. 
Lofty, $q§, erfjabetu 
Long, lang, lange. 
Look, baa Slnfe^en §aben; auaft^en; 

to - for, fud^en. 
Lose, serlieren. 
Loud, -ly, taut. 
Love, bte £tebe ; Xieberu 
Low, nie'brig, brixften. 

M 

Magdeburg, 9ttagbeburg. 

Maize, ber 2Ma. 

Make, mad)en, ^errtd^tett, Iaffen. 

Man, ber Sttenfd), 9ftann. 

Manheim, 9ftannt)etm. 

Many ; \>tcl ; L. 65; - a, manner. 



Marble, bet farmer. 

March, ber Sftdrj. 

Mark, ba^ £et$en r Btel. 

Mason, ber 3ftaurer. 

Mast, ber Wla)\ 

Master, ber Sftetjter, £err; «- of a 
language, einer <Spradje mddjttg. 

Matter, bie <5a$e ; what is the -? 
rcaa gibt ea ? 

May, ber Wlal 

May, mi>gen, fonnen, bur fen. 

Mayence, 5ftain$. 

Meadow, bie SBiefe. 

Mean, gemetn, fd)ledjt; ba^ $fttxel # 
by means of, ttermitteljr. 

Measles, bte SSftafern. 

Measure, ba^ 2Wa§ ; meffen. 

Meat, baa gleifdj. 

Meet, to go to -, entgegen getyen, iref* 
fen, begegnen. 

Melon, bie 9Mone. 

Melt, fdjmeljen. 

Memory, ba^ ®ebd$rm§. 

Mention, erttd^nen. 

Merchant, ber ^aufmamt. 

Messenger, ber 33ote. 

Migrate, jiet)en. 

Milk, bie mify 

Miller, ber Gutter. 

Mind, ba^ ®emutt) f ber Sinn. 
Mindful, aufmerffam, etngebenf. 

Mine, metn, metntge. (L. 35). 
Miser, ber ©et^ala. 
Miserable, elenb, erbdrmltc$. 
Misfortune, ba^ ttnglutf. 
Miss, ba^ grduletn. 
Misunderstand, falfd) serjreljen, mtjj* 

serpen. 
Modest, befdjetben. 
Money, baa (Mb, bie 2ftun$e. 
Month, ber Wlvmt. 
Moon, ber SJtonb. 
More, baa 5Jlet)r; me$r. 
Morning, ber Sftorgen. 
Mother, bte Gutter. 
Mountain, ber SBerg. 
Much, »ielr fe$r. 
Mule, baa 2ttault$ter. 
Munich, TCndjen. 
Murder, erotorben. 
Music, bie SJhtftt 
Must, mitffen. (L. 45X 
Mustard, ber Senf. 
My, mem, metne. 



512 



NAI— ~ OLD 



OLD PEC 



N 

Kail, bcr fftaget. 

Name, ber Sftame. 

Narrow, ettge. 

Native-country, bad $aiertanb. 

Natural, ttatiirltd). 

Nature, bte 9ktur. 

Near, na'fye, bematje, fajl, bei 

Need, beburfen, noting fyabtn. 

Needle, bte 92abel. 

Neighbor, ber S?ad}bar, ^aljjte, bit 

9£ad)barm. 
Negligent, nad)ldfftg. 
Neither, roeber, aud) nic^t ; - . . . nor, 

meter . . . nod). 
Nephew, ber 9£effe. 
Nest, bad iReft 
Never, nte, ntemald. 
Nevertheless, nid)t^beflott)entger # bef^ 

femmgeadjtet, bemtod). 
New, neu, frifdj. 
News, bte Stfeuigfett, -iftadjrtdjL 
Newspaper, bte B^itung. 
Next, nad)|l, folgenb. 
Night, bie SJtodji. 
No, netrt/ ntdjt, feiru 
Nobody, 9ttemanb. (L. 18. 5). 
None, fritter, feine, feined. 
Nor, nod), aud) ntcjjt. 
North, 9lorben. 
Norwegian, ber SKortoeger. 
Not, rttd)t 
Nothing, nid)td. 
Notwithstanding, ungea^iet, ben* 

nod), bod). 
Now, mm, jefct, foeben. 

O 

Oak, bte ©id>e. 

Oats, ber $afer. 

Obedience, ber ®efyorfam. 

Obedient, gefyorfam. 

Obey, get)orc^en. 

Oblige, »et&fUd)ten, tterbirtben, see 

mitffen (L. 45). 
Obstinate, etgenjtnnig. 
Of, son, roegen, sermttteljt - course, 

naturltd), ed serjle^t ftcfy. 
Offend, beXeibigeru 
Office, bad 2lmt. 
Officer, ber Dfftciex. 
Often, oft, bfterd. 
Oil, bad Oel 



Old, alt 

On, an, auf, in, Bet, &u, mlt, untei, 

i)or, itber, aon, roeg, tteiter, fort, 

gegen, jufolge. 
Only, einjig, atfein, tutr, erfi 
Opinion, bte sjfteimmg. 
Oppress, untenbruden. 
Or, ober. 

Oration, bte Sftebe. 
Orator, ber SRebner. 
Orchard, ber Dbjlgartea. 
Order, bejleHen. 
Orphan, ber, bte Satfe. 
Ostrich, ber Strang. 
Other, ber, bte, bad anbere ; every - 

day, etnen £ag urn ben anbent; 

-wise, anberd, fonjt 
Our, unfer, ber unfrtge. 
Out, aud, braugen; - of, aud, auger. 
Outside, augerfyalb. 
Over, itber, auf, tjimtber, ^eritber, 

soritber, sorbet, allju, &u fetyr, roett# 

breit, itberfyin, burd), i?or. 
Owe, fdjulbtg fein, serbanfen. 
Ox, ber Dc^d. 



Pain, ber (Sdjmerj. 

Paint brush, ber 9)tnfeU 

Painter, ber Scaler. 

Painting, bad ©emalbe. 

Pair, bad 9)aar. 

Palace, ber $PaIafL 

Pale, bletdj. 

Paper, ha^ papier; papieren. 

Parasol, ber <3onnenfd)trnu 

Parents, bie (Sltern. 

Paris, 9>arid. 

Part, ber £l)eti. 

Passion, bte Mbenfdjaft. 

Past, sergangen, sorbet. 

Patient, gebulbig; ber tfranfe* 

fient. 
Patriotic, patriottfd^. 
Pea, bte Srbfe. 
Peace, ber grtebe. 
Peaceful, frtebfam, frteblt<§. 
Peach, bie $ftrftd)e. 
Peacock, ber 3)fau. 
Pear 7 bte 93trne. 
Peail, bte 3>erle. 
Pea&ant, ber £anbmamt, SBauer. 
Peculiarity, bte ©igentyeit 



PEN — Mrs 



ipfft — ftuB 



51$ 



Pen, tie geber,_S$reibfeber; -knife, 

bad ffebermeijet. 
Pencil, ber S>infeX, SBIetfrift. 
People, bad Sotf, bie Seate; *«&' 

fern. 
Pepper, ber $feffer. 
Perfect, aaflfommen. 
Perhaps, suettetd):. 

Perish, nmfommen, $u ©runbt gtfietL 
Pestilence, bie $e|L 
Physician, ber 3tr&L 
Piece, bad <5tM. 
Pigeon, bie £aube<, 
Pink, bie s #elfe. 
Pit, bie ©ru&fc 
Pitcher, ber $rng. 
Pity, bad Sftitteiben- it is a -, ed ifk 

<S$abe; bemitieiben, bebauern. 
Plan, ber $lan, CEntrourf. 
Plane, ber ^>ckL 
Plate, ber Seller. 
Play, fpiekn, f^erjeru 
Player, ber ©pieler. 
Pleasant, -ly, angene^m. 
Please, gefallen, ergb|en. 
Pleasure, bad SSergnugeit. 
Plum, bie spflaume. 
Pole, ber 9)ole. 
Polite, fein, arttg, $ofli$. 
Poor, arm, Mrfttg, mager. 
Porcelain, bad 9)or$eEan. 
Post-mark, ber Stempel. 
Pound, bad §)fimb. 
Pour, giegen, einfdjenfett 
Poverty, bit 2lrmut$. 
Powder, bad $utoer. 
Power, bie Sttadjt, ©ematt* flraft 
Powerful, -ly, mticfytig* 
Practical, prat"tifd). 
Practice, bie Ueburtg-. 
Praise, bad £ob; loben, pretfen. 
Preposition, bad ^er^dltnijjroort. 
Pretty, ijubfd), nett, sierlte^. 
Prince, ber $rin$, gitrjt. 
Principle, ber ©ruttbfafr. 
Prison, bad ©efdngnig. 
Probable, wafjrfdjeintidj. 
Pronoun, bad gurroort* 
Promise, bad 2}erfpre$en; $erfpre$«n> 

geioben. 
Pronounce, audfpre<$etu 
Proud, \tolif tro jig. 
Prussia, $rcu§ea. 
Punish, bejlrafetJu 



Pure, rein, lanter. 
Purse, ber 25eutel. 
Put, jMen, legen. 

Q 

Quarrel, janfen, jfreiteft 
Queen, bi-e ilonigin. 

R 

Rage, routrjeru 

Rain, ber $egen; regneit. 

Raise, I)eben, auffyeben. 

Rapid, fcfynetf, gefdjnunb. 

Rather, lie ber. 

Raven, ber ffiabt. 

Read, lefeit. 

Really, nnrflid), in ber Ztyat 

Receive, empfangen, err)aXtett. 

Recommend, empfeljCen. 

Recover, gefunb rcerben, genefat 

Red, roti). 

Rejoice, ftcr) freuen. 

Relation, ber, bie SJerroanbte 

Reliable, suserldfftg. 

Remain, bletben. 

Remember, ftct) erinnern. 

Renowned, beru[)mt» 

Resemble, gletcben, djttltd) fein. 

Reside, roobnen. 

Resistance, ber Siberjranb. 

Respect* ad)ten, f$dj?en, fyofyatytttL 

Result, bie golge, ber (£rfoIg. 

Return, $uriicffeljren, &uriufgebem W 

ritcffd)ttferL 
Reward, sergelien? belotynen. 
Rice, ber 9M§. 
Rich, reic^o 
Ride, reiten, fa^rett 
Ridicule, iddjerlid) ma$tn, (?$ fiBet 

-. . . an flatten* 
Ring, ber Ottng, ilreid, $lana 
Ripe, retf, je-itig. 
Ripen, reifen. 
River, ber %lv$ f ^troirL 
Road, bie <Stra§e \ ber SBeg* 
Rob, ranben, berauben. 
Robbery, ber dlauh. 
Rock, ber geld, gelfen. 
Roof, ba^ £>ad?> 
Room, oer Otaum, bie <&tuU, ba$ 

Simmer. 
Rope, bad <Setl ; -maker, ber Seilet 
Rose, bie ffiofe. 
Baby, ber SRuMtt. 



514 



KUL— ~ SHI 



SMO-— SPA 



Rule, btc $egel, ^errfdjaft* 

Run, kuf in f retmeit; rumen j - away, 

burdjge^en, 
Russia, 3fatgfonb, 
Russian, ber $uffe; rufjtfdj- 
Rusty, rofrig. 
Rye, bet Sftoggeti/ ba# $orn* 

8 

Sad, traurig, betritbt 

Saddle, ber ©attcl- 

Saddler, ber <3attle& 

Sailor, ber $?atrofe< 

Sake. (L. 60.) 

Salt, ba$ ©alj- 

Same, berfelfo, biefelfce, fcaflfeftfj the 

very -, ber ndmlidjf. 
Satin, ber Sttlctg, 
Satisfied, ^ufriebett. 
Saxony, Sctcfyfen. 
Say, fag en. 

Scarlet-fever, ba% <5$axla$$tUx. 
Scholar, ber <5d$Ur> $eU$rie> bie 

Sdjulerin. 
School, bie ©<§ule. 
Scold, fdjelten. 
Sea, bie <See, bctS 5#eer. 
Seal, ber ®ee|mnb. 
Seal, ba<3 3>etfd&aft, ber @temj>cL 
Sealing-wax, ba3 (Siegeflad. 
Season, bie Sa^te^jcit* red^te 3t\L 
Season of the year, bk Sa^re^eif. 
See, fefen. 
Seem, fdjeinen. 
Seize, ergreifen* 
Seldom, fclten. 
Self, feifcft 
Selfish, eigermufctg. 
Sell, ioerfaufeiu 
Send, fenben, f^iden ; to - for, Ijplen 

laflTen. 
Sense, ber <Sinn, $erjtanb. 
September, September. 
Sergeant, ber gelbtioebel. 
Servant, ber Wiener; - girl, bct$ 

£>ienftmd$en. 
Several, serfdjiebene, mefyrere. 
Sew, nd^en. 
Shall, fatten, rserben. 
Sharp, -ly, fd^arf. 
Sharpen, fdjdrfen, f^ietfen, sufpifeen. 
Sheep, bct$ Scfyaf. 
Shine, fdjeinert, leuc^text 
Ship, b*$ @d)iff. 



Shoe, ber <&§v$, ba$ £ufeifett; - 

maker, ber ©<$tt$ma$er. 
Shoot, fdjiejjjen. 
Shore, ba$ Ufer. 
Shriek, fdjreten. 
Short, furj. 
Shovel, bie ©d&aufet- 
Show, jetgen 
Sick, franf, urttt>o$l 
Side, bie <Seite; on this-, MeSfettS; 

on the other •*•, ienfett§. 
Siege, bie SBelagerwtg* 
Sight, ba$ ©ejt$i j out of -, am ben 

9fugen. 
Bilk, bie Seibe \ feiben. 
Silly, einfditig, alberru 
Silver, ba^ ©ilbexj ftl&errt. 
Similar, dtynlidj* 
Since, feitbem, sorter, tt>eilj lo- 
sing, fingen. 
Singer, ber danger. 
Sister, bie ©djmefter ; - in law, Sit 

Sdjwdgerm 
Sit, jtfcen, pa|Ten* 
Situation, bie ©telle. 
Six, fe<§3. 

Sixteenth, fec^^^e^rtte, 
Skillful, gefd)tdt, 
Slaughter, fcfyladjten* 
Sleep, ber ©c&lafj fd)lafen. 
Sleeve, ber Vermel. 
Slow, langfam. 

SmalL Hcittf gering; ^pox, bie %folttxn. 
Smile, Xac^eXn* 

Smith, ber Sdjmieb, <£($mib, @$mfti> 
Smoke, ber Slaufy \ rauc§en. 
Smooth, glatt. 
Snow, ber ^ntt ; fdmeien* 
So, fo. 

Sojourn, ber Slufenttyatt. 
Sofa, ba3 Oiufyektt, <£op{)a. 
Soft, mify, fanft# leife- 
Soldier, ber (Solbat* 
Some, -body, jemanb ; -thing, etwa$ , 

-times, juroetten, mancfymal; - 

where, irgenbn>o. 
Son, ber <§o§n. 
Song, ber ®efang, ba$ £ieb. 
Soon, balb, fritlj. 
Sorrow, ber Summer. 
Sorry, traurig, betrubt; I am -, e# 

fyut mir leib* 
South, (Sitben. 
Spade, ber Spaten* 



SPA-^SWO 



HAM — TO 



515 



Spanish, franifdj. 

Spare, fdjonen. 

Sparrow, ber Sperling. 

Speak, fpret^en, reben. 

Spin, [pitmen, bre^en. 

Spirit, ber ®etjr, bie Seele. 

Spite, ber ®xoU; in - of; ircfc. 

Split, fp alien. 

Sponge* ber ^roanrnu 

Spoon, ber £offel\ 

Spring, ber Sprung bit Quelle^ ber 

tf ruling ; fpringetu 
S able, ber otatt* 

Stand, ber Stanb, bte @teHe; fte^en 
Start, fallen, abreifem 
State, ber @taat ; -'s-man, ber Qiaatd* 

ntantu 
Stay, ber 2lufent$alt ; Meiktu 
Stead, bie oteEe. (L. 60.) 
Steal, fte^Xeru 
Steel, ber @ta$t; \ttyltn, (lament* 

(L. 15, 5), 
Steep, jteiL 
Still, ftttt, rnljtg, tn)$> 
Sting, ber Stadjel ; jtedjen* 
Story, bie ®efd)idjte, ba3 2Rd$n§ett. 
Stove, ber Dfen. 

Stranger, ber Sretnbe, Un&efatmte. 
Stream, ber <5trom. 
Street, bie ©trape* 
Strength^ bie <Stdrfe* 
Strike, fd)lagen, jbpen, §auen. 
Strong, \taxtt frdftig, berfc. 
Study, ftubirettf nadjbenfeiu 
Stupid, bumm, alfcern. 
Subject, ber ttntert^an; untertfym. 
Succeed, nadjfclgen, geluigetu 
Succumb 5 erliegen* 
Suffer, leibetu 
Sugar, ber Bucfer. 
Summer, ber Sonvmer* 
Sun, Me Sonne* 

Super.'.or, irberlegen* J?or$gli<$ei 
Supply, erfe^en. 
Bu re, ft^er, geroig. 
Svirgeonj ber ©unbarjk 
Shallow* bie Sdjroalki 
*Svau, ber Sd)roatu 
Swede, ber @^roebe» 
Sweeps fefyretu 
Swell, f^rcetten, anffdjroetfett 
Swim, fdjtoimmen. 
Sword* ba$ Sdjn>ert 



Table, bie Safel, ber Stfdj. 

Tailor, ber Sdjneiber. 

Take, neljmen, madden; to - cold, jlc$ 

erf alien ; to -* off* afcne^metu 
Tanner* ber (Berber* 
Tea, ber Sfjee* 
Teach, leljren, unterridjten. 
Teacher, ber 2ef)rer, bie £e§rerirt. 
Tedious, langroeilig. 
Tell* jcu}len, er&d§len* 
Than, al3> bentu 
That, ptn. j.ener, ioeldjer, btt. 
That, conj. ba$* 
The, ber, bie, ba$,it ..., befto ...,um 

fo ; - more, - better, jc me§r, bejto 

oejTer. 
Thee, btr, bid) ; of -, beiner. 
Their, i$fi i^re. 
Them, ifynen, fie. 
Themselves, fte felbft, fid} felBft 
There* ba f bort, bafelBft, baJjin, e^ | 

-fore, better, barum, alfo, 
They, fte* 
Thief, ber SMeB. 
Thing, ba3 £)ing, bie <§a%i. 
Think, benfen, meinen, glaufcenj to * 

oi gebenfen. 
Third, britte ; ba§ 2>rttteL 
This, btefer. 
Thirty* breijug* 
Thorn* ber £>orm 
Though, oofctyon, ofcgletc§. 
Thought, ber ©ebanle. 
Thousand, taufenb. 
Thrash, brefdjen. 
Thrasher* ber £>refdjer. 
■Threaten, broken* 
Three, bret. 
Thresh, see Thrash. 
Through, burdj. 
Throw, roerfen. 
Thunder, bormerrt, toeitertt 
Thus, fo, alfo, auf biefe SSCrt. 
Thyself, bu felotf, felojt, bty, bit 
Tiger, ber Siger* 
Till, m. 

Time, bie QtxU ba$ 2JtoI. 
Tin, ba$ 3inn. 
Tinman, ber itlempnet. 
Tired, mitbe, u&erbritfjtg. 
To, $u, urn, att, auf, mil, na$, fur> 

gegen, ot$ ; - and fro, Ijin unb ^ej 



516 



TOB UPO 



trsfi — -Wtti 



Tobacco, ber %aM. Useful, ttu$lt$. 

To-day, tyeute. 

Toilsome, anjlrengertb. 

Toll-gatherer, ber Better. 

To-morrow, morgeru 

Too, iu t aU^Ur auq. 

Tooth, ber Bdjn. 

Toothache, ba$ S^tttt)e^ 

Toward, gegett. 

Traitor, ber $errdt$er. 

Translate, itberfe^ert. 

Trash, ber £anb. 

Travel, reiferu 

Traveler, ber fRetfetlbe. 

Treat, befyctnbeln. 

Tree, ber SSaum, ©tamm> 

Tremble, jitterit. 

Trouble, bie ttnrulje, ber SSerbrufi, 

Summer. 
True, roatyr, treu. 
Trunk, ber Coffer, Stamm. 
Truth, bie SBaljrrjeit. 
Try, ^ritfert, tterfudjen. 
Turk, ber £itrfe. 
Turkey, bie Siirfct. 
Turn, bie $eitje ; bre^ett, bre^feltt. 
Twelve, jroolf. 
Twenty, &tDan&ig. 
Twice, aroeimal. 
Two, §rr>ei. 
Tyrant, ber tyxaMt SMttyrtd). 

U 
Ugly, Jjaglidj. 

Umbrella, ber SRegenfdjirm. 
Unaccustomed, tmgeroofyttt. 
Uncle, ber Dr)etm, DnfeL 
Uncommon, ungemem. 
Under, urtter imten, nteber, unterge* 

crbrtet. 
Understand, tterjteJjertr fcegreifen; see 

formert. (L. 45). 
Unfavorable, imgihtjttg* 
Unfortunate, urt^IucfXtc^* 
Unhappy, unglMUd). 
United, sereirtigt 
Unpleasant, imartgerte^m. 
Until, m. 

Untrue, urtroafyr* untreu. 
Unwell, imtDofyi. 
Up, auf, aufroartS, ^irtauf, tyerattf, 

empor. 
Upon, auf, an, itfcer, lti f au$, ttu 



Vain, elteX. 

Valiant, taftfer, Bra». 

Value, ber2Berrfj. 

Veil, ber ©cfyleier. 

Venture, tMgeru 

Very, ferjr. 

Vessel, H% <55efag. 

Vest, bie SBefte. 

Vex, plagen, quaXen ijerbriefen. 

Vienna, SBieru 

Village, ba£ Dorf. 

Vinegar, ber (£fjtg. 

Violin, bie ®eige. 

Virtue, bie Sugenb ; by - ofj frctft 

Visit, ber SBefudj; kfu^en. 

Voice, bie ©timme. 

w 

Wafer, bie Dfilate. 

Wagon, ber SBagert; -maker, bet 

SBagrter. 
Wait, rDctrtetu 
Waiter, ber Jhttner. 
Walk, ber ®cmg, 2Beg, Spajiergangj 

ge^etu 
Want, bctS SSeburfntg ; to be in -, 

fcertotr)igt fetn r notfyig §a&en; SRatt* 

gel leiben an . . > 
War, ber $rieg. 
Warm, roarm; -r-spring, SSarmBrutt* 

nert. 
Wash, r»afd)en ; -stand, ber 2Baf$rtfd). 
Wasp, bie 2Befpe* 
Watch, bie ttljr, £af$emtf)r ; -maker, 

ber Uf)rma$er. 
Watchful, roadjfam. 
Water, bag Staffer. 
Wave, bie 2Betfe, 2Boge. 
Way, ber 2Beg. 
We, r»ir. 

Wealth, ber $elc$t$um. 
Wear, tragert, antyafcen. 
Weary, mitbe. 
Weather, ba$ SBetter. 
Weave, mhtXL 
Weaver, ber Sefcer. 
Weed, ba$ Unfraut. 
Week, bie 2Bo$e. 
Weep, rr>eirten, fcersetnett 
Well, n>o$l, gut. 
Whale ber ©aUfffdj. 



WHA — WOO 



WOO — YOtJ 



51T 



What-, tea*, welder, totl§ tin, m& 

fur ttitr nne »tel. 
Wheat, ber 2Bei$en. 
When, roenn, roam, al$ t bo. ■ 
Where, too, rootyin. 
Wherein, roorin. 
Whether, oK 

Which, welder, roetdj>e, wetted. 
While, inbem, rocrtjrenb. 
Whistle, bie $fetfe, pfeifen. 
White, roeijjj. 
Who, roer, roeldjer, ber, bie; -ever, 

roer audj tmmer. 
Whole, gan$. 
Why, roarum (L. 13. 6). 
Wild, rotlb. 

Will, ber SBittc; roollen. (L. 45). 
Win, geroinnen. 
Window, ba3 genjler. 
Wine, ber 2Betru 
Wise, roetfe, oerfranbta,. 
Wish, ber SBunfd;; roimfd^en; see 

rootten., (1*45)* 
With, mit, rtebjtr fammi, oet, auf, fur 

an, burd). 
Within, in, tnner^alo. 
Without, anger, ofyne. 
WoU, Der SBolf. 
Woman, ba3 2Betb, Me gran. 
Wood, ba§ £ol§; -cutter, ber &ot>* 

$auer 



Wooden, r}ol$em. 

Wool bie SBofle. 

Word, ba$ Sort. 

Work, bie Arbeit, ba$> 2Berf; arbeitett. 

World, bie Selt# (£rbe; -renowned, 

roeItberur)mt» 
Worm, ber 2Burm» 
Worst, fd)ted)tejle, drgfie. 
Worth, ber SBcrt^; roert^, roitrbtg. 
Worthy, rourbia,. 
Wretched, elenb. 
Write, fd)reiben. 
Writing-book, ba§ <S$retbbucr) ; - 

desk, ba§ Sdjreibpult; -paper ba# 

<Sd)retbpapier. 
Wrong, unredjt, fatfd). 



Yarn, ba3 ©am. 
Year, baS 3atyr. 
Yellow, gelfc. 
Yes, 3a. 

Yesterday, gejierrt 
Yet, bod), bennod), tto$. 
Yonder, bort. 
You, tfyr, etc. (L. 27), 
Foung, juno., frifd). 
Your, ener, bein, 3ty& 
Youth, bie 3ug?nk 



EltRATA. 



Bed, bag Sett* 

Citizen, ber SBitrger* 

Evil, ba$ Uebel ; ad/, itbel, oofe* 

Pupil, ber BoaUng, Stiller* 

Renonncej entfagen* 



Service, ber £>tettfh 
Spear, ber ©peer* 
Yain, ettel ; in — , fcergeocttl* 
Weak, fdjroa$*. 



GENERAL INDEX, 



$[, 0^ tt» ehanged to the umlauts* a, 
b> it, L. j:;i 2. II*i in derivative 
forms, § lli 1* 

Abbrevi itions, p* 261* 

$be?, aMtt, fottbent, distinguished* 
g 256, 2. a. L* 2L 4* 

Abstract nouns* § 5* 2* 

Accent, § 2, 10. L* 2. VI 

ttdjteit, L* 62. 6, 

Accusative or dative after certain 
prepositions* § 116* Rule for the 
use of* § 132* Verbs requiring 
too, § 132* 2* Used to denote 
measure* distance or time* § 132* 
3. Construed absolutely* § 132. 5. 

Adjectives* formed by suffixes* § 25; 
§ 26. Predicative and attributive* 
p. 44* {Note), Declension of* §27* 
Old form of* § 28* § 29* I* 14* 
New form of, § 30. § 31* L* 15. 
Mixed form of* § 32* L* 16* Com- 
parison of* § 35* L* 32. Used as 
nouns, § 34. 5* L* 33* 1. Com^ 
paratives and Superlatives* § 37. 
Irregular and defective forms of, 
§ 39. Compared by means of adi 
verbs* § 41. Their agreement 
with nouns* % 135* L. 14* 4* Re- 
petition of, for different genders, 
§ 135. 5* Requiring the gen., 
L. 61* Requiring the dat.* L* 63* 

Adverbs* § 100* Formed from nouns* 
§. 101* From adjectives, § 102* 
From pronouns* § 103* From 
Verbs, § 104* By composition* 
§ 105. Comparison of, § 106* 
Nouns used as* §. 128* L* 61* 8. 
Syntax of, § 151* 

ftfler, prefixed to superlatives* § 38* 
2. L. 32* 7* Applied to number 
and quantity* § 53* 3* Peculiar 
use of* § 134* L 

»13, K 69. 3* 

tllfe, L. 69. 4* 

Hilt/ with the positive of an adjec- 
tive used for the superlative* 



§ 38* 1* L* 32* 6* This forta of 
super!, when used* §* 42. 

3fo, § 116* L* 68. 1* 2. 

Stnber, L* 65* 1* 

$nbere, ber, instead of bet iwtxtU 
§ 45. 3* 

$nbertfjaIB, instead of awetttfjjalfy 
§49* (Note). 

Stnftatt, § 110. 1. I* 60* 7* Befdra 
infinitive* L* 49* 5* 

Apposition, rule for* § 133* § 123. 
6*7* 

Attributive adjective* L. 14. 

Articles* declension of* § 4* L. 8. 4> 
12. 4. Contracted with preposi* 
tions, % 4. 2. L* 20* 4« Rule for 
the use of, § 120* L* 42. Def* 
art* in place of possess, prom* 

tl34* 7* With fold), § 120. 4* 
efore $al& and kibe, § 120. 2. A* 
Omission of, L* 43. 

9Iitd), answering to ever and evert^ 
L* 69. 5* 

9fof, § 116* L* 68* 3. 

Auxiliary verbs* divided into two 
classes* § 70* 1. Those of the first 
class* tyctben, fettt and tDerben, when 
and how used* §5 70* § 71* Those 
of the second class* when and 
how used* § 74* Infinitives of 
the second class in place of th« 
participle* § 74. 3. 

SBalb, L* 69. 6. 

33ar, suffix* § 25* 

33e, prefix* § 97* 1* 

Sefmbett, L* 29. 10. 

S3ei)alten, L* 62* 

23ei, its use* § 112* 3* L. 66. 3. 

SBetbe, betbe^, L* 65. 2. 

»U, L* 69* 7. 

Capitals, rules for, § 5* 2* (Note). 

Cardinal numbers* § 44. Gender 
of* taken merely as figures, 
§44 7. 

Cases, § 3* 4* 5* Of participles* 
§ 147. 1. L. 8; 60; 61; 62; 63. 



° L. refers to Lessons, p. 19—260 inclusive ; § refers to the second 
part, p. 263-HL46 inclusive. 



GENERAL t&i)EZ, 



619 



(i$ett, diminutives in, § 10. L. 24. 1. 
Represented by pronouns masc. 
or fern,, § 134 2. L. 28, 4. 

Collective nouns, form o£ § 11. 3, 
Pronouns, referring to them, 
§ 134 3, 

Collocation of words, § 158. L, 53. 

Comparison of adjectives, § 35. 
L. 32. Euphonic changes in form- 
ing, § 36. Comparatives and 
superlatives* declension of, § 37. 
L. 32. 5. Irregular forms of* § 39. 
L. 32. 4 

Comparison of adverbs* § 106, 

Composing German, Exercises in, 
L. 25* Models for, p, 449. 

Compounds, formation of, § 2. 6, 7, 
Accent of, § 2, 10, 

Compound verbs, § 89, Separable, 
§ 90. L, 51, Paradigm of a com- 
pound separable,- § 92. Com* 
pounds inseparable, § 95. L. 54. 

Conditional mood, obs. on the sev- 
eral uses of, § 144. 1. 2, 3, &c, 
L. 56, 

Conjugation of verbs, § 75. Regu- 
lar, L, 37. Irregular, L, 47. 

Conjunctions, § 117. Syntax of, 
§ 156, Examples,- illustrating 
the use of, L, 69. 

Consonants, classification and pro- 
nunciation of, L. 11. IY. V. 

Correlatives, § 156. 2, g. 

Qa, compounded with other words* 
§ 103. L, 52, 2, 

2)afur (nid)t3 bafib ftmnen), L, 45.- 6. 

Qad, peculiar use of,- § 62. 1. 
§ 134 1, 

S)ag, its use, § 156, 2. k L, 69, 9. 

Dative, after certain prepositions, 
§ 116. Peculiar uses of, § 129, 
1. 2, 3, 4c, § 134, 8, After verbs 
compounded with er, ser, <fec, 
§ 130. After adjectives* § 131. 

Declension, of the article,- § 4, Of 
nouns, § 12, Old form, § 13. 
New form, § 14. Of adjectives* 
§ 27. Of comparatives and su- 
perlatives, § 37. Of adjective* 
article, noun, demonst. and poss, 
pronouns, L. 30. 9. 

Demonstrative pronouns, § 61. 
§ 62. L. 10-44 

Detm, L. 69, 10 



3Der, (determinative) when abso- 
lute, its form in the gen. plural, 

§ 63. 2. (relative) its use, § 65. % 
£)erjtetuge, L, 41, 
Derivation and composition o! 

Words* § 2. Derivatives, secon 

dary* § 2. 3. 4 5. 
£5ero and tyro, p, 312, {Note). 
£)ej3 (beffett), when used* § 62. 4 
Dej^alb, begttegen, L. 53. 6. 
<£)t\to, L, 32, 10. 
Determinative pronouns, § 6$. 

L, 41, 
£)iefer and }ener distinguished* 

§ 62, 2, 
£)iefe§, bteS, peculiar use of, § 62. 1. 

§ 134 L 
Dimidiative numerals* how formed^ 

§49, 
Diminutives, § 10, L, 24 1. 2, 

Gender of pronouns referring to* 

§ 134 2, L. 28, 4 
Distinctive numerals* how formed* 

§ 51, 1. 2. 
Diphthongs* sounds of* L. 2. III. 
Distributive numerals, how formed* 

§46, 
£oc§, § 156. 2, c. L, 69, 11, 
2)rei and $t»ei, when declined* 

§ 44 4, 
£)itrfen, conjugation of, § 83, 2. Re* 

marks on, § 83, 9. 
(Eben, before a demonstrative** 

§ 62. 6, 
(£t, termination* § 10. 
(£tgett, L, 16 3, 

(£in, one* how declined, § 44. 2. B 
(Sincmber, its use* § 60. 3. 
(£inige/ etlidje, ema3, § 53. 
drnp and ent, § 97, 2. 
(£tt, suffix, forming adjectives, §2& 

L 15, 5. 
(Sntgegett, § 112, 5, 
(£r and set, § 97, 3, 4. 
(£riimem, L. 62, 1. 
(£rft, L, 69. 14, 
&$, peculiar use of* § 57, 8 § 134 

1. 5, 
@3 fei bemt, L, 69. 10. 
<£t»a, L, 69, 15. 
(£ma<3, L. 65. 4 
&\\K, L, 27,3, (Note.) 
Etymology, § 1. 
Euphonic letters, § 2. 8. § 11. %. 



fcEtfflRAL IttJDfiX. 



gejlctt, L. 57. 5. m 

Feminine nouns, indeclirable in the 
singular, § 12. 4. Exceptions to 
this, p. 277. (Note). 

Foreign nouns 5 § 16. Old declension 
of, § 17. New declension of, § 18. 
Partly of the old and partly of 
the new, § 19* 

graa, graukut* L. 70. 

gitr, L. 67. 2. 

Future tenses, observ. on the use 
of, § 141. 1, 2. L. 38, 4. 

i$att$ and fyalb, before names of pla- 
ces, § 53. 2, ©<m$ urtb gar, L. 19. -3. 

©ar, L. 69. 16. 

©e, prefix of nouns, § 2. 3. § 11. 3. 
Prefixed to the past participle, 
§ 69. 4. Inserted between the 
prefix and the radical in com- 
pound verbs separable, § 93. 3. 
§ 99. 3. Excluded from the per- 
fect participle of compound verbs 
inseparable, § 94- 

©ebett, L. 57. 4. 

©egen, L. 67. 3. 

©egenitber, L, 66. 5. 

'Gender, the natural and gramma- 
tical, § 6. 1. 2. Rules of, § # 7. 
Gender of compounds and foreign 
words, § 8. 

Genitive, limiting a noun, § 123. 
Limiting an adjective, § 124. 
"With the verbs ctcfyten, <fcc, § 125. 
After reflexive verbs, § 126. After 
the impersonal e£ geliiftet mid), 
dec, § 126. 1. After anflctgett, fce* 
lefyren, <fcc, § 127. Nouns in, used 
as adverbs, § 128. L. 61. 8. With 
prepositions, L. 60. 

©eixug, L. 53. 7. 

©cm, L. 69. 17. 

©let*, L. 69. 18. 

£aben, when and how used as au 
auxiliary, § 70. 3. 4. § 71. .2. L. 48. 
Paradigm of, g 72. 1. § 73. 

£ctft, suffix, § 25, 

©alb, § 53. 2. 

$alben or £atber, § 110. 3. L. 6<X 4. 

-^alben, ttegen and urn - ttriflen with 
the genitive of personal pro- 
nouns, § 57. 1. L. 60. 6. 

£>au£, nacfy or £it, L. 43. 2. 
t>eigen, L. 49. 1. ob& 

£>eit, suffix, § 10, 



§er and §ut> § 103. 3. 4. L. 52. 

#err> L. 70. 

£tn, L. 52. 

|)od), form of, in the comparative 

§ 40. 1. 
£Hert kffen, L. 49. 6. 
•Jmnbert and taitfenb as collectives* 

§ 44. 6. 
Styro and £)ero, p. 312. (Note). 
Smmtr, L. 69. 19. 
Imperative mood, observations on 

the several uses of, § 145. 1. 2. 

L. 50. 5. Past participle, in 

place of, § 145. 3. 
Imperfect, observations on the us© 

of, § 138. 1. % 3. 
Impersonal verbs, § 88. K 57. 
3tt, L. 68. 4. 
Stt or inn, feminine terminations, 

§ io. 

Indefinite numerals, how formed, 
§53. 

Indefinite pronouns, § 59. 

Indicative mood, for the imperative 
| 142. 2. L. 88. 

Infinitive mood, use of, in place Oi 
a past participle, § 74. 3. Without 
IU, § 146. 1. L. 49. With JU, 
§ 146. % As a verbal substantive, 
§ 146. 3. Active form used pas* 
sively, § 146. 4. L. 49. 6. Position 
of, § 158. 5. Answering after blet* 
kit, gefyen <fcc, to our present 
participle, L. 49. 

Interjection, § 118. § 157. 

Interrogative conjugation, L. 6. 

Interrogative pronouns, § 66, 67. 
L. 13. 

Srgenb, L. 65. 6. 

Irregular verbs, commonly so cal- 
led, list of, § 78. 1. Thos prop- 
erly so called, § 81, 82, 83. 

3fd), suffix, § 25. 

Iterative numerals how formed, 
§50. 

3a, L. 69. 20. 

3e, used in forming distributives, 
§46. Before comparatives, §156. 
2. d. L. 32. 10. 

Seber, §53. Sebweber, § 53. 

3egiid)er, § 53. L. 42. 3. 

Semcmbem (dative), remark on tie 
use o^ § 59* & 



GENERAL INDEX. 



521 



Seiter and Mefer, distinguished, 
§62.2. 

3ette3, peculiar use of, § 62. 1. 

^eht, § 53. 3. L. 69. 22. 

.ft etrte3 »on Beiben, L. 65. 2. 

$eit, suffix, § 10. 

ftimnen, conjugation of, § 83. 3. Re- 
marks on, § 83. 10, L. 45. 5. 

£affen, remarks upon, p. 338. (Note). 
L. 45. 11. 

£ettt, diminutives in, § 10. L. 24. 1. 
Represented by a pronoun mas- 
culine or feminine, § 134. 2. 

Letters of union, § 2 7. 8. 9. Of 
euphony between suffix and ra- 
dical, § 11. 2. 

fit*, § 25. 

List, of (so called) irregular verbs, 
§ 78. 1. 

SSta, its use, § 59. 2. L. 19. 

2Jfonc()er, § 53. 

SfteBr, its two form in plural, § 40. 2. 
Witty, metyrere, § 53. 

SDlit, L. 66. 6. 

Mixed conjugation, how produced, 

§ 8L 
Mixed declension of adjectives, § 32. 

L. 16. Rule for the use of, § 33. 

Sftogen, conjugation of, § 83. 4. Re- 
marks on, § 83. 11. L. 45. 7. 

Moods, § 68. 5. Indicative, § 142. 
Subjunctive, § 143. L. 55. Con- 
ditional, § 144. L. 56. Impera- 
tive, § 145. L. 50. 5. Infinitive, 
§146. 

Multiplicative numerals, how for- 
med, § 47. 

Sftiiffen, conjugation of, § 83. 5. Re- 
marks on, § 83. 12. L. 45. 8. 

9hci), § 112. 8 ; L. 66. 8. 

9?atj, form of in superl., § 40. 1. 

Negative conjugation, L. 21. 

SftidjtS bafur fimnen, L. 45. 6. 

ilftdjt mty ? L. 21. 5. 

mod), L. 69. 23. t 

^temuttbem, dative, remark on the 
us*, of, § 59. 3. 

Nominative, the case of the subject, 
§ 121. Seldom omitted, § 121. 1. 

Nouns, common and proper, § 5. 1. 
Collective and abstract, §. 5. 2. 
Gender of, § 6. Derivation of, 
§9. Declensioi of, § 12. Old form 
of, § 13. L. 8. 4. New form of; 



§ 14. L. 30. 2. Obs. on irregular, 
§ 15. Foreign, § 16. Proper, de- 
clension of, § 20, 21, 22. Of 
measure, number <fec. § 123. 

Numbers, § 3. 3. 

Numerals, § 43. Cardinals, § 44. 
Ordinals, § 45. Distributives, 
§ 46. Multiplicatives, § 47. Va- 
riatives, § 48. Dimidiatives, § 49. 
Iteratives, § 50. Distinctives, 
§ 51. 1. 2, Partitives, § 52. Inde- 
finites, § 53. 

Vim, L. 69. 24. 

9tor, L. 69. 25. 

Dfcgleicfy, oBfcfyott, o&tt>o$I, § 156. 2. e. 

Dfc, L. 66. 10. 

Dljne, L. 67. 4. Followed by the 
infinitive, L. 49. 5. 

Ordinal numbers, § 45. Rules for 
forming, § 45. 2. 4. Interrogative 
form, § 45. 5. 

Paradigms of fyabtn and feitt, § 72. 1. 
2. Of werbcn, § 72. 3. Of a verb 
of the Old form, § 78. Of irregu- 
lar verbs, § 83. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 
Of a passive verb, § 85. Of a re- 
flexive verb, § 87. Of a com 
pound verb, § 92. 

Participles, their form and meaning, 
§ 69. L. 37. 1. 2. Declined like 
adjectives, § 34. 4. L. 37. 4.^ Past 
participle for the imperative, § 
145. 3. L. 50. 3. Place of the 
past part, of the mood auxiliaries, 
supplied by the infinitive, § 74. 3. 
Cases of, § 147. 1. Uses of part, 
in German restricted, § 147. 2. 3. 
Present part., its agreement with 
its noun, § 148. Usually attribu- 
tive, § 148. 1. With the article 
often used substantively, § 148. 2. 
Not, as in English, an abstract 
verbal noun, § 148. 3. Its po- 
sition, § 148. 4. Adverbial power 
of, § 148. 5. Preterite part., pe- 
culiar uses of, § 149. 2. Used 
absolutely, § 149. 3. Future part., 
§ 150. L. 50. 4. 

Particles, p. 388 (Note), L. 51. 54. 

Partitive numerals, how formed, 
§ 52. 

Passive verb, mode of forming, 
§ 84. 1. Paradigm of, § 85. L. 58. 
Advantage over the English, 



522 



GENERAL INDEX. 



§ 84 3. Other methods express- 
ing passivity, § 84. 4. 

Perfect tense, obs. on the use of, 
§ 139. 1. 2. 3. L. 38. 3. 

Personal pronouns, construed with 
Ijalbett, ttegen and urn- ttitfen, §57. 
2. Third pers. of, representing 
things without life, § 57. 3, Third 
pers. plural used for the second 
in addressing persons, § 57. 6. 
L. 27. 5. used as reflexives, § 
60. 4. L. 29. 1. 

Phrases, idiomatic, p. 446. 

Pluperfect tense, § 140. 

Plural, nouns having no, § 15. 2. 
Nouns, having two forms in the, 
§ 15. 3. 

Possessive pronouns, forms of, 
§ 58. 2. L. 12. 2. How declined, 
when conjunctive, § 58. 3. When 
absolute, § 58. 4. 5. 6. L. 35. 
Place of, supplied by the def. art. 
§ 58. 8. 

Predicate, of a sentence, 119. § 
Nouns, when used as, § 122. 
List of adjectives, always used 
as, §. 27. 2. 

Prefixes of verbs, simple separable, 
§ 90. Compound separable, §91. 
L. 51. When separated from the 
radical, § 93. Inseparable, § 94. 
95. Compound prefixes insepar- 
able, § 96. L. 54. Separable and 
inseparable, § 98. L. 54. 2. 

Prepositions, table of, § 108. Those 
construed with genitive, § 109. 
110. L. 60. With dative, § 111. 
112. L. 20. 1. With accusative, 
§ 113. 114. L. 20. 2. With the dat., 
or ace, § 115. 116. L. 20. 3. Ex- 
amples of the use o£ L. 66. 67. 68. 
Syntax of, § 152. 153. 154. 155. 

Primitives, § 2. 2. 

Pronouns, table of, § 55. Personal, 
§ 56. 57. L. 27; 28. Possessive, 
§ 58. Indefinite, § 59. Reflexive 
and reciprocal, § 60. L. 29. De- 
monstrative, § 61. 62. L. 10; 44. 
Determinative, § 63. L. 41. Re- 
lative, § 64. 65. L. 39. Inter- 
rogative, § 66. 67. L. 13. Syntax 
0^ §134. 

Proper names, declension o£ § 20. 



L. 30 4. In the plural, § 21. Of 
countries <fcc, § 22. 23. 

Quantity, weight <fcc, words of, 
when qualified by numerals, 
rarely in the plural, p. 279. 
Note. L. 59. 

Otetf)t, with f)<xUn f L. 36. 2. 

Reciprocal pronouns, § 60. L. 29. 6. 

Reflexive pronouns, § 60. L. 29. 
Special form for, in the dat. and 
ace, § 60. 4. 

Reflexive verbs, how produced, 
§ 86. 1. L. 29. 9. Some with the 
dat. and some with the ace. of the 
recip. pron., § 86. 2. Often equi- 
valent to passives, § 86. 4. Para- 
radigm of a reflexive, § 87. 

$eif)e, L. 46. 2. 

Relative pronouns, § 64. 65. L. 39. 
Can not (weldjer excepted) be 
joined with a noun like an ad- 
jective, § 65. 1. Never omitted, 
§ 134. 4. 

Repetition of the adject, when re- 
ferring to nouns of different 
genders, § 135. 5. 

©air fdjaftr fel, terminations, § 10 

©am, termination, § 25. 

©d)on, L. 69. 26. 

<£d)uib fein, L. 46. 2. 

@d)utt>ig fein, L. 61. 5. 

©etn> when and how used as an 
auxiliary, § 70. 5. § 71. 3. 4. 
L. 48. Paradigm of, § 72. 2. § 73. 

©etttr (possess.), peculiar use o£ 
§ 135. 4. 

©eit, L. 66. 11. 

(Selbft or felber, § 57. 4. L. 29. 

Sentence, essential parts of, § 119. 
§ 158. 2. Simple and compound, 
§ 119. Principal and subordin- 
ate, § 160. L. 39. 

Singular, nouns having no, § 15. 

@fo, § 156. 2 /. L. 69. 27. 

©old), when not declined, § 63. 4. 
(Note), 

(Sctfett, conjugation of, § 83. 6. 
Remarks on, § 83. 13. L. 45. 9 
As imperative, L. 50. 5. obs. 

Some, L. 39. 4. 

cBpajieren gefyen, fafjren, &c, L. 49 ; 2. 

Speech, parts of, § 3. 1. Those in 
fleeted, § 3. 2. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



523 



Subject of a sentence, § 119. 
§ 158. 2. 

Subjunctive mood, observations on 
the several uses of, § 143. 1. 2. 
3., <fcc. L. 55. 

Suffixes, used in forming nouns, 
§ 10. Used in forming adject- 
ives, § 25. 

Synoptical view of feht, $at>en, mx* 
ben, § 73. 

Syntax, § 119. 

£cmfenb and Ijimbert, employed as 
collectives,. § 44. 6. 

Tenses, § 68. 6. L. 37. Mode of con- 
jugating, § 75. 4. L. 37. Termin- 
ations of, § 76. Present, syntax 
of, § 137. Imperfect, syntax of, 
§ 138. Perfect, syntax of, § 139. 
Pluperfect, syntax of, § 140. 
Futures, syntax of, § 141. 

Styum, suffix, § 10. 

Xi)un f not used as an auxiliary, 
§ 137. 6. 

Uefcer, L. 68. 5. 

Urn, § 114. 4. L. 67. 5. 

ttm— nutten, § 110. 2. 5. L. 60. 

ltmt)tn (ntd)t— fomtett), L. 45. 6. 

Umlauts, sounds of, L. 2. 2. Use 
of, p. 275. (NotJ). 

vim, suffix, § 10. 

Unrest fyxoett, L. 36. 2. 

Urtter, L. 68. 6. 

Hitter mer Slugett, L. 68. 6. 

Variative numerals, how formed, 
§ 48. 

Verbs, classification of, according 
to form and meaning, § 68. 2. 3. 
Moods and tenses of, § 68. 5. 6. 
Auxiliary, § 70. Old and new 
conjugations of, § 75. Paradigm 
of one of the Old form, § 78. 
List of those of the Old form, 
§ 78. 1. Paradigm of one of the 
New form, § 80. Those of the 
Mixed conjugation, § 81. 82. 
Paradigms of bitrfen, formnen, mo* 
gen, mitffen, (often, ttiffett and root* 
len, § 83. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Pas- 
sive, § 84. Paradigm of a passive, 
§ 85. Reflexive, § 86. Paradigm 



of a reflexive, § 87. Impersonal, 

§ 88. Compound, § 88. 89. 

Paradigm of a compound, § 92. 

Syntax of, § 136. 
Sttet, when declined, § 53. 3. L. 65. 

7. 8. 9. 
£Hetleid)t, L. 69. 30. 
$0tt, § 112. 12. L. 66. 12. Before 

names, § 23. 3. With the dative 

instead of the genitive, § 123. 7. 
$or, L. 68. 7. 

Vowels, classification and pronun- 
ciation of, L. 2. 1. 
2Ba$, § 67. 3. § 134. 1. L. 13; 40. 
2Ba<3, for roaxum, § 67. 3. 
SBaS fur ein, § 66. 4. 5. § 67. 1. 2. 

L. 13. 
2Be$en, L. 60. 
SBeldjer (relative), genitive o£ when 

used, § 65. 1. 
SBeitig, when declined, § 53. 3. L. 

65. 7. 8. 9. 
2£er and tta3 (relatives), their use 

and position, § 65. 3. 4. 5. L. 40. 

As interrogatives,, § 66. 3. L. 13. 
SBerben, auxiliary of the first class, 

§ 70. 2. Paradigm of, § 72. 3. 

§ 73. L. 46. 
SBertty fein, L. 61. 6. 
2Bte, L. 69. 

2Bte befmben @ic fl$, L. 29. 10. 
2Bie ttiel, § 45. 5. 
Stiffen, conjugation of, § 83. 7. 

Placed before an infinitive, L. 

49. 7. 
2Bo, compounded with other words, 

§ 103. L. 52. 
2Bof)t, L. 69. 34. 
SBotlett, conjugation of, § 83. 8. 

Remarks on, § 83. 14. L. 45. 10. 
SBorben, for gettorbeit, § 84. 2. 
3tt, § 112. 9. 13. L. 66. 13. When 

between the parts of a compound 

verb, § 93. 
Sufotge, § HO. 8. L. 60. 
£tf ®runbe ge^en, rtdjten, L. 43. 6. 
Su $aufe, L. 43. 2. 
Sroei and bret, when declined, 

§ 44. 4 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YOBK. 



FRENCH, 




L FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COtJESE. 

$1 25. 

U. A KEY TO THE EXEECISES IN FAS- 

quelled French Course. 75 cents. 

HI. F A S Q U E L L E ' S COLLOQUIAL FEENCH 

Course. 76 cents. 

IV. FASQUELLE'S TELEMAQUE. 62 1-2 cents. 

V. NAPOLEON. BY ALEXANDEE DUMAS. 

With Notes, <fce. by Louis Fasquelle, LL.D. 75 cents. 

VI. HOWARD'S AIDS TO FEENCH COMPOSI- 

tion. A Companion to Fasquelle's French Course. $1. 

TIL TALBOT'S FEENCH PRONUNCIATION. 63 

cents. 



I. FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COURSE. 

$1 25. 

Fasquelle's French Course is on the plan of " Woodbury's Method with German." 
It pursues the same gradual course, and comprehends the same wide scope of instruc- 
tion. It is most eminently practical ; works admirably in the class-room. It will v >e 
found everywhere equal alike to the wants of the teacher and the pupil, indicating in 
the author a clear and profound knowledge of his native tongue, added to consummate 
skill in the art of imparting it. 

NOTICES. 

Prom the New York Evangelist. 

w lt is a very copious and elaborate work, supplying the pupil with the material 
for all his necessary elementary study, and going over the ground with great thorough- ; 
ness." 

From the New York Commercial Advertiser. 

u Tlii 3 gram mar is designed to teach reading, speaking, and writing the French 
language, upon the same system which Mr. Woodbury has so successfully applied 
to German. Combining the analytic and synthetic principles of instruction, it will 
perhaps be more generally useful than any o'her on the same subject." 

Prom the Philadelphia Enquirer. 

^'^as^ttelTe'S New French Course is evidently a work of more than ordlLary 
ability, and is the resull ui much labor and research." 

bb 



PUBLISHED BY IYISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK, 



FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COURSE. 



M Urbana, April 13th, 1854. 
tt Messrs. Ivison and Phinney: 

" G entlemen, — I have taught many classes in the French Language, and during my / 
atay of several years in Europe, I spent one year in Paris for the sake, among other 
things, of acquiring the language, and 1 do not hesitate to say, that ' Fasquelle's French 
Course,' on the plan of Woodbury's Method with the German, is superior to any other 
French grammar r have met with, for teaching French to those whose mother-tongue 
is English. li combines, in an admirable manner, the excellences of th6 old, or classic, 
and the new, or Ollendorfian methods, avoiding the faults of both. 

44 As f consider the rapid and thorough acquisition of this language of the * noble 
French nation,' whose history is emphatically the history of Europe, an i of modern \ 
civilization, as a most desirable accomplishment, I am gratified to forward every im- 
provement in the means of acquiring it. I am glad, therefore, to promote, in every 
proper way, the circulation of ' Dr. Fasquelle's Course.' 

Respectfully, yours, 

JOSEPH WILLIAM JENKS, 

Professor of Language in the New Church University 
at Urbana, Ohio. 

From Prof* Alphonse Brunner, of Cincinnati. 

44 Having been a teacher of my vernacular tongue, the French, for ten years, both 
in France and in this country, I consider it my duty to state, that I have used Dr. Fas- 
quelle's New French Grammar ever since its publication, and that, in my opinion, it is 
the best book yet prepared to facilitate the acquirement of the French language. It 
combines the practical or oral system, with a thorough grammatical course— two things 
indispensable in acquiring a living language. I recommend it, therefore, as superior 
to the old theoretical grammars, and to those works rejecting grammar a'together. 

44 The Colloquial Reader, and the edition of Telemaque, prepared by the same 
author, will be found equally valuable." 

Extract from a letter from the same gentleman. 

J "Je suis Francais, j'enseigne ma langue a Cincinnati ; quand votre grammairc 

J parut, je m'empressai de l'adopter, car il y avait longtemps que je desirais un ouvrage 

♦ qui tout en conservant un caractere pratique, me permit de donner a mes Aleves cette 
t connaissance grammatical, sans laquelle on ne peut savoir une langue qu'impar- 

faitement." 

Prom Prof. Auguste DWuvtlle, Philadelphia. 

44 Je cherchais depuis longtemps un livre que put plaire aux eleves en les instrui- 

sant, et faciliter en meme temps la tache du professeur. J'ai enfln trouve ces diverses 

t qualites portees a un tres haut degre de perfection dans le 4 French Course' de M. 

iFasquelle, et des ce moment j'ai fait adopter ce livre dans Unites les Institutions ou 
je vais, et aussi par tous mes eleves particuliers. Je confesse franchement que de tous 
les livres qui me sont passes par les mains, c'est celui que j'ai trouve b p'us par- 
t fakement calcule et arrange pour faire acquerir a ceux qui veulent etudier la langue 
\ francaise, la connaissance a la fois theorique et pratique de cette langue. Je trouve J 
j chaq'ue jour I'jccasionde l'apprecier d'avantage. $ 

44 Le fc French Reader' du mfcme auteur est aussi un livre excellent en ce que les j 
J morceaux dont ii est compost sont tres bien choisis et sont de naiure a interesser ♦ 
J beaucoup les elevea; et de phi?, son systeme d'exercices de conversation est tres bon t 
i pour exercer la me moire des eleves et les forct^r a penser en francais, ce qui est le i 
j reeuitat le plus essentiel et It plus difficile a obtenir. Je l'ai aussi adopte pour t )utes | 

* me» classes." ] 

56 



FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COURSE, 



NOTICES. 

From the New York Courier and Enquirer, 

" This work embraces both the analytical and synthetic modes of instruction, sn 
the plan of Woodbury's Method with German. It is the product of a great deal of 
skill and labor, and appears to us eminently adapted to its purpose. The book presents 
every facility the French learner can ever reasonably hope ior." 

From the. IAterary World, 
u Mr. Woodbury's New Method with German, upon the plan of which the present 
work is constructed, met with the approval of our best scholars. Our author takes up 
the subject of the French tongue with the zeal of an enthusiast, and evidently has 
labored diligently in reconciling its difficulties, in the way of students, with the 
English." 

From the New York Mirror, 

" It strikes us as being one of the best-arranged books for beginners that we hav<* 
seen." 

From the Philadelphia Evening Bulletin, 

"This work seems to us to be all that can j>ossibly be needed, in the way of book 
instruction, in acquiring the French language. The learner is carried forward, from 
the rudiments of the study, by progressive steps, to the complete art of composition 
and conversation in French." 

From Professors of French in Boston, 

u With a view of promoting the diffusion of whatever may tend to facilitate a 
knowledge of the French language, and as a just tribute of acknowledgment to the 
merits of Prof. Fasquelle's Grammar, we, the undersigned, Professors of French in the 
city of Boston, would heartily and unanimously testify, that the said work is held in 
high esteem and approbation among us, and that we consider it the very best hereto- 
fore published on the subject of which it treats. For the true interest of all engaged 
in the study of the spoken French, we would advise its universal adoption. 

"GUILLAUME H. TALBOT, 

"T. A. PELLETIER, 

«E. H. VI AN, 

« H. SEST, 

"N. B. M. DE MONTRACHY." 

From Prof. D. G. Mallery, Clarke Fern, Sem., Berry mile, Va. 
44 1 have used various books on the Ollendorf system, and still have classes in two 
of *hem, but as soon as possible shall exclude all but Fasquelle, which, after thorough 
trial, I consider the best book in the market." 

From Miss S. Wood* Principal jf Fcm, Department, Whitestown Seminary. 

u The progress which our classes in French have made during the past year, has 
g*-, en us abundant evidence of the superiority of Fasquelle." 

From E. L. Avery, Esq., Prinrlpm of Ward School, No. 42, New York City. 

** A careful examination of Fasquelle's French Course has convinced me that it 
proposes the best method I have ever seen for acquiring a complete mastery of the ! 
difficulties of pronunciation, the intricacies of construction, and also a just appreciation ! 
of the beauties of expression of the French language." 

From P. N. Legender, Professor of French, New Haven, Ct. 

" Never has a work come under mv notice that blends so happily and harmoniously ; 
| the great rival elements of the language My pup'U study it with pleasure." 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. 

| 

| FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COURSE. 

i 

; NOTICES. 

I -m F. J. P Wehrung, Prof, of Modern Languages in New York Central College. 

*The learned author has brought before the public a text-book for the acquisition 
i of tl it (the French) language, at ihe same time original and complete in itself, super- 
| sedL j any system heretofore in use." 

* From the Philadelphia North American and U. S. Gazette. 

* H .s elaborated in a very full and thorough manner, calculated to render his 

JvoIub, ;> y\ great value to both teachers and learners." 
From the Philadelphia Ledger, 

wr ^ie student will find it a very excellent assistant in acquiring a knowledge of the 
J French," 

From Prof. J. Wilson, of Wes. Female Institute, Staunton, Va. 

"TN» French Course is an unusually thorough and comprehensive work, evidently 
prepare ' with great care, by one fully qualified for the task. I am satisfied that it is by 
far the 1 ist work of the kind published in this country, and its general circulation and 
use in Spools will do much to facilitate the acquisition of the French language." 

From Cyrus Knowlton, Principal of the Hughes High School, Cincinnati, Ohio. 

u It h sometime since I began to make inquiry for a treatise on the French lan- 
guage, WL.ich should, in my opinion, meet the wants of pupils and teachers. Fas- 
quelle's g ammar satisfies me. It is evidently the work of a thorough teacher as well 
as a thorough scholar. * * * For the advent of such a work 

I shall ever be thankful, for it places in the hand of both tutor and student a new power 
for the coi. quest of knowledge. If the remainder of the series be as well prepared as 
this, I see luthing more for the student of French to hope or require." 

Fiam W. W. Howard, Prof, in the Military Institute, Newcastle, Ky. 

"The pj'ogress which my pupils have made in three months has highly gratified 
themselves, iheir parents, and their teachers, and I attribute it with justice to the sys- 
tematic and practical, yet simple plan of the work." 

From H. J. Doucet, Teacher of French in S. C. A^ Vt. 

*» The author has, in my opinion, rendered a great service to the teacher as well as 
to the student of the French language, in presenting them with this valuable guide. 
The skillful and ample manner in which the verbs are treated in this book would alone 
make it the best extant on the French language." 

From the Watchman and Reflector, Vi. 

" This work, as stated in the title-page, follows the plan of Mr. Woodbury's suc- 
cessful book for learning German. Its aim is to make progress thorough in tbe *\me \ 
way, by teaching the science and the art of the tongue. Like that book, i* embraces * 
reading-lessons and a vocabulary." 

From the Methodist Quarterly Review. 
u The work is done everywhere with conscientious thoroughness." 

From the New Haven Palladium. 
44 The work is exceedingly valuable, and will have an immense saie." 

From the Detroit Free Press. 
kt It seems to us most decidedly superior to any work of its kind ever published 

58 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON AND PHINNEY, NEW YORK. 



FASQUELLE'S NEW FRENCH COURSE. 

.< «« » •« $ »»■ 

NOTICES. 

From the New Church Repository. 

"These works (Woodbury's New Method with German, and Fasquelle's New 
French Course) are constructed on a plan admirably suited to the purposes of a . 
grammar. The theoretical and the practical, the principle and the application, the 
doctrine and the illustration, are most skilfully blended in the execution of the work. 
From our own experience of their utility, we can safely recommend them as exceed- 
ingly valuable manuals to the student of either language." 

From Zion's Herald. 

u It presents the true method of study, conducting the learner by such gradual and 
interesting steps over the difficulties of his path, that they seem to vanish at his ap- 
proach. In fact, it seems to us scarcely capable of improvement." 

From D. E. Haskins, Lowell, Mass. 

* I write to express my admiration of Woodbury's German, and Fasquelle's 
French System. I use them exclusively in my school. I do not mean to say that 
these books are faultless: but I do regard them as a great improvement upon Ollen- 
dorf and the old grammars." 

From George Spencer, A.M., Author of an Enghsfi Grammar. 

u Fasquelle's French Course cannot but be acceptable to teachers generally as well 
as the private student." 

From E. E. E. Bragdon, A.M., Principal of Falley Seminary. 

"I have examined somewhat faithfully and critically Prof. Fasquelle's French 
Course, on the plan of Woodbury's Method with German, and I am confident that it \ 
! excels, in many important particulars, any elementary French Course with which I am ; 
acquainted." 

H. A KEY TO TEE EXERCISES IN FAS- 

quell e's French Course. 15 cents. 

IT! FASQUELLE'S COLLOQUIAL FRENCH 

Reader; or, Interesting Narratives from the best French 
writers, for translation into English, accompanied by Conver- 
sational Exercises. With Grammatical References to Fas- 
quelle's New French Method, the explanation of the most diffi- 
cult passages, and a copious Vocabulary. By Louis Fasquelle, 
LL.D. 260 pages. Duodecimo. 75 cents. 

IV FASQUELLE'S TELEMAQUE ; LES A-' 

ventures de Telemaque. Par M. Fenelon. A New Edition, \ 
with Notes. By Louis Fasquelle, LL.D., Prof, of Modern } 
Languages in the University of Michigan. The Text carefully j 
prepared from the most approved French Editions. 62 1-2 cents, j 

i Fasquelle's ""Telemaque" presents this splendid production of Fenelon in a beau- j 

| iitn'i mechanical dreso. with copious references to Fasquelle.'s Grammar, full noU 8 ex- \ 

f t planatory ot difficulties in the text, and a full vocabulary. It forms a fine school j 

* editioB. j 

69 



V ' , • 







